Schneider Electric TSX / PMX / PCX 57 PLCs, Hardware User Guide
Anúncio
Anúncio
VOLUME 1
Racks, processors, power supplies, etc
Setup, processors and discrete I/O
Discrete I/O : TSX DEY i /DSY i /DMY i modules
Safety modules : TSX PAY i modules
Start-up/Diagnostics/Maintenance
Standards and service conditions
Process and AS-i power supplies : TSX SUP 1 ii 1 / A0 i
A
B
C
D
E
VOLUME 2
Setup
Counting,
Motion Control
VOLUME 3
Setup
Communication,
Bus and Network
Interfaces
VOLUME 4
Setup
Analog,
Weighing
VOLUME 1
P
___________________________________________________________________________
B/2
General safety advice for users
1 General
This manual is intended for personnel technically qualified to install, operate and maintain the products which are described herein. It contains all the necessary information for correct use of the products. However, for advanced use of our products please contact your nearest sales office for additional information.
The contents of this manual are not contractual and cannot under any circumstance extend or restrict contract warranty clauses.
2 Qualification of personnel
Only qualified personnel are authorized to install, operate or maintain the products. Any work performed by unqualified personnel or non-observance of the safety instructions in this document or attached to the equipment may risk the safety of personnel and/or cause irreparable damage to equipment. The following personnel may be regarded as being "Qualified" :
• those involved with application design. Design office personnel familiar with control system safety concepts (for example, design engineers, etc),
• those involved with equipment installation. Individuals who are familiar with the installation, connection and startup of control system equipment (for example installers or wiring technicians working during the installation phase, technicians setting up the equipment, etc),
• those involved with operation. Personnel trained to operate and manage control system equipment (for example, operators, etc),
• those performing preventive or corrective maintenance. Personnel who are trained and experienced in the adjustment and repair of control system equipment (for example, installation engineers, after sales service engineers, etc).
3 Warnings
Warnings serve to prevent specific risks encountered by personnel and/or equipment. They are indicated in the documentation and on the products by different warning symbols, according to the severity of the risk :
Danger or Caution
Indicates that not following instructions or ignoring the warning may cause serious personal injury, death and/or serious damage to equipment.
Warning or Important or
!
Indicates that not following a specific instruction may lead to minor injury and/or damage to equipment.
Note or Comment
Highlights important information relating to the product, its operation or its accompanying documentation.
___________________________________________________________________________
1
General safety advice for users
4 Conformity of use
The products described in this manual conform to the European Directives (*) to which they are subject (CE marking). However, they can only be used correctly in the context of the applications for which they are intended (described in the various documents) and when connected to approved third party products.
As a general rule, if all handling, transport and storage specifications are observed, and all instructions for installation, operation and maintenance are followed, the products will be used correctly, with no danger to personnel or equipment.
(*) EMC and LV Directives, concerning Electromagnetic Compatibility and Low Voltage.
5 Installing and setting up equipment
It is important to observe the following rules when installing and starting up equipment. In addition, if the installation includes digital links, it is essential to follow the basic wiring rules given in the manual
"Electromagnetic Compatibility of industrial Networks and Fielbuses", reference TSX DG KBLE, or in manual TSX DR NET, part C.
• safety instructions must be followed meticulously. These instructions are in the documentation or on the equipment being installed and set up.
• the type of equipment defines the way in which it should be installed :
- a flush-mountable device (for example, an operator terminal or a cell controller) must be flushmounted,
- a device which is to be built in (for example, PLC) must be placed in a cabinet or enclosure,
- the casing of a laptop or portable device (for example, a programming terminal or a notebook) must remain closed,
• if the device is permanently connected,
- the upstream installation must conform to standard IEC 1131-2 overvoltage category 2,
- in addition, its electrical installation must include a device to isolate it from the power supply and a circuit-breaker to protect it against overcurrents and isolation faults. If this is not the case, the power socket must be grounded and be easily accessed. In all cases, the device must be connected to the protective mechanical ground PG using green/yellow wires
(NFC 15 100 - IEC 60 364-5-51) .
• low voltage circuits (even though they are low voltage) must be connected to the protective ground so that dangerous voltages can be detected.
• before a device is powered up, its nominal voltage must be checked to ensure that it has been adjusted to conform with the supply voltage.
• if the device is supplied with 24 or 48 VDC, the low voltage circuits must be protected. Only use power supplies which conform to the standards currently in force.
• check that the supply voltages remain within the tolerance ranges defined in the technical characteristics of the devices.
• all measures must be taken to ensure that any power return (immediate, warm or cold) does not lead to a dangerous state which may risk personnel or the installation.
• emergency stop devices must remain effective in all the device's operating modes, even those which are abnormal (for example, when a wire becomes disconnected). Resetting these devices must not cause uncontrolled or improper restarts.
• cables which carry signals must be located where they do not cause interference with the control system functions by capacitive, inductive or electromagnetic interference.
___________________________________________________________________________
2
General safety advice for users
• control system equipment and their control devices must be installed in such a way as to ensure that they are protected against unintentional operation.
• appropriate safety measures must be taken for the inputs and outputs, to prevent improper states in the control system device, if no signal is received.
6 Equipment operation
The operational safety and availability of a device is its ability to avoid the appearance of faults and to minimize their effects if they occur.
A system is said to be fail-safe if the appearance of faults never causes a dangerous situation.
A fault inside the control system is known as :
• passive, if it results in an open output circuit (no command is sent to the actuators).
• active, if it results in a closed output circuit (a command is sent to the actuators).
From the safety point of view, a given fault is dangerous or not depending on the type of command given during normal operation. A passive fault is dangerous if the normal command is the operation of an alarm. An active fault is dangerous if it maintains or activates an undesirable command.
It is important to note the basic difference between the behavior of an electromechanical relay and an electronic component (for example a transistor) :
• there is a high probability, approximately 90%, that the failure of a relay will cause an open circuit
(control circuit powered off).
• there is a 50% probability that the failure of a transistor will cause either an open circuit or a closed circuit.
This is why it is important to correctly estimate the types and consequences of faults when automating a system using electronic products such as PLCs, including when relay output modules are used on PLCs.
The system designer must use devices external to the PLC to protect against active faults inside the PLC, which are not indicated and are judged to be dangerous to the application. This may require solutions from various different technologies such as mechanical, electromechanical, pneumatic or hydraulic devices (for example, directly wiring a limit switch and emergency stop switches to the coil of a movement control contactor).
To protect against dangerous faults which may occur on output circuits or preactuators, it is sometimes beneficial to resort to general principles and use the large processing capacity of
PLCs, for example by using inputs to check the correct execution of commands requested by the program.
7 Electrical and thermal characteristics
Details of the electrical and thermal characteristics of devices are given in the associated technical documents (installation manuals, quick reference guides).
___________________________________________________________________________
3
General safety advice for users
8 Environmental conditions
In industry, the micro-environmental conditions of electronic devices can vary greatly. For this reason, programmable controllers and associated modules must conform to the following two types of installation :
• installation in an enclosure with IP54 protection for protecting devices from metallic dust amongst other things. Two guidelines are associated with this type of installation :
- direct access to electronic modules should be strictly reserved to maintenance staff (see section 2), with access keys,
- the selection of a metal enclosure must be considered, since it serves as extra shielding against the latent risk of electromagnetic interference.
• direct installation without protection for Premium PLCs and associated systems (power supply modules, etc) which themselves have IP20 protection.
This type of installation applies to areas with restricted access and low pollution levels (not exceeding 2), for example stations or control rooms which have neither machines nor any activity generating metallic dust or other metallic particles. The external walls hence serve as the PLC enclosure.
9 Preventive or corrective maintenance
Availability
The availability of a system is its ability, in terms of its combined reliability, maintainability and maintenance logistics, to be in a state to perform a required function, at a given moment and within a defined time period.
Availability is therefore specific to each application, since it is a combination of :
• the architecture of the automatic system,
• the reliability and maintainability : intrinsic characteristics of the equipment (PLCs, sensors, machine, etc),
• maintenance logistics : characteristic intrinsic to the user of the control system (software structure, fault indication, process, on-site replacement parts, training of personnel).
Troubleshooting procedure
• control system equipment should only be repaired by qualified personnel (after sales service engineer, or technician approved by Schneider Automation). Only certified replacement parts or components should be used.
• before performing any operation on equipment (for example opening an enclosure), always cut the power supply off (disconnect the power plug or open the power isolation switch).
• before performing any "mechanical" operation on equipment on site, cut the power supply off and mechanically lock any moving parts.
• before removing a module, a memory cartridge, a PCMCIA card, etc, check in the manual whether this should be done with the power off or if it is possible with the device powered up.
Follow the instructions given in the manual carefully.
• on positive logic outputs or negative logic inputs, take all necessary precautions to prevent a disconnected wire coming into contact with the mechanical ground (risk of undesirable control action).
Replacement and recycling of used batteries
• if these are replaced, use batteries of the same type and dispose of defective batteries in the same way as toxic waste.
Do not throw lithium or mercury batteries into a fire, open or recharge them, or attempt to solder them.
___________________________________________________________________________
4
TSX/PMX/PCX 57 PLCs
Racks, processors, power supplies, etc
Contents
Part A
Section
1.1-4 Bus X remote rackmaster module
1.1-13 Process and AS-i power supplies
1.1-15 Emergency stop monitoring modules
1.2-1 PLC stations with processor integrated on
1.2-2 PLC stations with processor integrated in a PC
2 TSX RKY ii standard racks & TSX RKY ii EX extendable racks
Page
A
___________________________________________________________________________
A/1
A
TSX/PMX/PCX 57 PLCs
Racks, processors, power supplies, etc
Contents
Part A
Section Page
2.3-2 Composition of a PLC station with PCX 57 processors, which can be integrated in a PC
2.3-3 Addressing racks in a PLC station
2.3-5 Installing power supplies, processors and other modules 2/11
2.4-2 TSX TLYEX line terminator
2.4-3 TSX RKA 02 protective cover for an empty slot
Compatibility with the existing installed base
3 TSX 57/PMX57/PCX 57 processors 3/1
TSX / PMX 57 processors, which can be integrated in TSX RKY ii racks
PCX 57 processors, which can be integrated in a PC
___________________________________________________________________________
A/2
TSX/PMX/PCX 57 PLCs
Racks, processors, power supplies, etc
Contents
Part A
Section
Auxiliary functions common to all processors
3.4-2 Slot for PCMCIA communication card
3.4-4 Processor RESET pushbutton
3.5-1 General characteristics 3/25
3.5-2 Electrical characteristics 3/29
3.5-3 Definition and number of application-specific channels 3/31
Page
4 TSX PSY iiii power supplies 4/1
4.5-1 Characteristics of AC power supplies
4.5-2 Characteristics of DC power supplies
4.5-3 Characteristics of the alarm relay contact
4.6 Power consumption table for selecting a power supply module 4/13
Definition of protection devices at the head of the line 4/20
___________________________________________________________________________
A/3
A
A
TSX/PMX/PCX 57 PLCs
Racks, processors, power supplies, etc
Contents
Part A
Section
5 Bus X remote rackmaster module : TSX REY 200
5.1-2 Physical description of the module
Topology of a PLC station with remote rackmaster modules
Maximum distances according to the type of module
Managing an installation equipped with a Bus X remote rackmaster module
Page
___________________________________________________________________________
A/4
TSX/PMX/PCX 57 PLCs
Racks, processors, power supplies, etc
Contents
Part A
Section
Page
6.3-1 Mounting on a 35 mm wide DIN rail 6/3
6.3-2 Mounting on panel or Telequick pre-slotted mounting plate 6/4
Mounting modules and terminal blocks
6.4-1 Inserting a module in a rack
6.4-2 Fitting a screw terminal block on a module
Mounting a PCX 57 processor in a PC 6/7
6.5-3 Installation precautions
6.5-4 Preliminary operations before installation in the PC
6.5-5 Installing the processor card in the PC 6/14
6.5-6 Integrating a PCX 57 processor inside a Bus X segment 6/15
Fitting/removing the RAM memory backup battery
6.6-1 With a TSX 57 / PMX 57 processor
6.6-3 Frequency of changing the battery
Inserting/removing the PCMCIA memory extension card
6.7-1 On a TSX 57 / PMX 57 processor
Changing the battery on a RAM type PCMCIA memory card
___________________________________________________________________________
A/5
A
A
TSX/PMX/PCX 57 PLCs
Racks, processors, power supplies, etc
Contents
Part A
Section
Precautions to be taken when replacing a processor
Page
Connection of power supplies 7/2
7.2-2 Connecting AC power supply modules
7.2-3 Connecting DC power supply modules via a floating
7.2-4 Connecting DC power supply modules via an AC supply 7/7
7.2-5 Sensor and preactuator power supply interlocking 7/11
Addressing discrete I/O channels
Single task application structure
Multitask application structure
___________________________________________________________________________
A/6
TSX/PMX/PCX 57 PLCs
Racks, processors, power supplies, etc
Contents
Part A
Section
8.5-3 Response time on an event
8.5-4 Precision of the internal time bases
Setting the PLC to RUN/STOP 9/1
Processing on power break and power return
9.2-1 Break in the power supply on the rack supporting the
TSX/PMX 57 processor (rack 0) or on the PC supporting the PCX 57 processor
9.2-2 Break in the power supply on a rack other than rack 0
Processing on insertion/removal of a PCMCIA memory card
Processing after action on the processor RESET button
Processing after action on the power supply RESET button 9/7
Response of the PCX 57 to an action on the PC
Behavior on insertion/removal of a module when powered-up
Behavior of the I/O on downgraded operating mode 9/9
9.8-1 Safety value of discrete and analog outputs 9/9
9.8-2 Discrete and analog outputs switching to fallback mode 9/10
___________________________________________________________________________
A/7
Page
A
A
TSX/PMX/PCX 57 PLCs
Racks, processors, power supplies, etc
Section
9.10 Loading the operating system (OS)
10.1-6 Installation rules for racks with fan modules
Contents
Part A
Page
___________________________________________________________________________
A/8
1 General presentation
1.1
Main component parts
Premium PLCs are entirely modular. A PLC station is made up of racks, power supply modules, processor modules, discrete I/O modules, analog I/O modules, etc.
A
1.1-1 Racks
(see part A - section 2 in this manual)
Two types of rack are available :
• Standard racks with 6, 8 and 12 positions :
They can make up a PLC station limited to a
single rack.
4-position extendable rack
• Extendable racks with
4, 6, 8 and 12 positions :
They can make up a PLC station which can have up to :
- 16 racks maximum if the station is made up of racks with 4, 6 or 8 positions.
- 8 racks maximum if the station is made up of racks with 12 positions.
These racks are distributed on a bus
6-position extendable rack
8-position extendable rack
(known as Bus X) whose maximum length should not exceed 100 meters.
For applications which require a longer length, a
Bus X remote rackmaster module can be used. This enables 2 Bus X segments to be remotely located at a maximum distance of 250 meters from the rack supporting
12-position extendable rack the processor.
___________________________________________________________________________
1/1
A
1.1-2 Rack power supplies
(see part A - section 4 in this manual)
Each rack requires a power supply module determined according to the distributed line supply (AC or DC) and the power required at rack level (standard format module or double format module).
standard format power supply module for c or a supply double format power supply module for c or a supply
1.1-3 Processors
Each station has a processor which is selected according to :
- its type of integration : integrated in a rack or integrated in a PC
- the processing power required : number of discrete/analog I/O, etc
- the type of processing : sequential or sequential + process control
• Sequential processors, which can be integrated on TSX RKY iii racks (see part A - section 3 in this manual)
TSX P 57 102
This is used to :
TSX P 57 202
These are used to :
TSX P 57 252
• control a PLC station comprising a maximum of :
- 1 standard rack or
• control a PLC station comprising a maximum of :
- 1 standard rack or
- 8 x 12-position extendable racks or
- 2 x 12-position extendable racks or
- 4 x 4, 6 or 8-position extendable racks
- 512 in-rack discrete I/O
- 16 x 4, 6 or 8-position extendable racks
- 1024 in-rack discrete I/O
- 80 analog I/O
- 24 analog I/O
- 8 application-specific channels
(counter, axis control, etc)
• integrate the PLC station in a single
- 24 application-specific channels (counter, axis control, etc)
• integrate the PLC station in a multinetwork structure.
The TSX P 57 252 processor also has an integrated network structure
FIPIO master link.
___________________________________________________________________________
1/2
Presentation 1
A
Sequential processors which can be integrated in TSX RKY iii racks (cont.)
TSX P 57 302 TSX P 57 352 TSX P 57 402 TSX P 57 452
These are used to :
• control a PLC station comprising a maximum of :
- 1 standard rack or
- 8 x 12-position extendable racks or
- 16 x 4, 6 or 8-position extendable racks
- 1024 in-rack discrete I/O
- 128 analog I/O
- 32 application-specific channels (counter, axis control, etc)
• integrate the PLC station in a multinetwork structure
The TSX P 57 352 processor also has an integrated FIPIO master link.
These are used to :
• control a PLC station comprising a maximum of :
- 1 standard rack or
- 8 x 12-position extendable racks or
- 16 x 4, 6 or 8-position extendable racks
- 2040 in-rack discrete I/O
- 256 analog I/O
- 64 application-specific channels (counter, axis control, etc)
• integrate the PLC station in a multinetwork structure
The TSX P 57 452 processor also has an integrated FIPIO master link.
___________________________________________________________________________
1/3
A
• Process control processors which can be integrated in TSX RKY iii racks (see part A - section 3 in this manual)
TPMX P 57 102
This has the same capacity as a TSX P57 102 and performance levels which are equivalent to a TSX P57 2 i 2. It is used to :
• control a PLC station comprising a maximum of :
- 1 standard rack or
- 2 x 12-position extendable racks or
- 4 x 4, 6 or 8-position extendable racks
- 512 in-rack discrete I/O
- 24 analog I/O
- 8 application-specific channels (counter, axis control, etc)
- etc
- manage 10 process control channels
• integrate the PLC station in a single network structure
TPMX P57 202
This has the same capacity as a TSX P57 202 and performance levels which are equivalent to a TSX P57 4 i 2. It is used to :
• control a PLC station comprising a maximum of :
- 1 standard rack or
- 8 x 12-position extendable racks or
- 16 x 4, 6 or 8-position extendable racks
- 1024 in-rack discrete I/O
- 80 analog I/O
- 24 application-specific channels (counter, axis control, etc)
- etc
- manage 10 process control channels
• integrate the PLC station in a multinetwork structure
___________________________________________________________________________
1/4
Presentation 1
A
Process control processors which can be integrated in TSX RKY iii racks
TPMX P57 352 TPMX P57 452
This has the same capacity as a TSX P57 352 and performance levels which are equivalent to a TSX P57 4 i 2. It is used to :
• control a PLC station comprising a maximum of :
- 1 standard rack or
- 8 x 12-position extendable racks or
- 16 x 4, 6 or 8-position extendable racks
- 1024 in-rack discrete I/O
- 128 analog I/O
- 32 application-specific channels (counter, axis control, etc)
- etc
- manage 10 process control channels
• integrate the PLC station in a multinetwork structure
It has an integrated FIPIO master link.
This has the same capacity as a TSX P57 452 and performance levels which are equivalent to a TSX P57 4 i 2. It is used to :
• control a PLC station comprising a maximum of :
- 1 standard rack or
- 8 x 12-position extendable racks or
- 16 x 4, 6 or 8-position extendable racks
- 2040 in-rack discrete I/O
- 255 analog I/O
- 64 application-specific channels (counter, axis control, etc)
- etc
- manage 10 process control channels
• integrate the PLC station in a multinetwork structure
It has an integrated FIPIO master link.
___________________________________________________________________________
1/5
A
• Sequential processors, which can be integrated in a PC (see part A - section 3 in this manual)
Installed on the ISA bus of an industrial or office PC operating in a Windows 95 or
Windows NT environment, these are used to control a PLC station. In addition, the installation of a communication driver enables transparent communication between the host PC and the processor, thus overcoming the need for another programming terminal.
TPCX 57 1012
This is used to :
• control a PLC station comprising a maximum of :
- 1 standard rack or
- 2 x 12-position extendable racks or
- 4 x 4, 6 or 8-position extendable racks
- 512 in-rack discrete I/O
- 24 analog I/O
- 8 application-specific channels (counter, axis control, etc)
• integrate the PLC station in a single network structure
TPCX 57 3512
These are used to :
• control a PLC station comprising a maximum of :
- 1 standard rack or
- 8 x 12-position extendable racks or
- 16 x 4, 6 or 8-position extendable racks
- 1024 in-rack discrete I/O
- 128 analog I/O
- 32 application-specific channels (counter, axis control, etc)
• integrate the PLC station in a multinetwork structure.
It has an integrated FIPIO master link.
___________________________________________________________________________
1/6
Presentation 1
A
1.1-4 Bus X remote rackmaster module
(see section 5 of part A)
This module enables 2 bus segments to be remotely located at a maximum distance of 250 meters from the rack supporting the processor. Each remote segment can support a number of racks, distributed on the Bus X over a maximum length of 100 meters.
1.1-5 In-rack discrete I/O
(see part B1 in this manual)
A wide range of discrete I/O modules enables users to match their particular requirements. These modules vary in :
• Modularity : 8, 16, 28, 32 or 64 channels
• Type of inputs :
- modules with DC inputs (24VDC, 48VDC)
- modules with AC inputs (24VAC, 48VAC, 110VAC, 240VAC)
• Type of outputs :
- modules with relay outputs
- modules with DC solid state outputs (24VDC / 0.1A - 0.5A - 2A, 48VDC/ 0.25A - 1A)
- modules with AC solid state outputs (24VAC / 130VAC / 1A, 48VAC / 240VAC / 2A)
• Type of connections : screw terminal block connections and HE10 type connectors, for connection to sensors and preactuators by means of the TELEFAST 2 pre-wired system
HE10 connections Screw terminal block connections
64 I / 64 Q 32 I / 32 Q 28 I/O (16I+12Q)1 6 I
32 I
8I-16I / 8Q - 16Q
___________________________________________________________________________
1/7
A
1.1-6 Analog I/O
(see the "Analog and Weighing Installation Manual - Volume 4")
The range of analog I/O modules covers the majority of requirements. These modules vary in :
• Modularity : 4, 8, 16 channels
• Performance and signal ranges on offer : voltage/current, thermocouple, multirange
(thermocouple, temperature probe, voltage/current)
• Type of connections : 25-pin SUB D type connectors, for connection to sensors by means of the TELEFAST 2 pre-wired system
25-pin SUB D connections
16 I 16 I 8 I 8 I 4 I, fast 8 Q not isolated isolated not isolated isolated isolated not isolated betw. channels betw. channels betw. channels betw. channels betw. channels betw. channels
Voltage/Current Thermocouple Voltage/Current Voltage/Current Voltage/Current Voltage/Current
0...10 V - 80 + 80 mV 0...10 V, 0...10 V 0...10 V ± 10 V
± 10 V
1...5V
± 10 V
1...5V
± 10 V
1...5V
± 10 V
1...5V
0...5V
0...20 mA
4...20 mA
0...5V
0...20 mA
4...20 mA
0...5V
0...20 mA
4...20 mA
0...5V
0...20 mA
4...20 mA
0...20 mA
4...20 mA
12 bits 16 bits 12 bits 16 bits/Voltage 16 bits/Voltage 16 bits/Voltage
14 bits/Current 14 bits/Current 14 bits/Current
Screw terminal block connections
4 I isolated between channels
Multi-range
0...10 V, ± 10 V
0...5V, 1...5V
0...20 mA, 4...20 mA
- 13 + 63 mV
0..400
Ω
0..3850
Ω
Temperature probe
Thermocouple
4 Q isolated between channels
Voltage / Current
± 10 V
0...20 mA
4...20 mA
16 bits 11 bits + sign
___________________________________________________________________________
1/8
Presentation 1
A
1.1-7 Counting
(see the "Counting and Motion Control Installation Manual - Volume 2")
Premium PLCs offer the main counting functions (downcounting, upcounting, up/ down counting) using "counter" modules.
Three modules are available :
• One module with 2 channels and one module with 4 channels for incremental encoder, with a maximum read frequency of 40 kHz
4-channel module
• One module with 2 channels for :
- incremental encoder, with a maximum read frequency of 500 kHz
- SSI serial absolute encoder, with a maximum read frequency of 2 MHz
2-channel module
2-channel module
___________________________________________________________________________
1/9
A
1.1-8 Axis control
(see the "Counting and Motion Control Installation Manual - Volume 2")
By means of "axis control" modules,
Premium PLCs can be used to manage motion control applications, controlled by servomotors where the speed reference is an analog value (± 10 V).
There are five modules :
• A 2-channel module which can be used for servo loop positioning with two independent, linear and limited axes.
• A 2-channel module which can be used for servo loop positioning with two independent, circular and infinite axes.
• A 4-channel module which can be used for servo loop positioning with four independent, linear and limited axes.
• A 4-channel module which can be used for servo loop positioning with four independent, circular axes.
• A 3-channel module which can be used for positioning on 2 or 3 synchronized axes (linear interpolation).
2-channel modules
4-channel modules
3-channel modules
1.1-9 Stepper motor control
(see the "Counting and Motion Control Installation Manual - Volume 2")
By means of "stepper motor control" modules, Premium PLCs can be used to manage motion control applications, controlled by translators where the speed reference is a frequency.
Two modules are available :
• A 1-channel module used to control one translator
• A 2-channel module used to control two translators
Single channel module
2-channel module
___________________________________________________________________________
1/10
Presentation 1
A
1.1-10 Communication
Premium PLCs can be used for various methods of communication :
• Communication on terminal port (see the "Communication, Bus and Network
Interfaces Installation Manual - Volume 3")
TSX and PMX processors
TSX and PMX processors have two terminal ports (TER) and (AUX), a nonisolated RS 485 serial link, and UNI-
TELWAY or character mode protocol.
These terminal ports can be used for connecting :
- a programming terminal and/or a manmachine interface terminal (UNI-
TELWAY master mode)
- the station to a UNI-TELWAY multidrop link (UNI-TELWAY master or slave mode)
- a printer or a terminal in character mode
Note : The user-defined communication protocol is the same for both ports.
PCX processor
PCX processors have a terminal port
(TER), a non-isolated RS 485 serial link, and UNI-TELWAY or character mode protocol.
As with TSX and PMX processors, they are used to connect :
- a programming terminal and/or a manmachine interface terminal (UNI-
TELWAY master mode)
- the station to a UNI-TELWAY multidrop link (UNI-TELWAY master or slave mode)
- a printer or a terminal in character mode.
___________________________________________________________________________
1/11
A
• FIPIO master communication, integrated on certain processors.
(see the "Communication, Bus and Network Interfaces Installation Manual - Volume 3")
TSX P57 i 52 / TPMX P57 i 52 and PCX P57 3512 processors integrate as standard a FIPIO master link, which enables the following types of equipment to be located remotely (15 km maximum) :
- discrete I/O modules (TBX, Momentum)
- analog I/O modules (TBX, Momentum)
- variable speed controllers (ATV16)
- operator control panels (CCX 17)
- etc.
FIPIO link on PCX processor
FIPIO link on TSX /
PMX processor
• Communication via PCMCIA cards which can be integrated into the processor
or the TSX SCY 21601 communication module (see the "Communication, Bus and
Network Interfaces Installation Manual - Volume 3")
The processors and the TSX SCY 21 communication module both have a slot which can take a type III extended PCMCIA format communication card :
PCX processor
TSX / PMX processor module
TSX SCY 21 communication module
PCMCIA PCMCIA PCMCIA card card card
___________________________________________________________________________
1/12
Presentation 1
A
The various types of PCMCIA type III communication cards
(see the "Communication, Bus and Network Interfaces Installation Manual - Volume 3")
- multiprotocol cards (UNI-TELWAY,
MODBUS/JBUS, character mode) (1) : non isolated RS 232 D serial link isolated RS 485 serial link current loop link non-isolated
RS 232D
- JNET single protocol cards (2) : isolated RS 485 serial link current loop link isolated
RS 485
Current loop isolated
RS 485
Current loop
- Modbus+ network card (3)
- FIPWAY network card (1)
- FIPIO Agent bus card (3)
Modbus+ FIPWAY FIPIO Agent
- Modem cards (3)
Modem
(1) can be integrated on a TSX SCY 21601 communication module and/or TSX/PMX/PCX processors.
(2) can only be integrated on a TSX SCY 21601 communication module
(3) can only be integrated on TSX/PMX/PCX processors
• Communication via application-specific module
TSX SCY 21 module (see the "Communication, Bus and Network Interfaces Installation
Manual - Volume 3")
This module, which can be integrated in all TSX/PMX/PCX Premium PLC station racks, has :
- an integrated communication channel
(1), multiprotocol (UNI-TELWAY,
Modbus/Jbus, character mode), isolated RS 485 serial link
- a slot (2), which can take a type III extended PCMCIA communication
1
2
1/13
A
Communication via application-specific module (continued)
TSX ETY 110 module (see the "Communication, Bus and Network Interfaces
Installation Manual - Volume 3")
This module allows communication in an Ethernet multinetwork architecture and has a communication channel offering two types of connection :
- connection to an ETHWAY network
- connection to a TCP_IP network
1.1-11 Bus interfaces
• AS-i bus interface module : TSX SAY100 (see the "Communication, Bus and
Network Interfaces Installation Manual - Volume 3")
This module provides the connection to an AS-i bus on a TSX/PMX/PCX
Premium PLC station.
It is a bus master module, managing and coordinating access to the bus, which sends data to all the slaves and receives data from them.
___________________________________________________________________________
1/14
1.1-12 Weighing
(see the "Analog and Weighing Installation Manual - Volume 4")
By means of the "weighing" module, TSX
Premium PLCs can be used to manage weighing applications : batching, multiproduct batching, sorting by weight, flow control, weight totalizing, etc.
This module has a measurement input for
8 sensors maximum, 2 fast discrete outputs and a serial link for an extension display.
Presentation 1
A
1.1-13 Process and AS-i power supplies
(see part E in this manual)
• Process power supplies
A wide range of power supply units and modules enables users to match their particular requirements.
Designed to provide the 24 VDC power supply to the peripherals in an automated system, controlled by
TSX/PMX/PCX Premium PLCs, they can all be mounted on a Telequick plate, AM1-PA, and some can be mounted on a central DIN rail, AM1-DP200 / DE 200.
24 VDC / 1A
24 VDC / 1A 24 VDC / 2A
24 VDC / 5A
24 VDC / 10A
___________________________________________________________________________
1/15
A
• AS-i power supplies
These are designed to provide the 30 VDC power supply to the components connected on the AS-i fieldbus.
AS-i 30 VDC / 2.4A
AS-i 30 VDC / 5A & 24 VDC
1.1-14 Fan modules
(see part A - section 9 in this manual)
Depending on the rack modularity (4, 6, 8 or 12 positions), one, two or three fan modules can be installed on top of each rack in order to help cool the various modules by forced convection.
These fan units should be used in the following cases :
• Ambient temperature in the range 25°C...60°C : Forced ventilation increases the lifetime of the various TSX Premium PLC components (25% increase in MTBF).
• Ambient temperature in the range 60°C...70°C : Since the ambient temperature is limited to 60°C without ventilation, forced ventilation is used to decrease the temperature inside the modules by 10°C, bringing the internal module temperature to the equivalent of an ambient temperature of 60°C.
There are three types of fan module :
• fan module with 110 VAC power supply
• fan module with 220 VAC power supply
• fan module with 24 VDC power supply
___________________________________________________________________________
1/16
1.1-15 Emergency stop monitoring modules
(see part B2 of this manual)
Modules with an integrated safety circuit, designed for totally safe control of machine emergency stop circuits. These modules cover all safety functions up to category 4 in accordance with standard EN 954-1.
There are two modules :
• 1 module with 12 inputs and 2 outputs
• 1 module with 12 inputs and 4 outputs
Presentation 1
A
___________________________________________________________________________
1/17
A
1.2
The various types of station
1.2-1 PLC stations with processor integrated on TSX RKY ii rack
The maximum capacities of a TSX / PMX Premium PLC station are defined according to the type of rack (standard or extendable) and the type of processor
(TSX / T PMX P 57 1 ii , TSX / T PMX P 57 2 ii , TSX / T PMX P 57 3 ii , TSX /
T PMX P 57 4 ii ) selected.
• TSX 57 10 or PMX 57 10 stations : based on a TSX P57 102 or T PMX P57 102 processor
- With no Bus X remote rackmaster module
Station with standard rack :
- 1 rack with 6, 8 or
12 positions
Station with extendable racks:
- 2 racks with 12 positions or
- 4 racks with 4, 6 or
8 positions
- maximum length of
Bus X : 100 meters
- With Bus X remote rackmaster module (station example)
Bus X main segment Bus X remote segment
Remote location of Bus X
(≤
250 meters)
Bus X
(≤
100 m)
Bus X
(≤
100 m)
Processor
Station with extendable racks :
- 2 racks with 12 positions or
- 4 racks with 4, 6 or 8 positions
- 2 remote locations possible
- Maximum length of a remote connection : 250 meters
- Maximum length of Bus X segments : 100 meters
• TSX 57 20 or PMX 57 20 stations : based on a TSX P 57 202/252 or T PMX P57 202 processor
• TSX 57 30 or PMX 57 30 stations : based on a TSX P 57 302/352 or T PMX P57 352 processor
• TSX 57 40 or PMX 57 40 stations : based on a TSX P 57 402/452 or T PMX P57 452 processor
___________________________________________________________________________
1/18
- With no Bus X remote rackmaster module
Station with standard rack :
- 1 rack with 6, 8 or 12 positions
Station with extendable racks:
- 8 racks with 12 positions or
- 16 racks with 4, 6 or
8 positions
- maximum length of
Bus X : 100 meters
Presentation 1
A
- With Bus X remote rackmaster module (station example)
Bus X main segment
Remote location of Bus X
(≤
250 meters)
Bus X remote segment 1
Bus X
(≤
100 m)
Bus X
(≤
100 m)
Processor
Remote location of Bus X
(≤
250 meters)
Station with extendable racks :
- 8 racks with 12 positions or
- 16 racks with 4, 6 or 8 positions
- 2 remote locations possible
- Maximum length of a remote connection : 250 meters
- Maximum length of Bus X segments : 100 meters
Bus X
(≤
100 m)
Bus X remote segment 2
___________________________________________________________________________
1/19
A
Maximum configurations
Type of station TSX/PMX TSX/PMX TSX/PMX TSX/PMX
5710 57 20 5730 5740
Processors TSX/TPMX P57 v
102
No. of racks standard TSX RKY 6/8/12 1
202
1
252
1
302
1
352
1
402
1
452
1
8 8 8 8 8 8 extendable TSX RKY 12EX 2
TSX RKY 4EX
TSX RKY 6EX 4
TSX RKY 8EX
Processor In-rack discrete I/O (1) 512
16 16 16 16 16 16
1024 1024 1024 1024 2040 2040 processing Analog I/O (1) capacity
24
App-spec. channels (1) (2) 8
80 80 128 128 255 255
24 24 32 32 48 48
Network connections (3) 1
Third party fieldbus connections (4)
AS-i sensor/ actuator bus connections
FIPIO master connections
Process control channels (5)
Total length of Bus X extension cables on one segment
Maximum remote connection distance of a Bus X segment
–
2
–
10
1
1
4
–
10
1
1
4
1
–
3
2
8
–
–
100 meters maximum with
TSX CBY ii cables (ii
≥
02
)
250 meters maximum
3
2
8
4
2
8
1 –
10 –
4
2
8
1
10
(1) On a TSX/PMX 5740 station, the number of in-rack discrete I/O, analog I/O and applicationspecific channels is not cumulative (see section 3.5-4 in this part).
(2) Application-specific channels = counter, axis control, stepper motor control, communication, etc, channels (see section 3.5-3 in this part - definition and number of application-specific channels).
(3) FIPWAY, Modbus +, Ethernet TCP_IP network
(4) INTERBUS-S, PROFIBUS-DP
(5) Only on TPMX P57 102/202/352/452 process control processors.
___________________________________________________________________________
1/20
Presentation 1
A
1.2-2 PLC stations with processor integrated in a PC
The maximum capacities of a TSX Premium PLC station are defined according to the type of processor (TPCX 57 1012 or TPCX 57 3512). In this type of station, where the processor is integrated in a PC, the station is made up of extendable racks.
• PCX 57 10 station : based on a TPCX P57 1012 processor
- Without Bus X remote rackmaster module
PC
TSX RKY ii EX extendable racks
TPCX 57 1012
X 1
Station with extendable racks:
- 2 racks with 12 positions or
- 4 racks with 4, 6 or 8 positions
- maximum Bus X (X1 + X2) length : 100 meters
- With Bus X remote rackmaster module (station example)
Bus X remote segment 1
Bus X
(≤
100 m)
Remote location of Bus X
(≤
250 m - X1)
PC
TPCX 57 1012
Bus X
X1
Bus X
X2
Bus X main segment
Station with extendable racks :
- 2 racks with 12 positions or
- 4 racks with 4, 6 or 8 positions
- 2 remote locations possible
- Maximum length of a remote connection : 250 meters - X1
- Maximum length of Bus X segments :
100 meters
___________________________________________________________________________
1/21
A
• PCX 57 30 station : based on a TPCX 57 3512 processor
- Without Bus X remote rackmaster module
PC
TSX RKY ii EX extendable racks
TPCX 57 3512
X 1
Station with extendable racks:
- 8 racks with 12 positions or
- 16 racks with 4, 6 or 8 positions
- maximum Bus X (X1 + X2) length : 100 meters
- With Bus X remote rackmaster module (station example)
Bus X remote segment 1
Bus X
(≤
100 m)
Remote location of Bus X
(≤
250 m - X1)
PC
TPCX 57 3512
Bus X
(≤
100 m)
Bus X remote segment 2
Bus X
X1
Bus X
X2
Remote location of Bus X
(≤
250 m - X1)
Bus X main segment
Station with extendable racks :
- 8 racks with 12 positions or
- 16 racks with 4, 6 or 8 positions
- 2 remote locations possible
- Maximum length of a remote connection : 250 meters - X1
- Maximum length of Bus X
1/22
Presentation 1
A
Maximum configurations
Type of station
Processors TPCX P57
No. of racks extendable v
TSX RKY 12EX
TSX RKY 4EX
TSX RKY 6EX
TSX RKY 8EX
Processor In-rack discrete I/O
processing Analog I/O capacity App-spec. channels (1)
Network connections (2)
Third party fieldbus connections (3)
AS-i sensor/ actuator bus connections
FIPIO master connections
Total length of bus extension cables (X1 + X2)
Maximum remote connection distance of a Bus X segment
PCX 57 10
1012
2
4
1
–
512
24
8
2
–
PCX 5730
3512
8
16
1024
128
32
3
2
8
1
100 meters maximum with with TSX CBY ii cables (ii
≥
02
)
250 meters minus the distance between the processor and the rack at address 0
(X1)
(1) Application-specific channels = counter, axis control, stepper motor control, communication, etc, channels (see section 3.5-3 in this part - definition and number of application-specific channels).
(2) FIPWAY, Modbus +, Ethernet TCP_IP network
(3) INTERBUS-S, PROFIBUS-DP
___________________________________________________________________________
1/23
A
___________________________________________________________________________
1/24
TSX RKY ii standard racks & TSX RKY ii
Section 2
2 TSX RKY ii standard racks & TSX RKY ii EX extendable racks
2.1
Presentation
2.1-1 General
TSX RKY iii racks are the basic element of Premium PLCs.
These racks provide the following functions :
• Mechanical function :
They are used for fitting all PLC station modules (power supply modules, TSX/
PMX processor, discrete/analog I/O, application-specific modules).
They can be fitted in enclosures, on the machine frame or on panels.
• Electrical function :
The racks have an integral bus, called
Bus X, which distributes :
- the power supplies required for each module in the same rack,
- the service signals and data for the whole PLC station if it comprises a number of racks.
So as to match user requirements more closely, there are two families of racks, each available in several versions (4, 6, 8 and 12 positions) :
• Standard racks : These are used to make up a PLC station limited to a single rack.
• Extendable racks : These are used to make up a PLC station containing :
- Up to 8 RKY 12 EX racks
-
Up to 16 RKY 4EX/6EX/8EX racks
These racks are distributed on a bus known as Bus X, whose maximum length is limited to 100 meters.
Bus continuity from one rack to another is provided by a bus extension cable.
Standard racks
TSX RKY 6
(6 positions)
TSX RKY 8
(8 positions)
TSX RKY 12
(12 positions)
Extendable racks
TSX RKY 4EX
(4 positions)
TSX RKY 6EX
(6 positions)
TSX RKY 8EX
(8 positions)
A
TSX RKY 12EX
(12 positions)
___________________________________________________________________________
2/1
A
2.1-2 Physical description
• Standard racks
4 3 1
6
8
6
7
6
9
5
• Extendable racks
10 4 3
2
1
11
6
8
11
6
7
6
9
5 2
___________________________________________________________________________
2/2
9
6
9
6
TSX RKY ii standard racks & TSX RKY ii EX extendable racks 2
A
1 Metal plate acting as :
• support for the Bus X electronic card and protection for the bus against EMI and
ESD interference,
• module support,
• mechanical reinforcement for the rack.
2 Apertures for anchoring the module pins,
3 48-pin female 1/2 DIN connectors for connecting the rack to each module.
When the rack is supplied these connectors are protected by covers which should be removed before the modules are installed.
The connector located furthest to the left marked PS is always dedicated to the rack power supply module; the other connectors marked 00 to ii can take all the other types of module.
4 Tapped holes for the module fixing screw.
5 Aperture which ensures correct location when a power supply module is fitted.
Since the power supply modules have a boss on the rear panel, it is impossible to mount this module in any other position.
6 Holes large enough to take M6 screws for fitting the rack on a support.
7 Location for marking the rack address.
8 Location for marking the station network address.
9 Ground terminals for grounding the rack.
10 Micro-switches for encoding the rack address (on extendable racks only).
11 9-pin female SUB D connectors for connecting Bus X to another rack (on extendable racks only).
2.2
Installation /Mounting
The procedure for installing and mounting racks is explained in section 6 of this part.
• Installation : section 6.1
• Mounting : section 6.3
___________________________________________________________________________
2/3
A
2.3
Functions
2.3-1 Composition of a PLC station with TSX/PMX 57 processors, which can be integrated on TSX RKY ii racks
• Based on standard racks : TSX RKY 6/8/12
Standard racks are used to make up a
TSX/PMX 57 10, 57 20, 57 30 or 57 40
PLC station limited to a single rack.
• Based on extendable racks : TSX RKY 4EX/6EX/8EX/12EX
By using extendable racks, it is possible to make up a PLC station containing a maximum of :
2
TSX/PMX 57 10 station :
- 2 TSX RKY 12EX racks or
- 4 TSX RKY 4EX/6EX/8EX racks
1
TSX/PMX 57 20, 57 30 or 57 40 station:
- 8 TSX RKY 12EX racks or
- 16 TSX RKY 4EX/6EX/8EX racks
A single station may comprise racks with 4, 6, 8 and 12 positions which are connected by Bus X extension cables
(1). Bus X should have a line terminator
(2) fitted at each end.
- Bus X extension cables
The racks are interconnected by TSX
CBY ii
0K Bus X extension cables connected to the 9-pin SUB D connector on the right and left-hand side of each extendable rack.
As the concept of inlet and outlet does not apply to 9-pin SUB D connectors, it does not matter whether the cable coming in from a rack or the cable going out to another rack is connected to the right or left connector.
1
2
___________________________________________________________________________
2/4
TSX RKY ii standard racks & TSX RKY ii EX extendable racks 2
A
- Line terminator
The two extendable racks located at either end of the daisy chain must be fitted with a TSX TLYEX line terminator (marked A/ and /B) on the unused 9-pin SUB D connector.
- Maximum cable length : The total length of all the TSX CBY ii 0K cables used in a PLC station must never exceed 100 meters
Note:
For applications which require distances of more than 100 meters between racks, a remote rackmaster module can be used. This enables 2 Bus X segments to be remotely located at a maximum distance of 250 meters from the rack supporting the processor. The maximum distance of each Bus X segment is 100 meters. (See section 5 - Bus X remote rackmaster module)
___________________________________________________________________________
2/5
A
2.3-2 Composition of a PLC station with PCX 57 processors, which can be integrated in a PC
In this case, the PLC station is made up of extendable racks :
TSX RKY 4EX/6EX/8EX/12EX
P C
TPCX 57 3512
1
X1
1
By using extendable racks, it is possible to make up a PLC station containing a maximum of :
• PCX 57 10 station :
- 2 TSX RKY 12EX racks or
- 4 TSX RKY 4EX/6EX/8EX racks
• PCX 57 30 station :
- 8 TSX RKY 12EX racks or
- 16 TSX RKY 4EX/6EX/8EX racks
A single station may comprise racks with
4, 6, 8 and 12 positions which are connected to each other and to the processor by Bus X extension cables (1).
Bus X should have a line terminator (2) fitted at the end.
• Bus X extension cables
Connections between racks and between the racks and the processor are made using TSX CBY ii 0K Bus X extension cables connected to the 9-pin
SUB D connector on the right and lefthand side of each extendable rack and at the top of the front panel of the processor.
As the concept of inlet and outlet does not apply to 9-pin SUB D connectors, it does not matter whether the cable coming in from a rack or the cable going out to another rack is connected to the right or left connector.
2
1
___________________________________________________________________________
2/6
TSX RKY ii standard racks & TSX RKY ii EX extendable racks 2
A
• Line terminator
The equivalent of line terminator /A is integrated in the processor as standard, and thus the processor is located at the head of the Bus X line. The extendable rack located at the end of the daisy chain must be fitted with a TSX TLY EX line terminator
(marked /B) on the unused 9-pin SUB D connector.
• Maximum cable length
The total length (X1 + X2) of all the TSX CBY ii 0K cables used in a PLC station must never exceed 100 meters.
Note 1:
For applications which require distances of more than 100 meters between racks, a remote rackmaster module can be used. This enables 2 Bus X segments to be remotely located at a maximum distance of 250 meters from the rack virtually supporting the processor. The maximum distance of each Bus X segment is 100 meters. (See section 5 - Bus X remote rackmaster module).
Note 2:
By default, the PCX 57 processor is equipped to be installed at the head of the Bus
X line. Line terminator A/ is therefore integrated in the processor in the form of a plug-in daughter board.
If an application requires the integration of the processor inside a Bus X segment, a mechanical assembly is supplied with the processor so that this can be done.
This mechanical assembly is supplied in the form of :
- a daughter board which is installed in the place of line terminator A/
- a mounting plate with a 9-pin SUB D connector for connecting a TSX CBY ii 0K
Bus X cable and a ribbon cable for connection to the daughter board.
(See section 6.5-6 for the installation of this interface).
___________________________________________________________________________
2/7
A
2.3-3 Addressing racks in a PLC station
• Station made up of a standard rack
The station is always limited to a single rack; the rack address is therefore implicit and has the value 0 (no micro-switches).
• Station made up of extendable racks
Each station rack must have an address assigned to it. This address is coded via 4 micro-switches located on the rack.
Micro-switches 1 to 3 are used for coding the rack address on Bus X (0 to 7), micro-switch 4 is used for coding two racks (4, 6 or 8 positions) on the same address. This latter function is handled by PL7 Junior or PL7 Pro software, version V3.3 or later.
2
1
4
3
Rack addresses 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Position of micros w i t c h e s
4
3
2
1
ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
Note : At the time of supply, micro-switches 1, 2 and 3 are in the ON position (address 0).
Assigning addresses to the various racks
Address 0 : This address is always assigned to the rack which supports :
• the TSX/PMX 57 processor physically
• the PCX 57 processor virtually
This rack can be located in any position in the chain.
Addresses 1 to 7 : These can be assigned in any order to all the other extendable racks in the station.
Note : The rack address must be coded before the power supply module is mounted.
!
If two or more racks are accidentally positioned at the same address (other than address 0), the racks concerned change to fault mode as do all their modules. Having corrected the rack addressing, the racks concerned should be switched off/on.
Note : 1 This comment only concerns racks, reference TSX RKY ii EX.
2 If two or more racks are at address 0, the rack supporting the processor does not change to fault mode.
___________________________________________________________________________
2/8
TSX RKY ii standard racks & TSX RKY ii EX extendable racks 2
A
Principle of addressing 2 racks at the same address
TSX RKY 12EX
P
S
ON
TSX RKY 8EX
P
S
ON
OFF
TSX RKY 8EX
P
S
TSX RKY 6EX
1 TSX RKY 12EX rack at one address
2 TSX RKY 8EX racks at the same address
P
S
ON
OFF
TSX RKY 6EX
P
S
2 TSX RKY 6EX racks at the same address
TSX RKY 4EX
P
S
ON
TSX RKY 4EX
P
S
2 TSX RKY 4EX racks at the same address
ON
Microswitch
4
OFF
OFF
Notes :
• TSX RKY 12EX racks cannot receive a second rack at the same address.
• It is possible to mix TSX RKY 8EX/6EX/4EX racks.
• Two TSX RKY 8EX/6EX/4EX racks with the same address will not be necessarily be daisychained one after the other. The physical order of distribution is not important.
___________________________________________________________________________
2/9
A
2.3-4 Module addresses
For all standard and extendable racks, a module address is geographical and will depend on the position of the module on the rack. The address of each position is indicated below each connector; the connector marked PS is always dedicated to the rack power supply.
Module addresses according to the type of rack
• Standard racks
- TSX RKY6 : addresses 00 to 02
- TSX RKY8 : addresses 00 to 04
- TSX RKY12 : addresses 00 to 10
• Extendable racks
The address of a module depends on the position of micro-switch 4 (see table below).
- micro-switch 4 in the ON position, the modules will have addresses (00 to x) depending on the type of rack
- micro-switch 4 in the OFF position, the modules will have addresses (08 to y) depending on the type of rack. This function is only handled by PL7 Junior or PL7
Pro software, version V 3.3 or later.
Position of micro-switch 4
TSX RKY 4EX racks
TSX RKY 6EX racks
TSX RKY 8EX racks
TSX RKY 12EX racks
ON
00 to 02
00 to 04
00 to 06
00 to 10
Module addresses
OFF
08 to 10
08 to 12
08 to 14 cannot be used
Micro-switch 4
4
H
L
ON OFF
PS
PS
08
00
09
01
Module addresses
10
02
11
03
12
04
13
05
14
06
Note :
The shaded addresses can only be accessed from PL7 Junior or PL7 Pro software version
3.3 or later
Example : module addresses on TSX RKY 8EX rack
2/10
TSX RKY ii standard racks & TSX RKY ii EX extendable racks 2
A
2.3-5 Installing power supplies, processors and other modules
• On a standard or extendable rack at address 0 with a TSX 57 or
PMX 57 processor, which can be integrated on the rack
The rack with address 0 must receive a power supply module and the processor module.
Since TSX Premium PLCs can have two types of power supply (standard format or double format), the position of the processor will depend on the type of power supply being used.
Using a standard format power supply module :
- The power supply module always occupies position PS.
PS 00
- The single format processor module is installed in position 00 (preferred position) or position 01 if position 00 is not available.
01 02 03 04 05 06
- The double format processor module is installed in positions 00 and 01
(preferred positions) or positions 01 and 02 if position 00 is not available.
- The other modules should be installed from position 01, 02 or 03 onwards, depending on the location of the processor .
PS 00 01 02 03 04 05 06
Using a double format power supply module :
- The power supply module always occupies positions PS and 00.
PS 00
- The single format processor module must be installed in position 01.
- The double format processor module is installed in positions 01 and 02.
- The other modules should be installed from position 02 or 03 onwards, depending on the type of processor.
PS 00
01 02 03 04 05 06
01 02 03 04 05 06
___________________________________________________________________________
2/11
A
• On an extendable rack at address 0 with a PCX 57 processor, which can be integrated in the PC
The PCX 57 processor, integrated in the PC, occupies one position virtually on the rack at address 0; this virtual position must be empty. Since TSX Premium PLCs can have two types of power supply (standard format or double format), the empty position will depend on the type of power supply being used.
Using a standard format power supply module :
- The power supply module always occupies position PS.
- Position 00, virtual slot for the processor, must be empty.
- The other modules should be installed from position 01 onwards.
PS 00 01 02 03 04 05 06
Using a double format power supply module :
- The power supply module always occupies positions PS and 00.
- Position 01, virtual slot for the processor, must be empty.
- The other modules should be installed from position 02 onwards.
PS 00 01 02 03 04 05 06
• On an extendable rack at address 1 to 7 regardless of the type of processor
Each rack must have a power supply module, whether standard or double format.
Using a standard format power supply module :
- The power supply module always occupies position PS.
- The other modules should be installed from position 00 onwards.
PS 00 01 02 03 04 05 06
Using a double format power supply module :
- The power supply module always occupies positions PS and 00.
- The other modules should be installed from position 01 onwards.
PS 00 01 02 03 04 05 06
___________________________________________________________________________
2/12
TSX RKY ii standard racks & TSX RKY ii EX extendable racks 2
A
2.4
Accessories
2.4-1 Bus X extension cables
• TSX CBY ii 0K cables (II
≥≥≥≥≥
02)
These fixed-length cables are used to daisy-chain TSX RKY ii EX extendable racks and carry the various Bus X signals. When used with a PCX 57 processor, they also provide the connection between the processor integrated in the PC and the first rack in the station. They are fitted with 9-pin male SUB D connectors at each end, which connect to the 9-pin female SUB
D connectors on the extendable rack or the PCX 57 processor.
Several different lengths of cable are available to meet the various application requirements (see table below).
Station with TSX or PMX processor which can be integrated on the rack
Station with PCX processor which can be integrated in a PC
PC
PCX 57
!
!
The total length of all the cables used in a PLC station is limited to
100 meters.
!
All the station elements (racks,
PC, etc) must be powered down prior to inserting or removing a
TSX CBY iii
0K cable.
___________________________________________________________________________
2/13
A
The different types of cable available
References
TSX CBY 010K (II
≥≥≥≥≥
02)
TSX CBY 030K (II
≥≥≥≥≥
02)
TSX CBY 050K (II
≥≥≥≥≥
02)
TSX CBY 120K (II
≥≥≥≥≥
02)
TSX CBY 180K (II
≥≥≥≥≥
02)
TSX CBY 280K (II
≥≥≥≥≥
02)
TSX CBY 380K (II
≥≥≥≥≥
02)
TSX CBY 500K (II
≥≥≥≥≥
02)
TSX CBY 720K (II
≥≥≥≥≥
02)
TSX CBY 1000K (II
≥≥≥≥≥
02)
Lengths
1 meter
3 meters
5 meters
12 meters
18 meters
28 meters
38 meters
50 meters
72 meters
100 meters
• TSX CBY 1000 cables (reel with 100 meters)
For Bus X lengths which are less than 100 meters but not those offered already equipped with connectors, the TSX CBY 1000 cable must be used. This cable must be equipped at each end with TSX CBY K9 connectors to be fitted by the user. The procedure for this is described in the quick reference guide included with the cable and the connectors.
The following equipment is required to make up this cable :
- 1 TSX CBY 1000 cable including 1 reel of 100 meters and two testers for checking the cable once the connections have been made
Reel
- 1 set of two TSX CBY K9 9-pin connectors including for each connector :
1 connector body,
1 set of contacts,
1 internal shielding cover,
1 external shielding cover,
1 ferrule,
1 plastic cover with 2 fixing screws,
Testers
Connectors
- 1 TSX CBY ACC10 kit including 2 crimping pliers and a tool for extracting contacts to be used in case of error,
Crimping pliers
- 1 digital ohmmeter,
- 1 wire stripper,
- 1 pair of scissors.
___________________________________________________________________________
2/14
TSX RKY ii standard racks & TSX RKY ii EX extendable racks 2
A
2.4-2 TSX TLYEX line terminator
When using extendable racks, Bus X must be fitted with a line terminator at each end
(see outline diagram in section 2.3-1).
A line terminator is made up of a 9-pin
SUB D connector and a cover containing the matching elements. It fits onto the
9-pin SUB D connectors on the extendable racks located at the end of the line.
A
B
TSX TLYEX line terminators are sold in lots of 2 and marked A/ and /B. The bus must have an A/ terminator at one end and a /B terminator at the other end in no specific
order (see diagrams below).
!
All the station racks must be powered down prior to inserting or removing a line terminator.
• Positioning line terminators on a station with a TSX or PMX processor integrated on a TSX RKY ii
EX rack
- On a PLC station c o m p r i s i n g s e v e r a l
TSX RKY ii EX extendable racks
TSX RKY •• EX
TSX CBY •• 0K
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
TSX TLYEX
TSX RKY •• EX
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
TSX CBY •• 0K
O K O K N O K N O K
TSX RKY •• EX
- On a PLC station comprising one TSX
RKY ii EX extendable rack
Note :
When using a single extendable rack, a line terminator must be fitted on each 9-pin SUB D connector on the rack.
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
2/15
A
• Positioning line terminators on a station with a PCX 57 processor integrated in a PC
P C
PCX 57
A
B
A
B
OK NOK
The equivalent of line terminator /A is integrated in the processor as standard, and thus the processor is located at the head of the Bus X line. The extendable rack located at the end of the daisy chain must be fitted with a TSX TLY EX line terminator
(marked /B) on the unused 9-pin SUB D connector.
Special case
If no element is connected on Bus X, a TSX TLYEX line terminator, /B, must be installed on the Bus X connector on the PCX 57 processor.
TSX TLYEX
A
B
A
B
OK NOK
___________________________________________________________________________
2/16
TSX RKY ii standard racks & TSX RKY ii EX extendable racks 2
A
2.4-3 TSX RKA 02 protective cover for an empty slot
If there are any unoccupied positions on a rack, it is advisable to fit a TSX RKA 02 cover in this position, which is designed for this purpose.
This cover fits on the rack in the same way as a shallow version of a module.
TSX RKA 02 covers are sold in lots of 5.
2.4-4 Marking
• Marking module positions on the rack
When the module is in place on the rack, it hides the position marker which is screen-printed on the rack. So that a module position can still be identified quickly, each rack comes with a sheet of self-adhesive labels which can be used to mark the position of each module.
These self-adhesive labels can be stuck on top of the module when it is in place on the rack.
Label position
Sheet of labels
PS 00 01 02 03 04 05 06
07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14
Example : processor module marking
___________________________________________________________________________
2/17
A
• Marking racks
Each rack is supplied with a pack of clip-on markers on a strip. These can be used to mark each rack with :
- the address of the rack in the station
- the network address of the station, if this is connected to a communication network.
Each rack therefore has two locations to take these markers.
Station network address
Rack address in the station
___________________________________________________________________________
2/18
TSX RKY ii standard racks & TSX RKY ii EX extendable racks 2
A
2.5
Compatibility with the existing installed base
Existing configuration with
2 TSX TLY
(ii 01) line terminators
TSX CBY ii
0K
(ii 01) cables
Old references New references
TSX RKY ii
E TSX RKY ii
E TSX RKY ii
E TSX RKY ii
EX
TSX CBY ii
0K (ii 01) TSX CBY ii
0K (ii 01) TSX CBY ii
0K (ii 02) TSX CBY ii
0K (ii 02)
TSX TLY (ii 01) TSX TLY A+B (ii 03) or TSX CBY 1000 or TSX CBY 1000
TSX TLY A+B (ii 03) TSX TLYEX A/+/B
Yes No No No
Yes Yes No No
Yes Yes No TSX TLY A+B line terminators
(ii 03)
TSX racks
TSX RKY ii
E
Yes
Yes
TSX cable(s)
CBY ii
0K (ii 02) or CBY 1000
TSX racks
RKY ii
EX
Yes
Yes
TSX TLYEX line terminators
A/+/B
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Note :
On a PLC station, the TSX TLY line terminator coupling must be the same version.
___________________________________________________________________________
2/19
A
___________________________________________________________________________
2/20
3 TSX 57/PMX57/PCX 57 processors
3.1
General presentation
A wide range of processors is available, increasing in capacity and performance levels to best meet the differing needs of users :
• TSX 57 sequential processors, which can be integrated in TSX RKY ii racks :
- TSX P57 102 processor,
- TSX P57 202, TSX P57 252 processors,
- TSX P57 302, TSX P57 352 processors,
- TSX P57 402, TSX P57 452 processors,
• PMX 57 process control processors, which can be integrated in TSX RKY ii racks :
- TPMX P57 102 processor :
- TPMX P57 202 processor : processor with the same capacity as a TSX P57 102 processor and performance levels which are equivalent to TSX P57 2 i 2 processors. It can also be used to manage 10 process control channels.
processor with the same capacity as a TSX P57 57 202 processor and performance levels which are equivalent to TSX P57 4 i 2 processors. It can also be used to manage 10 process control channels.
- TPMX P57 352 processor :
- TPMX P57 452 processor : processor with the same capacity as a TSX P57 57 352 processor and performance levels which are equivalent to TSX P57 4 i 2 processors. It can also be used to manage 10 process control channels.
processor with the same capacity as a TSX P57 57 452 processor and performance levels which are equivalent to TSX P57 4 i 2 processors. It can also be used to manage 10 process control channels.
• PCX 57 sequential processors, which can be integrated in a PC :
- TPCX 57 1012 processors : processor with the same capacity as a TSX P57 102 processor.
- TPCX 57 3512 processors : processor with the same capacity as a TSX P57 352 processor.
TSX 57 / PMX 57 and PCX 57 processors manage an entire PLC station comprising discrete I/O modules, analog I/O modules and application-specific modules (counter, axis control, stepper motor control, communication) which can be distributed over one or more racks connected on Bus X.
The application is designed using PL7 Junior or PL7 Pro software under Windows, which offers :
• Four programming languages : Grafcet, Ladder, Structured Text and List languages,
• A multitask software structure : master task, fast task, event processing,
• Modification of currently running programs,
• etc
___________________________________________________________________________
3/1
A
A
3.2
TSX / PMX 57 processors, which can be integrated in
TSX RKY ii racks
3.2-1 Catalog
Type of processor TSX processors which can be integrated in TSX RKY ii racks
Station characteristics (1)
TSX RKY..EX racks 2
TSX RKY 4EX/6EX/8EX racks 4
Module slots (2) 21 [27]
8
16
87 [111]
I/O profile (3) F i x e d
No. of in-rack discrete I/O (4) 512
No. of analog I/O channels 24
No. of app-specific chans (5) 8
1024
80
24
1 (FIPWAY, ETHWAY/TCP_IP, Modbus +) Network connection
FIPIO master connection
1 (6) Third party fieldbus connection
AS-i sensor/actuator bus connection
Memory characteristics
Internal memory
Memory extension
2
32 K16
64 K16
4
48 K16
128 K16
References TSX P 57 102 TSX P 57 202
1 (integrated)
64 K16
TSX P 57 252
(1) Maximum characteristics for the station managed by the processor
(2) 21 or 87 slots with 2 or 8 TSX RKY 12EX racks, [27] or [111] slots with 4 or 16 TSX RKY 8EX racks. For standard format modules, except power supply modules and processor.
(3) Fixed I/O profile : the number of discrete I/O, analog and application-specific channels is cumulative
(4) In-rack discrete I/O. Discrete I/O on FIPIO bus, third party fieldbus, AS-i sensor/actuator bus are to be counted additionally.
(5) Counter, axis control, etc, channels (see section 3.5-3 : definition and number of application-specific channels)
3/2
TSX 57/PMX 57/PCX57 processors 3
A
Catalog (continued)
Type of processor TSX processors which can be integrated in TSX RKY ii racks
Station characteristics (1)
TSX RKY..EX racks 8
TSX RKY 4EX/6EX/8EX racks 16
Module slots (2) 87
I/O profile (3)
No. of discrete I/O (4)
No. of analog channels
No. of app.-spec. chans (5)
FIPIO master connection
Network connection
Fixed
1024
128
32
[111]
1 (integrated)
3 (FIPWAY,ETHWAY/TCP_IP
Modbus +)
Third party fieldbus connection
AS-i sensor/actuator bus connection
Memory characteristics
Internal memory
Memory extension
2 (6)
8
64 K16
256 K16
80 K16
Flexible
2040 maximum
255 maximum
48 maximum
1 (integrated)
4 (FIPWAY,ETHWAY/TCP_IP
Modbus +)
96 K16 96/112 K16(7)
References TSX P57 302 TSX P57 352 TSX P57 402 TSX P57 452
(1) Maximum characteristics for the station managed by the processor
(2) 87 slots with 8 TSX RKY 12EX racks, [111] slots with 16 TSX RKY 8EX racks. For standard format modules, except power supply modules and processor.
(3) Fixed I/O profile : the number of discrete I/O, analog and application-specific channels is cumulative
Flexible I/O profile : the number of discrete I/O, analog and application-specific channels is not cumulative (see section 3.5-4 of this manual).
(4) In-rack discrete I/O. Discrete I/O on FIPIO bus, third party fieldbus, AS-i sensor/actuator bus are to be counted additionally.
(5) Counter, axis control, etc, channels (see section 3.5-3 : number of app-specific channels)
(6) INTERBUS-S, PROFIBUS-DP.
3/3
A
Catalog (continued)
Type of processor PMX processors which can be integrated in TSX RKY ii racks
Station characteristics (1)
TSX RKY..EX racks 2
TSX RKY 4EX/6EX/8EX racks 4
Module slots (2)
I/O profile (3)
21
Fixed
No. of discrete I/O (4)
No. of analog I/O chan.
No.of app-spec.chan.(5)
Control loops
Network connection
512
24
8
10
[27]
8
16
87
1024
80
24
[111]
128
32
Flexible
2040 max.
255 max.
48 max.
1 3 4
(FIPWAY, ETHWAY/TCP_IP, Modbus +) (FIPWAY, ETHWAY/TCP_IP, Modbus+)
1 (integrated)
1 (6) 2 (6)
FIPIO master connection
Third party fieldbus connection
AS-i sensor/actuator bus connection
Memory characteristics
Internal memory
Memory extension
2
48 K16
64 K16
4
48 K16
128 K16
8
80 K16
256 K16
96/112 K16(7)
References TPMX P57 102 TPMX P57 202 TPMX P57 352 T PMX P57 452
(1) Maximum characteristics for the station managed by the processor
(2) 21 or 87 slots with 2 or 8 TSX RKY 12EX racks, [27] or [111] slots with 4 or 16 TSX RKY 8EX racks. For standard format modules, except power supply modules and processor
(3) Fixed I/O profile : the number of discrete I/O, analog and application-specific channels is cumulative
Flexible I/O profile : the number of discrete I/O, analog and application-specific channels is not cumulative (see section 3.5-4 in this part).
(4) In-rack discrete I/O. Discrete I/O on FIPIO bus, third party fieldbus, AS-i sensor/actuator bus are to be counted additionally.
(5) Counter, axis control, etc, channels (see section 3.5-3 : number of app-specific channels)
(6) INTERBUS-S, PROFIBUS-DP.
3/4
TSX 57/PMX 57/PCX57 processors 3
A
3.2-2 Physical description
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Standard format processors :
• TSX P57 102/202/252/302/352
• T PMX P57 102
Double format processors :
• TSX P57 402/452
• T PMX P57 202/352/452
1 Display block comprising 4 or 5 indicator lamps :
• RUN indicator lamp (green) : on if the processor is operating (program running),
• ERR indicator lamp (red) : when on, this indicates faults relating to the processor and its installed devices
(PCMCIA memory card and PCMCIA communication card)
• I/O indicator lamp (red) : when on, this indicates faults originating from another station module or a configuration fault,
• TER indicator lamp (yellow) : when flashing, this indicates activity on the terminal port. The frequency of flashing depends on the amount of traffic.
• FIP indicator lamp (yellow): when flashing, this indicates activity on the FIPIO bus (only on TSX / TPMX P57 i 52 processors). The frequency of flashing depends on the amount of traffic.
2 Pencil-point RESET button which causes the PLC to perform a cold start when pressed.
3 Terminal port (TER connector) : enables a peripheral device (with or without its own power supply) to be connected : programming or adjustment terminal, man-machine interface terminal, printer, etc.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
A
4 Terminal port (AUX connector) : enables a peripheral device (with or without its own power supply) to be connected : programming or adjustment terminal, manmachine interface terminal, printer, etc.
5 Slot for a type 1 PCMCIA format memory extension card.
!
If no card is present, this slot is fitted with a cover which MUST remain in place; if removed, the processor will stop.
6 Slot for a type 3 PCMCIA format communication card which enables a FIPWAY, FIPIO
Agent, UNI-TELWAY, or serial link communication channel to be connected to the processor.
If no communication card is present, this slot is fitted with a cover.
7 9-pin SUB D connector for connection to the FIPIO master bus. This connector is only available on TSX P57 i 52 or T PMX P57 i 52 processors.
3.2-3 Installation/mounting
• Installing a standard format processor module
A standard format processor module is always installed on the TSX RKY ii
rack at
address 0 and in position 00 or 01 depending on whether the rack is equipped with a standard format or double format power supply module.
• Rack with TSX PSY 2600/1610 standard format power supply module : PS 00 01 02 03 04 05 06
In this instance, the processor module will be installed in position 00 (preferred position) or position 01 (in which case, position 00 must be empty).
• Rack with TSX PSY 3610/5500/5520/
8500 double format power supply module :
In this instance, since the power supply module takes up two positions (PS and
00), the processor has to be installed in position 01.
PS 00 01 02 03 04 05 06
___________________________________________________________________________
3/6
TSX 57/PMX 57/PCX57 processors 3
A
• Installing a double format processor module
A double format processor module is always installed on the TSX RKY ii rack at
address 0 and in positions 00 and 01 or 01 and 02 depending on whether the rack is equipped with a standard format or double format power supply module.
- Rack with TSX PSY 2600/1610 double format power supply module :
In this instance, the processor module will be installed in positions 00 and 01
(preferred position) or in positions 01 and 02, in which case position 00 must be empty.
• Rack with TSX PSY 3610/5500/5520/
8500 double format power supply module :
In this instance, since the power supply module takes up two positions (PS and
00), the processor has to be installed in positions 01 and 02.
PS 00 01 02 03 04 05 06
PS 00 01 02 03 04 05 06
Note : The rack where the processor is installed is always address 0
• Mounting :
The procedure for mounting modules is defined in section 6.4-1.
!
The rack power supply must always be powered down prior to mounting a processor module.
Precautions to be taken when replacing a processor
!
If a TSX / PMX 57 processor is being replaced by another processor which has already been programmed and contains an application, the power must be cut to all the PLC station control devices.
Before restoring the power to the control devices, check that the processor actually contains the required application.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/7
A
3.2-4 Display
Five indicator lamps on the processor front panel enable rapid diagnostics of the PLC status :
RUN indicator lamp green) : shows the application status
• On : PLC running normally, program execution,
• Flashing : PLC stopped or affected by software blocking fault,
• Off : the PLC is not configured : application missing, invalid or
RUN
TER
FIP incompatible.
PLC in error mode : processor or system fault.
ERR
I / O
RUN
TER
FIP
ERR
I / O
ERR indicator lamp (red) : signals faults relating to the processor and its ancillary equipment (memory card and PCMCIA communication card)
• On : PLC in error mode : processor or system fault,
• Flashing :
- PLC not configured (application missing, invalid or incompatible).
- PLC affected by software blocking fault,
- memory card battery fault
- Bus X fault (1)
• Off : normal status, no internal fault.
I/O indicator lamp (red) : signals configuration faults and faults arising from other station modules :
• On : I/O fault originating from another module or channel, or a configuration fault
• Flashing : Bus X fault (1),
• Off : normal status, no internal fault.
TER indicator lamp (yellow) : signals activity on the TER terminal port
• Flashing : link active. The frequency of flashing depends on the amount of traffic
• Off : link inactive
FIP indicator lamp (yellow), only on TSX/TPMX P57 i 52 processors : this indicates activity on the FIPIO bus
• Flashing : link active. The frequency of flashing depends on the amount of traffic
• Off : link inactive
(1) A Bus X fault is indicated by the ERR and I/O indicator lamps flashing simultaneously.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/8
TSX 57/PMX 57/PCX57 processors 3
A
3.3
PCX 57 processors, which can be integrated in a PC
3.3-1 Presentation
Integrated in a host PC (1) which is running under Windows 95/98 or Windows NT and has a 16-bit ISA bus, PCX 57 processors, using PL7 Junior or PL7 Pro software, manage an entire PLC station made up of racks, discrete I/O modules, analog I/O modules and application-specific modules which can be distributed over one or more racks connected on Bus X. The PCX 57 processor communicates with the PC on which it is installed via the 16-bit ISA bus. To do this, a communication driver (ISAWAY 95/98 or ISAWAY NT) must be installed.
H o s t
P C
PCX 57 processor
Two types of processor are available to meet the differing needs of users :
• TPCX 57 1012 processors : processor with the same capacity as a TSX P57 102 processor.
•- TPCX 57 3512 processors : processor with the same capacity as a TSX P57 352 processor.
Characteristics of the host PC
To receive a PCX 57 processor, the host PC must :
• operate under Windows 95/98 or Windows NT,
• have an 8 MHz 16-bit ISA bus,
• have two standard slots available on the ISA bus (consecutive and 20.32 mm apart), with sufficient space in terms of height and width. The format of the PCX 57 processor card is identical to that of a 16-bit ISA PC card,
• comply with the ISA standards (signals, power supply, etc)
(1) In the remainder of this document, the term host PC covers a Groupe Schneider industrial
PC type device or any other commercially available PC which has the characteristics defined above.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/9
A
3.3-2 Catalog
Type of module Processors which can be integrated in a PC
Station characteristics (1)
TSX RKY..EX racks 2
TSX RKY 4EX/6EX/8EX racks 4
Module slots (2)
I/O profile (3)
21
Fixed
[27]
No. of discrete I/O (4)
No. of analog I/O chan.
No. of app-spe. chan (5)
FIPIO master conn.
Network connection
512
24
8
1(FIPWAY, ETHWAY/TCP_IP
Modbus +)
Third party fieldbus connection
AS-i sensor/actuator bus connection
Memory characteristics
Internal memory
2
32 K16
64 K16 Memory extension
References TPCX 57 1012
8
16
87 [111]
1024
128
32
1 (integrated)
3(FIPWAY, ETHWAY/TCP_IP
Modbus +)
2 (6)
8
80 K16
256 K16
TPCX 57 3512
(1) Maximum characteristics for the station managed by the processor
(2) 21 or 87 slots with 2 or 8 TSX RKY 12EX racks, [27] or [111] slots with 4 or 16 TSX RKY 8EX racks. For standard format modules, except power supply modules and processor
(3) Fixed I/O profile : the number of discrete I/O, analog and application-specific channels is cumulative
(4) In-rack discrete I/O. Discrete I/O on FIPIO bus, third party fieldbus, AS-i sensor/actuator bus are to be counted additionally.
(5) Counter, axis control, etc, channels (see section 3.5-3 : number of application-specific channels)
(6) INTERBUS-S, PROFIBUS-DP.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/10
TSX 57/PMX 57/PCX57 processors 3
A
3.3-3 Physical description
1 BAT, RUN, TER, I/O and
FIP indicator lamps (the
FIP lamp is only present on the TPCX
57 3512 model).
2 Slot for a type 1
PCMCIA format memory extension card.
3 Micro-switches for coding the position of the module on the rack.
4 Micro-switches for coding the rack address on Bus X.
3
4
5
6
5 Slot for a type 3 PCMCIA format memory extension card.
6 9-pin female SUB D connector for remote connection of Bus X to an extendable rack.
10
7 Terminal port (TER connector) : enables a peripheral device (with or without its own power supply) to be connected : programming or adjustment terminal, man-machine interface terminal, printer, etc.
8 Pencil-point RESET button which causes the PLC to perform a cold start when pressed.
9 ERR indicator lamp.
10 9-pin male SUB D connector for connection to the FIPIO master bus. This connector is only present on the PCX P57 3512 processor.
11
12
13
14
7
8
9
1
2
11 16-bit ISA connector for connection to the host PC.
12 Micro-switches for coding the address of the PCX 57 processor on the ISA bus (I/O space).
13 Coding devices for selecting the interrupt (IRQ ii), used by the processor on the ISA bus.
14 Slot which takes a battery for backing up the processor internal RAM memory.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/11
A
3.3-4 Mounting / installation
• Mounting (see section 6.5)
Precautions to be taken when replacing a processor
!
If a PCX 57 processor is being replaced by another processor which has already been programmed and contains an application, the power must be cut to all the PLC station control devices.
Before restoring the power to the control devices, check that the processor actually contains the required application.
• Physical installation in the PC
The PCX 57 processor mechanically occupies two consecutive slots 1 and 2 on the
ISA bus but electrically only uses one
1
. The second slot
2
is used by the mechanical part of the PCMCIA communication card.
The size and dimensions of the PCX 57 processor card are given in section 6 in this part.
Note : It is possible to install 2
PCX 57 processors in one PC.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/12
TSX 57/PMX 57/PCX57 processors 3
A
• Logical installation on Bus X
The PCX 57 processor logically occupies the same slot as a TSX/PMX 57 processor
(rack address 0, position 00 or 01).
The TSX RKY ii EX rack at address 0 must receive a power supply module and the position normally occupied by a TSX 57 or PMX 57 processor will be empty (virtual slot of PCX 57 processor). For Premium PLCs with two types of power supply
(standard format or double format), the empty position at rack address 0 will depend on the type of power supply used.
Note : The racks can be addressed in any order on Bus X.
Using a standard format power supply module :
Rack address : 0
Position address : 00
TSX RKY ii EX rack at address x
PS 00 01 02 03 04 05 06
Special feature of rack at address 0 :
- The power supply module always occupies position PS.
- Position 00, virtual slot for the processor, must be empty.
- The other modules should be installed from position 01 onwards.
TSX RKY ii EX rack at address y
PS 00 01 02 03 04 05 06
TSX RKY ii EX rack at address 0
PS 00 01 02 03 04 05 06
___________________________________________________________________________
3/13
A
Using a double format power supply module :
TSX RKY ii EX rack at address x
Rack address : 0
Position address : 01
PS 00 01 02 03 04 05 06
Special feature of rack at address 0 :
- The power supply module always occupies positions PS and 00.
- Position 01, the virtual slot for the processor, must be empty.
- The other modules should be installed from position 02 onwards.
TSX RKY ii EX rack at address 0
PS 00 01 02 03 04 05 06
TSX RKY ii EX rack at address y
PS 00 01 02 03 04 05 06
!
The slot corresponding to the address of the PCX 57 processor (physically free on the rack) should not be used by another module.
!
For the PCX 57 processor to read its address on Bus X, the Bus X address must be configured using the micro-switches on the processor card.
(See section 6.5-4 : preliminary operations before installing the processor in the PC).
3.3-5 Display
Six indicator lamps (BAT, RUN, TER, I/O, FIP and ERR) on the processor card enable rapid diagnostics of the PLC status.
Because of the lack of space available on the front cover, only the ERR indicator lamp is visible when the PC receiving the processor is closed. In order to assist the user, the state of the RUN, I/O and ERR and FIP indicator lamps is displayed via a utility in the
Windows 95 or Windows NT system taskbar on the PC in which the processor card is installed. This function is only available when the host PC is operational (ISAWAY driver installed).
___________________________________________________________________________
3/14
TSX 57/PMX 57/PCX57 processors 3
A
ERR
BAT indicator lamp (red) : this indicates the state of the backup battery for the processor internal RAM memory.
• on if battery missing, run down, wrong way round, or incompatible type
• off during normal operation,
RUN indicator lamp (green) : shows the application status
• On : PLC running normally, program execution,
• Flashing : PLC stopped or affected by software blocking fault,
• Off : the PLC is not configured : application missing, invalid or incompatible.
PLC in error mode : processor or system fault.
TER indicator lamp (yellow) : signals activity on the TER terminal port
• Flashing : link active. The frequency of flashing depends on the amount of traffic
• Off : link inactive
I/O indicator lamp (red) : signals configuration faults and faults arising from other station modules :
• On : I/O fault originating from another module or channel, or a configuration fault
• Flashing : Bus X fault (1),
• Off : normal status, no internal fault.
FIP indicator lamp (yellow), only on TPCX 57 3512 processors : this indicates activity on the FIPIO bus
• Flashing : link active. The frequency of flashing depends on the amount of traffic
• Off : link inactive
ERR indicator lamp (red) : signals faults relating to the processor and its ancillary equipment (memory card and PCMCIA communication card)
• On : PLC in error mode : processor or system fault,
• Flashing :
- PLC not configured (application missing, invalid or incompatible).
- PLC affected by software blocking fault,
- memory card battery fault
- Bus X fault (1)
• Off : normal status, no internal fault.
(1) A Bus X fault is indicated by the ERR and I/O indicator lamps flashing simultaneously.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/15
A
3.4
Auxiliary functions common to all processors
3.4-1 Terminal port
• On TSX 57 and PMX 57 processors
Each processor has a terminal port (non-isolated RS 485 link), with two 8-pin mini-
DIN connectors, used to physically connect two devices on the processor front panel :
- TER connector :
This is used to connect an FTX type or PC compatible terminal, or to connect the PLC to the UNI-TELWAY bus by means of the TSX P ACC 01 isolator box. This port enables power of 5V to be supplied to the connected accessory (within the limits of the current available from the power supply unit).
- AUX connector :
This is used to connect a peripheral device with its own power supply, (terminal, man-machine interface terminal or printer) (no voltage supplied to this connector).
The default communication mode for the TER and AUX connectors is UNI-TELWAY master at 19200 bauds and, by configuration, UNI-TELWAY slave mode or ASCII character mode.
• On PCX 57 processors
Each processor has a terminal port (non-isolated RS
485 link), with two 8-pin mini-DIN connectors, used to physically connect a device to the processor :
- TER connector :
This is used to connect an FTX type or PC compatible terminal, or to connect the PLC to the UNI-TELWAY bus by means of the TSX P ACC 01 isolator box. This port enables power of 5V to be supplied to the connected accessory (within the limits of the current available from the PC power supply).
The default communication mode for the terminal port is UNI-TELWAY master at
19200 bauds and, by configuration, UNI-TELWAY slave mode or ASCII character mode.
Note :
The various connection possibilities and the different operating modes for these terminal ports are explained in the "Communication, Bus and Network Interfaces Installation Manual - Volume 3".
___________________________________________________________________________
3/16
TSX 57/PMX 57/PCX57 processors 3
A
3.4-2 Slot for PCMCIA communication card
Each processor has a slot for inserting a type 3 PCMCIA format communication card.
This slot can take any card which conforms to the internal interface standard.
Processors :
TSX P57
TPMX P57 !
Do not insert or remove a communication card when the processor is powered up.
Note :Further information on how to install the various communication cards is provided in the "Communication, Bus and Network
Interfaces Installation Manual - Volume 3"
Processor :
PCX 57
The various types of communication card, which can be integrated in the following processors :
• TSX SCP111 : multiprotocol card (UNI-TELWAY,
Modbus/Jbus, character mode), RS 232 D, 9 signals, non-isolated,
• TSX SCP112 : multiprotocol card (UNI-TELWAY,
Modbus/Jbus, character mode), current loop (20mA
CL),
• TSX SCP114 : multiprotocol card (UNI-TELWAY,
Modbus/Jbus, character mode), RS 485, compatible with isolated RS 422, Type 3 PCMCIA c o m m u n i c a t i o n cards
• TSX FPP 10 : FIPIO Agent bus card,
• TSX FPP 20 : FIPWAY network card,
• TSX MBP 100 : Modbus+ network card,
• TSX MDM 10 : Modem cards.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/17
A
3.4-3 Memories
• Internal RAM memory
Each processor has an internal RAM memory. This memory can receive the whole application. If this is too large, the memory can be extended by a PCMCIA memory card.
Processors
TSX P 57 102 - TPCX 57 1012
TSX P57 202 - T PMX P57 102/202
TSX P57 252/302
TSX P57 352 - T PMX P57 352 - TPCX 57 3512
TSX P57 402
Internal RAM memory capacity
32 K16
48 K16
64 K16
80 K16
96 K16
TSX P57 452 - TPMX P57 452 96/112 K16(1)
(1) When the application is stored in the internal RAM, memory capacity is limited to 96 K16 .
When the application is in the PCMCIA card, the internal memory capacity is 112 K16.
Note : Organization of the application memory (internal RAM + PCMCIA memory card) is described in this part - section 8.4.
Internal RAM memory backup :
- On TSX 57 and PMX 57 processors
The processor internal RAM memory can be protected by an optional battery located in the power supply module. This protection is obviously only effective if the power supply and processor modules are in place on the rack.
- On PCX 57 processors
The processor internal RAM memory can be protected by an optional battery located on the processor card.
Backup period
The backup period depends on two factors :
- the percentage of time for which the PLC is powered down and thus the time for which the battery is used,
- the ambient temperature when the PLC is powered down
Ambient temperature when powered down
≤
30°C 40°C 50°C 60°C
Backup period
PLC powered down 12 hours/day
PLC powered down 1 hour/day
5 years 3 years 2 years 1 year
5 years 5 years 4.5 years 4 years
The processors have their own local backup facility which is effective when removing :
- the battery from the TSX PSY power supply (backup on TSX/PMX 57 processors),
- the battery from the PCX 57 processor card.
The backup period depends on the ambient temperature. If the processor was previously powered up, the guaranteed time varies as follows :
Ambient temperature during power down 20°C 30°C 40°C 50°C
Backup period 2 h 45 min 20 min 8 min
___________________________________________________________________________
3/18
TSX 57/PMX 57/PCX57 processors 3
A
• PCMCIA memory extension card on TSX 57 / PMX 57 processor
The slot located on the processor front panel, protected by a cover, can be used to insert an optional type 1
PCMCIA format memory card. This card can be used to extend the processor internal memory in order to store the application program and the constants.
Note : before inserting a PCMCIA memory card, the protective cover must first be removed.
Handling PCMCIA memory cards with the power on
A PCMCIA memory card can be inserted or removed with the power on. To become operational, the memory card handle must be fitted; if this is missing, the processor will not start (processor faulty, ERR indicator lamp on).
When a memory card complete with handle is inserted, this causes the processor to cold-start.
!
If the program contained in the PCMCIA memory card has the RUN AUTO option, the processor automatically starts in RUN once the card has been inserted.
Handle
PCMCIA memory card
• PCMCIA memory extension card on PCX 57 processor
PCX 57 processors have a slot which can take a type 1 PCMCIA format memory extension communication card.
PCMCIA memory card
!
The memory cards inserted in a
PCX 57 processor do not have a handle, thus they must be inserted or removed with the PC powered down.
PCMCIA memory cards do not have a location coding device, so should be inserted in the direction shown in the diagram opposite.
PCX 57 processor
!
If the program contained in the PCMCIA memory card has the RUN AUTO option, the processor automatically starts in RUN once the card has been inserted and the PC started.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/19
A
Three types of memory card are available :
• Standard memory cards :
- protected RAM type memory extension card : used predominantly during creation and debugging of the application program, this can be used for all online functions for transferring and modifying the application.
The memory is protected by a removable battery integrated in the memory card.
- Flash Eprom type memory extension card : used once the application program has been debugged, this can only be used to perform a global transfer of the application and to overcome the problems of battery backup.
• BACKUP type memory card :
Already loaded with the application program, this can be used to reload the application program into the processor internal RAM memory without needing to use a programming terminal.
This card cannot be used unless the application is only in the processor internal
RAM memory and the total size (program + constants) is less than 32 Kwords.
References of standard and Backup type memory extension cards
References
TSX MRP 032P
TSX MRP 064P
TSX MRP 0128P
TSX MRP 0256P
Type/Capacity
RAM/32 K16
RAM/64 K16
Processor compatibility
TSX P57 102 TSX P57 2 i 2 TSX P57 3 i 2
TPMX P57 102 TPMX P57 202 TSX P57 4 i 2
TPCX 57 1012 TPMX P57 352
TPMX P57 452
TPCX 57 3512
Yes Yes Yes
RAM/128 K16
RAM/256 K16
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
TSX MFP 032P
TSX MFP 064P
Flash Eprom/32 K16
Flash Eprom/64 K16
Yes
Yes
TSX MFP 0128P Flash Eprom/128 K16 No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
TSX MFP BAK032P BACKUP/32 K16 Yes Yes Yes
Note:
• Memory capacity : K16 = Kwords (word of 16 bits)
• Organization of the application memory (internal RAM + PCMCIA memory card) is described in this part - section 8.4
___________________________________________________________________________
3/20
TSX 57/PMX 57/PCX57 processors 3
A
• Application + files memory cards
In addition to the traditional application storage zone, these memory cards have :
- for all cards, a file area for archiving data by program.
Application examples :
- automatic storage of application data and remote viewing via modem link
- storage of manufacturing recipes
- etc
- for some cards, an area for archiving the client application symbol database. This symbol database is compressed to that it does not cause any space problems in the zone allocated to it (128 K16).
There are two types of memory card :
- application + files protected RAM type memory extension card . The memory is protected by a removable battery integrated in the memory card.
- application + files Flash Eprom memory extension card . In this case, the data storage area is protected RAM, which means that this type of card must have a backup battery.
References of application + files memory extension cards
References area
Type/Capacity
Application File area
(type
RAM)
TSX MRP 232P RAM/32 K16 128 K16 –
TSX MRP 264P RAM/64 K16 128 K16 –
Compatibility with processors
Symb. TSXP57102 TSXP572 i 2 TSXP573 i 2 area
(RAM type)
TPMXP57102 TPMX
TPCX571012 P57202
TSXP574 i 2
TPMXP57452
TPCX573512
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
TSX MRP 2128P RAM/128 K16 128 K16 128 No
K16
TSX MRP 3256P RAM/256 K16 640 K16 128 No
(5x128K16) K16
TSX MFP 232P Flash Eprom/ 128 K16 –
32 K16
Yes
TSX MFP 264P Flash Eprom/ 128 K16 –
64 K16
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
___________________________________________________________________________
3/21
A
3.4-4 Processor RESET pushbutton
Using a pencil to push this button on the processor front panel causes the application to cold-start :
• Processor in normal operation : cold start in STOP or in RUN, according to procedure defined at the time of configuration,
• Processor faulty : forced start in STOP.
Note :
The operating modes which are effective after a cold start are described in this part - section 9
!
On PCX 57 processors the RESET button should be pressed with an insulated object.
TSX / PMX processors
PCX processors
___________________________________________________________________________
3/22
TSX 57/PMX 57/PCX57 processors 3
A
3.4-5 Realtime clock
Each processor has a battery-backed realtime clock which manages :
• the current date and time,
• the date and time of the last application stop
The date and time are still managed when the processor is powered down (see the backup period, section 3.4-3) provided that :
• The TSX/PMX 57 processor is mounted on the rack with its power supply module in place, and fitted with a backup battery,
• The PCX 57 processor is fitted with a backup battery.
• Current date and time
The processor updates the current date and time in system words %SW49 to %SW53.
This data is encoded in BCD format.
System words
%SW49
%SW50
%SW51
%SW52
%SW53
High order byte
00
Seconds (0 to 59)
Hours (0 to 23)
Month (1 to 12)
Century (0 to 99)
Low order byte
Days of the week (1 to 7)
00
Minutes (0 to 59)
Days of the month (1 to 31)
Year (0 to 99)
• Access to the date and time :
- via the processor debug screen,
- via the program :
reads : system words %SW49 to %SW53 if system bit %S50 = 0
immediate updating : writes system words %SW49 to %SW53 if system bit
%S50 = 1
incremental updating : system word %SW59 is used to set the date and time field by field starting from the current value if system bit %S59 = 1 bit 0 = 1 increments the day of the week bit 1 = 1 increments the seconds bit 2 = 1 increments the minutes bit 3 = 1 increments the hours bit 4 = 1 increments the days bit 5 = 1 increments the months bit 6 = 1 increments the years bit 7 = 1 increments the centuries bit 8 = 1 decrements the day of the week bit 9 = 1 decrements the seconds bit 10 = 1 decrements the minutes bit 11 = 1 decrements the hours bit 12 = 1 decrements the days bit 13 = 1 decrements the months bit 14 = 1 decrements the years bit 15 = 1 decrements the centuries
Note : the processor does not manage the changeover from winter to summer time automatically.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/23
A
• Date and time of the last application stop
The date and time of the last application stop are stored in BCD format in system words
%SW54 to %SW58.
System words
%SW54
%SW55
%SW56
%SW57
%SW58
High order byte
Seconds (0 to 59)
Hours (0 to 23)
Month (1 to 12)
Century (0 to 99)
Day of the week (1 to 7)
Low order byte
00
Minutes (0 to 59)
Days of the month (1 to 31)
Year (0 to 99)
Cause of the last application stop
- access to the date and time of the last application stop :
By reading system words %SW54 to %SW58
- cause of the last application stop :
By reading the low order byte of system word %SW58 (value stored in BCD format)
%SW58 = 1 application changes to STOP mode,
%SW58 = 2 stops the application after a software fault,
%SW58 = 4 power break or the power supply RESET button pressed
%SW58 = 5 stop due to hardware fault
%SW58 = 6 application stop after HALT instruction
___________________________________________________________________________
3/24
TSX 57/PMX 57/PCX57 processors 3
A
3.5
Characteristics
3.5-1 General characteristics
TSX 57 processors
Maximum Max. no. of TSX RKY12EX racks
TSX P v
configurationMax. no. of TSX RKY 4EX/4EX/8EX racks
Max. no. of slots (1)
Functions I/O profile (2)
Maximum In-rack discrete I/O number In-rack analog I/O of channels Application-specific (3)
Maximum Integrated UNI-TELWAY number (terminal port) of Network (ETHWAY, connections FIPWAY, Modbus +)
FIPIO master (integrated)
Third party fieldbus
AS-i fieldbus
Memory structure
Realtime clock can be backed up
Internal protected RAM
PCMCIA memory card (maximum capacity)
Max. memory size
Application Master task
Fast task
Event processing (1 event has priority)
Application Internal 100% Boolean code RAM 65% Boolean+35% numerical execution time for 1K instructions
System overhead
PCMCIA 100% Boolean card 65% Boolean+35% numerical
MAST no FIPIO bus used task FIPIO bus used
FAST task
-
57 102 57 202 57 252
2
4
21/27 87/111 87/111 fixed fixed fixed
512 1024 1024
24
8
1
1
-
2
1
32
-
8
16
80
24
1
1
1
4
8
16
80
24
1
1
Yes Yes Yes
32K16 48K16 64K16
64K16 128K16 128K16
96K16 176K16 192K16
1 1 1
1
64
1
1
4
1
64
0.72 ms 0.31 ms 0.31ms
1.39 ms 0.78 ms 0.78 ms
0.72 ms 0.47 ms 0.47 ms
1.39 ms 0.98 ms 0.98 ms
2.9 ms 2 ms
– –
2 ms
3.8 ms
0.8 ms 0.6 ms 0.6 ms
(1) 21 or 87 slots with 2 or 8 TSX RKY 12EX, 27 and 111 slots with 4 or 16 TSX RKT 8EX. For standard format modules, except power supply modules and processor.
(2) Fixed I/O profile : the number of discrete I/O, analog and application-specific channels is cumulative.
3/25
A
General characteristics (continued)
TSX 57 processors TSX P v
57 302 57 352 57 402 57 452
Maximum No. of TSX RKY 12EX racks config.
No. of TSX RKY 4EX/4EX/8EX racks 16
8
16
8
16
8
16
8
Max. no. of slots (1) 87/111 87/111 87/111 87/111
Functions I/O profile (2)
Maximum In-rack discrete I/O fixed
1024 number In-rack analog I/O of channels Application-specific (3)
Maximum Integrated UNI-TELWAY number (terminal port) of Network (ETHWAY, connections FIPWAY, Modbus +)
FIPIO master (integrated) -
1
3
128
32 fixed
1024
128
32
1
3
1
2
flexible
2040
255
48
1
4
2 flexible
2040max
255 max
48 max
1
4
1
2
Memory
Third party fieldbus (4)
AS-i fieldbus
Realtime clock can be backed up
Internal protected RAM
PCMCIA mem. card (max. capacity)(K16)
2
8
Yes
(K16) 64
256
8
Yes
80
256
8
Yes
8
Yes
96 96/112 (5)
256 256
Max. memory size
Application Master task
(K16) 320
1
336
1
352
1
368
1 structure Fast task 1
Event processing (1 event has priority) 64
Application Internal 100% Boolean
1
64
1
64
1
64
0.31 ms 0.31 ms 0.31 ms 0.31 ms code execution time
RAM 65% Boolean+35% num.
0.78 ms 0.78 ms 0.5 ms 0.5 ms for 1K PCMCIA 100% Boolean instructions card 65% Boolean+35% num.
System overhead
MAST no FIPIO bus used task FIPIO bus used
FAST task
0.47 ms 0.47 ms 0.47 ms 0.47 ms
0.98 ms 0.98 ms 0.68 ms 0.68 ms
2 ms 2 ms 0.6 ms 0.6 ms
– 3.8 ms – 1.1 ms
0.6 ms 0.6 ms 0.2 ms 0.2 ms
(1) 87 slots with 8 TSX RKY 12EX racks, 111 slots with 16 TSX RKY 8EX racks. For standard format modules, except power supply modules and processor.
(2) Fixed I/O profile : the number of discrete I/O, analog and app.-specific channels is cumulative.
Flexible I/O profile : the number of discrete I/O, analog and application-specific channels is not cumulative, distribution is defined by a formula (see section 3.5-4).
(3) Counter, axis control, etc, channels (see section 3.5-3 : number of app-specific channels).
3/26
TSX 57/PMX 57/PCX57 processors 3
A
General characteristics (continued)
PMX 57 processors
Maximum No. of TSX RKY 12EX racks
TPMX P v 57 102 57 202 57 352 57 452
2 8 8 8
configuration No. of TSX RKY 4EX/6EX/8EX racks
Max. no. of slots (1)
Functions I/O profile (2)
Maximum In-rack discrete I/O number In-rack analog I/O of channels Application-specific (3)
No. of control loops managed
Maximum Integrated UNI-TELWAY number (terminal port) of Network (ETHWAY, connections FIPWAY, Modbus +)
4
21/27 87/111 87/111 87/111 fixed fixed fixed flexible
512 1024 1024 2040max
24
8
10
1
1
16
80
24
10
1
1
16
128
32
10
1
3
16
255 max
48 max
10
1
4
FIPIO master (integrated) -
Third party fieldbus (4) -
AS-i fieldbus 2
1
1
4
-
2
8
1
2
8
Memory
Realtime clock can be backed up
Internal protected RAM
Yes
(K16) 48
PCMCIA mem. card (max. capacity)(K16) 64
Max. memory size (K16) 112
Yes
48
128
176
1
Yes Yes
80 96/112 (5)
256
336
1
256
368
1 Application Master task structure Fast task
1
1
Event processing (1 event has priority) 32
1
64
1
64
1
64
Application Internal 100% Boolean code RAM
0.31 ms 0.31 ms 0.31 ms 0.31 ms
65% Boolean+35% numerical 0.78 ms 0.78 ms 0.5 ms 0.5 ms
execution time PCMCIA 100% Boolean 0.47 ms 0.47 ms 0.47 ms 0.47 ms for 1K instr.
card
Processing
65% Boolean+35% numerical 0.98 ms 0.68 ms 0.68 ms 0.68 ms
Process loop (ms) 4 to 9.5
0.4 to 1 0.4 to 1 0.4 to 1 time
System overhead
Cascaded loop
MAST task no FIPIO bus used
FIPIO bus used
FAST task
(ms) 8 to 16
2 ms
–
0.6 ms
0.8 to 1.6 0.8 to 1.6 0.8 to 16
0.6 ms
1.1 ms
0.2 ms
0.6 ms
–
0.2 ms
0.6 ms
1.1 ms
0.2 ms
(1) 21 or 87 slots with 2 or 8 TSX RKY 12EX racks, 27 or 111 slots with 4 or 16 TSX RKY 8EX racks.
For standard format modules, except power supply modules and processor.
(2), (3), (4), (5) : See definition on previous page.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/27
A
General characteristics (continued)
PCX 57 processors TPCX v
Maximum Max. no. of TSX RKY ii EX racks
configurationNo. of TSX RKY 4 EX/6EX/8EX racks
Max. no. of slots (1)
Functions I/O profile (2)
Maximum In-rack discrete I/O number In-rack analog I/O of channels Application-specific (3)
Maximum Integrated UNI-TELWAY number (terminal port) of Network (ETHWAY, connections FIPWAY, Modbus +)
FIPIO master (integrated)
Third party fieldbus (4)
AS-i fieldbus
Memory structure
Realtime clock can be backed up
Internal protected RAM
PCMCIA memory card (maximum capacity)
Max. memory size
Application Master task
Fast task
Event processing (1 event has priority)
Application Internal 100% Boolean code RAM 65% Boolean+35% numerical
execution time PCMCIA 100% Boolean for 1K inst.
System overhead card
MAST task
65% Boolean+35% numerical no FIPIO bus used
FIPIO bus used
FAST task
1
-
-
2
Yes
32K16
64K16
96K16
1
1
32
0.72 ms
1.39 ms
0.72 ms
1.39 ms
2.9 ms
–
0.8 ms
8
1
57 1012
2
4
21/27 fixed
512
24
57 3512
8
16
87/111 fixed
1024
128
32
1
3
(1) 21 or 87 slots with 2 or 8 TSX RKY 12EX racks, 27 or 111 slots with 4 or 16 TSX RKY 8EX racks.
For standard format modules, except power supply modules and processor.
(2) Fixed I/O profile : the number of discrete I/O, analog and application-specific channels is cumulative.
(3) Counter, axis control, etc, channels (see section 3.5-3 : number of application-specific channels).
(4) INTERBUS-S, PROFIBUS-DP.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/28
1
2
8
Yes
80K16
256K16
336K16
1
1
64
0.31 ms
0.78 ms
0.47 ms
0.98 ms
2 ms
3.8 ms
0.6 ms
TSX 57/PMX 57/PCX57 processors 3
A
General characteristics (continued)
Programming software
Programming languages
PL7 Junior under Windows 95/98 or NT
Ladder language,
Grafcet language, Structured Text language, List language
3.5-2 Electrical characteristics
Since the processors can accept certain devices which do not have their own power supply, the power consumption of these devices must be taken into account when calculating the overall power consumption.
• Devices without their own power supply which can be connected to the terminal port
- Adjustment terminal : T FTX 117 ADJUST,
- TSX P ACC01 box for connection to the UNI-TELWAY bus.
• Devices without their own power supply which can be integrated in the processor :
- TSX FPP 10/20 PCMCIA communication cards
- TSX SCP 111/112/114 PCMCIA communication card
- TSX MBP 100 PCMCIA communication card
- TSX MDM 10 modem card
TSX 57 and PMX 57 processors
Consumption of TSX PSY iii power supply module at 5VDC Typical
Processors + TSX P 57 102 440 mA
PCMCIA memory card 450 mA TSX P 57 202/302
TPMX P57 102
TSX P 57 252/352 500 mA
1300 mA TSX P 57 402
TPMX P57 202
TSX P57 452
TPMX P57 352/452
1350 mA
Dissipated power Typical
Processors +
PCMCIA memory card
2.2 W
2.25 W
TSX P 57 102
TSX P 57 202/302
TPMX P57 102
TSX P 57 252/352
TSX P 57 402
TPMX P57 202
TSX P57 452
TPMX P57 352/452
2.5 W
6.5 W
6.75 W
Maximum
600 mA
650 mA
750 mA
1700 mA
1750 mA
Maximum
3 W
3.25 W
3.75W
8.5W
8.75 W
___________________________________________________________________________
3/29
A
PCX 57 processors
PCX 57 processors have their own 5 VDC power supply, generated from the 12 VDC power supply of the host PC. The 12 VDC power supply of the host PC must therefore have sufficient power to take a PCX 57 processor.
Consumption of host PC at 12 VDC
Processors +
PCMCIA memory card
TPCX 57 1012
Typical
550 mA
Maximum
800 mA
Dissipated power
Processors +
PCMCIA memory card
TPCX 57 3512
TPCX 57 1012
600 mA
Typical
6.6 W
900 mA
Maximum
9.6W
TPCX 57 3512 7.2 W 10.8 W
Limit voltage of host PC at 12 VDC
≥
11.4 V
≤
12.6 V
Devices which can be connected to or integrated in the processor
TSX PSY iii power supply module consumption at 5 VDC Typical
Devices without their own power supply T FTX 117 ADJUST 310 mA
which connect to the terminal port (TER)TSX P ACC01
PCMCIA communication cards TSX FPP 10 which can be integrated in the processor
TSX FPP 20
TSX SCP 111
150 mA
330 mA
330 mA
140 mA
TSX SCP 112
TSX SCP 114
TSX MBP 100
TSX MDM 10
120 mA
150 mA
220 mA
195 mA
Dissipated power Typical
Devices without their own power supply T FTX 117 ADJUST 1.5 W which connect to the terminal port (TER) TSX P ACC01 0.5 W
PCMCIA communication cards which can be integrated in the processor
TSX FPP 10
TSX FPP 20
TSX SCP 111
1.65 W
1.65 W
0.7 W
TSX SCP 112
TSX SCP 114
TSX MBP 100
0.6 W
0.75 W
1.1 W
Maximum
340 mA
250 mA
360 mA
360 mA
300 mA
300 mA
300 mA
-
310 mA
Maximum
1.7 W
1.25 W
1.8 W
1.8 W
1.5 W
1.5 W
1.5 W
1.55 W
3/30
TSX 57/PMX 57/PCX57 processors 3
A
3.5-3 Definition and number of application-specific channels
App.-specific function
Counting
Motion control
Module/card
TSX CTY 2A
TSX CTY 2C
TSX CTY 4A
TSX CAY 21
TSX CAY 41
TSX CAY 22
TSX CAY 42
TSX CAY 33
App.-specific channels
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Y e s
Y e s
Y e s
Y e s
Stepper motor control
Modem
TSX CFY 21
TSX CFY 11
Y e s
Weighing TSX ISP Y100 Yes
Communication Serial links TSX SCP11 iC (in the processor) No
TSX SCP11 i (in the TSX SCY 21 i )Yes
TSX JNP11 i (in the TSX SCY 21 i ) Yes
TSX SCY 21 (integrated channel) Y e s
TSX MDM10
FIPIO agent TSX FPP10 in the processor
Y e s
No
Y e s 1
2
2
0 (*)
1
1
1
1
0 (*)
FIPIO master integrated in the processor No 0 (*)
(*) Although these channels are application-specific channels, they are not to be taken into account when calculating the maximum number of application-specific channels supported by the processor.
2
4
2
4
3
No.
2
2
4
Note : only those channels configured using PL7 Junior or PL7 Pro software are counted.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/31
A
3.5-4 I/O profile
• Fixed I/O profile :
The maximum number of in-rack discrete I/O, analog I/O and application-specific channels indicated in the various characteristics tables is cumulative.
• Flexible I/O profile :
The maximum number of in-rack discrete I/O, analog I/O and application-specific channels indicated in the various characteristics tables of the TSX/PMX P57 4 i 2 processors is not cumulative.
Each channel and group of channels (discrete, analog, application-specific) occupies space in the internal RAM and the system RAM. Since the system RAM is limited to
8800 bytes, the user must calculate the system RAM usage of the various modules and application-specific channels used in his terminal so that the system RAM occupation is less than 8800 bytes.
Note : If the system RAM occupation is greater than 8800 bytes, this will lead to a NON
CONFIGURED state of the processor when the application has been loaded.
The table on the next page gives the system RAM usage level for each type of module.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/32
TSX 57/PMX 57/PCX57 processors 3
A
Type of module
8 or 16-channel discrete I/O : TSX DEY• / TSX DSY•
28-channel discrete I/O : TSX DMY•
32 & 64-channel discrete I/O (1) : TSX DEY• / TSX DSY•
Safety : TSX PAY•
Bus X rackmaster : TSX REY 200
4, 8 or 16-channel analog : TSX AEY• / TSX ASY•
1, 2 or 4-channel counter : TSX CTY•
2, 3 or 4-channel axis control : TSX CAY•
1 or 2-channel stepper motor : TSX CFY•
Weighing : TSX ISP Y100
Serial link : TSX SCP 11•
Serial link : TSX SCY 2160•
Modem : TSX MDM 10
AS-i fieldbus : TSX SAY 100
FIPIO bus agent : TSX FPP10
Third party fieldbus INTERBUS-S: TSX IBY 100
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
60
–
25
System RAM usage in bytes
Per module Per channel
40 –
120
80
40
–
–
–
–
21
85
30
30
95
25
25
–
–
–
–
Network
PROFIBUS-DP: TSX PBY 100
ETHWAY: TSX ETY 110/120/210,
Modbus +: TSX MBP 100,
25
25
–
–
–
–
FIPWAY: TSX FPP 20 – –
(1) Mixing tasks (MAST, FAST) in channel groups of a 64-channel discrete I/O module generates a system RAM memory usage equivalent to 20 additional bytes per channel group.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/33
A
___________________________________________________________________________
3/34
TSX PSY iiii
Section 4
4 TSX PSY iiii power supplies
4.1
Presentation
4.1-1 General
TSX PSY iiii power supply modules are designed to supply power to each
TSX RKY iii rack and its modules. The power supply module is selected according to the distributed supply (DC or AC) and the required power (standard format or double format version).
Moreover, each power supply module has auxiliary functions such as :
• a display block, an alarm relay,
• a slot which takes a battery for backing up the data in the processor RAM memory,
• a pencil-point type pushbutton which, when pressed, simulates a power break, causing a warm restart of the application,
• a 24 VDC sensor power supply (only on versions powered by an AC supply).
Power supply modules for AC supply
Standard format model Double format model
TSX PSY 5500
A
TSX PSY 2600
100...240 VAC
Power supply modules for DC supply
Standard format model
TSX PSY 8500
100...120 / 200...240 VAC
Double format model
TSX PSY 1610 TSX PSY 3610
24 VDC, non-isolated
TSX PSY 5520
24...48 VDC, isolated
___________________________________________________________________________
4/1
A
4.1-2 Physical description
Power supplies take the form of the following modules :
• standard format, for TSX PSY 2600 and TSX PSY 1610 modules,
• double format, for TSX PSY 5500/3610/5520/8500 modules.
1 Display block comprising :
• an OK indicator lamp (green), on if the voltages are present and correct,
• a BAT indicator lamp (red), on when the battery is defective or missing,
• a 24V indicator lamp (green), on when the sensor voltage is present. This indicator lamp is only found on TSX
PSY 2600/5500/8500 AC power supplies.
2 Pencil-point RESET button which, when pressed, causes a warm restart of the application.
3 Slot which takes a battery for backing up the processor internal RAM memory.
4 Cover which protects the module front panel.
5 Screw terminals for connection :
• to the power supply network,
• of the alarm relay contact,
- of the sensor power supply for TSX
PSY 2600/5500/8500 AC supplies.
6 Hole for a cable clamp,
7 Fuse located under the module which protects :
- the 24 VR voltage on the TSX PSY 3610
DC power supply,
• the primary voltage on the TSX PSY 1610
DC power supply.
Note : On the TSX PSY 2600/5500/
5520/8500 power supplies, the protective fuse on the primary voltage is inside the module and cannot be accessed.
8 110/220 voltage selector, present only on the TSX PSY 5500/8500 AC power supplies. When delivered, the selector is set to 220.
Standard format
Double format
___________________________________________________________________________
4/2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
7
TSX PSY iiii power supplies 4
A
4.2
Catalog
Module type Power supplies for AC supply
Input characteristics
Nominal voltages 100...240 VAC 100...120VAC / 200...240VAC
Limit values 85...264 VAC 85...140VAC / 190...264VAC
Limit frequency
Accepted duration of
AC supply micro-cuts
47...63 Hz
≤
10 ms
Apparent power
Nominal input current
50 VA
0.5A to 100V
0.3A to 240V
150 VA
1.7A to 100V / 0.5A to 240V
Output characteristics
Total useful power
Auxiliary functions
Alarm relay
26 W 50 W
Output voltages a
5V, 24VR (1), 24VC (2)
Nominal current 5V a 5 A
24VR a
0.6 A
24VC a 0.5 A
7 A
0.8 A
0.8 A yes (1 N/O volt-free contact on terminal block)
80 W
5V, 24VC (2)
15 A not supplied
1.6 A
Display
Backup battery yes, via indicator lamps on the front panel yes (status monitoring via indicator lamp on module front panel)
Conformity to standards IEC 1131-2
References TSX PSY 2600 TSX PSY 5500 TSX PSY 8500
(1) 24V a voltage for supplying power to the relays, installed on "relay output" modules.
(2) 24 V voltage for supplying power to the sensors.
___________________________________________________________________________
4/3
A
Catalog
Module type Power supplies for DC supply
Input characteristics
Nominal voltages 24 VDC non-isolated
Limit values
Accepted duration of
AC supply micro-cuts
Nominal input current
19.2 ... 30 VDC
≤
1ms
≤
1.5 A
Output characteristics
Total useful power 26 W
Output voltages a
5V, 24VR (1)
Nominal current 5V a 3 A
24VR a
0.6 A
≤
2.7A
50 W
7A
0.8 A
24...48 VDC isolated
19.2...60 VDC
≤
3 A /24V
≤
1.5A/48V
50 W
7 A
0.8 A
Auxiliary functions
Alarm relay
Display
Backup battery yes (1 N/O volt-free contact on terminal block) yes, via indicator lamps on the front panel yes (status monitoring via indicator lamp on module front panel)
Conformity to standards IEC 1131-2
References TSX PSY 1610 TSX PSY 3610 TSX PSY 5520
(1) 24V a
voltage for supplying power to the relays, installed on "relay output" modules.
___________________________________________________________________________
4/4
TSX PSY iiii power supplies 4
A
4.3
Auxiliary functions
• Alarm relay
This relay, which is included in every power supply module, has a volt-free contact which can be accessed on the module screw connection terminals.
Connection terminal block
Ral
Principle
- Alarm relay of the module located on the rack supporting the processor (rack 0)
During normal operation, with the PLC running, the alarm relay is activated and its contact is closed (state 1). If the
PLC in RUN application stops, even partially, such as when a "blocking" fault appears,
PLC in STOP or faulty the output voltages are incorrect, or the supply voltage disappears, this relay is de-energized and its associated contact opens (state 0).
Alarm relay
1
0
Alarm relay operation rack 0
Appearance of a PLC blocking fault or incorrect voltages
Note :
If using a PCX 57 type processor which can be integrated in a PC, the power supply alarm relay is not managed and thus is always open.
If this function is absolutely essential to correct operation of the installation, the power supply module alarm relay function may be replaced by using a relay output from a module on Bus X or the FIPIO bus. To do this, this output must be :
- a relay output,
- configured with a fallback to 0 (default configuration),
- initialized at state 1 before execution of the application program.
When configured in this way, the relay output will behave in the same way as the alarm relay controlled by a TSX 57 processor.
- Alarm relay of modules located on the other racks (racks 1 to 7)
Once the module is powered up and the output voltages are correct, the alarm relay is activated and its contact is closed (state 1).
If the supply voltage disappears or the output voltages are incorrect, the relay is deenergized (state 0).
These operating modes enable these contacts to be used in external failsafe safety circuits such as, for example, interlocking of preactuator power supplies, data feedback.
___________________________________________________________________________
4/5
A
• Backup battery
Each power supply module has a slot to take a battery which supplies power to the internal RAM memory located in the processors, and therefore protects the data when the PLC is powered down. This battery, supplied in the same packaging as the power supply module, should be installed by the user, taking care to respect the polarity.
Note :
If using a PCX 57 type processor which can be integrated in a PC, the backup battery is built into the processor and its characteristics are the same as those described below.
- Battery characteristics : thionyl lithium chloride battery, 3.6 V / 0.8 Ah, size 1 / 2AA.
- Replacement part reference : TSX PLP 01
- Data backup period :
The data backup period depends on two factors :
- the percentage of time for which the PLC is powered down and thus the time for which the battery is used,
- the ambient temperature when the PLC is powered down.
Ambient temperature when powered down
Backup PLC powered down 12 hours/day
≤
30°C 40°C 50°C 60°C
5 years 3 years 2 years 1 year period PLC powered down 1 hour/day 5 years 5 years 4.5 years 4 years
- Monitoring the state of the battery : When powered up, the power supply module monitors the state of the battery. In the event of a problem, the user receives a visual warning from the BAT indicator lamp (red), which comes on; if this happens, the battery must be changed immediately.
- Changing the battery : The battery can be changed with the power supply module powered up or immediately after it is powered down. In the latter instance, the user intervention time available is limited.
The backup period depends on the ambient temperature. If the processor was previously powered up, the guaranteed time varies as follows :
Ambient temperature during power-down
Backup period
20°C 30°C 40°C 50°C
2 hrs 45 min 20 min 8 min
___________________________________________________________________________
4/6
TSX PSY iiii power supplies 4
A
• Display
Every power supply module has a display block comprising :
- Three indicator lamps (OK, BAT, 24V) for TSX PSY 2600/
5500/8500 AC power supplies,
- Two indicator lamps (OK, BAT) for TSX PSY 1610/
3610 / 5520 DC power supplies,
OK indicator lamp (green) :
- on during normal operation,
- off when the output voltages are below the thresholds.
OK
BAT
24 V
BAT indicator lamp (red) :
- off during normal operation,
- on if battery missing, run down, wrong way round, or incompatible type.
24V indicator lamp (green) :
- on during normal operation,
- off if the 24V sensor voltage delivered by the power supply is no longer present.
• RESET pushbutton
Action on this pushbutton results in a sequence of service signals identical to that for :
- a power break when pressed,
- a power-up when released.
These actions (press and release) effect a warm restart of the application (see section 8.5-2 - Part A).
• Sensor power supply
TSX PSY 2600/5500/8500 AC power supplies have an integrated power supply which delivers a 24 VDC voltage to supply the sensors.
This sensor power supply is accessible on the module screw terminal block.
!
This power supply cannot be wired in parallel with an external power supply.
Note :
The "24 VDC sensor supply" output on the TSX PSY 8500 module is SELV (safety extra low voltage) type. It therefore ensures the safety of the user.
___________________________________________________________________________
4/7
A
4.4
Installation / insertion
4.4-1 Installation
• TSX PSY 2600/1610 standard format power supply modules :
These are installed in the first slot of each TSX RKY iii rack and occupy position PS.
PS 00 01 02 03 04 05 06
• TSX PSY 3610/5500/5520/8500 double format power supply modules :
These are installed in the first two slots of each TSX RKY i i i rack and occupy positions PS and 00.
PS 00 01 02 03 04 05 06
Note :
Every power supply module has a locating system which ensures that it can only be installed in the slots designated above.
Important
The TSX PSY 8500 power supply module does not supply a 24 VR voltage. Thus a rack which is fitted with this module will not be able to take some modules, such as relay output and weighing modules (see section 4.6).
4.4-2 Insertion / connections
Inserting modules : see section 6.4-1 of this part.
Connections : see section 7.2 of this part.
!
When inserting or removing a TSX PSY iiii
power supply module, the external power supplies must be powered down.
Important:
The PLC internal 0V is connected to the machine ground. The machine ground itself must be connected to the earth ground.
___________________________________________________________________________
4/8
TSX PSY iiii power supplies 4
A
4.5
Characteristics
4.5-1 Characteristics of AC power supplies
References
Primary Nominal voltages (V)
Limit voltages (V)
Nominal/limit frequencies
TSX PSY 2600 TSX PSY 5500 TSX PSY 8500 c
100…240 c
85..264
100..120/200..240
85..140/ 190..264
100..120/200..240
85..140/ 170..264
50 -60 / 47-63 Hz 50 -60 / 47-63 Hz 50 -60 / 47-63 Hz
Apparent power at
25°C
I 2 t on activation
50 VA 150 VA
0.63 A 2 s at 100 V4 A 2 s at 100 V
2.6 A 2 s at 240 V 2 A 2 s at 240 V
150 VA
Nominal current drawn : Irms
≤
0.5 A at 100 V
≤
1.7 A at 100 V
≤
1.4 A at 100 V
≤
0.3 A at 240 V
≤
0.5 A at 240 V
≤
0.5 A at 240 V
Initial power-up
I inrush
≤
37 A at 100 V
≤
38 A at 100 V
≤
75 A at 240 V
≤
38 A at 240 V
≤
≤
30 A at 100 V
60 A at 240 V
15 A 2 s at 100 V
8 A 2 s at 240 V
( 1 ) It on activation
0.034 As at 100V 0.11 As at 100V
0.067 As at 240V 0.11 As at 240V 0.15 As at 240V
Accepted duration of micro-cuts
≤
10 ms
≤
10 ms
0.15 As at 100V
≤
10 ms
Integrated phase protection by fuse inside module (cannot be accessed)
Secondary Total useful power 26 W
5VDC output Nominal voltage 5.1 V
Nominal current 5 A
Power (typical) 25 W
24VR output Nominal voltage 24 VDC
(24V relay) Nominal current 0.6 A
(3) Power (typical) 15 W
24VC output Nominal voltage 24 VDC
(24V sensor)Nominal current 0.5 A
50 W
5.1 V
7 A
35 W
24 VDC
0.8A
19 W
24 VDC
0.8 A
77/85/100 W (2)
5.1 V
15 A
75 W not supplied not supplied not supplied
24 VDC
1.6 A
Power (typical) 12 W
Outputs protected against
19 W overloads/short-circuits/overvoltages
38 W
Dissipated power 10 W
Conformity to standards
20 W
IEC 1131-2
20 W
IEC 1131-2 IEC 1131-2
Isolation Dielectric primary/secondary2000 Vrms 2000 Vrms withstand primary/ground 2000 Vrms 2000 Vrms
(50/60 Hz-1min) 24VDC output/ground –
Insulation primary/secondary
≥
100 M
Ω ≥
100 M
Ω resistance primary/ground
≥
100 M
Ω ≥
100 M
Ω
3000 Vrms
3000 Vrms
– 500 Vrms
≥
≥
100 M
100 M
Ω
Ω
(1) These values should be taken into account when starting several devices simultaneously or when calculating the size of protection devices.
(2) 77 W at 60°C, 85 W at 55°C, 100 W at 55°C if the rack is fitted with fan modules.
4/9
A
4.5-2 Characteristics of DC power supplies
• Non-isolated power supplies
References
Primary Nominal voltages
TSX PSY 1610
24 VDC
TSX PSY 3610
24 VDC
Limit voltages (including ripple)
(1)
19.2...30 VDC 19.2...30 VDC
(possible up to 34V for 1 hour in 24 hours)
Nominal input current : I rms at 24VDC
Initial power-up
I inrush
≤
1.5 A
≤
2.7 A
≤
100 A at 24 VDC
≤
150 A at 24 VDC at I 2 t on activation 12.5 A 2 s 20 A 2 s
25°C (2) It on activation
Accepted duration of
AC supply micro-cuts
Integrated protection on + input
(fuse located under the module)
Secondary Total useful power (typical)
5VDC output Nominal voltage
Nominal current
Power (typical)
24VR output (3) Nominal voltage
0.2 As
≤
1 ms
0.5 As
≤
1 ms by 5x20 fuse, time-delay, 3.5 A
30 W
5 V
3 A no
50 W
5.1 V
7 A
15 W 35 W
U supply — 0.6V
U supply — 0.6V
(24 VDC relay) Nominal current
Power (typical)
0.6 A
15 W
0.8A
19 W
Integrated protection Overloads yes on outputs against Short-circuits yes
(4)
Dissipated power
Overvoltages yes
10 W yes yes yes
15 W
Conformity to standards IEC 1131-2 IEC 1131-2
(1) When supplying power to modules with "relay outputs", the limit range is reduced to
21.6V...26.4V.
(2) These values should be taken into account when starting several devices simultaneously or when calculating the size of protection devices.
(3) 24 V a output for supplying power to the "relay output" module relays.
(4) The 24VR output voltage cannot be accessed by the user and is protected by a fuse located under the module (5x20, 4A, Medium).
___________________________________________________________________________
4/10
TSX PSY iiii power supplies 4
A
• Isolated power supply
References
Primary Nominal voltages
Limit voltages (including ripple)
Nominal input current : I rms
Initial power-up
I inrush
I 2 t on activation at
25°C
(1) It on activation
Accepted duration of AC supply micro-cuts
Integrated protection on + input
TSX PSY 5520
24...48 VDC
19.2...60 VDC
≤
3 A at 24 VDC
≤
1.5 A at 48 VDC
≤
15 A at 24 VDC
≤
15 A at 48 VDC
50 A 2 s at 24 VDC
55 A 2 s at 48 VDC
7 As at 24 VDC
6 As at 48 VDC
≤
1 ms by fuse inside the module
(cannot be accessed)
50 W Secondary Total useful power (typical)
5 VDC output Nominal voltage
Nominal current
24 VR output (2)
(24 VDC relay)
Power (typical)
Nominal voltage
Nominal current
Power (typical)
Integrated protection Overloads on outputs against Short-circuits
Overvoltages
Dissipated power
Conformity to standards
5.1 V
7 A
35 W
24 V
0.8 A
19 W yes yes yes
20 W
IEC 1131-2
Isolation Dielectric withstand
Insulation resistance primary / secondary primary / ground primary / secondary primary / ground
2000 Vrms - 50/60 Hz - 1 min
2000 Vrms - 50/60 Hz - 1 min
≥
10 M
Ω
≥
10 M
Ω
(1) These values should be taken into account when starting several devices simultaneously or when calculating the size of protection devices.
(2) 24V a output for supplying power to the "relay output" module relays.
___________________________________________________________________________
4/11
A
4.5-3 Characteristics of the alarm relay contact
Characteristics
Limit operating AC voltage
Thermal current
D C
AC load Resistive Voltage
AC12 duty Power
DC load
Inductive Voltage
AC14 and Power
AC15 duty
Resistive Voltage
Alarm relay contact
19...264 V
10...30 V (possible up to 34V for 1 hour in 24 hours)
3 A c
24 V c
48 V c
110 V c
220 V
50 VA (5) 50 VA (6) 110 VA (6) 220 VA (6)
110 VA (4) 220 VA (4) c
24 V c
48 V c
110 V c
220 V
24 VA (4) 10VA (10) 10 VA (11) 10 VA (11)
24 VA (8) 50 VA (7) 50 VA (9)
110 VA (2) 110 VA (6)
220 VA (1) a
24 V
Inductive Voltage
DC13 duty Power
(L/R = 60 ms)
Response
Min. switchable load
Activation time
Type of contact
Deactivation
Integrated Against overloads
protection and short-circuits
Against inductive overvoltages in c
40 W (3) a
24 V
10 W (8)
24 W (6)
1 mA / 5 V
< 10 ms
< 10 ms
Normally open
None, a quick-blow fuse must be fitted
Isolation
(test voltage)
(1) 0.1 x 10 6
(2) 0.15 x 10
(3) 0.3 x 10 6
Against inductive overvoltages in
Contact/ground a
Insulation resistance
operations
6 operations
operations
None, an RC circuit or MOV peak limiter (ZNO) suitable for the voltage must be fitted in parallel across the terminals of each preactuator
None, a discharge diode must be fitted across the terminals of each preactuator
2000 Vrms - 50/60 Hz - 1 min (on TSX PSY 2600/
5500/1610/3610/5520 modules).
3000Vrms - 50/60 Hz - 1 min (on TSX PSY 8500 module)
> 10 M
Ω
at 500 VDC
(5) 0.7 x 10 6 operations.
(6) 1 x 10 6 operations.
(7) 1.5 x 10 6 operations.
(9) 3 x 10 6 operations.
(10) 5 x 10 6 operations.
(11) 10 x 10 6 operations.
4/12
TSX PSY iiii power supplies 4
A
4.6 Power consumption table for selecting a power supply module
The power required to supply a rack depends on the types of module installed on it. It is therefore necessary to draw up a power consumption table in order to define which power supply module should be inserted on the rack (standard or double format module).
The tables on the following pages show the typical consumption of each module and can be used to calculate the consumption of each rack and on each output according to which modules have been installed.
Power available on each power supply module
P o w e r
(typical)
Power supply Standard f o r m a t m o d u l e s
TSX TSX TSX
Double format
TSX TSX TSX
PSY 1610 PSY 2600 PSY 3610 PSY 5520 PSY 5500 PSY 8500
Total useful power
(all outputs included) (1)
30W (30 W) 26W (30W) 50W (55W) 50W (55W)50W (55W) 77W at 60°C
85W at 55°C
100W with
TSX FAN •
Power available on 5 VDC output
Power available on 24 VR output
15 W
15 W
25 W
15 W
35 W
19 W
35 W
19 W
35 W
19 W
75 W not supplied
Power available on 24 VC output not
(sensor power supply supplied on front panel term. blk)
12 W not supplied not supplied
19 W 38 W
(1) The values in brackets are the maximum values which can be tolerated for 1 out of every 10 minutes. These values must not be included when calculating the consumption requirement.
Caution :
When defining the power requirements, the total power drawn on each output (5 VDC,
24 VR and 24 VC) must not exceed the total useful power of the module.
Important:
The TSX PSY 8500 power supply module has no 24 VR output for supplying certain modules with 24 VDC.
Thus, for all racks which have this type of power supply, the following measures should be taken :
• TSX DSY 08R• / 16R• relay output modules and the TSX ISP Y100 weighing module should not be installed on these racks.
• TSX ASY 800 analog output modules should be configured for an external power supply (3 modules maximum per rack).
___________________________________________________________________________
4/13
A
Power consumption table
Rack number :
Module type References
Processor +
PCMCIA
TSX P57 102
TSX P57 202/302 memory card TSX P57 252/352
TSX P57 402
TSX P57 452
T PMX P57 102
TPMX P57 202
TPMX P57 352
TPMX P57 452
No.
Consumption in mA (typical value) (1)
On 5 VDC On 24 VR On 24 VC (2)
Module Total Module Total Module Total
440
450
500
1300
1350
450
1300
1350
1350
Discrete inputs TSX DEY 08D2
TSX DEY 16A2
TSX DEY 16A3
TSX DEY 16A4
TSX DEY 16A5
TSX DEY 16D2
TSX DEY 16D3
TSX DEY 16FK
TSX DEY 32D2K
TSX DEY 32D3K
TSX DEY 64D2K
80
80
80
250
135
55
80
80
80
140
155
80
135
135
75
160
275
315
Total
(1) The module consumption is given for 100% of inputs or outputs at state 1.
(2) If using an external a
24 V sensor power supply, do not take the consumption on this output into account when selecting the rack power supply.
___________________________________________________________________________
4/14
TSX PSY iiii power supplies 4
A
Power consumption table (continued)
Rack number:
Module type References
Report
Discrete output TSX DSY 08R4D
TSX DSY 08R5
TSX DSY 08R5A
TSX DSY 08S5
TSX DSY 08T2
TSX DSY 08T22
TSX DSY 08T31
TSX DSY 16R5
TSX DSY 16S4
Discrete
I/O
Emergency stop safety
TSX DSY 16S5
TSX DSY 16T2
TSX DSY 16T3
TSX DSY 32T2K
TSX DSY 64T2K
TSX DMY 28FK
TSX DMY 28RFK
TSX PAY 262
TSX PAY 282
No.
Consumption in mA (typical value) (1)
On 5VDC On 24VR On 24VC (2)
Module Total Module Total Module Total
55
55
55
125
55
55
55
80
220
220
80
80
140
155
300
300
150
150
80
70
80
135
75
75
Bus X remote TSX REY 200 location
500
Total
(1) The module consumption is given for 100% of inputs or outputs at state 1.
(2) If using an external a
24 V sensor power supply, do not take the consumption on this output into account when selecting the rack power supply.
___________________________________________________________________________
4/15
A
Power consumption table (continued)
Rack number:
Module type References No.
Consumption in mA (typical value) (1)
On 5VDC On 24VR On 24VC (2)
Module Total Module Total Module Total
Report
Analog
Counter
TSX AEY 414
TSX AEY 420
TSX AEY 800
TSX AEY 810
TSX AEY 1600
TSX AEY 1614
TSX ASY 410
TSX ASY 800 (3)
TSX CTY 2A
TSX CTY 2C
TSX CTY 4A
660
500
270
475
270
300
990
200
280
850
330
300
30
15
36
Axis control
TSX CAY 21
TSX CAY 22
TSX CAY 41
TSX CAY 42
TSX CAY 33
1100
1100
1500
1500
1500
15
15
30
30
30
Stepper motor TSX CFY 11 control TSX CFY 21
Weighing TSX ISP Y100
510
650
150
50
100
145
Grand total
(1) The module consumption is given for 100% of inputs or outputs at state 1.
(2) If using an external a 24 V sensor power supply, do not take the consumption on this output into account when selecting the rack power supply .
(3) If using an external
a
24 VR power supply, do not take the 300 mA consumption on the internal
24 VR into account when selecting the rack power supply.
___________________________________________________________________________
4/16
TSX PSY iiii power supplies 4
A
Power consumption table (continued)
Rack number:
Module type References
Report
Communication TSX ETY 110 (3)
(4)
TSX ETY 120 (3)
(4)
TSX ETY 210 (3)
(4)
TSX IBY 100
TSX PBY 100
TSX SAY 100
TSX SCY 21601
TSX SCP 111
TSX SCP 112
TSX SCP 114
TSX FPP 10
TSX FPP 20
TSX JNP 112
TSX JNP 114
TSX MBP 100
TSX MDM 10
No.
Consumption in mA (typical value) (1)
On 5VDC On 24VR On 24VC (2)
Module Total Module Total Module Total
800
1200
800
1200
800
1200
500
400
110
350
140
120
150
330
330
120
150
220
195
Grand total
(1) The module consumption is given for 100% of inputs or outputs at state 1.
(2) If using an external a
24 V sensor power supply, do not take the consumption on this output into account when selecting the rack power supply .
(3) Without remote power supply (RJ45)
4/17
A
Power consumption table (continued)
Rack number :
Module type References No.
Consumption in mA (typical value) (1)
On 5V DC On 24 VR On 24 VC (2)
Module Total Module Total Module Total
Report
Other (devices TSX P ACC01 without their own power supply which
T FTX 117 can be connected on the term. port)
150
310
Grand total
(1) The module consumption is given for 100% of inputs or outputs at state 1.
(2) If using an external a
24 V sensor power supply, do not take the consumption on this output into account when selecting the rack power supply.
___________________________________________________________________________
4/18
TSX PSY iiii power supplies 4
A
Power requirement
The power requirement for a rack should be calculated on the basis of the consumption table drawn up using the tables defined on the preceding pages. The currents which apply to each output (5 VDC, 24 VR and 24 VC) are those which appear on the grand total line of the preceding table.
Rack number :
1 Power required on 5 VDC output :
2 Power required on 24 VR output :
3
4
Power required on 24 VC output :
Total power required :
.................. x10 -3 A x 5 V = ............................. W
................... x10 -3 A x 24 V = ............................. W
...................x10
-3 A x 24 V = ............................. W
= ............................. W
Caution : The power calculated should be compared to the power supplies in the table below.
• Power required on each output - power available on each output :
1 - 1a, 2 - 2a, 3 - 3a
• Sum of the power required on each output - total power available :
4 - 4a
Power available (at each output and total)
Power available
Modules
TSX PSY 1610
TSX PSY 2600
TSX PSY 3610
TSX PSY 5520
TSX PSY 5500
TSX PSY 8500
On 5 VDC output
1a
15 W
25 W
35 W
35 W
35 W
75 W
On 24 VR output
2a
15 W
15 W
19 W
19 W
19 W
—
On 24 VC output
3a
—
12 W
—
—
19 W
38 W
Total
4a
30 W
26 W
50 W
50 W
50 W
77/85/100 W (1)
(1) 77 W at 60°C, 85 W at 55°C, 100 W at 55°C if the rack is fitted with fan modules.
___________________________________________________________________________
4/19
A
4.7
Definition of protection devices at the head of the line
It is recommended that a protection device such as a circuit-breaker or a fuse be installed on the power supply at the head of the line.
The information below shows the minimum rating for the circuit-breaker and line fuse for a given power supply module.
• Selecting a line circuit-breaker
When selecting the rating for the circuit-breaker, the following three characteristics, which are given for each power supply, should be taken into account :
- nominal input current : Irms,
- inrush current : I,
- It.
The minimum rating for the circuit breaker is selected as follows :
- circuit-breaker rating IN > Irms power supply,
- I max. circuit-breaker > I inrush power supply,
T
Characteristics supplied by the circuit-breaker manufacturer
- It circuit-breaker at point A on the curve
Thermal zone
> It power supply.
Magnetic zone
A
10
0
IN IA IB I
• Selecting the line fuse
When selecting the rating for the line fuse, the following two characteristics, which are given for each power supply, should be taken into account :
- nominal input current : Irms,
- I 2 t.
The minimum rating for the fuse is selected as follows :
- fuse rating IN > 3 x Irms power supply,
- I 2 t of the fuse > 3 x I 2 t power supply
Note :
A summary of the characteristics of power supplies ( I rms, I inrush, It I 2 t) is given on the next page.
___________________________________________________________________________
4/20
TSX PSY iiii power supplies 4
A
Reminder of the Irms, I inrush, It and I 2 t characteristics of each supply module
M o d u l e s
I rms
TSX at 24 VDC
PSY 2600 PSY 5500 PSY 8500 PSY 1610 PSY 3610 PSY 5520
– – – 1.5 A 2.7 A 3 A at 48 VDC at 100 VAC at 240 VAC
–
0.5 A
0.3 A
–
1.7 A
0.5 A
–
1.4A
0.5 A
–
–
–
–
–
–
1.5 A
–
–
I
I inrush at 24 VDC
(1) at 48 VDC
I t
(1)
2 t
(1) at 100 VAC 37 A at 240 VAC 75 A at 24 VDC at 48 VDC at 100 VAC at 240 VAC at 24 VDC
–
–
–
–
–
38 A
38 A
–
–
0.034 As 0.11 As
15 A
15 A
–
–
7 As
– 6 As
–
0.067 As 0.11 As 0.15 As –
– – – 12.5 A 2 s
–
20 A 2 s
–
50 A 2 s at 48 VDC – – at 100 VAC 0.63 A 2 s 4 A 2 s at 240 VAC 2.6 A 2 s 2 A 2 s
–
–
30 A
60 A
–
–
0.15 As
–
15A 2 s
8 A 2 s
100 A
–
–
–
0.2 As
–
–
–
–
–
150 A
–
–
–
0.5 As
–
–
–
–
–
55 A 2 s
–
–
(1) Values on initial power-up and at 25°C.
___________________________________________________________________________
4/21
A
___________________________________________________________________________
4/22
5 Bus X remote rackmaster module : TSX REY 200
5.1
Presentation
5.1-1 General
Bus X for Premium PLCs is used for connecting eight 12-position racks
(TSX RKY12EX) or sixteen 4, 6 or 8-position racks (TSX RKY 4EX/6EX/8EX) distributed over a maximum length of 100 meters.
For applications which require a greater distance between racks, the Bus X distributed remote rackmaster module (TSX REY 200) can be used to significantly increase the distance while retaining all the features and performance capabilities inherent in a PLC station which consists of a single Bus X segment without a remote rackmaster module.
The system consists of :
• A Bus X remote rackmaster module (TSX REY 200) called the "Master", located on the rack at address 0 (rack containing the processor) which is on the main Bus X segment. This module has 2 channels used to locate 2 Bus X segments remotely at a maximum distance of 250 meters.
• 1 or 2 TSX REY 200 modules called "Slaves", each located on a rack on the remote bus segments.
• Each slave module is connected to the master module using a TSX CBRY 2500 /
TSX CBRY K5 kit (cable + connectors).
Topology example
Bus X main segment
TSX REY 200
Master
Bus X
≤
100 m
Bus X remote segment
Bus X
≤
100 m
TSX REY 200
Slave
Processor
TSX REY 200
Slave
Bus X
≤
100 m
Bus X remote segment
A
___________________________________________________________________________
5/1
A
5.1-2 Physical description of the module
1 Display block with 6 indicator lamps :
- RUN indicator : indicates the operating status of the module
- ERR indicator : indicates a module internal fault
- I/O indicator : indicates a fault external to the module
- MST indicator : indicates whether the module is acting as master or slave
- CH0 indicator : indicates the operating status of channel 0
- CH1 indicator : indicates the operating status of channel 1.
2 Connector for connecting channel 0 of the module
3 Connector for connecting channel 1 of the module
1
2
3
___________________________________________________________________________
5/2
Bus X remote rackmaster module : TSX REY 200 5
A
5.2
Topology of a PLC station with remote rackmaster modules
5.2-1 TSX/PMX 57 station
___________________________________________________________________________
5/3
A
5.2-2 Station PCX 57
≤ location
Bus X remote
(250 m - X1)
L = X2
Bus X
≤ location
Bus X remote
(250 m - X1)
___________________________________________________________________________
5/4
Bus X remote rackmaster module : TSX REY 200 5
A
5.3
Installing the module
5.3-1 Master module
• On a TSX/PMX 57 station
The master module must be installed :
- on the rack which contains the processor (rack at address 00). This rack is on the
Bus X main segment
- in any position on this rack other than those positions specifically for the power supply module and the processor module.
Restrictions :
- position 00 of the rack at address 0 is prohibited for any module (including the processor module). This position can only be occupied by a double format power supply module.
The diagrams below indicate the various possible situations, depending on the format of the power supply and the processor.
Rack at address 0 with single format power supply and processor :
• Power supply in position PS
• Processor must be in position 01
• Position 00 always empty
• TSX REY 200 module in one of the available positions on the rack
Rack at address 0 with double format power supply and single format processor :
• Power supply in positions PS and 00
• Processor must be in position 01
• TSX REY 200 module in one of the available positions on the rack
PS 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 PS 00 01 02 03 04 05 06
Rack at address 0 with single format power supply and double format processor :
• Power supply in position PS
• Processor must be in positions 01 and 02
• Position 00 always empty
• TSX REY 200 module in one of the available positions on the rack
Rack at address 0 with double format power supply and processor :
• Power supply in positions PS and 00
• Processor must be in positions 01 and 02
• TSX REY 200 module in one of the available positions on the rack
PS 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 PS 00 01 02 03 04 05 06
___________________________________________________________________________
5/5
A
• On PCX 57 station
In the same way as on a TSX/PMX 57 station, the master module must be installed:
- on the rack which virtually supports the processor (rack at address 0). This rack is located on the main Bus X segment
- in any position on this rack other than the position specifically for the power supply module and that occupied by the processor module.
Restrictions:
- position 00 of the rack at address 0 is prohibited for any module. Only a double format power supply can occupy this position. The virtual position of the processor
(unoccupied position) must be position 01.
The diagrams below indicate the various possible situations, depending on the format of the power supply
Rack at address 0 with single format power supply :
• Power supply in position PS
• Virtual position of the processor must be position 01 (position always empty)
• Position 00 always empty
• TSX REY 200 module in one of the available positions on the rack
PS 00 01 02 03 04 05 06
Rack at address 0 with double format power supply :
• Power supply in position PS
• Virtual position of the processor must be position 01 (position always empty)
• TSX REY 200 module in one of the available positions on the rack
PS 00 01 02 03 04 05 06
___________________________________________________________________________
5/6
Bus X remote rackmaster module : TSX REY 200 5
A
5.3-2 Slave module
The slave module is installed in one of the racks of the remote bus segment, in any position on this rack other than the position specifically for the power supply module.
Rack with single format power supply module :
• Power supply in position PS
• TSX REY 200 module in one of the available positions on the rack
Rack with double format power supply module :
• Power supply in positions PS and 00
• TSX REY 200 module in one of the available positions on the rack
PS 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 PS 00 01 02 03 04 05 06
___________________________________________________________________________
5/7
A
5.4
Configuring the module
The module is configured for the master or slave function automatically :
• if the module is installed on the rack at address 0, it will automatically be declared as the master
• if the module is installed on a rack at an address other than 0, it will automatically be declared as a slave
Note 1 :
If 2 racks are declared at address 0, the master module must be located on the rack supporting
"low" module addresses as shown in the diagram below.
"Low" module addresses :
• addresses 0 to 6 on TSX RKY8EX rack
• addresses 0 to 4 on TSX RKY6EX rack
• addresses 0 to 2 on TSX RKY4EX rack
TSX RKY 8EX
P
S
ON
OK
Example:
2 TSX RKY 8EX racks at address 0
OFF
TSX RKY 8EX
P
S
NOK
ON
OFF
Microswitch 4 located on the rack
Note 2 :
If 2 racks are declared at address 0, the rack supporting the "high" module addresses cannot take a slave remote rackmaster module.
"High" module addresses :
• addresses 8 to 14 on TSX RKY8EX rack
• addresses 8 to 12 on TSX RKY6EX rack
• addresses 8 to 10 on TSX RKY4EX rack
___________________________________________________________________________
5/8
Bus X remote rackmaster module : TSX REY 200 5
A
5.5
Maximum distances according to the type of module
The diagram below shows the maximum permitted distances for the various Bus X segments and Bus X remote locations:
• Each Bus X segment (X1, X2 or X3) : maximum length 100
• Each Bus X remote connection (XD1 or XD2) : maximum length 250 meters.
Bus X main segment (X1)
TSX REY 200
Master
Bus X
≤
100 m
Processor
XD1
Bus X remote segment (X2)
Bus X
≤
100 m
TSX REY 200
Slave
XD2
TSX REY 200
Slave
Bus X
≤
100 m
Bus X remote segment (X3)
Taking these elements into account, the maximum distance between the processor and the furthest modules can be 350 meters.
This distance of 350 meters is only possible for standard discrete I/O modules. The following pages give restrictions for each type of module.
Note:
The remote location is not permitted for TSX SCY •••/TSX ETY •••/
TSX IBY •••/TSX PBY ••• communication modules. These modules must be located on the main
X1 segment on Bus X.
___________________________________________________________________________
5/9
A
• Standard and safety discrete I/O modules
≤
350 m
≤
250 m
Standard discrete I/O modules:
TSX DEY••• / TSX
DSY••• and safety modules
TSX PAY•••
Exception:
TSX DEY 16FK module
Bus X
≤
100 m
• Mixed, analog, application-specific, bus sensor/actuator discrete I/O modules
≤
175 m
Modules:
• Mixed discrete TSX DMY ••• and standard discrete
TSX DEY 16 FK,
• Analog TSX AEY ••• / TSX ASY •••,
• Application-specific TSX ISP Y••• / TSX CTY ••• / TSX
CAY ••• / TSX CFY •••,
• Bus sensor/actuator TSX SAY 100.
Bus X
≤
100 m
≤
175 m
Note: For the following modules:
• TSX DEY 16 FK index PV
≥
06,
• TSX DMY 28FK / 28 RFK,
• TSX AEY 810 / 1614,
• TSX ASY 410 index PV
≥
11,
• TSX ASY 800,
• TSX CTY 2C,
• TSX CAY 22 / 42 / 33, the maximum distance permitted (remote cable length + Bus X cable) is 225 m
___________________________________________________________________________
5/10
Bus X remote rackmaster module : TSX REY 200 5
A
• Communication modules
!
Remote location not permitted. Modules must be located on the main Bus
X segment.
No
Modules:
• Communication TSX SCY •••
• Network TSX ETY •••
• Fieldbus TSX IBY ••• / TSX PBY •••
Remote location not permitted. Modules must be located on the main bus segment
___________________________________________________________________________
5/11
A
5.6
Connections
5.6-1 Connection accessories
The locate Bus X remotely, the following must be used:
• the TSX CBRY 2500 kit comprising one 250 m cable on a drum,
• 1 set of TSX CBRY K5 connectors.
The user must fit connectors at both ends of the cable. The procedure for fitting the connectors on the cable is described in the quick reference guide supplied with the TSX
CBRY 2500 kit.
The following items are therefore required for setting up a remote Bus X connection:
1 TSX CBRY 2500 kit comprising : one 250 meter cable on a drum
Drum
1 set of 5 TSX CBRY K5 connectors for connecting 2 remote cables, plus one as a spare.
Connectors
___________________________________________________________________________
5/12
Bus X remote rackmaster module : TSX REY 200 5
A
5.6-2 Connection principle
Bus X main segment Bus X remote segment
Channel 0
TSX REY 200
Master
Bus X remote location (XD2)
≤
250m
TSX CBRY 2500 + TSX CBRY K5
(Cable + connector)
Channel 0
TSX REY 200
Slave
Channel 1
Processor
Channel 0
TSX REY 200
Slave
Bus X remote location (XD2)
≤
250m
TSX CBRY 2500 + TSX CBRY K5
(Cable + connector)
Bus X remote segment
Note:
Each Bus X segment is installed according to the rules defined in part A - section 2.4.
Reminder
Each Bus X segment must have a line terminator A/ and /B at either end.
5.7
Module consumption
Consumption on 5 VDC power supply : 500 mA
Dissipated power : 2.5 W
___________________________________________________________________________
5/13
A
5.8
Diagnostics
5.8-1 Using indicator lamps
The display block on the front panel of the TSX REY 200 module is used for diagnosing the remote location system according to the following tables.
CH0
CH1
RUN
Mst
ERR
I / O
Module acting as master (positioned on rack at address 00)
Status of indicator lamps
ERR RUN M s t I/O CH0 CH1
Module status Comments
Fault
OK
OK
OK
Fault
No communication with the processor
Channel 0 active,
Channel 1 inactive
Channel 0 inactive,
Channel 1 active
Channel 0 active,
Channel 1 active
Channel 0 inactive,
Channel 1 inactive
Module acting as slave function (positioned on rack at address other than 00)
Status of indicator lamps
ERR RUN M s t I/O CH0 CH1
Module status Comments
Fault
OK
No communication with the processor
Channel 0 active,
Fault Channel 0 inactive,
Key : indicator lamp status
On Off Flashing Indeterminate
___________________________________________________________________________
5/14
Bus X remote rackmaster module : TSX REY 200 5
A
5.9
Managing an installation equipped with a Bus X remote rackmaster module
!
Any use of a Bus X remote rackmaster module (TSX REY 200) in an installation requires the management of the installation or machine to be subject to the presence of all the racks configured in the application.
To do this, an application program check tests whether all the racks in the application are present by testing bit %MWxy.Mod.2:X6 on at least one module in each rack (explicit exchange).
This test prevents any incorrect declaration in the addressing of the racks, and in particular if two racks accidentally have the same address.
This test is only of use if the installation is restarted (power-up, modification of the installation, processor RESET, configuration change).
___________________________________________________________________________
5/15
A
___________________________________________________________________________
5/16
6 Mounting
6.1
Rack installation rules
6.1-1 Positioning the racks
When mounting TSX RKY iii racks certain installation rules must be respected :
1 As the various modules (power supply, processors, discrete I/O, etc) are cooled by natural convection, the various racks must be installed horizontally and on a
vertical plane to assist ventilation.
Note :
If using fan modules, see section 10 of this part.
2 If several racks are installed in the same enclosure, it is recommended that the following positioning guidelines are respected :
• leave a space of at least 150 mm between two superposed racks, to allow for the cable ducts and to facilitate air circulation.
• it is advisable to install equipment which generates heat (transformers, process power supplies, power contactors, etc) above the racks.
• leave a space of at least 100 mm on each side of a rack to allow room for the cables and to facilitate air circulation.
1
100 a 100
A
2 a a
2 2
1 a
≥
50 mm
1 Equipment or enclosure.
2 Cable duct or clip.
___________________________________________________________________________
6/1
A
6.2
Rack dimensions
TSX RKY 4EX
160 mm (1)
200 mm (2)
(1) Modules with screw terminal block
(2) Maximum depth with all types of module and associated connections
187.9 mm
TSX RKY 6/6EX
261.6 mm
TSX RKY 8/8EX
335.3 mm
TSX RKY 12/12EX
482.6 mm
Note :
If using fan modules, see section 10 of this part.
___________________________________________________________________________
6/2
Mounting 6
A
6.3
Mounting/fixing racks
TSX RKY ii and TSX RKY ii EX racks can be mounted :
• on a 35 mm wide DIN rail fixed with M6x25 screws
• on a Telequick pre-slotted mounting plate or on a panel,
The installation rules described in section 6.1 should be respected, regardless of the type of mounting.
Note :
If using fan modules, see section 10 of this part.
6.3-1 Mounting on a 35 mm wide DIN rail
Fix with 4 M6x25 screws + washers and AF1-CF56 1/4 turn sliding nuts.
AF1-CF56 AM1-ED
(1) 170.4 mm
(2) 244.1 mm
(3) 317.8 mm
(4) 465.1 mm
(1) TSX RKY 4EX
(2) TSX RKY6 and TSX RKY 6EX
(3) TSX RKY8 and TSX RKY 8EX
(4) TSX RKY 12 and TSX RKY 12EX
___________________________________________________________________________
6/3
A
6.3-2 Mounting on panel or Telequick pre-slotted mounting plate
• Mounting on panel : cut-out (dimensions in mm)
4 fixing holes (1)
8.75
a b
8.75
(1) The fixing hole diameter must be large enough for M6 screws.
• Mounting on AM1-PA Telequick pre-slotted mounting plate (dimensions in mm)
Fix the rack with 4 M6x25 screws + washers and AF1-EA6 clip nuts
AF1-EA6 AM1-PA
16 8.75
a b
8.75
Racks
TSX RKY 4EX
TSX RKY 6/6EX
TSX RKY 8/8EX
TSX RKY 12/12EX a
170.4 mm
244.1 mm
317.8 mm
465.1 mm b
187.9 mm
261.6 mm
335.3 mm
482.6 mm
Thickness
16 mm
16 mm
16 mm
16 mm
• Maximum tightening torque for fixing screws : 2.0 N.m
___________________________________________________________________________
6/4
Mounting 6
A
6.4
Mounting modules and terminal blocks
Modules can be inserted and removed while powered up with the exception of the processor module and PCMCIA communication cards.
To insert/remove powered-up modules, they must be manually screwed and unscrewed to ensure that the signals on Bus X are connected/disconnected in the correct sequence. This sequence is not necessarily respected if an electric screwdriver is used.
!
Powered-up modules must be removed/installed with the terminal block or HE10 connector disconnected, having taken care to cut the sensor/preactuator power supply if it is greater than 48V.
6.4-1 Inserting a module in a rack
1 Locate the pins on the rear of the module in the centering holes at the bottom of the rack
( 1 ).
2
2 Swivel the module, bringing it into contact with the rack ( 2 ).
1
3 Fix the module firmly onto the rack by tightening the screw at the top of the module ( 3 ).
Maximum tightening torque : 2.0 N.m
3
___________________________________________________________________________
6/5
A
6.4-2 Fitting a screw terminal block on a module
The first time a screw terminal block is mounted on a module which takes this type of connection, the terminal block has to be coded with the type of module on which it is mounted. This is done by transferring 2 physical coding devices from the module onto the screw terminal block. This mechanical code prohibits any subsequent mounting of the terminal block with this code on any other type of module.
1 With the module already in place on the rack, mount the terminal block as shown opposite ( 1 ).
The code is transferred automatically during this initial operation.
2
2 Swivel the terminal block into position to plug onto the module ( 2 ).
1
3 Lock the terminal block onto the module by tightening the appropriate screw ( 3 ).
Maximum tightening torque : 2.0 N.m
3
Note :
When replacing a module in position on the rack with another module, the screw terminal block on the old module already has physical coding devices which relate to that module.
There are two possible options :
• Replace the module with a module of the same type : in order to install the coded terminal block on the new module, it will first be necessary to remove the physical coding devices on the new module before installing the terminal block,
• Replace the module with another type of module : it will first be necessary to remove the old physical coding devices on the terminal block before mounting it as described above.
___________________________________________________________________________
6/6
Mounting 6
A
6.5
Mounting a PCX 57 processor in a PC
6.5-1 The various components
On delivery, the PCX 57 processor includes several component parts :
• A processor card and a mechanical subassembly for receiving a type 3 PCMCIA communication card.
• A battery for backing up the processor RAM memory, to be inserted in the appropriate slot on the processor card (see section 6.6.2 in this part).
• a TSX TLYEX /B line terminator.
(see section 2.4-2 in this part).
• A removable cover for a PCMCIA communication card dedicated to the PCX 57 processor (see part D in the
"Communication, Bus and Network Interfaces" manual).
• Front plate equipped with a 9-pin SUB D connector for connecting a TSX CBY •• 0K Bus X extension cable and a ribbon cable for connection to the PCX 57 processor. This accessory is to be used for incorporating the PCX 57 processor inside a Bus X segment. (See the installation in the quick reference guide included with the processor).
• Daughter board which provides the interface between the above front plate and the PCX 57 processor card.
This accessory for use with the above front plate.
It is installed in the place of the line terminator A/ incorporated as standard in the processor. (See the installation in the quick reference guide included with
A
B
6/7
A
The various components (continued)
• An installable disk containing the Windows 95 version of the ISAWAY driver (see the quick reference guide included with the processor).
• An installable disk containing the Windows NT version of the ISAWAY driver (see the quick reference guide included with the processor).
• OFS data server software
• A quick reference guide for setting up the PCX 57 processor.
___________________________________________________________________________
6/8
Mounting 6
A
6.5-2 Dimensions
249
42.1
The dimensions are given in millimeters
31.5
12.5
Note : A PCX processor occupies two slots on the PC ISA bus. These slots must be consecutive and 20.32 mm apart.
6.5-3 Installation precautions
It is advisable to limit the static electricity charges, which could cause significant damage to the electronic circuits. To do this, proceed as follows :
• Hold the card by the edges, without touching the connectors or the visible circuits.
• Do not remove the card from its antistatic protective packaging until you are ready to install it in the PC.
• If possible, connect yourself to ground during these operations.
• Do not place the card on a metal surface.
• Avoid unnecessary movement as static electricity is produced by clothing, carpets and furniture.
___________________________________________________________________________
6/9
A
6.5-4 Preliminary operations before installation in the PC
Before installing the processor card in the PC, certain operations must be performed :
• Insert the battery in the appropriate slot if necessary (see section
6.6-2),
• Insert the PCMCIA memory card if necessary (see section 5.7-2),
• Configure the address of the processor on Bus X (rack address, module position).
This address should be the same as that defined in the configuration screen in PL7
Junior or PL7 Pro. The address is configured using the micro-switches on the processor card.
Rack address : the virtual slot of the processor is always at rack address
0
Processor position : the virtual position of the processor will depend on the type of power supply installed on the rack.
single format power supply : virtual position of the processor = 00 double format power supply : virtual position of the processor = 01
Default configuration :
- rack address = 0
- module position = 00
Coding of processor position, here : 00
Coding of rack address, here : 0
P C X
A D D
R A C K
A D D
___________________________________________________________________________
6/10
Mounting 6
A
Positioning the RACK ADD micro-switches according to the rack address
Rack address 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Position of the
RACK ADD microswitches
Unused addresses
Positioning the PCX ADD micro-switches according to the position of the processor on the rack
Processor position
0 0 0 1
Position of the
PCX ADD micros w i t c h e s
• Configuring the base I/O address of the processor on the ISA bus
The PCX 57 processor uses :
- eight consecutive addresses in the I/O space of the ISA bus,
- one interrupt (IRQ ii ).
Before configuring the PCX 57 processor, it is advisable to define an I/O space and an IT available in the PC using the standard utilities under Windows 95/98 or
Windows NT.
!
An incorrect configuration may cause the PC to malfunction.
When the available resources have been determined, the PCX 57 is configured as follows :
-
Configure the base address of the PCX 57 processor on the ISA bus.
This address is configured using the 6 micro-switches near the PCX 57 ISA connector. They represent from left to right address bits SA9 to SA4 (see the diagram and examples opposite).
By default, address H '220' is configured.
Note : This address should be the same as that defined in the ISAWAY driver configuration screen.
___________________________________________________________________________
6/11
A
Default value
'H220'
SA
∇ ∇ ∇ ∇ ∇ ∇
Switch 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
H'000' 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
H'110' 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
H'220' 2 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
H'330' 3 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0
4 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
5 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
6
7
8
0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0
0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0
1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0
1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0
1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
Coding example
___________________________________________________________________________
6/12
Mounting 6
A
- Next, configure the interrupt used by the processor on the ISA bus (IRQ ii )
This is configured using a jumper which must be placed according to the interrupt to be selected. The default selection is IRQ 10.
___________________________________________________________________________
6/13
A
6.5-5 Installing the processor card in the PC
!
The PC must be powered down during installation of the processor.
Procedure :
When the preliminary operations described earlier have been completed, proceed as follows :
• With the electricity supply to the PC switched off, remove the cover of the computer and locate two free consecutive ISA slots,
!
Installation restriction :
The PC must respect the following standard
P C
ISA slot 1
ISA slot 2
• Remove the covers and fixing screws already in place which correspond to the available slots,
• Install the card in the appropriate slots,
• Fix the card firmly onto the PC by replacing and tightening the fixing screws,
• Close the computer and connect all the cables and accessories which must be added with the PC powered down :
- Bus X cable and TSX TLYEX /B line terminator,
!
The processor changes to blocking fault if line terminator /B is not installed :
- on the PCX 57 processor, if this is not connected to a rack by a TSX CBY ii X Bus cable. In this case, the /B line terminator must be installed on the processor
Bus X output (see section 2.4-2),
- on the connector available on the last rack of the station if the PCX 57 processor is connected to a rack by a TSX CBY ii Bus X cable. In this case, the /B line terminator must be installed (see section 2.4-2).
This mechanism enables the user to see whether Bus X has been terminated.
- FIPIO bus cable and PCMCIA communication card if required,
• Power up the PC and start installing the software :
- ISAWAY driver corresponding to the OS installed : WINDOWS 95/98 or Windows NT,
(see the quick reference guide included with the processor),
- OFS data server if used,
(see the OFS software installation manual),
6/14
Mounting 6
A
6.5-6 Integrating a PCX 57 processor inside a Bus X segment
The PCX 57 processor is equipped as standard to be integrated at the head of the Bus
X line. It therefore has an integrated line terminator A/.
If the user wishes to integrate the processor inside a Bus X segment, two accessories which are supplied with the module are used :
• A front plate equipped with :
- a 9-pin SUB D connector for connecting a TSX CBY•
Bus X cable,
- a ribbon cable for connecting the 9-pin SUB D connector to the processor card.
• A daughter board equipped with two connectors which performs the interface function between the PCX 57 card and the 9-pin SUB D connector on the front plate described above. This daughter board is installed in the place of line terminator A/, which is fitted as standard on the PCX 57 card.
Front plate
Daughter board
Installation procedure
!
The PCX 57 processor card, and thus the PC, must be powered down when installing these accessories.
1 Remove line terminator A/ from its slot on the processor.
2 Fit the daughter board in place of line terminator A/.
___________________________________________________________________________
6/15
A
3 With the processor card installed in the PC, fit the front plate in the available slot, to the immediate left of the processor card as shown in the diagram below.
4 Connect the ribbon cable to the connector on the daughter board installed in step
2.
___________________________________________________________________________
6/16
Mounting 6
A
Example of the topology of a PCX 57 station with the processor integrated inside a Bus X segment
Rack at address 0
TSX TLY EX
A
B
TSX CBY ••0K
TSX CBY ••0K
Host PC
PCX 57
PCX 57
TSX CBY ••0K
TSX TLY EX
A
B
TSX CBY ••0K
Important
In this situation, as the PCX 57 processor is no longer integrated at the head of the line, the TSX TLY EX line terminators (A/ and /B) must be installed on each of the racks located at the end of the line.
___________________________________________________________________________
6/17
A
6.6
Fitting/removing the RAM memory backup battery
6.6-1 With a TSX 57 / PMX 57 processor
This battery, located on the TSX PSY
iiii
power supply module, backs up the processor internal RAM memory and the realtime clock in the event of a mains power supply failure. Supplied in the same packaging as the power supply module, it should be installed by the user.
Fitting the battery
1 Open the access cover located on the front panel of the power supply module,
2 Position the battery in its compartment, taking care to respect the polarity, as shown on the plate,
3 Close the access cover.
Changing the battery
The battery may be changed once a year, as a preventative measure, or when the BAT indicator lamp lights up (see section 6.6-3 : frequency of changing the battery). Follow the same procedure as for installation :
1 Open the battery access cover,
2 Take the defective battery out of its compartment,
3 Insert the new battery, taking care to respect the polarity,
4 Close and lock the access cover.
If there is a loss of power supply when changing the battery, the RAM memory is backed up by the processor which has its own local backup facility
(see section 6.6-3).
Important : So as not to forget to change the battery every year, it is advisable to note the date of the next change due where indicated inside the access cover.
Next change
LITHIUM
BATTERY
Thionyl chloride
1/2AA
___________________________________________________________________________
6/18
Mounting 6
A
6.6-2 With a PCX 57 processor
This battery, located on the TPCX P57
iiii
processor module, backs up the processor internal RAM memory and the realtime clock in the event of a mains power supply failure. Supplied in the same packaging as the processor, it should be installed by the user.
Note : With a PCX 57 processor, there is no need to put a battery in the power supply of the rack which usually receives the processor (rack at address 0).
Fitting the battery for the first time
This operation must be performed before inserting the card in the PC.
1 Remove the cover 1 by squeezing the sides,
2 Position the battery
2 in its compartment, taking care to respect the polarity, as shown on the plate,
3 Replace the cover
1 which holds the battery in its slot.
–
–
Changing the battery
The battery may be changed once a year, as a preventative measure, or when the BAT indicator lamp lights up (see section 6.6-3 : frequency of changing the battery).
However, since this indicator lamp is not visible when the PC is closed, system bit %S68 can be used by the application program to create an alarm to indicate that the battery needs changing.
Procedure
1 Switch the PC off,
2 Disconnect the cables connected to the processor,
3 Open the PC,
4 Remove the card from its slot,
5 Remove the cover
1
,
6 Remove the defective battery from its slot,
7 Insert the new battery, taking care to respect the polarity,
8 Replace the cover 1 ,
9 Replace the card in its slot, close the PC, connect the external elements and switch on.
!
The operation to change the battery should not exceed a certain length of time
when the PC is switched off as the data in the RAM memory may be lost (see section 6.6-3).
___________________________________________________________________________
6/19
A
6.6-3 Frequency of changing the battery
Battery backup period
The time for which the battery provides its backup function for the processor internal
RAM memory and the realtime clock depends on two factors :
- the percentage of time for which the PLC is powered down and thus the time for which the battery is used,
- the ambient temperature when the PLC is powered down.
Ambient temperature when powered down
Backup period
PLC powered down 12 hours/day
PLC powered down 1 hour/day
≤
30°C 40°C 50°C 60°C
5 years 3 years 2 years 1 year
5 years 5 years 4.5 years 4 years
Processor backup facility
The processors have their own local backup facility for the processor internal RAM memory and the realtime clock which is effective when removing :
- the battery, the power supply or the TSX/PMX 57 processor,
- the battery from the PCX 57 processor.
The backup period depends on the ambient temperature. If the processor was previously powered up, the guaranteed time varies as follows :
Ambient temperature during power-down
Backup period
20°C
2 hrs
30°C 40°C 50°C
45 min 20 min 8 min
___________________________________________________________________________
6/20
Mounting 6
A
6.7
Inserting/removing the PCMCIA memory extension card
6.7-1 On a TSX 57 / PMX 57 processor
A handle is required to insert the memory card in its slot.
Fitting the handle onto the card
1 Position the end of the memory card
(opposite end from the connector) at the handle opening.
The triangular-shaped markers on both the handle and the label of the card should be on the same side.
2 Slide the memory card into the handle until it stops. It then forms an integral part of the handle.
markers locating device with 1 ridge connector markers locating device with 2 ridges handle
Inserting the memory card
To install the memory card in the processor, proceed as follows :
1 Remove the protective cover by unlocking and then pulling it towards the front of the PLC,
2 Position the PCMCIA card with its handle into the slot which is now vacant. Slide in until the card stops, then push the handle to connect the card.
Note :
When installing the PCMCIA card in its slot, make sure that the physical locating devices are correctly positioned :
• 1 ridge towards the top,
• 2 ridges towards the bottom
Note 2 :
If the program contained in the PCMCIA memory card has the RUN AUTO option, the processor automatically starts in RUN once the card has been inserted.
___________________________________________________________________________
6/21
A
6.7-2 On a PCX 57 processor
!
The memory extension card must be installed on the processor card with the power off and before it is inserted in the PC.
To install the memory card in the PCX 57 processor, proceed as follows :
1 Position the PCMCIA card in the appropriate slot.
2 Slide it as far as it will go into the slot.
3 Position the card in the PC with the power off.
Note :
If the program contained in the PCMCIA memory card has the RUN AUTO option, the processor automatically starts in RUN once the card has been inserted and the PC has been powered up.
___________________________________________________________________________
6/22
Mounting 6
A
6.8
Changing the battery on a RAM type PCMCIA memory card
RAM type PCMCIA memory cards (TSX MRP iiii
) must be fitted with a battery (reference
TSX BAT M01), which has to be changed at certain intervals (see the table below).
• On a TSX 57 / PMX 57 processor
1 Remove the card from its slot by pulling the handle towards the front of the PLC.
2 Separate the PCMCIA card from its handle by pulling them apart.
3 Hold the PCMCIA card so as to allow access to the battery slot at the nonconnector end of the card.
4 Unlock the battery holder, located at the non-connector end of the card. To do this, press the clip towards the bottom of the card (in the opposite direction to the writeprotect micro-switch) while pulling it back.
5 Remove the battery with holder from its slot.
5
6 Replace the defective battery with a new 3 V battery. The polarity must be respected by placing the + markers on the holder and the battery on the same side.
4
Write-protection
Clip
Slot for the battery
6
7 Put the battery with holder back in its slot and lock it in place. To do this, simply reverse the removal procedure.
Markers
8 Fix the PCMCIA card in its handle.
9 Replace the card with its handle in the PLC.
• On a PCX 57 processor
Having removed the card from its slot, follow steps 3 to 7 described above, then replace the card.
Battery service life
PCMCIA card stored in normal conditions (-20 °C to 70 °C)
12 months
PCMCIA card installed in an operating
PLC or PC (0 °C to 60 °C)
36 months
Note : During operation, when the PCMCIA card battery is faulty, the processor ERR indicator lamp flashes.
___________________________________________________________________________
6/23
A
6.9
Precautions to be taken when replacing a processor
!
If a TSX / PMX / PCX 57 processor is being replaced by another processor which has already been programmed and contains an application, the power must be cut to all the PLC station control devices.
Before restoring the power to the control devices, check that the processor actually contains the required application.
6.10 Screw tightening torques
Technical components
Fixing screws for PLCs, modules and terminals
Ground connection screws
Screws for discrete I/O module terminals
Screws for power supply terminals
Screws for SUB D connectors
Screws for various wire and cable connectors
Screws for TSX PAY/REY/SAY/••• module enclosed terminal blocks
Maximum tightening torques
2.0 N.m
0.8 N.m
0.5 N.m
___________________________________________________________________________
6/24
7 Connections
7.1
Ground connections
7.1-1 Grounding the racks
The functional grounding of racks is provided by the rear panel, which is metal. This ensures that PLCs meet environmental standards, provided that the racks are fixed to a metal support which is correctly grounded. The various racks which may constitute a TSX 57 PLC station must be fitted either on the same support or on different supports which must however be correctly interconnected.
To protect personnel, the s terminals of each rack must, without exception, be connected to the protective earth ground. To do this, use a green/yellow wire with a cross-section of at least 2.5 mm 2 and as short as possible.
A connected to earth ground green/yellow wire connected to earth ground
Important
The PLC internal 0V is connected to the machine ground. The machine ground itself must be connected to the earth ground.
Maximum tightening torque on ground connection screw : 2.0 N.m
7.1-2 Grounding the modules
The modules are grounded by metal plates located on the module rear panel. When the module is in position, these metal plates are in contact with the rack metalwork, thus providing the connection to ground.
Ground contacts
___________________________________________________________________________
7/1
A
7.2
Connection of power supplies
7.2-1 Rules for connection
The TSX PSY iiii
power supply modules on each rack have a non-removable terminal block, protected by a cover, which is used to connect the mains supply, the alarm relay, the protective ground and, for AC power supplies, the power supply for the 24 VDC sensors.
This terminal block is fitted with captive screw clamp terminals with a maximum connection capacity of 2 x 1.5 mm 2 cross-section wires with cable ends, or 1 x 2.5 mm 2 cross-section wire (maximum tightening torque on screw terminals : 0.8 N.m). The wires exit vertically downwards, and can be secured by a cable clamp.
Sensor
24V a supply
Alarm relay
110 - 220V c
supply
Protective ground
PG
24 V
0 V
L
N
Alarm relay
24V a supply (1)
Protective ground
PG
NC
NC
24 V
0 V
AC power supply
TSX PSY 2600/5500/8500
DC power supplies
TSX PSY 1610/3610/5520
!
For TSX PSY 5500/8500 power supply modules, set the voltage selector position according to the mains voltage being used
(1) 24V...48V for the TSX PSY 5520 power supply
(110 or 220VAC).
___________________________________________________________________________
7/2
Connections 7
A
Be sure to install a device for protecting and breaking the power supply upstream of the PLC station.
When choosing protection devices, the user should take account of the inrush currents defined in the table of characteristics for each power supply (see section 4.5).
Note :
Given that the TSX PSY 1610/2610/5520 DC power supplies have a very strong inrush current, it is not advisable to use them on DC supplies with return current protection (fold back).
When a power supply module is connected on a DC supply, in order to avoid line losses, it is essential to limit the length of the power supply cable :
• TSX PSY 1610 power supply module :
length limited to 30 meters each way (60 meters in total) with copper wires, cross-section 2.5mm
2
- length limited to 20 meters each way (40 meters in total) with copper wires, cross-section 1.5mm
2
• TSX PSY 3610 and TSX PSY 5520 power supply modules :
- length limited to 15 meters each way (30 meters in total) with copper wires, cross-section 2.5mm
2
- length limited to 10 meters each way (20 meters in total) with copper wires, cross-section 1.5mm
2
Warning :
Interconnection of several PLCs which are powered by a secure DC supply not connected to ground.
The 0V and the mechanical ground are connected inside PLCs, line supply wiring accessories and some operator panels.
Special connection arrangements must be made for specific applications which use a free-floating mounting. These depend on the installation method used. In this case, it is essential to use an isolated DC supply. Please contact us when defining the electrical installation.
___________________________________________________________________________
7/3
A
7.2-2 Connecting AC power supply modules
L
N
Connecting a PLC station comprising a single rack
100-240 V AC supply
Q
PE
KM
Interlocking circuit for preactuator power supply (see section 7.2-5)
Power supply for sensors relating to the rack (2)
TSX
PSY ii00
(1)
24 V
0 V
L
N
Q
KM
: general isolator,
: line contactor or circuit-breaker,
Protective fuse :
TSX PSY 2600/5500/8500 AC power supply modules are fitted as standard with a protective fuse. This fuse, wired in series with input L, is located inside the module and cannot be accessed.
(1) isolation strip for locating ground fault.
(2) available current :
- 0.6 A with TSX PSY 2600 power supply module (see characteristics section 4.5-1)
- 0.8 A with TSX PSY 5500 power supply module (see characteristics section 4.5-1)
- 1.6 A with TSX PSY 8500 power supply module (see characteristics section 4.5-1)
___________________________________________________________________________
7/4
Connections 7
A
Connecting a PLC station comprising a number of racks
100-240 V AC supply
L
N
Q
PE
KM
Interlocking circuit for preactuator power supply (see section 7.2-5)
Power supply for sensors relating to the rack (2)
TSX
PSY ii00
24 V
0 V
(1)
L
N
(1)
Interlocking circuit for preactuator power supply see section 7.2-5)
Power supply for sensors relating to the rack (2)
TSX
PSY ii00
24 V
0 V
L
N
Note :
When there are a number of PLC stations, all powered from a single supply, the connection principle is identical.
Q : general isolator,
K M : line contactor or circuit-breaker,
Protective fuse :
TSX PSY 2600/5500/8500 AC power supply modules are fitted as standard with a protective fuse. This fuse, wired in series with input L, is located inside the module and cannot be accessed.
(1) isolation strip for locating ground fault.
(2) available current :
- 0.6 A with TSX PSY 2600 power supply module, (see characteristics section 4.5-1)
- 0.8 A with TSX PSY 5500 power supply module, (see characteristics section 4.5-1)
- 1.6 A with TSX PSY 8500 power supply module (see characteristics section 4.5-1)
___________________________________________________________________________
7/5
A
7.2-3 Connecting DC power supply modules via a floating 24 VDC or 48 VDC supply
Warning :
For a free-floating mounting (not connected to ground) used in specific applications and in particular in Marine Applications, a TSX PSY 5520 (24 / 48 VDC) isolated power supply must be used.
Low voltage AC supply
Battery charger +
-
Interlocking circuit for preactuator power supply (see section 7.2-5)
Rack 0
T S X
P S Y
5520
NC
NC
24 V
0 V
Battery +
-
Isolation tester +
-
Interlocking circuit for preactuator power supply (see section 7.2-5)
Rack x
T S X
P S Y
5520
NC
NC
24 V
0 V
+24V
Floating 24 VDC supply for the sensor, actuator and discrete I/O module power supply
-0V
Notes :
• A device can be used to measure the degree of isolation of the 24 VDC (or 48VDC) continuously in relation to ground and to sound an alert if the degree of isolation is abnormally low.
• I/O modules in the Premium range are isolated.
___________________________________________________________________________
7/6
Connections 7
A
L
N
PE
7.2-4 Connecting DC power supply modules via an AC supply
• TSX PSY 1610/3610 non-isolated power supply modules
- Connecting a PLC station comprising a single rack, with AC supply referenced to ground
100-240 V AC supply
Q
(2)
Sensor/preactuator power supply
KM
(3)
—
+ 24 VDC
+
Fu1(4)
Interlocking circuit for preactuator power supply (see section 7.2-5)
TSX
PSY ii10
NC
NC
(1)
24 V
0 V
Q : general isolator,
KM : line contactor or circuit-breaker,
(1) : external shunt supplied with the power supply module
(2) : isolation strip for locating ground fault. In this instance the power supply needs to be unplugged in order to disconnect the AC supply from the ground.
(3) : it is possible to use a process power supply (to be defined according to the power required, see part E) .
(4) : protective fuse, (4 A, time-delayed) which is only necessary with a TSX PSY 3610 power supply module.
The TSX PSY 1610 power supply module is fitted as standard with a protective fuse located under the module and in series on the 24V input (3.5 A fuse, 5x20, time-delayed).
___________________________________________________________________________
7/7
A
L
N
- Connecting a PLC station comprising a number of racks, with AC supply referenced to ground
100-240 V AC supply
Q
PE
KM Interlocking circuit for preactuator power supply (see section 7.2-5)
(3)
—
+ 24 VDC
+
TSX
PSY ii10
NC
NC
Fu1(4)
(2)
24 V
0 V
(1)
Sensor/ preactuator power supply
Interlocking circuit for preactuator power supply (see section 7.2-5)
TSX
PSY ii10
NC
NC
Fu1(4)
24 V
0 V
(1)
Q : general isolator,
KM : line contactor or circuit-breaker,
(1) : external shunt supplied with the power supply module,
(2) : isolation strip for locating ground fault. In this instance the power supply needs to be unplugged in order to disconnect the AC supply from the ground.
(3) : it is possible to use a process power supply (to be defined according to the power required, see part E).
(4) : protective fuse, (4A, time-delayed) which is only necessary with a TSX PSY 3610 power supply module.
The TSX PSY 1610 power supply module is fitted as standard with a protective fuse located under the module and in series on the 24V input (3.5 A fuse, 5x20, time-delayed).
Note :
• When there are a number of PLC stations, all powered from a single supply, the connection principle is identical.
___________________________________________________________________________
7/8
Connections 7
A
L
N
• TSX PSY 5520 isolated power supply
- Connecting a PLC station comprising a single rack, with AC supply referenced to ground
100-240 V AC supply
Q
PE
(1)
Sensor/preactuator power supply
(1)
KM
(2)
— +
+ 24/48
VDC
Interlocking circuit for preactuator power supply (see section 7.2-5)
T S X
PSY ii 20
5520
NC
NC
24 V
0 V
Q : general isolator,
KM : line contactor or circuit-breaker,
Protective fuse :
The TSX PSY 5520 power supply module is fitted as standard with a protective fuse. This fuse, wired in series with the 24/48V input, is located inside the module and cannot be accessed.
(1) : isolation strip for locating ground fault.
(2) : it is possible to use a process power supply (to be defined according to the power required, see part E).
___________________________________________________________________________
7/9
A
L
N
- Connecting a PLC station comprising a number of racks, with AC supply referenced to ground
100-240 V AC supply
Q
PE
KM
(2)
— +
+ 24/48
VDC
Interlocking circuit for preactuator power supply (see section 7.2-5)
T S X
PSY ii 20
5520
NC
NC
24 V
0 V
(1)
Sensor/ preactuator/ power supply
(1)
Interlocking circuit for preactuator power supply (see section 7.2-5)
T S X
PSY ii 20
5520
NC
NC
24 V
0 V
Q : general isolator,
KM : line contactor or circuit-breaker,
Protective fuse :
The TSX PSY 5520 power supply module is fitted as standard with a protective fuse located under the module and in series on the 24V input : 5 A fuse, 5x20, time-delayed,
(1) : isolation strip for locating ground fault.
(2) : it is possible to use a process power supply (to be defined according to the power required, see part E).
Note :
• Where there are a number of PLC stations, all powered from a single supply, the connection principle is identical.
___________________________________________________________________________
7/10
L
Connections 7
A
7.2-5 Sensor and preactuator power supply interlocking
It is advisable to interlock the various power supplies in the following sequence :
1 Power up the PLC and input (sensor) power supply via the KM contactor (see previous circuit diagrams),
2 If the PLC is running in AUTO mode, power up the output (preactuator) power supply via the KA contactor. This is interlocked with the alarm relay contact of each power supply.
In addition, safety standards require authorization to be given by an operator before restarting the installation after a stop (caused by a power failure or use of the emergency stop button). The following interlocking circuit diagrams take account of these standards.
The MANU/AUTO switch gives the option of forcing the outputs from a programming terminal, when the PLC is stopped.
Example 1 : PLC station supplied with AC
Emergency stop
Start KA
Preactuator power supply
AUTO alarm relay contact
RAL0
MANU alarm relay contact (1)
RAL0
RAL1
RAL2
KA RC
N
KA : contactor interlocked with the alarm relay of the power supply in AUTO operation.
(1) If the PLC station comprises a number of racks : connect all the power supply
"alarm relay" contacts (RAL0,
RAL1, RAL2, etc) in series.
___________________________________________________________________________
7/11
A
Example 2 : PLC station supplied with DC
+
Emergency stop
Start KA
Preactuator power supply
AUTO alarm relay contact
RAL0
MANU
Sensor power supply alarm relay contact (1)
RAL0
RAL1
RAL2
KA
—
KA : contactor interlocked with the alarm relay of the power supply in AUTO operation.
(1) If the PLC station comprises a number of racks : connect all the power supply
"alarm relay" contacts (RAL0,
RAL1, RAL2, etc) in series.
___________________________________________________________________________
7/12
8 Functions/Performance
8.1
Addressing discrete I/O channels
The addressing for all TSX/PMX/PCX 57 PLC bit and word objects is defined in the PL7 reference manual. This section only covers the addressing principle for discrete
I/O.
Channel addressing is geographical; ie. it depends on :
• the rack address,
• the physical position of the module on the rack,
• the extendable rack when 2 racks are used on the same address
Module positions (y)
0
PS 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10
TSX RKY 12EX
1
ON
PS 00 01 02 03 04 05 06
TSX RKY 8EX
PS 08 09 10 11 12 13 14
TSX RKY 8EX
A
4
ON
PS 00 01 02 03 04
TSX RKY 6EX
7
ON
PS 00 01 02
TSX RKY 4EX
OFF
PS 08 09 10 11 12
TSX RKY 6EX
OFF
PS 08 09 10
TSX RKY 4EX
ON OFF
Note : When using 2 extendable racks on the same address, the position of the modules is defined by the setting of microswitch 4 on the rack (see section 2.3-3 - part A) :
• ON : module position y (y = 00 to 06 depending on the type of rack)
8/1
A
• Rack addresses
Rack references TSX v
RKY 6 RKY 8 RKY 12 RKY4EX RKY 6EX RKY 8EX RKY 12EX
Rack address (x) 0 0 0 0 to 7 0 to 7 0 to 7 0 to 7
• Module positions using standard racks
Rack references
Module position (y)
TSX v RKY 6
00 to 04
RKY 8
00 to 06
RKY 12
00 to 10
• Module positions using extendable racks
Rack references micro
ON
TSX v
RKY 4EX RKY 6EX RKY 8EX RKY 12EX
Module position (y) 00 to 02 00 to 04 00 to 06 00 to 10 switch 4
OFF
Module position (y) 08 to 10 08 to 12 08 to 14 not usable
Note:
One rack address can contain up to 2 TSX RKY 4EX/6EX/8EX extendable racks. In this case, the position of the modules is defined by the position (ON or OFF) of microswitch 4 which is located on the rack (see section 2.3-3 : principle for addressing 2 racks at the same address).
• Channel numbers (i)
TSX DEY i
/ DSY i
/DMY i modules 64 I/O
Channel number (i) 0 to 63
32 I/O 28 I/O
0 to 31 I=0-15, O=16-27
16 I/O
0 to 15
8 I/O
0 to 7
The syntax of a discrete I/O address is as follows :
% I or Q
Symbol I = input
Q = output rack x address x = 0 to 7 module y position y = 00 to 14 Point
•
• Examples
%Q7.3 means : output 3 of the module in position 07 in rack 0.
%I102.5 means : input 5 of the module in position 02 in rack 1 channel i number i = 0 to 63
___________________________________________________________________________
8/2
Functions/Performance 8
A
8.2
Single task application structure
The application comprises only the master (MAST) task, which may be executed either cyclically or periodically, depending on the selection at the time of configuration.
8.2-1 Cyclic execution
This type of operation corresponds to the normal execution of the PLC scan (default selection). It consists of sequencing the scans of the main task (MAST), one after another.
Program processing
Program processing
I.P.
I.P.
I.P.
I.P.
%I
Scan n (time T1)
%Q %I
Scan n+1 (Time T2)
%Q
I.P. (internal processing) : the system implicitly monitors the PLC (managing the system bits and words, updating the realtime clock current values, updating the status indicator lamps, detecting changes to RUN/STOP, etc) and processing requests originating from the programming terminal or the communication system,
%I (reading the inputs) : writing the status of information on the inputs to the memory,
Program processing : execution of the application program, written by the user,
%Q (updating outputs) : assigning physical outputs of discrete, analog and applicationspecific modules according to the status calculated by the application program.
___________________________________________________________________________
8/3
A
Operating cycle
PLC running : the processor performs internal processing, reading of inputs, application program processing and updating of outputs. Reading of inputs and updating of outputs occur in parallel with the internal processing.
Reading the inputs
Internal processing
PLC stopped : the processor only performs internal processing and reading of inputs.
The output values are handled by the module according to the fallback mode configured for each channel or group of channels.
• fallback to 0 or 1: the physical outputs are forced to the fallback value (the image memory is not changed),
• maintain state : the module physical outputs are maintained at their last value.
RUN
Program processing
Updating outputs
STOP
Internal processing
Watchdog overrun
The application scan time is monitored by the PLC (watchdog) and must not exceed the value defined at the time of configuration.
In the event of an overrun, system bit %S11 is set to 1 and the application is declared to be faulty, which causes the PLC to stop immediately (the processor ERR and RUN indicator lamps flash).
Comment
To avoid tripping the watchdog when making a modification in RUN mode, it is necessary to leave approximately 50 ms time available between the maximum duration of the MAST task and duration of the watchdog.
___________________________________________________________________________
8/4
Functions/Performance 8
A
8.2-2 Periodic execution
In this operating mode, the internal processing, reading of inputs, application program processing and updating of outputs are performed periodically according to a time defined during configuration (from 1 to 255 ms) which can be adjusted by system word %SW0.
At the start of a PLC scan, a timer, initialized with the current configured value, starts to count down. The PLC scan must finish before expiry of this downcount, which at 0 starts a new scan.
Program processing
Program processing
I.P.
I.P.
I.P.
I.P.
%I %Q %I %Q
Scan n (Time T) Scan n+1 (Time T)
I.P. (internal processing) : the system implicitly monitors the PLC (managing the system bits and words, updating the realtime clock current values, updating the status indicator lamps, detecting changes to RUN/STOP, etc) and processing requests originating from the programming terminal or the communication system,
%I (reading the inputs) : writing the status of information on the inputs to the memory,
Program processing : execution of the application program, written by the user,
%Q (updating of outputs) : assigning the physical outputs of discrete, analog and application-specific modules according to the status calculated by the application program.
___________________________________________________________________________
8/5
A
Operating cycle
PLC running : the processor performs internal processing, reading of inputs, application program processing and updating of outputs. Reading of inputs and updating of outputs occur in parallel with the internal processing.
If the period is not yet over, the processor completes its operating cycle with "system" tasks or background tasks until the end of the period.
PLC stopped : the processor only performs internal processing and reading of inputs.
The output values are handled by the module according to the fallback mode configured for each channel or group of channels.
• fallback to 0 or 1: the physical outputs are forced to the fallback value (the image memory is not changed),
• maintain state : the module physical outputs are maintained at their last value.
Start of period
Reading the inputs
RUN
Program processing
Updating the outputs
Internal processing
STOP
Internal processing
Period overrun : if the operating time exceeds that assigned to the period, the
PLC indicates a period overrun by setting task system bit %S19 to 1; processing continues and is executed in its entirety (it should not exceed the watchdog time limit).
The next scan is sequenced after implicit writing of the outputs of the current scan.
End of period
Watchdog overrun
The application scan time is monitored by the PLC (watchdog) and must not exceed the value defined at the time of configuration.
In the event of an overrun, system bit %S11 is set to 1 and the application is declared to be faulty, which causes the PLC to stop immediately (the processor ERR and RUN indicator lamps flash). The duration of the watchdog must, without exception, be longer than the duration of the period.
Comment
To avoid tripping the watchdog when making a modification in RUN mode, it is necessary to leave approximately 50 ms time available between the maximum duration of the period and the duration of the watchdog.
___________________________________________________________________________
8/6
Functions/Performance 8
A
8.3
Multitask application structure
The application structure of a TSX/PMX/PCX 57 PLC can be single task or multitask.
In a single task structure, only the main MAST task is used in cyclic or periodic operation
(see previous section). In a multitask structure, 2 control tasks (MAST and FAST) and event-triggered tasks are offered and executed according to their priority. The triggering of one of these tasks (occurrence of an event or start of scan) interrupts the execution of less important tasks in progress. The interrupted task recommences when the priority task is complete. The structure of this kind of application is as follows :
• the main MAST task, low priority, is always present. It can be cyclic or periodic,
• the FAST task, medium priority, is optional. It is always periodic,
• the event-triggered tasks EVTi, highest priority, are called by the system when an event occurs. These tasks are optional and are useful for applications requiring short software response times. There can be no more than 32 on a TSX/PMX/PCX 5710 PLC and 64 on a TSX /PMX/PCX 57 20, 57 30 and 5740 PLC.
In all TSX/PMX/PCX 57 PLCs, the event-triggered task EVT0 has higher priority than the other event-triggered tasks (EVT1 to EVT63).
Master task
MAST
–
Fast task
FAST
Priority
Event-triggered task
EVTi , i • 0
Event-triggered task
EVT0
+
Example of multitask processing :
• cyclic master task (MAST),
• fast task with 20 ms period (FAST),
• event-triggered task.
Event
Fast I P Q I P Q I P Q
Key
I : reading of inputs
P : program processing
Q : updating outputs
I P Q
I P Q I P Q
Master
I P P Q I P P Q I P
System
20 ms 20 ms 20 ms 20 ms
___________________________________________________________________________
8/7
A
8.3-1 Control tasks
• MAST master task
This task has the lowest priority and controls the majority of the application program. It can be configured to execute cyclically (default mode) or periodically. With periodic execution, the period duration can be configured in the PL7 Junior program and can be adjusted by system word %SW0 (%SW0 = 0 : cyclic execution).
The MAST task is organized according to the model described in the previous section : implicit reading of inputs, execution of the application program and implicit writing of outputs.
• FAST task
This task has a higher priority than the MAST task and is periodic in order to allow the lower priority time to be executed.
The period duration can be configured in the PL7 Junior program and adjusted by system word %SW1. This can be higher than that of the MAST task in order to adapt to slow periodic processing. The program executed must nevertheless remain short in order not to penalize the main task (MAST).
Note
When the FAST task is empty (no program), it does not exist in the PLC and the system bits and words associated with it are not significant. Hence the channels associated with the task are not exchanged.
• Period overrun
With periodic execution (MAST and FAST task), if the operating time exceeds that assigned to the period, the PLC signals a period overrun by setting system bit %S19 of the task to state 1; processing continues and is executed in its entirety (it must not exceed the watchdog time limit). The next scan is sequenced after implicit writing of the outputs of the current scan.
• Watchdog overrun
With cyclic or periodic execution, the application scan time is monitored by the PLC
(watchdog) and must not exceed the value defined during configuration. In the event of an overrun, system bit %S11 is set to 1 and the application is declared to be faulty, which causes the PLC to stop immediately (the processor ERR and RUN indicator lamps flash). The duration of the watchdog must, without exception, be longer than the duration of the period.
• Assigning channels to control tasks
In addition to the application program, the tasks execute "system" functions related to managing their associated implicit I/O. Associating a channel or group of channels with a task is defined in the configuration screen of the corresponding module; the task associated by default is the MAST task.
___________________________________________________________________________
8/8
Functions/Performance 8
A
Discrete I/O module channels :
The modularity of the discrete I/O modules being 8 successive channels (channels 0 to
7, channels 8 to 15, etc), the I/O can be assigned in groups of 8 channels, to either the
MAST or FAST task. For example, it is possible to assign the channels of a 32-input module as follows :
- inputs 0 to 7 assigned to the MAST task,
- inputs 8 to 15 assigned to the FAST task,
- inputs 16 to 23 assigned to the MAST task,
- inputs 24 to 31 assigned to the FAST task.
Counter and axis control module channels :
Each channel of a counter or axis control module can be assigned to either the MAST or FAST task. For example, for a 2-channel counter module, it is possible to assign : channel 0 to the MAST task and channel 1 to the FAST task.
Analog module channels :
Each channel (TSX AEY 414 and TSX ASY 410 modules) or group of 4 channels (TSX
AEY 800 and TSX AEY 1600 modules) can be assigned to either the MAST or FAST task
(MAST task by default).
Note
In order to maximize performance, the module channels should ideally be grouped in a single task.
• Task monitoring
In RUN mode, tasks can be enabled or inhibited by writing a system bit. When a task is inhibited, it exchanges its I/O but does not execute its application program.
MAST task monitoring : system bit %S30 (0 = task inhibited, 1 = task enabled).
FAST task monitoring : system bit %S31 (0 = task inhibited, 1 = task enabled).
By default, the MAST and FAST tasks are active.
8.3-2 Event-triggered tasks
Event-triggered tasks allow control events to be taken into account and processed as quickly as possible (for example, the event inputs of the TSX DEY 16FK and TSX DMY
28 FK discrete modules, threshold reached on a counter module, etc).
___________________________________________________________________________
8/9
A
Control events
These are external events which can be triggered by, for example :
• the event inputs of TSX DEY 16FK and TSX DMY 28 FK discrete modules, on a rising or falling edge,
• the counter channel(s) on counter modules,
• the reception of telegrams in a PLC equipped with a TSX FPP 20 or TSX SCY 2160 i module.
• etc.
It is possible to configure up to :
• 32 events in TSX/PMX/PCX 5710 PLCs,
• 64 events in TSX/PMX/PCX 57 20, 57 30 and 57 40 PLCs.
The association between a channel and an event number is made in the channel configuration screen.
The appearance of a control event diverts the application program towards the processing which is associated with the I/O channel or with the reception of a telegram, which caused the event :
External event IT
Event-triggered task
(EVTi)
Internal processing
All the inputs associated with the channel which caused the event are read automatically. (*)
Implicit reading :
• of inputs associated with the channel, origin of the event,
• of inputs used in the task program
The processing time must be as short as possible.
Event processing
All the outputs used in the EVTi task are updated.
Implicit updating of outputs used in the EVTi task
Notes :
The EVTi task I/O are also exchanged in the MAST or FAST task (in each period or scan), which can cause inconsistencies linked to the input chronology (loss of edge, for example).
(*) In the case of telegrams, data is read by the RCV_TLG function (refer to the "Communication" manual).
Enabling and inhibiting event-triggered tasks
Event-triggered tasks can be globally enabled or inhibited by the application program, via system bit %S38. If one or more events take place while the event-triggered tasks are inhibited, the associated processing is lost.
___________________________________________________________________________
8/10
Functions/Performance 8
A
Masking and unmasking control events
Two PL7 language instructions, available to the application program, allow both global masking and unmasking of control events. If one or more events take place during masking, they are memorized by the system and the associated processing in the eventtriggered tasks will only be performed after unmasking; the order of appearance is maintained.
The masking of event-triggered tasks must be short so that :
• there is not too long a delay in taking account of events,
• events are not lost (memorization capacity overrun).
Priority of control events
In a TSX/PMX/PCX 57 PLC, there are 2 levels of priority for control events : event 0
(EVT0) has higher priority than the other events (EVT1 to EVT31 or EVT63 depending on the processor).
When an event occurs, if an event-triggered task of the same or higher priority level is being executed, it is memorized in a stack and the processing associated with this new event will only be performed after the processing in progress. If the stack overflows, events will be lost; an error is indicated by system bit %S39 being set to 1.
Maximum number of channels used in event-triggered tasks
The number of channels associated with the total number of control events is limited (see table below).
Type of channel
Discrete I/O channels
Analog channels
App.-specific channels
32
8
4
Type of processor
TSX/TPMX P57 1 i 2
TPCX 57 1012
(32 EVT)
TSX/TPMX P57 2 i 2
TSX/TPMX P57 3 i 2 (64 EVT)
TSX/TPMX P57 4 i 2
TPCX 57 3512
128
16
16
Notes
• I/O exchanges of the EVTi task are performed by channel (for some analog and application-specific modules) or by group of channels (for discrete modules and some analog modules). For this reason, if the processing modifies, for example, outputs 2 and 3 of a discrete module, it is the image (PLC memory) of outputs 0 to
7 which will be transferred to the module.
• any exchange of an input/output in an event-triggered task can cause loss of rising edge information, concerning processing performed on this channel (or group of channels), in the task where it has been declared : MAST or FAST.
___________________________________________________________________________
8/11
A
8.4
User memory structure
The memory space of TSX/PMX/PCX 57 PLCs consists of an internal RAM memory designed to receive the application program. It varies in capacity according to the type of processor :
• 32 Kwords for a TSX P 57 102 or TPCX 571012 processor,
• 48 Kwords for a TPMX P57 102 or TSX/TPMX P 57 202 processor,
• 64 Kwords for a TSX P 57 252/TPMX P 57 302 processor,
•
80 Kwords for a TSX/TPMX P 57 352 or TPCX 573512 processor,
• 96 Kwords for a TSX P 57 402 processor,
• 112 Kwords (1) for a TSX/TPMX P 57 452 processor.
(1) When the application is in the internal RAM, the memory capacity is limited to 96 Kwords,
When the application is in the PCMCIA memory card, the memory capacity is 112 Kwords.
Furthermore, this internal RAM memory can be extended with a PCMCIA memory card with a capacity of :
• 32 or 64 Kwords, RAM or FLASH EPROM type for a TSX/TPMX P 57 102 or
TPCX 571012 processor,
• 32, 64 or 128 Kwords, RAM or FLASH EPROM type for a TSX/TPMX P 57 2 i 2 processor,
• 32, 64, 128 or 256 Kwords, RAM or FLASH EPROM (1) type for a TSX/TPMX P 57 3 i 2,
TSX/TPMX P 57 4 i 2, TPCX 57 3512 processor,
(1) FLASH EPROM memory card, limited to 128 Kwords
8.4-1 Application memory
The application memory can be divided into memory zones, physically shared between the internal RAM memory and the PCMCIA memory card (if the TSX/PMX/PCX 57 processor is equipped with a memory card) :
• the application data zone is always in internal RAM,
• the application program zone (application descriptor and executable task code) is in internal RAM or in the PCMCIA memory card
• the constants, initial values and configuration zone is in internal RAM or in the
PCMCIA card.
___________________________________________________________________________
8/12
Functions/Performance 8
A
With respect to these zones, 2 types of application memory organization are possible depending on whether or not the PLC is equipped with a PCMCIA memory card.
TSX /PMX/PCX 57 (with no PCMCIA card)
Data
Internal
R A M Program
TSX /PMX/PCX 57 (with PCMCIA card)
Data
Internal
R A M
Constants
Data : application data,
Program : descriptor and executable task code,
Constants : constant words, initial values and configuration
PCMCIA card
Program
Constants
Application in internal RAM
So that the application is loaded entirely in the protected internal RAM (*) of the PLC without PCMCIA memory extension card, its size must be compatible with that of the
RAM memory :
• 32 Kwords (TSX P57 102/TPCX 57 1012), split for example into 7.5 Kwords of application data and 24.5 Kwords of program and constants.
• 48 Kwords ( TPMX P57 102 and TSX/TPMX P 57 202), split for example into 10 Kwords of application data and 38 Kwords of program and constants.
• 64 Kwords (TSX P 57 252/TPMX P 57 302), split for example into 15 Kwords of application data and 49 Kwords of program and constants.
• 80 Kwords (TSX/TPMX P 57 352 et TPCX 573512), split for example into 20 Kwords of application data and 60 Kwords of program and constants.
• 96 Kwords (TSX P 57 402, TSX/TPMX P 57 452), split for example into 25 Kwords of application data and 71 Kwords of program and constants.
Note :If the PLC station has a TSX/TPMX P57 452 processor, the capacity of the internal RAM is limited to 96 Kwords.
(*) The internal RAM is protected by an optional 3.6 V battery located on the power supply module which has an autonomy of at least 1 year (see section 6 of this part).
___________________________________________________________________________
8/13
A
Application in the PCMCIA card
In this case, the memory card contains the executable program, the constants, the configuration, etc; the internal RAM is reserved exclusively for data.
In the creation and debugging phases of the program, it is necessary to use a protected
RAM type PCMCIA card. Once the program is operational, it will be able to be executed in this memory card or transferred to a FLASH EPROM type PCMCIA card, to ensure protection in the event of failure of the RAM type memory card battery.
Comment
When an application has been configured for execution in the internal RAM memory of a PLC (no PCMCIA memory card defined in the processor configuration screen), the presence of this card must first be declared (in the processor configuration screen) before transferring this application to a PLC equipped with a PCMCIA memory card.
Application protection
Whatever the structure of the PLC memory : whether the application is situated in the internal RAM or in the PCMCIA card, the application can be protected in order to inhibit access in online mode under PL7 Junior / PL7 Pro (program reading and debugging).
To "remove" the protection from such an application, it must be transferred again, without protection, from the terminal to the PLC. This operation requires the source program of the application to have been previously loaded into the terminal.
A protected application in a PCMCIA card can be executed by another PLC, but never duplicated. In addition to the protection offered by PL7 Junior, PCMCIA cards have a lock which inhibits any write access (program loading or modification).
Application backup
With Premium PLCs, it is possible to back up the application (program and constants) on a Backup memory card (reference TSX MFP BAK 032P). The internal RAM memory can thus be reloaded with the contents of this Backup memory card.
Note : This Backup function is not available when the application is being executed on a RAM or
FLASH EPROM PCMCIA memory card.
___________________________________________________________________________
8/14
Functions/Performance 8
A
• Loading an application "backup" from the PLC internal RAM memory.
This operation consists of transferring the application program from the PLC internal
RAM memory to a Backup PCMCIA memory card (reference TSX MFP BAK 032P).
To do this, perform the following steps.
1 insert the Backup memory card into its slot with the write-protection tab WP in the
OFF position,
2 transfer the application from the PLC internal RAM to the Backup card (PLC/
Backup menu, RAM v Backup zone option),
3 at the end of this operation, remove the Backup card and set the WP switch to ON
(backup protected).
!
If the application in the PLC is protected, inserting the Backup memory card reinitializes the PLC internal RAM memory. In this case, the procedure for loading the Backup memory card is as follows :
1 ensure that the application program to be saved is available in the terminal. If it is not, transfer this program to the terminal,
2 insert the Backup memory card into its slot with the write-protection tab WP in the
OFF position,
3 transfer the application from the terminal to the PLC internal RAM (PLC/Transfer program menu, : PC v PLC option),
4 transfer the application from the PLC internal RAM to the Backup card (PLC/Backup menu, RAM v Backup zone option),
5 at the end of this operation, remove the Backup card and set the WP switch to ON
(backup protected).
Note :
These various transfers are executed from a terminal equipped with PL7 Junior/PL7 Pro software.
• Retrieving an application "backup" from a preloaded memory card
This operation, using a preloaded memory card (reference TSX MFP BAK 032P), enables the application program to be updated without using a terminal. The writeprotection tab on this memory card must be in the ON position. When this type of card is inserted in a TSX/PMX/PCX 57 PLC, its contents are automatically transferred to the internal RAM memory of this PLC. At the end of the transfer, the
PLC is placed in forced STOP (whatever the configured RUN AUTO option).
As long as the "backup" card is in the PLC, a power break / power return always causes its start-up in forced STOP.
Removal of the card causes the PLC to cold start, in RUN or STOP according to the
RUN AUTO configuration.
___________________________________________________________________________
8/15
A
8.5
Performance
8.5-1 MAST task scan time
Program processing
I.P. at start of scan
%I
Scan time
I.P. at end of scan
%Q
IP = internal processing
MAST scan time =
Program processing time (Ttp)
+
Internal processing time at start and end of scan (Tti)
• Definition of the program processing time Ttp
Ttp =
Application code execution time (Texca)
+
Grafcet overhead time (ToG7)
Application code execution time (Texca)
Texca =
Σ of the time of each instruction executed by the application program
on each scan
The execution time of each instruction as well as the typical application used to verify these are given in the manual TLX DR PL7 33E - part B - section 8.
By way of indication, the table below gives the execution time in milliseconds (ms), for
1K instruction (1).
(1) 1K instruction = 1024 instructions
___________________________________________________________________________
8/16
Functions/Performance 8
A
Processors Application code execution time Texca (1)
Internal RAM PCMCIA card
100% Boolean 65% Boolean + 100% Boolean 65% Boolean +
35% numerical 35% numerical
TSX P57 102
TPCX 57 1012 0.72 ms
TSX P57 202 / 252
TSX P57 302 / 352 0.31 ms
TPMX P57 102
T PCX 57 3512
TSX P57 402 / 452
TPMX P57 202
TPMX P57 352 / 452
0.31 ms
1.39 ms
0.78 ms
0.5 ms
0.72 ms
0.47 ms
0.47 ms
1.39 ms
0.98 ms
0.68 ms
Note : not all the application program instructions need to be executed on each PLC scan.
(1) with all instructions executed on each PLC scan
___________________________________________________________________________
8/17
A
- Grafcet overhead time (ToG7)
ToG7 =
TGF
+
(TEA x number of steps active at the same time )
+
(TTP x number of transitions which are true at the same time).
Processors
TSX P57 102
TPCX 57 1012
TSX P57 202 / 252
TSX P57 302 / 352
TPMX P57 102
T PCX 57 3512
TSX P57 402 / 452
TPMX P57 202 / 352 / 452
TGF
0.332 ms
0,291 ms
0.13 ms
TEA
0.121 ms
0.106 ms
0.05 ms
TTP
0.491 ms
0.431 ms
0.19 ms
• Definition of the internal processing time at the start and end of the scan (Tti)
Tti =
MAST task system overhead time (TosM)
+ max [System time for communication in reception (Tcomr); management time at start of scan for implicit I/O %I (Tge%I)]
+ max [System time for communication in transmission (Tcome); management time at end of scan for implicit I/O %Q (Tgs%Q)]
MAST task system overhead time (TosM)
Processors
TSX P57 102
TPCX 57 1012
TSX P57 202 / 302
TPMX P57 102
TSX P57 252 / 352
TPCX 57 3512
TSX P57 402
TPMX P57 202
Time without FIPIO application Time with FIPIO application
2.9 ms –
2 ms
2 ms
0.6 ms
–
3.8 ms
–
TSX P57 452
TPMX P57 352 / 452
0.6 ms 1.1 ms
___________________________________________________________________________
8/18
Functions/Performance 8
A
- Management time of implicit I/O (%I and %Q) at the start and end of the scan
Tge%I =
60
µs
+ Σ of IN times for each module (see below)
Tgs%Q =
60
µs
+ Σ of OUT times for each module (see below)
Input (IN) and output (OUT) management times for each module :
Discrete I/O, analog, counter, axis control and stepper motor control modules.
Type of module
8-channel discrete inputs
16-channel discrete inputs
(all modules except TSX DEY 16FK)
32-channel discrete inputs
64-channel discrete inputs
Fast discrete inputs (8 channels used)
(TSX DEY 16FK/TSX DMY 28FK module)
Fast discrete inputs (16 channels used)
(TSX DEY 16FK/TSX DMY 28FK/28RFK module)
8-channel discrete outputs
16-channel discrete outputs
32-channel discrete outputs
64-channel discrete outputs
Analog inputs (per group of 4 channels)
Analog outputs (4 channels)
Counter (TSX CTY 2A/4A), per channel
Counter (TSX CTY 2C), per channel
Stepper motor control (TSX CFY ii
), per channel
Axis control (TSX CAY ii
), per channel
Input
(IN)
27 µs
Management times
Output
(OUT)
–
Total
(IN + OUT)
27 µs
27 µs – 27 µs
48 µs
96 µs
29 µs
37 µs
26 µs
33 µs
47 µs
94 µs
84 µs
59 µs
55 µs
65 µs
75 µs
85 µs
–
–
16 µs
22 µs
15 µs
20 µs
30 µs
60 µs
–
59 µs
20 µs
21 µs
20 µs
22 µs
48 µs
96 µs
45 µs
59 µs
41 µs
53 µs
77 µs
154 µs
84 µs
118 µs
75 µs
86 µs
95 µs
107 µs
Note:
The times given for discrete I/O modules assume that all the module channels are assigned to the same task.
Example: using a TSX DEY 32 D2 K module
- if the 32 channels are assigned to the same task, take the "32-channel discrete inputs" time.
- if only 16 channels are assigned to the same task, take the "16-channel discrete inputs" time, not the "32-channel discrete inputs" time divided by 2.
___________________________________________________________________________
8/19
A
- Communication system time
Communication (excluding telegram) is managed during the MAST task "Internal
Processing" phases :
- at the start of the scan for message reception (Tcomr)
- at the end of the scan for message transmission (Tcome)
The MAST task scan time is therefore affected by communication traffic. The communication time per scan varies considerably depending on :
- the traffic generated by the processor : number of communication EFs which are active simultaneously,
- the traffic generated by other devices in the direction of the processor or devices for which the processor, as master, acts as a router.
This time is only spent in scans where there is a new message to be managed.
Examples of communication system times :
- PL7 Junior software with terminal online and animation table open
Processors
TSX P57 102
TPCX 57 1012
TSX P57 202 / 252
TSX P57 302 / 352
TPMX P57 102
T PCX 57 3512
TSX P57 402 / 452
TPMX P57 202
TPMX P57 352 / 452
Average time per scan
2.5 ms
1.8 ms
0.8 ms
Maximum scan time
3.4 ms
2.4 ms
1 ms
- 1 SEND_RQ OF (mirror request, 100 characters)
Instruction execution time : 2 ms (for a TSX P 57 202 processor) to be included in the application code execution time for scans where the EF is actually executed.
___________________________________________________________________________
8/20
Functions/Performance 8
A
Communication system time
Processors
TSX P57 102
TPCX 57 1012
TSX P57 202 / 252
TSX P57 302 / 352
TPMX P57 102
T PCX 57 3512
TSX P57 402 / 452
TPMX P57 202
TPMX P57 352 / 452
Transmission time
1.4 ms
1 ms
0.4 ms
Reception time
1.4 ms
1 ms
0.4 ms
These times cannot all occur in the same scan. Transmission occurs in the same scan as execution of the instruction as long as the communication traffic is low, but not in the same scan as reception of the response.
___________________________________________________________________________
8/21
A
Example of calculating MAST task scan times in the following conditions :
For an application with the following characteristics :
• TSX P 57 202 processor,
• Program execution in PLC internal RAM,
• 10 K instructions, 65% Boolean + 35 % numeric,
• 1 communication OF of the SEND_REQ type,
• 128 discrete inputs distributed on : seven TSX DEY 16D2 modules + one TSX DEY
16FK module
• 80 discrete outputs, distributed on : five TSX DSY 16T2 modules,
• 32 analog inputs distributed on : two TSX AEY 1600 modules,
• 16 analog outputs distributed on : four TSX ASY 410 modules,
• 2 counter channels distributed on : 1 TSX CTY 2A module,
Application code execution time (Texca) :
• Without communication OF : 10x 0.78
• With 1 communication OF of the SEND_REQ type = (10x0.78) + 2
System overhead time (TosM)
=
=
=
7.8 ms
9.8 ms
2 ms
Management time for implicit I/O (%I and %Q) at the start and end of the scan :
Module reference
Type of module
TSX DEY 16 D2 16-channel discrete inputs 7
TSX DEY 16 FK 16-channel discrete inputs 1
(fast inputs)
Number of modules
TSX DSY 16T2 16-channel discrete outputs 5
TSX AEY 1600 Analog inputs 2 (32 channels)
TSX ASY 410
TSX CTY 2A
Analog outputs
Counter
4 (16 channels)
1 (2 channels)
Management time at start (IN) at end (OUT)
238 µs
37 µs
–
22 µs
165 µs
672 µs
236 µs
110 µs
100 µs
–
236 µs
40 µs
Total management time 1458 µs 398 µs
• Management time at start of scan : Tge%I = 60µs + 1458 µs = 1518 µs = 1.52 ms
• Management time at end of scan : Tgs%Q = 60µs + 398 µs = 458 µs = 0.46 ms
Communication system time :
• Sending the request : Tcome
• Receiving the response : Tcomr
= 1 ms
= 1 ms
___________________________________________________________________________
8/22
Functions/Performance 8
A
Scan time without execution of the communication OF
TcyM = Texca + TosM + Tge%I + Tgs%Q
= 7.8 ms + 2 ms + 1.52 ms + 0.46 ms = 11.78 ms
Scan time with execution of the communication OF and transmission of the request
TcyM = Texca + TosM + Tge%I + max [request transmission time (Tcome), Tgs%Q]
= 9.8 ms + 2 ms + 1.52 ms + max [1ms; 0.46 ms] = 14.32 ms
Scan time with reception of the response
TcyM = Texca + TosM + max [response reception time (Tcomr), Tge%I] + Tgs%Q
= 7.8 ms + 2 ms + max [1 ms; 1.52 ms] + 0.46 ms = 11.78 ms
___________________________________________________________________________
8/23
A
8.5-2 FAST task scan time
FAST scan time =
Program processing time (Ttp)
+
Internal processing time at start and end of scan (Tti)
• Definition of the program processing time Ttp
Ttp = Execution time of application code with respect to the FAST task (Texca)
- Application code execution time (Texca) : see the definition in section 8.5-1
• Definition of the internal processing time at the start and end of the scan (Tti)
Tti =
FAST task system overhead time (TsoF)
+
Management time for implicit I/O (%I and %Q) at start and end of scan
- FAST task system overhead time (TosF)
Processors
TSX P57 102
TPCX 57 1012
TSX P57 202 / 252
TSX P57 302 / 352
TPMX P57 102
TPCX 57 3512
TSX P57 402 / 452
TPMX P57 202
TPMX P57 352 / 452
FAST task system overhead time
0.8 ms
0.6 ms
0.2 ms
- Management time for implicit I/O (%I and %Q) : see section 8.5-1
___________________________________________________________________________
8/24
Functions/Performance 8
A
8.5-3 Response time on an event
Time between a rising edge on an event-triggered input and the corresponding edge on an output set by the event-triggered task program.
Example : program with 100 Boolean instructions and input module TSX DEY 16 FK
Processors Response time
TSX DSY 08T22 module
Minimum Typical
TSX DSY 32T2K module
Maximum Minimum Typical Maximum
TSX P57 102
TPCX 57 1012 1.2 ms
TSX P57 202 / 252 1 ms
TSX P57 302 / 352
TPMX P57 102
TPCX 57 3512
TSX P57 402 / 452
TPMX P57 202
TPMX P57 352 / 452
0.7 ms
1.3 ms
1.1 ms
0.8 ms
2.8 ms
2.2 ms
0.8 ms
1.9 ms
1.8 ms
1.5 ms
2.4 ms
2.2 ms
1.9 ms
4.2 ms
3.7 ms
2.1 ms
8.5-4 Precision of the internal time bases
For time management, Premium PLCs have :
• a time/date clock (10 -5 precision) from which system words %SW49 to %SW58 are refreshed.
• a realtime clock with a theoretical period of 1 ms but whose actual period is 0.99973
ms (10 -5 precision) which controls :
- the task periods,
- the timers, monostables, GRAFCET step activity times, etc,
- periodic system bits %S4 to %S7,
- system word %SD18.
This difference (0.027%) between the theoretical value and the actual value is completely acceptable for the above uses. However any timestamping operation performed using this clock will result in a gain of around 24 seconds per 24 hour period, which will not occur if the same operation is performed using the time/date clock.
___________________________________________________________________________
8/25
A
___________________________________________________________________________
8/26
9 Operating modes
9.1
Setting the PLC to RUN/STOP
Principle
The RUN/STOP function is used to start
(RUN) or stop (STOP) execution of the application program.
This function can be performed from :
• A programming or adjustment terminal,
• A discrete physical input which will previously have been dedicated to this function during the application configuration stage.
Setting the PLC to STOP using this physical input has priority over setting it to
RUN from a terminal or network.
PLC status
RUN
STOP
1
Physical input %Ixy.i
0
Set to RUN/STOP by physical input %Ixy.i
Operating modes of the physical RUN/STOP input
• Operation of the physical RUN/STOP input (%Ixy.i)
- At state 0, this input forces the application to stop (STOP state),
- A rising edge on this input causes the application to start up (RUN state),
- At state 1, the application can be controlled freely from a terminal,
- If there is a fault on the RUN/STOP input, the application stops. Once the fault has disappeared, and if the input is at state 1, the application restarts in RUN mode.
• Processing on a restart
- the cold start is performed in RUN if :
- the RUN/STOP input is at state 1,
- there is no fault on this input at the time of the start.
- the warm restart is performed in RUN if :
- the RUN/STOP input is at state 1,
- there is no fault on this input at the time of the start,
- the PLC has not received a STOP command before the break.
Summary of the PLC status during a warm restart
(depending on the state of the RUN/STOP input before the break and on return of power)
RUN/STOP input state on return of power
RUN/STOP input state before power break
State 1, PLC in RUN mode
State 1, PLC in STOP mode
State 0
Faulty
State 1
PLC in RUN mode
PLC in STOP mode
PLC in RUN mode
PLC in RUN mode
State 0 or faulty
PLC in STOP mode
PLC in STOP mode
PLC in STOP mode
PLC in STOP mode
___________________________________________________________________________
9/1
A
A
9.2
Processing on power break and power return
9.2-1 Break in the power supply on the rack supporting the TSX/PMX 57 processor (rack 0) or on the PC supporting the PCX 57 processor
On a power break, the system memorizes the application context. When the power supply returns, the saved context is compared to the current one, which defines the type of start which will be executed :
• If the application context has changed (loss of system context or new application), the
PLC performs a cold start and initializes the application,
• If the application context is identical, the PLC performs a warm restart without initializing the data.
Cold start
Cold starting is performed in RUN or in STOP depending on the state of the "automatic start-up in RUN" bit defined during configuration, or on the state of the RUN/STOP input.
• PLC response :
Initialization of the application data :
- Setting of the internal bits and I/O image to 0.
- Initialization of the system bits and words.
- Initialization of the function blocks from the configuration data.
- Canceling of any forcing.
- Setting of the internal words (%MWi) to 0 if no save was requested during configuration, otherwise they are left in their current state.
- Initialization of the data declared in the DFBs : either to 0, or to the initial value declared in the code, or with the value saved during the SAVE function.
Other initializations :
- Initialization of the message and event stacks.
- Transmission of the configuration parameters to all the discrete I/O modules and application-specific modules (analog, counter, axis control, communication, etc).
Start-up of the application, if start-up in RUN is requested :
- Restart of the first scan in the MAST task.
- Setting of system bits %S0 (cold start) and %S13 (first scan in RUN) to 1 at the start of the first MAST task scan.
- Setting of system bits %S0 and %S13 to 0 at the end of the first MAST task scan.
- Activation of other tasks.
___________________________________________________________________________
9/2
Operating modes 9
A
The PLC will respond differently on a cold start depending on whether it is equipped with a PCMCIA memory card (see diagram below).
PLC cold start
Yes
PCMCIA card present
No
Valid application in internal RAM
No
Yes
Cold start in RUN or in STOP (1) on the application in RAM memory.
The application is not valid, and the
ERR indicator lamp flashes.
Valid application in the
PCMCIA card ?
No
Yes
Cold start in RUN or in STOP (1) on the
PCMCIA card application. If an application in internal RAM is valid, it is deleted.
The application is not valid, and the
ERR indicator lamp flashes. If an application in internal RAM is valid, it is not accessible but is not deleted.
(1) Starting in RUN or in STOP is defined during configuration
• Processing of the application program on a cold start
If the user requires specific processing of the application in the event of a cold start, the state of system bit %S0, which remains at 1 during the first MAST task scan, must be tested at the start of the MAST task.
___________________________________________________________________________
9/3
A
• Actions causing a cold start
Actions
Loading an application
Action on the processor RESET button
Action on the processor RESET button following a blocking fault
Manipulation of the handle or
Inserting/removing a PCMCIA memory card
Initialization from PL7 Junior or PL7 Pro
Forcing system bit %S0
Restart after a power break with loss of context
Characteristics of the start
Forced cold start in STOP
Cold start in STOP or in RUN according to the configuration
Forced cold start in STOP
Cold start in STOP or in RUN according to the configuration
Cold start in STOP or in RUN according to the configuration, without initialization of the discrete I/O and application-specific modules.
Cold start in STOP or in RUN according to the configuration
Warm restart
A restart after a power break is treated as a warm restart if the application context has not changed.
• PLC response :
Restart of program execution program execution restarts from the line at which the power break occurred, without updating the outputs at the end of the restart cycle.
Initialization at the end of the restart cycle
- of the message and event stacks.
- transmission of the configuration parameters to all the discrete I/O modules and application-specific modules (analog, counter, axis control, communication, etc).
- deactivation of event-triggered and FAST tasks until the end of the first MAST task scan.
Restart
- Restart of the first scan in the MAST task.
- Setting of system bits %S1 (warm restart) and %S13 (first scan in RUN) to 1 at the start of the first MAST task scan.
- Setting of system bits %S1 and %S13 to 0 at the end of the first MAST task scan.
- Activation of other tasks.
• Processing the warm restart
If the user requires specific processing of the application in the event of a warm restart, the state of system bit %S1, which remains at 1 during the first MAST task scan, must be tested at the start of the MAST task.
___________________________________________________________________________
9/4
Operating modes 9
A
• Actions causing a warm restart
Actions
Action on the RESET button of the power supply module in rack 0
Forcing system bit %S1
Characteristics of the restart
Warm restart
Warm restart
Restart after a power break without loss of Warm restart context
(1) except on a station with a PCX 57 processor
Diagram of a cold start / warm restart
Reading inputs Stop the processor and save the application context
Program execution
TOP
>
If %S0 = 1, processing relating to cold start.
If %S1 = 1, processing relating to warm restart
>
Power failure detected
No >
BOT
Power return
Yes identical
Comparison of the saved context with the current context
Warm restart different
Cold start
Configuration self-tests
Configuration self-tests
Setting bit
%S0 or %S1 and %S13 to 0
Setting %S1 and %S13 to 1
Updating outputs
Initialization of the application
Setting %S0 and %S13 to 1
___________________________________________________________________________
9/5
A
9.2-2 Break in the power supply on a rack other than rack 0
All the channels on this rack are seen as faulty by the processor but the other racks are not affected, and the values of the faulty inputs cease to be updated in the application memory. In the case of a discrete input module they are set to 0, unless they have been forced, in which case they keep their forced value.
If the duration of the failure is less than 10 ms for AC power supplies or 1 ms for DC power supplies, it is not seen by the program which runs normally.
9.3
Processing on insertion/removal of a PCMCIA memory card
9.3-1 On TSX/PMX 57 PLCs
TSX/PMX 57 PLC processors are equipped with a cover on the front panel which must be removed in order to insert a PCMCIA memory card. Removing the cover causes the
PLC to stop without saving the application context. The module outputs change to fallback mode.
Insertion of the memory card fitted with its handle causes the PLC to cold start. Similarly, removing the memory card causes the PLC to stop without saving the application context.
!
If the program contained in the PCMCIA memory card has the RUN AUTO option, the processor automatically starts in RUN once the card has been inserted.
9.3-2 On PCX 57 PLCs
!
The PCMCIA memory card must not be inserted in or removed from a PCX 57 processor which is powered up. Such intervention, although not destructive for the processor or any other device, will cause random behavior of the processor, and operation cannot therefore be guaranteed.
!
If the program contained in the PCMCIA memory card has the RUN AUTO option, the processor automatically starts in RUN once the card has been inserted and the
PC has been powered up.
___________________________________________________________________________
9/6
Operating modes 9
A
9.4
Processing after action on the processor RESET button
All the processors have a RESET button on the front panel which, when pressed, causes the PLC to cold start in RUN or in STOP (1), on the application contained in the memory card (or in the internal RAM).
RESET following a processor fault
When a processor fault appears, the rack 0 (2) alarm relay is deactivated (open contact) and the module outputs change to the fallback position or their state is maintained, according to the choice made at the time of configuration. Pressing the RESET button causes the PLC to cold start, forced into STOP.
(1) Starting in RUN or in STOP is defined during configuration
(2) With a TSX/PMX 57 processor. This relay is not controlled in the case of a PCX 57 processor.
Note :
When the RESET button is used, and during the PLC cold start, the terminal link ceases to be active.
9.5
Processing after action on the power supply RESET button
The power supply module in each rack has a RESET button on the front panel, which can be activated to trigger an initialization sequence for the modules on the rack it is supplying.
If this button is activated on the power supply module on the rack containing the TSX/
PMX 57 processor (rack 0), it causes a warm start.
Special case of a PCX 57 processor
In this case, since the processor is not physically present on the rack at address 0, activation of the RESET button on the rack power supply does not cause a warm restart of the application. However, the modules on this rack are reinitialized.
___________________________________________________________________________
9/7
A
9.6
Response of the PCX 57 to an action on the PC
Note
The PCX 57 processor operating modes are identical to those of TSX / PMX 57 processors.
• Power up / down of the PC receiving the PCX 57 processor :
Warm restart of the PCX 57 if the application context has not changed.
• Micro-cuts on the AC supply powering the PC :
Since the PCX 57 does not have a mechanism for filtering micro-cuts, any micro-cut which is not filtered by the PC internal power supply causes the PCX 57 to warm restart if the application context has not changed.
• Pressing the PC RESET button :
As a general rule, and provided that the RESET button on the PC activates the RSTDRV signal on the ISA bus, pressing the RESET button on the PC causes the PCX 57 to warm restart if the application context has not changed,
• Software RESET of the PC (CTRL ALT DEL),
These actions have no effect on the current status of the PCX 57 processor (if the PCX
57 processor is in RUN, it stays in RUN, etc). They do not cause a warm restart or a cold start.
Comment :
A software blocking fault on the PC has no effect on the current status of the PCX 57 processor (same response as to that for a PC software RESET).
• Software commands (Shutdown or Restart)
On some PCs (a small minority), the Shutdown or Restart software commands cause a warm restart of the PCX 57.
This behavior of the PCX 57 has been observed on certain PCs where the mother board manages the RSTDRV signal in a particular way during the PC RESET phases.
On the majority of PCs, these software commands do not affect the behavior of the PCX
57.
___________________________________________________________________________
9/8
Operating modes 9
A
9.7
Behavior on insertion/removal of a module when powered-up
All modules can be inserted when powered-up, with the exception of the processor module and PCMCIA communication cards.
Insertion and removal of modules when powered-up means that a module can be replaced without stopping the application.
The removal of a module activates system bits associated with the I/O, and the faults associated with the module and its channels. Inputs are no longer updated in the application memory and are set to 0 in the case of a discrete input module, unless they have been forced, in which case they keep their forced value while the module is missing. The processor I//O indicator lamp comes on.
When the new module is inserted, the system tries to configure it with the configuration of the module it is replacing.
If this configuration is successful (module with the same reference), the channels are once again taken into account by the application, and the faults caused by the absence of the module disappear. The processor I/O indicator lamp goes off.
If this reconfiguration fails (module with a different reference), the channels are not taken into account by the application, the system bits associated with the I/O and the faults associated with the module and its channels remain active, and the processor I/O indicator lamp stays on.
9.8
Behavior of the I/O on downgraded operating mode
9.8-1 Safety value of discrete and analog outputs
• Situations :
- the PLC is not configured
- the PLC is in STOP mode without previously having been in RUN mode (for example after loading the application, or on a cold start in STOP mode),
- the PLC is in RUN mode but the task which manages the output module is in STOP mode and has never been in RUN mode,
- power break on the rack where the output module is positioned,
- output module does not conform to the configuration.
• Behavior :
Outputs are set to the safety value : 0 for discrete and analog outputs.
___________________________________________________________________________
9/9
A
9.8-2 Discrete and analog outputs switching to fallback mode
• Situations :
These occur as soon as the application ceases to function normally
- the PLC switches to STOP mode,
- the PLC switches to "error" (processor fault) or to "HALT or software fault" (application blocking fault),
- the task which manages these outputs switches to STOP mode,
- insertion of a breakpoint in the task which manages these outputs,
- command to switch outputs to fallback mode by system bit %S9 or the debug screen,
- communication fault detected by the output module (output not updated by the processor).
• Behavior :
The output values are managed by the module depending on the fallback mode for each channel or group of channels :
- fallback : the module physical outputs are forced to the fallback value configured (0 or
1). (The image memory is not modified),
- maintain state: the module physical outputs are maintained at their last value.
The default operating mode is fallback to 0.
9.8-3 I/O faults
• Situations :
- channel fault,
- module fault,
- module missing or does not conform to the configuration,
- communication fault detected by the processor.
• Behavior :
- faulty discrete input channel : the value in the application memory is set to 0, unless it is forced, in which case it is maintained at the forced value,
- other types of faulty input : in the case of a communication fault, the value in the application memory is not updated (the value is maintained),
- faulty output channel : the value of the output continues to be managed by the application and is only sent to the module if the latter conforms to the configuration.
The fault is indicated by the system bits associated with the I/O and the fault information associated with the module and its channels. The processor I/O indicator lamp is lit.
___________________________________________________________________________
9/10
Operating modes 9
A
9.9
Alarm relay management
9.9-1 On TSX/PMX 57 PLCs
Only the alarm relay on the power supply module in rack 0 is managed according to the state of the application. It opens for the duration of a stop, even a partial stop, of the application, and in particular on the occurrence of a blocking fault. However, the alarm relay in the power supply module for the other racks remains closed.
The relay on the power supply module for a rack other than that of rack 0, is only significant of the state of the power supply for this rack. It opens when this power supply is no longer operating.
9.9-2 On PCX 57 PLCs
If using a PCX 57 type processor which can be integrated in a PC, the alarm relay on the power supply for rack 0 is not managed and thus is always open.
If this function is absolutely essential to the correct operation of the installation, the power supply module alarm relay may be replaced by using a relay output from a module on the Bus X or FIPIO bus. To do this, this output must be :
• a relay output,
• configured with a fallback to 0 (default configuration),
• initialized at state 1 before executing the application program.
When configured in this way, the relay output will behave in the same way as the alarm relay on the power supply module in rack 0 controlled by a TSX / PMX57 processor.
9.10 Loading the operating system (OS)
The operating system for TSX/PMX/PCX 57 PLCs can be updated from the programming terminal by downloading via the processor terminal port.
For a PCX 57 PLC, downloading can be performed from the PC which supports the
PCX 57 processor. In this case, the PC serial output should be connected on the PCX 57 processor terminal port by a TSX PCU 1030 cable.
The operating system updating procedure is explained in the manual
"PL7 Junior and PL7 Pro Software Operating Modes".
___________________________________________________________________________
9/11
A
___________________________________________________________________________
9/12
10 Appendix
10.1 Fan modules
10.1-1 General presentation
The fan modules installed above
TSX/PMX/PCX 57 PLC station racks provide forced air convection to ensure an even ambient temperature inside the unit and thus eliminate any hot spots which may exist.
A temperature probe integrated into every fan module indicates to the user that the ambient temperature has reached its maximum value.
The use of fan modules is advised in the following cases :
• Ambient temperature in the range 25°C...60°C : this increases the lifetime of the various TSX Premium PLC components (25% increase in MTBF).
• Ambient temperature in the range 60°C...70°C : since the ambient temperature is limited to 60°C without ventilation, forced ventilation is used to decrease the temperature inside the modules by 10°C, bringing the internal module temperature to the equivalent of an ambient temperature of 60°C.
Three fan modules are available for adaptation to the main power supplies : fan module with 24 VDC,
110 VAC or 220 VAC supply voltage.
Depending on the rack modularity (4, 6, 8 or 12 positions), 1, 2 or 3 fan modules must be installed above each rack :
• TSX RKY 12 / 12EX racks with 12 positions :
3 fan modules,
• TSX RKY 8 / 8EX racks with 8 positions :
2 fan modules,
• TSX RKY 4EX/6 / 6EX racks with 4 and 6 positions :
1 fan module
TSX RKY 12/12EX
TSX RKY 8/8EX
TSX RKY 4EX/6/6EX
RKY 12/12EX
RKY 8/8EX
RKY 4EX/6/6EX
___________________________________________________________________________
10/1
A
A
10.1-2 Physical presentation
1 Terminal block for connecting :
- the module power supply voltage,
- the power supply for the temperature probe and the associated indicator lamp or preactuator.
Each terminal can receive one 1.5 mm 2 wire without a cable end or two 1 mm 2 wires with cable ends.
3
4
1
2
3
2 Terminal for grounding the module.
3 Holes for fixing the module (M4 x 12 screws). When using these modules with TSX
Premium PLCs, the fan modules must be fixed on a 35 x 15 AM1-ED iii type rail
.
4 Tilted shutters which enable the air to be directed to the front.
10.1-3 Catalog
Type of module Fan
Characteristics
Power supply voltage
Temperature probe
No. of modules per rack
References
24 VDC 110 VAC 220 VAC
Yes (temperature detection • 80°C ± 5°C), open on alarm
1 module on a rack with 4 and 6 positions (TSX RKY 4EX/6/6EX)
2 modules on a rack with 8 positions (TSX RKY 8/8EX)
3 modules on a rack with 12 positions (TSX RKY 12/12EX)
TSX FAN D2 P TSX FAN A4 P TSX FAN A5 P
___________________________________________________________________________
10/2
Appendix 10
A
10.1-4 Dimensions
• Single fan module (measurements in millimeters)
138
Back view
110
Right-hand view
• Fan module + rack (measurements in millimeters)
146
Front view
160 mm (1)
200 mm (2)
(1) with screw terminal module
(2) Maximum depth associated with all types of modules and their connectors
Racks
TSX RKY 4EX
TSX RKY 6/6EX
TSX RKY 8/8EX
TSX RKY 12/12EX
Number of positions
4
6
8
12 a a
187.9 mm
261.6 mm
335.3 mm
482.6 mm
___________________________________________________________________________
10/3
A
10.1-5 Mounting
The fan modules associated with TSX/PMX/PCX Premium
PLCs must be mounted on 35 mm x 15 mm rails (type AM1-
ED iii
) to compensate for the thickness of the rack.
Note :
The fixing distances for TSX RKY ii
racks are defined in part A
- section 6.3.
35x15 rail
Support
Fan module
TSX Premium PLC
Mounting positions for the fan modules depending on the type of rack
Racks with 6 positions (TSX RKY 6/6EX) Racks with 8 positions (TSX RKY 8/8EX)
Racks with 4 positions (TSX RKY 4EX)
___________________________________________________________________________
10/4
Appendix 10
A
10.1-6 Installation rules for racks with fan modules
(See general rules on positioning racks which are not fan-cooled, section 6.1 in this part).
100 a
100
2 a a
2
2 a > 50 mm b > 30 mm
1 Equipment or enclosure.
2 Cable duct or clip.
1
___________________________________________________________________________
10/5
A
10.1-7 Connections
• Connecting the fan module power supply
TSX FAN D2 P TSX FAN A4 P
θ θ
Fu 1
24 VDC
+24V
0V
Fu 1
110 VAC
L
N
TSX FAN A5 P
θ
Fu 1
220 VAC
L
N
Note : when using several fan modules of the same type, use one common power supply for all the fan modules.
• Connecting the temperature probe power supply
The temperature probe can be power supplied either in AC or DC and connected to an indicator lamp, a PLC input, etc.
DC power supply AC power supply
Fu 2
24/48 VDC
θ
Fu 2
110/220 VAC
θ
Note : when using several fan modules, the probe contacts will be placed in series.
(1)
Fu 2
θ
Fan module 1
θ
Fan module 2
θ
Fan module 3
(1) a
24 / 48 V or c
110 / 220 V
___________________________________________________________________________
10/6
Appendix 10
A
10.1-8 Characteristics
Type of module
Power supply voltage Nominal
TSX FAN D2 P
24 VDC
TSX FAN A4 P
110 VAC
TSX FAN A5 P
220 VAC
Limit 20...27.6 VDC 90...120 VAC 180...260 VAC
Current drawn at nominal voltage 180 mA 180 mA 100 mA
Temperature probe Power supply voltage : a
24 / 48 VDC or c
110 / 220 VAC
Breaking capacity 1 A at 24 VDC / 10 000 operations
(on resistive load) 1 A at 48 VDC / 30 000 operations
1 A at 110 VAC / 30 000 operations
0.5 A at 220 VAC / 10 000 operations
Activation
Status
Temperature > 75 °C ± 5°C closed if temperature < 75°C ± 5°C open if temperature > 75°C ± 5°C
___________________________________________________________________________
10/7
A
___________________________________________________________________________
10/8
Discrete I/O modules
Contents
Part B1
Section Page
1.1-2 Physical description 1/2
1.3 Installing, inserting and removing modules 1/10
1.3-2 Inserting/removing modules 1/10
1.4-1 Modules with screw terminal block 1/11
1.4-2 Module with HE10 connectors 1/12
2.1-1 Constant current inputs 2/1
2.1-2 Protecting DC transistor outputs 2/1
2.1-3 Reactivating outputs 2/1
2.2 Specific functions for certain modules 2/3
2.2-1 Programmable input filtering for TSX DEY 16 FK and
TSX DMY 28FK/DMY 28RFK modules 2/3
2.2-2 Latching inputs on TSX DEY 16 FK and DMY 28FK modules 2/4
2.2-3 Event management on inputs for TSX DEY 16 FK and
2.2-4 Reflex and timer functions on the TSX DMY 28RFK module 2/6
___________________________________________________________________________
B1/1
B1
B1 Discrete I/O modules
Contents
Part B1
Section Page
2.4-1 Built-in protection for 24 VDC transistor output modules 2/10
2.4-3 Protection of relay output contacts (TSX DSY 08R5/16R5) 2/11
3 General installation rules 3/1
3.1 Recommendations for use 3/1
3.2 General wiring rules and recommendations 3/2
3.3 Compatibility of sensors v inputs and preactuators v outputs 3/5
3.3-1 Compatibility of sensors with inputs 3/5
3.3-2 Compatibility of preactuators with outputs 3/7
3.3-3 Using negative logic (24 VDC) 3/8
3.4 Software installation and associated language objects 3/10
3.5 Discrete I/O display and diagnostics 3/10
4.1 Characteristics of input modules with terminal block 4/1
4.1-1 24 - 48 VDC positive logic input modules 4/1
4.1-2 24 VDC negative logic input module 4/2
4.1-3 AC voltage input modules 4/3
___________________________________________________________________________
B1/2
Discrete I/O modules
Contents
Part B1
Section Page
4.2 Characteristics of input modules with connectors 4/4
4.2-1 24 VDC positive logic fast input module 4/4
4.2-2 24 VDC and 48 VDC 32-channel positive logic input modules 4/5
4.2-3 24 VDC 64-channel positive logic input module 4/6
4.2-4 Temperature derating 4/7
4.3 Characteristics of outputs with terminal block 4/8
4.3-1 DC transistor output modules (positive logic) 4/8
4.3-2 Relay output modules, thermal current 3 A 4/9
4.3-3 DC relay output module 4/10
4.3-4 Relay output module, thermal current 5 A 4/11
4.3-5 Triac output modules 4/12
4.4 Characteristics of transistor output modules with connector 4/13
4.4-1 DC transistor output modules (positive logic) 4/13
4.5 Characteristics of mixed I/O modules with connectors 4/14
4.5-1 24 VDC positive logic fast inputs 4/14
4.5-2 DC transistor outputs (positive logic) 4/15
5.1-1 Connection to modules with screw terminal block 5/1
5.1-2 Connection to modules with HE10 connectors 5/2
5.2-1 TSX DEY 08D2 / 16D2 modules 5/4
5.2-3 TSX DEY 16A2 / 16A3 / 16A4 / 16A5 modules 5/7
5.2-5 TSX DEY 32D2K / 64D2K modules 5/11
5.2-6 TSX DEY 32D3K module 5/14
5.2-7 TSX DSY 08T2 / 16T2 / 16T3 / 08T22 / 08T31 modules 5/16
5.2-8 Relay modules 50 VA : TSX DSY 08R5 / 16R5 5/19
___________________________________________________________________________
B1/3
B1
B1 Discrete I/O modules
Contents
Part B1
Section
5.2-9 Relay modules 100 VA : TSX DSY 08R5A / 08R4D
5.2-10 TSX DSY 08S5 / 16S5 / 16S4 modules
5.2-11 TSX DSY 32T2K / 64T2K modules
5.2-12 TSX DMY 28FK/DMY 28RFK modules
6 TELEFAST 2 connection interfaces for discrete I/O
Page
TSX Micro I/O module and sub-base compatibility
TSX Premium I/O module and sub-base compatibility
Module v interface sub-base connection principle
Sensor or preactuator connection to sub-bases 6/10
6.5-1 ABE-7H08R10, ABE-7H08R11, ABE-7H16R10,
6.5-2 ABE-7H12R10, ABE-7H12R11 sub-bases
6.5-3 ABE-7H08R21, ABE-7H16R20, ABE-7H16R21,
ABE-7H16R23 sub-bases for type 2 inputs
6.5-4 ABE-7H12R20, ABE-H12R21 sub-bases
6.5-5 ABE-7H08S21, ABE-7H16S21 sub-bases with
6.5-6 ABE-7H12S21 sub-base with 1 isolator per channel
6.5-7 ABE-7H16R30, ABE-7H16R31 sub-bases
6.5-10 ABE-7H16F43 output sub-base with 1 fuse and
6.5-11 ABE-7H16S43 input sub-base with 1 fuse and
6.5-12 Fixed relay output adaptor sub-bases : ABE-7R08S111,
ABE-7R16S111, ABE-7R16S210, ABE-7R16S212
6.5-13 Fixed solid state relay input adaptor sub-bases :
ABE-7S16E2B1, ABE-7S16E2E1, ABE-7S16E2E0,
ABE-7S16E2F0, ABE-7S16E2M0 6/24
___________________________________________________________________________
B1/4
Discrete I/O modules
Contents
Part B1
Section
6.5-14 Solid state output adaptor sub-bases : ABE-7S16S2B0,
ABE-7S16S2B2 and ABE-7S08S2B0, ABE-7S08S2B1
6.5-15 Solid state or electromechanical relay output sub-bases, relay 10mm wide
6.5-16 Electromechanical or solid state relay input or output
Page
Compatibility table for relays and ABE-7R16T iii , ABE-7P16T iii ,
Sub-base electrical characteristics
6.8-1 Fixed input adaptor sub-bases
6.8-2 Fixed solid state output adaptor sub-bases
6.8-3 Fixed relay output adaptor sub-bases
6.8-4 Removable output electromechanical relays
6.8-5 Removable input solid state relays
6.8-6 Fixed output solid state relays
B1
___________________________________________________________________________
B1/5
B1 Discrete I/O modules
Section
Contents
Part B1
Page
___________________________________________________________________________
B1/6
1 Presentation
1.1
Description
1.1-1 General description
Inputs : these receive signals from sensors and perform the acquisition, adaptation, electrical isolation and filtering functions and protect against interference signals.
Outputs : these store instructions given by the processor in order to control preactuators via decoupling and amplifying circuits.
A wide range of discrete inputs and outputs meet requirements encountered on the following levels :
• functional : AC or DC I/O, positive or negative logic,
• connection via screw terminal blocks or HE 10 connectors,
• modularity : 8, 16, 32 or 64 channels/module.
B1
Modularity
C o n n e c t i o n
64 I or 64 Q
HE10 connectors
32 I or 32 Q
32 I
28 I/O
(16 I+12 Q)
16 I
Modularity
Connection
Screw terminal
blocks
(Term i nal blocks not
shown)
64 I or 64 Q 32 I or 32 Q 8/16 I or 8/16 Q 16 Q or 8 Q
B1
1.1-2 Physical description
I/O modules are standard format (1 slot), and are incorporated in a plastic case which provides IP20 protection for all the electronics.
The internal shielding elements are connected to the protective ground for the rack via contacts located at the back of the modules (see part A section 7.1-2).
Modules with connection via screw terminal block
1 Module display and diagnostics block.
2 Removable screw terminal block for direct connection of the I/O to sensors and preactuators.
Reference : TSX BLY 01.
3 Pivoting door providing access to terminal block screws and also acting as a reference label holder.
4 Rotating support containing the locating device.
Notes :
• The terminal blocks are supplied separately.
• Some output modules have integrated fuses, which can be accessed from the front when the terminal block, 2, is removed.
1
4
2
3
4
Modules with connection via HE10 connectors
Each module is composed of the following elements :
1 Module display and diagnostics block.
2 HE10 connectors, protected by a cover. They enable connection of the I/O to sensors and preactuators either directly or via TELEFAST 2 connection sub-bases.
1
2
___________________________________________________________________________
1/2
1.2
Catalog
Module type Inputs with screw terminal block
Presentation 1
B1
M o d u l a r i t y
V o l t a g e
I s o l a t i o n
IEC 1131-2 c o n f o r m i t y
L o g i c
Proximity sensor compatibility
Filtering
C o n n e c t i o n
References
8 inputs
24 VDC
16 inputs
48 VDC 24 VAC
24 VDC
48 VAC 100..120
200..240
VAC VAC
Isolated inputs
Type 2
Positive
(1)
Negative
2-wire DC and 3-wire PNP 2-wire DC & proximity sensors, IEC 947-5-2 3-wire NPN proximity sensor, IEC
947-5-2
2-wire AC proximity sensor (IEC 947-5-2)
Integrated, 50 or 60 Hz supply Integrated 4 ms
Screw terminal block
TSX DEY TSX DEY TSX DEY TSX DEY TSX DEY TSX DEY TSX DEY
08D2 16D2 16D3 16A2 16A3 16A4 16A5
(1) For module TSX DEY 16A2, type 2 conformity only applies to the 24 VAC version
B1
Catalog (continued)
Module type Inputs with HE10 connectors
M o d u l a r i t y
V o l t a g e
16 fast inputs
24 VDC
32 inputs
48 VDC
I s o l a t i o n Isolated inputs
Type 1 IEC 1131-2 c o n f o r m i t y
L o g i c
Type 2
Positive
Proximity sensor compatibility
2-wire proximity sensor, see characteristics section 3.3-1
3-wire PNP proximity sensor fixed 4 ms Filtering (0.1.. 7.5 ms in steps of 0.5)
Programmable filter Yes
Latching Yes
Event Yes
64 inputs
24 VDC
Type 1
Connection
References
HE 10 connectors
TSX DEY
16FK
TSX DEY
32D2K
TSX DEY
32D3K
TSX DEY
64D2K
___________________________________________________________________________
1/4
Presentation 1
B1
Catalog (continued)
Module type Transistor outputs with screw terminal block
M o d u l a r i t y
V o l t a g e
Isolation
Current
IEC 1131-2 conformity
Protection
Fallback
L o g i c
Response time
C o n n e c t i o n
References
8 outputs 16 outputs
24 VDC 48 VDC 24 VDC 48 VDC
Isolated outputs
0.5 A 2 A 1 A 0.5 A 0.25 A
Yes
Outputs protected against short-circuits and overloads with automatic or controlled reactivation with a rapid electromagnet demagnetization circuit
Configurable fallback mode for outputs. Continuous monitoring of output control and outputs set to 0 if an internal fault is detected
Positive
0.3 ms 1 ms 1 ms 1 ms 0.2 ms
Screw terminal block
TSX DSY
08T2
TSX DSY
08T22
TSX DSY
08T31
TSX DSY
16T2
TSX DSY
16T3
B1
Catalog (continued)
Module type Relay outputs with screw terminal block
Modularity
Voltage
Isolation
Current
IEC 1131-2 conformity
Protection
Fallback
Unlocking terminal block
Logic
Connection
References
8 outputs 16 outputs
12..24 VDC or
24..240 VAC
24..130 VDC 24..48 VDC or 12..24 VDC or
24..240 VAC
Outputs isolated between contact and ground
24..240 VAC
3 A 5 A 3 A
Yes
No protection Protection by interchangeable fuses
Outputs set to 0 on detection of a fault, reactivated after fuse replacement
Configurable fallback mode for outputs.
No protection
Automatic output cut-off facility when the terminal block is unlocked
Positive/negative
Screw terminal block
TSX DSY
08R5
TSX DSY
08R4D
TSX DSY
08R5A
TSX DSY
16R5
___________________________________________________________________________
1/6
Catalog (continued)
Module type Triac outputs with screw terminal block
Presentation 1
B1
Modularity
V o l t a g e
Isolation
Current
IEC 1131-2 conformity
Protection
Fallback
Unlocking terminal block
Connection
References
8 outputs
48..240 VAC
16 outputs
Isolated outputs
2 A
Yes
1 A
24..120 VAC
Protection by interchangeable fuses Outputs not protected against shortcircuits or overloads. Flameproof protection by non-interchangeable fuses.
Configurable fallback mode for outputs.
Automatic output cut-off facility when the terminal block is unlocked
Screw terminal block
TSX DSY
08S5
TSX DSY
16S5
TSX DSY
16S4
B1
Catalog (continued)
Module type Solid state outputs with connectors
M o d u l a r i t y
V o l t a g e
Isolation
C u r r e n t
IEC 1131-2 conformity
Protection
Fallback
L o g i c
C o n n e c t i o n
References
32 outputs
24 VDC
64 outputs
Isolated outputs
0.1 A
Yes
Outputs protected against short-circuits and overload with automatic or controlled reactivation
Configurable fallback mode for outputs. Continuous monitoring of output control and outputs set to 0 if an internal fault is detected
Positive
HE 10 connectors
TSX DSY
32T2K
TSX DSY
64T2K
___________________________________________________________________________
1/8
Catalog (continued)
Module type Mixed I/O with connectors
Presentation 1
B1
Modularity
12 outputs
Inputs
Voltage
Isolation
16 fast inputs
24 VDC
Isolated inputs
16 fast inputs
12 reflex outputs
IEC 1131-2 conformity
Logic
Event
Outputs
Voltage
Type 1
Positive
Prox. sensor compatibility 2-wire proximity sensor, see characteristics section 4.2, 3-wire proximity sensor
Programmable filtering (0.1.. 7.5 ms in steps of 0.5)
Latching Yes
Yes
Isolation
Current
IEC 1131-2 conformity
24 VDC
Isolated outputs
0.5 A
Yes
Protection Outputs protected against short-circuits and overloads with automatic or controlled reset with a fast demagnetization circuit for electromagnets
Fallback
Logic
Response time
C o n n e c t i o n
References
Configurable fallback mode for outputs. Continuous monitoring of output control and outputs set to 0 if an internal fault is detected
Positive
0.6 ms
HE 10 connectors
TSX DMY 28FK TSX DMY 28RFK
B1
1.3
Installing, inserting and removing modules
1.3-1 Installation
All TSX Premium discrete I/O modules are standard format.
They are supplied with power by the backplane bus and include a display on the front panel (see section 3.5).
The modules can be placed in either a standard rack or an extendable rack. They can be moved safely without switching off the power supply to the rack.
Extendable rack Standard rack
Modules with connectors
Modules with terminal block
1.3-2 Inserting/removing modules
Discrete I/O modules should be inserted in the rack as follows :
• Position the two pins at the bottom of the card in the corresponding slots in the rack.
• Tilt the module upwards and plug in the backplane connector.
• Tighten the fixing screw at the top of the module (see part A, section 6.4, Mounting modules).
Warning
If this screw is not tightened, the module will not stay in position in the rack.
! Reminder :
Modules must be inserted and removed with the sensor and preactuator supply off and
the terminal block disconnected.
___________________________________________________________________________
1/10
Presentation 1
1.4
Labeling
1.4-1 Modules with screw terminal block
The module has three-fold labeling :
1 on the display block, the module reference,
2 under the display block, the module characteristics
3 on the terminal block, a removable label, to be placed inside the door, printed on both sides with the following information : external view (door closed) :
• module reference,
• type of channels,
• a box for writing in the module position number (address),
• designation of each channel
(symbol), internal view (door open) :
• I/O wiring diagram with channel numbers and connection terminal numbers.
View with door closed
TSX DEY 16D2
16 Current Sinking
Inputs
24VDC IEC type 2
I 0
1
2
3
TSX DEY 16D2
16I 24 VDC
IEC type 2
TSX DEY 16D2
16 Current Sinking
Inputs
24VDC IEC type 2 I 0
13
14
15
9
10
11
12
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
8
9
10
11
12
6
7
4
5
13
14
15
Note :
The terminal block labels are included with the module.
___________________________________________________________________________
View with door open
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
0 VDC
+24 VDC
I 0
1
12
13
14
15
9
10
11
6
7
8
2
3
4
5
B1
B1
1.4-2 Module with HE10 connectors
The module labeling is laser-engraved :
• TSX DEY ii / DSY ii input or output modules
1 Marking on the display block shows :
• the module reference,
2 Marking of module characteristics
3 Marking of addresses of corresponding channels :
• module channels 0 to 15 (I or Q),
4 Marking of addresses of corresponding channels :
• module channels 16 to 31 (I or Q),
5 Marking of addresses of corresponding channels :
• module channels 32 to 47 (I or Q),
6 Marking of addresses of corresponding channels :
• module channels 48 to 63 (I or Q),
• TSX DEY 32D3K input modules and TSX DMY 28FK/28RFK mixed I/O modules
1 Marking on the display block shows :
• the module reference,
2 Marking of module characteristics
3 Marking of addresses of corresponding input channels :
• input channels 0 to 15 of the
TSX DEY 32D3K or TSX DMY 28FK/
28RFK (I) modules,
4 Marking of addresses of corresponding channels :
• input channels 16 to 31 of the
TSX DEY 32D3K (I) module,
• output channels 16 to 27 of the
TSX DMY 28FK/28RFK (Q) modules.
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
5
4
6
___________________________________________________________________________
1/12
Presentation 1
1.5
Channel addressing
Channel addressing is geographical; in other words it depends on :
• the rack address (0 to 7),
• the physical position of the module in the rack :
- 00 to 02 for a rack with 4 slots,
- 00 to 04 for a rack with 6 slots,
- 00 to 06 for a rack with 8 slots,
- 00 to 10 for a rack with 12 slots.
The syntax for a discrete I/O address is as follows :
% I or Q Rack address
Module position
.
Symbol I = Input
Q = Output
0 to 7 00 to 14 Point
Example :
%I102.5 indicates : input bit 5 of the module in position 2 of rack 1.
channel number
0 to 63
For more information, see :
• in this manual - part A - section 7.1,
• in the application-specific manual TLX DS 57 PL7 33E - Volume 1 - part B.
B1
B1
___________________________________________________________________________
1/14
2 Discrete I/O functions
2.1
General functions
2.1-1 Constant current inputs
24 and 48 VDC inputs are "constant current" type. Although the input voltage may be greater than 11 V (for 24 VDC inputs) or 20 V (for 48 VDC inputs), the input current is constant.
This characteristic has the following advantages :
• it ensures minimum current when energized conforming to the IEC standard,
• it limits the current drawn when the input voltage increases, thus avoiding unnecessary temperature rise in the module,
• it reduces the current drawn on the sensor power supply, whether provided by the
PLC power supply or a process power supply.
B1
2.1-2 Protecting DC transistor outputs
All transistor outputs (except those which are specifically marked "Unprotected"), have a protective device which detects the appearance of an overload or short-circuit when an output is active. Any such fault deactivates the output (tripping) and the fault is signaled on the front panel display. The indicator lamp for the faulty channel flashes, and the I//O fault lamp lights up.
The fault is also fed back to the system. Language interface objects and debug screens are used to display the fault.
To use an output after tripping, it must be reactivated (see section 2.1-3).
2.1-3 Reactivating outputs
When an output is tripped following a fault, it can be reactivated so that it is active again.
Reactivation may be either automatic or controlled, depending on the option selected during configuration. This applies to modules with DC transistor outputs and to
modules with relay and triac outputs protected by interchangeable fuses. (See application-specific manual TLX DS 57 PL7 33E - Volume 1 - part B "Discrete functions")
• If the automatic option has been selected, reactivation is executed by the module.
There is a delay of about 10 seconds, and if the fault persists, the reactivation is repeated every 10 seconds until the fault disappears.
• If the controlled option has been selected, reactivation is executed after a command from the application program or from the terminal, via the debug screen. The minimum time between two reactivations is 10 seconds, and the module incorporates a delay to prevent repeated reactivations occurring very close together.
Reactivation affects one group of 8 channels at a time, but has no effect on channels which are not active or faulty.
___________________________________________________________________________
2/1
B1
2.1-4 Output fallback
All TSX Premium discrete module outputs can be placed in a state determined by the user when there is a fault on the PLC bus (base rack or extension rack), or if the processor stops. This state, known as the fallback position, is selected during configuration.
Several options are available :
• Fallback strategy configured per group of 8 channels with one of the following options :
- maintain channel states (last state given by the module),
- switch to fallback position.
• Fallback value : if switching to fallback position is requested, all 8 channels in the same group will take the fallback value (0 or 1) set during configuration. The fallback value is determined channel by channel.
2.1-5 Sharing the I/O
Each module is split functionally into groups of 8 channels. Each group of channels can be assigned to a specific application task. This is most useful for modules with a large number of channels (eg : TSX DEY 64D2K) where, for example, 48 channels could be assigned to the Master task (Mast), 8 channels to a Fast task (Fast) and 8 channels would not be used for any task.
This property can be accessed in the PL7 Junior / PL7 Pro software in configuration mode.
Note :
Inputs belonging to a single group (of channels) can easily be used by different tasks. When sharing the output channels of the same group, it is wise to take a certain number of precautions.
The channels of a single group have consecutive numbers, the first channel of each group always being a multiple of 8, (eg channels 0 to 7, 8 to 15, ... 24 to 31, ... 56 to 63).
Operating modes are common to channels in a group, and some functions are handled in common for all the channels in a group.
Example :
• Fallback strategy.
• Reactivation of outputs after tripping.
___________________________________________________________________________
2/2
2 Discrete I/O functions 2
2.2
Specific functions for certain modules
2.2-1 Programmable input filtering for TSX DEY 16 FK and TSX DMY 28FK/
DMY 28RFK modules
The input filter time for TSX DEY 16FK, TSX DMY 28FK and TSX DMY 28RFK modules can be modified in configuration mode.
Input filtering is performed by :
• a fixed analog filter which provides maximum immunity for 0.1 ms to filter out line interference,
• a digital filter which can be configured in increments of 0.5 ms. This filtering can be modified in configuration mode via the terminal.
B1
Configurable filter times (in ms)
0.1
1 2 3
0.5
1.5
2.5
The default filter time is 4 ms.
3.5
4
4.5
5
5.5
6
6.5
7
7.5
Note
• To avoid signals due to contact bounce when mechanical contacts are closed, it is advisable to use filter times of more than 3ms.
• In order to comply with standard IEC 1131-2, the filter time must be set to
≥
3.5 ms.
___________________________________________________________________________
2/3
B1
2.2-2 Latching inputs on TSX DEY 16 FK and DMY 28FK modules
Principle
Use the latching function to take account of particularly short pulses and those which are shorter than the PLC scan time.
This function takes the pulse into account so that it may be processed in the master
(MAST) or fast (FAST) task during the next scan without interrupting the PLC scan.
The pulse is taken into account when the input changes state. This may be either :
• change from state 0 vÆ
to state 1,
• change from state 1 v
to state 0,
Example of processing a latch on pulse 0 v 1
PLC scan n
PLC scan n+1
PLC scan n+2
PLC scan n+3
PLC scan n+4
PLC scan
I P Q I P Q I P Q I P Q I P Q
Pulse arrival
Inputs latched
1
0
1
0
Example of processing a latch on pulse 1 v 0
PLC scan n
PLC scan n+1
PLC scan n+2
PLC scan n+3
PLC scan n+4
PLC scan
I P Q I P Q I P Q I P Q I P Q
Pulse arrival
1
0
Inputs latched
1
0
,, Reading and processing
Key
I = read inputs, P = process program, Q = update outputs
Note
The time which separates the arrival of two pulses on the same input must be greater than or equal to the time of two PLC scans.
The minimum duration of the pulse should be greater than the filter time selected.
___________________________________________________________________________
2/4
2 Discrete I/O functions 2
2.2-3 Event management on inputs for TSX DEY 16 FK and TSX DMY 28 FK modules
Principle
TSX DEY 16FK and TSX DMY 28FK modules can be used to configure up to 16 event-triggered inputs. These inputs enable acceptance of events and ensure their immediate processing (interrupt processing). Event-triggered processing is assigned
priority 0. Event 0 is only associated with channel 0.
These inputs can be associated with event-triggered processing (Evti) and are defined in configuration mode by :
• i = 0 to 31 for TSX/TPMX P57102 and TPCX 57 1012 processors
• i = 0 to 63 for TSX/TPMX P57 2 i 2 processors
• i = 0 to 63 for TSX/TPMX P57 3 i 2 and TPCX 57 3512 processors
• i = 0 to 63 for TSX/TPMX P57 4 i 2 processors
Event-triggered processing is initiated on a rising edge (0 v 1) or falling edge (1 v 0) of the associated input or simply on an edge : an EVT state (see Language interface) enables it to be differentiated during processing.
When two edges are detected on a module simultaneously, the events are processed in ascending order of channel number.
The principle of event-triggered processing is defined in part A, section 1.6-5 of the reference manual.
The recursion time of the edges on each input or the pulse width on an input programmed as RE + FE must correspond to the following diagram :
B1
RE or
FE
T recursion
RE
+
FE
T width
T recursion or T width > 0.25 ms + 0.25 X module event number
• Max. frequency of Evt = 1kHz / module Evt number
• Max number of events in bursts : 100 Evt per 100 ms
___________________________________________________________________________
2/5
B1
2.2-4 Reflex and timer functions on the TSX DMY 28RFK module
This module is used for applications which require a response time faster than the FAST task or only event processing (< 500
µ s).
It is used for control system functions executed at module level and independently of the PLC task, using the following as input variables :
• the physical inputs (%I) of the module
• the output commands (%Q) of the module
• the channel or module fault data
• the states of the module physical outputs
These functions are programmed using PL7 software in configuration mode. The configuration screen for each output comprises two main parts :
• one part representing a simplified ladder rung layout with 4 lines of 4 contacts to achieve a combinational logic function of the input variables listed above,
• the other part representing the function used which can be either direct control of the output using the configured combinational logic, or a function block.
%I5.2
%I5.3
%I5.4
%Q5.20
ERR 2
%I5.8
ERR 3
%I5.7
%Q5.25
%I5.2
%I5.3
%I5.4
%Q5.20
Val
Monostable
%Q
5.25
ERR 2
%I5.8
ERR 3
Sel
%I5.7
___________________________________________________________________________
2/6
2 Discrete I/O functions 2
List of main function blocks :
• on-delay timer function block
• off-delay timer function block
• on-delay/off-delay timer function block
• 2-value timer function block
• selectable on-delay/off-delay timer function block
• retriggerable monostable function block
• time-delayed non-retriggerable monostable function block
• 2-value monostable function block
• oscillator function block
• dual threshold counter function block
• single threshold counter with monostable function block
• interval counter function block used to measure time or length
• Burst function block used to generate a defined number of oscillator periods
• PWM function block used to generate continuous oscillation with a fixed frequency but variable cyclic ratio
• slow speed detection function block
• speed monitoring function block
• command / control function block used to control an action and to check that it has been executed within a given time :
- type 1 command / control function block : (1 single command),
- type 2 command / control function block : (2 commands, FWD and REV),
• function block command during a number of counting points (standard positioning),
• fault indication function block,
• D latch function block, memorization of edge,
• T latch function block, division by 2.
A further description of these various function blocks and their software setup can be found in the application-specific manual TLX DS 57 PL7 33E - Volume 1 - part B.
B1
___________________________________________________________________________
2/7
B1
2.3
Diagnostic functions
Dialog fault
Any communication fault, hindering normal operation of an output module or the fast input module, is indicated on the front panel by the red module "ERR" lamp flashing, and by the %@ module.ERR fault bit.
A communication fault can be caused by a hardware fault on the backplane bus, by a processor fault or by a faulty extension cable.
Internal module fault
Any internal fault which the module is able to detect is indicated on the front panel by the red "ERR" lamp coming on and the green "RUN" lamp going off.
Some instances of total module failure cannot be detected but are characterized by all lamps going off (as with a power supply fault).
2.3-2 Process diagnostics
Monitoring sensor/preactuator voltage
All input modules and transistor output modules have a device for monitoring the sensor and preactuator voltage.
When the sensor or preactuator voltage is below a certain threshold at which correct module operation cannot be ensured, the red I/O lamp lights up, and the "External voltage" fault is also indicated in the language objects.
• For an input module, when the sensor voltage is correct, the state perceived by the input is indeed that of the sensor, whatever type of sensor is being used (within the recommended range).
• For an output module, when the preactuator voltage is correct, the state determined for the preactuator is the state determined by the application. However, it is up to the user to check that the preactuator supply voltage is within the range accepted
by the preactuators being used (bear in mind the residual output voltage).
This monitoring is unique to modules with terminal blocks. On 32 or 64-channel modules with connectors, there is one monitoring device per connector (or one for every 16 channels).
A sensor or actuator voltage fault causes all inputs and outputs affected by the fault to switch to fault mode, that is all channels for a module with terminal block, and the group(s) of 16 channels, on a 32 or 64-channel module with connectors.
Note :
Relay and triac output modules do not monitor preactuator voltage.
___________________________________________________________________________
2/8
2 Discrete I/O functions 2
Monitoring the presence of the terminal block
All modules with connection via terminal block include a facility for checking that the terminal block is on the module. If the terminal block is missing or if it is not properly attached to the module, the "I/O" lamp flashes and a "Terminal block" fault is indicated in the language interface.
Module with connectors do not have a facility for monitoring the presence of connectors.
The module power supply monitoring performs this function.
Monitoring short-circuit and overload
Transistor output modules include a load state monitoring facility. If there is a short-circuit or an overload on one or more outputs, they trip. The faults are indicated on the front panel by the lamps of the faulty channels flashing, and by the red "I/O" lamp lighting up.
The faults are indicated in the language interface by the "Short-circuit fault" bit on each channel and by the "Trip" bit of channel groups per module.
The tripping of a channel is indicated by :
• I/O indicator lamp on (I/O fault),
• channel lamp flashing,
• channel fault bit being set to 1 (%Ix.i.ERR =1),
• a fault bit in the module status word.
Monitoring sensor voltage
All input modules include a facility for monitoring the sensor voltage for all module channels. This facility checks that the supply voltage for the sensors and the module is at a sufficient level to ensure correct operation of the module input channels (see section
4 for the various characteristics of each module).
If the sensor voltage is lower than or equal to a defined threshold, it is signaled by :
• I/O indicator lamp on (I/O fault),
• channel fault bit %Ix.i.ERR =1,
• a fault bit in the module status word and in the channel status word.
Note : The sensor supply should be protected by a fast blow fuse.
Monitoring preactuator voltage
All modules with 24/48 VDC transistor outputs include a facility for monitoring the preactuator supply voltage for all module channels. This facility checks that the supply voltage for the preactuator and the module is at a sufficient level to ensure correct operation of the module output channels.
This voltage should be greater than 18V (24 VDC power supply), 36 V (48 VDC power supply) for modules with DC transistor outputs. If the preactuator voltage is less than or equal to this threshold, the outputs change to state 0 and the fault is indicated by :
• I/O indicator lamp ON (I/O fault),
• channel fault bit %Ix.i.ERR =1,
• a fault bit in the module status word and in the channel status word.
___________________________________________________________________________
2/9
B1
B1
2.4
Protection
2.4-1 Built-in protection for 24 VDC transistor output modules
Protection of each channel against short-circuits and overload
All channels incorporate a protection device providing protection against this type of fault.
Protection against polarity reversal
Modules have a device which causes the power supply to short-circuit, without damaging the module, to protect against polarity reversal.
In order for this protection to function in optimum conditions, it is essential to place a fast blow fuse on the power supply upstream of the preactuators.
Note :
As a general rule it is advisable to fit one fuse for all the module output channels; see section 4.3 for a table of characteristics.
Protection against inductive overvoltages
Each output is individually protected against inductive overvoltages and is equipped with a zener diode fast demagnetization circuit for electromagnets which enables a reduction in the mechanical cycle time of certain fast machines.
2.4-2 Fuse protection
TSX DSY 08R5A/08R4D modules and
TSX DSY 08S5/16S5 output modules are equipped with interchangeable fuses which can be accessed on the front panel of the modules when the terminal block is removed.
If there is a fault, the front panel displays the module diagnostics.
The I/O indicator lamp is on; the channel fault bit %Ix.i.ERR =1.
Interchangeable fuses
The fuses can be accessed once the terminal block has been removed.
___________________________________________________________________________
2/10
2 Discrete I/O functions 2
2.4-3 Protection of relay output contacts (TSX DSY 08R5/16R5)
These relay outputs do not include a protection device for the contacts so as to enable control of :
Preactuator
• electrically isolated inputs, with a low energy level which require zero leakage current,
• power circuits, by eliminating induced overvoltages at source.
For this reason, it is imperative to connect the following to the terminals of the preactuator coils :
- an RC circuit or an MOV (ZNO) peak limiter, for use with AC supply,
- a discharge diode for use with DC supply.
Relay contact
Module
Relay contact
Preactuator
B1
Note : A relay output used on an AC load must not then be used on a DC load and vice versa.
___________________________________________________________________________
2/11
B1
___________________________________________________________________________
2/12
3 General installation rules
3.1
Recommendations for use
Installation/removal of screw terminal blocks or HE10 connectors
Screw terminal blocks or HE10 connectors are installed or removed with the power supply to the preactuators and sensors off.
Inserting and removing modules
The terminal block must be disconnected when modules are inserted and removed, however, this can be done while the PLC is powered up.
Locking modules into their slot
In order to ensure that the contacts and electrical ground are securely connected, the fixing lock on the modules should be pushed in as far as possible.
Choice of DC power supplies for sensors and preactuators
Regulated or rectified power supplies with filtering
When using external 24 VDC power supplies, it is advisable to use :
• either regulated power supplies,
• or non regulated power supplies with filtering of :
- 1000 µF/A for full wave single rectification and 500 µF/A for 3-phase rectification,
- Maximum ripple (peak to peak) : 5%
- Maximum voltage variation : - 20% to + 25% of the nominal voltage
(ripple included)
Note :
Unfiltered rectified power supplies must not be used.
Cadmium/nickel battery power supply
This type of power supply may be used for the sensors and preactuators as well as the associated I/O. In normal operation, the latter tolerate a maximum voltage of 30 VDC.
When this type of battery is being charged, the battery voltage may reach 34 VDC for a duration of 1 hour. For this reason, all I/O modules operating on 24 VDC tolerate a voltage of 34 VDC, limited to 1 hour in 24 hours.
This type of operation has the following restrictions :
• the maximum current at 34 VDC tolerated by the outputs must never exceed the current defined for a voltage of 30 VDC,
• a derating in temperature which limits to :
- 80% of the I/O at state 1 up to 30°C,
- 50% of the I/O at state 1 at 60°C.
B1
___________________________________________________________________________
3/1
B1
3.2
General wiring rules and recommendations
Discrete I/O contain protection circuits ensuring excellent immunity to industrial conditions. However, certain rules must be observed :
External power supplies for sensors and preactuators
These power supplies must be protected against short-circuits and overloads by fast blow fuses.
Caution
If the 24 VDC installation does not conform to SELV standards (safety extra low voltage), the 0V of the 24 VDC power supplies must be connected to the mechanical ground, which itself must be taken to ground as near to the power supply unit as possible. This is necessary for the safety of personnel in the event of one of the AC supply phases coming into contact with the 24 VDC.
Note :
If an I/O module with a screw terminal block or HE10 connector is present in the PLC, the sensor or preactuator voltage must be connected to it, otherwise an "external power supply" fault will be displayed with the I/O LED on.
For module with connectors, the sensor/preactuator power supply must be connected to each connector, except if the corresponding channels are not used and have not been assigned to any task (See the "Discrete functions" section in the applicationspecific installation manual).
Inputs
• Usage recommendations for fast input modules (TSX DEY 16 FK/DMY 28FK/DMY 28RFK)
- when using 24 VDC inputs, it is advisable to set the filter time for the required function.
- if the filter time is reduced to less than 3 ms, use of sensors with mechanical contact outputs is not recommended in order to avoid the effect of contact bounce when the contact is closed.
- in order to achieve optimal operation, the use of DC inputs and sensors is recommended as AC inputs have a much longer response time.
• 24 VDC inputs and line coupling with AC supply
Close coupling between cables carrying AC and cables carrying DC input signals may interfere with operation.
(see simplified schematic on the next page)
___________________________________________________________________________
3/2
General installation rules 3
24 VDC inputs and line coupling with an AC supply (continued)
Simplified schematic
– a power supply
+
M o d u l e
C
+24 VDC
Input %I.
–0 VDC
Output %Q
.
L N to c power supply
The power supply has the neutral connected directly or indirectly to ground
When the contact at the input is open, AC crossing the parasitic capacitance of the cable may generate a current in the input which may cause it to change to state 1.
Line capacitance not to be exceeded.
The following values are given for coupling with a 240 VAC/50 Hz line.
For coupling with a different voltage, apply the following formula :
Permissible capacitance = Capacitance at 240 VAC x 240
line voltage
Modules
TSX DEY 32/64D2K
TSX DEY 16D2 45 nF
TSX DEY 16FK/DMY 28FK Filtering 1.1 ms
TSX DMY 28RFK
Max. permissible coupling capacitance with 240 VAC/50 Hz line
25 nF
Capacity 10 nF
3.5 ms
30 nF
7.5 ms
60 nF
Note :
By way of an example, a standard 1 meter cable has a coupling capacitance of 100 to 150 pF.
B1
___________________________________________________________________________
3/3
B1
• 24 to 240 VAC inputs and line coupling
In this case, when the line controlling the input is open, current circulates due to the capacitance of the cable coupling.
Simplified schematic
N a power supply
L
M o d u l e
C
L
Input %I.
N
Line capacitance not to be exceeded :
Module
TSX DEY 16A2
TSX DEY 16A3
TSX DEY 16A4
TSX DEY 16A5
Maximum coupling capacitance
50 nF
60 nF
70 nF
85 nF
Outputs
• for high currents, it is advisable to segment the terminal connections by protecting each one with a fast blow fuse,
• use wire of sufficient cross-section to avoid voltage drops and temperature rises.
Cable routing
• inside and outside the equipment,
In order to limit the AC coupling, power circuit cables (power supply, power contactors, etc) must be separated from the input cables (sensors) and the output cables (preactuators).
• outside the equipment,
I/O cables must be placed in a sheath separate to that used for power cables and placed in separate metal ducting, which must be connected to ground. These cables must be separated by a minimum distance of 100 mm.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/4
General installation rules 3
3.3
Compatibility of sensors v inputs and preactuators v outputs
3.3-1 Compatibility of sensors with inputs
Compatibility between 3-wire sensors and 24 and 48 VDC inputs
• 3-wire sensors and positive logic inputs (sink)
IEC 1131-2 type 1 and type 2,
All inductive or capacitive proximity sensors, 3-wire
PNP type photoelectric detectors, operating at 24 and
48 VDC, are compatible with all positive logic inputs.
+
PNP
–
+
–
%I.
(Input)
Module
• 3-wire sensors and negative logic inputs (source)
All inductive or capacitive proximity sensors and 3wire NPN type photoelectric detectors, operating at 24
VDC, are compatible with negative logic inputs from the Premium range.
+
NPN
–
+
%I.
(Input)
Compatibility between 2-wire sensors and 24 VDC inputs
• 2-wire sensors and positive logic inputs (sink)
IEC 1131-2 type 1.
All proximity sensors or other 2-wire sensors, operating at 24 VDC and having the characteristics listed below, are compatible with all 24 VDC positive logic type 1 inputs from the Premium range.
Residual voltage at closed state :
≤
7 V
Minimum switching current :
≤
2.5 mA
Residual current at open state :
≤
1.5 mA.
• 2-wire sensors and positive logic inputs (sink)
IEC 1131-2 type 2.
All 2-wire proximity sensors, operating at 24 and 48
VDC and conforming to standard IEC 947-5-2, are compatible with all 24 and 48 VDC positive logic type
2 inputs.
• 2-wire sensors and negative logic inputs (source)
All proximity sensors or other 2-wire sensors, operating at 24 VDC and having the characteristics listed below, are compatible with all 24 VDC negative logic type inputs from the Premium range.
Residual voltage at closed state :
≤
7 V
Minimum switching current :
≤
2.5 mA
Residual current at open state :
≤
1.5 mA.
+
+
–
+
–
+
–
+
Module
%I.
(Input)
Module
%I.
(Input)
Module
%I.
(Input)
–
–
Module
___________________________________________________________________________
3/5
B1
B1
Compatibility between 2-wire sensors and 24/48/100...120/200...240 VAC inputs
All 2-wire AC proximity sensors conforming to standard IEC 947-5-2 and other 100...120
VAC sensors are compatible with all 110...120 VAC IEC 1131-2 type 2 inputs.
All 2-wire AC proximity sensors conforming to standard IEC 947-5-2 and other 200...240
VAC sensors are compatible with all 200...240 VAC IEC 1131-2 type 2 inputs from the
Premium range in the 220...240 VAC range.
Summary table
Type of input
Type of proximity sensor
24 VDC 24/48 VDC 24 VDC 24/48 VAC
Type 1 Type 2 100..120 VAC positive positive negative Type 2 logic logic logic
200...240 VAC
Type 2
All 3-wire prox. sensors (DC), PNP
All 3-wire prox. sensors (DC), NPN
Telemecanique or other 2-wire
Proximity sensors (DC) with the following characteristics:
Residual voltage at closed state
≤
7V
Minimum switching current
≤
2.5 mA
Residual current at open state
≤
1.5 mA
2-wire proximity sensor (AC/DC)
2-wire proximity sensor (AC)
(1) in nominal voltage range 220...240 VAC
Key
DC : operates at a voltage
AC : operates at c voltage
AC/DC : operates at c or a voltage
(1)
(1)
Compatibility
___________________________________________________________________________
3/6
General installation rules 3
3.3-2 Compatibility of preactuators with outputs
Compatibility between DC preactuators and outputs
• Respect the maximum current and output switching frequency specified in the characteristics tables.
• In the case of low consumption preactuators, the output leakage current at rest state must be taken into account such that :
I nominal • 50 x I leakage,
I nominal = current drawn by the preactuator,
I leakage = leakage current in the output at rest state.
Compatibility between tungsten filament lamps and transistor outputs (constant current)
• For outputs with protection against short-circuits, respect the maximum power of the tungsten filament lamps specified in the characteristics tables, otherwise there is the risk of tripping the outputs due to the lamp pull-in current at the moment of illumination.
Compatibility between AC preactuators and relay outputs
• Preactuators with inductive AC have a pull-in current which may exceed the holding current by ten times during a maximum time of 2/F seconds (F= AC frequency). For this reason, the relay outputs are designed to withstand this duty cycle (AC14 and
AC15). The characteristics table for relay outputs specifies the maximum permitted holding power (in VA) as a function of the number of operations.
Reminder of the definition of thermal current
The current which may continuously flow through a closed relay, with an acceptable rise in temperature. Under no circumstances should this current be switched by the relay.
Compatibility between filament lamp and triac outputs
• respect the maximum power equal to U x I max.
Compatibility between AC preactuators and triac outputs
• respect the maximum specified current,
• In the case of low consumption preactuators, the output leakage current at rest state must be taken into account such that :
I nominal • 50 x I leakage,
I nominal = current drawn by the preactuator,
I leakage = leakage current in the output at rest state.
B1
___________________________________________________________________________
3/7
B1
3.3-3 Using negative logic (24 VDC)
Negative logic (Source inputs / Sink outputs) can be used with the following modules :
• for the inputs :
- TSX DEY16A2 (this module intended for use with AC, can also be used with DC : negative logic).
Caution :
The filter time for the inputs of the TSX DEY 16A2 module is between 10 and 20 ms.
• for the outputs :
- relay outputs modules : TSX DSY 16R5 or TSX DSY 08R4D.
Wiring diagram :
Input module : TSX DEY 16A2
2-wire proximity sensor
+24 VDC
0 V
3-wire NPN p r o x i m i t y s e n s o r
+
8
10
12
–
14
16
18
20
2
4
6
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
I 0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
7
9
11
13
1
3
5
15
Comment :
The use of negative logic is not recommended when the sensor 0V is connected to ground. This is because if one of the wires were to be accidentally disconnected and come into contact with the mechanical ground, the input might be set to state
3/8
General installation rules 3
Relay output module : TSX DSY 16R5
+24 VDC
Loads
Fuses
8
10
16
18
2
4
6
12
14
20
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
Q0
1
2
3
5
6
C0-3
4
7
C4-7
8
9
10
11
C8-11
12
13
14
15
C12-15
0 V
Relay output module : TSX DSY 08R4D
+24...130 VDC
1
2
Q0
Loads
4
6
*
8
3
5
*
7
Q1
C0-1
*(24 V strap)
C2-3
9
Q2
10
11
Q3
12
14
13
*
15
Q4
C4-5
Q5
16
18
17
*
19
Q6
C6-7
Q7
20
0 V
(*) : Strap required for the 24 V
___________________________________________________________________________
3/9
B1
B1
3.4
Software installation and associated language objects
Discrete I/O used in the application program should be software configured using a configuration editor :
• declaration of the various modules in their respective position (in the rack),
• definition of the channel parameters for each module :
- filter time for fast inputs,
- assignment of channels to a task,
- type of output reactivation,
- fallback mode for output channels,
- etc.
The software installation and the language objects associated with discrete I/O are described in the PL7 Junior / PL7 Pro software installation manual TLX DS 57 PL7 33E,
Volume 1.
3.5
Discrete I/O display and diagnostics
The use and operation of display blocks is described in this manual in part C,
"Maintenance/Diagnostics".
The discrete I/O diagnostics are based on
3 indicator lamps :
• RUN green,
• ERR red,
• I/O red, on the front panel of each module as shown in the diagram opposite.
The zone below the diagnostic indicator lamps contains the lamps which relate to the input or output channels.
The channel is active when the corresponding lamp is on.
64-channel modules also have a +32 indicator lamp.
Lamps : RUN - ERR - I/O
Channel status lamps
___________________________________________________________________________
3/10
General installation rules 3
There are several different display blocks depending on the module :
• 8-channel modules have :
- 3 module status lamps,
- 8 channel status lamps,
• 16-channel modules have :
- 3 module status lamps,
- 16 channel status lamps,
RUN ERR
I / O
RUN ERR
I / O
5
6
3
4
7
0
1
2
5
6
3
4
7
0
1
2
11
12
13
14
15
8
9
10
B1
• 28, 32 and 64-channel modules have :
- 3 module status lamps,
- 1 + 32 lamp, displaying channels
32 to 63 for the 64 channel
module,
- 32 channel status lamps.
5
6
3
4
7
0
1
2
RUN
+ 32
ERR
I / O
11
12
13
14
15
8
9
10
19
20
21
22
23
16
17
18
27
28
29
30
31
24
25
26
Note : for mixed I/O modules with 28 I/O,
TSX DMY 28FK/28RFK :
• lamps 0 to 15 display the state of the inputs,
• lamps 16 to 27 display the state of the outputs,
Switch for displaying channels higher than 31. Only on
64-channel modules.
Example : displaying channel
41, lamps 9 and +32 lit if the channel is at state 1
___________________________________________________________________________
3/11
B1
___________________________________________________________________________
3/12
4 Characteristics
4.1
Characteristics of input modules with terminal block
4.1-1 24 - 48 VDC positive logic input modules
B1
Module reference
Nominal input Voltage
TSX DEY 08D2 / 16D2
24 VDC
TSX DEY 16D3
48 VDC values
Input limit values
Input impedance
Response time
Dielectric strength
Insulation resistance
Type of input
Current at state 1 Voltage
Current at state 0 Voltage
Current
Sensor supply
(ripple included)
(at U nominal) typical/maximum
7 mA
≥
11 V
≥
6.5 mA
(for U = 11V)
≤
5 V
≤
2 mA
7 mA
≥
30 V
≥
6.5 mA
(for U = 30V)
≤
≤
10 V
2 mA
19...30 V (possible up to 38...60 V
34 V, limited to 1 hour per
24 hours)
4 k
Ω
7 k
Ω
4 ms / 7 ms 4 ms / 7 ms
IEC 1131-2 conformity type 2
Compatibility 2-wire/3-wire prox. sensors (1) IEC 947-5-2 type 2
IEC 947-5-2
1 500 V rms, 50/60 Hz for 1 min
10 M
Ω
(at 500 VDC) current sink current sink
Paralleling of inputs (1)
Sensor voltage O K
Y e s
> 18 V monitoring threshold Fault < 14 V
Monitoring response time on appearance 1 ms < T < 3 ms on disappearance 8 ms < T < 30 ms
Consumption 5V
Sensor supply typical maximum typical
55/80 mA
65/90 mA
25 mA + (7 x N) mA
Y e s
> 36 V
< 24 V
1 ms < T < 3 ms
8 ms < T < 30 ms
80 mA
90 mA
25 mA+(7 x N) mA
consumption (3) maximum
Dissipated power (3)
Temperature
derating (3)
33 mA + (7 x N) mA
1W + (0.15 x N) W
33 mA+(7 x N) mA
1W + (0.3 x N) W
The characteristics at 60°C are ensured for 60% of the inputs at state 1
(this characteristic is not relevant to module TSX DEY 08D2).
(1) See section 3.3-1
(2) This characteristic enables several inputs to be wired in parallel on the same module, or on different modules if redundant inputs are required.
(3) N = Number of channels at 1
(4) See section 4.2-4.
4/1
B1
4.1-2 24 VDC negative logic input module
Module reference
Nominal input values
Input limit values
Voltage
Current at state 1 Voltage
Current at state 0 Voltage
Input impedance
Response time
Current
Sensor supply
(ripple included) at U nominal typical maximum
IEC 1131-2 conformity
TSX DEY 16A2
24 VDC
16 mA (outgoing)
≤
Usup — 14V
≥
6.5 mA (outgoing)
≥
Usup — 5 V
≤
2 mA (outgoing)
19...30 V (possible up to 34 V, limited to
1 hour per 24 hours)
1.6 k
Ω
10 ms
20 ms
Negative logic not considered in the standard
Compatibility 2-wire/3-wire prox. sensors (1) IEC 947-5-2
Dielectric strength
Insulation resistance
Type of input
Paralleling of inputs
1500 V rms, 50/60 Hz for 1 min
10 M
Ω
(at 500 VDC) resistive
No
Sensor voltage monitoring threshold
Monitoring response time
Consumption 5V
O K
Fault
> 18 V
< 14 V on appearance 20 ms < T < 40 ms
Sensor supply consumption
Dissipated power typical on disappearance 5 ms < T < 10 ms
80 mA maximum 90 mA typical maximum
15 mA + (15 x No. of channels at 1) mA
19 mA + (15 x No. of channels at 1) mA
1W + (0.4 x No. of channels at 1) W
Temperature
derating (2)
The characteristics at 60°C are ensured for 60% of the inputs at state 1
(1) See section 3.3-1
(2) See section 4.2-4.
___________________________________________________________________________
4/2
Characteristics 4
4.1-3 AC voltage input modules
Module reference
Nominal input
Voltage
Current
TSX DEY TSX DEY TSX DEY
16A2 16A3 16A4
TSX DEY
16A5
24 VAC 48 VAC 100..120 VAC 200..240 VAC
15 mA 16 mA 12 mA 15 mA values
Input limit values
Type of input
Frequency at state 1 at state 0
Frequency
Sensor supply
Peak current on activation (at U nominal)
Input impedance at U nominal
Response time
IEC 1131-2 conformity
Voltage
50 / 60 Hz
≥
10 V
≥
29 V
≥
74 V
Current
≥
6 mA
≥
6 mA
≥
6 mA
(U=10V) (U=29V) (U=74V)
Voltage
≤
5 V
≤
10 V
≤
20 V
Current
≤
4 mA
≤
4 mA
≤
4 mA
47...63 Hz
Activation
Deactivation
20...26 V 40...52 V 85..132 V
15 mA 80 mA 160 mA
≥
≤
159 V
≥
6 mA
(U=159V)
≤
40 V
4 mA
170...264V
300 mA
1.6 k
Ω
3.2 k
Ω
9.2 k
Ω
20 k
Ω
Resistive Capacitive Capacitive Capacitive
15 ms
20 ms type 2
10 ms
20 ms type 2
Compatibility 2-wire prox. sensors (1) IEC 947-5-2
10 ms
20 ms type 2
10 ms
20 ms type 1
Sensor voltage O K monitoring threshold Fault
Monitoring on appearance
> 18 V > 36 V > 82 V
< 14 V < 24 V < 40 V
20 ms < T < 50 ms
> 164 V
< 80 V response time
Consumption 5V
Consumption sensor supply
Power
dissipated (2) on disappearance typical/maximum
5 ms < T < 15 ms
80/90 mA 80/90 mA 80/90 mA typical/maximum 15/19 mA 16/20 mA 15/19 mA
+(15xN) +(16xN) +(15xN) m A m A m A
1 W+ 1 W 1 W
(0.35xN)W (0.35xN)W (0.35xN)W
80/90 mA
12/16 mA
+(12xN) m A
1 W
(0.4xN)W
Dielectric strength
Insulation resistance
Input / ground or 1500 Vrms1500 Vrms 1500 Vrms 2000 Vrms
Input/internal logic (50/60 Hz for 1 minute)
> 10 M
Ω
at 500 VDC
Temperature derating (2) The characteristics at 60°C are ensured for
60% of the inputs at state 1
(1) See section 3.3-1 (2) N = Number of channels at 1 (3) See section 4.2-4.
4/3
B1
B1
4.2
Characteristics of input modules with connectors
4.2-1 24 VDC positive logic fast input module
Reference
Nominal input values
Input limit values
Voltage
Current at state 1 Voltage
Current at state 0 Voltage
Current
Sensor supply
(ripple included)
Input impedance at U nominal
Response time Default
Configurable filtering
Type of input
Paralleling of inputs (1)
IEC 1131-2 conformity
TSX DEY 16FK
24 VDC
3.5 mA
≥
11 V
≥
3 mA
≤
5 V
≤
1.5 mA
19...30 V (possible up to 34 V, limited to
1 hour per 24 hours)
6.3 k
Ω
4 ms
0.1...7.5 ms (in increments of 0.5) current sink
Y e s
Type 1
Compatibility 2-wire proximity sensor (2)Y e s
3-wire proximity sensor (2)Y e s
O K > 18 V Sensor voltage monitoring threshold Fault
Monitoring response time
Consumption 5V on appearance on disappearance typical maximum
< 14 V
8 ms < T < 30 ms
1 ms < T < 3 ms
250 mA
300 mA
Sensor supply consumption
Dissipated power
Dielectric strength
Input / ground or internal logic
Insulation resistance
Temperature
derating (3) typical maximum
20 mA + (3.5 mA per input at 1)
30 mA + (3.5 mA per input at 1)
1.2 W + (0.1 W x No. of channels at 1)
1 500 V rms, 50/60 Hz for 1 minute
> 10 M
Ω
at 500 VDC
The characteristics at 60°C are ensured for 60 % of inputs at state 1
(1) This characteristic enables several inputs to be wired in parallel on the same module, or on different modules if redundant inputs are required.
(2) See section 3.3-1
(3) See section 4.2-4.
___________________________________________________________________________
4/4
Characteristics 4
4.2-2 24 VDC and 48 VDC 32-channel positive logic input modules
Reference
Type of input
TSX DEY 32D2K TSX DEY 32D3K
Nominal input values
Input limit values
Input impedance at U nominal
Response time
Voltage 24 VDC
Current 3.5 mA at state 1 Voltage
≥
11 V
Current
≥
3 mA at state 0 Voltage
≤
5 V
Current
≤
1.5 mA
Sensor supply
(ripple included)
7 mA
≥
30 V
≥
6.5 mA (for U=30V)
≤
10 V
≤
2 mA
19...30 V (possible up to 34 V, limited to
1 hour per 24 hours)
6.3 k
Ω
4 ms
6.3 k
Ω
4 ms
48 VDC
38...60 V
IEC 1131-2 conformity Type 1
Compatibility 2-wire and 3-wire proximity sensor Yes (1) current sink
Type 2
Y e s current sink
Paralleling of inputs
Sensor voltage O K monitoring threshold Fault
Monitoring on appearance response time on disappearance
Consumption 5V Typical
Maximum
Sensor supply consumption
Dissipated power
Typical
Maximum
No
> 18 V
< 14 V < 24 V
8 ms < T < 30 ms
1 ms < T < 3 ms
135 mA
155 mA
Y e s
> 36 V
300 mA
350 mA
30 mA + (3.5xN) mA 50 mA + (7xN) mA
40 mA + (3.5xN) mA 66 mA + (7xN) mA
1 W + (0.1 W 2.5 W + (0.34 W x No. of channels at 1) x No. of channels at 1)
Dielectric strength
Input / ground or internal logic
Insulation resistance
Temperature
derating (2)
N = Number of channels at 1
(1) See section 3.3-1
(2) See section 4.2-4.
1 500 Vrms, 50/60 Hz for 1 min
> 10 M
Ω
at 500 VDC
The characteristics at 60°C are ensured for
60 % of inputs at state 1 at nominal voltage
B1
4/5
B1
4.2-3 24 VDC 64-channel positive logic input module
Reference
Nominal input Voltage
TSX DEY 64D2K
24 VDC values
Input limit values
Response time
Current 3.5 mA at state 1 Voltage
≥
11 V
Current
≥
3 mA at state 0 Voltage
≤
5 V
Current
≤
1.5 mA
Sensor supply
(ripple included)
Input impedance at U nominal
19...30 V (possible up to 34 V, limited to
1 hour per 24 hours)
6.3 k
Ω
4 ms
IEC 1131-2 conformity Type 1
Compatibility 2-wire and 3-wire prox. sensor (1)Y e s
Type of input
Paralleling of inputs current sink
No
Sensor voltage O K monitoring threshold Fault
Monitoring response time
Consumption 5V
Sensor supply consumption on appearance on disappearance
Typical
Maximum
Typical
Maximum
Dissipated power
Dielectric strength
Input / ground or internal logic
Insulation resistance
Temperature
derating (2)
N = Number of channels at 1
(1) See section 3.3-1
(2) See section 4.2-4.
> 18 V
< 14 V
8 ms < T < 30 ms
1 ms < T < 3 ms
135 mA
175 mA
60 mA + (3.5xN) mA
80 mA + (3.5xN) mA
1.5W + (0.1 W x No. of channels at 1)
1 500 Vrms, 50/60 Hz for 1 min
> 10 M
Ω
at 500 VDC
The characteristics at 60°C are ensured for
60 % of inputs at state 1
___________________________________________________________________________
4/6
Characteristics 4
4.2-4 Temperature derating
All the characteristics of the various discrete modules are given for a simultaneous loading of
60% of the channels at state
1. For operation with a higher loading, see the derating curve opposite.
Percentage of inputs at state 1
100%
80%
60%
40%
20%
Temperature
0%
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 in C°
Note 1
There is no derating for relay output modules, the user must check that the overall consumption on the 24 V relay power supply is sufficient.
For transistor outputs, temperature derating is on the maximum current used by the active outputs.
Example 1 : a module with sixteen 24 VDC/0.5 A transistor outputs, each switching 0.5 A.
At 60°C, the maximum permitted current at the outputs is 16 x 0.5 x 60% = 4.8 which corresponds to about 10 outputs active simultaneously.
Example 2 : the same module (sixteen 24 VDC/0.5 A transistor outputs) each switching 0.3 A.
At 60°C, the maximum permitted current at the outputs is 16 x 0.3 x 60% = 2.9 A, which corresponds to 16 outputs active simultaneously. In this case, there is no derating on the outputs; the maximum permitted current of the module is not exceeded.
Note 2 : special case for the TSX DEY 32D3K module with 32 inputs
For extreme uses of this module (in terms of sensor voltage and temperature), the derating conditions defined below must be met.
The following curves indicate the percentage of inputs simultaneously at state 1, depending on the :
• operating temperature,
• sensor supply voltage.
Percentage of inputs at state 1
100%
80%
55%
60%
50%
40%
Sensor supply voltage
48VDC
54VDC
60VDC
B1
20%
Temperature
0% in C°
___________________________________________________________________________
4/7
B1
4.3
Characteristics of outputs with terminal block
4.3-1 DC transistor output modules (positive logic)
Module reference
Nominal values
Limit values
(for U
≤
30 V or 34 V, ripple included)
TSX DSY v
08T2/16T2 08T22 08T31 16T3
Voltage / Current 24V/0.5A 24V/2A 48V/1A 48V/0.25A
Voltage
Current / channel 0.625 A
Current / module 4 A / 7 A 14 A
Tungsten filament lamp power (max.)
19...30 V (1)
6 W
2.5 A
10 W
38...60 V 38...60 V
1.25 A 0.31 A
7 A
10 W
4 A
6 W
Leakage current at state 0 at state 1 Residual voltage
Min. load impedance
Response time (2)
< 0.5 mA < 1 mA < 1 mA < 0.5 mA
< 1.2 V < 0.5 V < 1 V
48
Ω
12
Ω
48
Ω
1.2 ms
< 1.5 V
192
Ω
200 µs 200 µs 1.2 ms
0.5 / LI 2 Hz Switching frequency on inductive load
Paralleling of outputs
Compatibility with DC inputs, IEC 1131-2
Built-in protection
Against overvoltages
Against reverse polarity
Against short-circuits and overloads
Preactuator voltage monitoring threshold
O K
Fault
Yes (2 maximum)
Yes (type 1 and type 2)
Yes, by transil diode
Yes, by reverse-mounted diode. Provide a fuse on the + 24 V or + 48 V of the preactuators.
Yes, by current limiter and electronic circuit-breaker 1.5 In < Id < 2 In
> 18 V
< 14 V
> 18 V > 36 V
< 14 V < 24 V
> 36 V
< 24 V
Monitoring response time
Consumption 5V on appearance on disappearance
T < 4 ms T < 4 ms
T < 30 ms T < 30 ms typical 55/80 mA 55 mA 55 mA 80 mA
Consumption 24V preactuator
(without load current) maximum 65/90 mA 65 mA 65 mA typical 30/40 mA 30 mA maximum 40/60 mA 50 mA
30 mA
50mA
90 mA
40 mA
60 mA
Dissipated power
(N = number of outputs at 1)
1 / 1.1 W 1.3 W
+ +
2.2 W
+
2.4 W
+
0.75WxN
0.2WxN
0.55WxN 0.85WxN
Dielectric strength output/ground or internal logic 1 500 Vrms, 50/60 Hz for 1 min
Insulation resistance > 10 M
Ω
at 500 VDC
Temperature derating The characteristics at 60°C are ensured for 60% of the max. module current
(1) 34 V permissible for 1 hour per 24 hours.
(2) All outputs have fast demagnetization circuits for electromagnets. Electromagnet discharge
4/8
Characteristics 4
4.3-2 Relay output modules, thermal current 3 A
Modules
Operating voltage limit DC/AC
Thermal current
TSX DSY 08R5 / 16R5
10...34 VDC / 19...264 VAC
3 A
Maximum current per common
AC load Resistive
3 A (must not exceed this value)
Voltage c
24 V c
48 V c
100..120V
c
200..240V
D C load
AC12 duty
Inductive
Power 50 VA (5) 50 VA (6) 110 VA (6) 220 VA (6)
110 VA (4) 220 VA (4)
Voltage c
24 V c
48 V c
100..120V
c
200..240V
AC14 and
AC15 duty
Resistive
DC12 duty
Power 24 VA (4) 10VA (10) 10VA (11) 10 VA (11)
24 VA (8) 50 VA (7) 50 VA (9)
110 VA (2) 110 VA (6)
220 VA (1)
Voltage a 24 V
Power 24 W (6)
40 W (3)
Inductive Voltage a 24 V
DC13 duty Power
(L/R = 60 ms)
10 W (8)
24 W (6)
Min switchable load 1 mA / 5 V
Response time
Type of contact
Built-in protection
Activation
Deactivation
Against overloads and short-circuits
Against inductive overvoltages in c
< 8 ms
< 10 ms
Normally open
None, a fast blow fuse must be fitted to each channel or group of channels
None, an RC circuit or MOV peak limiter (ZNO) suitable for the voltage must be fitted in parallel across the terminals of each preactuator
Dielectric strength
Insulation resistance
Power
Against inductive overvoltages in a
Outputs/ground
Outputs/internal logic
5 V internal
None, a discharge diode must be fitted across the terminals of each preactuator
2000 V rms 50/60 Hz for 1 min
> 10 M
Ω
at 500 VDC
Typical 55/80 mA Maximum 65/90 mA consumption
Dissipated power
24 V relay (per channel at 1) Typical 8.5 mA Maximum 10 mA
0.25 W + (0.2 W x No. of outputs at 1)
(1) 0.1 x 10 6 operations
(2) 0.15 x 10 6 operations
(3) 0.3 x 10 6 operations
(5) 0.7 x 10 6 operations.
(6) 1 x 10 6 operations.
(7) 1.5 x 10 6 operations.
(9) 3 x 10 6 operations.
(10) 5 x 10 6 operations.
(11) 10 x 10 6 operations.
(4) 0.5 x 10 6 operations (8) 2 x 10 6 operations.
___________________________________________________________________________
4/9
B1
B1
4.3-3 DC relay output module
Module reference
Limit operating voltage
D C
A C
Thermal current
Maximum current per common
DC load Resistive
DC12 duty
Voltage
Power
TSX DSY 08R4D
19...143 V not allowed
5 A
6 A (must not exceed this value) a 24 V a 48 V a 100...130 V
50 W (6) 100 W(6)
100 W (3) 200 W (3) a
24 V a
48 V
20 W (8) 50 W(8)
50 W (6) 100 W(6)
220 W (6)
440 W (3) a
100...130 V
110 W (8)
220 W (6)
Inductive
DC13 duty
(L/R = 60 ms)
Activation
Deactivation
Voltage
Power
Response time
Type of contact
Built-in protection common against overvoltages against overloads
< 10 ms
< 15 ms
2x2 C/O (1) (on-delay/off-delay)
2x2 N/O (on-delay)
R-C and Ge-Mov circuit
Interchangeable 6.3 A fast blow fuse per and short-circuits
Dielectric strength
Insulation resistance
Power
Outputs/ground
Outputs/internal logic
5 V
2000 V rms 50/60 Hz for 1 min
> 10 M
Ω
at 500 VDC
Typical 55 mA consumption
24 V
Maximum 65 mA
Typical 10 mA per channel at 1
Dissipated power (2)
Relay Maximum 12 mA per channel at 1
0.25 W + (0.24 W x No. of outputs at 1)
(1) N/C = normally closed - N/O = Normally open
(3) 0.3 x 10 6 operations
(6) 1 x 10 6 operations.
(8) 2 x 10 6 operations.
___________________________________________________________________________
4/10
Characteristics 4
4.3-4 Relay output module, thermal current 5 A
Module reference
Limit operating voltage
Thermal current
D C
A C
TSX DSY 08R5A
19...60 V
19...264V
5 A
Maximum current per common
AC load Resistive
AC12 duty
Inductive
6 A (must not exceed this value)
Voltage c
24 V c
48 V c
100..120V
c
200..240V
Power 100 VA(5) 100 VA(6) 220 VA(6) 440 VA(6)
200 VA(4) 440 VA(4)
Voltage c
24 V c
48 V c
100..120V
c
200..240V
D C load
AC14 and
AC15 duty
Inductive
Power 50 VA (4) 20VA (10) 20 VA (11) 20 VA (11)
50 VA (8) 110 VA (7) 110 VA (9)
220 VA(2) 220 VA(6)
440 VA (1)
Resistive Voltage a 24 V a 48 V
DC12 duty Power 24 W (6) 50 W (6)
50 W (3) 100 W (3)
Voltage a
24 V a
48 V
DC13 duty Power
(L/R = 60 ms)
10 W (8) 24 W (8)
24 W (6) 50 W (6)
Response Activation < 10 ms time
Type of contact
Deactivation < 15 ms
2x2 C/O (1) (on-delay/off-dlay)
2x2 N/O (on-delay) against overvoltages R-C and Ge-Mov circuit Built-in protection common against overloads Interchangeable 6.3 A fast blow fuse per and short-circuits
Dielectric strength
Power consumption
Outputs/ground
Outputs/internal logic
Insulation resistance
5 V
2000 V rms 50/60 Hz for 1 min
Typical
> 10 M
Ω
at 500 VDC
55 mA
Maximum 65 mA
Dissipated power
(1) 0.1 x 10 6 operations
(2) 0.15 x 10 6 operations
(3) 0.3 x 10 6 operations
(4) 0.5 x 10 6 operations
24 V Typical 10 mA per channel at 1
Relay Maximum 12 mA per channel at 1
(5) 0.7 x 10
(6) 1 x 10 6
(7) 1.5 x 10
0.25 W + (0.24 W x No. of outputs at 1)
6
6
operations.
operations.
operations.
(8) 2 x 10 6 operations.
(9) 3 x 10 6 operations.
(10) 5 x 10 6 operations.
(11) 10 x 10 6 operations.
B1
4/11
B1
4.3-5 Triac output modules
Module reference
Limit operating voltage
Permissible current (1)
Leakage current
Response time
Built-in protection
D C
A C
TSX DSY 08S5/16S5 not allowed
41..264V
TSX DSY 16S4 not allowed
20..132V
TSX DSY 08S5 2 A / chan. - 12A/module 1 A / chan. - 12A/module
TSX DSY 16S5 1 A / chan. - 12A/module
TSX DSY 08S5
≤
2 mA
TSX DSY 16S5
≤
1.5 mA
Activation
≤
10 ms
≤
1.5 mA
Deactivation
≤
10 ms against overvoltages Ge-Mov against overloads and short-circuits
Interchangeable fast blow fuse per common - 5 A
Flameproof protection non interchangeable per common of 10 A
Dielectric strength
Outputs/ground
Outputs/internal logic
2000 V rms 50/60 Hz for 1 min
Insulation resistance
Consumption on
> 10 M
Ω
at 500 VDC
Typical TSX DSY 08S5125 mA
TSX DSY 16S5220 mA
220 mA
5V supply
Dissipated power
MaximumTSX DSY 08S5
TSX DSY 16S5230 mA
135 mA 230 mA
TSX DSY 08S5 0.5 W + 1 W/A per output 0.85 W+1 W/A per output
TSX DSY 16S50.85 W + 1 W/A per output
(1) temperature derating is as shown on graph below
Important :
When using TSX DSY 08S5 modules at 220 VAC, it is essential not to use different phases between groups of channels on the same module.
I max/module (A)
12
6
4
2
0
10
8
T (°C)
4/12
Characteristics 4
4.4
Characteristics of transistor output modules with connector
4.4-1 DC transistor output modules (positive logic)
Module reference
Nominal values Voltage / current
TSX DSY 32T2K
24V / 0.1A
TSX DSY 64T2K
24V / 0.1A
Limit values
(for U
≤
30V or 34V, ripple included)
Voltage 19...30 V, possible up to 34 V, limited to 1 hour per 24 hours).
Current / channel 0.125 A
Current / module 3.2 A
Tungsten filament lamp power 1.2 W (maximum)
0.125 A
5 A
1.2 W (maximum)
Leakage current
Residual voltage
Min load impedance at state 0 at state 1
Response time (1)
Switching frequency on inductive load
Paralleling of outputs
Compatibility of DC inputs with
IEC 1131-2
Built-in Against overvoltages
< 0.1 mA for U = 30 V
< 1.5 V for I = 0.1 A
220
Ω
1.2 ms
0.5 / LI 2 Hz
Yes : 3 max.
Yes (type 1 and type 2)
< 0.1 mA for U = 30 V
< 1.5 V for I = 0.1 A
220
Ω
1.2 ms
0.5 / LI 2 Hz
Yes : 3 max.
Yes (type 1 and type 2)
Yes, by transil diode protection Against reverse polarity Yes, by reverse-mounted diode - provide a 2 A fuse on the + 24 V of the preactuators (1 per connector).
Against short-circuits and overloads
Preactuator voltage O K
Yes, by current limiter and electronic circuit-breaker 0.125 A < Id < 0.185 A
> 18 V > 18 V monitoring threshold Fault
Monitoring on appearance
< 14 V
T < 4 ms response time on disappearance T < 30 ms
< 14 V
T < 4 ms
T < 30 ms
Consumption 5V typical/maximum 135 mA / 155 mA
Consumption 24V typical/maximum 30 mA / 40 mA
preactuator (without load current)
135 mA / 175 mA
60 mA / 80 mA
Dissipated power
Dielectric strength output/ground or internal logic
1.6 W + 0.1 W / output 2.4 W + 0.1 W / output
1 500 V rms, 50/60 Hz for 1 min
Insulation resistance
Temperature derating
> 10 M
Ω
at 500 VDC
The characteristics at 60°C are ensured for 60% of the max. module current
(1) All outputs have fast demagnetization circuits for electromagnets. Electromagnet discharge time < L/R.
4/13
B1
B1
4.5
Characteristics of mixed I/O modules with connectors
4.5-1 24 VDC positive logic fast inputs
Module references
Nominal input values
Input limit values
Voltage
Current at state 1 Voltage
Current at state 0 Voltage
Current
Sensor supply
(ripple included)
Input impedance at U nominal
Response time
Type of input
Paralleling of inputs (1)
Default
Configurable filtering
TSX DMY 28FK/28RFK
24 VDC
3.5 mA
≥
11 V
≥
3 mA
≤
5 V
≤
1.5 mA
19...30 V (possible up to 34 V, limited to
1 hour per 24 hours)
6.3 k
Ω
4 ms
0.1...7.5 ms (in increments of 0.5) current sink
Y e s
IEC 1131-2 conformity
Compatibility
Sensor voltage
Type 1
2-wire proximity sensor (2)
3-wire proximity sensor (2)
O K > 18 V
Y e s
Y e s monitoring threshold Fault
Monitoring response time
Consumption 5V on appearance on disappearance
Sensor supply consumption typical maximum typical maximum
< 14 V
8 ms < T < 30 ms
1 ms < T < 3 ms
300 mA
350 mA
20 mA + (3.5 mA per input at 1)
Dissipated power
Dielectric strength
Input / ground or internal logic
Insulation resistance
Temperature
derating (3)
30 mA + (3.5 mA per input at 1)
1.2 W + (0.1 W x Number of inputs at 1)
1 500 V rms, 50/60 Hz for 1 minute
> 10 M
Ω
at 500 VDC
The characteristics at 60°C are ensured for 60 % of inputs at state 1
(1) This characteristic enables several inputs to be wired in parallel on the same module, or on different modules if redundant inputs are required.
(2) See section 3.3-1
4/14
Characteristics 4
4.5-2 DC transistor outputs (positive logic)
Module references
Nominal values
Limit values
Residual voltage
Min load impedance
Voltage / current
Voltage
(for U
≤
30 V or 34 V, Current / channel ripple included) Current / module
Tungsten filament lamp power (max.)
Leakage current at state 0 at state 1
Response time (2)
Switching frequency on inductive load
Paralleling of outputs
Compatibility with IEC 1131-2 DC inputs
Built-in Against overvoltages protection Against reverse polarity
TSX DMY 28FK/28RFK
24VDC/0.5A
19...30 V (1)
0.625 A
4 A
6 W
< 1 mA
< 1.2 V
48
Ω
0.6 ms
0.5 / LI 2 Hz
Yes (2 maximum)
Yes (type 1 and type 2)
Against short-circuits and overloads
Sensor voltage O K
Yes, by transil diode
Yes, by reverse-mounted diode - Provide a fuse on the + 24 V of the preactuators.
Yes, by current limiter and electronic circuit-breaker 1.5 In < Id < 2 In monitoring threshold Fault
Monitoring on appearance response time on disappearance
Consumption 24V preactuator typical
T < 30 ms
30/40 mA
(without load current) maximum 40/60 mA
1 W + (0.75 W) / output Dissipated power
Dielectric strength
Input/ground or Input/internal logic
> 18 V
< 14 V
T < 4 ms
Insulation resistance
Temperature derating
1500 V rms, 50/60 Hz for 1 min
> 10 M
Ω
at 500 VDC
The characteristics at 60°C are ensured for 60% of the max. module current
(1) 34 V permissible for 1 hour per 24 hours.
(2) All outputs have fast demagnetization circuits for electromagnets. Electromagnet discharge time < L/R.
B1
4/15
B1
___________________________________________________________________________
4/16
5 Connections
5.1
Connection methods
5.1-1 Connection to modules with screw terminal block
The terminal blocks of the I/O modules have an automatic transfer coding device for when they are first used. This avoids handling errors while a module is being replaced.
The coding ensures electrical compatibility for each type of module. See part A, section 5.4.
B1
Each terminal can accept bare wires or wires fitted with cable ends or open lugs.
The capacity of each terminal is :
• minimum :
• maximum :
1 wire, 0.2 mm 2 (AWG 24) without cable end,
1 wire, 2 mm 2 without cable end or,
1 wire, 1.5 mm 2 with cable end.
5.5 mm
(1)
(1) 5.5 mm maximum
The screw clamps have a recess for screwdrivers with the following heads :
• Pozidrive N°1 cruciform,
• flat, Ø 5 mm diameter
The screw terminal connection blocks are fitted with captive screws. They are supplied unscrewed. The maximum capacity of the terminal block is 16 wires, 1 mm 2 (AWG) +
4 wires, 1.5 mm 2 (AWG).
Maximum tightening torque on connection terminal screw : 0.8 N.m
Opening the cover
B1
5.1-2 Connection to modules with HE10 connectors
20-wire preformed cable, 22 gauge (0.34 mm 2 ),
Used for simple and direct wire-to-wire connection of the I/O on modules with HE10 connectors to sensors, preactuators or terminals.
This preformed cable comprises :
• at one end, an HE10 moulded connector carrying 20 wires, 0.34 mm 2 cross-section within a sheath,
• at the other end, flying leads color-coded conforming to standard DIN 47100.
Note : A nylon cord inside the cable enables the sheath to be stripped easily.
There are two product references : TSX CDP 301 : 3 meters.
TSX CDP 501 : 5 meters.
Preformed cable
Module
Correspondence between wire color and the HE10 connector pin number white brown green yellow gray pink blue red black purple gray-pink red-blue white-green white-yellow brown-green yellow-brown white-gray gray-brown white-pink pink-brown
TSX CDP i
01
Top
1
HE10
2
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17 18
19
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
20
Bottom
___________________________________________________________________________
5/2
Connections 5
Sheathed rolled ribbon cable 28 gauge (0.08 mm 2 )
Used to connect the I/O from modules with HE10 connectors to TELEFAST 2 rapid connection and wiring interfaces. This cable comprises 2 HE10 connectors and a sheathed rolled ribbon cable with 0.08 mm 2 cross-section wires.
Given the small cross-section of the wires, it is recommended that they be used only for low current inputs or outputs ( < 100 mA per input or output).
There are three product references : TSX CDP 102 : length 1 meter
TSX CDP 202 : length 2 meters
TSX CDP 302 : length 3 meters
Connection cable 22 gauge (0.34 mm 2 )
Used to connect the I/O of modules with HE10 connectors to TELEFAST 2 rapid connection and wiring interfaces. This preformed cable comprises 2 HE10 moulded connectors and a cable with 0.34 mm 2 cross-section wires used for carrying higher currents (> 500 mA).
There are five product references : TSX CDP 053 : length 0.50 meters.
TSX CDP 103 : length 1 meter.
TSX CDP 203 : length 2 meters.
TSX CDP 303 : length 3 meters.
TSX CDP 503 : 5 meters.
B1
Module
Module
TSX CDP ii3 cable
TX CDP i02 cable
TELEFAST 2 ABE-7H iiiii
Maximum tightening torque on TSX CDP• cable connector screw : 0.5 N.m
B1
5.2
Module connections
5.2-1 TSX DEY 08D2 / 16D2 modules
Presentation
TSX DEY 08D2 / 16D2 modules comprise :
• 8 inputs 24 VDC, positive logic type 2 for
TSX DEY 08D2 modules,
• 16 inputs 24 VDC, positive logic type 2 for
TSX DEY 16D2 module,
The inputs are connected via a removable screw terminal block on the module.
Simplified input schematic
Fuse
+
Sensor
Sensor voltage monitoring and supply
Input % I (0...n)
Input
–
Module
___________________________________________________________________________
5/4
TSX DEY 08D2 module connections
Sensors
FU1
+ –
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
0 V
18
+24 VDC
20
19
FU1 = 0.5 A fast blow fuse
Inputs
I 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
TSX DEY 16D2 module connections
FU1 = 0.5 A fast blow fuse
Sensors
2
4
12
14
6
8
10
16
FU1
+ –
0 V
18
+24 VDC
20
19
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
Inputs
I 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
17
Connections 5
B1
B1
5.2-2 TSX DEY 16D3 module
Presentation
The TSX DEY 16D3 module has 16 inputs, 48 VDC.
This module is connected to a 20-pin screw terminal block. Inputs are type 2, positive logic.
TSX DEY 16D3 module connections
FU1 = 0.5 A fast blow fuse
FU1
Sensors
+ –
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
0 V
18
20
+48 VDC
19
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
Inputs
I 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
17
___________________________________________________________________________
5/6
Connections 5
5.2-3 TSX DEY 16A2 / 16A3 / 16A4 / 16A5 modules
Presentation
TSX DEY 16A2 / 16A3 / 16A4 and 16A5 modules have AC inputs, type 2. They are connected to 20-pin screw terminal blocks.
Simplified input schematic
B1
UVAC Power supply monitor circuit
Electrical isolation
Sensor
+5 V
PNP
Filtering
Inputs
0VAC
Module
TSX DEY 16A2 / 16A3 / 16A4 / 16A5 module connections
Sensors
FU1 UVAC
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
1
3
5
7
9
11
I 0
Inputs
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
13 12
13
15 14
15
17
19
UVAC = 24 V for TSX DEY 16A2
48 V for TSX DEY 16A3
115 V for TSX DEY 16A4
230 V for TSX DEY 16A5
FU1 = 0.5 A fast blow fuse
B1
TSX DEY 16A2 module connections with negative logic DC inputs
FU1 = 0.5 A fast blow fuse
Sensors
+24 VDC
0 V
FU1
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
Inputs
I 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
17
18
19
20
!
The use of negative logic is not recommended when the sensor 0V is connected to ground. This is because if one of the wires were to be accidentally disconnected and come into contact with the mechanical ground, the input might be set to state 1.
This would cause an undesriable control action.
___________________________________________________________________________
5/8
Connections 5
5.2-4 TSX DEY 16FK module
Presentation
This module has 16 fast input channels, 24 VDC. They are type 1 inputs, proximity sensor compatible conforming to the characteristics in section 4.
The module is fitted with an HE10 male connector :
• connector A addresses 0 to 15
The connector can accept :
• either a TSX CDP•01 preformed cable for direct connection to the sensor terminal,
• or a TSX CDP•02 ribbon cable or a TSX CDP••3 cable for connection to a TELEFAST 2 interface.
A
B1
Simplified schematic
Fuse
Sensor
+
Sensor voltage monitoring and supply
Input % I (0...n)
Input
–
Module
B1
TSX DEY 16FK module connections
Sensors white brown green yellow gray pink blue red black purple gray-pink red-blue
1
3
5
7
9
11 white-green brown-green white-yellow yellow-brown
+24 VDC white-gray gray-brown
FU1
+
–
0 V white-pink pink-brown
13
15
17
19
A
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
FU1 = 0.5 A fast blow fuse
I 0
Inputs
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Note :
The colors are used to show the correspondence between the HE10 connector pins and the wires of a TSX CDP•01 preformed cable.
___________________________________________________________________________
5/10
Connections 5
B1
5.2-5 TSX DEY 32D2K / 64D2K modules
Presentation
TSX DEY 32D2K and 64D2K modules have 24 VDC inputs. These are type 1 proximity sensor compatible inputs conforming to the characteristics in section 4.
The TSX DEY 32D2K module is fitted with 2 HE10 male connectors :
• connectors A and B are used to connect inputs :
- A (0 to 15)
- B (16 to 31)
The TSX DEY 64D2K module is fitted with 4 HE10 male connectors :
• connectors A and B for connecting channels :
- A (0 to 15)
- B (16 to 31)
• connectors C and D for connecting channels :
- C (32 to 47)
- D (48 to 63)
A
C
B
D
Each connector can accept :
• either a TSX CDP•01 preformed cable for direct connection to the sensor terminal,
• or a TSX CDP•02 ribbon cable or a TSX CDP••3 cable for connecting to a TELEFAST
2 interface.
Simplified input schematic
Fuse
+
Sensor
+
–
24 VDC
Sensor voltage monitoring and supply
Input % I (0...n)
A
B
–
___________________________________________________________________________
B1
TSX DEY 32D2K module connections
FU1 = 0.5 A fast blow fuse
Sensors white brown green yellow gray pink blue red black purple gray-pink red-blue white-green brown-green white-yellow yellow-brown
+24 VDC white-gray gray-brown
FU1
+
–
0 V white-pink pink-brown
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
19
A
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
17 18
20
Sensors
B white brown green yellow gray pink blue red black purple gray-pink red-blue white-green brown-green white-yellow yellow-brown
+24 VDC white-gray gray-brown
FU1
+ white-pink
–
0 V pink-brown
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
19
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
17 18
20
Inputs
I 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Inputs
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
___________________________________________________________________________
5/12
Connections 5
TSX DEY 64D2K module connections
Sensors white brown green yellow gray pink blue red black purple gray-pink red-blue white-green brown-green white-yellow yellow-brown
+24 VDC white-gray gray-brown
FU1
+
–
0 V white-pink pink-brown
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
C
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
Inputs
32
34
36
38
40
42
44
46
33
35
37
39
41
43
45
47
Sensors white brown green yellow gray pink blue red black purple gray-pink red-blue white-green brown-green white-yellow yellow-brown
+24 VDC white-gray gray-brown
FU1
+ white-pink
–
0 V pink-brown
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
D
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
Inputs
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
FU1 = 0.5 A fast blow fuse
Sensors white brown green yellow gray pink blue red black purple gray-pink red-blue
1
3
5
7
9
11 white-green brown-green white-yellow yellow-brown
+24 VDC white-gray gray-brown
FU1
+
–
0 V white-pink pink-brown
13
15
17
19
A
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
I 0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
Inputs
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
Sensors white brown green yellow gray pink blue red black purple gray-pink red-blue white-green brown-green white-yellow yellow-brown
+24 VDC white-gray gray-brown
FU1
+
–
0 V white-pink pink-brown
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
B
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
Inputs
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
B1
B1
5.2-6 TSX DEY 32D3K module
Presentation
The TSX DEY 32D3K has 48 VDC inputs. These are type
2 proximity sensor compatible inputs conforming to the characteristics in section 4.
The TSX DEY 32D3K module is fitted with 2 HE10 male connectors :
• connectors A and C are used to connect inputs :
- A (0 to 15)
- C (16 to 31)
A
C
Each connector can accept :
• either a TSX CDP•01 preformed cable for direct connection to the sensor terminal,
• or a TSX CDP•02 ribbon cable or a TSX CDP••3 cable for connecting to a TELEFAST
2 interface.
Simplified input schematic
Fuse
Sensor
+
–
48 VDC
+
Sensor voltage monitoring and supply
Input % I (0...n)
Input
–
Module
___________________________________________________________________________
5/14
Connections 5
B1
TSX DEY 32D3K module connections
Sensors white brown
1 green yellow gray pink blue red black purple gray-pink red-blue
3
5
7
9
11 white-green brown-green
13 white-yellow yellow-brown
15
+48 VDC white-gray gray-brown
FU1
+ white-pink
–
0 V pink-brown
17
19
C
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
Inputs
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
18
20
FU1 = 0.5 A fast blow fuse
Sensors white brown green yellow gray pink blue red black purple gray-pink red-blue white-green brown-green white-yellow yellow-brown
+48 VDC white-gray gray-brown
FU1
+ white-pink
–
0 V pink-brown
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
A
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
Inputs
I 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
B1
5.2-7 TSX DSY 08T2 / 16T2 / 16T3 / 08T22 / 08T31 modules
Presentation
TSX DSY 08T2 / 16T2 and 08T22 modules have protected 24 VDC transistor outputs, TSX DSY 16T3 /08T31 modules have 48 VDC protected transistor outputs.
These five modules are fitted with a 20-pin screw terminal block, which can be removed in order to connect the outputs.
Simplified output schematic
+
C U R R E N T
M O N I T O R
C I R C U I T
C O M M A N D
V O L T A G E
M O N I T O R
C I R C U I T
SOLID STATE
S W I T C H
R
T r a n s i l
T r a n s i l
%Q. (0...n)
P r e a c t u a t o r
L o a d
+
–
–
FU
Module Output
___________________________________________________________________________
5/16
Connections 5
TSX DSY 08T2/08T22 module connections
Preactuators
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
TSX DSY 08T22
2
4
6
8
1
3
5
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
0 V
–
+
FU2
+24 VDC
FU2 = 6.3 A fast blow fuse
16
18
20
17
19
Outputs
Q0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Preactuators
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
– +
FU2
0 V
TSX DSY 08T2
+24 VDC
FU2 = 16 A fast blow fuse
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
TSX DSY 16T2 module connections
0
Preactuators
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
Outputs
Q0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
17
18
0 V
19
+24 VDC
20
– +
FU2
FU2 = 6.3 A fast blow fuse
___________________________________________________________________________
Outputs
Q0
3
4
1
2
5
6
7
B1
B1
TSX DSY 16T3 module connections : 48 VDC supply
Preactuators
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
Outputs
Q0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
FU2 = 10 A fast blow fuse
17
– +
FU2
18
0 V
+48 VDC
20
19
TSX DSY 08T31 module connections
Preactuators
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
– +
FU2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
0 V
+48 VDC
20
19
Outputs
Q0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
FU2 = 10 A fast blow fuse
___________________________________________________________________________
5/18
5.2-8 Relay modules 50 VA : TSX DSY 08R5 / 16R5
Presentation
TSX DSY 08R5 and 16R5 modules have 8 relay outputs and 16 relay outputs respectively.
They are fitted with a 20-pin screw terminal block, which can be removed in order to connect the outputs.
Connections 5
B1
Simplified output schematic
+
B
–
P r e a c t u a t o r s
%Q.
(0...n)
C o m m o n
C O M M A N D
Warning :
Module Output
The relay contact must be protected by placing across the preactuator terminals :
• either an RC circuit or MOV (ZNO) peak limiter when using AC,
• or a discharge diode when using DC.
B1
TSX DSY 08R5 module connections
R
0
C
MOV
19...240 VAC
AC load
7
DC load
– 24 VDC +
Protection device must be placed across terminals of each preactuator
0
2
FU
FU
4
6
5
7
1
3
19 to 240 VAC or 24 VDC
TSX DSY 16R5 module connections
R
0
C
MOV
19...240 VAC
AC load
7
DC load
– 24 VDC +
Protection device must be placed across terminals of each preactuator
Note : When the supply voltage from the preactuators is from a 3-phase supply which is equal to or greater than 200 VAC, the preactuators must all be supplied from the same phase.
5/20
0
1
2
3
FU
4
5
6
7
FU
8
9
10
FU
11
12
13
14
FU
19 to 240 VAC
15
Outputs
8
10
2
4
6
12
13
14
15
16
18
17
19
20
1
3
5
7
9
Q0
1
2
3
C0-3
4
5
6
7
C4-7
11
Outputs
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
C4-7
8
9
10
11
C8-11
12
13
14
15
C12-15
Q0
1
2
3
6
7
C0-3
4
5
Connections 5
5.2-9 Relay modules 100 VA : TSX DSY 08R5A / 08R4D
Presentation
TSX DSY 08R5A and 08R4D modules each have 8 protected relay outputs. They are fitted with a 20-pin screw terminal block, which can be removed in order to connect the outputs.
B1
Simplified C/O output schematic
Channels 0 to 3
N/C
Channel 0 / 2
N/O
N/C
Channel 1 / 3
N/O
FU
N/C : Normally closed - N/O : Normally open
FU = interchangeable 6.3 A fast blow fuse. 1 fuse per common
Simplified N/O output schematic
Channels 4 to 7
Common
Channel 4 / 6
Channel 5 / 7
FU
FU = 6.3 A - interchangeable fast blow fuse. 1 fuse per common.
Common
B1
TSX DSY 08R5A module connections
Preactuators
T0
R0
R1
R2
R3
T1
T2
T3
4
5
6
7
2
4
6
*
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
1
Q0
3
Q1
C0-1
5
*
7
C2-3
9
Q2
11
Q3
13
*
15
Q4
C4-5
Q5
17
*
19
Q6
C6-7
Q7
Outputs
FU
FU
FU
FU
* = strap 24 V must be connected when using
24 V AC or DC.
FU = 6.3 A fast blow fuse
19 to 240 VAC or 19 to 60 VDC (nominal = 48 VDC)
TSX DSY 08R4D module connections
Preactuators
T0
R0
T1
R1
2
4
1
6
8
*
Q0
3
Q1
C0-1
5
*
7
C2-3
Outputs
FU
FU
T2 9
Q2
R2 10
T3 11
Q3
R3 12
4
5
14
16
13
15
* Q4
C4-5
Q5
FU
6
7
18
20
17
*
19
Q6
C6-7
Q7
FU
* = strap 24 V must be connected when using 24
V AC or DC .
FU = 6.3 A fast blow fuse
5/22
Connections 5
B1
5.2-10 TSX DSY 08S5 / 16S5 / 16S4 modules
Presentation
Each module comprises :
• 8 triac outputs for the TSX DSY 08S5 module,
• 16 triac outputs for TSX DSY 16S4/16S5 modules,
The modules must be fitted with a removable 20-pin screw terminal block.
Simplified output schematic for a TSX DSY 08S5/16S5 module
V D C
(*) O u t p u t n
L o a d
(*)
Module
(*) RC not present on TSX DSY 16S5 module
Simplified output schematic for a TSX DSY 16S4 module
Fu
48...240
V A C s u p p l y
Preactuator
V D C
Output n
Load
U L N
24...120 VAC supply
Fu
Module Preactuator
Note :
Protect the module outputs against short-circuits at the load, by means of a 5 A ultra fast blow and high breaking capacity fuse.
B1
TSX DSY 08S5 module connections
Preactuators
0
1
6
7
P N
48...240 VAC
TSX DSY 16S5 module connections
4
5
2
3
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
1
3
1
Outputs
Q0
5
C0-1
2
7
3
9
11
C2-3
4
13
5
15
17
7
C4-5
6
19
C6-7
FU
FU
FU
FU = interchangeable 5
A ultra fast blow fuse
FU
Preactuators Outputs
Q0
0
2
1 2
1
3
1
2
3
3
4
4
6
5
C0-3
4
5
FU
5
6 8
7
6
7
7
9
8
10
12
9
11
C4-7
8
9
10
FU
10 13
11
11 14
13
12 16
15
17
C8-11
12
13
14
FU
FU = interchangeable
5 A ultra fast blow fuse
14 18
15
15 19
C12-15
20 FU
P N
48...240 VAC
___________________________________________________________________________
5/24
Connections 5
B1
TSX DSY 16S4 module connections
Preactuators
P N
24...120 VAC
0
2
1
5
7
9
11
8
10
3
Fu
4
6
Fu
Fu
12
13
14
15
Fu
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
Outputs
Q0
9
10
11
7
C4-7
8
C8-11
12
13
14
15
C12-15
1
2
3
5
6
C0-3
4
Note :
Protect the module outputs against short-circuits at the load, by means of a 5 A ultra fast blow and high breaking capacity fuse.
B1
5.2-11 TSX DSY 32T2K / 64T2K modules
Presentation
TSX DSY 32T2K and 64T2K modules have positive logic source type transistor outputs.
These modules are fitted with male HE10 connectors :
• 2 connectors A and B for TSX DSY 32T2K modules
- connector A for outputs 0 to 15
- connector B for outputs 16 to 31
• 4 connectors A, B, C and D for TSX DSY 64T2K modules
- connector A for outputs 0 to 15
- connector B for outputs 16 to 31
- connector C for outputs 32 to 47
- connector D for outputs 48 to 63
The connectors can accept :
• either a TSX CDP•01 preformed cable for direct connection to the preactuator terminal,
• or a TSX CDP••3 cable or TSX CDP•02 ribbon cable for connection to a TELEFAST 2 wiring interface.
A
B
A
C
B
D
Simplified output schematic
+ 24 VDC f u s e
Limitation and tripping t r a n s i l
+
–
Output 0 to n
Preactuator load monitor
Solid state switch
L o a d
– 0 V
Module Preactuator
___________________________________________________________________________
5/26
Connections 5
TSX DSY 32T2K module connections
FU2 = 2 A fast blow fuse
Preactuators
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
0 V
–
+
FU2
+24 VDC
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15 white brown
1 green yellow gray pink blue red black purple gray-pink red-blue white-green brown-green
3
5
7
9
11
13 white-yellow y e l l o w - b r o w n
15 white-gray gray-brown white-pink pink-brown
17
19
A
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
Outputs
Q0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
11
10
12
13
15
14
!
It is essential to connect :
• + 24 VDC to terminals
17 and 19,
• 0 V to terminals 18 and
20
Preactuators
16
18
17
19 white brown green yellow
1
3
5
B
2
4
6
Outputs
Q16
17
19
21
18
20
20 gray pink
21
7 8 23
22
22 blue red
23
9 10 25
24
24 black purple
25
11 12 27
26
26 gray-pink red-blue
27
13 14 29
28
28 white-green brown-green
29
16 31
30
30 white-yellow y e l l o w - b r o w n
15
31
FU2 = 2 A fast blow fuse
0 V
–
+
FU2
+24 VDC white-gray gray-brown white-pink p i n k - b r o w n
17
19
18
20
Note :
The colors show the correspondence between the HE10 connector pins and the flying leads of
___________________________________________________________________________
B1
B1
TSX DSY 64T2K module connections
Preactuators
32
34
33 white brown green yellow
35
36 gray pink
37
38 blue red
39
40
42
41
43 black purple gray-pink red-blue
44
46
45
47
1
3
5
7
9
11 white-green brown-green
13 white-yellow y e l l o w - b r o w n
15
0 V
–
+
FU2
+24 VDC white-gray gray-brown white-pink pink-brown
17
19
C
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
33
Outputs
Q32
35
34
36
37
39
38
40
41
43
42
45
44
46
47
FU2 =
2 A fast blow fuse
Preactuators
0 white brown
1
2
4
6
3
5 green yellow gray pink blue red
7
8
10
12
14
9
11
13
15
1
3
5
7 black purple gray-pink red-blue
9
11 white-green brown-green
13 white-yellow y e l l o w - b r o w n
15
0 V
–
+
FU2
+24 VDC white-gray gray-brown white-pink pink-brown
17
19
A
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
1
Outputs
Q0
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
11
10
13
12
14
15
Preactuators
48
50
52
54
56
58
60
62
0 V
–
+
FU2
+24 VDC
49
51
53
55
57
59
61
63 white brown green yellow gray pink blue red black purple gray-pink red-blue white-green brown-green white-yellow y e l l o w - b r o w n
15 white-gray gray-brown white-pink pink-brown
FU2 = 2 A fast blow fuse
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
17
19
D
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
Outputs
Preactuators
Q48 white
49 16 brown
1
50
17 green
51 18 yellow
3
52
19 gray
53 20 pink
5
54
21 blue
55 22 red
7
57
56
24
23 black purple
9
58
25 gray-pink
59 26 red-blue
11
60
27 white-green
61 28 13 brown-green
63
62
30
29 white-yellow y e l l o w - b r o w n
15
31
!
It is essential to connect :
• + 24 VDC to terminals
17 and 19,
• 0 V to terminals
18 and 20
0 V
–
+
FU2
+24 VDC white-gray gray-brown white-pink pink-brown
FU2 = 2 A fast blow fuse
17
19
B
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
Outputs
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
Q16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
Note : The colors show the correspondence between the HE10 connector pins and the flying
5/28
Connections 5
5.2-12 TSX DMY 28FK/DMY 28RFK modules
Presentation
This mixed I/O module comprises :
• 16 fast input channels, 24 VDC. They are type 1 inputs, proximity sensor compatible conforming to the characteristics in section 4.
• 12 output channels, 24 VDC / 0.5A
The module is fitted with two male HE10 connectors :
• connector A for inputs : addresses 0 to 15
• connector C for outputs : addresses 16 to 27
The connector can accept :
• either a TSX CDP•01 preformed cable for direct connection to the sensor terminal,
• or a TSX CDP•02 ribbon cable or a TSX CDP••3 cable for connection to a TELEFAST 2 interface.
Simplified input schematic
+
FU
Sensor
Sensor voltage monitoring and supply
Input % I (0...n)
A
C
B1
–
Input
Simplified output schematic
Module
+
R
C U R R E N T
M O N I T O R
C I R C U I T
C O M M A N D
FU
T r a n s i l
T r a n s i l
%Q (16...27)
P r e a c t u a t o r
V O L T A G E
M O N I T O R
C I R C U I T
SOLID STATE
S W I T C H
L o a d
+
–
–
___________________________________________________________________________
B1
TSX DMY 28FK and TSX DMY 28RFK module connections
Preactuators
16
18
20
22
24
26
0 V
–
+
FU2
+24 VDC white brown
17 green yellow
19 gray pink
21 blue red
23 black purple
25
27 gray-pink red-blue white-green brown-green white-yellow yellow-brown white-gray gray-brown white-pink pink-brown
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
C
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
FU2 = 10 A fast blow fuse
Outputs
Q16
17
18
19
21
20
22
23
25
24
27
26
Sensors white brown
1 green yellow gray pink blue red black purple gray-pink red-blue
3
5
7
9
11 white-green brown-green
13 white-yellow yellow-brown
FU1
+
–
+24 VDC white-gray gray-brown white-pink
0 V pink-brown
15
17
19
A
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
Inputs
I 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
FU1 = 0.5 A fast blow fuse
Note :
The colors show the correspondence between the HE10 connector pins and the flying leads of a TSX CDP•01 preformed cable.
___________________________________________________________________________
5/30
6 TELEFAST 2 connection interfaces for discrete I/O
B1
6.1
Presentation
The TELEFAST 2 system is a range of products for rapid connection of discrete I/O modules to the application. It replaces screw terminal blocks, and provides remote location of single-wire termination.
The TELEFAST 2 system can only be connected to modules equipped with HE10 connectors. It is composed of interface sub-bases and connecting cables. Several types of sub-base exist :
• Connection interface sub-bases for discrete I/O, 8/12/16 channels :
- 8-channel sub-base :
ABE-7H08R10, ABE-7H08R11,
ABE-7H08R21
• with 1 isolator/channel
ABE-7H08S21
- 12 and 16-channel compact sub-bases :
ABE-7H12R50*,
ABE-7H16R50.
- 12 and 16-channel sub-bases :
ABE-7H12R10 (1), ABE-7H12R11 (1),
ABE-7H12R20 (1), ABE-7H12R21 (1),
ABE-7H16R10, ABE-7H16R11,
ABE-7H16R20, ABE-7H16R21/23,
ABE-7H16R30, ABE-7H16R31,
• with 1 isolator/channel
ABE-7H12S21 (1), ABE7-H16S21
• with 1 fuse + 1 isolator/channel
ABE-7H16S43 (for Inputs)
ABE-7H16F43 (for Outputs)
Method of identifying the various discrete I/O connection sub-bases
ABE-7H ii i i i
0 or even number = without LED per channel odd number = with LED per channel
08 = 8-channel sub-base
12 = 12-channel sub-base
16 = 16-channel sub-base
(1) none of the 12-channel sub-bases are compatible with
TSX Premium discrete I/O
1 = 1 screw terminal per channel on 1 row
2 = 2 screw terminals per channel on 2 rows
3 = 3 screw terminals per channel on 3 rows
4 = 2 screw terminals per channel on 1 row
5 = 1 screw terminal per channel on 2 rows
(compact version)
Primary function :
R = Direct connection
S = Isolator/channel
6/1
B1
• Input connection interface and adaptor sub-bases, 16 isolated channels
- ABE-7S16E2B1: 16 inputs 24 VDC,
- ABE-7S16E2E1 : 16 inputs 48 VDC,
- ABE-7S16E2E0 : 16 inputs 48 VAC,
- ABE-7S16E2F0 : 16 inputs 110/120
VAC,
: 16 inputs 220/240
VAC.
• Solid state output connection interface and adaptor sub-bases, 8 and 16 channels :
8 channel sub-bases
- ABE-7S08S2B0 : 8 solid state outputs
24VDC/0.5 A, with fault detection feedback to the
PLC.
- ABE-7S08S2B1 : 8 solid state outputs
24VDC/2A, with fault detection feedback to the
PLC.
16 channel sub-base
- ABE-7S16S2B0 : 16 solid state outputs 24VDC/
0.5A, with fault detection feedback to the PLC,
- ABE-7S16S2B2 : 16 solid state outputs 24VDC/
0.5A, without fault detection feedback to the PLC.
___________________________________________________________________________
6/2
TELEFAST 2 connection interfaces for discrete I/O 6
• Relay output connection interface and adaptor sub-bases, 8 and 16 channels :
B1
8-channel sub-bases
- ABE-7R08S111 : 8 relay outputs,
1 "N/O" with distribution of "+ or c
" poles.
- ABE-7R08S210 : 8 relay outputs,
1 "N/O", volt-free contact.
16-channel sub-base
- ABE-7R16S111 : 16 relay outputs,
1"N/O", 2x8 commons "+ or c
".
- ABE-7R16S210 : 16 relay outputs,
1 "N/O", volt-free contact,
- ABE-7R16S212 : 16 relay outputs,
1 "N/O" with distribution of both poles per group of 8 channels.
• 16 channels v
2 x 8 channels adaptor sub-base
- ABE-7ACC02 : outputs can be split :
• 16 channels in 2 blocks of 8,
• 12 channels in 1 block of 8 + 1 block of 4.
___________________________________________________________________________
6/3
B1
• Input or output adaptor interface sub-bases, with or without removable electromechanical or solid state relays, 16 channels
Output sub-bases
1"N/O", volt-free contact
- ABE-7R16T210 : with 10 mm wide electromechanical relay,
- ABE-7P16T210 : 10 mm wide relay, not supplied,
- ABE-7P16T214 : as above but with 1 fuse per channel.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
1"N/O", with distribution of both poles per group of 8 channels
- ABE-7R16T212 : with 10 mm wide electromechanical relay,
- ABE-7P16T212 : 10 mm wide relay, not supplied,
- ABE-7P16T215 : as above but with 1 fuse per channel.
0Vdc
LC
+24Vdc
Fus I = 1A max
Q1
Q2
Q0
ABE7P16T214
Q5
Q6
Q3
Q4
Q7
16 Relays Outputs
Q9
Q10
Q11
Q12
Q8
Q13
Q14
Q15
1"N/O", with distribution of both poles per group of 4 channels
- ABE-7P16T318 : without 12.5 mm wide electromechanical relay,
1 fuse +
1 isolator/channel
___________________________________________________________________________
6/4
TELEFAST 2 connection interfaces for discrete I/O 6
1"C/O", volt-free contact
- ABE-7R16T230 : with 10 mm wide electromechanical relay,
- ABE-7R16T330 : with 12.5 mm wide electromechanical relay,
- ABE-7P16T330 : 12.5 mm wide relay, not supplied,
- ABE-7P16T334 : as above but with 1 fuse per channel.
1"C/O", common per group of 8 channels
- ABE-7R16T231 : with 10 mm wide electromechanical relay.
1"C/O", with distribution of both poles per group of 8 channels
- ABE-7R16T332 : with 12.5 mm wide electromechanical relay,
- ABE-7P16T332 : 12.5 mm wide relay, not supplied.
2 "C/O", volt-free contact
- ABE-7R16T370 : with 12.5 mm wide electromechanical relay.
• Input sub-bases for 12.5 mm wide solid state relay
- ABE-7P16F310 : volt-free,
- ABE-7P16F312 : distribution of both poles per group of 8 channels.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
B1
___________________________________________________________________________
6/5
B1
6.2
TSX Micro I/O module and sub-base compatibility
Discrete I/O modules
Modularity
Connection sub-bases
8 channels
ABE-7H08R ii
.
ABE-7H08S21
12 channels
ABE-7H12R ii
ABE-7H12S21
16 channels
ABE-7H16R ii
ABE-7H16S21
ABE-7H16R23
ABE-7H16F43
ABE-7H16S43
TSX DMZ 28DTK DMZ64DTK DEZ 12D2K
1x16I 1x12Q 2x16I 2x16Q 1x12I
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
DSZ 08T2K
1X8Q
Input adaptor sub-bases
16 channels
ABE-7S16S2 ii
ABE-7P16F3 ii
Output adaptor sub-bases
8 channels
ABE-7S08S2 ii
ABE-7R08S iii
16 channels
ABE-7R16S iii
ABE-7R16T iii
ABE-7P16T iii
(3)
(3)
(3)
(1)
(1)
(2)
(1) with adaptator 16 v
2x8 channels ABE-7ACC02
(2) except ABE-7S08S2B0
(3) caution : the 4 unused outputs are at state 1
Combination possible
___________________________________________________________________________
6/6
TELEFAST 2 connection interfaces for discrete I/O 6
6.3
TSX Premium I/O module and sub-base compatibility
Discrete I/O modules TSX DEY DEY : 32D2K DEY
16FK 64D2K
DMY
3 2 D 3 K 28FK/28RFK
DSY : 32T2K
64T2K
1x16I 2x16I 4x16I 2x16I 1x16I 1x12Q 2x16Q 4x16Q Modularity
Connection sub-bases
8 channels
ABE-7H08R ii
ABE-7H08S21
12 channels
ABE-7H12R ii
ABE-7H12S21
16 channels
ABE-7H16R ii
ABE-7H16S21
ABE-7H16R23
ABE-7H16F43
ABE-7H16S43
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(2)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
B1
Input adaptor sub-bases
16 channels
ABE-7S16E2 ii
ABE-7P16F3 ii
Output adaptor sub-bases
8 channels
ABE-7S08S2 ii
ABE-7R08S iii
16 channels
ABE-7R16S iii
ABE-7R16T iii
ABE-7P16T iii
(1) with adaptator 16 v
2x8 channels ABE-7ACC02
(2) only with sub-base ABE-7H16R20
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
Combination possible
___________________________________________________________________________
6/7
ABE-7
B1
6.4
Module v interface sub-base connection principle
The connection between an HE 10 connector located on a discrete I/O module and a connection sub-base is made using a sheathed rolled ribbon cable (TSX CDP i 02) or a connection cable (TSX CDP ii 3) equipped with 20-pin HE10 connectors at each end.
• Sheathed rolled ribbon cables, 28 gauge : 0.08 mm 2 (see description section 5.1-2).
Given the small cross section of the wires, it is recommended that they be used for the connection of low current I/O (< 100 mA per channel).
There are three product references :
- TSX CDP 102 : 1 meter long,
- TSX CDP 202 : 2 meters long,
- TSX CDP 302 : 3 meters long.
• Connection cables, 22 gauge : 0.34 mm 2 (see description section 5.1-2)
Used to connect any I/O with a current of > 500 mA per channel.
There are five product references :
- TSX CDP 053 : 0.5 meters long,
- TSX CDP 103 : 1 meter long,
- TSX CDP 203 : 2 meters long,
- TSX CDP 303 : 3 meters long,
- TSX CDP 503 : 5 meters long,
(1) TSX CDP i 02 ribbon cable or TSX CDP ii 3 cable
(1)
(1)
Module with HE10 connector
(16 channels per connector)
___________________________________________________________________________
6/8
TELEFAST 2 connection interfaces for discrete I/O 6
Connection of 16 channels (2 x 8) using an ABE-7ACC02 adaptor sub-base.
Example 1 : Connection of 16 channels (2 x 8) connecting channels 0 to 7 7
Module with HE10 connector
(16 channels per connector)
B1
(1)
(1)
ABE-7ACC02
(1) TSX CDP i02 ribbon cable
or TSX CDP ii 3 cable
(1) connecting channels 8 to 15
___________________________________________________________________________
6/9
B1
6.5 Sensor or preactuator connection to sub-bases
6.5-1 ABE-7H08R10, ABE-7H08R11, ABE-7H16R10, ABE-7H16R11 sub-bases
+24VDC 0VDC
ABE7-H08R11
8 Digital I/O
PLC
+ +
_ _
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
+24VDC 0VDC
PLC 0 1 2
ABE7-H16R11
3 4 5 6 7 8
16 Digital Inputs / Outputs
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
+ +
_ _
Input functions connection Output functions connection
+ 24
VDC
Module and sensor supply
- 0
VDC
ABE-
7H08R10/11
ABE-
7H16R10/11
+ 24
VDC
Module and preactuator supply
- 0
VDC
ABE-
7H08R10/11
ABE-
7H16R10/11
+ – sensors
+ preactuators
–
Connection of sensor common :
• on terminals 1 or 2 : sensors connected to supply "+" (positive logic inputs),
Connection of preactuator common :
• on terminals 3 or 4 : preactuators connected to supply "–" (positive logic outputs).
!
Sub-bases are supplied with a general purpose 2 A fast blow fuse. In order to ensure optimum protection, this fuse should be rated according to the application (connection to input or output functions) and the maximum permissible current in the sub-base. Type and rating of fuse to be used :
• input functions : 0.5 A fast blow fuse,
• for output functions :
2 A fast blow fuse on ABE-7H16R ii sub-base
-6.3 A fast blow fuse on ABE-7H08R ii sub-base
___________________________________________________________________________
6/10
TELEFAST 2 connection interfaces for discrete I/O 6
6.5-2 ABE-7H12R10, ABE-7H12R11 sub-bases
B1
+24VDC
PLC
+ +
_ _
0VDC ABE7-H12R11
0 1 2 3
12 Digital Inputs / Outputs
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Input functions connection
Module and sensor supply
+ 24
VDC
- 0
VDC
ABE-
7H12R10/11
+ – sensors
–
Output functions connection
Module and preactuator supply
+ 24
VDC
- 0
VDC
ABE-
7H12R10/11
– – + preactuators
–
Connection of sensor common :
• on terminals 1 or 2 : sensors connected to the supply "+" (positive logic inputs).
!
Terminals 200/201/202 and 203 are connected to the "–" pole.
Connection of preactuator common :
The use of a number of terminals connected to the "–" pole (3, 4, 200, 201, 202 and 203) creates commons for each group of 4 or 2 channels (positive logic outputs)
!
Sub-bases are supplied with a general purpose 6.3 A fast blow fuse. In order to ensure optimum protection, this fuse should be rated according to the application (connection to input or output functions) and the maximum permissible current in the sub-base. Type and rating of fuse to be used :
• input functions : 0.5 A fast blow fuse,
• for output functions :
- 6.3 A fast blow fuse on ABE-7H12R ii
sub-base
___________________________________________________________________________
6/11
B1
6.5-3 ABE-7H08R21, ABE-7H16R20, ABE-7H16R21, ABE-7H16R23 sub-bases for type 2 inputs
+24VDC 0VDC
PLC
ABE7-H08R21
8 Digital I/O
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
+
_
+24VDC
+
PLC
_
0VDC ABE7-H16R21
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
16 Digital Inputs / Outputs
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Input functions connection
+ 24
VDC
Module and sensor supply
- 0
VDC
ABE-
7H08R21
ABE-
7H16R20/21
7H16R23
+
(1)
–
Output functions connection
Module and preactuator supply
+ 24
VDC
- 0
VDC
ABE-
7H08R21
ABE-
7H16R20/21
+
(2)
– sensors preactuators
Connection of sensor common :
In order to create the sensor supply common, place the jumper (1) across terminals 1 & 2 : terminals 200 to 215 should be connected to the supply "+" (positive logic input).
Connection of preactuator common :
In order to create the preactuator supply common, place the jumper (2) across terminals
3 & 4 : terminals 200 to 215 should be connected to the supply "+" (positive logic outputs).
!
Sub-bases are supplied with a general purpose 2 A fast blow fuse. In order to ensure optimum protection, this fuse should be rated according to the application (connection to input or output functions) and the maximum permissible current in the sub-base. Type and rating of fuse to be used :
• input functions : 0.5 A fast blow fuse,
• for output functions :
- 2 A fast blow fuse on ABE-7H16R ii sub-base
- 6.3 A fast blow fuse on ABE-7H08R ii sub-base
___________________________________________________________________________
6/12
TELEFAST 2 connection interfaces for discrete I/O 6
6.5-4 ABE-7H12R20, ABE-H12R21 sub-bases
+24VDC 0VDC ABE7-H12R21
0 1 2 3 4 5
12 Digital Inputs / Outputs
6 7 8 9 10 11
PLC
_
+
B1
Input functions connection
Module and sensor supply
+ 24
VDC
- 0
VDC
ABE-
7H12R20/21
+
(1)
– sensors
Output functions connection
+ 24
VDC
- 0
VDC
Module and preactuator supply
ABE-
7H12R20/21
+
(2)
–
Preactuators
Connection of sensor common :
In order to create the sensor supply common, place the jumper (1) across terminals 1 & 2 : terminals 200 to 215 should be connected to the supply "+" (positive logic input).
!
Terminals 216, 217, 218 and 219 are connected to the "–"pole.
Connection of preactuator common :
In order to create the preactuator supply common, place the jumper (2) across terminals
3 & 4 : terminals 200 to 215 should be connected to the supply "–" (positive logic outputs).
!
Terminals 216, 217, 218 and 219 are connected to the "–"pole.
!
The sub-base is supplied with a general purpose 6.3 A fast blow fuse. In order to ensure optimum protection, this fuse should be rated according to the application (connection to input or output functions) and the maximum permissible current in the sub-base. Type and rating of fuse to be used :
• input functions : 0.5 A fast blow fuse,
• output functions :
- 6.3 A fast blow fuse on ABE-7H12R ii sub-base
___________________________________________________________________________
6/13
B1
6.5-5 ABE-7H08S21, ABE-7H16S21 sub-bases with 1 isolator per channel
+24VDC 0VDC
ABE7-H08S21
8 Digital I/O
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
PLC
+
_
+24VDC
+
PLC
_
0VDC ABE7-H16S21
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
16 Digital Inputs / Outputs
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Input functions connection
Module and sensor supply
+ 24
VDC
- 0
VDC
ABE-
7H08S21
ABE-
7H16S21
+
(1) sensors
–
Output functions connection
Module and preactuator supply
+ 24
VDC
- 0
VDC
ABE-
7H08S21
ABE-
7H16S21
+ preactuators
(2)
–
Connection of sensor common :
In order to create the sensor supply common, place the jumper (1) across terminals 1 & 2 : terminals 200 to 215 should be connected to the supply "+" (positive logic input).
Connection of preactuator common :
In order to create the preactuator supply common, place the jumper (2) across terminals 3 & 4 : terminals 200 to 215 should be connected to the supply "–" (positive logic outputs).
!
Sub-bases are supplied with a general purpose 2A fast blow fuse. In order to ensure optimum protection, this fuse should be rated according to the application (connection to input or output functions) and the maximum permissible current in the sub-base. Type and rating of fuse to be used :
• input functions : 0.5 A fast blow fuse,
• output functions :
- 2 A fast blow fuse on ABE-7H16S21 sub-base
- 6.3 A fast blow fuse on ABE-7H08S21 sub-base
___________________________________________________________________________
6/14
TELEFAST 2 connection interfaces for discrete I/O 6
6.5-6 ABE-7H12S21 sub-base with 1 isolator per channel
+24VDC 0VDC ABE7-H12S21
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
12 Digital Inputs / Outputs
7 8 9 10 11
PLC
_
+
B1
Input functions connection
Module and sensor supply
+ 24
VDC
- 0
VDC
ABE-
7H12S21
+
(1)
– sensors
Output functions connection
Module and preactuator supply
+ 24
VDC
- 0
VDC
ABE-
7H12S21
+
(2)
–
Preactuators
Connection of sensor common :
In order to create the sensor supply common, place the jumper (1) across terminals 1 & 2 : terminals 200 to 215 should be connected to the supply "+" (positive logic input).
!
Terminals 216, 217, 218 and 219 are connected to the "–"pole.
Connection of preactuator common :
In order to create the preactuator supply common, place the jumper (2) across terminals 3 & 4 : terminals 200 to 215 should be connected to the supply "–" (positive logic outputs).
!
Terminals 216, 217, 218 and 219 are connected to the "–"pole.
!
The sub-base is supplied with a general purpose 6.3 A fast blow fuse. In order to ensure optimum protection, this fuse should be rated according to the application (connection to input or output functions) and the maximum permissible current in the sub-base. Type and rating of fuse to be used :
• input functions : 0.5 A fast blow fuse,
• output functions :
- 6.3 A fast blow fuse on ABE-7H12S21 sub-base
___________________________________________________________________________
6/15
B1
6.5-7 ABE-7H16R30, ABE-7H16R31 sub-bases
+24VDC
_
0VDC ABE7-H16R31
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
16 Digital Inputs / Outputs
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
+
Input functions connection
Module and sensor supply
+ 24
VDC
- 0
VDC
ABE-
7H16R30/31
+
(1)
(2)
–
Connection of sensor common :
In order to create the sensor supply common :
• place the jumper (1) across terminals 1 & 2 : terminals 200 to 215 should be connected to the supply "+",
• connect terminal 4 to one of the "C" terminals on the third row (2) : terminals 300 to
315 should be connected to the supply "–".
!
Sub-bases are supplied with a general purpose 2 A fast blow fuse. In order to ensure optimum protection, this fuse should be rated according to the application (connection to input or output functions) and the maximum permissible current in the sub-base. Type and rating of fuse to be used :
• input functions : 0.5 A fast blow fuse.
___________________________________________________________________________
6/16
TELEFAST 2 connection interfaces for discrete I/O 6
6.5-8 ABE-7H12R50 sub-base
+24VDC 0VDC
PLC
0
1
2
3
+ +
_ _
ABE7-H12R50
12 Digital I/O
4
5
6
7
8
9 11
10
B1
Input functions connection
Module and sensor supply
+ 24
VDC
- 0
VDC
ABE-
7H12R50
+ – sensors
Output functions connection
Module and preactuator supply
+ 24
VDC
- 0
VDC
ABE-
7H12R50
+ –
Preactuators
Connection of sensor common :
• on terminals 1 or 2 : sensors connected to the supply "+" (positive logic input).
!
Terminals 200/201/202 and 203 are connected to the "–" pole.
Connection of preactuator common :
The use of a number of terminals connected to the "–" pole (3, 4, 200, 201, 202 and 203) creates commons for each group of 4 or 2 channels (positive logic outputs).
!
The sub-base is supplied with a general purpose 6.3 A fast blow fuse. In order to ensure optimum protection, this fuse should be rated according to the application (connection to input or output functions) and the maximum permissible current in the sub-base. Type and rating of fuse to be used :
• input functions : 0.5 A fast blow fuse,
• output functions :
- 6.3 A fast blow fuse on ABE-7H12R50 sub-base
___________________________________________________________________________
6/17
B1
6.5-9 ABE-7H116R50 sub-base
+24VDC 0VDC
PLC
ABE7-H16R50
16 Digital I/O
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 11
10 12
13 15
14
+ +
_ _
Input functions connection
Module and sensor supply
+ 24
VDC
- 0
VDC
ABE-
7H16R50
+ – sensors
Output functions connnection
Module and preactuator supply
+ 24
VDC
- 0
VDC
ABE-
7H16R50
+ –
Preactuators
Connection of sensor common :
• on terminals 1 or 2 : sensors connected to the supply "+" (positive logic input).
Connection of preactuator common :
• on terminals 3 or 4 : preactuators connected to supply "–" (positive logic output).
!
The sub-base is supplied with a general purpose 6.3 A fast blow fuse. In order to ensure optimum protection, this fuse should be rated according to the application (connection to input or output functions) and the maximum permissible current in the sub-base. Type and rating of fuse to be used :
• input functions : 0.5 A fast blow fuse,
• output functions :
- 2 A fast blow fuse on ABE-7H12R50 sub-base
___________________________________________________________________________
6/18
TELEFAST 2 connection interfaces for discrete I/O 6
6.5-10 ABE-7H16F43 output sub-base with 1 fuse and 1 isolator per channel
B1
NC
NC
NC
NC
114
214
113
213
115
215
212
111
112
110
210
211
109
209
108
208
107
207
106
206
105
205
104
204
103
203
102
202
101
201
100
200
3
2
1
4
___________________________________________________________________________
6/19
B1
6.5-11 ABE-7H16S43 input sub-base with 1 fuse and 1 isolator per channel
NC
NC
NC
NC
114
214
113
213
115
215
112
212
111
211
110
210
109
209
108
208
107
207
106
206
105
205
104
204
103
203
202
101
102
100
200
201
3
2
1
4
___________________________________________________________________________
6/20
TELEFAST 2 connection interfaces for discrete I/O 6
6.5-12 Fixed relay output adaptor sub-bases : ABE-7R08S111, ABE-7R16S111,
ABE-7R16S210, ABE-7R16S212
• ABE-7R08S111 sub-bases : 8 relay outputs, 1"N/O" 2 x 4 commons "+ or c "
ABE-7R16S111 : 16 relay outputs, 1"N/O" 2 x 8 commons "+ or c "
B1
+24VDC
PLC Fuse I=1Amax.
0VDC
ABE7- R08S111
8 Relays Outputs
Q0
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q5
Q6
Q7
PLC
+24VDC
Fuse I=1Amax.
0VDC
ABE7-R16S111 16 Relays Outputs
Q0
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q5
Q6
Q7
13
14
Q8
Q9
Q10
Q11
Q12
Q13
Q14
Q15
13
14
Sub-base and module output supply
+ 24
VDC
- 0
VDC
ABE-7R08S111
Preactuator
supply
24...240 VAC or
24...127VDC
Ph
N
U1
Fu
Fu
Ph
U2
N preactuators
+ 24
VDC
- 0
VDC
ABE-7 i sub-base and module output supply
ABE-7R16S111
Preactuator
supply
24...240 VAC or
24...127VDC
Ph
N
Ph
U1
U2
Fu
Fu
N preactuators
Type and rating of fuse supplied with the sub-base :
1 A fast blow fuse.
Fu : fuse to be rated according to the load
Protection of relay contacts :
Protection circuit must be placed across the preactuator terminals :
• RC or MOV circuit for AC,
• discharge diode for DC
___________________________________________________________________________
6/21
B1
• ABE-7R16S210 sub-base : 16 relay outputs, 1 "N/O", volt-free contacts
NC
NC
NC
NC
113
213
112
212
111
211
110
210
115
215
114
214
106
206
207
105
205
104
204
109
209
208
107
108
103
203
102
202
101
201
100
200
3
2
1
4
___________________________________________________________________________
6/22
TELEFAST 2 connection interfaces for discrete I/O 6
• ABE-7R16S212 sub-base : 16 relay outputs, 1 "N/O", with distribution of both poles per group of 8 channels
B1
206
105
205
104
204
103
101
201
202
100
203
102
209
108
109
208
107
210
207
106
200
112
212
111
211
110
114
214
113
213
115
215
4
3
1
2
___________________________________________________________________________
6/23
B1
6.5-13 Fixed solid state relay input adaptor sub-bases : ABE-7S16E2B1,
ABE-7S16E2E1, ABE-7S16E2E0, ABE-7S16E2F0, ABE-7S16E2M0
105
205
206
104
204
103
203
108
208
207
106
107
202
101
102
201
100
200
210
109
110
209
112
212
111
211
215
114
115
214
113
213
4
3
1
2
___________________________________________________________________________
6/24
TELEFAST 2 connection interfaces for discrete I/O 6
6.5-14 Solid state output adaptor sub-bases : ABE-7S16S2B0, ABE-7S16S2B2 and ABE-7S08S2B0, ABE-7S08S2B1
• ABE-7S16S2B0 and ABE-7S16S2B2 sub-bases : 16 solid state outputs/ 24VDC / 0.5A
B1
114
214
113
213
115
215
112
212
111
211
110
210
109
209
108
208
107
207
106
206
105
205
104
204
103
203
101
201
100
200
102
202
NC
NC
4
3
1
2
___________________________________________________________________________
6/25
B1
• ABE-7S08S2B1 sub-base : 8 solid state outputs / 24 VDC / 2A
NC
NC
NC
NC
3
2
1
4
100
200
NC
NC
101
201
NC
NC
102
202
NC
NC
103
203
NC
NC
104
204
NC
NC
105
205
NC
NC
106
206
NC
NC
107
207
___________________________________________________________________________
6/26
TELEFAST 2 connection interfaces for discrete I/O 6
• ABE-7S08S2B0 sub-base : 8 solid state outputs / 24 VDC / 0.5A
+24VDC
Fuse I=2Amax.
On protected outputs only
+
0VDC
Q0
ABE7-S08S2B0 8 non Isolated Outputs 24VDC 0,5A
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7
B1
+ 24
VDC
- 0
VDC
ABE-7 i sub-base, TSX i module output and preactuator supply
Type and rating of fuse supplied with the sub-base :
2 A fast blow fuse
ABE-708S2B0
1 2 3 4 200
100
201
101
202
102
203
103
– +
Fu
Preactuators
207
107 chan. 7 Fu : fuse to be rated according to the load chan. 0 chan. 1 chan. 2 chan. 3
___________________________________________________________________________
6/27
B1
6.5-15 Solid state or electromechanical relay output sub-bases, relay 10mm wide
• 1"N/O" sub-bases, volt-free contact
- ABE-7R16T210 with electromechanical relays
- ABE-7P16T210 relay not supplied
6
8
5
7
115
215
114
214
113
213
112
212
111
211
110
210
109
209
108
208
2
1
4
3
107
207
106
206
105
205
104
204
103
203
102
202
101
201
100
200
___________________________________________________________________________
6/28
TELEFAST 2 connection interfaces for discrete I/O 6
• 1"N/O" sub-bases, with distribution of both poles per group of 8 channels
- ABE-7R16T212 with electromechanical relays
- ABE-7P16T212 relay not supplied
6
5
8
7
115
215
114
214
113
213
112
212
111
211
110
210
109
209
108
208
2
1
4
3
107
207
106
206
105
205
104
204
103
203
102
202
101
201
100
200
___________________________________________________________________________
6/29
B1
B1
• ABE-7R16T230 sub-base with electromechanical relays (1 "C/O"), volt-free contact
112
312
313
111
311
114
314
113
6
5
115
315
110
310
109
309
108
308
2
1
105
305
104
304
103
303
102
302
107
307
106
306
101
301
100
300
8
7
215
4
3
207
210
202
214
213
212
211
209
208
206
205
204
203
201
200
___________________________________________________________________________
6/30
TELEFAST 2 connection interfaces for discrete I/O 6
• ABE-7R16T231 sub-base, with electromechanical relays (1"C/O"), distribution of one common per group of 8 channels
B1
109
309
108
308
111
311
110
310
113
313
112
312
2
1
107
307
106
306
115
315
114
314
6
5
105
305
104
304
102
302
103
303
101
301
100
300
4
3
8
7
___________________________________________________________________________
6/31
B1
• ABE-7P16T214 sub-base relays not supplied
1"N/O", volt-free contact
1 fuse per channel
6
5
8
7
115
215
114
113
213
214
112
212
111
211
110
210
108
208
109
209
2
1
4
3
107
207
106
206
105
205
104
204
103
203
102
202
101
201
100
200
___________________________________________________________________________
6/32
TELEFAST 2 connection interfaces for discrete I/O 6
• ABE-7P16T215 sub-base relays not supplied
1"N/O", distribution of both poles per group of 8 channels
1 fuse per channel
6
5
8
7
115
215
114
214
113
213
112
212
111
211
110
210
109
209
108
208
2
1
4
3
107
207
106
206
105
205
104
204
103
203
102
202
101
201
100
200
___________________________________________________________________________
6/33
B1
B1
6.5-16 Electromechanical or solid state relay input or output sub-bases, relay 12.5 mm wide
• 1"C/O" sub-bases, volt-free contact
- ABE-7R16T330 with electromechanical relays
- ABE-7P16T330 relays not supplied
115
215
315
114
214
314
113
213
313
112
212
312
111
211
311
110
210
310
109
209
309
108
208
308
107
207
307
106
206
306
105
205
305
104
204
304
103
203
303
102
202
302
101
201
301
100
200
300
___________________________________________________________________________
6/34
TELEFAST 2 connection interfaces for discrete I/O 6
B1
• 1"C/O" sub-bases, distribution of both poles per group of 4 channels
- ABE-7R16T332 with electromechanical relays
- ABE-7P16T332 relays not supplied
14
13
12
11
10
9
16
15
3
4
5
6
1
2
7
8
210
310
110
209
309
109
108
206
306
105
307
106
107
207
208
308
305
104
205
211
311
212
312
111
302
101
201
301
100
202
102
200
300
204
304
103
203
303
215
315
114
115
313
112
213
314
113
214
___________________________________________________________________________
6/35
B1
• ABE-7R16T370 sub-bases, with electromechanical relay (2 "C/O"), volt-free contact
___________________________________________________________________________
6/36
TELEFAST 2 connection interfaces for discrete I/O 6
B1
• ABE-7P16T334 sub-base, relays not supplied (1"C/O"), volt-free contact
210
310
110
211
311
209
309
109
108
107
207
307
208
308
314
113
214
213
313
114
312
111
212
112
205
305
105
206
306
106
204
304
104
103
203
303
102
215
315
115
101
201
302
301
100
200
202
300
___________________________________________________________________________
6/37
B1
• ABE-7P16T318 sub-base, relays not supplied
1"C/O" distribution of both poles per group of 4 channels
1 fuse and 1 isolator per channel
8
114
213
214
113
NC
212
112
7
211
111
NC
6
110
209
210
109
NC
115
NC
208
108
5
207
107
NC
4
106
205
206
105
215
NC
204
104
3
203
103
NC
202
2
102
201
101
NC
200
100
1
___________________________________________________________________________
6/38
TELEFAST 2 connection interfaces for discrete I/O 6
• ABE-7P16F310 solid state relay input sub-base (relays not supplied), volt-free
B1
215
NC
115
114
NC
200
100
NC
101
202
201
NC
102
104
204
203
NC
NC
103
205
NC
105
NC
106
NC
206
107
207
209
NC
108
NC
208
NC
109
210
110
NC
111
211
NC
112
212
NC
113
213
NC
214
___________________________________________________________________________
6/39
B1
• ABE-7P16F312 solid state relay input sub-base (relays not supplied), distribution of both poles per group of 8 channels
101
201
NC
NC
200
100
202
102
203
NC
NC
107
207
106
NC
NC
208
206
205
105
104
204
109
209
108
3
2
4
1
103
6
5
8
7
111
211
112
212
110
210
113
213
214
215
114
115
NC
NC
___________________________________________________________________________
6/40
TELEFAST 2 connection interfaces for discrete I/O 6
B1
6.6
Compatibility table for relays and ABE-7R16T iii , ABE-7P16T iii ,
ABE-7P16F iii sub-bases
___________________________________________________________________________
6/41
B1
6.7
Accessories
• Add-on shunt terminal block :
ABE-7BV10 : terminal block with 10 screw terminals
ABE-7BV20 : terminal block with 20 screw terminals
• Adaptor sub-base :
ABE-7ACC02 : used to switch from 16 channels to 2x8 channels
• Mounting kit :
ABE-7ACC01 : is used to fix sub-bases to solid plates
ABE-7BV20
• Dust and damp-proof cable bushing :
ABE-7ACC84 : is used to feed through the enclosure without isolating the leads
• Enclosure feed through :
ABE-7ACC83 : HE10 connectors for 8/12 channels v
M23 cylindrical connector.
ABE-7ACC82 : HE10 connector for 16 channels v
M23 cylindrical connector.
ABE-7ACC80 : HE10 connectors for 32 channels v
"HARTING" type connector.
ABE-7ACC81 : plug-in connector for ABE-7ACC80
ABE-7ACC82
• Removable continuity module :
ABE-7ACC20 : 10 mm wide
ABE-7ACC21 : 12.5 mm wide
• Software for marking customer labels :
ABE-7LOGV10
• Glass 5 x 20 fast blow fuse :
ABE-7FU012 0.125 A
ABE-7F7050
ABE-7FU100
0.5
1
A
A
ABE-7FU200
ABE-7FU630
• Self-adhesive label holder :
AR1-SB3 for AB1-R. / AB1-G. type labels
2
ABE-7ACC80
A
6.3 A
• Relays for ABE-7R16T iii , ABE-7P16T iii and ABE-7P16F iii sub-bases :
ABR-7S iii : electromechanical output relays
(see page 6/41)
ABS-7S iii : solid state output relays
(see page 6/41)
ABS-7E iii : solid state input relays
(see page 6/41)
ABR-7S3 ii ABR-7S2 ii
___________________________________________________________________________
6/42
TELEFAST 2 connection interfaces for discrete I/O 6
6.8
Sub-base electrical characteristics
6.8-1 Fixed input adaptor sub-bases
Types of sub-base
Number of channels
ABE-7 ABE-7 ABE-7 ABE-7 ABE-7
S16E2B1 S16E2E1 S16E2E0 S16E2F0 S16E2M0
16 16
Control circuit characteristics (application inputs)
16 16 16
Nominal values Voltage 24VDC 48VDC
Input limit values
Current
Frequency -
12 mA
-
13 mA
At state 1 Voltage > 13.7 V > 30 V
Current > 5 mA > 6 mA
At state 0 Voltage < 5 V < 10 V
48VAC 110/ 230/
130VAC 240VAC
12 mA 8.3 mA 8 mA
50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz
> 32 V
> 5 mA
< 10 V
> 79 V
> 5 mA
< 30 V
> 164 V
> 4.5 mA
< 40 V
Frequency
Current < 2 mA
-
Sensor supply
(ripple included)
-
< 2 mA < 1.5 mA < 2 mA < 2 mA
47...63 Hz 47...63 Hz 47...63 Hz
19..30 V 38.4...60 V 38.4...53 V 96...143 V 184...264 V
IEC 1131-2 conformity
Response time
Maximum switching frequency
Rated insulation voltage
Rated impulse withstand voltage
(1.2 / 50) type 1
State 0 to 1 0.05 ms 0.05 ms 20 ms
State 1 to 0 0.4 ms
I/O
I/O type 2
0.4 ms type 1
20 ms
1000 Hz 1000 Hz 25 Hz
300 V
2.5 kV type 1
20 ms
20 ms
25 Hz type 1
20 ms
20 ms
25 Hz
B1
___________________________________________________________________________
6/43
B1
6.8-2 Fixed solid state output adaptor sub-bases
Types of sub-base ABE-7
S i i S2B0
8 / 16 Number of channels
Output circuit characteristics
DC load Resistive,
DC12 duty
Voltage 24 VDC
Inductive,
DC13 duty
Current 0.5 A
Voltage 24 VDC
Filament lamp
Current 0.25 A
10 W
ABE-7
S16S2B2
16
24 VDC
0.5 A
24 VDC
0.25 A
10 W
ABE-7
S08S2B1
8
24 VDC
2 A (1)
24 VDC
0.5 A (1) no
Limit values
Leakage current at state 0
Residual voltage at state 1
Minimum current per channel
Response time State 0 to 1
Built-in protection
State 1 to 0
Against overloads and short-circuits
Against inductive overvoltages
Against reverse polarity
Switching frequency on inductive load
Fault detection feedback
Rated insulation voltage
I/O
Rated impulse withstand voltage
(1.2 / 50)
I/O
Voltage 19...30 VDC
< 0.3 mA
< 0.6 V
19...30 VDC
< 0.3 mA
< 0.6 V
19...30 VDC
< 0.5 mA
< 0.5 V
1 mA
0.1 ms
1 mA
0.1 ms
1 mA
0.1 ms
0.02 ms 0.02 ms 0.02 ms
Yes by current limiter and circuit-breaker
Id > 0.75 A Id > 0.75 A Id > 2.6 A
Yes by integrated zener diode
Yes by peak limiter
< 0.6 LI
Y e s
2
300 V
2.5 kV
< 0.6 LI
No
2 < 0.5 LI
Y e s
2
(1) from 50°C to + 60°C alternating between channels
___________________________________________________________________________
6/44
TELEFAST 2 connection interfaces for discrete I/O 6
6.8-3 Fixed relay output adaptor sub-bases
Types of sub-base
Number of channels
Contact characteristics
Limit operating voltage AC c
DC a
Thermal current
A C load
Resistive,
AC12 duty
Voltage
Inductive,
AC15 duty
ABE-7
R i i S111
8 / 16
250 V
30 V
3 A
230 VAC
Current (1) 0.6 A
Voltage 230 VAC
ABE-7
R i i
8 / 16
250 V
125 V
5 A
230 VAC
1.5 A
S210
230 VAC
D C load
Resistive,
DC12 duty
Current (1) 0.4 A
Voltage 24 VDC
0.9 A
24 VDC
Minimum switching
Current (1) 0.6 A
Inductive,
DC13 duty
Voltage 24 VDC
L/R = 10 ms Current (1) 0.2A
Current
Voltage
1 mA
5 V
10 ms Response time State 0 to 1
State 1 to 0
Maximum rate of on-load operation
Built-in protection
Against overloads and short-circuits
6 ms
0.5 Hz
1.5 A
24 VDC
0.6 A
10 mA
5 V
10 ms
5 ms
0.5 Hz
None, fit a fast blow fuse per channel or group of channels
Against inductive overvoltages in AC
ABE-7
R16S212
16
250 V
125 V
5 A
230 VAC
1.5 A
230 VAC
0.9 A
24 VDC
1.5 A
24 VDC
0.6 A
10 mA
5 V
10 ms
5 ms
0.5 Hz
None, an RC circuit or an MOV (ZNO) peak limiter appropriate to the voltage must be placed across the terminals of each preactuator
Against inductive overvoltages in DC
Rated insulation voltage
Coil/contact
Rated impulse withstand Coil/contact
voltage (1.2 / 50)
None, a discharge diode must be placed across the terminals of each preactuator
300 V
2.5 kV
(1) for 0.5 x10 6 operations
___________________________________________________________________________
6/45
B1
B1
6.8-4 Removable output electromechanical relays
Relay references
Relay width
ABR-7
Contact characteristics
Contact type
Max operating voltage AC c
(in line with IEC 947-5-1)DC a
Thermal current v
S21
10 mm
1"N/O"
250 V
125 V
4 A
L/R = 10 ms Current (1) 0.6 A
Minimum switching Current
Voltage
10 mA
5 V
Response time State 0 to 1 10 ms
State 1 to 0 5 ms
0.5 Hz Maximum rate of on-load operation
Rated insulation voltage
Rated impulse withstand voltage
(1.2 / 50)
Coil/contact
Coil/contact
S23
10 mm
1"C/O" 1"C/O"
250 V 264 V
125 V
4 A
125 V
5 A
Frequency of the operating current
AC load Resistive, Voltage 230 VAC
AC12 duty Current (1) 1.5 A
50/60 Hz
230 VAC
1.2 A
230 VAC
3 A
230 VAC
2.5 A
DC load
Inductive, Voltage 230 VAC 230 VAC 230 VAC 230 VAC
AC15 duty Current (1) 0.9 A 0.7 A 1.7 A 1.3 A
Resistive,
DC12 duty
Inductive,
DC13 duty
Voltage
Current (1)
Voltage
24 VDC
1.5 A
24 VDC
24 VDC
1.2 A
24 VDC
24 VDC
3 A
24 VDC
24 VDC
2.5 A
24 VDC
0.45 A
10 mA
5 V
10 ms
5 ms
0.5 Hz
S33
12.5 mm
1.4 A
13 ms
13 ms
0.5 Hz
300 V
2.5 kV
S37
12.5 mm
2"C/O"
264 V
125 V
5 A
1 A
100 mA 100 mA
5 V 5 V
15 ms
20 ms
0.5 Hz
(1) for 0.5 x10 6
___________________________________________________________________________
6/46
TELEFAST 2 connection interfaces for discrete I/O 6
6.8-5 Removable input solid state relays
References
Relay width
ABS-7 v
EC3AL EC3B2 EC3E2 EA3E5 EA3F5 EA3M5
12.5mm 12.5mm 12.5mm 12.5mm 12.5mm
12.5mm
Control characteristics
Rated operating D C voltage (Us) A C
Maximum operating voltage
(ripple included) a
5V c
6 V
Max Us current
24V
30 V
48V
60 V
—
48V
53 V
— —
110/130V 230/240V
143 V 264 V
13.6 mA 15 mA 15 mA 12 mA 8.3 mA 8 mA
State 1 guaranteed Voltage
Current
State 0 guaranteed Voltage
Current
Maximum switching
frequency (cyclic ratio 50%)
3.75 V
2 V
11 V
4.5 mA 6 mA 6 mA 5 mA 5 mA
5 V
0.09 mA 2 mA
30 V
10 V
2 mA
32 V
10 V
1.5 mA
1000 Hz 1000 Hz 1000 Hz 25 Hz
79 V
30 V
2 mA
25 Hz
164 V
4.5 mA
40 V
2 mA
25 Hz
IEC 1131-2 conformity
Response time
— Type 2 Type 2 Type 1 Type 1 Type 1
State 0 to 1 0.05 ms 0.05 ms 0.05 ms 20 ms 20 ms 20 ms
State 1 to 0 0.4 ms 0.4 ms 0.4 ms 20 ms 20 ms 20 ms
I/O 300 V Rated insulation voltage
Rated impulse withstand voltage
(1.2 / 50)
I/O 2.5 kV
B1
___________________________________________________________________________
6/47
B1
6.8-6 Fixed output solid state relays
References
Relay width
ABS-7
Output circuit characteristics
Rated operating D C v
SC2E
10mm
SA2M
10mm
SC3BA
12.5mm
SC3E
12.5mm
SA3M
12.5mm
voltage
Maximum voltage
A C load
A C a c
5..48V
Resistive, Current —
AC12 duty
— 24V 5..48V
—
— 24..240V — — 24..240V
57.6VDC 264 VAC 30 VDC 60 VDC 264 VAC
0.5 A — — 2 A
D C load
Resistive, Current 0.5 A
DC12 duty
Inductive, Current —
DC13 duty
Filament lamp
DC6 duty
—
Leakage current at state 0
—
—
—
2 A
—
—
1.5 A
0.3 A
10 W
—
—
—
< 0.5 mA < 2 mA < 0.3 mA < 0.3 mA < 2 mA
Residual voltage at state 1
Minimum current per channel
Response time
Switching frequency on inductive load
Rated insulation voltage
Rated impulse withstand voltage
(1.2 / 50)
< 1 V
1 mA
< 1.1 V
10 mA
State 0 to 1 0.1 ms 10 ms
State 1 to 0 0.6 ms 10 ms
— —
I/O
I/O
300 V
2.5 kV
< 0.3 V
1 mA
0.1 ms
0.02 ms
< 0.5 LI 2
< 1.3 V
1 mA
0.1 ms
0.6 ms
—
< 1.3 V
10 mA
10 ms
10 ms
—
___________________________________________________________________________
6/48
TELEFAST 2 connection interfaces for discrete I/O 6
6.9
Dimensions and mounting
• Dimensions
67
58 84 125
B1
15
(1) Dimension with add-on shunt terminal block
ABE-7BV20 or
ABE-7BV10
67
58
(1)
ABE-7H08R1 i
ABE-7H08R2 i
ABE-7H12R50
ABE-7H16R50
ABE-7R08S111
ABE-7H08S21
(1)
ABE-7H12R1 i , ABE-7H12R2 i
ABE-7H12S21 , ABE-7H16R1 i
ABE-7H16R2 i , ABE-7H16R3 i
ABE-7H16S21 , ABE-7R16S111
ABE-7R08S210 , ABE-
7S08S2B0
206
15
57
48
ABE-7H16F43
ABE-7H16S43
ABE-7S16E2B1
ABE-7S16E2E1
ABE-7S16E2E0
ABE-7S16E2F0
ABE-7S16E2M0
ABE-7S08S2B1
ABE-7S16S2B0
ABE-7S16S2B2
ABE-7R16S210
ABE-7R16S212
50
ABE-7ACC02
15
___________________________________________________________________________
6/49
B1
• Dimensions (cont)
74
65 211
15
Reference with dimensions of
211x88 mm
(product pictured with removable relays and screws not mounted)
83
74
(1)
ABE-7R16T210
ABE-7R16T212
ABE-7R16T231
ABE-7R16T230
ABE-7P16T210
ABE-7P16T212
ABE-7P16T214
ABE-7P16T215
272
(1)
15
Reference with dimensions of
272x88 mm
(product pictured with removable relays and screws not mounted)
ABE-7R16T330
ABE-7R16T332
ABE-7R16T370
ABE-7P16T330
ABE-7P16T332
ABE-7P16T334
ABE-7P16T318
(1) Dimension with add-on shunt terminal block
ABE-7BV20 or ABE-7BV10
___________________________________________________________________________
6/50
TELEFAST 2 connection interfaces for discrete I/O 6
• Mounting
TELEFAST 2 connection sub-bases are mounted on 35 mm DIN rails.
Special mounting requirements for certain sub-bases
The following sub-bases must be mounted on a vertical plane and in a horizontal position :
• input adaptor sub-bases : ABE-7S16E2E1
• solid state output adaptor sub-bases : ABE-7S ii S2B i
B1
___________________________________________________________________________
6/51
B1
___________________________________________________________________________
6/52
TSX PAY safety modules
Section
2.1-1 User functions of the product
2.3-2 Protective guard function with automatic start
2.4-1 Detection of faults on the inputs
2.4-2 Detection of faults on the outputs
2.4-3 Detection of internal module faults
2.4-4 Detection of ground faults
Contents
Part B2
B2
Page
___________________________________________________________________________
B2/1
B2 TSX PAY safety modules Contents
Part B2
Section
3 Connections and wiring examples
3.1-2 Feedback loop connection
3.2-2 Marking of the TSX CPP x02 cable
___________________________________________________________________________
B2/2
Page
TSX PAY safety modules Contents
Part B2
B2
Section
4.5-4 Activation of the Reset input
4.5-5 State of the output control bit
Characteristics of TSX PAY modules
Characteristics of TSX CPP x02 and TSX CPP 301 cables
General wiring rules and recommendations
Protection of the safety system
Protection of the safety outputs
Page
___________________________________________________________________________
B2/3
B2 TSX PAY safety modules
Section
Contents
Part B2
Page
___________________________________________________________________________
B2/4
1 Presentation B2
1.1
General description
TSX PAY safety modules and TSX CPP ... and ABE-7CPA13 accessories are used to interrupt one or more category 0 emergency stop (ES) or safety stop control circuits
(safety components). The complete safety system satisfies the requirements of European standards EN418 for emergency stops and EN60204-1 for safety circuits.
The modules also meet the safety requirements for the electrical monitoring of limit switches (LS) activated by protection devices.
TSX PAY TSX PAY
TSX CPP 301
TSX
CPP x02
ABE7-CPA13
TSX PAY 262 and TSX PAY 282 safety modules offer :
• A safety system designed to safely control the emergency stop (ES) circuits on machines. The modules are equipped with a safety block in hard-wired logic for emergency stop monitoring.
• Complete diagnostics of the safety system by reading the state of the pushbuttons or limit switches for the emergency stop input circuit, the reset input, the feedback loop, the control bit of the two output circuits and the supply state of the safety system. This data is transmitted to the TSX Premium CPU in the form of 28 discrete input bits.
The PLC has no effect on the safety modules, and the safety system part is connected to an external power supply.
___________________________________________________________________________
1/1
B2
1.2
Physical description
TSX PAY modules have the same format as Premium PLC interfaces.
They occupy a single slot.
1 IP20 rigid housing to support and protect the electronic card
2 Block for displaying the operating modes, any errors and state of the safety system
3 Module reference label (right side)
4 Laser marking of the module external power supply
5 Label marking the characteristics of the safety outputs (left side)
6 Free zone for user referencing
7 High-density 44-pin SUB-D connector for connecting the safety system
8 Front panel label for identifying the safety outputs
9 Removable screw terminal block for connecting the safety outputs
___________________________________________________________________________
1/2
Presentation 1
B2
1.3
Module range
Modules
Target applications
For emergency stop and limit switch monitoring
From 1 to 12 double-contact PB/LS.
Break per relay :
2 safety outputs
Power supply : 24VDC
1 to 12 double-contact PB/LS.
Break per relay :
4 safety outputs
Power supply : 24VDC
Category
Number of outputs
Number of inputs
Connection
Input string
Outputs
Power supply
4
2F (Immediate stop)
12 double or single contacts
By 44-pin HD SUB-D connectors
By 6-pin screw terminal block
24VDC
4F (Immediate stop)
12 double or single contacts
By 44-pin HD SUB-D connectors
By 6-pin screw terminal block
24VDC
Output string voltage 24VDC
PLC diagnostics
24VDC
Reading the state of the input contacts (PB or LS)
Reading the reset input
Reading the output control bit
Reading the feedback loop
Presence of safety system power supply / monitoring (see section 2.2)
Reset monitoring
Standards
Yes, by means of a strap Yes, by means of a strap
EN 60204-1, EN 292, EN 418, prEN 1921, BS 2771-1, DIN VDE 0113-1,
EN 954, EN 1088, EN 574 type III A, NF C 79-130, NF E 09-053
Display
Synchronism of inputs
28 LEDs + 3 Premium standard state LEDs approx. 400ms (<1s, automatic start)
Module ref.
TSX PAY 262 TSX PAY 282
TSX CPP X02 connection cables and ABE 7CPA13 terminal blocks must be ordered separately.
___________________________________________________________________________
1/3
B2
1.4
Installing TSX PAY modules
TSX PAY 262 and TSX PAY 282 modules have a standard format.
They can be installed in any of the positions of a TSX RKY ... rack, with the exception of positions dedicated to the power supply and processor modules.
The I/O of PAY ... modules must be counted as discrete in-rack I/O, respecting the limits defined for each type of processor.
1.5
Software setup
Software setup (configuration, debugging, etc) is performed using PL7 Premium / PL7
PRO software (see the Premium PLC application-specific manual "Basic Functions").
___________________________________________________________________________
1/4
2 Safety function B2
2.1
Description
2.1-1 User functions of the product
TSX PAY modules provide the following functions :
• Monitoring of the emergency stop PBs and limit switches (LS) of moving guards for immediate stop (Emergency stop category 0 according to standard EN 418)
• Detection of desynchronism between the channels (>400ms) in automatic start-up mode
• Hard-wired safety block independent of the operating mode of the Premium PLC
• Regardless of the failures in the safety system components, the safety function is guaranteed by :
- 2 safety output circuits
- double-contact inputs for the emergency stop PB or LS
• Wiring of one (+) channel on an input (x) and the (-) channel on another input (x+12) in the case of a double contact
• Self-checking redundancy concept (similar to the PREVENTA XPS-ASF range, see the Telemecanique catalogue "Components for safety applications")
• Restart control via action on an auxiliary input : reset input
• Possibility of monitoring the reset input via action on a falling edge
• Selection of start-up mode via external wiring : manual, automatic or on a falling edge
• Self-testing of outputs by reading their state in the feedback loop
• Self-testing of input channels by means of the continuous comparison of their respective states
• Complete diagnostics of the safety system by :
- reading the state of the emergency stop PB or LS inputs
- reading the reset input
- reading the feedback loop
- reading the safety output control bit
- reading the state of the safety system power supply
- monitoring the module external power supply
• Possibility of selecting external power supply monitoring by PL7
Note :
PB (pushbutton)
ES (emergency stop)
LS (limit switch)
___________________________________________________________________________
2/1
B2
2.1-2 Operating modes
• Diagram of the product
S121 + Double
Single
S232 B1
A1
24VDC
External power supply
A2
K1 K2
Y1
Y2/S33
S34
Feedback loop
Reset
Y3
Y4
Reset monitoring
(Shunt)
S112
Single
S01
• External power supply
The 24 VDC external power supply is wired between terminals A1 and A2. It must be protected by an external fuse.
• Use of single/double contact ES PB and LS
The wiring of terminal B1 makes it possible to choose the type of ES PB, single or double :
- B1 connected to S121, the module will be wired with double contacts between terminals S121 to S232 for positive polarity and between terminals S01 to S112 for negative polarity
- B1 connected to S232, the module will be wired with single contacts between terminal S121 and S232 for positive polarity, a global shunt between terminals
S01 and S112 having been produced for negative polarity
• Use of ES PB and LS contact
- Pressing one of the emergency stop buttons, or a break in the external power supply, will directly cause the safety output circuits K1 and K2 to open.
- After unlocking the emergency stop PBs or closing the limit switches of the input circuit, the safety output contacts (terminals 13-14, 23-24, 33-34, 43-44) are closed by sending a pulse to the enable input (terminals S33-S34).
___________________________________________________________________________
2/2
Safety function 2
• Reset
The resetting of the safety system is active when the feedback loop between terminals Y1 and Y2 is closed AND when there is a reset request (S24) between terminals S33 and S34.
Terminals Y3/Y4 are used to choose whether or not this reset input is monitored :
- Y3/Y4 open means activation of the outputs (recommended use) when the PB is pressed and then released (falling edge on S34).
- Y3/Y4 closed means immediate activation of the outputs when the PB is interrogated.
Notes :
. The shunt between terminals Y3-Y4 must be as short as possible.
. No other connections may be made to these terminals.
A shunt performed on terminals Y3-Y4 on the one hand and S33-S34 on the other hand makes it possible to automatically activate the outputs as soon as the two input channels are closed. A desynchronization time of 400 ms is permissible.
• Safety outputs
The PAY 262 module has two outputs wired between terminals 13-14 and 23-24; these two outputs may have their own power supply.
The PAY 282 module has four outputs wired between terminals 13-14, 23-
24, 33-34, 43-44; these outputs are grouped into blocks of two, and each block may have its own power supply.
The relays (with guided contacts) or contactors connected downstream of the outputs must be inserted in the feedback loop between terminals Y1 and Y2. It is only possible to start the unit if the relays with safety functions have become inactive after receiving the stop command. The feedback loop must be closed for each new start-up operation.
An additional external condition, managed by the PLC, may be inserted in the feedback loop in order to prevent a reset if a fault is detected in the safety system.
• Diagnostics
The PLC always knows the state of the safety system, by means of the input data.
B2
___________________________________________________________________________
2/3
B2
2.2
Operating modes
The safety function is autonomous in respect of the operation of the PLC. It does not follow the PLC operating modes and is capable of cutting off the power even when the
PLC is powered off or in Stop or if the CPU is absent : it is not a safety PLC.
The only exchanges between the CPU and the module are diagnostic data sent from the module to the CPU; no output is controlled by the PLC.
The module can be connected or disconnected with the power on; however, it is necessary to disconnect the HD SUB-D and the screw terminal block.
2.3
Functional diagrams
2.3-1 Emergency stop function
Supply voltage
On
(+) channel input
(S121 to S232)
(-) channel input
(S01 to S112)
Feedback loop
Y1-Y2
Start button
S33-S34 "N/O"
(with monitoring)
Output 13-14 "N/O"
Emergency stop not activated
Emergency stop activated
Output 23-24 "N/O" < 10 ms
Depending on the wiring of Y3-Y4, the reset is performed on an edge or a state.
A single open ES PB contact opens the safety outputs.
It is necessary to open the two channels to enable a reset : this is the input self-test.
The reset is only possible if loop Y1-Y2 is closed : this is the output self-test.
Key
Closed
Open
___________________________________________________________________________
2/4
Safety function 2
B2
2.3-2 Protective guard function with automatic start
(+) channel input
(S121 to S232)
(-) channel input
(S01 to S112)
Feedback loop
Y1-Y2
Shunt to
S33-S34 "N/O"
Supply voltage
Switch 1
Protector open
Output 13-14 "N/O"
Output 23-24 "N/O"
400 ms
Switch 2
Guard closed
Guard opens
< 10 ms
The use of the 2 separate limit switches (switches 1 and 2) means that the mechanism respects a time delay on closing of the 2 switches of less than 400ms.
The manufacturer characteristics guarantee the absence of control if the time is greater than 1s. In this configuration, automatic reset is selected.
___________________________________________________________________________
2/5
B2
2.4
Fault processing
2.4-1 Detection of faults on the inputs
The module is capable of detecting a short-circuit between the two ES PB or LS channels; in this case, bit Ix.27 indicates a fault in the safety system.
The module also carries out an input self-test, in the case of use with double contacts : if there is an inconsistency in the state of the ES PB or LS when interrogated, the safety outputs open but a reset is no longer possible.
To memorize a fault, it is essential to :
- maintain a permanent power supply
- activate a single ES PB at a time (detection of a short-circuiting ES)
Application solutions using a PLC output in the feedback loop and fault detection by means of the module diagnostic data can be used to improve the memorization of a fault.
2.4-2 Detection of faults on the outputs
Detection of a fault on the outputs requires the use of mechanically linked auxiliary contact relays (see the Telemecanique catalogue "Components for safety applications")
: this is the output self-test. The "N/C" contacts on relays K3 and K4 must be looped back in series on the feedback loop, between terminals Y1 and Y2. This wiring prevents the resetting of the safety system if one of the two control relays (K3 or K4) sticks.
2.4-3 Detection of internal module faults
In the event of the failure of an internal component, the TSX PAY modules ensure the safety function by opening the output contacts (K1, K2) immediately or at the next interrogation (when an ES PB or LS is opened or the power is switched off). Once this happens, the output contacts (K1, K2) can no longer be closed and the module should be changed.
If such a fault causes over-consumption on the 24VDC, the current is limited to 750mA.
In this case, bit Ix.27, the state of the safety system power supply, changes to 0.
___________________________________________________________________________
2/6
Safety function 2
2.4-4 Detection of ground faults
The TSX PAY modules have been designed to meet the requirements of standard
EN60204-1, which deals in particular with cases of short-circuits to ground. As the
0VDC is connected to ground, the consequences of one or several short-circuits to ground may be :
- a short-circuit of one or several ES PB or LS on negative polarity, if double contacts are used. The outputs open when an ES PB or LS is interrogated, by means of the opening of the contact on positive polarity, as a reset is no longer possible because of the self-test performed on the inputs,
- a short-circuit of the 24VDC external power supply, whether the wiring uses single or double contacts. Immediate opening of the safety outputs because of the absence of a power supply in the safety system. External power supply A1-A2 is protected by the current limitation to 750mA, and bit Ix.27=0 indicates a fault in the safety system.
B2
2.4-5 Limitations
The interrogation of a short-circuited ES PB or LS opens the safety outputs and the self-test does not permit a reset. However, the opening of a second ES PB or LS before the reset also renders this self-test ineffective, as in this case the two channels reach a consistent state (see section 2.4-1).
In the same way, the input self-test is rendered ineffective if a break in the external power supply occurs (or is triggered) after the interrogation of a faulty ES PB or LS, as the power-up reinitializes the module and makes a reset possible once again.
___________________________________________________________________________
2/7
B2
___________________________________________________________________________
2/8
3 Connections and wiring examples B2
3.1
Safety system
Wiring is via :
• a TSX CPP 301 cable, of which the ends of the strands are free
• a TSX CPP x02 cable with the Telefast ABE-7CPA13 connection sub-base (see section 3.2-2)
The connection diagrams below indicate the connections of the Telefast sub-base; they have been checked and tested with the greatest of care.
Risks may arise if :
• the wiring diagrams are modified by changing connections or adding components if the latter are not integrated (or are insufficiently integrated) into the safety circuit.
• the user does not respect the requirements of the safety standards for the installation, use, adjustment and maintenance of the machine. It is important to strictly respect an inspection and maintenance interval of 1 year.
• the module is manipulated when the supply voltages have not been cut off
___________________________________________________________________________
3/1
B2
3.1-1 ES PB or LS connections
• Double contacts (recommended use)
This double contact wiring of the inputs is suitable for applications requiring a safety level of category 3 or 4.
Short-circuits between channels are detected.
Short-circuits of an ES PB or LS are detected and located.
( - )
S 2 3
S 2 2
S 2 1
S 2 0
S 1 9
S 1 8
S 1 7
S 1 6
S 1 5
S 1 4
S 1 3
S 1 2
S 4
S 5
S 6
S 7
S 8
S 0
S 1
S 2
S 3
S 9
S 1 0
S 1 1
( + )
2 5
2 3
2 1
1 9
3 3
3 1
2 9
2 7
SO1
S11/S02
S21/S12
S31/S22
S41/S32
S51/S42
S61/S52
S71/S62
1 7
1 5
1 3
1 1
9
1 0
1 2
S81/S72
S91/S82
S101/S92
S111/S102
S112
S232
S231/S222
1 4
1 6
1 8
S221/S212
2 0
2 2
2 4
S211/S202
S201/S192
S191/S182
S181/S172
4 0
3 9
S171/S162
2 6
2 8
3 0
3 2
3 4
S161/S152
S151/S142
S141/S132
S131/S122
S121
S121
B1
(-) channel
(+) channel
If using less than 12 double contacts, the unused input terminals must be bridged.
Example : Contacts S7 to S11 and S19 to S23 not used.
A bridge is required between terminals S71/S62 and S112 and terminals
S191/S182
___________________________________________________________________________
3/2
Connections and wiring examples 3
• Single contact
This wiring is not suitable for applications requiring a safety level of category 3 or
4.
All the faults are not detected; a short-circuit on an ES PB or LS is not detected. In this case, the interrogation of this PB does not cause the fault relays to open (loss of the safety function).
B2
( - )
S 1 8
S 1 9
S 2 0
S 2 1
S 2 2
S 2 3
S 1 2
S 1 3
S 1 4
S 1 5
S 1 6
S 1 7
( + )
SO1
S112
S121
S122/S131
S132/S141
S142/S151
S152/S161
S162/S171
S172/S181
S182/S191
S192/S201
S202/S211
S212/S221
S222/S231
S232
S232
B1
2 8
2 6
2 4
2 2
2 0
3 3
9
4 0
3 2
3 0
1 8
1 6
1 4
1 2
1 0
3 8
3 9
2 4
V D C
0 VDC
If using less than 12 double contacts, the unused input terminals must be bridged.
Example : Contact S18 not used.
A bridge is required between terminals S172/S181 and S182/S191.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/3
B2
3.1-2 Feedback loop connection
The design of a category 4 immediate stop circuit requires redundancy and a check on interrogation of the power break devices.
The wiring of the "N/C" contacts (K3, K4) or (K3, K4, K5, K6) makes a check possible upon each interrogation.
The relays (K3, K4) or (K3, K4, K5, K6) must have mechanically linked contacts.
Category three wiring corresponds to :
- no wiring of the auxiliary contacts in the feedback loop (a strap connects terminals
Y1 and Y2/S33)
- conventional contactors, with unguided contacts being sufficient
• Use of 2 contactors (category 4)
N(-)
K 3 K 4
1 4
2 4
K 2 K 1
Y 1
K4 K3
Y 2
1 3
2 3
F 2
L1(+)
• Use of 4 contactors (category 4)
N(-)
K 3 K 4
1 4
2 4
3 4
K 5 K 6
4 4
K 2 K 1
Y 1
K4 K3
Y 2
K6 K5
13/
2 3
F 2
L1(+)
33/
4 3
F 2
L2(+)
___________________________________________________________________________
3/4
3.1-3 Reset connection
• Automatic reset (protective guard)
Connections and wiring examples 3
B2
5
6
4
3
S 3 3
S 3 4
Y 3
Y 4
• Manual reset
When all the ES PB or LS are unlocked, manual resetting of the safety system may be monitored if required.
With monitoring of the power on button (recommended use)
4
3
5
6
S 3 3
S 3 4
Y 3
Y 4
Y3-Y4 open
Without monitoring of the power on button
5
6
4
3
S 3 3
S 3 4
Y 3
Y 4
___________________________________________________________________________
3/5
B2
3.2
Telefast ABE-7CPA13 sub-base
The Telefast sub-base described below is of the "wire to wire" type without electronic components and is specific to the PAY safety modules on PREMIUM.
It is used to simplify the installation and wiring of the safety system on a machine. It transforms a SUB-D connector into a terminal block connector.
The Telefast is not supplied with the module.
125 mm
70 mm
___________________________________________________________________________
3/6
Connections and wiring examples 3
3.2-1 Connectors
• The TSX CPP x02 cables for connection to the module form part of the safety system.
They must not be modified by the user.
• The maximum capacity of the screw terminals of the Telefast terminal block is :
- with cable end : 2 x 1mm² wires or 1 x 1.5mm² wire
- without cable end : 1 x 2.5mm² wire
B2
Marker
A1
A2/Y4
B1
S01
S02/S11
S12/S21
S22/S31
S32/S41
S42/S51
S52/S61
S62/S71
S72/S81
S82/S91
S92/S101
S102/S111
S112
S121
3.2-2 Marking of the TSX CPP x02 cable
21
19
17
15
13
11
9
34-40
33
31
29
27
25
23
Telefast screw terminal block
37
1-3
39
Marker
S122/S131
S132/S141
S142/S151
S152/S161
S162/S171
S172/S181
S182/S191
S192/S201
S202/S211
S212/S221
S222/S231
S232
S33/Y2
S34
Y1
Y3
GND
14
12
10-38
5-7
6
8
4
2-35-36
26
24
22
20
18
16
Telefast screw terminal block
32
30
28
___________________________________________________________________________
3/7
B2
3.3
Wiring example
• Wiring of 5 emergency stops with reset monitoring
0 VDC
+24 VDC
F3
L3
L2
F2
F1
S0
S1
S2
S3
S4
S24
ESC
K4 K3
S16
S15
S14
S13
S12
3 3 S 0 1
3 1 S11/S02
2 9 S21/S12
2 7 S31/S22
2 5 S41/S32
2 3 S51/S42
9 S 1 1 2
3 Y 4
4 Y 3
6 S 3 4
5 S 3 3
7 Y 2
8 Y 1
1 0 S 2 3 2
2 4 S171/S162
2 6 S161/152
2 8 S151/S142
3 0
S141/S132
3 2 S131/S122
3 4 S 1 2 1
4 0 S 1 2 1
3 9 B 1
1 A 2
3 7 A 1
2 3
1 3
K1 K2
2 4
1 4
TSX PAY 262
C P U
K4
K3
N3
N2
Y 1 - Y 2
S 3 3 - S 3 4
Y 3 - Y 4
S121 to S232
S01 to S112
A 1 - A 2
B 1
13-14, 23-24
F 1
F2, F3
Feedback loop
Enable operation
Selection of reset monitoring mode
Contact of (+) input channel
Contact of (-) input channel
External 24VDC power supply
Selection of double or single contact wiring
Safety outputs (common on the PAY 282 module)
1A gl fuse
4A gl fuses
___________________________________________________________________________
3/8
Connections and wiring examples 3
3.4
TSX CPP 301 cable
The cable described in section 5 is not supplied with the module; it is identified by a product reference of the type TSX CPP 301.
The wiring procedure is indicated in the module quick reference guide.
Each strand is marked by a color code, taken from standard EN47100.
• Marking of the TSX CPP 301 cable
B2
Marker
A1
A2/Y4
B1
S01
S02/S11
S12/S21
S22/S31
S32/S41
S42/S51
S52/S61
S62/S71
S72/S81
S82/S91
S92/S101
S102/S111
S112
S121
Color
DIN 47100
Yellow/Brown
White/Pink
White/Pink
Pink/Brown
Brown
Brown/Blue
Yellow
Brown/Red
Pink
Brown/Black
Red
Yellow/Gray
Purple
Yellow/Pink
Red/Blue
Yellow/Blue
White
Marker
S122/S131
S132/S141
S142/S151
S152/S161
S162/S171
S172/S181
S182/S191
S192/S201
S202/S211
S212/S221
S222/S231
S232
S33/Y2
S34
Y1
Y3
GND
Color
DIN 47100
White/Blue
Green
White/Red
Gray
White/Black
Blue
Gray/Green
Black
Pink/Green
Gray/Pink
Green/Blue
White/Green
White/Yellow
Gray/Brown
White
Brown/Green
Yellow/Green
The first color indicates the base color of the conductor insulation, and the second indicates the color of the printed band.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/9
B2
3.5
Safety outputs
For both types of module, the outputs are wired to a 6-pin screw terminal block.
The removable part is supplied with the module.
• TSX PAY 282 module
13/23
14
24
33/43
34
44
13/23 : common supply input
14 : safety output
24 : safety output
33/43 : common supply input
34
44
: safety output
: safety output
• TSX PAY 262 module
13
14
23
24
13
14
: independent supply input
: safety output
23
24
: independent supply input
: safety output
• Wire cross-section :
- with cable end : 2 x 1mm² wires or 1 x 1.5mm² wire
- without cable end : 1 x 2.5mm² wire
___________________________________________________________________________
3/10
Connections and wiring examples 3
3.6
Connecting modules in series
For applications with more than 12 single contact or double contact inputs, it is possible to use several TSX PAY modules.
However the safety system is wired, it is necessary to wire :
- the safety module outputs in series
- the same number of S33/S34 reset contacts in series as there are modules (contacts isolated electrically)
- the feedback loop K3/K4 on one of the modules and a bridge between terminals
Y1/Y2 on the other modules
- the safety system inputs independently on each module (no connection in series)
Use of 2 contactors
Supply 1 Supply 2
Use of 4 contactors
Supply 1 Supply 2
B2
TSX PAY 262
13 23
13 23
TSX PAY 262
TSX PAY 262
14
13
24
23
TSX PAY 262
14
13
24
23
14 24
14 24
TSX PAY 262
13 23
TSX PAY 282
13/23 33/43
14 24
14 24 34 44
K3 K4 K3 K4 K3 K4
Note :
It is however necessary to note the global voltage drop on the output circuit, due to the resistance of the 0.1
Ω
contacts of the fault relays, which depends on the current conveyed.
For a max. thermal current of 2.5A, this voltage drop will be 4V with 16 PAY modules connected in series, and 16V with 32 PAY modules connected in series.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/11
B2
___________________________________________________________________________
3/12
4 Maintenance and diagnostics B2
4.1
Display LEDs
Like the discrete input modules, the TSX PAY 262 and TSX PAY 282 modules have a 32-LED display block.
Three RUN, ERR and I/O LEDs indicate the module status. LEDs 0 to 27 indicate the safety system status (see section 4.3).
RUN ERR
I / O
5
6
3
4
7
0
1
2
11
12
13
14
15
8
9
10
19
20
21
22
23
16
17
18
27
28
29
30
31
24
25
26
LEDs 0 to 11 State of the ES PB and LS contacts,
(+) circuit
LEDs 12 to 23 State of the ES PB and LS contacts,
(-) circuit
LED 24
LED 25
State of reset input
State of feedback loop
LED 26
LED 27
Fault relay control state
Presence of a power supply on the safety system, safety system diagnostics
LEDs 28 to 31 Not used
___________________________________________________________________________
4/1
B2
4.2
Language interfaces
4.2-1 Input data
The modules are similar to discrete modules as regards the 28 diagnostic inputs of the emergency stop circuit.
• The states of the ES PB or LS contacts of the emergency stop circuit can be accessed via bits %Ix.0 to %Ix.23, with the value 0 for an open contact and 1 for a closed
contact.
• The state of the reset input can be accessed via bit %Ix.24, with the value 0 for an open contact and 1 for a closed contact; if feedback loop %Ix.25 is closed.
• The state of the feedback loop can be accessed via bit %Ix.25, with the value 0 for
an open loop and 1 for a closed loop.
• The control state of fault relays K1 and K2 can be accessed via bit %Ix.26, with the
value 0 for de-energized relays and the value 1 for controlled relays.
• The presence of a power supply to the safety system can be accessed via bit %Ix.27,
with the value 0 for insufficient voltage (<15VDC).
• Bits %Ix.28 to %Ix.31 are not used.
4.2-2 Diagnostic data
The table below provides the diagnostic data managed by the PAY and shows the tree structure of the diagnostic data which is user-definable.
ERR module ERR channel Module status
Implicit Implicit Explicit
Channel status
Explicit
%Ixy.MOD.ERR %Ixy.i.ERR Links with %MWxy.MOD.2 Address
-----
Meaning
%MWxy.MOD.2:x1 %MWxy.i.2:x0 Not significant at %MWxy.i.2:x2
1
(1)
1
(1)
1
---
1
---
%MWxy.MOD.2:x1 %MWxy.i.2:x3 Ext. supplyfault
(1) (1) For this module, the absence of the terminal block results in an external supply fault
%MWxy.MOD.2:x0 %MWxy.i.2:x4 Int. fault : Module out of order
-- %MWxy.i.2:x5 Not significant at %MWxy.i.2:x15
Note : (1) The feedback of this fault is associated with the parameter definition.
___________________________________________________________________________
4/2
Maintenance and diagnostics 4
B2
4.3
Display block diagnostics
4.3-1 Module status
RUN LED ERR LED I/O LED
Off
Off
Off
Off Off
Off On
On Off
Off On On
On Off Off
On Off
On On
On On
On
Off
On
Meaning
Rack powered-off or module fault
External power supply fault
Module fault
Module fault and external power supply
Module operating : no int./ext. fault
OR
Module not recognized if external power supply is absent
External fault = 24VDC ext. power supply fault (<19VDC)
Internal fault
General fault (short-circuit, etc)
4.3-2 Safety system status
LEDs
0 to 23
24
25
26
27 between
28 to 31
State
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
Meaning
ES PB or LS contact open
ES PB or LS contact closed
Reset input open or feedback loop open
Reset input closed AND feedback loop closed
Feedback loop open
Feedback loop closed
Safety system relays K1 and K2 not controlled
Safety system relays K1 and K2 controlled
Safety system power supply fault or fault creating a short-circuit the safety system channels
Safety system power supply present
Not used
An external power supply fault causes the I/O LED of the module to light up. The
LEDs of the display block always display the state of the channels, even if they change to an error state (all equal to 0) in PL7.
It is possible to define parameters for monitoring the external power supply. In this case, the LEDs of the display block reflect the real state of the Emergency Stops.
___________________________________________________________________________
4/3
B2
4.4
Maintenance table
FAULTS
Cannot start up
POSSIBLE CAUSES
Inappropriate opening No external power supply or
of the safety outputs fuse F1 burnt out
ES PB or LS open
B1 disconnected
C H E C K
Read %Ix.MOD.ERR = external fault
Display I/O LED on PAY module
Voltage between terminals A1-A2 >19.2VDC
If %Ix.27=0, then SC on safety system
Read %Ix.0 to %Ix.23
Check the consistency of the state of the contacts
Check B1 is connected to S232 (single cont.)
Check B1 is connected to S121 (double cont.)
Read %Ix.26
Check the state and characteristics of F2
Relays no longer controlled
Fuse F2 destroyed
No external power supply or fuse F1 destroyed
Emergency stop still open
Read %Ix.MOD.ERR = external fault
Display I/O LED on PAY module
Voltage between terminals A1-A2 >19.2VDC
Read %Ix.0 to %Ix.23
Check the consistency of the state of the contacts
Conflict on the inputs
(wires cut or faulty
ES PB), use of double contacts : self-test
No PB action with feedback loop closed
Read %Ix.0 to %Ix.23
Check the consistency of the state of the contacts
Feedback loop still open
No control possible
%Ix.24=%Ix.25=1 when PB pressed
Check PB contacts
Check the state of shunt Y3-Y4
Read %Ix.25
Check contacts on the auxiliary relays
Read %Ix.26 when PB is pressed
Fuse F2 destroyed Check the state and characteristics of F2
Output power supply not working Check the reset wiring
Automatic
start-up
Incorrect input
data
PB continuously enabled with loop closed
Voltage drop on the cables
%Ix.24=%Ix.25=1 without PB being pressed. Check PB contacts
Voltage between terminals S01-S112 and
S121-S232 > 18.2VDC all ES PBs closed
If the fault persists once the wiring has been checked, change the module.
To avoid errors when replacing a product, it is advisable to mark the slot on the module label on the front panel and on the label of the TSX CPP... cable. The specific red color of the front panel of PAY modules helps to avoid errors during PLC maintenance operations.
note : SC : Short-circuit
Cont.
: Contact
ES PB : Emergency Stop Pushbutton
___________________________________________________________________________
4/4
Maintenance and diagnostics 4
4.5
Test procedures
Before installation or during a periodic check (cyclic test), it may be useful to test the module and its functions. This procedure may be as follows.
B2
4.5-1 External power supply
The module integrates an external power supply voltage check. A voltage less than
19VDC causes a fault on the module (%[email protected] = 1). The input bits are no longer significant (%Ix.0 to 31 = 0).
The power supply fault is signaled as follows :
- The I/O indicator lamp lights up, as does that of the CPU
- Module fault bit %[email protected] changes to 1
- Module fault bit %MWx.MOD.2:X9 changes to 1
- Channel fault bits %Ix.i.ERR all change to 1
In this state, the safety system remains operational : a voltage drop of up to 10VDC will still set the module to the safety position by opening the safety outputs.
The module is protected against polarity inversions and has a current limit set at 750mA.
If the external power supply check is not activated (parameter setting), power supply faults are not indicated and the bits represent the process.
4.5-2 Emergency stop inputs
With the outputs closed, interrogate all the emergency stops one by one to check that the outputs change to the safety position : %Ix.26 should change from 1 to 0.
Check the triggering of the safety system and the consistency of the diagnostic data.
___________________________________________________________________________
4/5
B2
4.5-3 Feedback loop input
The feedback loop is used to indicate to the module the real image of the safety outputs.
It is open when the outputs are active. The device used is a relay with guided contacts for controlling the outputs.
Loop open Bit %Ix.25 = 0 Loop closed Bit %Ix.25 = 1
Check the state of the feedback loop depending on the output control bit.
4.5-4 Activation of the Reset input
The activation of the reset input between terminals S33 and S34 makes it possible to reset the system when no ES has been interrogated AND if the feedback loop is closed; the device used is a pushbutton (activation on a state or a falling edge).
It is only possible to read the state of the reset input if the feedback loop is also closed.
Contact open Bit %Ix.24 = 0 Contact closed Bit %Ix.24 = 1 and Bit %Ix.25 = 1
Depending on the reset option chosen, check correct functioning and the diagnostic indicators.
4.5-5 State of the output control bit
Depending on the module, TSX PAY 262 or TSX PAY 282, two or four outputs are available between terminals 13-14, 23-24, 33-34, 43-44; they are used to control the contactors or preactuators. This part is isolated from the control (reset) part.
When the reset conditions are met (feedback loop closed AND activation of the reset input), the outputs are controlled.
Outputs off Bit %Ix.26 = 0 Outputs active Bit %Ix.26 = 1
___________________________________________________________________________
4/6
5 Detailed characteristics B2
5.1
Characteristics of TSX PAY modules
• General characteristics
Safety functions emergency stop and LS monitoring checking of moving guards monitoring of pressure sensitive mats two-handed control
Category according to EN 954-1
Module external power supply voltage residual ripple voltage limits protection of external supply fuse F1
(according to IEC 947-5-1) max. consumption monitoring threshold max. current inrush safety circuit voltage 24VDC module protection
isolation
PLC power supply current consumption on internal 5V
Power power dissipated in the module
Display
Mounting
Dimensions H x L x D
Weight
Module MTBF
Connection safety system safety outputs
Max. length of safety system
for module external supply = 24V
Yes (from 1 to 12 single or double contacts)
Yes (desynchronism > 400ms)
No
No
4 terminals A1 and A2
24VDC
5%
-15% +20%
< 1A gl
200mA
< 19VDC
0.5A / 5ms
Electronic internal fuse > 250mA and < 1A
Overvoltage category II (2kV), degree of pollution 2
< 150mA
< 5W
28 LEDs for discrete inputs + Diag
3 module status LEDs
In Premium rack
150 x 36 x 120 mm
PAY 262 = 0.43 Kg PAY 282 = 0.49 Kg
3 x 10 -6 failures / hour
(relay board = 0.5 x 10 -6 , mother board = 2.4 x 10 -6 )
44-pin HD SUB-D
6-pin screw terminal block depending on the wire resistance (see section 6.3)
___________________________________________________________________________
5/1
B2
• Input characteristics
Inputs number of safety channels reset / power on button selection of single or double ES PBs feedback loop monitoring of reset input inrush current isolation Inputs / ground
• Output characteristics
12 single or double contact ES PBs
Yes (S33-S34)
Yes = external shunt (B1)
Yes (Y1-Y2)
Yes = external shunt (Y3-Y4)
0.5A / 1ms
500 Vrms 50/60Hz - 1 min
Safety outputs
voltage reference number and type of circuits
Volt-free
2F (AgCdo, 2µ gold plated) with independent power supply for the TSX PAY 262
2*2F (AgCdo, 2µ gold plated) with independent power supply for the TSX PAY 282
DIN EN 60947-5-1 breaking capacity AC15 / C300 : Inrush 1800VA,
Holding 180VA
DC13 : 24V / 2.5A L/R =100ms
19 ... 250 VAC / 17 ... 127 VDC voltage protection of outputs by fuse 4 A gl
(according to DIN VDE 0660 part 200 and IEC 947-5-1) max. thermal current Ithe minimum current and voltage response time on ES interrogation isolation Output / ground
Test voltage isolation of safety system / Ground
Mechanical life
Electrical life
2.5A
30mA and 24VDC
< 10 ms
Insulation voltage 300V according to
VDE0110 / part 1
2000Vrms 50/60 Hz - 1 min
300Vrms
10 6 operations
1 x 10 6 operations (depends on the power)
The module is capable of switching low loads (24 V / 30 mA). This is possible provided that the contact has never previously switched any high loads, as this may have impaired the gold plating on the contact.
___________________________________________________________________________
5/2
Detailed characteristics 5
B2
• Conditions of use
Operating temperature
Humidity without condensation
Storage temperature
0...+60°C for the PLC
-10...+60°C for the safety function
5 to 95%
-25 to 70°C
Isolation resistance > 10MW at 500VDC
Dielectric strength on SUB-D acc. to IEC1131 500Vrms, 50/60Hz, 1min
Operating altitude 0...2000m
Degrees of protection according to IP IEC 529 terminals / connection box installation area
Maximum capacity of screw terminals
IP20
IP54
2 x 1mm² wires with cable end
• Terminal marking (according to DIN EN 50005, DIN EN 50042)
Module external power supply
Contacts on the (+) circuit
Contacts on the (-) circuit
Selection of single or double contacts
Reset
Feedback loop
A1 - A2
S01-S02, S11-S12, S21-S22, S31-S32,
S51-S52, S61-S62, S71-S72,
S81-S82, S91-S92, S101-S102,
S112
S121-S122, S131-S132, S141-S142,
S152, S161-S162, S171-S172,
S181-S182, S191-S192, S201-S202,
S211-S212, S221-S222, S231-S232
B1
S33 - S34
Y1 - Y2
Monitoring of reset input Y3 - Y4
Safety outputs
TSX PAY 262 module, independent power supply: 13 - 14, 23 - 24
TSX PAY 282 module, common power supply: 13/23 - 14, 13/23 - 24, 33/43 - 34, 33/43 - 44
___________________________________________________________________________
5/3
B2
5.2
Characteristics of TSX CPP x02 and TSX CPP 301 cables
• TSX CPP x02 cable
SUB-D - 44-pin HD male
SUB-D / SUB-D version
SUB-D - 44-pin HD male
Cable
Connector
Lengths
Unshielded multiconductors (32 conductors used)
According to EN47100 (conductor color)
SUB-D 44-pin HD male, SUB-D 44-pin HD male
The connector cannot be removed
1m, 2m and 3m
• TSX CPP 301 cable
SUB-D / free strands version
SUB-D - 44-pin HD male free strands
Cable Unshielded multiconductors (32 conductors used)
Gauge 22, 7 strands per conductor
According to EN47100 (conductor color)
Connector side
Preparation of the
ends
SUB-D 44-pin HD male
The connector cannot be removed
Semi-stripped (the sheath has been cut but
the conductor is not stripped)
Length 3m
___________________________________________________________________________
5/4
Detailed characteristics 5
5.3
Standards
TSX PAY modules have been designed to meet the requirements of European and international standards concerning electronic industrial control system equipment and safety circuits.
B2
Specific PLC requirements
Electrical qualities
Electrical machine equipment
Emergency stop equipment
Machine safety - Parts of the control system concerned with safety
EN61131-2 (IEC 1131-2), CSA 22-2 no.142,
UL508
UL746L, UL94
EN60204-1 (IEC204-1)
EN418
EN954-1
PR EN954-2
EN953
EN1088
DIN VDE 0110
DIN VDE 0660
EN60947-5-1
VDE 57100
NF C63-850
IEC 664
___________________________________________________________________________
5/5
B2
___________________________________________________________________________
5/6
6 Wiring recommendations
6.1
General wiring rules and recommendations
B2
The safety system should be wired in accordance with the specifications given in section 15 of standard EN60204-1. This section describes the regulations concerning wiring and the mechanical protection of cables.
The entire safety system, the ES PB or LS, the TSX PAY modules, the protective fuses and the auxiliary relays must be housed in an enclosure providing IP54 protection minimum as specified in standard EN954-1.
The modules can be mounted / removed with the PLC energized (without the risk of damaging the module or disturbing the PLC. It is essential to disconnect the module cable in order to deactivate the safety outputs before removing the output terminal block).
6.2
Cable length and dimensions
The length of the safety system wires can cause a voltage drop in the power supply which depends on the circulating current. This voltage drop results from the sum of the currents circulating in the 0Vdc return path of the electrical circuit. A common practice is to double or triple the 0Vdc wires.
To ensure the correct functioning of the safety system (resetting of the relays) and the correct reading of the diagnostic data, it is important that the voltage measured between terminals A1 and A2 is greater than 19.2V.
• Cross-section of wires with the Telefast ABE-7CPA13 sub-base
Each terminal can receive bare wires or wires fitted with cable ends, or open or closed tag connectors.
The capacity of each terminal is :
- minimum : 1 x 0.28mm wire 2 without cable end
- maximum : 2 x 1mm wires 2 or 1 x 1.5mm wire 2 with cable end
The maximum cross-section of the wires on the terminal block is : 1 x 2.5mm² wire without cable end.
___________________________________________________________________________
6/1
B2
• Calculation of the maximum cable length
The resistance of each safety system (plus circuit and minus circuit) must not exceed
75 Ohms. The resistance can be calculated from the length and cross-section of the cable :
R =
ρ
l / S where
ρ
= 1.78 for copper l = the length in meters
S = the cross-section in mm²
It is possible for the wiring to allow a greater distance between the ES PB or LS and the module :
Conventional wiring :
S12
S121
S122/S131
S13
S132/S141
S14
PAY
S142/S151
S15
S152/S161
S232
Wiring with optimized length :
S12
S13
S14
S15
S121
S122/S131
S132/S141
S142/S151
PAY
S152/S161
S232
Length to be taken into account when calculating the resistance
___________________________________________________________________________
6/2
Wiring recommendations 6
6.3
Ground connection
The module does not have a ground connection terminal on the front panel. Depending on the TSX CPP cable used, the 0Vdc can be connected to ground (see EN60204-1) via the intermediate connection block or directly on the Telefast ABE-CPA13 sub-base.
B2
6.4
Protection of the safety system
Faults within the PAY safety modules can be propagated outside the module, and particularly to the external power supply used : module internal short-circuits can cause an avalanche of the supply voltage or a malfunction if the latter is not protected. For this reason, a 1A fast-blow fuse (gL) is placed in the control part of the relays, as the maximum power consumption is 200mA : this fuse, known as F1, is an active element
of the safety system.
The module also has a current-limiting device set at 750mA in order to detect shortcircuits between channels on the ES PB or LS : in this case, the external power supply is protected, with bits Ix.27=0 indicating a safety system fault.
To ensure the safety function, the following must be used :
- As inputs : ES PB or LS with double contacts
N/C contacts of the auxiliary relays with guided contacts in the feedback loop,
- As outputs : two or four auxiliary relays with guided contacts an F2 fuse for protecting the 4A gl outputs
- On the external power supply of the module : an F1 1A gl protective fuse
___________________________________________________________________________
6/3
B2
6.5
Protection of the safety outputs
The output voltages may be up to 230VAC or 127VDC.
The outputs are not protected inside the module; GMOV type protections (for a continuous load), or an RC cell (for an AC load) are placed directly at the terminals of the load used. These protections must be adapted to the load.
The use of auxiliary relays with guided contacts and the wiring of the feedback loop thus makes it possible to detect a short-circuit on the safety outputs.
A 4A fast-blow fuse (gL) is placed on the auxiliary supply circuit to protect the fault relay contacts of the module and the connected loads : this is identical to the PREVENTA modules.
The F2 fuse placed on the safety outputs provides protection against short-circuits or overloads. This protection prevents the fusing of the fault relay contacts internal to the
TSX PAY modules.
___________________________________________________________________________
6/4
Start-up/Diagnostics/Maintenance Contents
Part C
___________________________________________________________________________
C
Section
1.3-2 Analog and application-specific modules
Checking discrete I/O connections
PLC and module states on initial power-up
3 Troubleshooting and fault analysis
Troubleshooting using the processor status indicator lamps
3.1-3 Processor or system faults
Reminder of system bits and system words
Page
___________________________________________________________________________
C/1
C
Start-up/Diagnostics/Maintenance
Section
Contents
Part C
Page
___________________________________________________________________________
C/2
1 Display
1.1
Introduction
Every module has indicator lights which assist setup, operation, diagnostics and maintenance of the PLC :
• display the PLC status on the processor module
• display the status of each module (discrete I/O, application-specific module, power supply)
• display the channels for each discrete I/O module and some of the applicationspecific modules
• I/O channel diagnostics
C
1.2
Display of PLC status
The 5 indicator lamps RUN, TER, I/O, ERR, FIP situated on the processor provide information, depending on their state (off, flashing or on), on the PLC operating mode :
RUN :
ERR :
I/O :
TER :
FIP:
PLC Run/Stop
Processor or application fault
I/O fault (channel or module)
Traffic on the terminal port
Traffic on the FIPIO bus (TSX/PMX/PCX 57 i 52 processors)
On Flashing Status
Indicator
RUN
(green)
PLC running normally
ERR
(red)
I/O
(Red)
TER
(Yellow)
FIP
(Yellow)
PLC error : processor fault or system fault
I/O fault from a module, channel or configuration fault.
—
—
Off
RUN
TER
ERR
I / O
FIP
RUN ERR
TER I/O
PLC in Stop or PLC faulty, blocking software (1)
PLC not configured : application absent, invalid or incompatible with the type of processor
PLC : processor or system fault
•PLC not configured : application absent, invalid or incompatible with the type of processor
•PLC faulty, blocking software
•Memory card battery fault.
•Fault on X Bus
No fault
Fault on X Bus : (the X bus No fault fault is detected on simultaneous flashing of
I/O and ERR indicator lamps)
Exchange in progress on No exchanges in terminal port progress
FIPIO Bus active,
Exchange in progress
No exchanges in progress
1/1
C
1.3
Display of module status
1.3-1 Discrete I/O modules
• Module status indicator lamps : (RUN, ERR, I/O)
Three or four indicator lamps situated on each module provide information, depending on their state (off, flashing or on), about the module operating mode :
- RUN indicator : signals the module operating status,
- ERR indicator : signals an internal module fault,
- I/O indicator : signals an external fault,
- indicator + 32 : signals the display of channels 32 to 63 on modules with 64 channels.
• Channel status indicator lamps : (0 to i)
Depending on the type of module, 8, 16, 28 or 32 indicator lamps display and provide diagnostics on the status of each module channel.
Flashing Off Status O n
Indicator
RUN Normal operation
ERR
I/O
Internal fault : module failure
— Module faulty or powered off
Communication fault if RUN indicator lamp is on
Module not configured if
RUN indicator lamp off (1)
Terminal block fault
No module fault
No external fault
0...i
External fault : overload, short-circuit, sensor/preactuator voltage fault
Channel at state 1 Channel faulty due to overload or short-circuit
Channel at state 0
Note : during the self-tests, the RUN, ERR, and I/0 indicator lamps flash.
8-channel modules 16-channel modules 28, 32 or 64-channel modules
RUN ERR
I / O
RUN ERR
I / O
RUN
+ 32
ERR
I / O
5
6
3
4
7
0
1
2
5
6
3
4
7
0
1
2
11
12
13
14
15
8
9
10
(1) This state is available on module versions
≥
V2.0.
(2) Pushbutton enabling the display of channels 32 to 63 on modules with 64 channels
5
6
3
4
7
0
1
2
11
12
13
14
15
8
9
10
19
20
21
22
23
16
17
18
27
28
29
30
31
24
25
26
(2)
___________________________________________________________________________
1/2
Display 1
1.3-2 Analog and application-specific modules
Like discrete I/O modules, analog and application-specific modules (counter, axis control, etc) have indicator lamps which display the module status and channel status
(on certain modules).
• Module status indicator lamps (RUN, ERR, I/O)
Three indicator lamps situated on each module give information, depending on their status (indicator off, flashing or on), about the module operating mode :
- RUN indicator : signals the module operating status,
- ERR indicator : signals an internal module fault,
- I/O indicator : signals an external fault,
• Channel status indicator lamps (CH i
)
Certain application-specific modules have 1, 2 or 4 indicator lamps which display and provide diagnostics for the status of each module channel.
CH2
CH3
CH0
CH1
RUN ERR
I / O
C
TSX AEY / TSX ASY analog modules and TSX ISP Y100 weighing modules
Indicator
Status O n
RUN Normal operation
ERR
I/O
CHi
Flashing Off
Internal fault module failure
— Module faulty or powered off
Communication fault on No module fault
TSX ASY analog output module and TSX ISP Y100 weighing module
External fault
• range overshoot
• sensor link fault
(TSX AEY 414 module)
Terminal block fault No external fault
No channel status indicator lamps
___________________________________________________________________________
1/3
C
TSX CTY 2A/4A/2C counter modules
Status O n
Indicator
RUN Normal operation
Flashing Off
— Module faulty or powered off
No module fault ERR
I/O
Internal fault module failure
External fault
• wiring fault
• encoder supply fault
• measurement overrun
Application fault (1).
Communication fault
— No external fault
CH i
TSX CTY 2A :
CH0 and CH1
TSX CTY 4A :
CH0, CH1, CH2,
CH3
Channel is operational Channel is not operating Channel is not Iin correctly due to : service,
• an internal fault,
(module absent or
No configuration or incorrect configuration.
failed),
• an external fault,
(application fault),
• communication fault.
TSX CAY 21/22/33/41/42 axis control modules
Status O n
Indicator
RUN Normal operation
Flashing Off
— Module faulty or powered off
No module fault ERR
I/O
Internal fault module failure
External fault
• wiring fault,
• encoder/24 V supply fault,
• absolute encoder fault,
• speed drive fault,
Application fault (1).
Communication fault
—
CH i
TSX CAY 21/22 :
CH0 and CH1
TSX CAY 21 :
CH0, CH1, CH2
TSX CAY 41/42 :
CH0, CH1, CH2,
CH3
Channel is operational
No external fault
Channel is not operating Channel is not correctly due to : operational,
• an internal fault, No configuration or incorrect configuration.
(module absent or failed),
• an external fault,
(application fault),
• communication fault.
1/4
Display 1
TSX CTY 11/21 stepper motor control module
Indicator
Status O n
RUN Normal operation
ERR
I/O
CH i
Internal fault module failure
External fault
• wiring fault
• 24 V supply fault
• transporter fault,
Application fault (1)
Channel is operational
Flashing
—
Communication fault
—
Off
Module faulty or powered off
No module fault
No external fault
TSX CFY 11 :
CH0
TSX CFY 21 :
CH0, CH1
Channel is not operating Channel is not correctly due to : operational,
• an internal fault,
(module absent or failed),
• an external fault,
No configuration or incorrect configuration.
(application fault),
• communication fault.
C
TSX SCY 21601 communication module
Flashing
Indicator
Status O n
RUN Normal operation
ERR
CH0
Internal fault module failure
Channel is operational
Off
— Module faulty or powered off
No module fault Communication fault with the connected device, configuration fault
Channel is not operating Channel is not correctly due to : operational
• an internal fault,
(module absent or failed),
• an external fault,
(application fault)
• communication fault.
(1) configuration, adjustment, OF control problems
___________________________________________________________________________
1/5
C
TSX SAY 100 AS-i bus interface module
Flashing
Indicator
Status On
RUN
(Green)
Normal operation
ERR
(Red)
COM
(Yellow)
I/0
(Red)
Serious internal fault, module failure
I/O fault
—
Off
Module self-tests (1)
Module self-tests (1)
Fault : system OK but
• application program faulty
• fault on AS-i bus
No internal fault
Module self-tests (1)
Communication on the AS-i bus
Module self-tests (1)
Module faulty , or module powered off
No communication on the AS-i bus
Module in normal operation
(1) 4 indicator lamps flashing simultaneously during self-tests when module is powered up.
TSX ISP Y100 weighing module
Indicator
RUN
ERR
Status On
I/O
CH
Flashing Off
Normal operation Module faulty or powered off
No fault Internal fault, module failure
Communication fault,
Application absent, invalid or faulty
External faults :
• Overload or underload fault during calibration,
• Range overshoot fault,
• Measurement fault,
• Module sealed
(configuration refused)
No fault
No channel status indicator lamp
___________________________________________________________________________
1/6
Display 1
1.3-3 Power supply modules
Each power supply module has a display block comprising :
• 3 indicator lamps (OK, BAT, 24V) on TSX PSY 2600/
5500/8500 power supply modules for an AC supply,
• 2 indicator lamps (OK, BAT) on TSX PSY 1610/3610/
5520 power supply modules for a DC supply.
Status O n
•
Indicator
O K Normal operation
Flashing
—
BAT Battery fault : battery absent, spent, incorrectly fitted, incompatible.
24V
(only on modules for c supply )
Normal operation
—
—
OK
BAT
24 V
Off
Module powered off or output voltage outside monitoring range
Normal operation
24V sensor voltage outside monitoring range.
C
___________________________________________________________________________
1/7
C
___________________________________________________________________________
1/8
2 Start-up
2.1
Checking discrete I/O connections
• Principle
This check consists of ensuring that :
- data originating from the sensor is taken into account by the corresponding inputs and the processor,
- commands from the processor are taken into account by the outputs and transmitted to the corresponding preactuators.
!
Activated outputs may cause machine movements. As a result, it is advisable to disconnect the power part before carrying out this check :
• remove the motor control power fuses,
• disconnect the hydraulic and pneumatic power generators
• then power up the PLC equipped with its discrete I/O modules
C
• Checking input connections without a terminal
This check is carried out by activating each sensor and checking that the corresponding input indicator lamp changes state. If it does not, check the wiring and that the sensor is operating normally.
• Checking I/O connections using a terminal
The use of a terminal enables I/O connections to be checked more thoroughly. To this end, an application (1) should first be loaded to the PLC from a programming terminal, even if it contains only the I/O configuration.
This check can be carried out with the PLC in RUN :
- either from an "ADJUST 117" adjustment terminal
- or from an FTX 417/507 terminal or PC equipped with PL7 Junior or PL7 Pro software which gives access to the debug functions.
Note :
This check can also be carried out with the complete application loaded in the memory. In this case, inhibit the MAST, FAST and event tasks to prevent the program from being processed, by setting system bits %S30, %S31, %S38 to 0.
- Checking inputs :
1 - activate each sensor and check that the corresponding input indicator changes state,
2 - check on the terminal screen that the corresponding input bit (%I
.i
) also changes state.
- Checking outputs : from the terminal, set each corresponding output bit (%Q
.i
) to 1 then to 0 and check that the corresponding output indicator lamp switches on and off and that the associated preactuator is activated and deactivated.
(1) no module must be declared in FAST task if the application is empty.
___________________________________________________________________________
2/1
C
2.2
PLC and module states on initial power-up
PLC status : on power-up, the processor executes its self-tests then waits for an application transfer. The various processor states are indicated on the display block by the
RUN, ERR, I/O, etc indicator lamps. The following diagram shows the procedure to be followed on initial start-up, depending on the state of the indicator lamps.
Power up the
PLC
State of processor indicator lamps
RUN ERR I/O
PLC self-tests
Processor fault
No application in the PLC
"PLC not configured"
"PLC error"
RUN ERR I/O
Transfer a valid application to in the PLC
RUN ERR I/O
(see PL7 Junior documentation)
RUN ERR I/O
"PLC stopped"
Set the PLC to RUN
(see PL7 Junior documentation)
RUN ERR I/O
"PLC running"
RUN ERR I/O
"PLC software fault or HALT" status
Key Processor fault lamp off lamp flashing lamp on
"PLC error"
RUN ERR I/O
___________________________________________________________________________
2/2
Start-up 2
Description of the PLC states
PLC self-tests
The PLC processor executes its self-tests internally. The PLC does not control the process and cannot communicate via its terminal port (or networks). This state is signaled by all 3 indicator lamps RUN, ERR and I/O flashing.
"PLC error"
The processor is stopped after :
• a hardware failure or system fault. The process is no longer controlled, communication is impossible and only a cold restart is possible (press the processor RESET button, move the memory card handle, etc). This state is signaled when the RUN indicator lamp is off and the ERR and I/O indicator lamps are on.
• a wiring fault on X Bus :
- the fault is detected by the processor during the self-tests if a fault occurs during startup. It is signaled when the RUN indicator lamp is off and the ERR and I/O indicator lamps are flashing. Be prepared for a break in communication if the wiring fault persists.
- if a fault occurs during program execution (a cable break, for example), it will be detected as soon as it occurs if the application uses the X Bus I/O. In this case, the processor will trigger a switch to "processor error" state. Be prepared for a break in communication if the wiring fault persists. To identify if the fault is a processor fault or an X Bus wiring fault, press the RESET button on the processor. If the fault is an X Bus wiring fault, it will be detected during the self-tests and indicated by the indicator lamps
: RUN off, ERR and I/O flashing.
"PLC not configured"
The processor has started but does not contain any valid applications. It does not control the process but can communicate via its terminal port (or networks). This state is signaled when the RUN indicator lamp is off and the ERR indicator lamp is flashing.
"PLC software fault or HALT"
The application has changed to "watchdog timer overrun" or performed an unresolved
JUMP, a HALT instruction or a blocking fault has appeared. This state is signaled when the RUN and ERR indicator lamps are flashing and, in the case of an I/O fault, the I/O indicator lamp is on.
"PLC stopped"
The PLC has a valid application which is stopped (the application is in an initial state when first powered up, tasks are stopped at the end of a cycle). The process commands are in fallback state. This state is signaled by the RUN indicator lamp flashing. I/O faults : I/O indicator lamp on, battery fault on PCMCIA memory card : ERR indicator lamp flashing.
"PLC running"
The application operates normally in order to control the process. An application nonblocking fault (I/O fault or software fault) may also be present. This state is signaled when the RUN indicator lamp is on.
I/O faults : I/O indicator lamp on.
Battery fault on PCMCIA memory card :ERR indicator lamp flashing.
C
___________________________________________________________________________
2/3
C
Module states : During the module power-up phase, modules can be in one of the following five states :
Power up the
PLC
State of module indicator lamps
RUN ERR
Module self-tests
Version < V2.0 modules
Initial state
Version
≥
V2.0 modules
Module used
Module disconnected
Module failure
Key lamp off lamp flashing lamp on
Indeterminate
___________________________________________________________________________
2/4
Start-up 2
Description of module states
Self-tests
On power-up, or reinitialization of the processor, the module runs its self-tests. This state is signaled by the RUN, ERR and I/O indicator lamps flashing.
Output state : safety value (state 0 for discrete I/O).
C
Initial state :
This is the normal state of the module after the self-test phase if it is not controlled by the application. Depending on the module software version, this state is signaled when :
• the RUN indicator lamp is on, the ERR indicator lamp is off and the I/O indicator lamp is on, flashing or off, depending on the presence or not of an I/O fault for version < V2.0
modules,
• the RUN indicator lamp is off, the ERR indicator lamp is flashing and the I/O indicator lamp is on, flashing or off, depending on the presence or not of an I/O fault for version
≥
V2.0 modules,
Output state : safety value (state 0 for discrete I/O).
Module used
The module is used in the application, and its channels are controlled by control tasks
(MAST, FAST, event). This state is signaled when the RUN indicator lamp is on, the ERR indicator lamp is off and the I/O indicator lamp is on, flashing or off depending on the presence or not of an I/O fault.
The state of the outputs depends on the state of the task which controls them :
• state 0 if the controlling task has not been started,
• state 0 or 1 (value given by the application if the controlling task is in RUN),
• state at fallback value (configurable) if the controlling task is stopped in STOP, on a breakpoint (BKPT), on a HALT instruction or if system bit %S9=1.
Module disconnected
No more communication between the module and the processor (processor error or powered off, rack disconnected, etc). This state is signaled when the RUN indicator lamp is on, the ERR indicator lamp is flashing and the I/O indicator lamp is on, flashing or off depending on the presence or not of an I/O fault.
This state is only controlled by the modules controlling the outputs. The other modules remain in the "module used" state in the event of a communication stop (discrete input modules for example).
Module failure
The module has an internal fault and has to be replaced. This state is signaled when the
RUN indicator lamp is off, when the ERR indicator lamp is on and the I/O indicator lamp is in any state.
___________________________________________________________________________
2/5
C
___________________________________________________________________________
2/6
3 Troubleshooting and fault analysis
3.1
Troubleshooting using the processor status indicator lamps
The status indicator lamps situated on the processor inform the user about the PLC operating mode and also about any possible faults. Faults detected by the PLC concern :
• circuits in the PLC and/or its modules : internal faults,
• the process controlled by the PLC or the wiring to the process : external faults,
• the operation of the application executed by the PLC : internal or external faults.
Faults are detected during start-up (self-tests) or during operation (this is the case for the majority of hardware faults), during exchanges with the modules or upon the execution of a program instruction.
Certain "serious" faults require a PLC restart, with others, the user uses his discretion to decide on appropriate action, depending on the level of application required.
3 types of faults can be identified : non-blocking, blocking or processor faults.
C
3.1-1 Non-blocking faults
This is an anomaly caused by an I/O fault on the X Bus, the FIPIO bus or by the execution of an instruction. It may be processed by the user program and does not change the PLC status.
• Non-blocking faults linked to the I/O
A non-blocking fault linked to the I/O is signaled by :
- the I/O status indicator lamp of the processor being on,
- the I/O status indicator lamps of the faulty modules being on, (on X Bus and FIPIO bus)
- the fault bits and words associated with the channel :
I/O on X Bus :
%Ixy.i.ERR bit = 1 indicates faulty channel (implicit exchanges),
%MWxy.i.2 words indicate the type of channel faults (explicit exchanges),
I/O on FIPIO bus :
%I\p.2.c\m.v.ERR bit = 1 indicates faulty channel (implicit exchanges),
%MW\p.2.c\m.v.2 words indicate the type of channel faults (explicit exchanges),
- the fault bits and words associated with the module :
Module on X Bus :
%Ixy.MOD.ERR bit = 1 indicates a module fault (implicit exchanges),
%MWxy.MOD.2 words indicate the type of module fault (explicit exchanges),
Module on FIPIO bus :
%I\p.2.c\0.MOD.ERR bit = 1 indicates a module fault (implicit exchanges),
%MW\p.2.c\0.MOD.2 words indicate the type of module fault (explicit exchanges),
- system bits
%S10 : I/O fault (on X Bus and on FIPIO bus),
%S16 : I/O fault (on X Bus and FIPIO bus) in the task in progress
%S40 to %S47 : I/O fault in racks with addresses 0 to 7 on X bus (see section 3.2).
___________________________________________________________________________
3/1
C
Note : the use of these bits and words is explained in the TLX DS 57 PL7 30E application-specific manuals.
Status indicator lamps System
RUN ERR I/O bits
Faults
%S10
%S16
%S40 to
%S47
I/O faults : channel supply fault, channel tripped, module not conforming to configuration, out of order, module supply fault
I/O fault in a task
Rack I/O fault
(%S40: rack 0,.... %S47: rack 7)
Key Indicator lamp on Indeterminate state
• Non-blocking faults linked to program execution
A non-blocking fault linked to the program execution is signaled by setting to 1 any of the system bits %S15, %S18 and %S20.
Testing and setting these system bits to 0 is the responsibility of the user.
Faults Status indicator lamps System
RUN ERR I/O bits
%S15 = 1
%S18 = 1
%S20 = 1
Character string manipulation error.
Capacity overflow, error on floating point or division by 0.
Index overflow
Note : The program diagnostics function, which can be accessed via PL7 Junior/PL7 Pro software enables certain non-blocking faults linked to the execution of the program to be rendered blocking. The type of fault is indicated in system word %SW 125.
3.1-2 Blocking faults
These faults, caused by the application program, prevent the program from continuing to operate, but do not cause a system fault. When such a fault appears, the application stops immediately and changes to the HALT state (all tasks are stopped on the current instruction).
There are 2 ways of restarting the application :
- via the INIT command using PL7 Junior or PL7 Pro software,
- via the processor RESET pushbutton.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/2
Troubleshooting and fault analysis 3
The application is then at its initial state : the data has its initial values, tasks are stopped at the end of the scan, the input image bits are updated and the outputs are set to fallback position ; the RUN command enables the application to be restarted.
A non-blocking fault is indicated by status indicator lamps (ERR and RUN) flashing and, depending on the type of fault, by the setting to 1 of one or both system bits %S11 and %S26. The type of fault is indicated in system word %SW 125.
C
Status indicator lamps System
RUN ERR I/O bits
%S11 = 1 Watchdog overrun
Faults
%S26 = 1 Overrun of grafcet activity table
Unresolved Grafcet step
Execution of HALT instruction
Execution of unresolved JUMP
Key Indicator lamp on Indicator lamp flashing Indeterminate state
Diagnostic tools under PL7 Junior/PL7 Pro
The program diagnostics tool for PL7 Junior/PL7 Pro software shows "in plain language" the cause and origin of the change to a PLC blocking fault : watchdog overrun, character string fault, etc.
The type of fault is indicated in system word %SW 125.
Fault type Meaning
Blocking Watchdog overrun
System bits
System word
%SW125
%S11 = 1 H'DEB0'
Grafcet activity table overrun
Unresolved Grafcet step
Execution of HALT instruction
Execution of unresolved JUMP
Non-blocking, Manipulation error on a character string rendered blocking Division by 0 during program Capacity overflow diagnostics Operation on floating point error
Index overflow
%S26 = 1 H'DEF7'
% S26 = 1 H'DEFE'
H'2258'
H'DEF8'
%S15 = 1 H'DEF1'
%S18 = 1 H'DEF0'
%S18 = 1 H'DEF2'
%S18 = 1 H'DE87'
%S20 = 1 H'DEF3'
___________________________________________________________________________
3/3
C
3.1-3 Processor or system faults
These serious processor (hardware or software), or X Bus wiring faults mean that correct operation of the system is no longer assured. They cause a PLC to stop in
ERROR which requires a cold restart. To prevent a PLC fault occurring again, the next cold start will be forced to STOP mode.
Status indicator lamps System word Faults
RUN ERR I/O %SW124
H'80'
H'81'
System watchdog fault or wiring fault on X Bus
Wiring fault on X bus
System code fault, interruption not expected,
System task stack overflow
PL7 Junior task stack overflow
Key Indicator lamp on Indeterminate state
Processor fault diagnostics :
When the PLC has stopped due to a fault, it can no longer communicate with a diagnostic device. Data relating to faults can only be accessed after a cold start (see system word %SW124). In general this data cannot used by the operator. Only H'80' and H'81' data can be used to diagnose a wiring fault on X Bus.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/4
Troubleshooting and fault analysis 3
3.2
Reminder of system bits and system words
System bits %Si and system words %SWi provide information about the PLC status and can be used to control its operation. Some of these objects are managed entirely by the system, others are the user's responsibility. For more information on system bits and words refer to the PL7 Junior documentation (TLX DR PL7 30 E - section 3 of part B).
C
3.2-1 System bits
Bits Function Description
%S0
%S1
%S4 to
%S7
%S9
%S10
Cold start
Warm restart
Normally at state 0, this bit is set to 1 :
• on power return with loss of data,
• by the user program,
• by the terminal,
• on changing the PCMCIA memory card,
• by pressing the processor RESET button,
• by manipulating the memory slot cover or the handle of the PCMCIA memory card.
This bit is reset to 0 by the system after a normal program execution scan.
To process an application program after a cold PLC start, it is also possible to test bit %SW10:X0
(if %SW10:X0 = 0, there has been a cold restart).
Normally at state 0, this bit is set to 1 :
• on power return with data save,
• by the user program,
• by the terminal.
This bit is reset to 0 by the system at the end of the first complete scan and before the outputs are updated.
Time bases
%S4 changes state every 5 ms (Time base = 10 ms),
%S5 changes state every 50 ms (TB = 100 ms),
%S6 changes state every 500 ms (TB = 1 s),
%S7 changes state every 30 s (TB = 1 min).
These bits are not synchronized with the PLC scan.
Change to output Normally at state 0, this bit can be set to 1 via the fallback state program or the terminal.
on all buses %S9 = 1 : change to fallback state (0 or 1) depending on choice
(X Bus, FIPIO, made in configuration of all discrete and analog outputs,
AS-i, etc) %S9 = 0 : normal output update.
I/O fault on
X Bus and
FIPIO bus
Normally at state 1, this bit is set to 0 by the system during an
I/O fault on one of the station racks.
This bit is reset to 1 by the system when the fault disappears.
%S11 Watchdog overrun
Normally at state 0, this bit is set to 1 by the system if the program execution time exceeds the maximum execution time (watchdog) declared during configuration.
Such a fault causes the PLC to change to HALT (software fault).
___________________________________________________________________________
3/5
C
System bits (continued)
Bits
%S13
%S15
%S16
%S17
%S18
%S19
%S20
Function
First scan
Character string fault
Description
Normally at state 0, this bit is set to 1 by the system during the first scan after setting the PLC to RUN.
In the case of a cold restart, %S13 can only change to 1 after the RESET button on the processor has been pressed or after manipulation of the PCMCIA memory card handle or slot cover.
Normally at state 0, this bit is set to 1 by the system when the size of the destination zone for the transfer of a character string is insufficient.
This bit must be reset to 0 by the user.
I/O task fault
Normally at state 1, this bit is set to 0 by the system during a fault on an X Bus I/O module or a FIPIO device configured
X Bus and FIPIO in the task.
This bit must be reset to 1 by the user. Each task manages its own bit %S16.
Exit bit on a shift operation or arithmetic report
Normally at state 0, this bit is set to 1 by the system :
• during a shift operation, contains the state of the last bit,
• when an overrun occurs with unsigned arithmetic.
This bit is reset to 0 by the user.
Arithmetic overflow or error
Normally at state 0, this bit is set to 1 by the system in the event of a capacity overflow during operation on a word :
• result greater than +32767 or less than -32768 (single word),
• result greater than +2147483647 or less than -2147483648
(double word),
• overflow or error during operation on a floating point. The
type of fault is given by system word %SW17.
• division by 0,
• square root of a negative number,
• forcing a DRUM to a non-existent step,
• stacking a full register or unstacking an empty register.
This bit must be reset to 0 by the user.
Task period overrun
(periodical scan)
Index overrun
Normally at state 0, this bit is set to 1 by the system in the event of an overrun of the time defined for the task during configuration or programmed in %SW0 /%SW1.
This bit is reset to 0 by the user. Each periodic task
(MAST, FAST) controls its own bit %S19.
Note : while the cause of the task time overrun persists, the task operates cyclically.
Normally at state 0, this bit is set to 1 by the system when the address of the indexed object becomes less than 0 or exceeds the number of objects declared during configuration.
This bit is reset to 0 by the user.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/6
Troubleshooting and fault analysis 3
System bits (continued)
Bits
%S21
%S22
%S23
%S24
%S26
%S30
%S31
Function Description
Grafcet initialization
Normally at state 0, this bit is set to 1 by :
• a cold restart (%S0 = 1)
• the user program exclusively in preprocessing,
• the terminal
At state 1, it causes the Grafcet to be initialized. The active steps are deactivated and the initial steps are activated.
It is reset to state 0 by the system at the end of preprocessing.
Grafcet reset Normally at state 0, this bit is managed by the user and can to zero only be set to state 1 via the program during preprocessing.
At state 1, all active steps are deactivated.
It is reset to state 0 by the system at the end of preprocessing.
Grafcet freeze Normally at state 0, this bit is managed by the user and can only be set to state 1 via the program during preprocessing.
Maintained at state 1 by the application program, it enables the Grafcet to remain in a given state (without changing).
It must be reset to 0 only by program during preprocessing so that the Grafcet can change from the freeze situation.
Resetting macro-steps to 0
Normally at state 0, setting %S24 to 1 resets the selected macro-steps in a table of 4 system words %SW22 to %SW25. It is reset to 0 by the system after acceptance at the end of preprocessing.
Table overflow Normally at state 0, this bit is set to state 1 when the number
(steps/ of possible steps or transitions has been exceeded. An transitions) overflow causes the PLC to change to STOP. Starting execution (RUN) via the terminal must be preceded by an initialization (setting %S21 to 1) by the same terminal. It is thus reset to 0 on initialization of the terminal. System words %SW20 and %SW21 contain the number of positions occupied in the Grafcet activity tables (%SW20 step positions, %SW21 transition positions). In the event of an overflow, the words %SW20 and %SW21 contain the number of positions corresponding to the scan before the overflow.
Activation/ Normally at state 1, this bit is managed by the user : deactivation of %S30 = 1, activation of master task, master task
(MAST)
%S30 = 0, deactivation of master task.
Activation/ Normally at state 1, this bit is managed by the user : deactivation of %S31 = 1, activation of the fast task, fast task %S31 = 0, deactivation of the fast task.
(FAST) This bit is inactive if the fast task is not programmed.
C
___________________________________________________________________________
3/7
C
System bits (continued)
Bits
%S38
%S39
%S14 to
%S47
%S50
%S51
%S59
%S60
%S67
Function Description
Activation/ deactivation of events
Loss of events
Normally at state 1, this bit is managed by the user :
%S38 = 1, activation of event-triggered processing,
%S38 = 0, deactivation of event-triggered processing.
This bit is inactive if no event is programmed as an event task.
This bit is set to 1 by the system to advise the application that one or more events have been lost following stack overflow.
This bit should be reset to 0 by the application.
I/O faults
(racks)
Normally at state 1, each of these bits is set to state 0 on an
I/O fault of the corresponding rack :
%S40 for 0, %S41 for rack 1, ........, %S47 for rack 7.
Setting one of these bits to 0 causes :
• the %S10 general bit to be set to 0,
• the I/O indicator lamp of the corresponding rack and processor to light up,
• status module bit %Ixy.ERR to be set to 1.
They are reset to 1 when the fault disappears.
These various bits are used by the program to draw up the fault processing structure.
Updating of date and time by %SW50 to %SW53
Normally at state 0, this bit is managed by the user :
%S50 = 0, access to date/time by reading words %SW50 to %SW53,
%S50 = 1, updating of date/time by writing words %SW50 to %SW53.
Loss of This bit managed by the system indicates at state 1 either time on the the absence of the real-time clock, or that the system words real-time clock relating to the real-time clock have no significance; in this case the real-time clock must be reset. This automatically resets the bit to 0.
Updating date / time by %SW59
Redundant architecture control
Normally at state 0, this bit is managed by the user :
%S59 = 0, the system does not manage word %SW59,
%S59 = 1, the system manages word %SW59,
System bit used when redundant architecture is used.
(see description and usage in "Premium Redundant
Architecture" manual).
PMCIA This bit, managed by the system, is used to check the memory card backup battery for the PMCIA memory card (RAM type) : battery status %S67 = 0, battery present and operative,
%S67 = 1, battery missing or inoperative.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/8
Troubleshooting and fault analysis 3
System bits (continued)
Bits
%S68
%S70
%S73
%S74
%S80
%S90
%S92
%S94
%S95
%S100
Function Description
Processor internal RAM
This bit, managed by the system, is used to check the backup battery for the data and the program in the processor internal backup RAM memory : battery status %S68 = 0, battery present and operative,
%S68 = 1, battery missing or inoperative.
Updating of data on the
AS-i bus
This bit is set to 1 by the system at the end of each AS-i bus scan. During start-up, it indicates that all data has been refreshed at least once and is significant.
This bit is reset to 0 by the user.
Change to Normally at state 0, this bit is set to 1 by the user to protected mode switch to protected mode on the AS-i bus. Initially, bit %S74 on the AS-i bus must be set to state 1. This bit is only used for wiring checks.
It is not used in the PLC.
Saving current
Normally at state 0, this bit is set to 1 by the user to save the current configuration on the AS-i bus.
configuration This bit is only used for wiring checks. It is not used in the on the AS-i bus PLC.
Normally at state 0, this bit is set to 1 by the user to reset the message counters %SW80 to %SW86.
Reset message counters
Updating the common words
Normally at state 0, this bit is set to 1 by the system on receipt of common words from another station.
This bit is reset to 0 by the user.
Switch to Normally at state 0, this bit can be set to 1 by the user to set communication the communication functions in performance measurement mode.
function The communication function Time-out parameter then displays measurement the exchange loop-back time in tenths of ms (if this time <10s, mode otherwise insignificant).
Save DFB adjustments
Restore DFB adjustments
Protocol on terminal port
Normally at state 0, this bit can be set to 1 by the user to save the adjustment values of user function blocks.
Normally at state 0, this bit can be set to 1 by the user to restore the adjustment values of user function blocks.
This bit, managed by the system, takes the value 0 or 1 depending on the type of device connected to the terminal port :
%S100 = 0, UNI-TELWAY master protocol,
%S100 = 1, UNI-TELWAY slave or ASCII protocol (character mode).
C
___________________________________________________________________________
3/9
C
System bits (continued)
Bits
%S101
%S102
%S118
%S119
Function
Diagnostic buffer configured
Diagnostic buffer full
General I/O fault on
FIPIO bus
General I/O fault on
X Bus
Description
This bit is set to 1 by the system when the diagnostic option is configured, and a diagnostic buffer designed to store errors sent by diagnostic DFBs is then reserved.
This bit is set to 1 by the system when the buffer receiving errors from diagnostic function blocks is full.
Normally at state 1, this bit is set to 0 by the system if a fault occurs on a connected device on the FIPIO bus.
When the fault disappears, this bit is set to 1 by the system.
Normally at state 1, this bit is set to 0 by the system if a fault occurs on a connected device on the X Bus.
When the fault disappears, this bit is set to 1 by the system.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/10
Troubleshooting and fault analysis 3
3.2-2 System words
Words Function Description
%SW0
%SW1
%SW8
%SW9
%SW10
%SW11
%SW12
%SW13
%SW17
Master task scan time (MAST)
Fast task scan time (FAST)
Used to modify the master task time, defined during configuration, via the program or the terminal.
Time is expressed in ms (1 to 255 ms).
During cyclic operation %SW0 = 0.
Used to modify the fast task time, defined during configuration, via the program or the terminal.
Time is expressed in ms (1 to 255 ms).
This system word is not significant if the fast task is not programmed.
Used to inhibit reading the inputs for each task :
%SW8:X0 = 1 inhibit in the master task (MAST)
%SW8:X1 = 1 inhibit in fast task (FAST)
Control of reading inputs for each task
Control of updating outputs for each task
Used to inhibit updating the outputs of each task :
%SW9:X0 = 1 inhibit in the master task (MAST)
%SW9:X1 = 1 inhibit in fast task (FAST)
Detection of a cold restart at the end of the first scan of a task
This word indicates a change to RUN after a cold start
Bit %SW10:X0 is associated with the MAST task,
Bit %SW10:X1 is associated with the FAST task (if it is programmed).
The value 0 of the current task bit means that it is executing its first scan after a cold start. Each bit is set to 1 after the associated task has been executed.
Contains the duration of the watchdog defined during configuration. It is expressed in ms (10 to 500 ms).
Watchdog duration
Terminal port UNI-TELWAY address of the terminal port defined during
UNI-TELWAY configuration and loaded in this word on a cold start.
address This word is updated by the system.
Main station address
Indicates for the main network :
• the station number (low order byte) : 0 to 127,
• the network number (high order byte) : 0 to 63.
Fault status of operations on floating points
Indicates the type of fault on a floating point operation:
%SW17:X0 = 1 invalid operation
%SW17:X1 = 1 non-standard operand
%SW17:X2 = 1 division by 0 / the result is ± ×
%SW17:X3 = 1 overflow / the result is ± ×
%SW17:X4 = 1 underflow / the result is 0
%SW17:X5 to X15: unused, always at 0
%SD18
(%SW18 +
%SW19)
Absolute time counter
This double word is used to calculate the duration.
It is incremented by the system every 1/10th of a second
(even when the PLC is in STOP).
%SW18 the least significant and %SW19 the most significant bits of word %SD18.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/11
C
C
System words (continued)
Words
%SW20
%SW21
%SW22 to
%SW25
%SW30
%SW31
%SW32
%SW33
%SW34
%SW35
%SW48
%SW49 to
%SW53
Function
Grafcet activity level
Validity table for Grafcet transitions
Description
This word contains the number of active steps to be activated and deactivated for the current scan.
This word contains the number of enabled transitions and transitions to be enabled and disabled for the current scan.
Macro-step reset to 0 table
A macro-step corresponds to each bit in this table with
%SW22:X0 for XM0 ....%SW25:X16 for XM63.
Macro-steps whose associated bit in the table is at 0 will be reset when bit %S24 is set to 1.
Shows, for the master task (MAST), the execution time of the last PLC scan (in ms).
Master task execution time
Max execution Shows, for the master task (MAST), the longest execution time for time since the last cold start (in ms).
master task
Min execution Shows, for the master task (MAST), the shortest execution time for time since the last cold start (in ms).
master task
Fast task execution time
Shows, for the fast task (FAST), the execution time of the last PLC scan (in ms).
Max execution Shows, for the fast task (FAST), the longest execution time for time since the last cold start (in ms).
fast task
Min execution Shows, for the fast task (FAST), the shortest execution time for time since the last cold start (in ms).
fast task
Number of events
Indicates the number of events processed since the last cold start.
Real-time Contains, in BCD, the current date / time value : clock function %SW49 : day of the week, 1 to 7 (00DD)
(1 = Monday, ..., 7 = Sunday)
%SW50 : Seconds, 0 to 59 (SS00),
%SW51 : Hours, 0 to 23 / Minutes, 0 to 59 (HHMM),
%SW52 : Month, 1 to 12 / day of month, 1 to 31 (MMDD),
%SW53 : Century, 0 to 99 / Year, 0 to 99 (CCYY).
These words are managed by the system when %S50 = 0.
They can be accessed by the user in write mode when %S50 = 1.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/12
Troubleshooting and fault analysis 3
System words (continued)
Words
%SW54 to
%SW58
Function
Real-time clock function
%SW58
%SW59
%SW60 to
%SW69
%SW80 to
%SW86
Code of last stop
Adjustment of current date/time
Redundant
PLC diagnostics
Message counters
Description
Contains, in BCD, the date / hour of the last power supply fault or PLC stop :
%SW54 : Seconds, 0 to 59 (00SS)
%SW55 : Hours, 0 to 23 / Minutes, 0 to 59 (HHMM),
%SW56 : Month, 1 to 12 / day of month, 1 to 31 (MMDD),
%SW57 : Century, 0 to 99 / Year, 0 to 99 (CCYY).
%SW58 : day of the week on MSB, (1 to 7 (DD00) 1 = Monday,
..., 7 = Sunday)
Contains the code of the cause of the last stop on the low order byte (00CC) :
%SW58 = 1, change from RUN to STOP by the terminal,
%SW58 = 2, stop on software fault (task overflow),
%SW58 = 4, power fault or power supply RESET
button pressed,
%SW58 = 5, stop on hardware fault,
%SW58 = 6, stop on HALT instruction.
Contains 2 series of 8 bits for adjusting the current date/time.
The adjustment is made on the rising edge of a bit.
The adjustment word is validated by %S59.
Incrementation Decrementation Parameter bit %SW59:X0 bit %SW59:X1 bit %SW59:X8 bit %SW59:X9 day of the week seconds bit %SW59:X3 bit %SW59:X4 bit %SW59:X5 bit %SW59:X6 bit %SW59:X7 bit %SW59:X11 bit %SW59:X12 bit %SW59:X13 bit %SW59:X14 bit %SW59:X15 hours day of month month year century
System words used when redundant architecture is used.
(see description and usage in "Premium Redundant
Architecture" manual).
%SW80 : number of messages transmitted by the system to the terminal port.
%SW81 : number of messages received by the system from the terminal port.
%SW82 : number of messages transmitted by the system to the PCMCIA communication card.
%SW83 : number of messages received by the system from the PCMCIA communication card.
%SW84 : number of telegrams transmitted by the system.
%SW85 : number of telegrams received by the system.
%SW86 : number of telegrams refused by the system.
C
___________________________________________________________________________
3/13
C
System words (continued)
Words Function Description
%SW87
%SW88
%SW89
%SW108
%SW109
%SW116
Management Number of requests processed by the synchronous server of per master task cycle (MAST).
communication Number of requests processed by the asynchronous server flow per master task cycle (MAST).
(1) Number of requests processed by the server functions (immediate) per master task cycle (MAST).
Number of forced bits
Indicates the number of forced bits in the application.
Normally set to 0, it is updated by the system when forcing and unforcing bits in the application memory.
Counts the number of analog channels forced to 0.
Forced analog channel counter
FIPIO
I/O fault in the task
Normally at 0, each bit of this word represents a
FIPIO exchange state in the task in which it is tested.
This word is reset to 0 by the user.
bit %SW116:X0 bit %SW116:X1
= 1 explicit exchange error (the variable is not exchanged on the bus),
= 1 time out on an explicit exchange (no response at the end of the time out), bit %SW116:X2 bit %SW116:X3 bit %SW116:X4 bit %SW116:X5 bit %SW116:X6
= 1 number of explicit exchanges carried out simultaneously,
= 1 incorrect MPS status (the contents of the variable are invalid),
= 1 the length of a received variable is greater than the declared length,
= 0 reserved at 0,
= 1 invalid PDU code (the variable must be bit %SW116:X7 ignored by the channel manager),
= 1 asynchronous promptness time out : the time taken by the agent to produce the variable has not been respected.
Signals absence of configured devices on the FIPIO bus,
= 1 channel fault
= 0 reserved at 0, bit %SW116:X8 bit %SW116:X9 bit %SW116:X10 = 0 reserved at 0, bit %SW116:X11 = 0 reserved at 0, bit %SW116:X12 = 0 reserved at 0, bit %SW116:X13 = 0 reserved at 0, bit %SW116:X14 = 0 reserved at 0, bit %SW116:X15 = 1 global fault (or fault on bits 3, 4, 6, 7).
(1) words only available on TSX/PCX/PMX 57, version V3.3 or later.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/14
Troubleshooting and fault analysis 3
System words (continued)
Words
%SW118 to
%SW121
%SW124
Function
Not significant
%SW125
%SW126 and
%SW127
%SW128 to
%SW143
Description
Not significant for TSX/PMX/PCX Premium processors.
These words are at state 0
Type of processor fault
Contains the last type of processor fault encountered.
At values H'80' and H'81', it is used to diagnose a wiring fault on X Bus.
Read after PLC cold restart.
Type of blocking fault
Contains the last type of blocking fault encountered (see section 3.1).
Address of Contains the address of the instruction which generated the the blocking blocking fault.
fault instruction %SW126 contains the offset of this address
%SW127 contains the base of this address
Connection point fault on device on
Each bit in this group of words represents the state of a connected device on the FIPIO bus.
Normally at state 1, if one of these bit is at state 0, a connection the FIPIO bus point fault has occurred.
When the fault disappears, this bit is set to 0 by the system.
%SW128 represents addresses 0 to 15 bit %SW128:X0 = @ 0 bit %SW128:X1 = @ 1
...
bit %SW128:X15 = @ 15
%SW129 represents addresses 16 to 31
%SW130 represents addresses 32 to 47
%SW131 represents addresses 48 to 63
%SW132 represents addresses 64 to 79
%SW133 represents addresses 80 to 95
%SW134 represents addresses 96 to 111
%SW135 represents addresses 112 to 127
%SW136 represents addresses 128 to 143
%SW137 represents addresses 144 to 159
%SW138 represents addresses 160 to 175
%SW139 represents addresses 176 to 191
%SW140 represents addresses 192 to 207
%SW141 represents addresses 208 to 223
%SW142 represents addresses 224 to 239
%SW143 represents addresses 240 to 255
C
___________________________________________________________________________
3/15
C
System words (continued)
Words
%SW144
%SW145
Function Description
Operating mode Used to stop or start the bus arbitrator of bus arbitrator, and the producer/consumer functions on the bus. It is used producer/ consumer functions on FIPIO bus to modify the starting, automatic and manual modes of the bus if it is stopped.
bit %SW144:X0 = 1 producer/consumer function in
RUN bit %SW144:X0 = 0 producer/consumer function in
STOP (no variables are exchanged on the bus).
bit %SW144:X1 = 1 the bus arbitrator is in RUN, bit %SW144:X1 = 0 the bus arbitrator is in STOP (no variables or messages are scanned on the bus).
bit %SW144:X2 = 1 automatic start if the bus has been stopped automatically.
bit %SW144:X2 = 0 manual start if the bus has been stopped automatically.
bit %SW144:X3 = 1 reserved at 1 bit %SW144:X4 to bit %SW144:X15
= 0 reserved at 0
!
Modifying this system word may stop the
PLC station
Modification of FIPIO bus arbitrator parameters
The bits are set to state 1 by the user and reset to 0 by the system when initialization is performed.
bit %SW145:X0 = 1 modification of bus arbitrator priority : the high order byte of this system word contains the value of the bus arbitrator priority which will be applied on the bus.
bit %SW145:X1 = 1 modification of the slot time value (Tr): the high order byte of this word contains the slot time value Tr (in µs) which will be applied on the bus, bit %SW145:X2 = 1 modification of silence time (T0): the high order byte of this word contains the silence time value T0 (in µs) which will be applied on the bus, bit %SW145:X3 to bit %SW145:X7
= 0 reserved at 0.
bit %SW145:X8 to = bus arbitrator priority value bit %SW145:X15 (if bit %SW145:X0 = 1).
These parameters can be modified when in RUN, but the application must be stopped and then restarted.
!
Modifying this system word may stop the
3/16
Troubleshooting and fault analysis 3
System words (continued)
Words
%SW146
%SW147
%SW148
%SW149
%SW150
%SW151
%SW152
Function Description
Display of The low order byte shows the state of the producer/ the bus arbitrator consumer function on the FIPIO bus.
and producer/ The low order byte shows the state of the producer/ consumer consumer function.
function on the FIPIO
The high order byte shows the state of the bus arbitrator function.
bus Byte value
H'00' : the function does not exist.
H'70' : the function is loaded but is not operational.
H'F0' : the function is currently being executed.
Network cycle A value not equal to 0 (in ms), showing the network cycle time for the time for the MAST task (NCT-MAST).
MAST task
Network cycle A value not equal to 0 (in ms), showing the network cycle time for the
FAST task time for the FAST task (NCT-FAST).
Reserved
Number of frames This word shows the number of frames transmitted by the transmitted FIPIO channel manager.
Number of This word shows the number of frames received by the FIPIO frames received channel manager.
Number of message resend attempts
This word shows the number of message resend attempts by the FIPIO channel manager.
C
___________________________________________________________________________
3/17
C
System words (continued)
Words
%SW153 and
%SW154
Function Description
List of FIPIO channel
Each bit is set to state 1 by the system and reset to 0 by the user.
manager faults %SW153 bit %SW153:X0 = 1 station overrun fault bit %SW153:X1 = 1 message refusal fault bit %SW153:X2 = 1 interrupt variable refusal fault bit %SW153:X3 = 1 station underrun fault bit %SW153:X4 = 1 physical layer fault bit %SW153:X5 = 1 non echo fault bit %SW153:X6 = 1 chatter fault bit %SW153:X7 = 1 hypocurrent fault bit %SW153:X8 = 1 pierced frame fault bit %SW153:X9 = 1 frame reception CRC fault bit %SW153:X10 = 1 frame reception coding fault bit %SW153:X11 = 1 received frame length fault bit %SW153:X12 = 1 unknown frame type received bit %SW153:X13 = 1 truncated frame received bit %SW153:X14 bit %SW153:X15 not used, value not significant not used, value not significant
%SW155
%SW162
%SW154 bit %SW154:X0 = 1 aperiodic Time Out sequence bit %SW154:X1 = 1 message handling request refused bit %SW154:X2 = 1 urgent update command refused bit %SW154:X3 = 1 non-urgent update command refused bit %SW154:X4 = 1 silence fault bit %SW154:X5 = 1 network collision on transmission of identifier bit %SW154:X6 = 1 bus arbitrator overrun fault bit %SW154:X7 not used, value not significant bit %SW154:X8 = 0 reserved at 0 bit %SW154:X9 = 0 reserved at 0 bit %SW154:X10 = 0 reserved at 0 bit %SW154:X11 = 0 reserved at 0 bit %SW154:X12 = 0 reserved at 0 bit %SW154:X13 = 0 reserved at 0 bit %SW154:X14 = 0 reserved at 0 bit %SW154:X15 = 0 reserved at 0
Number of explicit exchanges
This word indicates the number of explicit exchanges during processing.
Number of errors in diagnostic buffer
Number of current errors in the diagnostic buffer.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/18
Standards Contents
Service conditions Part D
___________________________________________________________________________
Section Page D
1 Standards / service conditions 1/1
Service conditions and requirements linked to the environment 1/1
1.2-1 Normal service conditions
1.2-2 Transport and storage requirements
___________________________________________________________________________
D/1
D
Standards Contents
Service conditions Part D
___________________________________________________________________________
Section Page
___________________________________________________________________________
D/2
1 Standards / service conditions
1.1
Standards
TSX/PMX/PCX Premium PLCs have been developed to conform to the main national and international standards regarding electronic industrial control system products :
• Specific PLC requirements : operational characteristics, immunity, ruggedness, safety, etc.
EN61131-2 (IEC1131-2), CSA 22.2, UL 508
• Merchant navy requirements of principal European bodies :
BV, DNV, GL, LROS, RINA, etc.
• Compliance with European Directives (low voltage, Electromagnetic Compatibility), CE
Marking.
• Electrical and self-extinguishing qualities of insulating materials :
UL 746C, UL 94, etc.
D
1.2
Service conditions and requirements linked to the environment
1.2-1 Normal service conditions
• Operating temperature/Humidity/Altitude
Ambient operating temperature
Relative humidity
Altitude
0°C to +60°C (IEC 1131-2 = +5°C to +55°C)
10% to 95% (without condensation)
0 to 2000 meters
• Supply voltages
Voltage nominal 24VDC 48VDC 100...240VAC 100-120/200-240VAC limit nominal -
19..30VDC 19..60VDC 90...264VAC
90..140/190..264VAC
(1)
50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz Frequency
Micro-breaks limit duration
≤
1 ms repetition
≥
1s
Total harmonic distortion -
Residual ripple included
5 %
-
-
≤
1 ms
≥
1s
5 % -
47/63 Hz
≥
1s
10%
-
47/63 Hz
≤
1/2 period
≤
1/2 period
≥
1s
10% i
(1) Possible up to 34 VDC, limited to 1 hour per 24 hours.
With TSX PSY 1610 and TSX PSY 3610 power supplies, and if relay output modules are used, this range is reduced to 21.6V...26.4V
___________________________________________________________________________
1/1
D
• Mechanical withstand
- Immunity to vibrations :
Complies with IEC 68-2-6, Fc test.
- Immunity to shocks:
Conforming to standard IEC 68-2-27, Ea test.
• Electrostatic discharge withstand
- Immunity to electrostatic discharges :
Conforming to standard IEC 1000-4-2, level 3 (1)
• HF interference withstand
- Immunity to electromagnetic radiation :
Conforming to standard IEC 1000-4-3, level 3 (1)
- Immunity to conducted interference induced by RF fields :
Conforming to standard IEC 1000-4-6, level 3 (1)
- Immunity to bursts of rapid transients :
Conforming to standard IEC 1000-4-4, level 3 (1)
- Immunity to shock waves :
Conforming to standard IEC 1000-4-5, level 3 (1)
- Immunity to damped oscillatory waves :
Conforming to standard IEC 1000-4-12, level 3 (1)
(1) minimum level in the test conditions laid down in the standards
• LF interference withstand
Conforming to standard IEC 1131-2.
• TSX Premium PLC protective treatment
TSX/PMX/PCX Premium PLCs meet the "TC" treatment (1) requirements.
For installing in an industrial production workshop or in an atmosphere corresponding to "TH" treatment (2), TSX Premium PLCs must be installed in at least IP54 protection enclosures as defined by the IEC 664 and NF C 20 040 standards.
TSX/PMX/PCX Premium PLCs offer their own protection index IP20 (3). They can therefore be installed without enclosures in reserved access premises which do not exceed pollution level 2 (control room with neither machines nor dust-producing activity).
(1) "TC" treatment : all-atmosphere treatment.
(2) "TH" treatment : treatment for warm or humid atmospheres.
(3) When a position is not occupied by a module, a TSX RKA 02 protective cover must be placed over the position.
___________________________________________________________________________
1/2
Standards/ service conditions 1
1.2-2 Transport and storage requirements
Conforming to the IEC 1131-2 requirements
Storage temperature - 25°C to +70°C
Relative humidity 5% to 95% (without condensation)
D
___________________________________________________________________________
1/3
D
___________________________________________________________________________
1/4
Process and AS-i Contents power supplies Part E
___________________________________________________________________________
Section
Page
E
1-2 24 VDC process power supplies
1.4-1 TBX SUP 10 power supply unit
1.4-2 TSX SUP 1011/ 1021/ 1051/ A02 power supply modules 1/7
1.4-3 TSX SUP 1101 and TSX SUP A05 power supply unit 1/10
TBX SUP 10 dimensions/mounting/connections
Dimensions/mounting of process and AS-i power supplies
2.2-1 TSX SUP 1011 / 1021 / 1051 / A02 power supply
2.2-2 TSX SUP 1101 / A05 power supplies
2.2-3 Summary of mounting options
Connections for 24 VDC process power supplies
2.3-1 TSX SUP 1011/1021 power supplies
2.3-2 TSX SUP 1051 power supply
2.3-3 TSX SUP 1101 power supply
___________________________________________________________________________
E/1
Process and AS-i power supplies
Contents
Part E
E
Section
Connections for AS-i power supplies
2.4-1 TSX SUP A02 power supply
2.4-2 TSX SUP A05 power supply
Page
Electrical characteristics 3/1
3.1-1 Process power supplies : TBX SUP 10 and TSX SUP 1011 3/1
3.1-2 Process power supplies : TSX SUP 1021/1051/1101
3.1-3 AS-i power supplies : TSX SUP A02 /A05
Physical and environmental characteristics 3/5
___________________________________________________________________________
E/2
1 Presentation
1.1
General
A wide range of power supply units and modules are available providing the user with the best possible solution for his requirements :
• TBX SUP 10 and TSX SUP 1 ii
1 process power supply units and modules supply
24 VDC to the peripherals of an application controlled by PLCs (TSX Micro and
Premium). These peripherals include sensors, preactuators, encoders, operator terminals, loop controllers, indicator lamps, pushbuttons, pneumatic cylinders, etc.
The 24 V supply can be provided by a 100/240 V, 50/60 Hz AC supply.
TBX SUP 10 and TSX SUP 1011 power supply modules can also be connected to
125 VDC supply.
• AS-i TSX SUP A02 and A05 process power supply units and modules supply components connected on an AS-i fieldbus with 30 VDC. This power supply is distributed via the same conductors as those used for data exchanges.
The mounting arrangements for these products have been specially designed to meet the specific distance and mounting requirements for TSX Micro and Premium PLCs and
TBX products.
All the products can be mounted :
• on a Telequick AM1-PA mounting plate,
• on an AM1-DP200 / DE200 central DIN rail, with the exception of TSX SUP 1101 and
TSX SUP A05 high power supply units.
E
Supply voltage 100..240VAC or 125VDC
Process power supply
Supply voltage 100...120/200...240 VAC
24VDC / 1A 24VDC / 1A 24VDC / 2A 24VDC / 5A
AS-i bus power supplies
Supply voltage 100...120 or 200...240 VAC
24VDC / 10A
AS-i 30 VDC / 2.4 A AS-i 30 VDC / 5 A & 24 VDC
___________________________________________________________________________
1/1
1-2 24 VDC process power supplies
1.2-1 Catalog
Selection table
E
Input characteristics
Nominal voltage
Limit values
Limit frequency
Nominal input current
Output characteristics
Useful power a output voltage
Nominal current
Auxiliary functions
SELV (1)
Paralleling (2)
100...240 VAC or 125 VDC
90...264VAC or 88...156 VDC 85...264VAC or 105...150 VDC
47...63 Hz
0.4A
47...63 Hz or 360...440 Hz
0.4 A
26 W 24 W
24 VDC
1 A
No
No
1.1 A
Yes
Yes, with power optimization (3)
Redundancy (4)
References
No
TSX SUP 10
Yes
TSX SUP 1011
(1) Construction characteristics conforming to standards IEC 950, IEC 1131-2, ensuring the safety of the user at the 24 V output, in terms of isolation between primary and secondary, maximum overvoltage on the output wiring and protection via the grounding circuit.
(2) Option of paralleling 2 power supply outputs of the same type, to provide an output current greater than the maximum authorized by a single supply.
(3) For 2 modules providing a total current of 100 %, each module supplies 50 % of the total. This improves the lifetime of the products.
(4) Option of paralleling 2 power supply outputs of the same type, to provide an output current less than the maximum authorized by a single supply but ensuring availability of the output voltage even if one of the two modules becomes faulty.
___________________________________________________________________________
1/2
Presentation 1
Catalog (continued)
Selection table (continued)
Input characteristics
Nominal voltage
Limit values
Limit frequency
Nominal input current
Output characteristics
Useful power a output voltage
Nominal current
Auxiliary functions
SELV (1)
Paralleling (2)
Redundancy (4)
References
100...120 VAC or 200...240 VAC
85...132VAC or 170..264 VAC
47...63 Hz or 360...440 Hz
0.8 A 2.4 A
53 W
24VDC
2.2 A
120 W
5 A
5 A
240 W
10 A
Yes
Yes, with power optimization (3)
Yes No
TSX SUP 1021 TSX SUP 1051 TSX SUP 1101
(1) Construction characteristics conforming to standards IEC 950, IEC 1131-2, ensuring the safety of the user at the 24 V output, in terms of isolation between primary and secondary, maximum overvoltage on the output wiring and protection via the grounding circuit.
(2) Option of paralleling 2 power supply outputs of the same type, to provide an output current greater than the maximum authorized by a single supply.
(3) For 2 modules providing a total current of 100 %, each module supplies 50 % of the total. This improves the lifetime of the products.
(4) Option of paralleling 2 power supply outputs of the same type, to provide an output current less than the maximum authorized by a single supply but ensuring availability of the output voltage
1/3
E
E
1.2-2 Auxiliary functions
• Parallel operation with power optimization mode
The aim of paralleling is to use two modules with the same reference to provide an output current greater than the maximum authorized by a single power supply.
The total current is the sum of the currents supplied by all the power supplies.
Power optimization is an internal power supply system used to distribute currents equally between power supplies connected in parallel. The benefit obtained is a significant increase in the service life due to the distribution of power consumed.
- On TSX SUP 1011 / 1021 power supplies
Power optimization mode is obtained by setting the NOR/LSH switch located at the rear of the modules to the LSH position. The support must be dismantled in order to reach this switch. When the orange (LSH) indicator lamp is on, the mode is operational. (See section 2.3-1 for required connections).
The current supplied with two power supplies connected in parallel is limited to :
- 2 A with 2 TSX SUP 1011 power supply modules,
- 4 A with 2 TSX SUP 1021 power supply modules.
Using this mode reduces the precision of the output voltage: 24% ± 5% instead of
24 V ± 3% in normal mode.
The phase imbalance of the powers on load sharing can be a maximum of 25%.
- On TSX SUP 1051 / 1101 power supplies
Power optimization mode does not require a switch on these power supplies. The connections specified in the following sections must be made :
- 2.3-2 for the TSX SUP 1051 power supply module,
- 2.3-3 for the TSX SUP 1101 power supply unit,
The maximum current supplied with two power supplies connected in parallel is limited to :
- 10 A with 2 TSX SUP 1051 power supply modules,
- 20 A with 2 TSX SUP 1101 power supply units.
Using this mode does not affect the precision of the output voltage.
The phase imbalance of the powers on load sharing can be a maximum of 15%.
___________________________________________________________________________
1/4
Presentation 1
• Redundancy / safety on TSX SUP 1101 / 1021 power supplies
Principle :
To ensure availability of the currents required for the application, even if one of the power supplies becomes faulty.
In this case the two power supplies are connected in parallel, using the connections specified in section 2.3-1.
The power supplies are configured in power optimization mode.
Example : supply 1A with redundancy from the 2 TSX SUP 1011 power supplies.
Discrete inputs 1 and 2 of the PLC indicate the failure of one or other of the power supplies.
SUP
1011 24 V//
1 A
+ 24 V Discrete input 1 Fuse
0 V
E
SUP
1011 24 V//
+ 24 V
0 V
Discrete input 2
Load
Note :
TSX SUP 1051 and 1101 power supplies are not fitted with the diode in series, required for the redundancy function.
___________________________________________________________________________
1/5
E
1-3 AS-i power supplies
Special features :
As data and power are transmitted simultaneously on the same cable, data transmission must be filtered in relation to the power supply. For this reason the AS-i power supply integrates a decoupling filter which supports the maximum direct current provided by the power supply. The power supply gives a standardized impedance in relation to data transmission frequencies.
1.3-1 Catalog
Selection table
Input characteristics
Nominal voltage
Limit values
Limit frequency
Nominal input current
Output characteristics
Useful power a output voltages
Nominal current
Auxiliary functions
SELV safety (2)
Paralleling
Redundancy
References
100...120 VAC or 200...240 VAC
85...132 VAC or 170...264 VAC
47...63 Hz or 360...440 Hz
1.3 A 5 A
72 W
AS-i 30 VDC
2.4 A
230 W
AS-i 30 VDC
5 A (1)
24 VDC
7 A (1)
Yes
No
No
TSX SUP A02 TSX SUP A05
(1) Maximum current for each output, the sum of the powers is limited to 230 W
(2) Construction characteristics conforming to standards IEC 950, IEC 1131-2, ensuring the safety of the user at the 24 V output, in terms of isolation between primary and secondary, maximum overvoltage on the output wiring and protection via the grounding circuit.
___________________________________________________________________________
1/6
Presentation 1
1.4
Physical description
1.4-1 TBX SUP 10 power supply unit
1 Lamp indicating module power-up.
2 Screw terminal block for wiring the power supply voltages.
3 Identification label for the wiring terminals.
4 Module mounting lugs.
1.4-2 TSX SUP 1011/ 1021/ 1051/ A02 power supply modules
• TSX SUP 1011 module
1 Support plate for mounting the supply module directly on an AM1-DE200/
DP200 rail or an AM1-PA Telequick pre-slotted plate.
2 Display block comprising :
- A 24V indicator lamp (green) : lit if the internal and output voltages are established and correct.
1
- An LSH indicator lamp (orange) "power optimization mode" : lit if the supply is operating in parallel mode with power optimization.
3 Cover to protect the terminal block
4 Screw terminal block for connection to the :
- AC or DC supply,
- 24VDC output.
4
5 Slots for cable clamp.
5
6 "NOR / LSH" switch on the rear of the module to control the power optimization device.
• NOR position : normal operation without power optimization (default position),
• LSH position : operation with power optimization with power supplies in parallel.
6
2
3
___________________________________________________________________________
1/7
3
4
1
2
E
E
• TSX SUP 1021 / 1051 modules
1 Support plate for mounting the supply module directly on an AM1-DE200/
DP200 rail or an AM1-PA Telequick pre-slotted plate.
2 Display block comprising :
- A 24V indicator lamp (green) : lit if the internal and output voltages are correct.
- An LSH "power optimization mode" indicator lamp (orange), only on TSX
SUP 1021 : lit if the supply is operating in parallel mode with power optimization.
3 Cover to protect the terminal block
1
4 Screw terminal block for connection to the :
- AC or DC supply,
- 24VDC output.
5 Slots for cable clamp.
6 110/220 V voltage selector. On delivery, the selector is set to 220.
4
5
7 "NOR / LSH" switch on the rear of the module to control the power optimization device. This switch is only present on the TSX SUP 1021 module
• NOR position : normal operation without power optimization (default position),
• LSH position : operation with power optimization with power supplies in parallel.
6
7
2
3
___________________________________________________________________________
1/8
• TSX SUP A02 module
1 Support plate for mounting the supply module directly on an AM1-DE200/
DP200 rail or an AM1-PA Telequick pre-slotted plate.
2 Display block comprising :
- An AS-i indicator lamp (green) : lit if the internal and output voltages are correct.
3 Cover to protect the terminal block
4 Screw terminal block for connection to the :
- AC supply
- AS-i 30 VDC output.
5 Slot for cable clamp.
6 110/220 V voltage selector. On delivery, the selector is set to 220.
Presentation 1
1
2
3
E
4
5
6
___________________________________________________________________________
1/9
1.4-3 TSX SUP 1101 and TSX SUP A05 power supply unit
2
E 7
1
5
7
4
1 Display block comprising an ON indicator lamp (orange) : lit if the power supply is on.
2 Display block comprising :
- a 24V indicator lamp (green) : lit if the 24 VDC output voltage is present and correct,
- an AS-i indicator lamp (green : lit if the AS-i 30 VDC output voltage is present and correct. Indicator lamp present only on the TSX SUP A05 unit.
3 Cover to protect the terminal blocks
4 Screw terminal block for connection to the AC supply
5 Screw terminal block for connection of the 24 VDC and AS-i 30 VDC output voltage to TSX SUP A05
6 Slots for cable clamp
7 Four fixing holes for M6 screws.
3
6
___________________________________________________________________________
1/10
Presentation 1
1.4-4 Support plate
Each TSX SUP 10 i
1 and TSX SUP A02 power supply module comes with a support plate for fixing the power supply : either on an AM1-DE200 or AM1-DP200 rail, or an
AM1-PA Telequick pre-slotted plate.
Each support plate can take : one TSX SUP 1021, TSX SUP 1051 or TSX SUP A02 module, or one or two TSX SUP 1011 modules.
1 Three Ø 5.5 holes for mounting the support plate on a panel or AM1-PA preslotted plate at 140 mm centers (fixing center for TSX 37 PLCs).
2 Four Ø 6.5 holes for mounting the support plate on a panel or AM1-PA preslotted plate at 88.9 mm centers (fixing center for TSX 57 PLCs).
3 Two M4 holes for fixing one or more
TSX SUP 1011/1021/1051/A02 power supply modules.
4 Slots for anchoring pins located at the bottom and rear of the module.
1
3
2
2
4
E
1
Notes :
• Each of these power supply modules can also be mounted on a TSX RKY iii rack replacing another module, with the exception of position PS, which must be used by a TSX PSY iii
power supply module supplying power to the rack modules.
• The following operations require the module to be removed from the support plate :
- setting the "NOR/LSH" switch to LSH,
- mounting the plate on a panel or a pre-slotted AM1-PA plate,
- mounting the module on a TSX RKY iii
rack.
___________________________________________________________________________
1/11
E
___________________________________________________________________________
1/12
2 Installation / Connections
2.1
TBX SUP 10 dimensions/mounting/connections
• Dimensions / mounting
74 100
113
The TBX SUP 10 power supply unit should be mounted vertically to ensure optimal air flow within the unit.
It can be mounted on a panel, on an AM1-PA Telequick pre-slotted plate or AM1-DE200 /
DP200 rail.
• Connections
L
AC/DC
IN N
24VDC
OUT +
E
Fu (1)
+ or
Note
Primary : if the module is supplied with 100/240 V c , the phase and the neutral must be respected when wiring. Conversely, if the module is supplied with 125 V a , it is not necessary to respect the polarities.
Secondary : the - 0 V terminal must be connected to the ground at the output of the power supply module.
!
To ensure the safety of personnel, connect the ground terminal of the module to the protective ground with a green/yellow wire.
(1) External protection fuse on phase : 1A time-delayed 250 V for a single power supply.
___________________________________________________________________________
2/1
E
2.2
Dimensions/mounting of process and AS-i power supplies
2.2-1 TSX SUP 1011 / 1021 / 1051 / A02 power supply
TSX SUP 1011/1021/1051/A02 power supply modules Mounting support
16 8.72
SUP 1011 SUP 1021/1051/ A02
56
4
120.2
Dimensions in millimeters
36.5
73
17.72
20
40
73.43
TSX SUP 1011/1021/1051/A02 power supply modules can be mounted in the following ways :
Mounting on AM1-DE200 or AM1-DP200 rail or AM1-PA plate
Each power supply module comes mounted on a support for this type of mounting.
(1) 147.2 mm (AM1-DE200)
139.7 mm (AM1-DP200)
Mounting on an AM1-D iiii rail
1 Check that the module is mounted on the support
2 Mount the module + support on the rail
147.2 (1)
136.2 (2)
2/2
(2) 136.7 mm (AM1-PA)
Mounting on an AM1-PA plate
1 Dismantle the module from the support
2 Mount the support on the
AM1-PA plate
3 Mount the module on the
Installation / Connections 2
Mounting the module on the support
Each power supply module has an integral support for mounting it directly on a DIN rail.
The support can take 1 or 2 TSX SUP 1011 power supply modules or 1 TSX SUP 1021/
1051/A02 power supply module.
1 Fix the module pins in the slots on the lower part of the support.
2 Tilt the module until it touches the support.
3 Tighten the screw on the upper part of the module to secure it to the support.
1 TSX SUP 1011 module
2 TSX SUP 1011 modules
1 TSX SUP 1021/1051/ A02 module
E
___________________________________________________________________________
2/3
E
Mounting on TSX RKY ii rack
TSX SUP 1011/1021/1051/A02 power supply modules can be mounted in any of the positions on a TSX RKY
ii
rack with the exception of position PS which is reserved for the rack power supply module. If this is the case, the support is not used and must be removed.
Support TSX SUP 10.1/A02
1
2
Support
4
TSX SUP 10.1/A02
5
3
TSX RKY
ii
TSX SUP
10.1/A02
TSX RKY
ii
TSX SUP
10.1/A02
Note:
The TSX PSY
iii
rack power supply module must be in position PS in order to supply power to the rack modules.
___________________________________________________________________________
2/4
Installation / Connections 2
2.2-2 TSX SUP 1101 / A05 power supplies
TSX SUP 1101 and TSX SUP A05 power supply units can be mounted on a panel, an
AM1 - PA plate or a DIN rail.
• Mounting on a panel : drilling plan (dimensions in millimeters)
4 fixing holes (1)
E
8.75
207.3
224.8
8.75
(1) The diameter of the fixing holes must be large enough to take M6 screws.
• Mounting on a Telequick AM1-PA pre-slotted plate (dimensions in millimeters)
Fix the power supply unit using four M6x25 screws + washers and AF1-EA6 clip nuts
AF1-EA6
135
16 8.75
207.3
224.8
8.75
• Mounting on a DIN rail, width 35 mm (dimensions in millimeters)
Fix the power supply unit using four M6x25 screws + washers and AF1-CF56 1/4 turn sliding nuts
AF1-CF56 AM1-ED
(1) 207.3 mm
___________________________________________________________________________
2/5
2.2-3 Summary of mounting options
E
Power supply references
Telequick
AM1-PA plate
AM1-DE200/DP200 central DIN rail
TBX SUP TSX SUP TSX SUP TSX SUP TSX SUP TSX SUP TSX SUP
10 1011 1021 1051 1101 A02 A05 i i i i i i i i i i i i
AM1-ED DIN rail
140 mm center
(TSX 37 PLC)
AM1-ED DIN rail
88.9 mm center
(TSX 57 PLC)
TSX RKY ii
TSX 57 rack i i i i i i i i i i i i i i
___________________________________________________________________________
2/6
Installation / Connections 2
2.3
Connections for 24 VDC process power supplies
2.3-1 TSX SUP 1011/1021 power supplies
Normal connection
Module 1
Paralleling
+ 24 V
0 V
+
24 V 1 A
–
+ 24 V
0 V
Fu Fu
L
N
L
N
+ 24 V
– 0 V
E
Module 2
Fu = External protection fuse on phase
(Fu) : 4A time-delayed 250 V.
(1) 100...240VAC on TSX SUP 1011
100...120 / 200..240VAC on TSX SUP 1021
(2) 125 VDC, only on TSX SUP 1011
+ 24 V
0 V
L
N
Fu
Connection rules
Primary : if the module is supplied with 100/240 V c , it is necessary to respect the phase and the neutral when wiring. Conversely, if the module is supplied with 125 V a , it is not necessary to respect the polarities.
!
To ensure the safety of personnel, connect the ground terminal of the module to the protective ground with a green/yellow wire.
The power supply terminal block is protected by a cover which allows access to the wiring terminals. Wires exit vertically downwards. The wires can be held by a cable clamp.
In order to ensure 24 V SELV isolation, use wires with :
• An operating voltage
≥
600 VAC and a cross-section of 1.5 mm 2 for connecting to the
AC supply,
• An operating voltage
≥
300 VAC and a cross-section of 2.5 mm 2 for 24 V outputs and the ground.
___________________________________________________________________________
2/7
E
2.3-2 TSX SUP 1051 power supply
Normal connection
Module 1
Lsh
Paralleling
Lsh
+ 24 V + 24 V
0 V
+ 24 V
– 0 V 0 V
Fu
L
N
L
N
Fu = External protection fuse on phase
(Fu) : 4A time-delayed 250 V.
Module 2
Lsh
+ 24 V
0 V
L
N
Fu
Fu
+ 24 V
– 0 V
Connection rules
Primary : respect the phase and the neutral when wiring.
!
To ensure the safety of personnel, connect the ground terminal of the module to the protective ground with a green/yellow wire.
The power supply terminal block is protected by a cover which allows access to the wiring terminals. Wires exit vertically downwards. The wires can be held by a cable clamp.
In order to ensure 24 V SELV isolation, use wires with :
• An operating voltage
≥
600 VAC and a cross-section of 1.5 mm 2 for connecting to the
AC supply,
• An operating voltage
≥
300 VAC and a cross-section of 2.5 mm 2 for 24 V outputs and the ground.
___________________________________________________________________________
2/8
Installation / Connections 2
2.3-3 TSX SUP 1101 power supply
Normal connection input terminal block output terminal block
Sel
Sel
L
N
Fu (2)
Sel
Sel
L
N
Fu (2)
Lsh
+ 24 V
+ 24 V
0 V
0 V
+ 24 V
– 0 V
Connection to a c 200..240 V supply
Paralleling input terminal blocks
Module 1
Sel
Sel
(1)
L
N
Fu (2)
Connection to a c 100..120 V supply
Module 1
Connection to a a 24V output output terminal blocks
Lsh
+ 24 V
+ 24 V
0 V
0 V
E
Module 2
Sel
Sel
(1)
L
N
Fu (2)
Module 2
Lsh
+ 24 V
+ 24 V
0 V
0 V
+ 24 V
– 0 V
(1) Connection to be performed if the power supply is provided by c 100...120 V
(2) External protection fuse on phase (Fu) : 6.3A time-delayed 250 V.
___________________________________________________________________________
2/9
E
Connection rules
Primary : respect the phase and the neutral when wiring.
!
To ensure the safety of personnel, connect the ground terminal of the module to the protective ground with a green/yellow wire.
The power supply terminal block is protected by a cover which allows access to the wiring terminals. Wires exit vertically downwards. The wires can be held by a cable clamp.
Secondary :
In order to ensure 24 V SELV isolation, use wires with :
• An operating voltage
≥
300 VAC and a cross-section of 1.5 mm 2 or 2.5 mm 2 for connecting to the AC supply,
• An operating voltage
≥
300 VAC and a cross-section of 2.5 mm 2 for 24 V outputs and the ground.
• Wire the two 24V terminals in parallel or share the load on the two 24V outputs if the total current supplied is greater than 5A.
___________________________________________________________________________
2/10
Installation / Connections 2
2.4
Connections for AS-i power supplies
2.4-1 TSX SUP A02 power supply
Shd
AS-i +
AS-i
OUT
(1)
+
30 VDC AS-i/2.4 A
L
N
IN
Fu
100...120/200...240 VAC
(1) Shielded AS-i cable screen for atmospheres subject to interference
Fu = External protection fuse on phase (Fu) : 4A time-delayed 250 V.
E
Connection diagram
The TSX SUP A02 power supply module is used to supply power to the AS-i bus and the slaves connected to it (30 VDC/2.4A output).
TSX 57
TSX SUP A02
TSX SAY 100
AS-i master
AS-i bus
30 VDC AS-i bus
100...120/
200...240 VAC
___________________________________________________________________________
2/11
E
Connection rules
Primary : respect the phase and the neutral when wiring.
!
To ensure the safety of personnel, connect the ground terminal of the module to the protective ground with a green/yellow wire.
The power supply terminal block is protected by a cover which allows access to the wiring terminals. Wires exit vertically downwards. The wires can be held by a cable clamp.
In order to ensure 24 V SELV isolation, use wires with :
• An operating voltage
≥
600 VAC and a cross-section of 1.5 mm 2 for connecting to the
AC supply,
• An operating voltage
≥
300 VAC and a cross-section of 2.5 mm 2 for 24 V outputs and the ground.
A shielded cable is only required for the AS-i bus if the installation is subject to high EMC
(Electromagnetic Compatibility) interference.
___________________________________________________________________________
2/12
Installation / Connections 2
2.4-2 TSX SUP A05 power supply input terminal block output terminal block
Sel
Sel
L
N
Fu (2)
Sel
Sel
L
N
(1)
Fu (2)
+ 24 V
+ 24 V
0 V
0 V
Shd
AS-i +
AS-i –
(3)
+
–
24 VDC/7 A
+
–
30 V AS-i/5 A
Connection to a c
200..240 V supply
Connection to a c
100..120 V supply
Connection to a a 24V output and a
30 V AS-i
(1) Connection to be performed if the power supply is provided by c
100...120 V
(2) External protection fuse on phase (Fu) : 6.3A time-delayed 250 V.
(3) Shielded AS-i cable screen for atmospheres subject to interference
Connection diagram
The TSX SUP A05 power supply unit is used to supply power to the AS-i bus and the slaves connected to it (30 V/5A output). It also has an auxiliary power supply (24 VDC/7A) for sensors /actuators which are high current consumers; a black AS-i ribbon cable is used for this purpose.
TSX 57
E
TSX SUP A05
30 VDC
24 VDC
100...120/
200...240 VAC
TSX SAY 100
AS-i master
AS-i bus
AS-i bus
___________________________________________________________________________
2/13
E
Connection rules
Primary : respect the phase and the neutral when wiring.
!
To ensure the safety of personnel, connect the ground terminal of the module to the protective ground with a green/yellow wire.
The " c power supply" and " a 24V and AS-i 30 VDC output voltage" terminal blocks are protected by a cover which allows access to the wiring terminals. Wires exit vertically downwards. The wires can be held by a cable clamp.
In order to ensure 24 V SELV isolation, use wires with :
• An operating voltage
≥
300 VAC and a cross-section of 1.5 mm 2 or 2.5 mm 2 for connecting to the AC supply,
• An operating voltage
≥
300 VAC and a cross-section of 2.5 mm 2 for 24V outputs and the ground.
• Wire the two 24V terminals in parallel or share the load on the two 24V outputs if the total current supplied is greater than 5A.
A shielded cable is only required for the AS-i bus if the installation is subject to high EMC
(Electromagnetic Compatibility) interference.
As this power supply can supply a very large current, its positioning on the bus is very important. If the power supply if positioned at one end of the bus, it provides its nominal current (for example 5A) for the whole bus, and the voltage drop at the end of the bus is thus proportional to this 5A. If it is positioned halfway along the bus, the voltage drop at the end of the bus is only proportional to 2.5A, if consumption on each of the sections of the bus is equal.
2.5 A
AS-i power supply
2.5 A
If none of the slaves use a large amount of energy, it is preferable to position the power supply in the center of the installation. Conversely, if the installation has one or more slaves which use a large amount of energy, it is advisable to position the power supply near to these slaves.
Note : If actuators which use a large amount of energy are present (contactors, solenoid valve coils, etc), the TSX SUP A05 power supply can provide the auxiliary 24 VDC, isolated from the AS-i line.
___________________________________________________________________________
2/14
Installation / Connections 2
2.4-3 General recommendations
When the AS-i yellow cable is installed, it must be placed in a cable ducting which is separate from the power cable ducting. It is also advisable to lay it flat and not to twist it in order to optimize the symmetry between the two wires of the AS-i cable. The installation of the AS-i cable in a plan connected to the electrical potential of the machine (for example the frame), meets the requirements of the EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility) directive.
The end of the cable, or ends for a star connection, must be protected by :
• connecting them to a tap link tee,
• not allowing them to exit the last connection point.
Important
The energy on the AS-i bus must be properly distributed so that each product on the bus is supplied with sufficient voltage to ensure correct operation. To do this, the following rules must be respected :
- Rule 1
Select the power supply rating suitable for the total consumption of the AS-i segment.
The ratings available are 2.4 A (TSX SUP A02) and 5 A (TSX SUP A05). A rating of
2.4 A is usually sufficient for an average consumption of 65 mA per slave for a segment comprising a maximum of 31 slaves.
- Rule 2
To minimize voltage drops and reduce the cost of the cable, it is necessary to determine the optimum position for the power supply on the bus, as well as the minimum cross-section suitable for distributing the power.
The voltage drop should not exceed 3V between the master and the last slave on the bus. To this end, the table below gives the information required to select the crosssection of the AS-i cable.
AS-i cable cross-section
Linear resistance
Voltage drop for
1 A on 100 meters
0.75 mm 2
52 m
Ω
/ meter
5.2 V
1.5 mm 2
27 m
Ω
/ meter
2.7 V
2.5 mm 2
16 m
Ω
/ meter
1.6 V
The 1.5 mm 2 cable is suitable for the majority of applications, this is the AS-i bus standard model (cable offered in the SCHNEIDER catalog). Cables with a smaller cross-section may be used if the sensors use very little energy.
Note :
The maximum length without a repeater for all the segments of the AS-i bus is 100 meters. The length of cable connecting a slave to a passive splitter block must be taken into account.
E
___________________________________________________________________________
2/15
E
___________________________________________________________________________
2/16
3 Characteristics
3.1
Electrical characteristics
3.1-1 Process power supplies : TBX SUP 10 and TSX SUP 1011
Process power supplies TBX SUP 10
24 V / 1A
TSX SUP 1011
24V / 1A
Primary
Nominal input voltage
Input limit voltage
V
V
Line frequency H z
Nominal input current (U = 100V) A
Max inrush current at 100 V A
(1)
It max on activation (1) at 240 V A at 100 V A s at 240 V A s c 100... 240 a
125 c
90...264
a 88...156
47... 63
0.4
3
30
0.03
0.07
c 100... 240 a
125 c
85...264
a 105...150
47...63/360...440
0.4
37
75
0.034
0.067
I 2 t max on activation (1)
Power factor
Harmonic 3
Full load efficiency
Secondary
Useful power (2) at 100 V A 2 s at 240 V A
Nominal output current (2)
2
%
W
A s
2
2
0.6
10% ( ϕ
= 0° and 180°)
> 75
24
1
0.63
2.6
0.6
10% ( ϕ
= 0° and 180°)
> 75
26 (30)
1.1
Output voltage / specified at 25°C
Residual ripple (peak to peak)
Max HF noise (peak to peak)
Permitted duration of AC supply micro-break (3)
Protection Short-circuits against and overloads
V mV mV ms
24 ± 5 % 24 ± 3 %
240
240
150
240
≤
10 in c
≤
1 in a
≤
10 in c
≤
1 in a continuous fallback to 0 and automatic reautomatic reactivation activation when error disappears
Paralleling
Overvoltages V peak limiting U > 36 no no
8 peak limiting U > 36 yes with power optimization yes Serial connection
Dissipated power W 9
(1) Values on initial activation, at 25°C. These elements should be taken into account when starting up for sizing protection devices.
(2) Useful power and output current at an ambient temperature of 60°C. Value between () = useful power in a ventilated enclosure or within a temperature range of 0...+40°C.
3/1
E
E
3.1-2 Process power supplies : TSX SUP 1021/1051/1101
Process power supplies TSX SUP 1021
24 V / 2A
TSX SUP 1051
24 V / 5A
TSX SUP 1101
24 V / 10A
Primary
Nominal input voltage
Input limit voltage
Line frequency
Nominal input current (U=100V)
Max inrush current
(1)
It max on activation (1) at 100 V at 240 V
V
V
Hz
A
A
A at 100 V As at 240 V As
I 2 t max on activation (1)
Power factor
Harmonic 3
Full load efficiency
Secondary
Useful power (2)
Nominal output current (2) A at 100 V A 2 s at 240 V A 2 s
%
W
2.2
0.8
< 30
< 30
0.06
0.03
4
4
0.6
> 75
53(60)
5 c
100...120/200...240
c
85...132/170...264
47...63 / 360...440
2.4
51
51
0.17
0.17
8.6
8.6
0.52
10% ( ϕ
= 0° and 180°)
120
10
> 80
5
75
51
0.17
0.17
8.5
8.5
0.5
240
Output voltage (0°C - 60°C) V 24 ± 3 % 24 ± 1 %
Residual ripple (peak to peak)
Max HF noise (peak to peak) mV mV
150
240
200
Permitted duration of AC supply m s micro-break (3)
>
Start time on resistive load s < 1
Protection Short-circuits against and overloads fallback to 0 and automatic reactivation when error disappears
Paralleling
Internal overvoltages V peak limiting U > 36
≤
10 current limit peak limiting U > 32 yes, with power optimization
Serial connection yes
Dissipated power W 18 30 60
(1) Values on initial activation, at 25°C. These elements should be taken into account when starting up for sizing protection devices.
(2) Useful power and output current at an ambient temperature of 60°C. Value between () = useful power in a ventilated enclosure or within a temperature range of 0...+40°C.
3/2
Characteristics 3
3.1-3 AS-i power supplies : TSX SUP A02 /A05
AS-i power supplies TSX SUP A02
30V AS-i / 2.4A
Primary
Nominal input voltage
Input limit voltage
Line frequency
V c
100...120/200...240
V c
85...132/170...264
Hz 47...63/360...440
Nominal input current (U = 100V)
Max inrush current at 100 V
A
A
1.3
30
(1)
It max on activation (1) at 240 V A at 100 V As at 240 V As
30
0.06
0.03
TSX SUP A05
24V / 7A & 30V AS-i/5A c
100...120/200...240
c
85...132/170...264
47...63/360...440
5
50
50
0.17
0.17
I 2 t max on activation (1)
Power factor
Harmonic 3
Full load efficiency
Secondary
Useful peak power
Nominal peak current at 100 V A 2 s at 240 V A 2
%
W
AS-i 30 V output A
24V output A s
4
4
0.6
10% ( ϕ
= 0° and 180°)
> 75
72 (84)
2.4 (2.8) (2)
—
(2)
8.5
8.5
0.51
10% ( ϕ
= 0° and 180°)
> 80
230
5
7
(3)
(3) (4)
(3) (4)
Output voltage V
Global variation (-10°C to + 60°C) V
30 (AS-i)
29.5 to 31.6
24
±3%
30 (AS-i)
29.5 to 31.6
Ripple (from 10 to 500 kHz)
Ripple (from 0 to 10 kHz)
Start time on resistive load
Permitted duration of AC supply micro-break (5)
Protection Short-circuits against and overloads mV mV s ms
50
300
< 2 (with C = 15000 µF)
≤
10
200
240
50
300
< 2 (with C = 15000 µF)
≤
10
Overvoltages
Dissipated power
V
W fallback to 0 and automatic reactivation when error disappears peak limiting U > 36
24 current limit on each output peak limiting U > 36
60
(1) Values on initial activation, at 25°C. These elements should be taken into account when starting up for sizing protection devices.
(2) Useful power and output current at an ambient temperature of 60°C. Value between () = transitory useful power.
(3) Useful power and output current for a maximum ambient temperature of 55°C, if product index II = 01. (60°C if product index II > 01).
(4) See the distribution diagram for current on each output on the next page.
3/3
E
E
Diagram of currents available on AS-i 30 V and 24V outputs of the TSX SUP A05 power supply unit
I OUT 24 VDC (A)
The maximum power delivered by the power supply is 230 W. If the consumption is 5 A on the AS-i 30 V, the possible flow on the
24 V output is then only 3 A (see diagram opposite).
4
3
2
1
7
6
5
5,8
4,5
3A
I OUT
AS-i (A)
1 2 3 4 5
___________________________________________________________________________
3/4
Characteristics 3
3.2
Physical and environmental characteristics
Process and AS-i power supply modules / units
Connection to screw terminals
TBX SUP 10 TSX SUP 1011 / 1021
TSX SUP 1051 / 1101
TSX SUP A02/A05
1 terminal per output 1011/1021/1051/A02: 1 terminal/output
1101: 2 terminals/output
A05: 2 terminals/output (24 VDC)
1 x 2.5
1 terminal/output (AS-i 30 VDC)
2x1.5 with cable end or 1 x 2.5
Max. capacity / terminal mm 2
Temperatures :
Storage
Operation
° C
° C
Relative humidity
Cooling
User safety
%
%
-25 to +70
+5 to +55
_
-25 to +70
0 to +60 (TSX SUP 1011/1021/1051/1101)
-10 to + 60 (TSX SUP A02/A05) (1)
5-95
By natural convection
SELV (EN 60950 and IEC1131-2)
Dielectric strength :
Primary / secondary V rms
Primary / ground V rms
Secondary / Ground V rms
Insulation resistance:
Primary / secondary M
Ω
Primary / ground M
Ω
Leakage current
Electrostatic discharge immunity
Fast electrical transients
Electromagnetic field influence
Electromagnetic interference rejection
50/60Hz- 1min
1500
1500
500
≥
100
≥
100
I
≤
3.5 mA (EN 60950)
6 KV per contact / 8 KV in the air
(conforms to IEC 1000-4-2)
2 KV (serial mode and common mode on input and output)
10 V/m (80 MHz to 1 GHz)
3500
2200
500
(conforms to FCC 15-A and EN 55022 class A)
Test conditions : U and I nominal, resistive load, cables: 1 meter horizontal, 0.8 meter vertical
Shock wave
Vibrations (2)
Degree of protection
MTBF
Service life at 40°C at 50°C
H
H
Input : 4 kV MC, 2 KV MS Outputs : 2 kV MF, 0.5 kV MS
(conforms to IEC 1000-4-5)
1 mm 3 Hz to 13.2 Hz 1 g 57 Hz to 150 Hz (2g TSX SUP A02/A05)
(conforms to IEC 68-2-6, FC test)
IP 20.5
IP 20.5, terminal block IP 21.5
100 000
30 000 (at nominal voltage and at 80% of the nominal power)
(1) -10°C to + 55°C for the TSX SUP A05 power supply unit with product index II = 01
-10°C to + 60°C for the TSX SUP A05 power supply unit with product index II > 01
(2) conforms to IEC 68-2-6, FC test with module or unit mounted on plate or panel
___________________________________________________________________________
3/5
E
E
___________________________________________________________________________
3/6
Index
Symbols
24 VDC pvocess power supplies
Paralleling mode
Power optimization
Redundancy / Safety
Support plate
TBX SUP 10
TSX SUP 1011
TSX SUP 1021 / 1051
TSX SUP 1101
A
Addressing discrete I/O
Addressing discrete I/O channels
Addressing racks
Alarm relay management
Alarm relay on power supply
Altitude
Ambient temperature
Application memory
Application-specific channels
AS-i power supplies
TSX SUP A02
TSX SUP A05
AUX terminal port
B
Blocking faults
Built-in protection
Bus X extension
cables
Bus X remote rackmaster module :
TSX REY 200
Configuring the module
Connections
Diagnostics
Installing the module
Maximum distances
A 5/9
C
Characteristics
TBX SUP 10
TSX SUP 1011
TSX SUP 1021/1051/1101
TSX SUP A02 /A05
Characteristics of discrete I/O modules
TSX DEY 08D2/16D2
TSX DEY 16A2
TSX DEY 16A2/16A3/16A4/16A5
TSX DEY 16D3
TSX DEY 16FK
TSX DEY 32D2K/TSX DEY 64D2K B1 4/5
TSX DEY 32D3K
TSX DMY 28FK
TSX DMY 28RFK
TSX DSY 08R4D
TSX DSY 08R5 / 16R5
TSX DSY 08R5A
TSX DSY 08S5
TSX DSY 16S4
TSX DSY 16S5
TSX DSY 32T2K/TSX DSY 64T2K B1 4/13
Characteristics of fan modules
Checking discrete I/O connections
Inputs
Outputs
Cold start
Compatibility of sensors v inputs and preactuator
Compatibility preactuator/discrete outputs
Connections
TBX SUP 10
TSX SUP 1011/1021
TSX SUP 1051
TSX SUP 1101
TSX SUP A02
TSX SUP A05
Connection of TSX PSY iiii power
supply modules
Control events
Cyclic execution
B
___________________________________________________________________________
P/1
P
D
Dimensions
TSX SUP 1011 / 1021 / 1051 / A02 E 2/2
Dimensions of fan modules A 10/3
Discrete I/O connections B1 5/1
Discrete I/O display and
Discrete I/O module connections B1 5/4
TSX DEY 16A2 / 16A3 / 16A4 /
TSX DEY 32D2K B1 5/12, B1 5/15
TSX DSY 08S5 / 16S5 / 16S4 B1 5/23
Display of module status C 1/2
Application-specific modules C 1/3
Display of TSX PSY
iiii
E
Event management B1 2/5, B1 2/6
F
Fitting/removing
PCMCIA memory extension card A 6/21
RAM memory backup battery A 6/18
G
General wiring rules for discrete I/O B1 3/2
I
Inserting and removing discrete I/O
Inserting the PCMCIA memory card A 6/21
Inserting TSX PSY iiii
Installation
Installing a PCX 57 processor A 6/7
Installing discrete I/O modules B1 1/10
Installing the battery on a PCMCIA
Installing the internal RAM memory
Installing TSX PSY iiii
power
P
___________________________________________________________________________
P/2
Index
Interlocking circuit for power supply
Internal RAM
Internal RAM memory backup battery
L
Labeling discrete I/O modules
Latching
Line terminator
Loading a "backup"
Loading the operating system (OS)
M
Marking module positions
Marking racks
MAST master task
Micro-breaks
Module addresses
Module diagnostics
Module states
Initial state
Module disconnected
Module failure
Module self-tests
Module used
Monitoring preactuator voltage
Monitoring presence of the terminal block
Monitoring sensor voltage
Monitoring short-circuit and overload B1 2/9
Monitoring tasks
Mounting
TSX SUP 10
TSX SUP 1011 / 1021 / 1051 / A02
TSX SUP 1101 / A05
Mounting fan modules
Mounting modules
Mounting racks
Mounting screw terminal blocks A 6/5, A 6/7
Multitask application structure
N
Non-blocking faults
Linked to program execution
Linked to the I/O
O
Output fallback
P
PCMCIA memory extension cards
PCX 57 dimensions
PCX 57 processor
Dimensions
Mounting
Precautions to be taken during installation
Preliminary operations prior to installation
PCX 57 processors
Display
General characteristics
Mounting / Installation
Physical description
Periodic execution
PLC states
PLC error
PLC not configured
PLC running
PLC self-tests
PLC software fault or HALT
PLC stopped
PLC station
Positioning the racks
Power consumption
Power supply interlocking
Power supply RESET button
Process diagnostics
Process power supply mounting
TBX SUP 10
TSX SUP 1011 / 1021 / 1051 / A02
TSX SUP 1101 / A05
B
___________________________________________________________________________
P/3
P
Processing after
Action on the power supply RESET
Action on the processor RESET
Insertion/removal of a PCMCIA
Programmable input filtering B1 2/3
Protection of relay output contacts B1 2/11
R
RAM memory backup battery A 6/18
Recommendations for use on
Retrieving from a "backup" A 8/15
S
Selecting a power supply module A 4/13
Single task application structure A 8/3
T
General characteristics A 3/25
Operating modes B2 2/2, B2 2/4
TSX Premium performance A 8/16
TSX PSY iiii
TSX PSY iiii power supply
TSX PSY power supply
TSX RKA 02 protective cover A 2/17
TSX RKY
iii
U
W
P
___________________________________________________________________________
P/4
VOLUME 2
Counting : TSX CTY 2A / 4A / 2C modules
Installation,
Counting and
Motion Control
Axis Control : TSX CAY 21 / 22 / 33 / 41 /42 modules
Stepper Motor Control : TSX CFY 11 / 21 modules
A
B
C
D
VOLUME 3
Installation
Communication,
Bus and Network
Interfaces
VOLUME 4
Installation
Analog,
Weighing
VOLUME 1
Installation
Processors and
Discrete I/O
VOLUME 2
P
___________________________________________________________________________
General safety advice for users
____________________________________________________________________________
1 General
This manual is intended for personnel technically qualified to install, operate and maintain the products which are described herein. It contains all the necessary information for correct use of the products. However, for advanced use of our products please contact your nearest sales office for additional information.
The contents of this manual are not contractual and cannot under any circumstance extend or restrict contract warranty clauses.
2 Qualification of personnel
Only qualified personnel are authorized to install, operate or maintain the products. Any work performed by unqualified personnel or non-observance of the safety instructions in this document or attached to the equipment may risk the safety of personnel and/or cause irreparable damage to equipment. The following personnel may be regarded as being "Qualified" :
• those involved with application design. Design office personnel familiar with control system safety concepts (for example, design engineers, etc),
• those involved with equipment installation. Individuals who are familiar with the installation, connection and startup of control system equipment (for example installers or wiring technicians working during the installation phase, technicians setting up the equipment, etc),
• those involved with operation. Personnel trained to operate and manage control system equipment (for example, operators, etc),
• those performing preventive or corrective maintenance. Personnel who are trained and experienced in the adjustment and repair of control system equipment (for example, installation engineers, after sales service engineers, etc).
3 Warnings
Warnings serve to prevent specific risks encountered by personnel and/or equipment. They are indicated in the documentation and on the products by different warning symbols, according to the severity of the risk :
Danger or Caution
Indicates that not following instructions or ignoring the warning may cause serious personal injury, death and/or serious damage to equipment.
Warning or Important or
!
Indicates that not following a specific instruction may lead to minor injury and/or damage to equipment.
Note or Comment
Highlights important information relating to the product, its operation or its accompanying documentation.
___________________________________________________________________________
1
General safety advice for users
___________________________________________________________________________
4 Conformity of use
The products described in this manual conform to the European Directives (*) to which they are subject (CE marking). However, they can only be used correctly in the context of the applications for which they are intended (described in the various documents) and when connected to approved third party products.
As a general rule, if all handling, transport and storage specifications are observed, and all instructions for installation, operation and maintenance are followed, the products will be used correctly, with no danger to personnel or equipment.
(*) EMC and LV Directives, concerning Electromagnetic Compatibility and Low Voltage.
5 Installing and setting up equipment
It is important to observe the following rules when installing and starting up equipment. In addition, if the installation includes digital links, it is essential to follow the basic wiring rules given in the manual
"Electromagnetic Compatibility of industrial Networks and Fielbuses", reference TSX DG KBLE, or in manual TSX DR NET, part C.
• safety instructions must be followed meticulously. These instructions are in the documentation or on the equipment being installed and set up.
• the type of equipment defines the way in which it should be installed :
- a flush-mountable device (for example, an operator terminal or a cell controller) must be flushmounted,
- a device which is to be built in (for example, PLC) must be placed in a cabinet or enclosure,
- the casing of a laptop or portable device (for example, a programming terminal or a notebook) must remain closed,
• if the device is permanently connected,
- the upstream installation must conform to standard IEC 1131-2 overvoltage category 2,
- in addition, its electrical installation must include a device to isolate it from the power supply and a circuit-breaker to protect it against overcurrents and isolation faults. If this is not the case, the power socket must be grounded and be easily accessed. In all cases, the device must be connected to the protective mechanical ground PG using green/yellow wires
(NFC 15 100 - IEC 60 364-5-51) .
• low voltage circuits (even though they are low voltage) must be connected to the protective ground so that dangerous voltages can be detected.
• before a device is powered up, its nominal voltage must be checked to ensure that it has been adjusted to conform with the supply voltage.
• if the device is supplied with 24 or 48 VDC, the low voltage circuits must be protected. Only use power supplies which conform to the standards currently in force.
• check that the supply voltages remain within the tolerance ranges defined in the technical characteristics of the devices.
• all measures must be taken to ensure that any power return (immediate, warm or cold) does not lead to a dangerous state which may risk personnel or the installation.
• emergency stop devices must remain effective in all the device's operating modes, even those which are abnormal (for example, when a wire becomes disconnected). Resetting these devices must not cause uncontrolled or improper restarts.
• cables which carry signals must be located where they do not cause interference with the control system functions by capacitive, inductive or electromagnetic interference.
___________________________________________________________________________
2
General safety advice for users
____________________________________________________________________________
• control system equipment and their control devices must be installed in such a way as to ensure that they are protected against unintentional operation.
• appropriate safety measures must be taken for the inputs and outputs, to prevent improper states in the control system device, if no signal is received.
6 Equipment operation
The operational safety and availability of a device is its ability to avoid the appearance of faults and to minimize their effects if they occur.
A system is said to be fail-safe if the appearance of faults never causes a dangerous situation.
A fault inside the control system is known as :
• passive, if it results in an open output circuit (no command is sent to the actuators).
• active, if it results in a closed output circuit (a command is sent to the actuators).
From the safety point of view, a given fault is dangerous or not depending on the type of command given during normal operation. A passive fault is dangerous if the normal command is the operation of an alarm. An active fault is dangerous if it maintains or activates an undesirable command.
It is important to note the basic difference between the behavior of an electromechanical relay and an electronic component (for example a transistor) :
• there is a high probability, approximately 90%, that the failure of a relay will cause an open circuit
(control circuit powered off).
• there is a 50% probability that the failure of a transistor will cause either an open circuit or a closed circuit.
This is why it is important to correctly estimate the types and consequences of faults when automating a system using electronic products such as PLCs, including when relay output modules are used on PLCs.
The system designer must use devices external to the PLC to protect against active faults inside the PLC, which are not indicated and are judged to be dangerous to the application. This may require solutions from various different technologies such as mechanical, electromechanical, pneumatic or hydraulic devices (for example, directly wiring a limit switch and emergency stop switches to the coil of a movement control contactor).
To protect against dangerous faults which may occur on output circuits or preactuators, it is sometimes beneficial to resort to general principles and use the large processing capacity of
PLCs, for example by using inputs to check the correct execution of commands requested by the program.
7 Electrical and thermal characteristics
Details of the electrical and thermal characteristics of devices are given in the associated technical documents (installation manuals, quick reference guides).
___________________________________________________________________________
3
General safety advice for users
___________________________________________________________________________
8 Environmental conditions
In industry, the micro-environmental conditions of electronic devices can vary greatly. For this reason, programmable controllers and associated modules must conform to the following two types of installation :
• installation in an enclosure with IP54 protection for protecting devices from metallic dust amongst other things. Two guidelines are associated with this type of installation :
- direct access to electronic modules should be strictly reserved to maintenance staff (see section 2), with access keys,
- the selection of a metal enclosure must be considered, since it serves as extra shielding against the latent risk of electromagnetic interference.
• direct installation without protection for Premium PLCs and associated systems (power supply modules, etc) which themselves have IP20 protection.
This type of installation applies to areas with restricted access and low pollution levels (not exceeding 2), for example stations or control rooms which have neither machines nor any activity generating metallic dust or other metallic particles. The external walls hence serve as the PLC enclosure.
9 Preventive or corrective maintenance
Availability
The availability of a system is its ability, in terms of its combined reliability, maintainability and maintenance logistics, to be in a state to perform a required function, at a given moment and within a defined time period.
Availability is therefore specific to each application, since it is a combination of :
• the architecture of the automatic system,
• the reliability and maintainability : intrinsic characteristics of the equipment (PLCs, sensors, machine, etc),
• maintenance logistics : characteristic intrinsic to the user of the control system (software structure, fault indication, process, on-site replacement parts, training of personnel).
Troubleshooting procedure
• control system equipment should only be repaired by qualified personnel (after sales service engineer, or technician approved by Schneider Automation). Only certified replacement parts or components should be used.
• before performing any operation on equipment (for example opening an enclosure), always cut the power supply off (disconnect the power plug or open the power isolation switch).
• before performing any "mechanical" operation on equipment on site, cut the power supply off and mechanically lock any moving parts.
• before removing a module, a memory cartridge, a PCMCIA card, etc, check in the manual whether this should be done with the power off or if it is possible with the device powered up.
Follow the instructions given in the manual carefully.
• on positive logic outputs or negative logic inputs, take all necessary precautions to prevent a disconnected wire coming into contact with the mechanical ground (risk of undesirable control action).
Replacement and recycling of used batteries
• if these are replaced, use batteries of the same type and dispose of defective batteries in the same way as toxic waste.
Do not throw lithium or mercury batteries into a fire, open or recharge them, or attempt to solder them.
___________________________________________________________________________
4
TSX CTY 2A / 4A / 2C modules
Installation
Contents
Part A
Section
Presentation of the various counting functions
2.1-1 Downcounting function (TSX CTY 2A / 4A modules)
2.1-2 Upcounting function (TSX CTY 2A / 4 A modules)
2.1-3 Up/down counting function (TSX CTY 2A / 4A modules)
2.1-4 Up/down counting and measurement function
Up or down counting with a TSX CTY 2A / 4A module
Up/down counting with a TSX CTY 2A / 4A module 2/7
Up/down counting and measurement with a TSX CTY 2C module 2/14
Principle of connecting the EPSR input "power supply return" 2/19
Page
3 Setting up counter modules 3/1
Maximum number of counter modules
Types of sensor which can be used on counter inputs
Electrical characteristics of TSX CTY 2A / 4A / 2C modules 3/3
3.3-1 General module characteristics
3.3-2 Characteristics of the counter inputs (TSX CTY 2A / 4A)
3.3-3 Characteristics of the counter inputs (TSX CTY 2C)
3.3-4 Characteristics of the auxiliary inputs (preset, enable, read) 3/7
3.3-5 Characteristics of the auxiliary outputs 3/9
___________________________________________________________________________
A/1
A
A
TSX CTY 2A / 4A / 2C modules
Installation
Contents
Part A
Section Page
15-pin SUB-D and HE10 connector pinout 3/10
3.4-1 Standard 15-pin SUB-D connectors for a TSX CTY 2A / 4A module 3/10
3.4-2 Standard 15-pin SUB-D connectors for a TSX CTY 2C module 3/11
3.4-3 20-pin HE10 type connector for a TSX CTY 2A / 4A module 3/12
3.4-4 20-pin HE10 type connector for a TSX CTY 2C module 3/13
Connection of proximity type counting sensors 3/14
3.5-1 Connection principle 3/14
3.5-2 Connection of counting sensors and their power supply 3/15
3.5-3 Wiring recommendations 3/16
Connection of encoder type counting sensors
3.6-2 Connection of an encoder to a TSX CTY 2A / 4A / 2C
module
3/18
Connection of the sensors to auxiliary inputs and outputs
3.7-2 Connection of sensors and their power supply
3.8-2 General wiring instructions
3.8-3 Encoder and auxiliary sensor supplies
TELEFAST 2 connections : ABE-7CPA01
___________________________________________________________________________
A/2
TSX CTY 2A / 4A / 2C modules
Installation
Contents
Part A
Section
4.1-4 Availability of counting signals on the TELEFAST screw terminal block
4.1-5 Correspondence between TELEFAST ABE-7CPA01 terminal blocks and 15-pin SUB-D connectors
TELEFAST 2 connection sub-base : ABE-7H16R20
4.2-2 Availability of signals on the TELEFAST screw terminal block
4.2-3 Correspondence between TELEFAST ABE-7H16R20 terminal blocks and HE10 connector
Page
TELEFAST 2 connection and adaptor sub-base : ABE-7CPA11 4/8
4.3-3 Characteristics of the TELEFAST sub-base
4.3-4 Connecting the TELEFAST sub-base
4.3-5 Wiring instructions and recommendations
4.3-6 Configuring the TELEFAST sub-base
TSX TAP S15•• wiring accessories
4.4-2 Mounting the TSX TAP S15••
4.4-3 Connection of an encoder using the TSX TAP S1505 accessory
4.4-4 Connection of an encoder using the TSX TAP S1524 accessory
4.5-1 TSX CDP 301 and TSX CDP 501 preformed cables
4.5-2 TSX CDP 102, TSX CDP 202 and TSX CDP 302 ribbon cables
4.5-3 TSX CDP 053 / 103 / 203 / 303 / 503 connection cable
___________________________________________________________________________
A/3
A
A
TSX CTY 2A / 4A / 2C modules
Installation
Section
Contents
Part A
Page
___________________________________________________________________________
A/4
1 Presentation
1.1
Description
1.1-1 General
TSX CTY 2A, TSX CTY 4A and TSX CTY 2C modules are standard format counter modules. They are used to count pulses from a sensor, at a maximum frequency of 40 kHz (CTY 2A / 4A) or 1 MHz (CTY 2C).
Counter modules can be installed in any available slot in a Premium (TSX, PMX or PCX)
PLC configuration, provided it uses no more than :
• 8 "app.-specific" channels in a TSX P57 102/TPMX P57 102/TPCX 57 1012 configuration
• 24 "app.-specific" channels in a TSX P57 2•2/TPMX P57 202 configuration
• 32 "app.-specific" channels in a TSX P57 3•2/TPMX P57 352/TPCX 57 3512 configuration
• 48 "app.-specific" channels in a TSX P57 4•2/TPMX P57 452 configuration
TSX CTY 2A and TSX CTY 4A modules only differ in the number of channels they have (2 channels for the TSX CTY 2A module and 4 channels for the TSX CTY 4A module) and are used to perform upcounting, downcounting and up/down counting functions for each channel.
The TSX CTY 2C module (2 channels) is used to perform up/down counting and measurement functions in normal mode or modulo mode.
The sensor used on each channel can be :
• A 2- or 3-wire proximity sensor, type PNP or NPN. If an output with mechanical contacts is used, the channel immunity must be increased, in order to reduce bounce when the contact is closed.
• An incremental encoder with 5 VDC differential output signals (encoder with RS 422/
485 line driver)
• An incremental encoder with 10-30 VDC output signals (Totem Pole encoder)
• A serial output absolute encoder, RS 485 standard interface (TSX CTY 2C only)
• A parallel output absolute encoder, via the TELEFAST adaptor : ABE-7CPA11
(TSX CTY 2C only).
TSX CTY 2A / 4A modules
Incremental encoder
A
Proximity sensors
Serial output absolute encoder
TSX CTY 2C module
TELEFAST ABE-7CPA11
Parallel output absolute encoder
___________________________________________________________________________
1/1
A
1.1-2 Physical description
1 Standard 15-pin SUB-D connector for connecting :
• the counting sensor(s) corresponding to channels 0 and 1 for TSX CTY 2A / 2C modules, and channels
0, 1, 2, and 3 for the TSX CTY 4A module,
• the encoder power supply if this type of sensor is used,
• the encoder power supply return which confirms that this is correctly supplied.
2 20-pin HE10 connector for connecting (for each channel) :
• the auxiliary inputs :
- reset or set to preset value,
- counter enable,
- read,
• the auxiliary outputs,
• the external power supplies :
- power supply for the auxiliary inputs and outputs,
- power supply for other sensors.
3 Screw for fixing the module in its position.
4 Rigid casing providing :
• support for the electronic card,
• guidance of module into its slot.
5 Module diagnostics indicator lamps :
• module level diagnostics :
- green RUN indicator lamp : indicates the module operating mode (module operative),
- red ERR indicator lamp : indicates the internal status of the module (internal fault, module failure),
- red I/O indicator lamp : indicates an external module fault or an application fault.
• channel level diagnostics :
- green CHx indicator lamp : indicates channel diagnostics :
. indicator lamp on : channel operating,
. indicator lamp flashing : channel not operating,
. indicator lamp off : channel faulty, not configured or incorrectly configured.
TSX CTY 2A
TSX CTY 4A
TSX CTY 2C
2
2
2
___________________________________________________________________________
1/2
3
4
5
1
3
4
5
1
3
4
5
1
2 Functions
2.1
Presentation of the various counting functions
2.1-1 Downcounting function (TSX CTY 2A / 4A modules)
The downcounting function is used to downcount pulses (on 24 bits + sign) from a preset value from 0 to +16777215 and indicates if the current value is less than or equal to 0.
The downcounting range is between -16777216 and +16777215.
valid downcounting range
A current value < 0
-16777216 0 preset
+16777215 with automatic preset
Note
The operation of the downcounting function, associated language objects and software installation are described in the application-specific manual.
2.1-2 Upcounting function (TSX CTY 2A / 4 A modules)
The upcounting function is used to upcount pulses (on 24 bits + sign) from 0 to a preset value called the setpoint value and indicates passage through the setpoint value. The upcounting range is from 0 to + 16777215.
The current value of the counter is continuously compared with two adjustable thresholds (threshold 0 and threshold 1).
valid upcounting range current value < setpoint value current value < value of threshold 1 current value < value of threshold 0
0 threshold 0 with automatic reset to 0 threshold 1 setpoint
+16777215
Note
The operation of the upcounting function, associated language objects and software installation are described in the application-specific manual.
___________________________________________________________________________
2/1
A
2.1-3 Up/down counting function (TSX CTY 2A / 4A modules)
The up/down counting function is used to upcount and downcount pulses (on 24 bits + sign) from a preset value between -16777216 and +16777215 on the same module.
This function also offers the option of defining several values the crossing of which by the current value will be signaled and may trigger event processing :
• a low setpoint and a high setpoint
• 2 adjustable thresholds (thresholds 0 and 1) valid up/down counting range current value < high setpoint current value < threshold 1 current value < threshold 0 current value < low setpoint
-16777216 low setpoint preset threshold 0 threshold 1 high setpoint
+16777215
Note
The operation of the up/down counting function, associated language objects and software installation are described in the application-specific manual.
___________________________________________________________________________
2/2
Functions 2
A
2.1-4 Up/down counting and measurement function (TSX CTY 2C module)
The up/down counting function is used to upcount and downcount pulses (on 24 bits + sign) on the same counter from a preset value from -16777216 to +16777215.
The measurement function is used to read a serial frame from a serial output absolute encoder.
The up/down counting and measurement function also offers the option of defining 2 thresholds (thresholds 0 and 1), the crossing of which by the current value will be signaled and may trigger event processing.
valid up/down counting range current value < threshold 1 current value < threshold 0
-16777216 preset threshold 0 threshold 1 +16777215
Modulo mode is used for up/down counting (on 25 bits) in the range 0 to +33554431.
valid up/down counting range current value < threshold 1 current value < threshold 0
0 preset threshold 0 threshold 1 1... 33554431
Note
The operation of the up/down counting and measurement function, associated language objects and software installation are described in the application-specific manual.
___________________________________________________________________________
2/3
A
2.2
Up or down counting with a TSX CTY 2A / 4A module
The TSX CTY 2A/4A counter modules provide :
• 2 independent upcounting or downcounting channels (TSX CTY 2A module)
• 4 independent upcounting or downcounting channels (TSX CTY 4A module)
The maximum counting frequency on each channel is 40 kHz.
Upcounting or downcounting signals
The upcounting or downcounting signals relating to a channel, as well as the encoder power supply (if the sensor is an incremental encoder) are grouped together on a standard 15-pin SUB-D connector. Each upcounter or downcounter channel can receive 5 VDC or 24 VDC signals. Pulses are received on input IA.
Auxiliary inputs
The 24 VDC auxiliary inputs (reset to 0 for upcounting, set to the preset value for downcounting and enable for upcounting or downcounting) and the external power supplies are grouped together on an HE10 connector, common to channels 0 and 1 or
2 and 3 (TSX CTY 4A only).
• Reset to 0 (upcounting) or preset (downcounting)
The reset to 0 (upcounting) or set to the preset value (downcounting) can be performed as follows :
- changing the state (rising or falling edge) of input IPres (downcounting) or IReset
(upcounting), depending on the selection made during configuration,
- crossing the setpoint value (upcounting) or value 0 (downcounting),
- by the program,
• Enable upcounting or downcounting
Upcounting or downcounting is enabled as follows :
- set input IEna to 1,
- by the program.
Note
For further information on these functions, refer to the application-specific manual.
___________________________________________________________________________
2/4
Functions 2
A
Line check input : EPSR
This input is connected to the power supply return output of an incremental encoder, in order to check that the encoder power supply is correct.
If there is a line break on the cable carrying the encoder power supply, a fault is generated which can be used by the application program.
See the following pages for the EPSR input wiring.
Counter outputs
Upcounting or downcounting functions have counter outputs which can be associated with 2 reflex physical outputs (Q0 and Q1) on the counter module :
• downcounting function : this offers one counter output with predefined activation and deactivation conditions :
- activation when the current value passes through 0,
- deactivation on downcounter preset.
• upcounting function : this offers two counter outputs, with activation and deactivation conditions which are predefined for counter output 0, and which can be set for counter output 1 :
Counter output 0
- activation on passage through the setpoint value,
- deactivation upon counter reset.
Counter output 1
- activation and deactivation can be set in the adjustment screen.
Physical outputs
Physical outputs Q0 and Q1 can be controlled as follows :
• in automatic mode : if the physical output is enabled, the state of the counter output is applied to the output (counter output 0 controls output Q0 and counter output 1 controls output Q1). If the physical output is not enabled, it is at 0,
• in manual mode : the state of the physical output is controlled manually.
For further information on setting up counter outputs and physical outputs, refer to the applicationspecific manual.
___________________________________________________________________________
2/5
A
Simplified schematic
The 15-pin SUB-D connector is used to wire a single counter channel (for example, channel 0), while the HE10 connector is common to 2 channels (for example, channels
0 and 1). The wiring of the other channels or pairs of channels is identical.
Standard 15-pin SUB-D connector for connection of counting sensor
1
Upcounting or downcounting pulse input
IA +5 VDC
IA +24 VDC
IA
9
10
1
2
3
IA
IB
2
3
4
9
10
11
11
12
4
IZ 5
12
13
Power supply reserved exclusively for the encoder (from the external power supply connected to the HE10 connector)
Encoder power supply return signal
(must be wired)
+10...30 VDC
+5 VDC
0 VDC
EPSR
7
8
5
15
13
6
7
8
14
15
5 VDC or 10...30 VDC encoder supply
+
+5 VDC
0 VDC
+10...30 VDC
1 2
+ 3 4
Preset input channel 0
Enable input channel 0
IPres0
IEna0
5 6
I0
I1
7 8
I2 Auxiliary inputs
Preset input channel 1
Enable input channel 1
IPres1
IEna1
9 10
I0
I1
I2
11 12
Reflex physical outputs channel 0
Reflex physical outputs channel 1
Q0
Q1
Q0
+24 VDC
Q1
13
15
14
16
17 18
Sensor supply for
24 VDC auxiliary inputs
+
19 20
0 VDC
HE10 connector for connecting power supplies
(encoders and sensors), auxiliary inputs (preset, enable, etc) and reflex outputs.
___________________________________________________________________________
2/6
Functions 2
A
2.3
Up/down counting with a TSX CTY 2A / 4A module
TSX CTY 2A/4A counter modules provide :
• 2 independent up/down counting channels (TSX CTY 2A module),
• 4 independent up/down counting channels (TSX CTY 4A module).
The maximum up/down counting frequency on each channel is 40 kHz.
Up/down counting signals
Up/down counting on a channel can be performed in several ways :
• use of a physical input for upcounting and a physical input for downcounting.
Upcounting pulses are received on input IA and downcounting pulses on input IB.
Note
All pulses on inputs IA and IB are taken into account, whatever the synchronism of the signals.
• use of a physical input for up/down counting and a physical input for direction
(upcounting or downcounting). Up/down counting pulses are received on input IA and the direction (upcounting or downcounting) is defined by the state of input IB
(upcounting at state 1 and downcounting at state 0).
Note
In upcounting, pulses on input IA are taken into account if input IB is at 1 for more than 3 µs.
In downcounting, pulses on input IA are not taken into account if input IB is at 0 for more than
3 µs.
• use of an up/down counting physical input and definition of direction by the application
(setting a bit to 0 or 1). The up/down counting pulses are received on input IA.
• Use of two physical inputs with signals phase-shifted by
π
/2 (incremental encoder signals). Counting signal A is received on input IA and counting signal B on input IB.
___________________________________________________________________________
2/7
A
Auxiliary inputs
The 24 VDC auxiliary inputs and the external power supplies are grouped together on an HE10 connector, common to 2 channels : channels 0 and 1 or channels 2 and 3
(TSX CTY 4A only). The connector comprises the following signals : set to preset value
IPres, enable up/down counting IEna, capture current value IRead.
• Preset
Setting to the preset value can be performed as follows :
- on a change of state (rising or falling edge) of input IPres and enable by program,
- on a rising edge of input IPres, if the direction is + (upcounting) or on a falling edge of input IPres, if the direction is - (downcounting), and enable by program.
Upcounting direction Downcounting direction
Physical input IPres
- on a rising edge of input IPres, if the direction is - (downcounting) or on a falling edge of input IPres, if the direction is + (upcounting), and enable by program.
Upcounting direction Downcounting direction
Physical input IPres
- on state 1 of input IPres and enable by program. The current value does not change while the input is at 1.
- on short cam reference point : the preset is taken into account :
. if the direction is + (upcounting) : input IPres at state 1, rising edge of zero marker input IZ, and enable by program,
. if the direction is - (downcounting) : input IPres at state 1, falling edge of zero marker input IZ, and enable by program.
Upcounting direction Downcounting direction
Physical input IPres
Zero marker input IZ
Preset Preset
Note
In theory, as the short cam is less than one revolution of the incremental encoder, the zero marker only appears once in the cam.
If, however, there are several revolutions of the incremental encoder in the cam, the last active edge of the zero marker signal triggers a preset.
___________________________________________________________________________
2/8
Functions 2
A
- on long cam reference point : the preset is taken into account on the first rising edge of the zero marker input IZ after input IPres has passed through state 0 in both the upward and downward directions, and enable by program.
Upcounting direction Downcounting direction
Physical input IPres
Zero marker input IZ
Preset Preset
- directly by program.
• Enable up/down counting
Up/down counting is enabled as follows :
- on setting to 1 of input IEna and enable by program,
- by the program.
• Capture
The current value is captured in the following way :
- on change of state (rising or falling edge) of input IRead and enable by program,
- by the program.
Note
For further information on these functions, refer to the application-specific manual.
___________________________________________________________________________
2/9
A
Line check input : EPSR
This input is connected to the power supply return output of an incremental encoder, in order to check that the encoder power supply is correct.
If there is a line break on the cable carrying the encoder power supply, a fault is generated which can be used by the application program.
See the following pages for the EPSR input wiring.
Counter outputs
The up/down counting function has 2 counter outputs which can be associated with 2 reflex physical outputs (Q0 and Q1) on the counter module.
These two counter outputs have activation and deactivation conditions defined by the user in a coding matrix which can be accessed via the adjustment function.
Physical outputs
Physical outputs Q0 and Q1 can be controlled as follows :
• in automatic mode : if the physical output is enabled, the state of the counter output is applied to the output (counter output 0 controls output Q0 and counter output 1 controls output Q1). If the physical output is not enabled, it is at 0.
• in manual mode : the state of the physical output is controlled manually.
For further information on setting up counter outputs and physical outputs, refer to the application-specific manual.
Notes :
The following schematics show the principle for wiring a 15-pin SUB-D connector (1 channel only).
The wiring of the other channels is identical.
On schematics 2 to 4, the HE10 connector is not shown, as its wiring is identical to that of schematic 1.
___________________________________________________________________________
2/10
Functions 2
A
Simplified schematic 1
Use of an up/down counter physical input and definition of direction (upcounting or downcounting) by the application.
Standard 15-pin SUB-D connector for connection of counting sensor
1
Up/down counting pulse input
IA +5 VDC
IA +24 VDC
IA
9
1
2
10
3
Zero marker input
Power supply reserved exclusively for the encoder (from the external power supply connected to the HE10 connector)
Encoder power supply return signal
(must be wired)
IZ +5 VDC
IZ +24 VDC
IZ
+10...30 VDC
+5 VDC
0 VDC
EPSR
11
12
7
8
4
5
15
13
IA
IB
IZ
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
5 VDC or 10...30 VDC encoder supply according to encoder type
+
+
Preset input channel 0
Enable input channel 0
Read input channel 0
Preset input channel 1
Enable input channel 1
Read input channel 1
Reflex physical outputs channel 0
Reflex physical outputs channel 1
Sensor supply for 24 VDC auxiliary inputs +
+5 VDC
0 VDC
+10...30 VDC
1
3
IPres0
IEna0
IRead0
5
7
IPres1
IEna1
IRead1
2
4
9
11
10
12
6
8
I0
I2
I0
I2
I1
I1
Auxiliary inputs
Q0
Q1
Q0
+24 VDC
Q1
13
15
17
14
16
18
19 20
0 VDC
HE10 connector for connecting power supplies
(encoders and sensors), auxiliary inputs (preset, enable, etc) and reflex outputs.
___________________________________________________________________________
2/11
A
Simplified schematic 2
Use of a physical up/down counting input and a physical input for direction (upcounting or downcounting).
Standard 15-pin SUB-D connector for connection of counting sensor
1
Up/down counting pulse input
Counting direction input
(upcount or downcount) downcount upcount
Zero marker input
Power supply reserved exclusively for the encoder (from the external power supply connected to the HE10 connector)
Encoder power supply return signal
(must be wired)
IA +5 VDC
IA +24 VDC
IA –
IB +5 VDC
IB +24 VDC
IB –
IZ +5 VDC
IZ +24 VDC
IZ –
+10...30 VDC
+5 VDC
– 0 VDC
EPSR
9
10
11
12
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
15
13
IA
IB
IZ
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
5 VDC
0 VDC
10...30 VDC
1
3
2
HE10 connector
Simplified schematic 3
Use of a physical input for upcounting and a physical input for downcounting.
Standard 15-pin SUB-D connector for connection of counting sensor
1
Upcounting pulse input
Downcounting pulse input
Zero marker input
Power supply reserved exclusively for the encoder (from the external power supply connected to the HE10 connector)
Encoder power supply return signal
(must be wired)
IA +5 VDC
IA +24 VDC
IA –
IB +5 VDC
IB +24 VDC
IB –
IZ +5 VDC
IZ +24 VDC
IZ –
+10...30 VDC
+5 VDC
– 0 VDC
EPSR
9
10
11
12
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
15
13
IA
IB
IZ
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
5 VDC
0 VDC
10...30 VDC
1
3
2
2/12
Functions 2
A
Simplified schematic 4
Use of two physical inputs for wiring an incremental encoder with signals phase-shifted by
π
/2. The multiplication by 4 option can be used to increase encoder resolution :
• multiplication by 1 : up/down counting is performed on the rising edges of input IB,
• multiplication by 4 : up/down counting is performed on all the rising and falling edges of inputs IA and IB.
Signal A input
Signal B input
/2
Zero marker input
Power supply reserved exclusively for the encoder (from the external power supply connected to the HE10 connector)
Encoder power supply return signal
(must be wired)
Standard 15-pin SUB-D connector for connection of counting sensor
IA +5 VDC
IA +24 VDC
IA –
IB +5 VDC
IB +24 VDC
IB –
IZ +5 VDC
IZ +24 VDC
IZ –
+10...30 VDC
+5 VDC
– 0 VDC
EPSR
9
10
11
12
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
15
13
IA
IB
IZ
1
4
5
6
7
2
3
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
1
3
2
HE10 connector
___________________________________________________________________________
2/13
A
2.4
Up/down counting and measurement with a TSX CTY 2C module
The TSX CTY 2C counter module can be used for 2 independent up/down counting and measurement channels (absolute encoder interface).
• up/down counting (mechanical contacts, proximity sensor, pulse generators, incremental encoders)
Up/down counting on a channel can be performed in several ways :
- use of a physical input for upcounting and a physical input for downcounting.
Upcounting pulses are received on input IA and downcounting pulses on input IB.
- use of a physical input for up/down counting and a physical input for direction
(upcounting or downcounting). Up/down counting pulses are received on input IA and the direction (upcounting or downcounting) is defined by the state of input IB
(upcounting at state 1 and downcounting at state 0).
- use of an up/down counting physical input and definition of direction by the application (setting a bit to 0 or 1). The up/down counting pulses are received on input IA.
The maximum up/down counting frequency on each channel is 1 MHz.
- use of two physical inputs with signals phase-shifted by
π
/2 (incremental encoder signals). Counting signal A is received on input IA and counting signal B on input IB.
The maximum frequency of phase-shifted signals is 500 kHz (in multiplication by 1) or 250 kHz (in multiplication by 4).
• measurement (absolute encoders)
- use of a physical input to receive serial data (signals from a serial output absolute encoder) and use of a physical output to send the transmission clock to the encoder.
TELEFAST adaptor TSX ABE-7CPA11 allows a parallel output absolute encoder to be used.
___________________________________________________________________________
2/14
Functions 2
A
Auxiliary inputs
The 24 VDC auxiliary inputs and the external power supplies are grouped together on an HE10 connector, common to 2 channels. The connector comprises the following signals : set to preset value IPres, enable up/down counting IEna, capture current value
IRead.
• Preset
Setting to the preset value can be performed as follows :
- on a change of state (rising or falling edge) of input IPres and enable by program,
- on a rising edge of input IPres, if the direction is + (upcounting) or on a falling edge of input IPres, if the direction is - (downcounting), and enable by program.
Upcounting direction Downcounting direction
Physical input IPres
- on rising edge of input IPres, if the direction is - (downcounting) or on a falling edge of input IPres, if the direction is + (upcounting), and enable by program.
Upcounting direction Downcounting direction
Physical input IPres
- on state 1 of input IPres and enable by program. The current value does not change while the input is at 1.
- on short cam reference point : the preset is taken into account :
. if the direction is + (upcounting) : input IPres at state 1, rising edge of zero marker input IZ, and enable by program,
. if the direction is - (downcounting) : input IPres at state 1, falling edge of zero marker input IZ, and enable by program.
Upcounting direction
Downcounting direction
Physical input IPres
Zero marker input IZ
Preset Preset
Note
In theory, as the short cam is less than one revolution of the incremental encoder, the zero marker only appears once in the cam.
If, however, there are several revolutions of the incremental encoder in the cam, the last active edge of the zero marker signal triggers a preset.
___________________________________________________________________________
2/15
A
- on long cam reference point : preset is taken into account on the first rising edge of the zero marker input IZ after input IPres has passed through state 0 in both the upward and downward directions, and enable by program.
Upcounting direction Downcounting direction
Physical input IPres
Zero marker input IZ
Preset Preset
- directly by program.
• Enable up/down counting
Up/down counting is enabled as follows :
- on setting to 1 of input IEna and enable by program,
- by the program.
• Capture
The current value is captured in the following way :
- on change of state (rising edge, falling edge or rising and falling edges) of input
IRead and enable by program,
- by the program.
Note
For further information on these functions, refer to the application-specific manual.
___________________________________________________________________________
2/16
Functions 2
A
Line check input : EPSR
This input is connected to the power supply return output of an incremental or absolute encoder, in order to check that the encoder power supply is correct.
If there is a short-circuit or line break on the cable carrying the power supply voltage to the encoder, a fault is generated which can be used by the application program.
See the following pages for the EPSR input wiring.
Counter outputs
The up/down counting function has 2 counter outputs which can be associated with 2 reflex physical outputs (Q0 and Q1) on the counter module.
These two counter outputs have activation and deactivation conditions defined by the user in a coding matrix (30 possible combinations), which can be accessed via the adjustment function.
Physical outputs
Each channel of the TSX CTY 2C module has 4 physical outputs, Q0 to Q3.
Physical outputs Q0 and Q1 are identical to those of a TSX CTY 2A or TSX CTY 4A module. They can be controlled :
• in automatic mode : if the physical output is enabled, the state of the counter output is applied to the output (counter output 0 controls output Q0 and counter output 1 controls output Q1). If the physical output is not enabled, it is at 0.
• in manual mode : the state of the physical output is controlled manually.
Output Q2 can only be controlled in manual mode.
Output Q3 is in fact, a configurable input/output. It can be used in programmable
frequency mode to give an external synchronization marker on several channels in several counter modules.
When using parallel outputs absolute encoder(s), with a TELEFAST adaptor, ABE-
7CPA11, outputs Q2 and Q3 can be used as discrete outputs to address these encoder(s).
For further information on setting up counter outputs and physical outputs, refer to the application-specific manual.
Note
The schematics showing the principle for wiring a 15-pin SUB-D connector (1 channel only) are identical to those for up/down counting with a TSX CTY 2A / 4A module (schematics 1 to 4). These schematics are complemented by schematic 5 on the next page, which takes account of the wiring of a serial output absolute encoder or a parallel output absolute encoder, via TELEFAST adaptor
ABE-7CPA11.
___________________________________________________________________________
2/17
A
Simplified schematic 5
Use of a physical input to receive serial data and use of a physical output to send the transmission clock to the SSI absolute encoder.
Standard 15-pin SUB-D connector for connection of counting sensor
Serial data input
Serial transmission clock output
Power supply reserved exclusively for the encoder (from the external power supply connected to the HE10 connector)
Encoder power supply return signal
(must be wired)
SSI Data +
SSI Data -
1
2
10
3
11
CLK SSI +
CLK SSI -
+10...30 VDC
+5 VDC
0 VDC
EPSR
6
7
8
4
14
15
13
3
4
5
1
2
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Absolute encoder power + supply, 5 VDC or 10...30 VDC depending on encoder type
+
10...30 VDC encoder ref. voltage
Preset input channel 0
Enable input / output Q2 channel 0
Read input channel 0
Output Q3 channel 0
Preset input channel 1
Enable input / output Q2 channel 1
Read input channel 1
Output Q3 channel 1
Reflex physical outputs channel 0
Reflex physical outputs channel 1
+5 VDC
0 VDC
+10...30 VDC
1 2
3 4
Q2
Q2
IPres0
IEna0
IRead0
Q3
IPres1
IEna1
IRead1
Q3
Q0
Q1
Q0
+24 VDC
Q1
5
7
9
11
13
15
6
8
10
12
14
16
17 18
Sensor supply for 24 VDC
+
19 20
0 VDC
I0
I2
I0
I2
I1
I1
Auxiliary I/O
HE10 connector for connecting power supplies
(encoders and sensors), auxiliary inputs (preset, enable, etc) and reflex outputs.
___________________________________________________________________________
2/18
Functions 2
A
2.5
Principle of connecting the EPSR input "power supply return"
This input must be wired.
The connection of this input depends on the type of sensor used :
• incremental encoder with power supply return output
- the EPSR input is connected to the encoder power supply return output
Z
+
–
EPSR
A
B
+5 VDC
– 0 VDC
EPSR
7
8
TSX CTY 2A / 4A / 2C
15
13
5
6
7
8
Encoder
13
14
15
Standard
15-pin SUB-D
• serial output absolute encoder with power supply return output
- the EPSR input is connected to the encoder power supply return output
SSI Data
CLKSSI
+
–
EPSR
Encoder
+5 VDC
– 0 VDC
EPSR
7
8
15
13
TSX CTY 2C 5
6
13
14
7
15
8
Standard
15-pin SUB-D
• incremental encoder without power supply return output
- the EPSR input is connected to the positive of the encoder power supply, encoder side.
Z
+
A
B
TSX CTY 2A / 4A / 2C
+24 VDC
7
6
13
–
– 0 VDC
EPSR
8
15
7
14
13
15
8
Encoder
Standard 15-pin SUB-D
___________________________________________________________________________
2/19
A
• serial output absolute encoder without power supply return output
- the EPSR input is connected to the positive of the encoder power supply, encoder side.
SSI Data
CLKSSI
+
+24 VDC
TSX CTY 2C
13
7
6
–
– 0 VDC
EPSR
8
15
7
14
13
15
8
Encoder
Standard
15-pin
SUB-D
• inductive proximity sensors
- the EPSR input is connected to the positive of the counting sensor power supply,
- the - 0 VDC output is connected to the negative of the counting sensor power supply.
+24 VDC – 0 VDC
Counting sensor power supply
TSX CTY 2 A / 4 A / 2C
– 0 VDC
EPSR
7
8
15
13
6
7
8
SUB-D standard
15-pin
Note
If the sensor does not have a power supply return output, the EPSR input of a TSX
CTY 2C module does not need to be wired. In this case, it is advisable to mask the
"encoder or proximity sensor power supply" fault.
Note
For further information on these functions, refer to the application-specific manual.
13
14
15
___________________________________________________________________________
2/20
3 Setting up counter modules
3.1
Maximum number of counter modules
TSX CTY 2A / 4A / 2C counter modules can be installed in any available slot in a Premium
(TSX, PMX or PCX) PLC configuration, provided they use no more than :
Processors
TSX P57 102 / TPMX P57 102 / TPCX 57 1012
TSX P57 202 / TPMX P57 202
TSX P57 252
TSX P57 302
TSX P 57 352 / TPMX P57 352 / TPCX 57 3512
TSX P57 402
TSX P57 452 / TPMX P57 452
No. of "app.-specific" channels managed
8
24
24
32
32
48
48
All the channels of an application-specific module (counter module, axis control module, etc) are called "application-specific" channels. TSX CTY 2A / 2C modules comprise 2
"application-specific" channels and the TSX CTY 4A module comprises 4 "applicationspecific" channels. Only configured channels are counted.
For example, in a configuration with a TSX
P57 202 processor, it is possible to install
12 TSX CTY 2A / 2C modules or 6
TSX CTY 4A modules, where all the channels are configured.
These modules can be installed in all the positions of the main rack and in all the positions of the 7 extension racks.
A
___________________________________________________________________________
3/1
A
3.2
Types of sensor which can be used on counter inputs
Counter inputs on TSX CTY 2A / 4A / 2C modules can receive pulses generated by :
• 2- or 3-wire proximity sensors, type PNP or NPN,
• incremental encoders with 5 VDC differential output signals, line driver
RS 422 / 485, supplied at 10-30 V,
• incremental encoders with 5 V differential output signals, RS 422 / 485 line driver, supplied at 5 V,
• incremental encoders with 10-30 V differential output signals, Totem pole, supplied at 10-30 V,
• SSI serial output absolute encoders, RS 485 standard interface (TSX CTY 2C only),
• parallel output absolute encoders and TELEFAST adaptor ABE-7CPA11 (TSX CTY 2C only).
Incremental or absolute encoder
Proximity sensors
___________________________________________________________________________
3/2
Setting up counter modules 3
A
3.3
Electrical characteristics of TSX CTY 2A / 4A / 2C modules
3.3-1 General module characteristics
Modules
Maximum frequency at counter inputs
Current consumed by the module
5 V internal Typical
Maximum
24 V sensor / Typical preactuator Maximum
Power dissipated in the module
Power supply monitoring for sensors / preactuators
Operating temperature
Typical
Maximum
Dielectric strength inputs/ground or inputs and internal logic
Insulation resistance
Relative humidity
Storage temperature
Operating altitude
(*) with fan operating
TSX CTY 2A TSX CTY 4A TSX CTY 2C
40 kHz 40 kHz 1 MHz
280 mA
330 mA
30 mA
60 mA
4.5 W
6 W
Yes
330 mA
470 mA
36 mA
72 mA
8 W
11.5 W
Yes
850 mA (*)
1 A (*)
15 mA
18 mA
7 W
10 W
Yes
0 to 60 °C 0 to 60 °C 0 to 60 °C
1000 V rms - 50/60 Hz - 1 min
> 10 M
Ω
at 500 VDC
5% to 95% without condensation
- 25 ° to + 70 °C
0 to 2000 m
3.3-2 Characteristics of the counter inputs (TSX CTY 2A / 4A)
Characteristics for use in RS 422 C
Example schematic for each counter input IA, IB, IZ.
IA +5 VDC 220
A
1 nF
PS2701-1-L opto-coupler line check
Opto-coupler
190
A
IA –
Inputs IA, IB and IZ used in RS 422 are totally compatible with incremental encoder line drivers with RS 422 outputs and also with encoders with push-pull complementary outputs with a 5 V power supply. Line monitoring is performed on each output.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/3
A
TSX CTY 2A / 4A : characteristics for use at 5 VDC / 24 VDC
Inputs
Logic
Nominal values
Voltage
Current
Sensor supply
(ripple included)
Voltage
At state 1 Voltage
5 VDC counter
(IA/IB/IZ)
Positive
5 V
18 mA
–
24 VDC counter
(IA/IB/IZ)
Positive or Negative
24 V
18 mA
19…30 V (possible up to
34 V, limited to 1hr per 24hrs)
34 V (1hr per 24hrs)
> 11 V
Limit values
Current
At state 0 Voltage
< 5.5 V
> 2.4 V
> 3.7 mA (1)
< 1.2 V
> 6 mA (2)
< 5 V
Current
Input impedance for U nominal
Input impedance for U = 2.4 V
(RS 422 compatibility)
Response time
< 1 mA (3)
400
Ω
> 270
Ω
< 2 mA (4)
1.4 k
–
Ω
Input type
IEC 1131 conformity
Resistive
–
2-wire prox. sensor compatibility (5) –
3-wire prox. sensor compatibility (5) –
Maximum permissible frequency 40 kHz
(1) for U = 2.4 V, (2) for U = 11 V, (3) for U = 1.2 V,
(5) see compatibility of sensors with type 1 and type 2 inputs
Resistive
Type 2
Yes
Yes
(4) for U = 5 V
3.3-3 Characteristics of the counter inputs (TSX CTY 2C)
Example schematic for input IA
IA+
Line check
Input A
IA-
___________________________________________________________________________
3/4
Setting up counter modules 3
A
TSX CTY 2C : characteristics for use at 5 VDC / 24 VDC
Inputs
Logic
Nominal values
Limit values
Voltage
Current
Sensor supply
(ripple included)
Voltage
At state 1 Voltage
Current
At state 0 Voltage
> 3.6 mA (1)
< 1.2 V
Current
Input impedance for U nominal
Response time
Maximum permissible frequency for :
• counting pulses
• incremental encoders
< 1 mA
270
Ω
• SSI and parallel output absolute encoders
(with TELEFAST adaptor ABE-7CPA11)
Input type
IEC 1131 conformity
Resistive
–
> 6 mA (2)
< 5 V
< 2 mA
1.5 k
Ω
1 MHz
500 kHz in multiplication by 1
250 kHz in multiplication by 4
SSICLK transmission clock :
150 kHz...1 MHz
Resistive
Type 2
2-wire prox. sensor compatibility (3)
3-wire prox. sensor compatibility (3)
5 VDC counter 24 VDC counter
(IA/IB/IZ) or measurement (IA/IB/IZ)
(SSI Data)
Positive
5 V
18 mA
–
< 5.5 V
> 2.4 V
Positive or Negative
24 V
16 mA
19…30 V (possible up to
34 V, limited to 1hr per 24hrs)
34 V (1hr per 24hrs)
> 11 V
–
–
(1) for U = 2.4 V, (2) for U = 11 V
(3) see compatibility of sensors with type 1 and type 2 inputs
Yes
Yes
Compatibility of inputs IA, IB, IZ :
RS 422 / RS 485 / 7mA current loop line driver outputs. Differential line check on each input.
IA+
220
Ω
IA-
Line check
Totem pole complementary outputs, 5 V supply. Differential line check on each input.
IA+
220 Ω
IA-
Line check
___________________________________________________________________________
3/5
A
Characteristics of power supply monitor circuit for counting sensors (encoder or proximity sensor)
Counting sensor supply return
PS2701-1-L opto-coupler
0 V counting sensor
Modules TSX CTY 2A / 4A TSX CTY 2C
Voltage with no encoder or proximity sensor supply fault :
• 5 V power supply
• 10...30 V power supply
> 2.5 V
> 2.5 V
> 3.75 V
> 3.75 V if the
10...30 V encoder reference voltage input is not wired (pin 4 of the HE10 connector).
/
> 80% of the supply voltage of the encoder or proximity sensor, if the 10...30 V encoder reference voltage input is wired
(pin 4 of the HE10 connector).
Current with detection of a fault on the proximity sensor or encoder supply
Limit values Voltage
Current
< 0.5 mA
30 V (possible up to 34 V, limited to 1 hour per 24 hours)
< 3 mA < 3 mA
Note
If the sensor does not have a power supply return output, the EPSR input of a TSX
CTY 2C module does not need to be wired. In this case, it is advisable to mask the
"encoder or proximity sensor power supply" fault.
Note :
For further information on these functions, refer to the application-specific manual.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/6
Setting up counter modules 3
A
3.3-4 Characteristics of the auxiliary inputs (preset, enable, read)
Modules
Logic
Nominal values
TSX CTY 2A / 4A
Positive
TSX CTY 2C
Positive
Voltage
Current
24 VDC
7 mA
24 VDC
8 mA
Sensor power supply 19…30 V (possible up to 34 V, limited to 1 hr per 24 hrs)
(ripple included)
At state 1 Voltage > 11 V > 11 V Limit values
At state 0
Current
Voltage
Current
2-wire proximity sensor compatibility (2)
3-wire proximity sensor compatibility (2)
> 6 mA (1)
< 5 V
< 2 mA
Sensor / preactuator voltage OK monitoring thresholds Fault
Response time of sensor / preactuator voltage monitoring
Input impedance
Response time
Input type
IEC 1131 conformity
> 18 V
< 14 V
On disappearance < 2.5 ms (4) of 24 V
On appearance < 10 ms (4) of 24 V
State 0 to 1
State 1 to 0
3.4 k
Ω
< 250 µs (3)
< 250 µs (3)
Current sink
Type 2
> 6 mA (1)
< 5 V
< 2 mA
> 18 V
< 14 V
< 2.5 ms (4)
< 10 ms (4)
3.4 k
Ω
< 25 µs (3)
< 50 µs (3)
Resistive
Type 2
Yes (all 24 VDC 2-wire proximity sensors)
Yes (all 24 VDC 3-wire proximity sensors)
(1) for U = 11 V
(2) see compatibility of sensors with type 1 and type 2 inputs
(3) auxiliary inputs are fast inputs (response time < 50 µs or < 250 µs) in accordance with the maximum permissible frequency (1 MHz or 40 KHz) of the counter inputs.
(4) when the sensor supply voltage disappears, the fast auxiliary inputs can be taken into account.
Note
If auxiliary I/O are not used on a TSX CTY 2C module, the auxiliary power supply does not need to be wired. In this case, it is advisable to mask the "auxiliary I/O power supply" fault.
Note :
For further information on these functions, refer to the application-specific manual.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/7
A
The auxiliary inputs are supplied with 24 V from a power supply on the connector.
Equivalent schematic for TSX CTY 2A / 4A :
24 V
IPres
Ie
Ie
IEna
Ie
IRead
24 V
0 V
___________________________________________________________________________
3/8
Setting up counter modules 3
A
3.3-5 Characteristics of the auxiliary outputs
Equivalent schematic :
Preactuator/ sensor supply monitor circuit
Short-circuit fault monitor circuit
Command
+
24 V
Q0 to Q3
–
Modules
Nominal voltage
Voltage limits
Nominal current
Voltage drop
Leakage current
Max current at 30 V and at 34 V
Switching time
Dielectric strength with the ground
Compatibility with DC inputs
IEC 1131-2 conformity
Protections against overloads and short-circuits
Short-circuit monitoring of outputs of each channel
Reactivation can be configured
• manual (by application program)
• automatic
Protection against overvoltage on channels
TSX CTY 2A / 4A
24 VDC
TSX CTY 2C
24 VDC
19…30 V (possible up to 34 V, limited to 1 hour per 24 hours)
500 mA 500 mA
Protection against reverse polarity
Power of one filament lamp
< 0.5 V
< 0.1 mA
625 mA
< 250 µs
Yes
< 0.5 V
< 0.1 mA
625 mA
< 250 µs
1500 V rms. 50 / 60 Hz for 1 min
All positive logic inputs whose input resistance is < 15 K
Ω
Yes
By current limiter and and thermal tripping (0.7 < Id < 2 A)
One signalling bit per channel
One configuration bit per channel via zener diode between outputs and + 24 V by reverse-mounted diode on supply
8 W (max.) 8 W (max.)
___________________________________________________________________________
3/9
A
3.4
15-pin SUB-D and HE10 connector pinout
3.4-1 Standard 15-pin SUB-D connectors for a TSX CTY 2A / 4A module
These connectors are used for connecting counting sensors and the encoder power supply :
• TSX CTY 2A modules : two 15-pin SUB-D connectors (channels 0 and 1),
• TSX CTY 4A module : four 15-pin SUB-D connectors (channels 0,1, 2 and 3).
Note the pinouts of the various connectors are strictly identical.
Standard 15-pin SUB-D connector for connecting the counting sensor to channel 0, 1, 2 or 3
1 input IA signal input IB signal input IZ signal
Encoder power supply
Encoder power supply return signal
(must be wired)
IA +5 VDC
IA +24 VDC
IA –
IB +5 VDC
IB +24 VDC
IB –
IZ +5 VDC
IZ +24 VDC
IZ –
+10...30 VDC
+5 VDC
– 0 VDC
EPSR
9
10
11
12
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
15
13
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
5 VDC signals
Input IA +
Input IA -
Input IB +
Input IB -
Input IZ +
Input IZ -
Encoder supply :
+ 5 VDC
- 0 VDC
Encoder power supply return
Pins
10
11
4
5
1
2
15
8
13
10...30 VDC signals
Input IA +
Input IA -
Input IB +
Input IB -
Input IZ +
Input IZ -
Encoder supply :
+ 10...30V
- 0 VDC
Encoder power supply return
Pins
3
11
12
5
9
2
7
8
13
___________________________________________________________________________
3/10
Setting up counter modules 3
A
3.4-2 Standard 15-pin SUB-D connectors for a TSX CTY 2C module
These connectors are used for connecting counting sensors and the encoder power supply :
• TSX CTY 2C modules : two 15-pin SUB-D connectors (channels 0 and 1).
Note : the pinouts of the various connectors are strictly identical.
input IA signal
SSI Data input IB signal input IZ signal
SSICLK clock output
Encoder power supply
Encoder power supply return signal
(must be wired)
5 VDC signals
Input IA +
Input IA -
Input IB +
Input IB -
Input IZ +
Input IZ -
Encoder supply :
+ 5 VDC
- 0 VDC
Encoder power supply return
Pins
10
11
4
5
1
2
15
8
13
IA +24 VDC
IA - / SSI Data -
IB +5 VDC
IB +24 VDC
IB –
IZ +5 VDC
IZ +24 VDC
IZ –
SSICLK +
SSICLK –
+10...30 VDC
+5 VDC
– 0 VDC
EPSR
9
10
11
12
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
14
15
13
10...30 VDC signals
Input IA +
Input IA -
Input IB +
Input IB -
Input IZ +
Input IZ -
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Encoder supply :
+ 10...30V
- 0 VDC
Encoder power supply return
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Serial signals (absolute encoder with serial or parallel outputs, via TELEFAST adaptor ABE-7CPA11)
Pins
Input SSI Data +
Input SSI Data -
Input SSICLK+
Input SSICLK -
6
14
1
2
Encoder supply :
+ 5
- 0 VDC
Encoder power supply return
8
13
___________________________________________________________________________
3/11
Pins
3
11
12
5
9
2
7
8
13
A
3.4-3 20-pin HE10 type connector for a TSX CTY 2A / 4A module
This connector is used for connecting auxiliary inputs, outputs, encoder power supplies and other sensors.
The TSX CTY 2A module has a single HE10 connector for channels 0 and 1.
The TSX CTY 4A module has 2 HE10 connectors, for channels 0,1 and 2,3 respectively.
5 VDC or 10...30 VDC encoder supply inputs
Preset input channel 0 (channel 2)
Enable counter input channel 0 (channel 2)
Read input channel 0 (channel 2)
Preset input channel 1 (channel 3)
Enable counter input channel 1 (channel 3)
Read input channel 1 (channel 3)
Reflex physical outputs channel 0
(channel 2)
Reflex physical outputs channel 1
(channel 3)
Sensor supply for
24 VDC auxiliary I/O
+5 VDC
0 VDC
+10...30 VDC
IPres0 (2)
IEna0 (2)
IRead0 (2)
IPres1 (3)
IEna1 (3)
IRead1 (3)
1
7
9
11
3
5
2
4
6
I0
8
10
12
I2
I0
I2
Q0
Q1
Q0
+24 VDC
Q1
13 14
15 16
17 18
19 20
0 VDC
I1
I1
Supply feedback to connector(s)
15-pin SUB-D
Auxiliary inputs
24 VDC signals Pins Power supplies Pins
Auxiliary inputs channel 0 (channel 2) :
Preset IPres 0/2
Enable IEna 0/2
Read IRead 0/2
5
6
7
Auxiliary inputs channel 1 (channel 3) :
Preset IPres 1/3
Enable IEna 1/3
Read IRead 1/3
9
10
11
Reflex output channel 0 (channel 2) :
Output Q0
Output Q1
13
14
Encoder supply :
+ 5 VDC
- 0 VDC
- +10...30 VDC
Sensor supply :
+ 24 VDC
- 0 VDC
17 or 19
18 or 20
1
2
3
Reflex output channel 1 (channel 3) :
Output Q0
Output Q1
15
16
___________________________________________________________________________
3/12
Setting up counter modules 3
A
3.4-4 20-pin HE10 type connector for a TSX CTY 2C module
This connector is used for connecting auxiliary inputs, outputs, encoder power supplies and other sensors.
The TSX CTY 2C module has a single HE10 connector for channels 0 and 1.
5 VDC or 10...30 VDC encoder supply inputs
10...30 VDC encoder reference voltage
Preset input channel 0
Enable input / Output Q2 channel 0
Read input channel 0
Output Q3 channel 0
Preset input channel 1
Enable input / Output Q2 channel 1
Read input channel 1
Output Q3 channel 1
Reflex outputs channel 0
Reflex outputs channel 1
Sensor / preactuator supply for
24 VDC auxiliary I/O
+5 VDC
– 0 VDC
+10...30 VDC
1
3
Q2
Q2
IPres0
IVal0
ICapt0
Q3
IPres1
IVal1
ICapt1
Q3
Q0
Q1
Q0
+24 VDC
Q1
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
2
8
10
16
18
4
6
12
14
I0
I2
I0
I2
19 20
– 0 VDC
Supply feedback to connector(s)
15-pin SUB-D
I1
I3
I1
I3
Auxiliary inputs
24 VDC signals
Auxiliary inputs channel 0 :
Preset IPres0
Enable IEna0 / Output Q2
Read IRead0
Output Q3
Pins
7
8
5
6
Power supplies Pins
Encoder supply :
+ 5 VDC
- 0 VDC
+10...30 VDC 3
Encoder reference voltage 10...30 VDC 4
1
2
Auxiliary inputs channel 1 :
Preset IPres1
Enable IEna1 / Output Q2
Read IRead1
Output Q3
Reflex output channel 0 :
Output Q0
Output Q1
9
10
11
12
Sensor supply :
+ 24 VDC
- 0 VDC
17 or 19
18 or 20
13
14
Reflex output channel 1 :
Output Q0
Output Q1
15
16
___________________________________________________________________________
3/13
A
3.5
Connection of proximity type counting sensors
3.5-1 Connection principle
TSX CTY 2A TSX CTY 2C
channel 1
Counting sensor 24 VDC supply connection
1
TELEFAST 2
ABE-7CPA01
2
Counting sensor connections
1 TSX CCP S15 (2.5 m long) or TSX CCP S15050 (0.5 m long) or TSX CCP S15100
(1 m long) cable, with high density 15-pin SUB-D connector and standard 15-pin
SUB-D connector. This cable is used to connect the counter channel to the
TELEFAST 2 connection sub-base (ABE-7CPA01). It carries the various counter channel signals.
2 TELEFAST 2 connection sub-base, reference ABE-7CPA01 :
This is used to connect the counting sensors and their power supply for the relevant channel.
Note
The connection of channels 2 and 3 of a TSX CTY 4A module is identical to that of channels 0 and 1.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/14
Setting up counter modules 3
A
3.5-2 Connection of counting sensors and their power supply
TSX CCP S15 (2.5 m) or TSX CCP S15050 (0.5 m) or TSX CCP S15100 (1 m) channel 0
+ + – –
+ + – –
Counting sensor 24
VDC supply connection
TELEFAST 2
ABE-7CPA01
TSX CTY 2A TSX CTY 2C
Counting sensor connection (proximity sensor)
GND 4 1 8 10 14 16 18
(1)
25 27 26 28
+
A
– +
B
– +
Z
–
GND 4 1 8 10 14 16 18 25 27 26 28
Connection of
3-wire proximity sensor with PNP output
+
A
– +
B
– +
Z
–
Connection of
3-wire proximity sensor with NPN output
GND 4 1 8 10 14 16 18 25 27 26 28
Connection of
2-wire proximity sensor
Note (1)
A B Z
If proximity type counting sensors are used, the EPSR input (encoder power supply return) must respect polarity. To do this, connect :
• EPSR (terminal 18) to the 24VDC positive of the sensor power supply (terminal 26 or 28),
3/15
A
3.5-3 Wiring recommendations
Inputs IPres, IEna and IRead are fast inputs which should be connected to the sensor by twisted pair if it is a volt-free contact, or by shielded cables if it is a 2 or 3-wire proximity sensor.
This module is fitted as standard with devices to protect against short-circuits or polarity inversions. Power supplies must, however, be protected by fuses in series. These fuses must be "fast blow" type with 1A maximum rating.
Important : wiring solid state outputs Q0 to Q3
The actuator connected to outputs Q0 to Q3 has its common point at the 0V of the power supply. If, due to a poor contact or accidental disconnection, there is a break in the 0V supply of the output amplifier, while the common point of the actuators remains connected to the 0V supply; there may be an output current from the amplifier of a few mA which is sufficient to keep certain low-power actuators energized.
+ + – –
+ + – – channel 0
IPres0 IVal0/Q2 ICapt0 Q3 Q0 Q1 IPres1 IVal1/Q2 channel1
ICapt1 Q3 Q0 Q1
204 104
+
205 105
+
206 106
+
107 307 112 312 113 313 208 108
+
209 109
+
210 110
+
111 311 114 314 115 315
Rl Rl Rl Rl Rl Rl
105 305 109 309
Rl Rl
Connecting using TELEFAST :
This is the most reliable type of connection provided the actuator common is connected to the bar of the 2•• common points (jumper in position 1-2). In this case there can be no break in the module common without breaking the actuator common.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/16
Setting up counter modules 3
A
3.6
Connection of encoder type counting sensors
3.6-1 Connection principle
A TSX CTY 4A module is wired as follows. For a TSX CTY 2A or TSX CTY 2C module, only the elements relating to channels 0 and 1 should be connected.
Encoders channel 0
TSX CTY 2C TSX CTY 4A channel 2
TSX CTY 2A channel 0 channel 0
Encoders
1 1 1 channel 1
1 channel 3 channel 1 channel 1
Description of the various connection elements
1 Equipment for connecting the encoder to the standard 15-pin SUB-D connector, located on the TSX CTY 2A / 4A / 2C module. In view of the different types of encoder, the connection equipment is the user's responsibility and consists of :
• a connector for the encoder connection (depends on the encoder used; generally a 12-pin female DIN connector),
• a standard 15-pin male SUB-D connector for connection to the 15-pin female
SUB-D connector on the TSX CTY 2A / 4A / 2C module. This connector is available with the reference TSX CAP S15,
• a cable :
- twisted pairs (26 gauge) with shielding for an incremental encoder with RS 422 standard line driver outputs or absolute encoder,
- multicore (24 gauge) with shielding for an incremental encoder with Totem Pole outputs.
The cable shielding is of the "braid + strip" type. Contact between the "braid + strip", and the ground for each connector must be secured by clamping around the whole circumference of the cable.
The connection of this cable to the two connectors varies depending on the type of power supply used by the encoder (5 VDC or 10...30 VDC) and the type of outputs
(RS 422, Totem Pole). Different types of connection are used as examples on the following pages.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/17
A
3.6-2 Connection of an encoder to a TSX CTY 2A / 4A / 2C module
TSX CTY 2A TSX CTY2C
Channel 0
Cable 0
Encoder
Connection example for incremental encoder with RS 422 / RS 485 line driver outputs
Encoder characteristics
• supply voltage : 5 VDC,
• output voltage : 5 VDC differential,
• output stage : RS 422/485 standard line driver.
Simplified schematic
+5 VDC
15
CTY module
EPSR
13
IA +24 VDC
9
+
A IA +5 VDC
Incremental encoder
1
A IA –
–
0 VDC
2
8
Standard 15-pin SUB-D connector
Schematic for channel connection
Encoder
DIN connector
Cable 1
(encoder/TSX CTY •• connection)
TSX CTY ••
A
A
B
B
Z
Z
EPSR*
9
10
11
12
+
13
–
14
Standard 15-pin SUB-D
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
3
4
5
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
7
2
15
15
(1) 8
8
* EPSR = encoder power supply return
3/18
Setting up counter modules 3
A
Connection example for incremental encoder with Totem Pole outputs
Encoder characteristics
• supply voltage : 10...30 VDC,
• output voltage : 10...30 VDC,
• output stage : Totem Pole.
Simplified schematic
+10...30 VDC
7
EPSR
13
CTY module
Incremental encoder
+
–
A
15
IA +24 VDC
9
IA +5 VDC
1
IA –
2
0 VDC
8
Standard 15-pin
SUB-D connector
Schematic for channel connection
Encoder
EPSR*
+
–
A
B
Z
TSX CTY ••
Standard 15-pin SUB-D
DIN connector
Cable 1
(encoder/TSX CTY •• connection)
9
1
1
9
2
2
10
10
3
3
11
11
4
4
12
12
5
5
13
13
6
6
14
14
(1)
7
7
15
15
8
8
* EPSR = encoder power supply return
If the encoder does not have a power supply return, the EPSR input should be linked on the encoder side to the positive of the power supply.
(1) This link should be made directly if the encoder is isolated from ground.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/19
A
Connection example for incremental encoder with NPN open collector outputs
Encoder characteristics
• supply voltage : 24 VDC
• output voltage : 24 VDC,
• output stage : NPN open collector.
Simplified schematic
+
+10...30 VDC
7
CTY module
EPSR
13
Incremental encoder
–
Schematic for channel connection
15
IA +24 VDC
9
IA +5 VDC
1
IA –
0 VDC
2
8
Standard 15-pin SUB-D connector
Encoder
Z
EPSR*
+
A
B
–
TSX CTY ••
DIN connector
Cable 1
(encoder/TSX CTY •• connection)
Standard 15-pin SUB-D
1
9
9
1
2
2
10
10
3
3
11
11
4
4
12
12
5
5
13
13
6
6
14
14
(1)
7
7
15
15
8
8
* EPSR = encoder power supply return
If the encoder does not have a power supply return, the EPSR input should be linked on the encoder side to the positive of the power supply.
(1) This link should be made directly if the encoder is isolated from ground.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/20
Setting up counter modules 3
A
Connection example for incremental encoder with PNP open collector outputs
Encoder characteristics
• supply voltage : 24 VDC
• output voltage : 24 VDC,
• output stage : PNP open collector.
Simplified schematic
+24 VDC
7
EPSR
13
CTY module
+
Incremental encoder
15
IA +24 VDC
9
–
IA +5 VDC
1
IA –
0 VDC
2
8
Standard 15-pin SUB-D connector
Schematic for channel connection
Encoder
A
B
Z
EPSR*
+
–
TSX CTY ••
DIN connector
Cable 1
(encoder/TSX CTY •• connection)
Standard 15-pin SUB-D
1
9
9
1
2
2
10
10
3
3
11
11
4
4
12
12
5
5
13
13
6
6
14
14
(1)
7
7
15
15
8
8
* EPSR = encoder power supply return
If the encoder does not have a power supply return, the EPSR input should be linked on the encoder side to the positive of the power supply.
(1) This link should be made directly if the encoder is isolated from ground.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/21
A
Connection example for serial output or parallel output absolute encoder, via
TELEFAST adaptor ABE-7CPA11 (TSX CTY 2C module only)
Encoder characteristics
• supply voltage : 5 VDC or 10...30 VDC
• output stages : differential line driver.
Simplified schematic
+10...30 VDC
7
CTY module
EPSR
15
13
Alim +
Absolute encoder
Alim -
SSIData +
SSIData -
SSICLK +
SSICLK -
0 VDC
1
2
6
14
8
Standard 15-pin SUB-D connector
Schematic for channel connection
DIN connector
Encoder
TSX CTY 2C
Cable 1
(encoder/TSX CTY 2C connection)
SSIData
Standard 15-pin SUB-D
9
1
1
2
9
EPSR*
SSICLK
+
–
10
11
12
13
14
4
5
6
2
3
5
6
7
3
4
10
11
12
13
14
7
15
15
(1) 8
8
* EPSR = encoder power supply return
If the encoder does not have a power supply return, the EPSR input should be linked on the encoder side to the positive of the power supply.
(1) This link should be made directly if the encoder is isolated from ground.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/22
Setting up counter modules 3
A
3.7
Connection of the sensors to auxiliary inputs and outputs
3.7-1 Connection principle
A TSX CTY 4A module is wired as follows. For a TSX CTY 2A or TSX CTY 2C module, a single TELEFAST sub-base is connected (channel 0 and 1).
TSX CTY 2C TSX CTY 4A TSX CTY 2A
TSX CDP ••2 ribbon cable (1) or TSX CDP ••3 cable (2)
2
24 VDC sensor supply
2
24 VDC sensor supply
TELEFAST 2
ABE-7H16R20
TELEFAST 2
ABE-7H16R20
1 1
Connection : Connection
• encoder power supply (5 VDC or 10...30 VDC) • encoder power supply (5 VDC or 10...30 VDC)
• preset sensor channels 2 and 3 • preset sensor channels 0 and 1
• counter enable sensor channels 2 and 3
• read sensor channels 2 and 3
• counter enable sensor channels 0 and 1
• read sensor channels 0 and 1
• reflex outputs channels 2 and 3 • reflex outputs channels 0 and 1
Notes
• It is not essential but it is advisable to use a discrete TELEFAST connection sub-base in order to facilitate connection of the power supplies, sensors and preactuators to the auxiliary inputs and outputs.
(1) TSX CDP 102 : 1 m long,
TSX CDP 202 : 2 m long,
TSX CDP 302 : 3 m long.
(2) TSX CDP 053 : 0.5 m long,
TSX CDP 103 : 1 m long,
TSX CDP 203 : 2 m long,
TSX CDP 303 : 3 m long,
TSX CDP 503 : 5 m long.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/23
A
Description of the various connection elements
1 TELEFAST 2 connection sub-base : ABE-7H16R20. It is used for rapid connection of the :
• 24 VDC supply for the sensors connected to the auxiliary I/O,
• encoder power supply (for encoder type counting sensors),
• sensors to the auxiliary I/O (preset, enable, read),
• preactuators.
Note :accessory ABE-7BV20 (sold in lots of 5) is used for connecting the commons.
2 TSX CDP ••2 sheathed rolled ribbon cable or TSX CDP ••3 connection cable.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/24
Setting up counter modules 3
A
3.7-2 Connection of sensors and their power supply
These are connected using a TELEFAST 2 connection sub-base, reference ABE-
7H16R20 :
TSX CTY 2C TSX CTY 2A/4A
+ +
24 VDC sensor power supply connection
+ +
Channels
0 and 1
ABE-7H16R20.
TSX CDP ••2 ribbon cable
TSX CDP ••3 or cable
Power supply connection
Encoder supplied at
10...30 VDC
100 101 102 103
10...30 VDC
10...30 VDC encoder reference voltage
ABE-7BV20
(negative common)
Connection of sensors to auxiliary I/O channel 0
IPres0 IEna0/Q2 IRead0 Q3 Q0 Q1 channel 1
IPres1 IEna1/Q2 IRead1 Q3 Q0 Q1
204 104
+
205 105
+
206 106
+
208
+
108 209
+
109 210
+
110
105 305
Mechanical contact
109 309
Preactuator
204 104 205 105 206 106
+ + +
208 108 209 109 210
+ + +
110
Encoder supplied at
5 VDC
100 101 102
105 305
204 104
+
304
205 105
+
305
206 106
+
306
109 309
2-wire PNP proximity sensor
208 108
+
308
209 109
+
309
210 110
+
310
5 VDC
105 305 109 309
3-wire PNP proximity sensor
Note
The connection of channels 2 and 3 of a TSX CTY 4A module is identical to that of channels 0 and 1.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/25
A
3.8
General installation rules
3.8-1 Installation
It is not advisable to connect or disconnect the standard 15-pin SUB-D connectors of TSX
CTY 2A / 4A / 2C modules with the encoder and sensor supplies present, as this could damage the encoder. Certain encoders cannot withstand a sudden power-up or simultaneous disconnection of the signals and power supplies.
3.8-2 General wiring instructions
Cross section of wires
Wires of a sufficient cross sectional area must be used in order to avoid voltage drops
(mainly at 5 V) and temperature rises.
Example of voltage drops for encoders with a 5 V power supply and a 100 meter length of cable.
Wire cross section
0.08 mm 2 (28 gauge)
0.12 mm2 (26 gauge)
0.22 mm2 (24 gauge)
0.34 mm 2 (22 gauge)
0.5 mm 2
1 mm 2
-
-
50 mA
1.1 V
0.25 V
0.17 V
0.09 V
Encoder consumption
100 mA
2.2 V
1.4 V
0.8 V
0.5 V
0.34 V
0.17 V
-
-
150 mA
3.3 V
0.75 V
0.51 V
0.24 V
-
-
200 mA
4.4 V
1 V
0.68 V
0.34 V
Connection cables
All cables carrying power supplies to the counting sensors (encoders, proximity sensors, etc) and signals must :
• be kept apart from power cables,
• be shielded with the shielding connected to the mechanical ground on both the PLC and the encoder,
• never carry signals other than counting signals and power supplies relating to the counting sensors.
The module/encoder connecting cable should be as short as possible in order to avoid creating loops causing coupling capacitances which can interfere with operation.
Note :
Position the outward and return lines for a signal in the same cable as the power supplies if necessary. In order to do this, it is preferable to use twisted pair cables.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/26
Setting up counter modules 3
A
3.8-3 Encoder and auxiliary sensor supplies
Encoder supply
This must be :
• reserved exclusively for supplying the encoder, to avoid interference pulses which could disrupt encoders with sensitive electronics,
• as near to the TELEFAST 2 sub-base as possible in order to reduce voltage drops and coupling with other cables,
• protected against short-circuits and overloads by fast blow fuses,
• have sufficient endurance to micro-cuts.
Auxiliary sensor supply
See the general installation rules for discrete modules.
Important
The - 0VDC polarity of the encoder and auxiliary sensor power supplies must be connected to ground ( s ) as close as possible to the power supplies.
Cables carrying supply voltages should have their shielding connected to ground ( s ).
3.8-4 Software installation
Software installation and the language objects associated with the various counting functions are described in the counting manual.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/27
A
___________________________________________________________________________
3/28
4 Appendix
4.1
TELEFAST 2 connections : ABE-7CPA01
4.1-1 Presentation
The TELEFAST 2 connection sub-base (ABE-7CPA01) transforms a standard 15-pin female SUB-D connector to a screw terminal block connector with :
• 32 terminals on two rows for connecting the various sensors and their power supply,
• 4 terminals for onward connection (2 GND terminals + 2 N1 terminals for special connections),
• 4 terminals for connecting the sensor power supply.
This enables rapid connection of the proximity type sensors to a counter channel on TSX
CTY 2A, TSX CTY 4A and TSX CTY 2C modules.
A
TSX CTY 2A
TSX CTY 4A
TSX CTY 2C
TSX CCP S15 (2.5 m) or TSX CCP S15050 (0.5 m) or TSX CCP S15100 (1 m)
ABE-7CPA01
Sensors for counting
A 9-pin SUB-D connector is used to transfer information to an Altivar drive when using this sub-base with analog I/O.
___________________________________________________________________________
4/1
A
4.1-2 Wiring diagram
15 X1
X2
4.1-3 Dimensions and mounting
• Dimensions
67
58 142.4
15
• Mounting
The ABE-7CPA01 connection sub-base is mounted on 35 mm DIN rails.
___________________________________________________________________________
4/2
Appendix 4
A
4.1-4 Availability of counting signals on the TELEFAST screw terminal block
Counter channel used with proximity type sensors
Notes
• Each TELEFAST 2 ABE-7CPA01 connection sub-base is supplied with 6 labels which enable each sub-base to be identified individually according to its intended use.
• It is possible to add an optional bar, to provide, for example, a GND common.
___________________________________________________________________________
4/3
A
4.1-5 Correspondence between TELEFAST ABE-7CPA01 terminal blocks and
15-pin SUB-D connectors
30
31
32
27
28
29
24
25
26
20
21
22
23
14
15
16
10
11
12
13
17
18
19
TELEFAST Standard 15-pin screw term. block SUB-D connector
C
(Terminal no.) (Pin no.)
1 2
2
3
1
2
9 4
5
6 10
7
8
9
3
11
4
12
5
13
6
15
14
7
8
TSX CTY 2A / 4A
IA -
IA + 5 V RS 422C
IA -
IA + 24 VDC
Type of signals
TSX CTY 2C
IA -
IA + 5 V RS 422C
IA -
IA + 24 VDC
IB + 5 V RS 422C
IB + 24 VDC
IB -
IZ + 5 V RS 422C
IZ + 24 VDC
IZ -
IB + 5 V RS 422C
IB + 24 VDC
IB -
IZ + 5 V RS 422C
IZ + 24 VDC
IZ -
Encoder power supply return (EPSR)
Reserved
+5VDC encoder supply input
Reserved
+ 10...30 VDC encoder supply input
- 0 VDC encoder supply input
+ 24 V DC sensor supply output
- 0 V DC sensor supply output
+ 24 V DC sensor supply output
___________________________________________________________________________
4/4
Appendix 4
A
4.2
TELEFAST 2 connection sub-base : ABE-7H16R20
4.2-1 Presentation
The TELEFAST 2 connection sub-base (ABE-7H16R20) transforms a 20-pin HE10 connector to a screw terminal block connector for the rapid connection of the sensors and power supplies relating to the auxiliary inputs of TSX CTY 2A / 4A / 2C counter modules.
TSX CTY 4A
TSX CDP xxx (1)
TSX CTY 2A
TELEFAST 2
ABE-7H16R20
TSX CDP xxx (1)
TSX CTY 2C
Auxiliary input sensors
TSX CDP xxx (1)
(1) TSX CDP ••2 ribbon cable or TSX CDP ••3 cable.
Note :
TELEFAST 2 connection sub-bases for discrete I/O are described in the discrete I/O installation manual.
___________________________________________________________________________
4/5
A
4.2-2 Availability of signals on the TELEFAST screw terminal block
The terminal block below represents the terminal block of the ABE-7H16R20 sub-base.
(1)
(2)
(1) On the ABE-7H16R20 sub-base, the position of the jumper defines the polarity of all the
2•• terminals :
• Jumper in position 1 and 2 : terminals 200 to 215 have positive polarity,
• Jumper in position 3 and 4 : terminals 200 to 215 have negative polarity,
(2) On the ABE-7H16R20 sub-base it is possible to add an optional ABE-7BV20 bar to create a second sensor common (+ or - selected by the user).
Note :
Connection of sensors and power supply on ABE-7H16R20 sub-base is described in the discrete
I/O installation manual.
___________________________________________________________________________
4/6
Appendix 4
A
4.2-3 Correspondence between TELEFAST ABE-7H16R20 terminal blocks and HE10 connector
TELEFAST screw term. blk
(Terminal no.)
100
101
102
103
20-pin HE10 connector
(Terminal no.)
1
2
3
4
TSX CTY 2A /A
+ 5 VDC
- 0 VDC
+ 10…30 VDC
Type of signals
TSX CTY 2C
+ 5 VDC
- 0 VDC
+ 10…30 VDC
Type of signal
Encoder power supply
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
+ 24 VDC
- 0 VDC
+ 24 VDC
- 0 VDC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
18
19
20
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
IPres 0/2
IEna 0/2
IRead 0/2
IPres 1/3
IEna 1/3
10...30 VDC encoder reference voltage
IPres 0
IEna 0 / output
Q2 channel 0
IRead 0
Output Q3 chan. 0
IPres1
IEna1 / output
Auxiliary inputs channs 0 / 2
Auxiliary I/O channels
IRead 1/3
Q2 channel 1
IRead 1
Output Q3 chann. 1
1 / 3
Output Q0 chann. 0/2 Output Q0 chann. 0 Reflex outputs
Output Q1 chann. 0/2 Output Q1 chann. 0 channels 0 / 2
Output Q0 chann. 1/3 Output Q0 chann. 1 Reflex outputs
Output Q1 chann. 1/3 Output Q1 chann. 1 channels 1 / 3
Auxiliary I/O supply
Terminals 200 to 215 at + 24 VDC
Terminals 200 to 215 at - 0 VDC
200...215
Connecting sensor commons to :
+ 24 VDC if terminals 1 & 2 are linked
- 0 VDC if terminals 3 & 4 are linked
300...315
Terminals may be used as a sensor common on optional ABE-7BV20 bar
___________________________________________________________________________
4/7
A
4.3
TELEFAST 2 connection and adaptor sub-base : ABE-7CPA11
4.3-1 Presentation
The TELEFAST 2 connection and adaptor sub-base ABE-7CPA11 is used to connect parallel output absolute encoders to the TSX CTY 2C counter module. It converts the position value given by the parallel output absolute encoder to serial data. The absolute encoder must be coded in pure binary or Gray with a maximum of 24 data bits.
It is possible to connect 2 parallel output absolute encoders to the same TELEFAST adaptor. Moreover, connecting several ABE-7CPA11 sub-bases (maximum 4) in series can be used to multiplex up to 4 parallel output absolute encoders on the same counter channel (position acquisition).
TSX CTY 2C
TELEFAST
ABE-7CPA11
Parallel output absolute encoder
4.3-2 Physical description
1 Standard 15-pin SUB-D connector for connecting the
TELEFAST sub-base to the TSX CTY 2C module.
2 Standard 15-pin SUB-D connector for connecting several TELEFAST sub-bases (maximum 4) in series.
3 Screw terminal block for connecting parallel output absolute encoder(s) (maximum 2).
It is possible to distribute power supplies using additional snap on terminal blocks : ABE-7BV10 (10 terminals) or ABE-7BV20 (20 terminals).
1
4 TELEFAST diagnostics indicator lamp. This green indicator lamp is on when the TELEFAST is supplied with power.
4 5
5 Protective fuse (1A fast-blow type) for the 10...30 V supply.
6 Micro-switches for configuring the encoder(s) (number / type, etc).
3
2
6
___________________________________________________________________________
4/8
Appendix 4
A
4.3-3 Characteristics of the TELEFAST sub-base
• General characteristics
Parameters
Permissible voltage at 10-30 VDC
Permissible voltage at 5 VDC
Maximum frequency of change of state of least significant bit
Frequency for reading the serial frame
Current consumption (excluding encoders)
Power dissipation
Values
11...30 V
5...6 V
75 kHz
150 kHz ... 1 MHz typically : 90 mA max. : 130 mA typically : 450 mW max. : 1.5 W
Encoder power supply return monitoring :
• on + supply
• on - supply
Insulation resistance
Dielectric strength
Operating temperature
Relative humidity
Storage temperature
Operating altitude
-15 % Vsupply
+15 % Vsupply
> 10 M
Ω
at 500 VDC
1000 Vrms. 50 / 60 Hz for 1 min
0...60 °C
5%...95% without condensation
-25 °C...+70 °C
0...2000 m
• Characteristics of encoder read inputs (in0 to in23)
Parameters
Logic
Values positive or negative (1)
Compatibility with encoder outputs 11-30 V Totem-pole outputs
5V TTL outputs
11-30 V NPN open collector transistor outputs
Maximum permissible voltage on inputs
Max. length of cable between encoder and TELEFAST
+30 V
200 m (2)
VIL input voltage
VIH input voltage
0 V < VIL < 2.5 V
3.9 V < VIH < 30 V
(1) Positive logic :
Negative logic : voltage < 2.5 V -> state 0, voltage > 3.9 V -> state 1, voltage < 2.5 V -> state 1, voltage > 3.9 V -> state 0.
(2) 50 m max. with encoders with pure binary coding and NPN open collector outputs and derating depending on the length.
___________________________________________________________________________
4/9
A
• Characteristics of discrete address inputs (AD0, AD1)
Parameters
Logic
Voltage limit
• max. permissible voltage limit
Nominal values
• voltage
• current
Voltage at ON state
Current at ON state at 11 V
Voltage at OFF state
Current at OFF state
Input impedance for U nominal
Response time
Type of inputs
IEC 1131 conformity
Values
Positive
30 V
34 V (1 hr per 24 hrs)
24 V
7 mA
> 11 V
> 3 mA
< 5 V
< 2 mA
3.6 k
Ω
25
µ s...50
µ s resistive type 1
• Characteristics of encoder 3-state control outputs (3ST0, 3ST1)
Parameters
Output voltage
Nominal current
Max. voltage drop
Max. current
Protection against overvoltages and short-circuits
Values encoder supply encoder supply / 3 k
Ω
< 0.5 V
10 mA no
___________________________________________________________________________
4/10
Appendix 4
A
4.3-4 Connecting the TELEFAST sub-base
• Pinout of 15-pin SUB-D connectors
+ – – +
TELEFAST
ABE-7CPA11
DATA+
DATA-
MAE
AD0ME
AD1ME
CLKS+
10...30 VDC
0VDC
Left connector
6
7
3
4
5
1
2
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
8
AD0E
AD1E nc nc
EPSR
CLKS-
5 VDC
DATA+
DATA-
MAS
AD0MES
AD1MES
CLKS+ nc
0VDC
Right connector
1
2
3
9
4
5
7
8
6
12
13
14
15
10
11
AD0ES
AD1ES nc nc
EPSR
CLKSnc
Supply
0 VDC
10...30 VDC
0 VDC
Addressing encoders
• inter-TELEFAST bus (Input) :
AD0E
AD1E
AD0ME
AD1ME
MAE
Encoder power supply return
EPSR
Serial link
• data outputs :
DATA+
DATA-
• clock inputs :
CLKS+
CLKS-
Supply
8
7
15 0 VDC
9
10
4
5
3
Addressing encoders
• inter-TELEFAST bus (Output) :
AD0ES
AD1ES
AD0MES
AD1MES
MAS
Encoder power supply return
13 EPSR
1
2
6
14
Serial link
• data outputs :
DATA+
DATA-
• clock inputs :
CLKS+
CLKS-
8
6
14
1
2
9
10
4
5
3
13
___________________________________________________________________________
4/11
A
• Connecting encoders supplied at 10...30 V
24 VDC supply
+ – – +
TELEFAST ABE-7CPA11 local
GND
0 V
Q1
Q0
TSX CTY 2C
(see note)
Connection to cable shielding
Parallel output absolute encoder
Signals Meaning Terminal no.
GND
+10...30V
encoder ground
+ terminal of encoder supply
0V - terminal of encoder supply in0 to in 23 encoder outputs
DEF
3ST0
3ST1
AD0, AD1 encoder fault output encoder 0 output inhibit command (for multiplexing) encoder 1 output inhibit command (for multiplexing) encoder multiplexing command
1...24
25
26
27
28, 30
COM
+EPSR common of signals AD0 and AD1
+EPSR encoder power supply return - (connect to 0 V if no monitor circuit)
32 encoder power supply return + (connect to +10...30 V if no monitor circuit) 29
31
Note : refer to the wiring instructions and recommendations for encoder inputs (section 4.3-5).
___________________________________________________________________________
4/12
• Connecting encoders supplied at 5 V
5 VDC supply
+ – – +
TELEFAST ABE-7CPA11
Appendix 4
A local
GND
0 V
Q1
Q0
TSX CTY 2C
(see note)
Connection to cable shielding
Parallel output absolute encoder
Signals Meaning Terminal no.
GND
+5V
0V encoder ground
+ terminal of encoder supply
- terminal of encoder supply in0 to in 23 encoder outputs
DEF encoder fault output
3ST0
3ST1 encoder 0 output inhibit command (for multiplexing) encoder 1 output inhibit command (for multiplexing)
AD0, AD1
COM encoder multiplexing command common of signals AD0 and AD1
+EPSR encoder power supply return + (connect to +5 V if no monitor circuit)
+EPSR encoder power supply return - (connect to 0 V if no monitor circuit)
1...24
25
26
27
28, 30
32
29
31
Note : refer to the wiring instructions and recommendations for encoder outputs (section 4.3-5).
___________________________________________________________________________
4/13
A
• Example of multiplexing of encoders supplied at 5 V
+ – – +
TELEFAST ABE-7CPA11
(2)
Parallel output absolute encoders
0 V
Q1
Q0
TSX CTY 2C
(1) to encoder 1 to encoder 0 to encoder 0 or 1
IMPORTANT
For multiplexing, the same type of parallel output encoders must be used :
- same number of data bits,
- same supply (encoders are supplied at either 10...30 VDC, or 5 VDC).
Note : if the encoder supply monitor circuit is not used, the +EPSR terminal (+ encoder power supply return) must be connected to the +10...30 V or +5 V and the -EPSR terminal
(- encoder power supply return) must be connected to the 0 V.
(1) It is not essential to use reflex outputs Q0 and Q1 of the TSX CTY 2C module to address the encoders; this operation can be performed by 2 outputs of a discrete module. In this case, the output common must be connected to the COM input of the TELEFAST ABE-
7CPA11.
(2) The configuration micro-switch must be positioned according to the number of encoders connected to the sub-base (OFF for 1 encoder or ON for 2 encoders).
___________________________________________________________________________
4/14
Appendix 4
A
• Connection example : each TSX CTY 2C module channel is connected to a single TELEFAST sub-base
TSX CTY 2C
TELEFAST 0
ABE-7CPA11
Configuration :
1 encoder per sub-base
Channel 0
Channel 1
TSX CCP S15 (2.5 m) or TSX CCP S15100 (1 m) or TSX CCP S15050 (0.5 m) cable
Parallel output absolute encoder
TSX CDP••2 ribbon cable or TSX CDP••3 cable
TELEFAST 1
ABE-7CPA11
Configuration :
2 encoders per sub-base
TELEFAST
ABE-7H16R20
Encoder 1
Encoder 0
Parallel output absolute encoders
Encoder addressing (AD0, COM) (1)
Note
(1) It is not necessary to wire the encoder addressing for the TELEFAST 0 sub-base (channel 0), as it has a default address of 00. Encoder addressing for the TELEFAST 1 sub-base (channel
1) is as follows :
0
1
AD1 AD0 Action
0 0 read encoder 0
1
1
0
1 read encoder 1 no read operation no read operation
___________________________________________________________________________
4/15
A
• Connection example : 2 TELEFAST sub-bases are connected on a single channel
TSX CTY 2C
TELEFAST 0
ABE-7CPA11
Channel 1
Configuration :
2 encoders per sub-base
Channel 1
TSX CDP••2 ribbon cable or TSX CDP••3 cable
TSX CCP S15 (2.5 m) or TSX CCP S15100 (1 m) or TSX CCP S15050 (0.5 m) cable
Encoder 0
TELEFAST 1
ABE-7CPA11
Encoder 1
Parallel output absolute encoder
Configuration :
2 encoders per sub-base
TELEFAST
ABE-7H16R20
Encoder 1
Encoder 0
Parallel output absolute encoder
Encoder addressing channel 1 (AD0, AD1, COM) (1)
Note
(1) Encoder addressing is as follows :
0
1
AD1 AD0 Action
0 0 read encoder 0 of TELEFAST 0
1
1
0
1 read encoder 1 of TELEFAST 0 read encoder 0 of TELEFAST 1 read encoder 1 of TELEFAST 1
___________________________________________________________________________
4/16
Appendix 4
A
• Connection example : 3 TELEFAST sub-bases are connected on a single channel
TELEFAST 0
ABE-7CPA11 Configuration :
1 encoder per sub-base
TSX CCP S15 (2.5 m) or TSX CCP S15100 (1 m) or TSX CCP S15050 (0.5 m) cable
TSX CTY 2C
Parallel output absolute encoder
TELEFAST 1
ABE-7CPA11
Channel 0
Channel 1
TSX CDP••2 ribbon cable or
TSX CDP••3 cable
Parallel output absolute encoder
TELEFAST 2
ABE-7CPA11
Configuration :
1 encoder per sub-base
Configuration :
2 encoders per sub-base
TELEFAST
ABE-7H16R20
Encoder 1
Encoder 0
Parallel output absolute encoder
Encoder addressing (AD0, AD1, COM) (1)
Note
(1) Encoder addressing is as follows :
0
1
AD1 AD0 Action
0 0 read encoder of TELEFAST 0
1
1
0
1 read encoder of TELEFAST 1 read encoder 0 of TELEFAST 2 read encoder 1 of TELEFAST 2
If, for example, 2 encoders are wired on TELEFAST 0 and one encoder is wired on TELEFAST
2, the addressing becomes : 00-read encoder 0 of TELEFAST 0, 01-read encoder 1 of
TELEFAST 0, 10-read encoder of TELEFAST 1 and 11-read encoder of TELEFAST 2.
___________________________________________________________________________
4/17
A
• Connection example : 4 TELEFAST sub-bases are connected on a single channel
TELEFAST 0
ABE-7CPA11
Configuration :
1 encoder per sub-base
TSX CCP S15 (2.5 m) or TSX CCP S15100 (1 m) or TSX CCP S15050 (0.5 m) cable
TSX CTY 2C
Parallel output absolute encoder
TELEFAST 1
ABE-7CPA11
Channel 0
Configuration :
1 encoder per sub-base
TSX CDP••2 ribbon cable or TSX CDP••3 cable
Channel 1
Parallel output absolute encoder
TELEFAST 2
ABE-7CPA11
TSX CCP S15 (2.5 m) or TSX CCP S15100 (1 m) or TSX CCP S15050 (0.5 m) cable
TELEFAST
ABE-7H16R20 Parallel output absolute encoder
TELEFAST 3
ABE-7CPA11
Configuration :
1 encoder per sub-base
Configuration :
1 encoder per sub-base
Parallel output absolute encoder
Encoder addressing (AD0, AD1, COM) (1)
Note
(1) Encoder addressing is as follows :
0
1
AD1 AD0 Action
0 0 read encoder of TELEFAST 0
1
0 read encoder of TELEFAST 1 read encoder of TELEFAST 2
1 1 read encoder of TELEFAST 3
___________________________________________________________________________
4/18
Appendix 4
A
4.3-5 Wiring instructions and recommendations
IMPORTANT
All connections or disconnections on the TELEFAST must be performed
WITH THE POWER OFF (encoders, connection to the counter module, connections between TELEFAST sub-bases).
• Connecting TELEFAST 0 to the counter module and daisy-chaining TELEFAST sub-bases
TSX CCP S15 (2.5 m), TSX CCP S15100 (1 m) and TSX CCP S15050 (0.5 m) cables are offered for connecting TELEFAST sub-bases to each other or for connecting
TELEFAST 0 to the TSX CTY 2C module. The user can, however, use longer connections by using the wiring kit, reference TSX CAP S15••, and respecting the following rule if encoders are supplied at 5 V : if the connection between the counter module and the TELEFAST 0 is no longer than 100 m, use a 28-gauge wire (0.08
mm²). If it is > 100 m, use a 22-gauge wire minimum (0.34 mm 2 ). However, to limit the voltage drop in the 0 V, due to the encoder supply current, it is advisable to wire the
0 V in the following way :
24 VDC supply
+
24 V
-
+ – – +
TELEFAST ABE-7CPA11
+24 V encoder 0 V encoder
___________________________________________________________________________
4/19
A
• Length of cables between counter module and TELEFAST
The total length of the connection between the counter module and the TELEFAST sub-bases (sum of lengths between the counter channel and the first TELEFAST subbase and between the various TELEFAST sub-bases) must not exceed 200 m, with a maximum cable length between 2 TELEFAST sub-bases of 50 m.
If the total distance between the first and last TELEFAST sub-base exceeds 20 m, a line terminator must be installed on the right-hand connector of the last TELEFAST sub-base, by inserting an end of line plug (resistance of 220
Ω
between pins 1 and
2 of the connector).
The following table indicates the clock frequencies for the serial transmission, depending on the total length of the connection :
Cable length Clock frequency for the serial transmission
< 10 m
< 20 m
1 MHz
750 kHz
< 50 m
< 99 m
< 150 m
< 200 m
500 kHz
375 kHz
200 kHz (By default)
150 kHz
• Protection of encoder supply
The operating voltage of the encoder(s) connected to the TELEFAST determines whether it must be supplied at 10...30 VDC or 5 VDC. For a 10...30 VDC supply, the protective fuse is integrated in the TELEFAST sub-base (fast-blow type 1 A fuse).
However, if the TELEFAST sub-base is supplied at 5 VDC, the user should provide, in series with the + terminal of the power supply, a fast-blow fuse suitable for the consumption of the TELEFAST sub-base and the encoders connected to it.
• Encoder supply voltage monitoring
This function is only valid if a single encoder is connected to the TELEFAST sub-base.
If the encoder supply voltage decreases by more than 15%, the EPSR fault is fed back to the module.
If the encoder does not have an encoder power supply return, the following must be wired :
- the +EPSR terminal of the TELEFAST sub-base to the + terminal of the encoder power supply,
- the -EPSR terminal of the TELEFAST sub-base to the - terminal of the encoder power supply.
___________________________________________________________________________
4/20
Appendix 4
A
• Wiring of encoder outputs
If the encoder has positive logic outputs and if there are less than 24, the following rules must be respected :
- wire the encoder outputs on the TELEFAST inputs, from the least significant to the most significant,
- wire the TELEFAST inputs which are not used to the 0 V terminal.
0 V
14-bit encoder
If the encoder has negative logic outputs and if there are less than 24, the following rules must be respected :
- wire the encoder outputs on the TELEFAST inputs, from the least significant to the most significant,
- do not wire the TELEFAST inputs which are not used.
14-bit encoder
___________________________________________________________________________
4/21
A
4.3-6 Configuring the TELEFAST sub-base
The sub-base is configured by positioning the 4 micro-switches, located under the right-hand connector of the sub-base. They are used to inhibit the encoder outputs and to define the number and type of encoders connected to the TELEFAST sub-base.
+ – – +
Type of encoders connected to the TELEFAST sub-base
Number of encoders connected to the TELEFAST sub-base
Inhibition of encoder outputs
ON
OFF
Inhibition of encoder outputs
This micro-switch is used to select the active state of the 2 inhibit commands (3ST0 and
3ST1) for the encoder outputs.
ON
The encoder outputs are high impedance with a 3ST0 or 3ST1 command active at 0.
OFF
ON The encoder outputs are high impedance with a 3ST0 or 3ST1 command active at 1.
OFF
Number of encoders connected to the TELEFAST
This micro-switch is used to define the number of encoders connected to the TELEFAST sub-base (1 or 2 parallel output absolute encoders).
ON
One encoder is connected to the sub-base.
OFF
ON
Two encoders are connected to the sub-base.
OFF
If, for a counter channel, there is an odd number of encoders connected and there are
2 or 3 TELEFAST sub-bases connected in series, the TELEFAST sub-bases must be
configured so that the total number of encoders is 4.
• For 2 TELEFAST sub-bases
Hardware configuration TELEFAST Address
(number of encoders per micro-switch
TELEFAST sub-base) 0 1 AD0 AD1
Action
2 encoders on TELEFAST 0 ON and
1 encoder on TELEFAST 1
ON 0
0
1
1
0 Read encoder 0 of TELEFAST 0
1 Read encoder 1 of TELEFAST 0
0 Read encoder of TELEFAST 1
1 Read encoder of TELEFAST 1
1 encoder on TELEFAST 0 ON and
2 encoders on TELEFAST 1
ON 0
0
1
0 Read encoder of TELEFAST 0
1 Read encoder of TELEFAST 0
0 Read encoder 0 of TELEFAST 1
1 1 Read encoder 1 of TELEFAST 1
___________________________________________________________________________
4/22
Appendix 4
A
• Case of 3 TELEFAST sub-bases
Hardware configuration TELEFAST Address
(number of encoders per micro-switch
TELEFAST sub-base) 0 1 2 AD0 AD1
1 encoder on TELEFAST 0 ON OFF OFF 0
1 encoder on TELEFAST 1 0 and 1
1 encoder on TELEFAST 2 1
Action
0 Read encoder of TELEFAST 0
1 Read encoder of TELEFAST 0
0 Read encoder of TELEFAST 1
1 Read encoder of TELEFAST 2
1 encoder on TELEFAST 0 OFF ON OFF 0
1 encoder on TELEFAST 1 and
1 encoder on TELEFAST 2
0
1
1
0 Read encoder of TELEFAST 0
1 Read encoder of TELEFAST 1
0 Read encoder of TELEFAST 1
1 Read encoder of TELEFAST 2
1 encoder on TELEFAST 0 OFF OFF ON 0
1 encoder on TELEFAST 1 0 and 1
1 encoder on TELEFAST 2 1
0 Read encoder of TELEFAST 0
1 Read encoder of TELEFAST 1
0 Read encoder of TELEFAST 2
1 Read encoder of TELEFAST 2
Type of encoders connected to TELEFAST
These micro-switches are used to define the type of encoders connected to the
TELEFAST sub-base. The following tables indicate the performance of the encoder /
TELEFAST connection, depending on the code selected using the micro-switches :
Encoders with positive logic outputs,
Totem-pole, TTL and NPN open collector,
Gray code
Max. length encoder /
TELEFAST
Max. frequency of change of least significant bit
ON
50 m 75 kHz
OFF
Encoders with negative logic outputs,
Totem-pole, TTL and NPN open collector,
Gray code
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Max. length encoder /
TELEFAST
50 m
100 m
200 m
Max. frequency of change of least significant bit
75 kHz
40 kHz
5 kHz
___________________________________________________________________________
4/23
A
Encoders with positive or negative logic outputs,
NPN open collector, binary coded
ON
OFF
Max. length encoder /
TELEFAST
10 m
Max. frequency of change of least significant bit
40 kHz
ON
OFF
30 m 20 kHz
ON
OFF
50 m 5 kHz
Note
For encoders with positive logic, TTL and Totem-pole outputs, it is possible to improve these performance levels, without exceeding the recommendations of encoder manufacturers.
___________________________________________________________________________
4/24
Appendix 4
A
4.4
TSX TAP S15•• wiring accessories
4.4-1 Presentation
TSX TAP S15•• wiring accessories are used to connect an incremental encoder to the counter module, using a special cable (supplied by the encoder manufacturer).
• the TSX TAP S1505 accessory is used to connect an incremental encoder supplied at 5 VDC : encoder with RS 422 line driver outputs,
• the TSX TAP S1524 accessory is used to connect an incremental encoder supplied at 24 VDC : encoder with Totem Pole or open collector PNP outputs.
The TSX TAP S15•• is fitted with 2 connectors :
• a 12-pin female DIN connector, numbered in an anti-clockwise direction. This connector is used to connect the encoder, via a cable supplied by the encoder manufacturer,
• a standard 15-pin DIN connector for connecting to the counter module, via a TSX CCP
S15 cable.
The TSX TAP S15•• can be mounted on a DIN rail, using the bracket supplied with the product, or fitted through an enclosure wall (in the second case, a seal supplied with the product ensures the cabinet is dust and damp-proof).
Incremental encoder fitted with a 12-pin
DIN connector TSX TAP S15 ••
Special cable supplied by the encoder manufacturer
M
1 9 8
2 10 12 7
3
11
4 5
6
F
8 9 1
7 12 10 2
6
11
3
5 4
M
8 9 1
7 12 10 2
6
11
3
5 4
F
1 9 8
2 10 12 7
3
11
4 5
6
___________________________________________________________________________
4/25
A
4.4-2 Mounting the TSX TAP S15••
Mounting on Telequick plate
The bracket supplied is used to fix the TSX TAP S15•• to an AM1-PA••• type pre-slotted plate or to any other support.
Mounting into an enclosure wall
The TSX TAP S15•• can be mounted into an enclosure wall using its fixing nut. The seal supplied with this accessory ensures the enclosure is dust and damp-proof.
max thickness = 5mm seal drill hole = Ø 37mm
___________________________________________________________________________
4/26
Dimensions
70.4
∅
5.5
27.4
43
Appendix 4
A
___________________________________________________________________________
4/27
A
4.4-3 Connection of an encoder using the TSX TAP S1505 accessory
Connecting the encoder via a TSX TAP S1505 accessory requires a special cable
(supplied by the encoder manufacturer).
The TSX TAP S1505 pinout is as follows :
TSX TAP S1505
A+ 5 V
1 5
TSX CCP S15
9
10
1
2
2
10
A- 5 V
B+ 5 V
6
8
Special cable supplied by the encoder manufacturer
3
B- 5 V
11 11 1
12
13
4
5
4
5
Z+ 5 V
Z- 5 V
3
4
3
1 9
11
8
2 10 12 7
6
4 5
6
14
13
EPSR
2
7
15
15
+5 V
12
8
0V
8 10
___________________________________________________________________________
4/28
Appendix 4
A
4.4-4 Connection of an encoder using the TSX TAP S1524 accessory
Connecting the encoder via a TSX TAP S1524 accessory requires a special cable
(supplied by the encoder manufacturer).
The TSX TAP S1524 pinout is as follows :
TSX CCP S15
9
10
11
12
13
1
2
3
4
5
3
TSX TAP S1524
B+ 24V
A+ 24V
9
12
7
13
8
5
Z+ 24V
3
Encoder power supply return
24V
12
2
3
1 9 8
2 10 12 7
11
6
4 5
Special cable supplied by the encoder manufacturer
6
14
5
7
15
8
8
0V
11 10
This type of connection is compatible with encoders supplied at 24V (Heidenheim,
Hengstler, Codéchamp, Ivo, Ideacod, etc).
___________________________________________________________________________
4/29
A
4.5
Cables
4.5-1 TSX CDP 301 and TSX CDP 501 preformed cables
Preformed cables (or ribbon cables) are used to connect sensors, preactuators or terminals directly to counter modules. They consist of 20 wires, 22 gauge (0.34 mm 2 ) and are fitted with an HE10 connector at one end. The flying leads at the other end are color-coded according to DIN 47100 standard.
The correspondence between the wire color and the pin number of the HE10 connector is as follows :
Cable :
TSX CDP 301
TSX CDP 501 length :
3 m
5 m
HE10
1 2
3
5
7
9 10
11 12
13 14
4
6
8
15 16
17 18
19 20 white brown green yellow gray pink blue red black purple gray-pink red-blue white-green brown-green white-yellow yellow-brown white-gray gray-brown white-pink pink-brown
TSX CTY 2A/4A TSX CTY 2C
+5 VDC
0 VDC
+10...30 VDC nc
IPres0
IEna0
IRead0 nc
IPres1
IEna1
IRead1 nc
Q0
Q1
Q0
Q1
+24 VDC
0 VDC
+24 VDC
0 VDC
+5 VDC
0 VDC
+10...30 VDC nc
IPres0
IEna0 / Q2
Iread0
Q3
IPres1
IEna1 / Q2
IRead1
Q3
Q0
Q1
Q0
Q1
+24 VDC
0 VDC
+24 VDC
0 VDC chann.0
(or 2) chann.1
(or 3) chann.0
(or 2) chann.1
(or 3)
___________________________________________________________________________
4/30
Appendix 4
A
4.5-2 TSX CDP 102, TSX CDP 202 and TSX CDP 302 ribbon cables
These sheathed, rolled ribbon cables are used to connect the HE10 connector of a counter module to a TELEFAST 2 connection interface (1). They consist of a rolled and sheathed ribbon cable with 28-gauge wires (0.08 mm 2 ), fitted at each end with a HE10 connector.
Given the small wire cross-section, it is recommended to use these preformed connection cables only for low current inputs or outputs (<100 mA per input or output).
3 lengths of preformed connection cable are offered :
TSX CDP 102 : length 1 meter,
TSX CDP 202 : length 2 meters,
TSX CDP 302 : length 3 meters.
4.5-3 TSX CDP 053 / 103 / 203 / 303 / 503 connection cable
These connection cables are used to connect the HE10 connector of a counter module to a TELEFAST 2 connection interface (1). They consist of a cable with 22-gauge wires
(0.34 mm 2 ), fitted at each end with a moulded HE10 connector.
These cables can be used for higher currents (< 500 mA) than the ribbon cables.
5 lengths of connection cable are offered :
TSX CDP 053 : length 0.5 meter,
TSX CDP 103 : length 1 meter,
TSX CDP 203 : length 2 meters,
TSX CDP 303 : length 3 meters,
TSX CDP 503 : length 5 meters.
(1) see sections 3.7 and 4.2
___________________________________________________________________________
4/31
A
4.6
Module display
TSX CTY 2A / 4A / 2C modules have indicator lamps on the front panel which display the status of the module and the counter channels :
• Module status lamps (RUN, ERR, I/O)
These 3 indicator lamps give information on the module operating mode :
- RUN indicates the module is operating,
- ERR signals an internal module fault,
- I/O signals an external module fault or application fault,
• Channel status lamps (CH.)
2 or 4 indicator lamps to display and diagnose the status of each module channel.
CH2
CH3
CH0 RUN
CH1 I / O
ERR
I/O
Status On
Indic. lamps
RUN Module running.
ERR
I/O
CH
.
TSX CTY 2A / 2C :
CH0 and CH1
TSX CTY 4A :
CH0, CH1, CH2,
CH3
Internal module fault :
. module failure.
External fault :
. wiring fault,
. encoder supply fault,
. measurement overrun.
Application fault.
The channel is operating
/
/
Flashing
Communication fault or waiting for configuration.
Off
Module faulty or off.
No fault.
No fault.
The channel is not operating The channel is faulty correctly due to The channel is not configured
. an internal fault or is incorrectly configured.
. an external fault,
. a communication fault
. an application fault.
___________________________________________________________________________
4/32
TSX CAY axis control modules
Installation
Contents
Part B
Section
3.1-1 Basic configuration required
3.1-3 General wiring instructions
Connecting the speed reference signals
3.3-2 Connecting using a TSX CAP S9
3.3-3 Connecting using a TSX CDP 611 cable
3.3-4 Connecting to terminals with the TELEFAST pre-wired system
3.3-6 Connecting speed drives using the TAP MAS connection box
3.4-2 Connecting an incremental encoder
___________________________________________________________________________
B/1
Page
B
B TSX CAY axis control modules
Installation
Contents
Part B
Section
3.4-3 Connecting an SSI absolute encoder
3.4-4 Connecting encoder supplies
Page
3.5-1 Encoder connection accessories
3.5-2 Mounting the TSX TAP S15 05
Connecting sensors, preactuators and supplies without a speed drive 3/20
3.6-2 TELEFAST connection and wiring accessories
3.6-3 Signal availability on the TELEFAST screw terminal block 3/23
3.6-4 Connecting via TSX CDP 301 or 501 cable 3/26
3.6-5 Wiring recommendations 3/27
Connecting speed drive monitoring signals
3.7-2 Connecting using the TELEFAST pre-wired system
3.7-3 Correspondence between TELEFAST terminal blocks and HE10 connector
Electrical characteristics of the module
3.8-2 Characteristics of the analog outputs
3.8-3 Characteristics of the counter inputs
3.8-4 Characteristics of auxiliary inputs
3.8-5 Characteristics of the reflex outputs Q0
3.8-6 Monitoring the sensor / preactuator voltage
3.8-7 Characteristics of the speed drive monitoring inputs
3.8-8 Characteristics of the relay outputs
___________________________________________________________________________
B/2
1.1
Description
1.1-1 General
TSX CAY 2•
TSX CAY 4•
1 Presentation B
TSX CAY 33 speed drive motor encoder
The axis control and servo-loop positioning range for TSX Premium PLC is designed for machines which require high-performance motion control together with simultaneous sequential control via a PLC.
TSX CAY 21 (2 axes) and TSX CAY 41 (4 axes) modules are multiaxis control modules which are used to control movements on an independent, linear and limited axis.
TSX CAY 22 (2 axes)and TSX CAY 42 (4 axes) modules are multiaxis control modules which are used to control movements on an independent, circular and infinite axis.
TSX CAY 33 (3 axes) modules are multiaxis control modules which are used to control movements on on 2 or 3 synchronized axes (linear interpolation).
Terminology :
• The term TSX CAY covers the axis control range
• The reference TSX CAY2• refers to all TSX CAY 21 and 22 modules
• The reference TSX CAY4• refers to TSX CAY 41 and 42 modules
These standard (TSX CAY2•) or double (TSX CAY 4• and TSX CAY 33) format modules can be inserted in all the available slots of a PLC configuration (TSX, PMX or PCX).
To ensure position measurement, an encoder, which may be one of several types, is wired on each of the channels :
• incremental encoder, type RS 422/485
• incremental encoder, type 5V totem pole
• SSI serial absolute encoder
1/1
B
1.1-2 Physical description
1 15-pin SUB-D connector for connecting the axis 0 encoder.
2 15-pin SUB-D connector for connecting the axis 1 encoder.
3 15-pin SUB-D connector for connecting the axis 2 encoder.
4 15-pin SUB-D connector for connecting the axis 3 encoder.
5 9-pin SUB-D connector for connecting the speed references :
6 HE10 connector(s) for connecting :
• auxiliary inputs : reference point cam emergency stop recalibration
• auxiliary outputs,
• external power supplies (encoders and sensors).
7 HE10 connector for connecting speed controller control I/O.
8 Screw for fixing the module in its position.
9 Rigid casing to locate the module into its slot.
10 Module diagnostics indicator lamps :
• module diagnostics :
- green RUN indicator lamp : indicates module operating mode
- red ERR indicator lamp : indicates internal fault
- red I/O indicator lamp : indicates external fault or application fault.
• channel diagnostics :
- green CHx indicator lamp : indicates channel diagnostics
TSX CAY 2 •
TSX CAY 4 •
TSX CAY 33
1
5
2
6
7
8
9
7
6
6
___________________________________________________________________________
1/2
3
1
5
4
8
9
10
7
10
3
1
5
4
2
8
9
10
2 Functions
B
2.1
Functions
Block diagram of an axis control system
Processor TSX CAY module
Application
Encoder input
Configuration
+ adjustment
%K, %M
Configuration
Parameters
Adjustment
Setpoint
Servo loop
SMOVE function
%Q/%QW
%I/%IW
Processing
Speed drive output
Processing of auxiliary I/O
RP cam input
Event input
Recalibration input
Emergency stop input
Speed drive fault input
Speed drive enable relay output
Auxiliary output
Axis control modules provide the following functions for each axis :
• Inputs
- input for reading position measurements : incremental encoder, type RS 485 or 5V totem pole absolute encoder, type SSI serial interface, 16 to 25 data bits
- machine reference point input
- event input
- speed drive fault input
- recalibration input
- emergency stop input
• Outputs
- isolated analog output ± 10V, resolution 13 bits + sign, to control the speed drives
- speed drive enable relay output
- auxiliary solid state output
___________________________________________________________________________
2/1
B
Processing commands :
Each movement, controlled by the PLC sequential program, is described by an SMOVE movement command function in PL7 language. The TSX CAY 21/41 module uses this
SMOVE command to calculate a position / speed trajectory.
PL7 screens make it easy to configure, adjust and debug the axes.
• Configuring the axes
The configuration screen is used to enter the parameters required to adapt the module operation to the machine characteristics. These parameters are : type of encoder, position limits, maximum speed, etc. They cannot be modified by the program. There is no default configuration.
• Adjusting the axes
The parameters offered in the adjustment screen are associated with operation of the axes. The parameters are adjusted online or offline.
The operating parameters are :
- corrected resolution
- motion control : deviation, recalibration, overspeed, etc.
- stop control : time, speed, target window
- position loop : position gain, feedforward cœfficient, offset
- command : soft limits, acceleration, acceleration profile
- manual mode parameter : speed, reference point value, etc.
These parameters can be modified by the program.
• Debugging
The debug screen can only be accessed online. It is used to control and observe axis behavior.
The data and commands differ depending on the operating mode selected :
- automatic mode :
Manual mode
- direct drive mode
- measurement mode (Off)
The upper area of the screen gives information about the module operating status and its diagnostics. The lower area of the screen gives access to the commands and information about the operation of movements, I/O, faults, etc.
___________________________________________________________________________
2/2
3 Setup
3.1
Setup
3.1-1 Basic configuration required
Servomotor axis control modules can be installed in any available slot in a Premium (TSX,
PMX or PCX) PLC configuration, provided they use no more than :
B
Processors
TSX P57 102 / TPMX P57 102 / TPCX 57 1012
TSX P57 202 / TPMX P57 202
TSX P57 252
TSX P57 302
TSX P57 352 / TPMX P57 352 / TPCX 57 3512
TSX P57 402
TSX P57 452 / TPMX P57 452
No. of "app-specific" chans managed
8
24
24
32
32
48
48
(*) All the channels of an application-specific module are called "application-specific" channels
(counter module, axis control module, etc). TSX CAY 2 modules comprise 2 "application-specific" channels, TSX CAY 4 modules comprise 4 "application-specific" channels and TSX CAY 33 modules comprise 3 "application-specific" channels.
Note: TSX CAY 22/42 and 33 modules are not compatible with the former TSX P57 10 and
TSX P57 20 processors.
The power supply for a rack must be chosen according to the number of modules installed.
3.1-2 Installation procedure
It is possible to install or remove a module without switching off the supply voltage to the rack. The module design enables this operation to be executed while powered up to ensure that another device remains available for use.
Connection or disconnection of connectors with sensor supplies is, however, not recommended, as certain encoders cannot tolerate such handling. The auxiliary I/O connectors can be disconnected while powered up without damaging the module.
Nevertheless, for the safety of personnel it is recommended that auxiliary supplies are switched off before any disconnection.
The module and connector fixing screws must be tightened correctly in order to obtain good electrical contacts, thus ensuring good protection against electrostatic and electromagnetic interference.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/1
B
3.1-3 General wiring instructions
The sensor and actuator supplies must be protected against overloads or overvoltages by fast-blow fuses.
Use wires with an adequate cross-section to avoid line voltage drops or overheating.
Keep sensor and actuator cables away from any source of radiation caused by high-power electrical circuit switching.
All cables connecting absolute or incremental encoders must be shielded. Shielding must be of high quality and connected to the machine ground at both the module and encoder ends. There must be continuity along the entire length of the connections. Only encoder signals should be carried on the cable.
For performance reasons, module auxiliary inputs have short response times and it is thus important that these inputs have an adequate independent supply to ensure that the module continues to operate correctly in the event of brief power outage. It is recommended that regulated supplies are used as they ensure the consistency of actuator and sensor response times. The 0V supply must be connected to the machine ground as near as possible to the supply output.
3.2
Choice of encoders
3.2-1 Output interface
The output interfaces of incremental encoders or pulse generators are :
• RS 422/485 standard output, two push-pull complementary outputs per signal
• 5V Totem Pole output, two push-pull complementary outputs.
The SSI-type serial absolute encoders have a standard RS485 interface for clock and data signals.
We recommend using an encoder with an opto type "CLOCK" signal input stage.
It is possible to connect encoders of different types to the same module. For example, an incremental encoder on channel 0 and an SSI absolute encoder on channel 1.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/2
Setup 3
3.2-2 Encoder power supply
The module is designed to supply either 5V or 24V to the encoders. It is possible to supply a mix of supply voltages to the module channels.
Incremental encoders generally have a 5V supply.
SSI-type absolute encoders often have a 24V supply (10/30V).
5V encoder supply : maximum voltage drop
It is necessary in this case to take into account the line voltage drop, which depends on the cable length and the encoder consumption for a given wire gauge.
Example for a 100m cable :
Wire cross-section
Encoder consumption
28-gauge = 0.08mm
2
22-gauge = 0.34 mm 2
0.5 mm 2
1 mm 2
Voltage drop for a 100m cable
50mA 100mA
1.1V
0.25V
2.2V
0.5V
0.17V
0.09V
0.34V
0.17V
150mA
3.3V
0.75V
0.51V
0.24V
200mA
4.4V
1V
0.68V
0.34V
24V encoder supply
This type of encoder is recommended as there is no need for a precise supply (10V/30V).
With a 24V power supply these encoders can use a very long cable, and the voltage drop along the cable is very small. This is the case with SSI-type serial link encoders.
If an SSI-type 24V serial absolute encoder is used it is not necessary to connect it to the 5V supply.
The 24V supply must be reserved for the encoders. The supplies must be able to operate independently for a sufficient length of time to power the encoder during microbreaks
(•10ms).
B
3.2-3 Shielding
To ensure correct operation when the environment is subject to interference, it is necessary to choose an encoder with a metal casing referenced to machine ground of the connected equipment. The encoder must provide ground connection to the connection cable shielding.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/3
B
3.3
Connecting the speed reference signals
3.3-1 Signal referencing
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CAY 4 CAY 2 CAY 33
Vref0+
Vref0-
Vref1+
Vref1-
Vref2+
Vref2-
Axis 0
Axis1
Axis 2
Vref3+
Vref3-
Axis 3
GND-ANA
(common)
Axis 0
Axis1 nc
Axis 0
Axis1
Axis 2 nc
GND-ANA
(common) nc
GND-ANA
(common)
Male connector seen from wiring side
Connection of speed references :
There are four types of connection
• wiring with TSX CAP S9 connector and cover
• using a TSX CDP 611 cable
• wiring with output on terminals with TELEFAST ABE-7CPA01
• wiring with output to TAP MAS (distribution box)
3.3-2 Connecting using a TSX CAP S9
The user makes the connection by soldering directly onto the 9-pin Sub-D connector as shown in 3.3-1. Ensure that the cable shielding is correctly tightened onto the connector cover.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/4
Setup 3
3.3-3 Connecting using a TSX CDP 611 cable
This preformed cable consists of a 9-pin Sub-D connector for connection to the
TSX CAY 21/41 module end with flying leads at the other end. 6m long, it consists of
24-gauge wires which correspond to the pins on the Sub-D connector. It is used to connect devices directly to the module. The various signals are identified using a color code.
The shielding must be connected to the machine ground of the connected device.
B
TSX CDP 611 black blue white orange red pin
1
6
2
7
3 yellow green violet
8
4
9 brown
5 signal
Vref0+
Vref0axis 0
Vref1+
Vref1-
Vref2+
Vref2-
Vref3+
Vref3-
GND-ANA
Shielding axis 1 axis 2 axis 3
The TSX CDP 611 cable is 6m long.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/5
B
3.3-4 Connecting to terminals with the TELEFAST pre-wired system
The TELEFAST 2 system is a range of products used for rapid connection of modules in the TSX Micro and TSX Premium ranges. This system replaces screw terminals and provides a single-wire remote connection.
It is necessary to connect speed references to terminals when the speed drives are not close to each other. The TELEFAST pre-wired system simplifies setup by giving access to signals via screw terminals. The module is connected to the TELEFAST (reference
ABE-7CPA01) via a cable fitted with a 9-pin Sub-D connector at the module end and a
15-pin Sub-D connector at the TELEFAST end. This cable may either be : TSX CXP213 or TSX CXP 613.
TSX CXP 213
TSX CXP 613
+ + – –
ABE-7CPA01
TSX CXP 213 cable : l = 2m
TSX CXP 613 cable : l = 6m
GND 6 8 5 10 12 11 14 16 15 18 20 19 21 23
Connection to
GND-ANA
(terminals 5,
11, 15 and 19)
Speed drive with
2-wire inputs ref c o m m o n
GND
+ –
Vref0
+ –
Vref1
+ –
Vref2
+ –
Vref3
TSX CAY 41 extension
Speed drive with differential inputs common (0V) ref– ref+
GND
___________________________________________________________________________
3/6
Setup 3
Correspondence between Sub-D connector pins and TELEFAST terminals
18
19
20
21
22
11
12
14
15
16
23
24
26
28
30
32
5
6
8
10
TELEFAST screw terminal
(Terminal no.)
2
4
10
3
11
4
12
5
13
6 nc
14 nc nc nc nc nc
15-pin Sub-D connector
(Pin no.)
1
2
1
6
2
8
4
7
3
9-pin Sub-D connector for the
TSX CAY module
9
5
Type of signal
Vref0+
Vref0-
Vref1+
Vref1-
Vref2+
Vref2-
Vref3+
Vref3connect to terminal 23
GND-ANA
Note : nc = not connected
Terminal 23 of the lower TELEFAST terminal block (GND-ANA) must be connected to terminal 21 in order to distribute the GND-ANA to terminals 5, 11, 15 and 19.
B
___________________________________________________________________________
3/7
B
3.3-5 TAP MAS connection box
The connection box is used to assign the speed references from each speed drive to particular port, enabling simple connection of several speed drives while ensuring good ground continuity.
Dimensions and fixing :
The TSX TAP MAS box is installed on an AM1 PA-type pre-slotted plate or on a DIN rail with an LA9 D09976 fixing plate using two M3x8 or M3x10 screws.
AM1-PA...
AM1-DE/ED =
2 x Ø 5,5
50 =
___________________________________________________________________________
3/8
Setup 3
3.3-6 Connecting speed drives using the TAP MAS connection box
NUM MDLA modular speed drives can be connected to the TSX CAY module using a TSX TAP MAS connection box. Setup is simplified by the use of predefined cables and the connection box which directs the voltage references of the different axes in a simple manner.
Modular speed drive
NUM MDLA
TSX CAY
B
TSX CXP 223
J3
TSX TAP MAS
TSX CXP 213/613
Cables :
TSX CXP 223 : length = 2.5m
TSX CXP 213 : length = 2.5m
TSX CXP 613 : length = 6m male
TSX CXP 223
9-pin Sub-D
1 Vref +
6 Vref -
5 GND-ANA male
25-pin Sub-D
5 Vref +
18 Vref -
6 GND-ANA
9-pin Sub-D
1 Vref +
6 Vref -
5 GND-ANA male
TSX CDP 611 black ref + blue ref brown GND-ANA shielding
___________________________________________________________________________
3/9
B
3.4
Connecting counter signals
To ensure position measurement, TSX CAY modules are fitted with connectors which enable an incremental encoder or SSI absolute encoder to be directly connected to each channel. Each channel may be fitted with an encoder of a different type.
3.4-1 Signal referencing
TSX CAY modules can be connected either to incremental encoders or to absolute encoders with SSI-type serial link. In configuration mode the following functions are available.
• Two types of interface can be used for incremental encoders :
- RS 422/RS485 outputs with two complementary outputs per signal,
- 5V Totem Pole outputs,
• SSI absolute encoder with RS 485 standard interface.
A 15-pin Sub-D connector is assigned to each channel. It is also used to supply power to the encoder. These supplies are generated via the HE10 connector discrete + supply. The encoder + supply return signal from the encoder enables accidental disconnection of the encoder to be detected.
SSI data+/A+
SSI data-/A-
Z+
Z-
CLKSSI+
Encoder + supply (10...30V)
Encoder - supply (0V)
7
8
11
12
13
14
15
9
10
5
6
3
4
1
2
B+
B+
B-
Encoder + supply return
CLKSSI-
5V encoder supply
1 2
5 V
0 V
10...30 V encoder
3 4 0 V supplies
___________________________________________________________________________
3/10
Connections :
Incremental encoder input A+ input Ainput Z+ input Z-
SSI absolute encoder SSI data+
SSI data-
5V encoder supply
+ supply (5V) 15
1
2
4
5
1
2
Encoder supply (10-30V)
+ supply (10-30V)7 input B+ input B-
10
11 encoder 13 supply return
CLKSSI+ 6
CLKSSI14
- supply (0V) 8
- supply (0V) 8
Setup 3
B
3.4-2 Connecting an incremental encoder
The interface is RS 422 / RS 485 or totem pole type
TSX CAY encoder supply return
10-30 V
5 V
0 V
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
4
2
1
3
5
6
8
12
10
ENCODER (*)
A+
A-
B+
B-
Z+
Z-
+ supply return
+ supply
- supply
(*) standard pin-out of an encoder with a 12-pin DIN connector.
Each signal (A+,A- for example) must be connected by a twisted pair. To reduce line voltage drops, it is recommended that each supply point is connected through a pair. The cable shielding must be connected to the machine ground at each end.
!
The DIN connector encoder + supply input must be connected to the 10-30V supply wire or to the 5V wire depending on the type of encoder used.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/11
B
3.4-3 Connecting an SSI absolute encoder encoder supply return
10...30 V
5 V
0 V
3
4
5
1
2
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ENCODER
Data+
Data-
+ supply return (*)
CLKSSI+
CLKSSI-
+ supply
- supply
!
The encoder supply must be connected to pin number 15 or 7 of the Sub-D connector depending on the encoder supply voltage.
(*) + supply return : encoder output which sends the supply voltage to the module enabling the module to detect the presence of the encoder.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/12
Setup 3
B
3.4-4 Connecting encoder supplies
+ + – –
Connection of 24 VDC auxiliary input sensor supply
+ + – –
TELEFAST 2
ABE-7H16R20
TSX CDP053 / 503 cable
102 101 100 101
Cable : length :
TSX CDP 053 : 0.5m
TSX CDP 103 : 1m
TSX CDP 203 : 2m
TSX CDP 303 : 3m
TSX CDP 503 : 5m
24 V supply
+24 V
0 V
5 V supply
+5 V
0 V
Important : the maximum length of the wires between the supply outputs and the
TELEFAST connecting pins must be less than 0.5m.
Only one supply is necessary if the same type of encoder is used on both channels.
Fuses :
This module has as standard several systems to protect against wiring errors and accidental short-circuits on the cable, such as :
• inversion of supply polarity,
• inversion of 5V <- -> 10/30V supplies,
• 10/30V short-circuit on the CLOCK signal of the serial link.
As the module cannot withstand for any length of time, the fuses must blow very quickly.
The fuses must therefore be "fast blow" type with 1A maximum rating. Supplies must have a limit current at such a level that the fuse can blow at the correct point.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/13
B
3.5
Wiring accessories
3.5-1 Encoder connection accessories
A number of accessories are available to simplify setup and installation. These accessories are used for prewiring the installation.
TSX CAP S15 cover kits with a 15-pin Sub-D connector enable the user to make a direct link to the installation. To simplify installation, the TSX TAP S15 05 provides an interface between the Sub-D connector and the 12-pin DIN connector. This accessory can be fitted on a DIN rail using clips, or in the wall of an enclosure with a seal and locknut. A 2.5m
TSX CCP S15 cable is used for connection to the module.
Examples :
TSX CAP S15
Incremental or absolute encoder
Incremental or absolute encoder
TSX CAP S15
5V RS 422 incremental encoder
5V RS 422 incremental encoder
TSX TAP S15 05
TSX CCP S15
These accessories provide good signal and shielding continuity in adverse conditions.
The encoder connection cables are generally offered by the encoder suppliers.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/14
Setup 3
Precision with regard to FRB type 12-pin connectors
The pins on these connectors are numbered in two different ways. Most encoders have an integrated 12-pin base which is numbered in an anti-clockwise direction. The
TSX TAP S15 has a 12-pin female connector numbered in an anti-clockwise direction.
All user leads must be fitted with connectors numbered in a clockwise direction, in order that the pin numbers correspond exactly during wiring.
B
Encoder with anti-
clockwise socket connectors
User lead base housing
M
3
1 9
11
8
2 10 12 7
6
4 5
F
8 9 1
7 12 10 2
6
11
3
5 4 clockwise anti-clockwise
M
8 9 1
7 12 10 2
6
11
3
5 4
F
3
1 9
11
8
2 10 12 7
6
4 5
Pinout of the DIN and 15-pin Sub-D connectors on the TSX TAP S15 05
DIN SUB-D
1
Pin Signal Pin
B11
2 Supply return 13
3
4
5
6
7
Z+
Z-
A+
Anc
4
5
1
2
8
9
10
11
B+ nc
0V nc
10
8
Shielding must be continuous along the entire length of the connections, which must be connected to the machine ground at both ends.
12 5V 15
___________________________________________________________________________
3/15
B
3.5-2 Mounting the TSX TAP S15 05
Mounting on Telequick plate
The bracket supplied is used to fix the TSX TAP S15 05 to an AM1-PA ... type pre-slotted plate or to any other support.
Mounting through the wall of an enclosure
The TSX TAP S15 05 can be fitted through the wall of an enclosure using its fixing nut.
The seal ensures dust and damp protection between the inside and the outside.
max thickness = 5mm seal cut-out = Ø 37mm
___________________________________________________________________________
3/16
Dimensions
70.4
∅
5.5
27.4
43
Setup 3
B
___________________________________________________________________________
3/17
B
Connecting an // absolute encoder via an ABE-7CPA11 Telefast adaptor sub-base
• the multiplexing function should not be used : each channel uses a sub-base, to which a single parallel output absolute encoder is connected,
• the encoder frame should be configured as follows :
- code : binary or Gray (depending on the type of encoder),
- header bits : 0,
- data bits : 24 (regardless of the number of encoder data bits),
- status bits : 3,
- significance of error bit : 1 (optional),
- parity : even.
TSX CAY TELEFAST
ABE-7CPA11
Parallel output absolute encoder
ON
OFF
Type of encoder connected
Configuration of encoder via the sub-base
Inhibition of encoder outputs
___________________________________________________________________________
3/18
Setup 3
Connecting to a NUM MDLA speed drive
The NUM 400 V speed drive integrates all of the elements necessary for its operation.
To indicate position it has an output whose signals simulate the operation of an incremental encoder. The TSX CXP 233 / 633 cable accessory (2.5m or 6m) is used for direct connection.
TSX CAY NUM MDLA
B
TSX CXP 223/633
Cable : length :
TSX CXP 213 : 2.5m
TSX CXP 633 : 6m
Note : in this case no encoder supply is necessary.
signal
A+
A-
B+
B-
Z+
Zencoder OK encoder 0V
J2
15
5
14
4
13
3
12
8
J2
___________________________________________________________________________
3/19
B
3.6
Connecting sensors, preactuators and supplies without a speed drive
The TSX CAY 21 / 41 module is fitted with dedicated I/O as standard to ensure full operation of the motion control system, as well as providing the encoder supply.
3.6-1 Signal referencing
The connector is a high density HE 10 type
C B
5 V
10...30 V
I0
1
3
5
I2
I0
7
9
I2 11
2 0 V
4 nc
6 I1
8 I3
10 I1
12 I3
Q0 13
Q0 15
24 V 17
24 V 19
14 nc
16 nc
18 0 V
20 0 V
Encoder supply input
Auxiliary inputs
Auxiliary inputs
Reflex output
Reflex output
Sensor supply input
CAY 21/41
B
CAY 41
C chan. 0.1
chan. 2.3
chan. 0 chan. 1 chan. 0 chan. 1 chan. 0.1
chan. 2 chan. 3 chan. 2 chan. 3 chan. 2.3
TSX CAY 2• module : channels 0 and 1
TSX CAY 4• module : channels o, 1, 2 and 3
TSX CAY 33 module : channels 0, 1 and 2
The auxiliary I/O are assigned to the following functions :
• I0 = reference point cam input,
• I1 = emergency stop input (stop if no current at input),
• I2 = event input,
• I3 = recalibration input,
• Q0 = reflex output (solid state output).
• 0 V = auxiliary inputs and reflex outputs common.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/20
Connection principle for I/O associated with channel 0
I0 5 6
I1
I2 7 8
I3
RP
Evt
LLS
Rec
RLS Em_Stop
Setup 3
B
-
24 V
+
24 V 17 18
0 V
24 V 19 20 0 V
___________________________________________________________________________
3/21
B
3.6-2 TELEFAST connection and wiring accessories
To connect this high-density connector, it is recommended to use the discrete TELEFAST
ABE 7H16R20 prewiring accessory together with the TSX CDP 053 / 503 cable, or the
TSX CDP 301 20-wire 3m cable or the TSX CDP 501 5m cable, with an HE10 connector at one end and flying leads at the other.
Wiring using discrete TELEFAST
TSX CDP 053/503
TELEFAST
ABE-7H16R20
Cable : length :
TSX CDP 053 : 0.5m
TSX CDP 103 : 1m
TSX CDP 203 : 2m
TSX CDP 303 : 3m
TSX CDP 503 : 5m
___________________________________________________________________________
3/22
Setup 3
3.6-3 Signal availability on the TELEFAST screw terminal block
The terminal block below represents that of the ABE-7H16R20. sub-base. The signals are referenced using the TSX CDP 053 / 503 cable.
B
Emergency stop input
(1)
(2)
(1) On the ABE-7H16R20 sub-base, the position of the jumper defines the polarity of terminals 200 to 215 :
• Jumper in position 1 and 2 : terminals 200 to 215 have positive polarity,
• Jumper in position 3 and 4 : terminals 200 to 215 have negative polarity.
(2) On the ABE-7H16R20 sub-base it is possible to add an optional ABE-7BV20 bar to create a second sensor common (+ or - selected by the user).
___________________________________________________________________________
3/23
B
Example of connecting sensors on auxiliary inputs and their supply
This connection is made using a TELEFAST 2
ABE-7H16R20 connection sub-base
Connection of auxiliary input sensor 24 VDC supply
+ +
24 VDC 0 VDC
+ +
TELEFAST 2
ABE-7H16R20
TSX CDP 053 / 503 cable
I0 I1
ABE-7BV20
(- common)
Connection of sensors to auxiliary inputs channel 0 channel 1
I2 I3 Q0 I0 I1 I2 I3
Mechanical contact
Q0
204 104
+
205 105
+
206 106
+
207 107 112 312
+
208 108
+
209 109
+
210 110
+
211 111
+
114 314
Rl Rl
2-wire
PNP prox. sen
204 104 205 105 206 106
+ + +
207 107 112 312
+
208 108 209 109 210 110
+ + +
211 111
+
114 314
Rl Rl
3-wire
PNP prox. sen
204 104
+
304
205 105
+
305
206 106
+
306
207 107
+
307
112 312 208 108
+
308
209 109
+
309
210 110
+
310
211 111
+
311
114 314
Rl Rl
NO
N/O : normally open
NC NO NO NO NC NO NO
3/24
Setup 3
Correspondence between TELEFAST terminal blocks and HE10 connector on module
113
114
115
+ 24 VDC
- 0 VDC
109
110
111
112
TELEFAST 20-pin HE10 screw term. blk. connector
(Terminal no.) (Pin no.)
100 1
101
102
103
2
3
4
104
105
106
107
108
7
8
5
6
9
14
15
16
17
18
10
11
12
13
19
20
+ 24 VDC
- 0 VDC
1
2
3
4
200...215
Signal type
+ 5 VDC
- 0 VDC
+ 10…30 VDC nc
Encoder supply reference point cam input I0 (chan. 0) Channel 0 emergency stop input I1 (channel 0) auxiliary event input I2 (channel 0) recalibration input I3 (channel 0) inputs reference point cam input I0 (chan.1) Channel 1 emergency stop input I1 (channel 1) auxiliary event input I2 (channel 1) inputs recalibration input I3 (channel 1)
Reflex output Q 0 (channel 0) nc
Reflex output Q0 (channel 1) nc (1)
Auxiliary input sensor supply
Terminals 200 to 215 at + 24 VDC
Terminals 200 to 215 at - 0 VDC
300...315
Connection of sensor commons to :
+ 24 VDC if terminals 1 & 2 linked
- 0 VDC if terminals 3 & 4 linked
Terminals on the optional ABE-7BV20 bar may be used as sensor common, to be wired to the common voltage.
Note (1) nc = not connected
The same wiring is used in the CAY 4• modules for channels 2 and 3 as well as for
3/25
B
B
3.6-4 Connecting via TSX CDP 301 or 501 cable
The use of these cables gives a direct connection to the actuators, preactuators or terminals. The cable consists of twenty 22-gauge (0.34 mm 2 ) wires, and has an HE10 connector at one end and color-coded flying leads at the other.
Cable :
TSX CDP 301 :
TSX CDP 501 : length :
3m
5m preformed cable
1
3
5
7
9 10
11 12
6
8
2
4
13 14
15 16
17 18
19 20 brown yellow pink red purple red-blue brown-green white-green gray-brown pink-brown white green gray blue black gray-pink yellow-brown white-yellow white-gray white-pink
+5 VDC
0 VDC
+10...30 VDC nc
I0
I1
I2
I3
I0 chan.0
I1
I2
I3
Q0 nc
Q0 chan.1
nc
+24 VDC
0 VDC
+24 VDC
0 VDC
Correspondance between the wire color and the pin number of the HE10 connector.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/26
Setup 3
3.6-5 Wiring recommendations
Inputs I0, I1, I2 and I3 are fast inputs and must be connected to the sensor by twisted wire if it is a volt-free contact, or by shielded cables if it is a 2 or 3-wire proximity sensor.
This module is fitted as standard with devices to protect against short-circuits or voltage inversions. The module cannot, however, withstand a fault for any length of time and the fuses connected in series with the supplies must give effective protection. The fuses must, therefore, be of the fast blow type with a maximum rating of 1A. The supplies must provide sufficient power to blow the fuses.
Important note : wiring solid state outputs Q0
The actuator connected to output Q0 has its common point at the 0V of the power supply.
If for any reason (poor contact or accidental disconnection) there is a break in the 0V supply to the output amplifier while the 0V of the actuators remains connected to the 0V supply, there may be an output current from the amplifier of a few mA which is sufficient to keep certain low-power actuators energized.
B
+ + – –
+ + – –
I0 I1 channel 0
I2 Q0 I0 I1 chan.1
I2 Q0
204 104
+
205 105
+
206 106
+
112 312 208 108
+
209 109
+
210 110
+
114 314
Rl Rl
Connecting using TELEFAST :
This is the most reliable type of connection provided the actuator common is connected to the bar of common points 200 to 215 (jumper in position 1-2). In this case there can be no break in the module common without breaking the actuator common.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/27
B
Connecting via cable
This type of connection requires very careful attention. Great care must be exercised during wiring, for example, using cable ends at the screw terminals. If required it will be necessary to double up the connections to ensure permanent contacts. When the actuator supply is some distance from the modules and near to the actuator common, the connection between the common and 0V terminal of the module(s) may be accidentally broken.
TSX CAY 21/41
24 V
Q0
0V
17
13
24 V
Q0
0V
15
18
Critical wire
A B
RL RL
Actuator supply
If there is a break in the supply cable segment between A and B, there is a risk of the
RL actuators remaining energized. If possible, double up the 0V power supply connections for the modules.
Using the TSX CDP 301/501 cable :
HE10
TSX CDP 301 / 501 cable white-pink
17 white-gray
19 white-green
13
24 V white-yellow
15
RL 0 V
RL
0VDC gray-brown
18 pink-brown
20
0VDC connection terminal
___________________________________________________________________________
3/28
Setup 3
3.7
Connecting speed drive monitoring signals
3.7-1 Signal referencing
TSX CAY modules integrate standard management of the signals necessary for correct operation of the speed drives. This connector is always used whatever the number of channels on the TSX CAY modules.
B
COM0 nc
VALVAR1
1
3
COM2
5
7
2
4
6
8
VALVAR0
COM1 nc
VALVAR2 nc
VALVAR3
9
11
OK_VAR0
13 14
OK_VAR2
15 16
10 COM3
12 nc
OK_VAR1
OK_VAR3
Speed drive monitoring inputs nc nc
17 18
19 20
0 V
0 V
24 V common
Auxiliary I/O supply
COMx - VALVARx : volt-free contact to enable the speed drive
OK_VARx : speed drive monitoring input
24V - 0V sensor supply
Each channel has a volt-free N/O contact.
Connection principle for speed drive I/O associated with channel 0
HE10 connector
1
COM0
+24 V
2 VALVAR0
Speed drive
ENABLE
13 OK_VAR0
+24 V
OK
To connect the HE10 connector, use the following wiring accessories : discrete
TELEFAST discrete ABE-7H16R20 with TSX CDP 303 or TSX CDP 503 cable.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/29
B
3.7-2 Connecting using the TELEFAST pre-wired system
+ + – –
+ + – –
24VDC supply
(*)
1 P4 0
P4
100 200 201 101 112 301
P4
24 V
REFEN
DROK
GND24
24 V
REFEN
DROK
GND24
For direct connection use a TSX CDP 301 or 501 cable.
See section 3.6-3.
(*) Strap between 1 and 2 : terminals 200 to 215 are at +24 VDC.
103 203 204 104 113 303
___________________________________________________________________________
3/30
Setup 3
3.7-3 Correspondence between TELEFAST terminal blocks and HE10 connector
TELEFAST screw term. blk.
(Terminal no.)
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
112
113
114
115
+ 24 VDC
107
108
109
110
111
- 0 VDC
+ 24 VDC
- 0 VDC
1
2
3
4
200...215
300...315
13
14
15
16
17
10
11
12
8
9
20-pin HE10 connector
(Pin no.)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
18
19
20
Signal type
COM0
VALR0 nc
COM1
VALR1 nc
COM2
VALR2 nc
COM3
VALR3 nc
OK_VAR0
OK_VAR1
OK_VAR2
OK_VAR3
Auxiliary input sensor supply
contact closed =
speed drive enabled
ENCoder OK = encoder supply voltage present
Terminals 200 to 215 at + 24 VDC
Terminals 200 to 215 at - 0 VDC
Connection of sensor commons to :
+ 24 VDC if terminals 1 & 2 are linked
- 0 VDC if terminals 3 & 4 are linked
Terminals on the optional ABE-7BV20 bar may be used as sensor common
B
Note (1) nc = not connected
___________________________________________________________________________
3/31
B
3.8
Electrical characteristics of the module
3.8-1 General characteristics
Maximum counting frequency :
SSI absolute encoder : CLK transmission frequency incremental encoder :
200KHz
500 kHz x 1
250 kHz x 4
Current drawn on internal 5V
(fan running)
Current drawn on sensor/ preactuator 24V, outputs OFF typical
CAY 2 • 1.1A
CAY 4 • /33 1.5A
CAY 2 • typical
15mA
CAY 4 • /33 30mA max
1.4A
1.8A
max
18mA
36mA
Current drawn by module on
10/30V encoder at 24V (1)
Power dissipated in module
Insulation resistance
Dielectric strength with ground or PLC logic 0V
Operating temperature
Storage temperature
CAY 2 • typical
11 mA
CAY 4 • /33 22mA typical (2)
CAY 2 • 7.2W
CAY 4 • /33 10 W
> 10 MOhms at 500 VDC
1000 V rms 50 / 60 Hz for 1 min max
20 mA
40mA max (3)
11.5W
17 W
0 to 60°C
-25°C to 70°C
Relative humidity (without condensation)
Operating altitude
5% to 95%
< 2000 m
Note (1) : Use of an absolute encoder and a single supply at 24V
Note (2) : normal operating conditions : one auxiliary input active per channel (at 24 V)
Note (3) : the "worst possibility" and extreme conditions : all auxiliary inputs active (at 30 V).
The module has a small internal fan to ensure correct operation across the entire temperature range. The fan is activated as necessary by a temperature sensor inside the module (triggered at 45 °C external temperature).
It is possible to use TSX FAN•• external ventilation units if the temperature conditions around the module exceed the parameters above.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/32
Setup 3
3.8-2 Characteristics of the analog outputs
Parameters
Range
Actual range
Resolution
Value of LSB
Max. current from one output
Fallback value
Monotonicity
Differential linearity
Accuracy
Dielectric strength between channels and machine ground
Value
±
10.24
±
10.24
13 bits + sign
1.25
1.5
max
±
1
100
±
2
0.5
1000VAC
Unit
V
V mV mA
LSB
%
LSB
% F.S.
Each output is protected against short-circuits and overloads. If a fault occurs a signal is sent to the CPU via a status word. A short-circuit on these outputs will not damage the module.
The absence of the connector on the analog output is not checked.
B
3.8-3 Characteristics of the counter inputs
Equivalent circuit diagram : example of input A
220
Ω
A+
10nF
190
Ω
Line check
Ainput A
___________________________________________________________________________
3/33
B
Characteristics
Electrical characteristics
Nominal voltage
Voltage limits
Nominal current
Input impedance (at 5 V)
Voltage at "On" state
Current at "On" state
Voltage at "Off" state
Current at "Off" state
Encoder / sensor voltage return check
Symbol
Un
U1
In
Re
Uon
Ion
Uoff
Ioff
Compatibility of inputs A, B and Z :
RS 422 / RS 485 / 7 mA current loop line driver outputs. Differential line check on each input.
A+ 220
Ω
A-
Line check
Value
±5
±5.5
±18
270
>=+2.4
> +3.7
<1,2
<1
Presence check
Unit
V
V mA
Ohms
V mA
V mA
Totem pole complementary outputs, 5V supply.
Differential line check on each input.
A+ 220
Ω
A-
Line check
___________________________________________________________________________
3/34
Setup 3
B
Encoder + power supply return input characteristics :
Ie encoder + power supply return
0 V
Electrical characteristics
Voltage at "On" state (OK)
Voltage limits
Input current (2.5 < Uok < 30)
Symbol
Uok
Umax
Imax
Value
> 2.5
30
3
The presence of the encoder will be detected as long as the input is active.
Unit
V
V mA
___________________________________________________________________________
3/35
B
3.8-4 Characteristics of auxiliary inputs
The auxiliary inputs are supplied at 24V from a supply provided via the connector.
Equivalent circuit diagram :
24 V sensors / preactuators 24V
I3
I2
I1
Ie
Ie
I0
Voltage check
+
24 V
-
0 V sensors / preactuators 0V
Electrical characteristics
Nominal voltage
Voltage limits (1)
(ripple included)
Nominal current
Input impedance (at Unom)
Voltage at "On" state
Current at Uon (11V)
Voltage at "Off" state
Current at "Off" state
Immunity Off --> On (for I0, I2 and I3)
EVT input (on G07)
(for I1)
Immunity Off --> On (for I0, I2 and I3)
(for I1)
Dielectric strength with ground
IEC compatibility with sensors
3-wire / 2-wire proximity sensor compatibility
Input type
Logic type
Symbol
Un
U1
Utemp (*)
In
Re
Uon
Ion
Uoff
Value
24
19 to 30
34
8
3
>=11
>6
<5
Ioff ton
<2
0.1 to 0.2
1 to 4 ton 0.1 to 0.2
1 to 4 incremental encoder : 1
µ s absolute encoder : < 400
µ s
1500V rms 50 / 60 Hz for 1min type 2 all proximity sensors operating at 24VDC
Current sink
Positive (sink) mA ms ms ms ms
Unit
V
V
V mA
KOhms
V mA
V
3/36
Setup 3
3.8-5 Characteristics of the reflex outputs Q0
Each position control channel has an output controlled by the processor which is used for the integrated control of one function of the axis being controlled. For example, control of braking between two movements, safety, etc. This is a solid state output with the load common at the sensor / preactuator 0V voltage. It is protected against overloads and shortcircuits, and fault information is provided to the processor if a fault occurs.
B sensor/preact.
sensor monitor circuit short-circuit fault monitor circuit
Command
+
Electrical characteristics
Nominal voltage
Voltage limits
Max for 1 hour / 24 hrs (Utemp)*
Nominal current
Max voltage drop when "On"
Leakage current
Max current at 30V and at 34V
Switching time
Dielectric strength with ground
Compatible with DC inputs
IEC 1131 compatibility
Short-circuit monitoring on each channel
24 V
Q0
–
Value
24
19 to 30
34
500
< 1
< 0.3
625
<500
1500V rms 50 / 60 Hz for 1min
All positive logic inputs where input resistance is less than 15KOhms yes
One signalling bit per channel
Unit
V
V
V mA
V mA mA
µ s
___________________________________________________________________________
3/37
B
Electrical characteristics
Reactivation :
• by application program
• automatic
Protection against overloads and short-circuits
Protection against channel overvoltages
Protection against reverse polarity
Power of filament lamp
Value
One bit per channel written by program
By current limiter and thermal tripping (0.7 < Id < 2 A)
Zener diode between outputs and +24V
By reverse-mounted diode on the supply
10 W (max)
Note
Utemp is the maximum voltage which can be applied to the module for 1 hour in any 24-hour period.
3.8-6 Monitoring the sensor / preactuator voltage
The module monitors the supply to the actuators / preactuators so that it can signal to the processor any malfunction which may cause incorrect operation.
Electrical characteristics
Voltage at OK state
Voltage at fault state
Immunity OK ---> Fault
Immunity Fault---> OK
Accept fault
Accept no fault
Symbol
Uok
Udef
Im.off
Im.on
Toff
Ton
Value
>18
<14
>1
>1
<10
<10
Unit
V
V ms ms ms ms
___________________________________________________________________________
3/38
Setup 3
3.8-7 Characteristics of the speed drive monitoring inputs
The speed drive monitoring auxiliary inputs have the same supply as the auxiliary
I/O. The module does not monitor this supply, but any voltage drop below 5V on a
CTRL_VAR input may signal a speed drive fault to the processor.
B
I3
OK_VAR3
I2
OK_VAR2
I1
OK_VAR1
I0 OK_VAR0
+
24 V
-
0V speed drive
Electrical characteristics
Nominal voltage
Voltage limits (1)
(ripple included)
Nominal current
Input impedance (at Un)
Voltage at OK state
Current at Uon (11V)
Voltage at "Fault" state
Current at "Fault" state
Immunity OK --> Fault
Immunity Fault-->OK
Dielectric strength with ground
IEC 1131 compatibility with sensors
Logic type
Symbol
Un
U1
Utemp (*)
In
Re
Uon
Ion
Uoff
Ioff toff ton
Value
24
19 to 30
34
8
3
>=11
>3,5
<5
<1.5
1 to 4
1 to 4
1500V rms 50 / 60 Hz for 1min type 1
Positive (sink)
(*) Utemp : maximum permitted voltage for 1 hour in any 24-hour period.
Unit
V
V
V mA
KOhms
V mA
V mA ms ms
___________________________________________________________________________
3/39
B
3.8-8 Characteristics of the relay outputs
Each channel has one relay output.
Electrical characteristics
DC operating voltage
Permissible DC switching current
30V on resistive load
Permissible minimum load
Switching time
Dielectric strength :
• between contacts and between channels
• between contacts and ground
COMx
VALVARx
Value
5 to 30
200
1V / 1mA
<5
300VAC for 1min
1000VAC for 1 min
Unit
V mA ms
___________________________________________________________________________
3/40
Setup 3
3.9
Module display
TSX CAY 21/41 modules have indicator lamps displaying the status of the module and the channels.
• Module status lamps (RUN, ERR, I/O)
The state of the three lamps on the front panel (off, flashing or on) indicates the module operating mode :
- RUN lamp : signals module operating state
- ERR lamp : signals an internal module fault
- I/O lamp : signals an external fault
• Channel status lamps (CH i
)
TSX CAY 21/41 modules have 2 or 4 indicator lamps to display and diagnose the state of each channel.
These lamps are green.
CH2
CH3 CH3 CH1
RUN ERR
I / O I/O
B
State On Flashing Off
Lamps
RUN Normal operation — Module faulty or off
No fault ERR
I/O
Internal fault module failure
External fault
• wiring fault
• encoder power supply and 10 / 30V power supply fault
• absolute encoder fault (*)
Communication fault
Application absent, invalid or execution fault
— No fault
CHi
TSX CAY 4 • /33 :
CH0 and CH1
TSX CAY 41 :
CH0, CH1, CH2,
CH3
Channel is operational Channel is operating Channel not operating.
incorrectly because of : No configuration or
• external fault,
• communication fault,
• a process fault.
incorrect configuration.
Application fault
• configuration refused
• SMOVE function refused
___________________________________________________________________________
3/41
B
___________________________________________________________________________
3/42
4 Appendix
4.1
Appendix
All SSI absolute encoders, 16 < Number of data bits < 25, Gray or binary code are compatible with TSX CAY modules. For example :
IVO brandname
• GM 400 0 10 11 01
24 Volts, Gray, 0 header bit, 25 data bits, 0 status bit, no parity.
• GM 401 1 30 R20 20 00
24 Volts, Gray, 0 header bit, 25 data bits, 1 status bit, even parity.
Hengstler brandname
• RA58-M/1212
24 Volts, Gray, 0 header bit, 24 data bits, 1 status bit, no parity.
Stegmann brandname
• AG 661 01
24 Volts, Gray, 0 header bit, 24 data bits, 0 status bit, no parity.
IDEACOD brandname
• SHM506S 428R / 4096 / 8192 / 26
11-30 Volts, Gray, 0 header bit, 25 data bits, 0 status bit, no parity.
B
___________________________________________________________________________
4/1
B
___________________________________________________________________________
4/2
Installation
Stepper motor control
Contents
Part C
C
Section
1.1-1 Stepper motor axis control range
3.1-1 Basic configuration required
3.1-3 General wiring instructions
3.2-2 Translator interface power supply
3.3-2 Connecting a translator using an RS 422/485 interface
3.3-3 Connecting a translator using an NPN open collector interface
Page
___________________________________________________________________________
C/1
C
Installation
Stepper motor control
Contents
Part C
Section Page
Connecting sensors / preactuators and power supplies 3/6
3.4-3 Connecting auxiliary I/O to the process 3/6
3.4-4 Connecting using a TSX CDP 301/ 501 preformed cable 3/8
3.4-5 Connecting using the TELEFAST pre-wired system
3.4-6 Signal availability on the TELEFAST terminal block
3.4-7 Correspondence between TELEFAST terminal blocks and HE10 connector
3.4-9 Connecting using a TSX CDP 301 / 501 preformed cable 3/13
Electrical characteristics of the module 3/14
3.5-1 General characteristics 3/14
3.5-2 Characteristics of the translator inputs (Sub-D connector) 3/15
3.5-3 Characteristics of the translator outputs (Sub-D connector) 3/15
3.5-4 Characteristics of the auxiliary inputs (HE10 connector) 3/16
3.5-5 Characteristics of brake output Q0 characteristics 3/17
Translators compatible with TSX CFY 11 / 21
Installing TSX CFY 11/21 with Phytron translators
4.2-3 Recommendations for initial adjustments
___________________________________________________________________________
C/2
1.1
Introduction
1.1-1 Stepper motor axis control range
FIP
1 Presentation
C translator motor
The CFY 11/21 stepper motor axis control range for Premium PLCs is designed to meet the requirements of machine manufacturers.
It is designed for machines which require motion control using a stepper motor together with simultaneous sequential control via a PLC.
1.1-2 Presentation
There are two modules :
• TSX CFY 11 module : a single-axis module with one translator control output
• TSX CFY 21 module : a 2-axis module with two translator control outputs
___________________________________________________________________________
1/1
C
1.1-3 Setup software
PL7 Junior or PL7 Pro software can access screens to configure each axis and define elementary movements using its function library.
Screens for adjusting the axis parameters and setting up movements can also be accessed from PL7 Junior or PL7 Pro.
___________________________________________________________________________
1/2
Presentation 1
1.2
Physical description
Description of TSX CFY 11 and TSX CFY 21 stepper motor axis control modules
TSX CFY 11
C
Translator axis 0
Discrete I/O, translator check axis 0
TSX CFY 21
Translator axis 0
Translator axis 1
Discrete I/O, translator check axes 0 and 1
___________________________________________________________________________
1/3
C
___________________________________________________________________________
1/4
C
A
I
T
O
N
A
P
P
I
L
P
R
O
G
R
A
M
2.1
Functions
Block diagram of a stepper motor axis control system :
Processor CFY 11/21 module
Control commands
Enable control
Modes
Pulse generator
Operating parameters
Status
Cams and end stops
E
R
F
A
I
N
T
C
E
2 Functions
Application
Translator enable
Boost
+ pulses
- pulse or direction
Translator check
Loss of step
Reset loss of step check
Brake
Emergency stop
External stop
- limit switch
+ limit switch
Reference point cam
External event
C
CFY 11/21 stepper motor axis control modules provide for each axis :
• inputs
- translator check input
- loss of step check input
- + limit switch input
- - limit switch input
- reference point cam input
- event input
- emergency stop input
- external stop input
• outputs
- brake output
- + pulse output
- - pulse or direction output
- reset loss of step check output
- boost output
- translator enable output
___________________________________________________________________________
2/1
C
Processing commands
Each movement, controlled by the PLC sequential program, is described by an SMOVE movement function in PL7 language. The CFY 11/12 module uses this SMOVE command to calculate a position setpoint / speed reference and generates movement pulses.
PL7 screens make it easy to adjust, debug and clearly display the status of the axes.
2.1-1 Configuring the axes
This screen is used to enter the parameters required to adapt the module operation to the machine axis characteristics and the technical characteristics of the power translators controlling the motor.
There is no default configuration for this screen. The configuration parameters cannot be modified by the program. Access is only possible via the programming terminal.
Note: For an MSD or SP type Phytron translator, use the following configuration :
• Command mode : A=Pulse / B=Direction
• Translator (drive) inversions : Enable output (box checked)
___________________________________________________________________________
2/2
Functions 2
2.1-2 Adjusting the axes
Adjustment parameters may be modified, either via the terminal (online or offline), or directly via the application program.
The operating parameters are :
• trajectory parameters : stop/start frequency, acceleration, soft stops (software Hi and
Lo limits), stop plateau (level) duration,
• manual mode parameters : speed, reference point (origin point),
• brake output activation and deactivation delay times.
C
___________________________________________________________________________
2/3
C
2.1-3 Debugging
Debug mode can be accessed online and is used to control and observe axis behavior.
The information shown differs depending on the operating mode selected :
• Off mode
• Dir Drive mode
• Manual mode
• Automatic mode
The upper part of the screen gives information about the module and axis operating status : the lower part of the screen gives information about the state of the module inputs and the position of the axis with respect to the programmed target position.
Various manual movement modes are available, including a command for creating a machine reference point.
___________________________________________________________________________
2/4
3 Setup
3.1
Setup
3.1-1 Basic configuration required
Stepper motor axis control modules can be installed in any slot of a TSX RKY ii rack. The power supply to the rack must be chosen according to the number of modules installed.
Maximum number of TSX CFY modules i 1 per station
Each stepper motor axis control module supports :
• 1 application-specific channel for the TSX CFY 11 module,
• 2 application-specific channels for the TSX CFY 21 module,
The number of application-specific channels managed by a PLC station depends on the type of processor installed. The maximum number of TSX CFY i 1 modules in a PLC station thus depends on :
• the type of processor installed,
• the number of application-specific channels already used apart from the stepper motor control channels.
The user should therefore perform a review at station level to determine the number of application-specific channels already used, in order to define the number of TSX CFY i 1 modules which can be used.
Note : The definition and number of application-specific channels is given in the manual
TSX DM57 2 E "Volume 1 - part A - section 3.5-3).
Number of application-specific channels managed by each type of processor
Processors
TSX P57 102/TPMX P57 102/TPCX 571012
TSX P57 2 i 2/TPMX P57 202
TSX P57 3 i 2/TPMX P57 352/TPCX 57 3512
TSX P57 4 i 2/TPMX P57 452
No. of app.-spec. channels managed
8
24
32
48
C
3.1-2 Installation procedure
It is possible to install or remove a module without switching off the rack supply voltage to ensure that another device remains available for use.
However, connection or disconnection of connectors to the translator power supplies is not recommended, as certain translators cannot tolerate such handling. The auxiliary I/O connector can be disconnected while powered up without damaging the module. Nevertheless, for the safety of personnel it is recommended that auxiliary supplies are switched off before any disconnection.
The module and connector fixing screws must be tightened correctly in order to obtain good protection against electrostatic and electromagnetic interference.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/1
C
3.1-3 General wiring instructions
The sensor and actuator power supplies must be protected against overloads or overvoltages by fast-blow fuses.
Use wires with an adequate cross-section to avoid line voltage drops or overheating.
Keep sensor and actuator cables away from any source of radiation caused by high-power electrical circuit switching.
All cables connecting translators must be shielded. Shielding must be of high quality and connected to the machine ground at both the module and translator ends. There must be continuity along the entire length of the connections. Only translator signals should be carried on the cable.
For performance reasons, module auxiliary inputs have short response times and it is thus important that these inputs have an adequate independent supply to ensure that the module continues to operate correctly in the event of brief power outage. It is recommended that regulated supplies are used as they ensure the consistency of actuator and sensor response times. The 0V supply must be connected to the machine ground as near as possible to the supply output.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/2
Setup 3
3.2
Choice of translator
3.2-1 I/O interfaces
TSX CFY 11 and TSX CFY 21 stepper motor axis control modules can be connected to translators which have the following I/O characteristics :
• RS422 / RS485 differential inputs or TTL/5V "source" compatible inputs,
• RS422 / RS485 differential outputs or NPN open collector outputs.
C
3.2-2 Translator interface power supply
The modules have an isolated 5V power supply which can power the translator interfaces if the translator does not provide power. This is the case for interfaces with open collector outputs or TTL inputs. The 0V is common to both the inputs and the outputs, and must in all cases be wired between the module and the translator.
3.2-3 Shielding
To ensure correct operation of the module when the environment is subject to interference, shielding must be continuous along the entire length of the connector cables, and must be connected to machine ground at both ends of the cable.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/3
C
3.3
Connecting translator signals
3.3-1 Signal referencing
3
4
5
1
2
6
7
8
13
14
11
12
15
9
10
9
10
11
12
1
2
3
4
13
14
5
6
8
15
7
–
+
–
+
+
–
+
–
+
–
+ pulse output
- pulse output (or direction) boost output translator enable output reset loss of step check output translator check input loss of step check input isolated 0V isolated 5V nc : not connected
Each module output transmits an RS 485-type signal, and for each output there is thus a direct (+) signal and its complement (-). The inputs are TTL-compatible current sinking inputs. The 5V isolated supply is only available (if necessary) for the translator I/O interface. The 0V supply is common to both inputs and outputs. The 5V supply may only be used for translators with open collector outputs and TTL-type inputs (the 5V isolated supply is not supplied by the translator).
Physical interfaces of the module :
5 V
RS 485 driver
+ output
- output input
The type of connection suggested is to solder the wires directly onto the connector : the
TSX CAP S15 kit comprises a Sub-D connector and its protective cover.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/4
Setup 3
6
7
8
4
5
1
2
3
14
15
9
10
11
12
13
3.3-2 Connecting a translator using an RS 422/485 interface
A shielded cable containing 7 twisted pairs is recommended for connection. The + and wires for each module output signal must be connected on the same pair.
C
3
4
9
1
2
10
11
12
13
14
5
6
7 NC
0V 8
5V 15 NC
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
-
-
-
NC
NC
NC
+ pulses
- pulses (or direction)
Boost
Translator enable
Reset loss of step check
Translator check
Loss of step check
TRANSLATOR
RS 422/RS485 compatible inputs
RS422/RS485 outputs
3.3-3 Connecting a translator using an NPN open collector interface
A single wire is used for each I/O signal. If the isolated 5V supply is not provided by the translator, the isolated 5V supply from the module must be used to supply the interface.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
1
4
9
2
3
10
11
12
13
-
-
-
-
-
14
5
6
7 nc
8
5V 15
0V
+5V
+ pulses
- pulses (or direction)
Boost
Translator enable
Reset loss of step check
Translator check
Loss of step check
TRANSLATOR
TTL/5V "source" compatible inputs
NPN open collector outputs
___________________________________________________________________________
3/5
C
3.4
Connecting sensors / preactuators and power supplies
3.4-1 Signal referencing
CFY 21 reference point cam I0 emergency stop I1
1
3
2
4
+ limit switch I2 reference point cam I0 external stop I1
+ limit switch I2 brake Q0 brake Q0
5
7
9
6
8
10
11 12
13 14
15 16
17 18
Sensor / preactuator
24V supply
19 20
I3 event
I4 external stop inputs channel 0
I5 - limit switch
I3 event
I4 external stop
I5 - limit switch inputs channel 1 n c n c output channel 0 output channel 1
Sensor / preactuator
0V supply
The 0V for sensors / preactuators should be connected within the module to machine ground by an R/C circuit with value : R = 10M
Ω
/ C = 4.7nF.
3.4-2 Connections
There are several possible solutions for connecting CFY 11 / 21 module sensors / preactuators. They must be connected directly via a TSX CDP 301 / 501 flat cable or via the discrete TELEFAST pre-wired system.
3.4-3 Connecting auxiliary I/O to the process
For optimum performance, the event and reference point inputs have low immunity. The use of bounce-free contacts (proximity sensor for example) is recommended.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/6
Setup 3
Connection principle for the I/O of channel 0
CFY 21
Sensor / preactuator power supply
+ 24 V
0 V
1
3
5
7
9
8
10
11 12
2
4
6
13 14
15 16
17 18
19 20 event reference point cam external stop emergency stop
- limit switch
+ limit switch same as channel 0 electro brake channel 0
Q0
The emergency stop or limit switch contacts are N/C.
The limit switch contacts are not overtravel contacts which must be wired in series with the emergency stop input. The role of the limit switch contacts is to control the stopping of a movement with deceleration. Limit switch (LS +) stops the movement in the + direction, limit switch (LS –) stops the movement in the – direction. It is therefore important that they are positioned at the correct ends of the axis (see diagram below).
Emergency stop
+ 24V
Overtravel Overtravel
C
LS – R.P.
–
Moving part
E V T LS +
___________________________________________________________________________
3/7
C
3.4-4 Connecting using a TSX CDP 301/ 501 preformed cable
This preformed cable enables direct connection to actuators, preactuators or any system with terminals. The cable consists of twenty 22-gauge wires (0.34 mm 2 ) with a connector at one end and color-coded flying leads at the other.
CFY 21 cable :
TSX CDP 301
TSX CDP 501 length :
3m
5m
HE10
1
3
5
7
9
8
10
11 12
2
4
6
13 14
15 16
17 18
19 20 white brown green yellow gray pink blue
red black purple gray-pink red-blue white-green brown-green white-yellow yellow-brown white-gray gray-brown white-pink pink-brown reference point cam event emergency stop external stop
+ limit switch
- limit switch reference point cam event emergency stop external stop
+ limit switch
- limit switch brake Q0 channel 0 n c brake Q0 channel 1 n c
24V
0V
24V
0V channel 0 channel 1
___________________________________________________________________________
3/8
Setup 3
3.4-5 Connecting using the TELEFAST pre-wired system
Connection is made by means of a TELEFAST 2 sub-base : ABE-7H16R20.
CFY 21
C
TSX CDP 053 / 503
Sensor / preactuator
24 VDC supply
+ + - -
+ + -
ABE-7H16R20
Wiring example :
I0 I1 I2 I3
Channel 0
I4 I5 Q0 I0 I1 I2
Channel 1
I3 I4 I5 Q0
200
100
202
102
204
104
+ + +
201
101
+
203
103
205
105
+ +
112
Rl
312
-
206
106
+
208
108
+
210
110
+
207
107
+
209
109
211
111 114
+ +
Rl
314
-
200
100
202
102
204
104
+ + +
201
101
+
203
103
205
105 112
+ +
Rl
312
-
206
106
208
108
210
110
+ + +
207
107
+
209
109
211
111 114
+ +
Rl
314
-
NO NC NC NO NO NC NO NC NC NO NO NC
200
100
+
202
102
204
104
201
101
203
103
205
105
300
+ 302 + 304 + 301 + 303 + 305
-
112
Rl
-
206
106
+
208
108
210
110
207
107
209
109 111
211
306
+ 308 + 310 + 307
+
309
+
311
-
114
Rl
314
-
NO NC
NO : normally open
NC : normally closed
NC NO NO NC NO NC NC NO NO NC
___________________________________________________________________________
3/9
C
3.4-6 Signal availability on the TELEFAST terminal block
The terminal block below represents that of the ABE-7H16R20 sub-base. The signals are referenced using the TSX CDP 053 / 503 direct connecting cable.
(1)
(2)
(1) On the ABE-7H16R20 sub-base, the position of the jumper defines the polarity of terminals 200 to 215 :
• Jumper in position 1 and 2 : terminals 200 to 215 have positive polarity,
• Jumper in position 3 and 4 : terminals 200 to 215 have negative polarity.
(2) On the ABE-7H16R20 sub-base it is possible to add an optional ABE-7BV20 bar to create a second sensor common (+ or - selected by the user).
___________________________________________________________________________
3/10
Setup 3
3.4-7 Correspondence between TELEFAST terminal blocks and HE10 connector
111
112
113
114
115
+ 24 VDC
- 0 VDC
+ 24 VDC
- 0 VDC
1
2
3
4
200...215
TELEFAST 20-pin HE10 screw term. blk.
connector
(Terminal no.) (Pin no.)
100 1
101 2
102
103
104
105
3
4
5
6
106
107
108
109
110
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Signal type
I0 reference point cam
I3 event
I1 emergency stop
I4 external stop
I2 + limit switch
I5 - limit switch
I0 reference point cam
I3 event
I1 emergency stop
I4 external stop
I2 + limit switch
I5 - limit switch
Brake output Q 0 nc
Brake output Q0 nc (1)
Sensor / actuator supply
Terminals 200 to 215 at + 24 VDC
Terminals 200 to 215 at - 0 VDC channel 0 channel 1 channel 0 channel 1
300...315
Connection of sensor commons to :
+ 24 VDC if terminals 1 & 2 linked
- 0 VDC if terminals 3 & 4 linked
On the optional ABE-7BV20 bar, terminals may be used as sensor common, wired to the common voltage.
note (1) nc = not connected
Signals corresponding to channel 1 are not connected for a CFY 11 module.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/11
C
C
3.4-8 Wiring recommendations
To ensure optimum performance, inputs I0 to I5 are fast inputs. If the actuator is a voltfree contact type, the inputs must be connected using a twisted pair, or a shielded cable if the sensor is a two or three-wire proximity sensor.
This module is fitted as standard with devices to protect against short-circuits or voltage inversions. However, the module cannot withstand a fault for any length of time and the fuses connected in series with the supplies give effective protection. The fuses must therefore be of the fast blow type with a maximum rating of 1A. The supplies must provide sufficient power to blow the fuses.
Important note : wiring of solid state outputs Q0
The actuator is connected to output Q0 at its common point at the 0V of the power supply. If for any reason (poor contact or accidental disconnection) there is a break in the 0V supply of the output amplifier while the 0V of the actuators remains connected to the 0V supply, there may be an output current from the amplifier of a few mA which is sufficient to keep certain low-power actuators energized.
+ + - -
+ +
- -
I0 I1 I2 Q0 I0 I1 I2 Q0
204
+
104
205
+
105
206
+
106 112
312
208
+
108
209
+
109
210
+
110
Rl
114
Rl
314
Connecting using TELEFAST :
This is the most reliable type of connection provided the actuator common is connected to the bar of common points 200 to 215 (jumper in position 1-2). In this case there can be no break in the module common without breaking the actuator common.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/12
Setup 3
3.4-9 Connecting using a TSX CDP 301 / 501 preformed cable
This type of connection requires very careful attention. Great care must be exercised during wiring, for example using cable ends at the screw terminals. In certain circumstances, it is necessary to double up the connections to ensure permanent contacts.
When the actuator supply is some distance from the modules and near to the actuator common, the connection between the common and 0V terminal of the module(s) may be accidentally broken.
C
TSX CFY 11/21
24 V
Q0
0V
17
13
24 V
15
Q0
Actuator supply
0V
18
Critical wire
RL RL
A B
If there is a break in the supply cable segment between A and B, it is possible that the
RL actuators may remain energized. If possible, double up the 0V supply connections for the module(s).
Connecting using a TSX CDP 301 / 501 preformed cable :
TSX CFY 11/21
HE10 white-gray
17 white-pink
19 white-green
13 white-yellow
15
RL
24 V
0 V
RL
0VDC gray-brown
18 pink-brown
20
0VDC User connection terminal block
___________________________________________________________________________
3/13
C
3.5
Electrical characteristics of the module
3.5-1 General characteristics
Electrical characteristics
Maximum pulse frequency
Current drawn on internal 5V TSX CFY 11
TSX CFY 21
Current drawn by module on 24V sensor / preactuator excluding sensor / preactuator current
Power dissipated in module
TSX CFY 11
TSX CFY 21
TSX CFY 11
TSX CFY 21
Insulation resistance
Dielectric strength between "translator" I/O and protected ground or PLC logic
Operating temperature
Storage temperature
Relative humidity (without condensation)
Operating altitude
Values
187.316 KHz
510 mA
650 mA
50 mA
100 mA
3.8 W
5.6 W
> 10 M
Ω
at 500VDC
1000Vrms
50 / 60 Hz for
1minute
0 to 60°C
-25°C to 70°C
5% to 95%
< 2000 m
___________________________________________________________________________
3/14
3.5-2 Characteristics of the translator inputs (Sub-D connector)
These are current sinking inputs with negative logic.
diagram :
5 V
Setup 3
C
Ue
0 V
Characteristics
Nominal current
(Ue = 0V)
Voltage at ON state
Voltage at OFF state
Immunity of loss of step input
Immunity of translator fault input
Symbol
Ie
Uon
Uoff
Value
4.5
2
3.6
15 to 30
3 to 10
Unit mA
V
V
µs ms
3.5-3 Characteristics of the translator outputs (Sub-D connector)
These are isolated RS 422 / 485 type. There are two complementary outputs per signal.
Characteristics
Differential output voltage at R load <= 100
Ω
Short-circuit current
Permissible common mode voltage
Permissible differential voltage
Values
± 2
< 150
≤
7
≤
12
Units
V mA
V
V
___________________________________________________________________________
3/15
C
3.5-4 Characteristics of the auxiliary inputs (HE10 connector)
Equivalent circuit diagram :
24 V
I5
I4
I3
I2
I1
Ie
Ie
I0
+
24 V
0 V
Characteristics
Nominal voltage
Nominal voltage limits
(including ripple)
Symbol Value
Un 24
U1 19 to 30
Utemp (1) 34
Unit
V
V
V
Nominal current
Input impedance (at Unom)
Voltage at ON state
Current at Uon (11V)
Voltage at OFF state
Current at OFF state
Input immunity :
Reference point cam and event
Other inputs
In
Re
Uon
Ion
Uoff
Ioff
7
3.4
>=11
> 6
< 5
< 2 mA
K
Ω
V mA
V mA
IEC 1131 compatibility with sensors
2 and 3-wire proximity sensor compatibility
Input type
Logic type
Preactuator voltage monitoring
Power supply detection time supply threshold OK supply threshold faulty supply OK supply faulty ton/ toff (2) < 250 ton / toff 3 to 10 type 2 all proximity sensors at 24 VDC current sink positive (sink)
> 18
< 14
<30
> 1
µs ms
V
V ms ms
(1) Utemp : maximum permissible voltage for 1 hour in any 24-hour period.
(2) Inputs : reference point cam and event are fast inputs (response time < 250µs) in accordance with the maximum frequency of 187.316 KHz for translator check outputs.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/16
Setup 3
3.5-5 Characteristics of brake output Q0 characteristics sensor/preact.
monitor circuit + short-circuit fault monitor circuit command
24V
Q0
–
Electrical characteristics
Nominal voltage
Value
24
Unit
V
Voltage limits
Temporary voltage
Nominal current
Maximum voltage drop at ON state s
Leakage current at OFF state
Load impedance
Maximum current at 30V and 34V
19 to 30
34 (1)
500
< 1
< 0.3
Voltage monitoring response time
80 < Zon <15000
625
Switching time
Electro discharge time
Maximum switching frequency
(on inductive load)
< 250
< L/R
F < 0.6 /(LI2)
µs s
Hz
Inductive input compatibility All inputs with Re less than 15 K
Ω and positive logic
IEC 1131 conformity yes
Protection against overloads and short-circuits via current limiter and tripping thermal with signaling : 1 bit per channel Short-circuit check on each channel
Reset :
(by program or automatic)
Protection against channel overvoltages
Protection against polarity inversions
1 bit per module
Zener diode (55V) between outputs and +24V via reverse-mounted diode on supply
Permissible power of filament lamp
Preactuator voltage check
8
OK if supply > 18 (rising) not OK if supply < 14 (falling)
NOK--> OK < 30
OK --> NOK > 1
W
V
V ms ms
V
V mA
V mA
Ω mA
C
3/17
C
___________________________________________________________________________
3/18
4 Appendix
4.1
Translators compatible with TSX CFY 11 / 21
4.1-1 Phytron translators
Manufacturer
Phytron Elektronik
Reference
MSD MINI 172/140 (17 A : 140 V)
MSD MINI 172/70 (17 A : 70 V)
SP MINI 92/70 (9 A : 70 V)
SP MINI 72/70 (7 A : 70 V)
SP MINI 52/70 (5 A : 70 V)
C
4.1-2 Other translators
Manufacturer
Other
Reference
All RS422 / RS485 type translators :
• RS422 / RS485 differential inputs or
TTL 5V "source" compatible inputs,
• RS422 / RS485 differential outputs or NPN open collector outputs.
___________________________________________________________________________
4/1
C
4.2
Installing TSX CFY 11/21 with Phytron translators
4.2-1 Connections
The TSX CXP 611 cable is used to simplify the connection between the
TSX CFY 11/21 modules and the Phytron Elektronik range of translators, series
MSD MINI and SP MINI :
Phytron translator
TSX CFY 21
TSX CXP 611
(length 6 meters)
5
6
8
11
12
13
14
4
9
10
1
2
3
+ pulses
– pulses
+ direction
– direction
+ boost
– boost
+ enable
– enable
+ reset fault
– reset fault
Translator ready
Fault
0V isolated
5
18
9
11
22
24
15
3
16
4
17
1
14
2
___________________________________________________________________________
4/2
Appendix 4
4.2-2 Special notes on use
• "Translator check" signal
The "Translator check" input of TSX CFY 11/21 modules is connected to the "Ready/
Module ready" translator output signal.
If the translator is not powered-up, or if the cable connection is broken, or if the module does not deliver the “Translator enable” output signal, the “Translator check” fault signal becomes active, causing a fault at TSX CFY11/21 module level :
- in the debug screen :
Transl Chk indicator lamp and DIAG indicator lamp in module zone both on,
- in the application program interface :
ST_DRIVE (%Ixy.i.35) at 1, HD_ERR (%Ixy.i.4) at 1 and DRV_FLT (%MWxy.i.3:X2, explicit reading) at 1.
To resolve this fault, simply :
1- Ensure that :
- the translator is switched on and connected correctly,
- in the TSX CFY 11/21 Configuration Editor : the “Drive Inversions : Enable
output” box is checked. Also select Command mode : "A=Pulse / B=Direction".
- the “Translator enable” output is activated, either :
- in the debug mode screen when online : by activating the Enable button.
- via the application program : ENABLE (%Qxy.i.10) set to 1.
2- Acknowledge the fault :
- In the debug mode screen when online : by pressing the Ack button.
- Via the application program : Rising edge on ACK_DEF object (%Qxy.i.9)
If the fault persists, check that there are no other reasons for the error.
In particular, check the presence of the 24 V supply on the auxiliary I/O connector, and check that no emergency stop signal is present (presence of the 24 V supply on the emergency stop input, EMG_STOP: %Ixy.i.29 is at 0)
• "Loss of step" signal.
The TSX CFY 11/21 “Loss of step” input is connected to the “Fault” output signal of the translator.
If the translator is powered up, if the cable connection is broken, or if the “Fault” output signal of the translator is confirmed, the “Loss of step” signal becomes active :
- in the debug screen : Loss of step indicator lamp on.
- in the application program interface: STEP_FLT (%Ixy.i.28) at 1.
The documentation for the Phytron MSD MINI and SP MINI translators lists the internal translator conditions which activate this signal.
Note : the appearance of the “Loss of step” signal does not cause a fault at TSX CFY11/21 module level.
C
___________________________________________________________________________
4/3
C
• "Reset loss of step check" command
This TSX CFY 11/21 command output is connected to the “Reset” input of the translators.
The command can be activated :
- in the debug screen : by pressing the Reset step button.
- Via the application program : ACK_STEPFLT (%Qxy.i.15) set to 1.
The activation of this command causes a translator Reset and as long as this command is active, the translator signals that it is not ready and the “Translator fault” signal appears : ST_DRIVE (%Ixy.i.35) at 1, HD_ERR (%Ixy.i.4) at 1
To resolve this common fault, simply :
1 Deactivate the “Reset loss of step check” command :
- in the debug screen : release the Reset step button.
- Via the application program : ACK_STEPFLT (%Qxy.i.15) to 1.0
2 Acknowledge the fault :
- In the debug mode screen when online : by pressing the Ack button.
- Via the application program : Rising edge on ACK_DEF object (%Qxy.i.9)
4.2-3 Recommendations for initial adjustments
• Configuration of enable and command outputs.
In TSX CFY configuration editor:
- Check the “Drive Inversions : Enable output” box,
- Select the control mode : “A=Pulse / B=Direction”.
• Start and stop frequency
This parameter can be adjusted:
- In the adjustment parameters editor,
- Via the application program : assignment of SS_FREQ %MDxy.i.18, followed by
WRITE_PARAM %CHxy.i.
The start and stop frequency is the frequency at which the motor can start and stop without a ramp and without loss of step. Its maximum limit value depends on the external inertia exerted on the motor axis. For Phytron MSD/SP systems, a start/stop frequency value which is generally suitable, whatever the external inertia exerted on the motor, is 400 Hz (in ½ step mode), corresponding to 1 revolution/s. This value may become critical above 600/800 Hz (1.5 to 2 revolution/s).
___________________________________________________________________________
4/4
Index
Symbols D
15-pin SUB-D connector
15-pin SUB-D connectors
20-pin HE10 type connector
24 V encoder supply
5 V Totem Pole outputs
5V encoder supply
9-pin SUB-D connector
A
B3/10
Daisy-chaining TELEFAST
Debugging
Diagnostics indicator lamps
Downcounting function
E
Encoder supplies
Encoder supply
Encoder supply voltage monitoring
EPSR input
ABE-7BV20
ABE-7CPA01
ABE-7CPA11
ABE-7H16R20
Absolute encoders
Adjusting the axes
Analog outputs
Auxiliary inputs
Auxiliary outputs
Auxiliary sensor supply
B
F
FRB type 12-pin connectors
Fuses
G
General characteristics
H
HE10 connector
Basic configuration
I
C
Cable
Cable length
Capture
Characteristics of TSX CFY 11/21
Auxiliary inputs
Electrical
Q0 brake output
Translator inputs
Configuring the axes
Connecting speed drive I/O
Connecting using TELEFAST
Connecting via cable
Connection cable shielding
Connection cables
Counter enable
Counter inputs
Counter outputs
Counting signals
Current consumption
Incremental encoder
Incremental encoders
Indicator lamps
Inhibition of encoder outputs
L
Line check input
M
N
Max. number of counter channels
Maximum frequency
Measurement
Module display
Mounting the TSX TAP S15
Multiplexing of encoders
NPN open collector outputs
Number of encoders connected
___________________________________________________________________________
P/1
P
B
P
O
Operating temperature
Output wiring
P
Parallel output absolute encoder
Physical outputs
PLC configuration
PNP open collector outputs
Power dissipated
Preformed cables
Preset
Programmable frequency
Protection of encoder supply
Proximity sensors
R
Read
Reflex outputs
Relay outputs
Reset to 0
Ribbon cables
RS422/RS485 line driver outputs
RS422/RS485 outputs
S
Sensor / preactuator voltage
Serial output absolute encoder
Speed drive
Speed drive monitoring inputs
SSI absolute encoder
SSI absolute encoders
Stepper motor axis control
TSX CFY 11
TSX CFY 21
Sub-base configuration
T
TELEFAST pre-wired system
Totem Pole outputs
Translator with interface
NPN open collector
RS 422/485
TSX CAP S15
TSX CAP S9
TSX CCP S15
TSX CCP S15050
TSX CCP S15100
TSX CDP 053
TSX CDP 102
TSX CDP 103
TSX CDP 202
TSX CDP 203
TSX CDP 301
TSX CDP 302
TSX CDP 303
TSX CDP 501
TSX CDP 503
TSX CDP 611
TSX CFY 11/21
Adjusting the axes
Configuring the axes
Debugging
Functions
Physical description
TSX CFY 11/21 connections
Auxiliary I/O
Sensors / preactuators
TELEFAST
Translator signals
Via TSX CDP 301/501 preformed cable C3/13
With Phytron translators
TSX CFY 11/21 modules
TSX CFY 11/21 setup
Basic configuration
I/O interfaces
Installation procedure
Interface power supply
Shielding
Wiring instructions
TSX CXP 213
TSX CXP 223
TSX CXP 613
TSX CXP 633
TSX TAP MAS
TSX TAP S15 05
TSX TAP S1505
TSX TAP S1524
Type of encoders connected
___________________________________________________________________________
P/2
U
Up/down counting
Up/down counting and measurement
function
Up/down counting function
Upcounting function
W
Wire cross-section
Wiring of encoder outputs
Wiring recommendations
Wiring solid state outputs
Index
B
___________________________________________________________________________
P/3
P
P
___________________________________________________________________________
P/4
Volume 3
Installation,
Communication,
Bus and Network
Interfaces
FIPIO master communication integrated in the processors
AS-i bus interface: module TSX SAY 100 module
A
B
C
Communication: TSX SCY 21601 module and PCMCIA cards
D
Communication: TSX ETY 110 module
Communication: PCMCIA Modem card
E
F
G
H
VOLUME 4
Installation
Analog,
Weighing
VOLUME 1
Installation
Processors and
Discrete I/O
VOLUME 2
Installation
Counting,
Motion control
VOLUME 3
P
___________________________________________________________________________
B/2
General safety advice for users
____________________________________________________________________________
1 General
This manual is intended for personnel technically qualified to install, operate and maintain the products which are described herein. It contains all the necessary information for correct use of the products. However, for advanced use of our products please contact your nearest sales office for additional information.
The contents of this manual are not contractual and cannot under any circumstance extend or restrict contract warranty clauses.
2 Qualification of personnel
Only qualified personnel are authorized to install, operate or maintain the products. Any work performed by unqualified personnel or non-observance of the safety instructions in this document or attached to the equipment may risk the safety of personnel and/or cause irreparable damage to equipment. The following personnel may be regarded as being "Qualified" :
• those involved with application design. Design office personnel familiar with control system safety concepts (for example, design engineers, etc),
• those involved with equipment installation. Individuals who are familiar with the installation, connection and startup of control system equipment (for example installers or wiring technicians working during the installation phase, technicians setting up the equipment, etc),
• those involved with operation. Personnel trained to operate and manage control system equipment (for example, operators, etc),
• those performing preventive or corrective maintenance. Personnel who are trained and experienced in the adjustment and repair of control system equipment (for example, installation engineers, after sales service engineers, etc).
3 Warnings
Warnings serve to prevent specific risks encountered by personnel and/or equipment. They are indicated in the documentation and on the products by different warning symbols, according to the severity of the risk :
Danger or Caution
Indicates that not following instructions or ignoring the warning may cause serious personal injury, death and/or serious damage to equipment.
Warning or Important or
!
Indicates that not following a specific instruction may lead to minor injury and/or damage to equipment.
Note or Comment
Highlights important information relating to the product, its operation or its accompanying documentation.
___________________________________________________________________________
1
General safety advice for users
___________________________________________________________________________
4 Conformity of use
The products described in this manual conform to the European Directives (*) to which they are subject (CE marking). However, they can only be used correctly in the context of the applications for which they are intended (described in the various documents) and when connected to approved third party products.
As a general rule, if all handling, transport and storage specifications are observed, and all instructions for installation, operation and maintenance are followed, the products will be used correctly, with no danger to personnel or equipment.
(*) EMC and LV Directives, concerning Electromagnetic Compatibility and Low Voltage.
5 Installing and setting up equipment
It is important to observe the following rules when installing and starting up equipment. In addition, if the installation includes digital links, it is essential to follow the basic wiring rules given in the manual
"Electromagnetic Compatibility of industrial Networks and Fielbuses", reference TSX DG KBLE, or in manual TSX DR NET, part C.
• safety instructions must be followed meticulously. These instructions are in the documentation or on the equipment being installed and set up.
• the type of equipment defines the way in which it should be installed :
- a flush-mountable device (for example, an operator terminal or a cell controller) must be flushmounted,
- a device which is to be built in (for example, PLC) must be placed in a cabinet or enclosure,
- the casing of a laptop or portable device (for example, a programming terminal or a notebook) must remain closed,
• if the device is permanently connected,
- the upstream installation must conform to standard IEC 1131-2 overvoltage category 2,
- in addition, its electrical installation must include a device to isolate it from the power supply and a circuit-breaker to protect it against overcurrents and isolation faults. If this is not the case, the power socket must be grounded and be easily accessed. In all cases, the device must be connected to the protective mechanical ground PG using green/yellow wires
(NFC 15 100 - IEC 60 364-5-51) .
• low voltage circuits (even though they are low voltage) must be connected to the protective ground so that dangerous voltages can be detected.
• before a device is powered up, its nominal voltage must be checked to ensure that it has been adjusted to conform with the supply voltage.
• if the device is supplied with 24 or 48 VDC, the low voltage circuits must be protected. Only use power supplies which conform to the standards currently in force.
• check that the supply voltages remain within the tolerance ranges defined in the technical characteristics of the devices.
• all measures must be taken to ensure that any power return (immediate, warm or cold) does not lead to a dangerous state which may risk personnel or the installation.
• emergency stop devices must remain effective in all the device's operating modes, even those which are abnormal (for example, when a wire becomes disconnected). Resetting these devices must not cause uncontrolled or improper restarts.
• cables which carry signals must be located where they do not cause interference with the control system functions by capacitive, inductive or electromagnetic interference.
___________________________________________________________________________
2
General safety advice for users
____________________________________________________________________________
• control system equipment and their control devices must be installed in such a way as to ensure that they are protected against unintentional operation.
• appropriate safety measures must be taken for the inputs and outputs, to prevent improper states in the control system device, if no signal is received.
6 Equipment operation
The operational safety and availability of a device is its ability to avoid the appearance of faults and to minimize their effects if they occur.
A system is said to be fail-safe if the appearance of faults never causes a dangerous situation.
A fault inside the control system is known as :
• passive, if it results in an open output circuit (no command is sent to the actuators).
• active, if it results in a closed output circuit (a command is sent to the actuators).
From the safety point of view, a given fault is dangerous or not depending on the type of command given during normal operation. A passive fault is dangerous if the normal command is the operation of an alarm. An active fault is dangerous if it maintains or activates an undesirable command.
It is important to note the basic difference between the behavior of an electromechanical relay and an electronic component (for example a transistor) :
• there is a high probability, approximately 90%, that the failure of a relay will cause an open circuit
(control circuit powered off).
• there is a 50% probability that the failure of a transistor will cause either an open circuit or a closed circuit.
This is why it is important to correctly estimate the types and consequences of faults when automating a system using electronic products such as PLCs, including when relay output modules are used on PLCs.
The system designer must use devices external to the PLC to protect against active faults inside the PLC, which are not indicated and are judged to be dangerous to the application. This may require solutions from various different technologies such as mechanical, electromechanical, pneumatic or hydraulic devices (for example, directly wiring a limit switch and emergency stop switches to the coil of a movement control contactor).
To protect against dangerous faults which may occur on output circuits or preactuators, it is sometimes beneficial to resort to general principles and use the large processing capacity of
PLCs, for example by using inputs to check the correct execution of commands requested by the program.
7 Electrical and thermal characteristics
Details of the electrical and thermal characteristics of devices are given in the associated technical documents (installation manuals, quick reference guides).
___________________________________________________________________________
3
General safety advice for users
___________________________________________________________________________
8 Environmental conditions
In industry, the micro-environmental conditions of electronic devices can vary greatly. For this reason, programmable controllers and associated modules must conform to the following two types of installation :
• installation in an enclosure with IP54 protection for protecting devices from metallic dust amongst other things. Two guidelines are associated with this type of installation :
- direct access to electronic modules should be strictly reserved to maintenance staff (see section 2), with access keys,
- the selection of a metal enclosure must be considered, since it serves as extra shielding against the latent risk of electromagnetic interference.
• direct installation without protection for Premium PLCs and associated systems (power supply modules, etc) which themselves have IP20 protection.
This type of installation applies to areas with restricted access and low pollution levels (not exceeding 2), for example stations or control rooms which have neither machines nor any activity generating metallic dust or other metallic particles. The external walls hence serve as the PLC enclosure.
9 Preventive or corrective maintenance
Availability
The availability of a system is its ability, in terms of its combined reliability, maintainability and maintenance logistics, to be in a state to perform a required function, at a given moment and within a defined time period.
Availability is therefore specific to each application, since it is a combination of :
• the architecture of the automatic system,
• the reliability and maintainability : intrinsic characteristics of the equipment (PLCs, sensors, machine, etc),
• maintenance logistics : characteristic intrinsic to the user of the control system (software structure, fault indication, process, on-site replacement parts, training of personnel).
Troubleshooting procedure
• control system equipment should only be repaired by qualified personnel (after sales service engineer, or technician approved by Schneider Automation). Only certified replacement parts or components should be used.
• before performing any operation on equipment (for example opening an enclosure), always cut the power supply off (disconnect the power plug or open the power isolation switch).
• before performing any "mechanical" operation on equipment on site, cut the power supply off and mechanically lock any moving parts.
• before removing a module, a memory cartridge, a PCMCIA card, etc, check in the manual whether this should be done with the power off or if it is possible with the device powered up.
Follow the instructions given in the manual carefully.
• on positive logic outputs or negative logic inputs, take all necessary precautions to prevent a disconnected wire coming into contact with the mechanical ground (risk of undesirable control action).
Replacement and recycling of used batteries
• if these are replaced, use batteries of the same type and dispose of defective batteries in the same way as toxic waste.
Do not throw lithium or mercury batteries into a fire, open or recharge them, or attempt to solder them.
___________________________________________________________________________
4
Terminal port communication
Contents
Part A
Section
Page
1.2-1 Communication with a programming or adjustment terminal 1/3
1.2-2 Communication with an operator panel
1.2-3 UNI-TELWAY master / slave communication
1.2-4 Character string communication 1/6
1.3-1 Programming / adjustment terminal
1.3-3 Programming / adjustment terminal and operator panel 1/10
1.3-4 Modem on terminal port 1/11
1.3-11 Terminal port connection summary table
1.4-2 Pinout of the terminal port connectors
___________________________________________________________________________
A/1
A
A
Terminal port communication
Section
2.2-3 Connection to the UNI-TELWAY bus
2.2-4 Connection to TSX/PMX/PCX 57 PLCs
2.2-5 Configuring the switches
2.3-4 Connection between two PLC stations
Contents
Part A
Page
___________________________________________________________________________
A/2
1 Terminal port
1.1
Preface
Since the terminal port refers to the UNI-TELWAY master, UNI-TELWAY slave and character string communication modes it will be necessary to refer to the following documentation for the installation (hardware and software) of these communication modes.
• TSX DG UTW E
• TSX DR NET E
: UNI-TELWAY bus communication (User guide),
: X-WAY communication (Reference manual),
• TLX DS COM PL7 30E : TSX Micro / Premium PLC communication (software installation manual)
A
1.2
Presentation
• On TSX / PMX 57 PLCs
The terminal port on TSX/PMX 57 processors is an RS 485 non-isolated link consisting of two 8-pin mini DIN connectors. These two connectors, which are functionally identical, located on the processor and marked TER and AUX, enable physical and simultaneous connection of two devices such as a programming/adjustment terminal and an operator panel.
The TER connector is also able to supply power to a device which does not have its own power supply
(RS 485/RS 232 converter cable, TSX P ACC 01 isolation box, etc).
The terminal port functions in UNI-TELWAY master mode by default. By configuration, it is possible to switch to UNI-TELWAY slave or character mode.
Note :
The communication mode (UNI-TELWAY master, UNI-TELWAY slave or character mode) is identical on the two connectors TER and AUX.
___________________________________________________________________________
1/1
A
Section 1
• On PCX 57 PLCs
PCX 57 processors have a single terminal port, TER, which is exactly the same as the
TER terminal port on TSX/PMX 57 PLC processors. It is an RS 485 non-isolated link, consisting of an 8-pin mini DIN connector for physically connecting a device such as a programming/adjustment terminal or an operator panel.
This connector is also used to supply power to a device which does not have its own power supply (RS 485/
RS 232 converter cable,
TSX P ACC 01 isolation box, etc).
The terminal port functions in UNI-TELWAY master mode by default. By configuration, it is possible to switch to UNI-TELWAY slave or character mode.
Note :
Using a TSX P ACC01 isolation box doubles the terminal port in order to provide the two ports, TER and AUX, as on a TSX/PMX 57 PLC processor.
___________________________________________________________________________
1/2
Terminal port 1
A
1.2-1 Communication with a programming or adjustment terminal
Configured in UNI-TELWAY master mode (default function), the terminal port is used to connect a programming or adjustment terminal.
• TSX/PMX 57 station
TSX/PMX 57
• PCX 57 station
TSX RKY rack
Programming/adjustment terminal
FTX 417/507 - PC
Bus X
PCX 57
Programming/adjustment terminal host PC
Programming/adjustment terminal
FTX 417 / 507- PC
Note :
For a PCX 57 PLC station, the programming terminal is generally the PC which supports the
PCX 57 processor. However, as with a TSX/PMX 57 PLC station, the programming terminal may also be a PC type terminal, connected to the processor terminal port.
___________________________________________________________________________
1/3
A
1.2-2 Communication with an operator panel
Configured in UNI-TELWAY master mode (default function), the terminal port is used to manage an operator panel.
The operator terminal uses UNI-TE protocol to communicate with the local PLC and other stations on the network.
For a TSX / PMX 57 PLC, in order to free the TER connector for possible connection of a programming or adjustment terminal, the operator panel will be connected to the
AUX connector.
TSX/PMX 57 master
Rack TSX RKY
Bus X
Host PC
PCX 57 master
CCX 17 slave
CCX 17 slave
___________________________________________________________________________
1/4
Terminal port 1
A
1.2-3 UNI-TELWAY master / slave communication
The default communication mode of the terminal port is UNI-TELWAY master. It is mainly used for the connection of a slave programming terminal and operator panel.
TSX/PMX 57 master
Client
Client/Server
Slave
Slave
Client/Server
FTX 417/507 CCX 17
Note :
For a PCX 57 PLC, whose processor only has one terminal port, this type of connection is only possible using a TSX P ACC01 box.
___________________________________________________________________________
1/5
A
1.2-4 Character string communication
This mode is used for connecting a printer or specialized panel (monitor, panel mounted controller, etc) to the terminal port of the TSX/PMX/PCX 57 PLC.
TSX/PMX 57 TSX RKY
X Bus
PCX 57 or
M o n i t o r or
Controller
Printer or
M o n i t o r
Controller or
Printer
___________________________________________________________________________
1/6
Terminal port 1
A
1.3
Connections
The connector marked TER can be used to connect any device supporting the
UNI-TELWAY protocol, and in particular devices which do not have their own power supply (RS 485/RS 232 converter cable, TSX P ACC 01 isolation box, etc).
The connector marked AUX (only on TSX/PMX 57 PLCs) can only be used to connect devices which have their own power supply (operator panel, third-party equipment, etc).
The terminal port enables three operating modes :
• UNI-TELWAY master (default configuration),
• UNI-TELWAY slave,
• Character string.
TSX/PMX 57
PCX 57
Note :
For TSX/PMX 57 PLCs, which have two connectors (TER and AUX), the operating mode defined during configuration (UNI-TELWAY master, UNI-TELWAY slave, character mode) is identical for both connectors.
Depending on the operating mode selected during configuration, the terminal port can be used to connect :
• A programming and adjustment terminal on TSX/PMX 57 PLCs,
• An operator terminal,
• Another PLC, via the TSX P ACC01 isolation box,
• UNI-TELWAY devices (sensor / actuator, variable speed drive, etc),
• A printer or monitor (character string mode link),
• A modem.
The use of an isolation box, reference TSX P ACC 01, provides 2 connectors, enabling, for example, a programming terminal and two slave devices to be connected simultaneously. This box is also necessary for connecting a TSX 57 ii
PLC on a
UNI-TELWAY link when the distance between the devices is greater than 10 meters.
Slave mode can be forced by using this box, which is described in section 2.
Note :
A TSX P ACC 01 box must be used to connect a TSX/PMX/PCX 57 slave PLC on a UNI-TELWAY bus.
___________________________________________________________________________
1/7
A
1.3-1 Programming / adjustment terminal
Terminals which have their own power supply (FTX 417, FTX 507) can be connected to either the TER or the AUX connector on TSX / PMX 57 processors.
If a terminal does not have its own power supply, it must be connected to the TER connector on the processor.
The programming terminal uses the UNI-TE protocol for programming, adjusting or performing diagnostics on the local PLC and all the station devices.
If the PLC is connected on a network architecture, network transparency enables the programming terminal to reach all the devices on the network.
The references for the various connection cables are given in the diagram below.
Connection examples
TSX / PMX 57
TSX RKY
Bus X
PC
Host
P C PCX 57
PC
OR
Programming/adjustment
FTX 417/507
Programming/adjustment
OR
Programming/adjustment
FTX 417/507
Note :
The TSX P CU1030 cable must be connected to the TER terminal port on TSX/PMX 57 PLCs
(it will not operate if it is connected to the AUX
Programming/adjustment
___________________________________________________________________________
1/8
Terminal port 1
A
1.3-2 Operator panel
An operator terminal uses the UNI-TE protocol to communicate with the local PLC and other stations on the network.
In the case of a TSX 57 PLC, the operator panel has its own power supply and must be connected to the AUX terminal port in order to leave the TER port available for a terminal which requires a power supply (FTX 117 Adjust for example).
Connection example
The references of the connection cables between the terminal port and a CCX 17 operator panel are shown below.
TSX/PMX57 TSX RKY
XBT-Z 968
Bus X
CCX 17 : operator panel
T CCX CB10 002
(supplied with the
CCX 17)
Host PC
PCX 57
T CCX CB10 002
(supplied with the
CCX 17)
XBT-Z 968
CCX 17 : operator panel
___________________________________________________________________________
1/9
A
1.3-3 Programming / adjustment terminal and operator panel
The terminal port on a TSX / PMX 57 processor can handle two devices in multidrop mode : the programming / adjustment terminal and an operator panel.
TSX/PMX 57 processors have two connectors, therefore each connector can take one of these devices.
Connection example
T FTX CBF 020
XBT-Z 968
T CCX CB10 002
(supplied with the CCX 17)
FTX 417 :
Programming/adjustment terminal
CCX 17 : operator panel
Note :
Either connected device can be removed without disturbing the operation of the other.
For a PCX 57 PLC, whose processor only has one terminal port, this type of connection is only possible using a TSX P ACC01 box.
___________________________________________________________________________
1/10
Terminal port 1
A
1.3-4 Modem on terminal port
The terminal port on TSX Micro PLCs version V1.5 and later and on TSX/PMX/PCX 57 processors of Premium PLCs is compatible with a modem connection in all the protocols : UNI-TELWAY master, UNI-TELWAY slave, and character string.
The modem to be connected must have the following characteristics :
1- Support a 10 or 11 bits per character format if the terminal port is used in
UNI-TELWAY mode : 1 Start, 8 Data, 1 Stop, Odd, or No Parity,
2- operate without any data compression if the terminal port is used in UNI-TELWAY mode,
3- be able to be configured with "DTR signal forced" at the RS 232 serial port end (in cases where the modem is used in response mode), since this signal is not connected by the cable,
4- operate without flow control (no -RTS/CTS- hardware or -XON/XOFF- software) at the RS 232 serial port end, since the cable to be used at the terminal port end can only carry TX, RX and GND signals.
5- operate without carrier control. Warning : this operating mode also uses RTS and
CTS control signals,
6- accept an incoming telephone call while characters arrive on the RS 232 serial port
(in cases where a modem/telephone network is used in response mode on a terminal port configured in UNI-TELWAY master mode).
Warning : it is strongly recommended to check with the modem supplier that the above characteristics are available on the selected modem.
Example : diagram showing connection to a TSX/PMX 57 processor
Note : a PCX 57 processor is connected in the same way.
TSX CTC 07/10 adaptor if necessary
Modem
TSX PCX 1130
Example 1 : for a terminal port in UNI-TELWAY master mode connected to a modem/ telephone network in response mode, numbers 1 to 6 of the above characteristics are required.
Example 2 : for a terminal port in character string mode connected to a modem via a dedicated line, numbers 3 to 5 of the above characteristics are required.
___________________________________________________________________________
1/11
A
Configuration of the terminal port in UNI-TELWAY mode :
The waiting time is between 100 and 250 ms.
In master mode, the number of slaves configured must correspond to the real number of slaves on the bus.
In slave mode, the number of addresses must correspond to those used.
The terminal port on TSX/PMX/PCX 57 PLCs is configured using PL7 Junior or PL7 Pro software.
For further details refer to the TLX DS COM PL7 30E communication manual.
___________________________________________________________________________
1/12
Terminal port 1
A
1.3-5 UNI-TELWAY Master
This is the default operating mode of the terminal port. It is mainly used for :
• the connection of a programming/adjustment terminal and an operator panel in the case of a TSX/PMX 57 PLC.
• the connection of a programming/adjustment terminal or an operator panel in the case of a PCX 57 PLC which only has one terminal port.
Connection example
TSX/PMX 57 master
T FTX CBF 020
XBT-Z 968
Client
Client/Server
Slave
Client/Server
T CCX CB10 002
(supplied with the
CCX 17)
Slave
FTX 417 CCX 17
Note :
For a PCX 57 PLC station where the processor only has one terminal port, this type of connection may be made using a TSX P ACC01 box.
Important
The master can scan up to eight link addresses. Link addresses 1, 2 and 3 are reserved for the programming terminal, the five other addresses can be used to connect a man-machine interface, slave PLC, sensors/actuators or any other slave device which supports the UNI-TE protocol. If a CCX 17 operator panel is used, addresses 4 and 5 are reserved (addresses forced by using XBT-Z 968 cables).
This operating mode is operational immediately, and consequently, within the limits of the default configuration, no other installation phase is necessary to connect a device on this type of link.
___________________________________________________________________________
1/13
A
1.3-6 UNI-TELWAY slave
The terminal port UNI-TELWAY slave protocol enables, for example, a slave TSX/PMX/
PCX 57 PLC to be integrated on a UNI-TELWAY bus managed by a TSX/PMX/PCX 57 master PLC (PCMCIA communication card or terminal port) or a TSX/PMX model 40
PLC.
For this connection to be possible, a TSX P ACC 01 connection box must be used. The various ways of connecting this box are shown in section 2.
Connection example
TSX/PMX 57 master
TSX SCP 114
PCMCIA communication card
S1=ON
S2=ON
TER AUX
TSX P
ACC 01
T S X
SCA 50
TSX SCP CU 4030 cable
UNI-TELWAY bus
T S X
SCA 50
T S X
SCA 62
TSX CSC 015
S1=ON
S2=ON
TER AUX
TSX P
ACC 01
TSX 57ii slave
ATV 16 slave
TSX 17-20 slave
X Bus
PCX 57
PCX 57 slave
A slave PLC manages up to three consecutive link addresses :
• Ad0 (system address),
• Ad1 (application address - client),
• Ad2 (application address - listen only mode).
Note :
For the installation of TSX SCA 50 and TSX SCA 62 junction boxes, refer to the
TSX DG UTW manual : UNI-TELWAY bus communication (User Guide),
___________________________________________________________________________
1/14
Terminal port 1
A
1.3-7 UNI-TELWAY inter-PLC
The terminal port on TSX/PMX 57 processors permits the connection of two PLCs, one of which is the master and the other the slave.
A TSX P ACC 01 box is essential for this type of connection. The various ways of connecting this box are given in section 2.
TSX/PMX 57 master TSX/PMX 57 slave
T FTX
CBF 020
FTX 417 slave
TSX/PMX 57 master
T FTX CB 1020/1050
TSX P ACC 01
TER AUX
S1=ON
S2=ON
TSX RKY
Bus X
T FTX
CBF 020
FTX 417 slave
PCX 57
PCX 57 slave
T FTX CB 1020/1050
TSX P ACC 01
TER AUX
S1=ON
1/15
A
1.3-8 UNI-TELWAY inter-device
The terminal port on TSX/PMX/PCX 57 PLCs provides a means of connection to a
UNI-TELWAY bus for communication with devices such as variable speed drives, sensors/actuators or other PLCs.
When connecting a TSX/PMX/PCX 57 PLC (master or slave) to a UNI-TELWAY bus it is essential to use a TSX P ACC 01 box. For further details, see section 2.
Connection example
FTX 417 slave TSX/PMX 57 master
T FTX
CBF 020
S1=ON
S2=ON
TER AUX
TSX P
ACC 01
TSX SCA 50
UNI-TELWAY bus
TSX SCA 62
CCX 17
ATV 16 slave
The connected devices communicate with the PLC using the UNI-TE protocol.
The various devices can also communicate between themselves.
The programming terminal can access all devices directly to perform adjustment and diagnostic functions.
Note :
For the installation of TSX SCA 50 and TSX SCA 62 junction boxes, refer to the TSX DG UTW manual : UNI-TELWAY bus communication (User guide),
___________________________________________________________________________
1/16
Terminal port 1
A
1.3-9 TSX model 40 master PLC
A TSX/PMX model 40 PLC can also be configured in UNI-TELWAY bus master mode and can control TSX/PMX/PCX 57 slave PLCs.
Connection example
FTX 417 slave
TSX 107-40 master
T FTX
CBF 020 S1=ON
S2=ON
TER AUX
TSX P ACC 01
TSX CSB 015
TSX SCA62
TSX/PMX 57 slave
S1=ON
S2=ON
UNI-TELWAY bus
TER AUX
TSX P ACC 01
TSX/PMX 57 slave
Note :
For the installation of TSX SCA 50 and TSX SCA 62 junction boxes, refer to the TSX DG UTW manual : UNI-TELWAY bus communication (User guide),
___________________________________________________________________________
1/17
A
1.3-10 Character string
When configured in character mode, the terminal port can be used to connect a device such as a printer, monitor, or specialized panel (panel mounted controller for example, etc).
Connection examples
TSX/PMX 57 TSX RKY
Bus X
RS 485/RS 232 converter cable : TSX PCX 1030
Host PC
PCX 57
OR
RS 485/RS 232 converter cable :
TSX P CD 1030
Monitor which does not handle the RTS signal
RS 485/RS 232 converter cable : TSX PCX 1030
Monitor which does not handle the RTS signal
Controller OR
OR
RS 485/RS 232 converter cable :
TSX P CD 1030
RS 485/RS 232 converter cable :
TSX P CD 1030
Controller
Printer
RS 485/RS 232 converter cable :
TSX P CD 1030
OR
Printer
___________________________________________________________________________
1/18
Terminal port 1
A
Note :
The TSX P CD 1030 cable provides the RS485 / RS232 conversion, and supplies "slave peripheral" information to the printer. It does not operate on the AUX terminal port and the connected device must handle the RTS signal.
Warning :
The TSX PCX 1030 and TSX PCX 1130 cables should only be connected to the PLC TER port to supply the RS485 / RS 232 conversion electronics. To avoid conflicting signals, devices should not be connected to the PLC AUX port.
To ensure all types of connection, cables are provided with adaptors.
The TSX PCX 1030 cable is provided with two adaptors / converters :
TSX CTC 07 : 9-pin male to 25-pin female,
TSX CTC 10 : 9-pin male to 25-pin male.
The TSX PCX 1130 cable is provided with one adaptor / converter :
TSX CTC 09 : 9-pin male to 25-pin male.
___________________________________________________________________________
1/19
A
1.3-11 Terminal port connection summary table
The table below defines the cable linking the terminal port connectors on a
TSX/PMX/PCX 57 PLC to peripheral equipment.
Connection cable PLC terminal ports Example of connected devices
TER AUX
T FTX CB 1020
T FTX CB 1050 X TSX P ACC 01
T FTX CBF 020
TSX P CU 1030
TSX P CD 1030
XBT-Z 968
TSX P ACC 01
TSX PCX 1030
TSX PCX 1130
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
FTX 507, FTX 417
RS 232 programming and adjustment terminals
Graphic terminals, printers, managing the RTS signal
CCX 17, XBT
UNI-TELWAY connection
Devices which do not manage the RTS signal, type DTE <--> DTE : programming terminals, RS 232 printers
Devices which do not manage the RTS signal, type DTE <--> DCE : Modem
TSX PCX 1030 and TSX PCX 1130 cables convert RS 485 signals to RS 232. They permit connection of the terminal port to RS 232 devices which do not manage the RTS signal.
They are both fitted with a switch for setting the PLC to Master or slave mode. The switch can be accessed internally by removing the metal cover containing the electronics. The switch is managed as follows :
Switch position M
Switch position S
Switch setting :
PL7 configuration PL7 configuration PL7 configuration
UTW master UTW slave Character mode
UTW master with UTW master with UTW master with
PL7 conf default conf default conf
UTW slave with default conf.
UTW slave with
PL7 conf.
Character mode with
PL7 conf.
Master mode M Slave mode S
___________________________________________________________________________
1/20
Terminal port 1
A
1.4
Appendix
1.4-1 Characteristics
The characteristics of the terminal port are given in the table below :
Structure Physical interface
Transmission Protocol
UNI-TELWAY mode master or slave
RS 485 non isolated.
Multidrop master/slave.
Bit rate
Configuration Number of devices
Character mode
RS 485 non isolated.
No protocol.
19200 bits/s by default modifiable from 1200 to
9600 bits/s by default modifiable from 1200
1 start bit, 8 data bits, even, to 19200 bits/s. 7 or 8 odd or no parity, 1 stop bit data bits, even, odd or no parity, with or without echo.
Eight maximum (eight One device (point-toaddresses managed by the point).
master). In slave mode addresses 4,5,6 are selected by default. In master mode, the reserved addresses are :
1,2,3 for the programming terminal, 4,5 if CCX 17 present, the others are available.
Services
Length
UNI-TE
Other functions
Safety
Monitoring
10 m maximum.
10 m maximum.
Requests in point to point Character strings of with confirmation of 128 bytes 20 bytes max.
maximum initiated by any connected device.
The messages must end with $0D
No broadcasting initiated by the master.
(carriage return)
Transparency of communication with any device in a network architecture via the master.
One control character on each No error feedback.
frame, acknowledgment and repetition possible.
No flow control.
Bus status table, status of devices, error counters are accessible on the slaves.
Note :
Use of a TSX P ACC 01 isolation box enables the RS485 link to be used in isolated mode. See section 2.
___________________________________________________________________________
1/21
A
1.4-2 Pinout of the terminal port connectors
The terminal port has 8-pin mini-DIN lockable connectors marked TER and AUX.
The signals are given below :
5
8 7
4
6
3
2 1
5
8 7 6
4 3
2 1
TER
1 D (B)
2 D (A)
3 not connected
4 /DE
5 /DPT (1 = master)
6 not connected
7 0 volt
8 5 volts
AUX
1 D (B)
2 D (A)
3 not connected
4 /DE
5 /DPT (1 = master)
6 not connected
7 0 volt
8 not connected
Note :
The operation of the terminal port is dependent on two parameters :
• the state of the /DPT signal (0 or 1), set by the wiring accessory (cable,
TSX P ACC 01),
• the software configuration of the terminal port defined under PL7 Junior/Pro.
The table below defines the operating mode of the terminal port according to these two parameters.
/DPT signal value
Configuration under PL7 Junior/Pro
UNI-TELWAY master
0
Terminal port in UTW slave mode (by default)
1
Terminal port in UTW master mode
UNI-TELWAY slave Terminal port in UTW slave mode
Terminal port in UTW master mode (by default)
Character mode Terminal port in character mode
Terminal port in UTW master mode (by default)
___________________________________________________________________________
1/22
2 TSX P ACC01 box
2.1
Presentation
2.1-1 Functions
The TSX P ACC 01 box is a wiring accessory which connects to the TER connector on the processor of TSX/PMX/PCX 57 PLCs via an integral cable with a mini-DIN connector at one end.
It is used to :
• connect several devices to the terminal port on TSX/PMX/PCX 57
PLCs. For this purpose, it has two mini-DIN connectors, marked TER and AUX, which are functionally identical to the TER and AUX connectors on TSX/PMX 57 ii
PLC processors,
• isolate UNI-TELWAY signals so that the Premium terminal port link can be extended to more than 10 meters when connecting the PLC to a UNI-TELWAY bus,
• provide line termination when the box is connected to one end of the UNI-TELWAY bus,
• set the operating mode of the terminal port :
- UTW master,
- UTW slave or character mode.
Note :
The two terminal ports of the TSX P ACC01 box, TER and AUX, are not isolated from each other nor from the TER port of the PLC which supplies power to the box.
A
2.1-2 External appearance
The box is made of zamak, the same as for the UNI-TELWAY T-junction or Y-junction box
(TSX SCA 50 and TSX SCA 62). It is designed to be mounted in a cabinet (see dimensions section 2.2-1). Its index of protection is IP 20.
Terminal ports
Connection cable to the TER port on the TSX/PMX/PCX 57 ii
PLC (Length :1 m)
TER AUX
___________________________________________________________________________
2/1
A
2.2
Hardware installation
2.2-1 Dimensions and fixing
The TSX P ACC 01 box is installed on an AM1-PA ... pre-slotted plate or an AM1-E/DP
DIN rail with an LA9 D09976 fixing plate.
AM1-PA...
AM1 DE/EP
2.2-2 Internal view
=
2 x 5.5
50 =
S2
Z
JA JB
S M
S1
S2
JA and JB
Selection of operating mode (master or slave),
Line terminator,
UNI-TELWAY bus connection terminals.
___________________________________________________________________________
2/2
TSX P ACC 01 box 2
A
2.2-3 Connection to the UNI-TELWAY bus
The TSX P ACC 01 box is connected to the
UNI-TELWAY bus via connection terminals JA and JB as shown opposite.
Shielding
Insulating sleeve
(essential)
White
Red
White
Blue
1
2
3
0 VL
0 VL
4 D(A)
5 D(B)
2.2-4 Connection to TSX/PMX/PCX 57 PLCs
As the TSX P ACC 01 box has to be supplied, it must be connected by its integral cable to the TER connector on the PLC processor.
The box can be connected or disconnected while the PLC is powered up.
TSX/PMX 57
TSX RKY
X Bus
Host PC
PCX 57
Note :
TER AUX Only one TSX P ACC01 box can be connected to a
TER AUX
TSX P ACC 01 TSX/PMX/PCX 57 PLC TSX P ACC 01
___________________________________________________________________________
2/3
A
2.2-5 Configuring the switches
Configuring the line terminator
Switch S2 provides line termination as indicated below :
Configuring the operating mode
The choice of operating mode is determined via switch S1 as indicated below :
Note : The selected operating mode only concerns the cable for connecting the TER connector on the PLC processor
OFF
Z
S2
Position for UNI-TELWAY line termination
OFF
Z
S2
Other positions
S2
Z
JA JB
S M
S M
UNI-TELWAY slave or character mode
S M
UNI-TELWAY master
2.3
Examples of topology
2.3-1 Connectable devices
The functions of the TER and AUX connectors on the TSX P ACC 01 box are identical to those of the TER and AUX connectors on the processors of TSX/PMX 57 PLC stations.
• the TER connector on the box can be used to connect any device supporting the UNI-
TELWAY protocol, and in particular devices which do not have their own power supply
(RS 485/RS 232 converter cable, etc),
• the AUX connector on the box can only be used to connect devices which have their own power supply (operator panel, third party equipment, etc).
___________________________________________________________________________
2/4
TSX P ACC 01 box 2
A
Important
The TSX P ACC 01 box is supplied by the TER connector of the PLC to which it is connected. The TER connector on the box can therefore supply devices which have their own power supply (CCX 17, etc) or those which do not (RS 485/RS 232 converter cable, etc).
If the user wishes to connect the terminal port of a second PLC to one of the connectors on the TSX P ACC 01 box, it is essential that the AUX connector (on the box and the PLC) is used in order to avoid conflict between the two PLC power supplies.
Examples
TSX/PMX 57 master
TSX/PMX 57 slave
T FTX CB 1020/1050
TSX/PMX 57 master
TER AUX TSX P ACC 01
TSX RKY
X Bus
T FTX CB 1020/1050
PCX 57 slave
TER AUX TSX P ACC 01
___________________________________________________________________________
2/5
A
2.3-2 Master mode
A TSX P ACC 01 box is connected to a master PLC on the UNI-TELWAY link as shown in the example below.
Switches S1 and S2 must be set to OFF (master mode).
• TSX / PMX 57 station
FTX 417 slave TSX/PMX 57 master
Address 1, 2, 3
TSX SCA 50
S1=OFF
T FTX CBF 020
S2=OFF
UNI-TELWAY Bus
TER AUX
TSX P ACC 01 TSX SCA 62
XBT Z 968
TSX CSC 015
T CCX CB10 002
ATV 16 slave CCX 17 slave TSX 17-20 slave
Address 6 Address 4/5 Address 7/8
1000 m max
___________________________________________________________________________
2/6
TSX P ACC 01 box 2
A
• PCX 57 station
TSX RKY
X Bus
FTX 417 slave
Host PC
PCX 57 master
Address 1, 2, 3
TSX SCA 50
S1=OFF
T FTX CBF 020
S2=OFF
UNI-TELWAY bus
TER AUX
TSX P ACC 01 TSX SCA 62
XBT Z 968
TSX CSC 015
T CCX CB10 002
ATV 16 slave
CCX 17 slave
Address 6 Address 4/5
TSX 17-20 slave
Address 7/8
1000 m max
___________________________________________________________________________
2/7
A
2.3-3 Slave mode
A TSX P ACC 01 box is connected to a slave PLC on the UNI-TELWAY link as shown in the example below.
In this example, switches S1 and S2 on both boxes must be set to ON (slave mode and line termination boxes).
Important
For a PLC to operate in slave mode, it must be connected to a TSX P ACC 01 box by the box integral cable.
TSX 107-40 master
S1=ON
S2=ON
FTX 417
UNI-TELWAY bus
TER AUX
TSX P ACC 01
TSX PMX 57
TSX CSB 015
TSX SCA 62
XBT Z 968
T CCX CB10 002
CCX 17
1000 m max
S1=ON
S2=ON
TER AUX
TSX PACC 01
X Bus
PCX 57 slave
___________________________________________________________________________
2/8
TSX P ACC 01 box 2
A
2.3-4 Connection between two PLC stations
Reminder
If the user wishes to connect the terminal port of a second PLC to one of the TSX P ACC
01 box ports, the AUX port must be used in order to avoid conflict between the power supplies of the two PLCs.
For a PLC to operate in slave mode, it must be connected to a TSX P ACC 01 box by the box integral cable.
In the example below, the TSX P ACC 01 box must be connected to the UNI-TELWAY slave PLC by the box integral cable. Switch S1 must be set to ON.
As the box is not situated on a UNI-TELWAY bus, the position of switch S2 is not important.
TSX PMX 57 master TSX/PMX 57 slave
FTX 417
T FTX CB
1020/1050
T FTX CBF 020
S1=ON
S2=not significant
TER AUX
TSX P ACC01
XBT Z 968
T CCX CB10 002
CCX 17
___________________________________________________________________________
2/9
A
2.4
TSX P ACC01 box connectors
The TSX P ACC 01 box has two parallel connectors, marked TER and AUX.
The signals are given below :
5
8 7 6
4 3
2 1
TER
1 D (B)
2 D (A)
3 not connected
4 not connected
5 not connected
6 not connected
7 0 volt
8 5 volts
5
8 7 6
4 3
2 1
AUX
1 D (B)
2 D (A)
3 not connected
4 not connected
5 not connected
6 not connected
7 not connected
8 not connected
___________________________________________________________________________
2/10
FIPIO master communication integrated in the processors
Contents
Part B
Section
1 FIPIO master communication, integrated in the processors
Integrated FIPIO link on TSX/PMX/PCX 57 processors
Page
B
___________________________________________________________________________
B/1
B FIPIO master communication integrated in the processors
Contents
Part B
___________________________________________________________________________
B/2
1 FIPIO master communication, integrated in the processors
1.1
Summary of the FIPIO bus
FIPIO is a fieldbus used for remote location of the I/O of a PLC station and its industrial peripheral equipment as close as possible to the operative part.
From a PLC station whose processor has an integrated FIPIO link, the FIPIO bus can be used to connect between 1 and 127 devices, such as :
• Momentum remote I/O modules (discrete and analog),
• TBX remote I/O modules (discrete and analog),
• CCX 17 operator panels,
• ATV16 variable speed drives,
• devices which comply with standard profiles,
• agent PLCs, PCs,
• etc.
The FIPIO fieldbus can be used in a simple architecture (single station) or in a more complex architecture (multiple stations) where several FIPIO segments can be governed by a higher level local area network, FIPWAY or Ethernet TCP_IP for example.
Main characteristics
• Structure
- Type
- Topology
- Method of access
- Communication
- Priority exchanges
: open fieldbus, conforming to the WorldFIP standards,
: linking of devices by daisy-chaining or tap link connection,
: management by a bus arbitrator,
: by exchanging variables which can be accessed by the user in the form of PL7 objects and by X-WAY datagrams.
: cyclical exchange of status variables and remote I/O commands.
• Transmission
- Data rate
- Medium
: 1 Mb/s
: shielded twisted pair (150 Ohms characteristic impedance).
• Configuration
- Number of connection points
: 128 logical connection points for the whole architecture,
- Number of segments : 15 maximum (in cascade) using electrical or optical repeaters (14 maximum in cascade),
- PLC : one PLC (connection point address 0),
- Programming terminal
- Length
: one programming terminal (must be connected at connection point 63).
: the length of a segment depends on the type of tap links.
1000 meters maximum for one segment without repeaters.
15000 meters maximum between the devices which are furthest apart.
___________________________________________________________________________
1/1
B
B
1.2
Integrated FIPIO link on TSX/PMX/PCX 57 processors
Some processors have an integrated master FIPIO link as standard, which can be used to connect the PLC station to a FIPIO bus.
Processors concerned :
FIPIO link
FIPIO link
TSX P 57 252
TSX P57 352
TSX P57 452
PMX P57 352
PMX P57 452
FIPIO link
TPCX P57 3512
Connection to the FIPIO bus
The processor has a 9-pin SUB D connector which is used for connection to the FIPIO bus via a TSX FP ACC12 connector.
TSX FP
ACC12
TSX FP
ACC12
The complete installation of a FIPIO bus (type of architecture, type of cables to use, wiring accessories, etc) is described in detail in the FIPIO bus reference manual.
Note: The master FIPIO link integrated in the processors should not be included when calculating the number of application-specific channels for the station.
___________________________________________________________________________
1/2
FIPIO master communication, integrated in the processors 1
1.3
Examples of architectures
• TSX / PMX 57 station
TSX/PMX 57
TSX RKY EX rack
B
X Bus
TBX
Momentum
FIPIO bus CCX 17
ATV
PC
___________________________________________________________________________
1/3
B
Examples of architectures (continued)
• PCX 57 station
PC
PCX 57
X bus
TSX RKY EX rack
TBX
Momentum
FIPIO bus
CCX 17
ATV
PC
___________________________________________________________________________
1/4
AS-i bus interface
TSX SAY 100 module
Section
1 TSX SAY 100 : AS-i bus interface module
1.2-1 Range of AS-i products in the Schneider catalog
1.2-2 Presentation of the main components
1.2-3 Example of an AS-i bus topology
1.2-4 Main characteristics of the AS-i bus
Description of the TSX SAY 100 module
1.3-4 Displaying the module status
1.3-5 Special displays of the TSX SAY 100 module
1.3-6 Technical characteristics
Operating modes of the TSX SAY 100 module
1.7-1 24 V auxiliary power supply
Contents
Part C
C
Page
___________________________________________________________________________
C/1
C
AS-i bus interface
TSX SAY 100 module
Contents
Part C
___________________________________________________________________________
C/2
1 TSX SAY 100 : AS-i bus interface module
1.1
Preface
This section only covers the hardware installation of the TSX SAY 100 interface module which controls the AS-i bus from a TSX /PMX/PCX 57 PLC. For the complete installation of an AS-i bus, the following manuals should be consulted :
• the AS-i bus reference manual (reference XD0C 5511E) which explains the design and installation of the bus.
• the AS-i section in the application-specific functions installation manual which covers the software setup of an AS-i bus using PL7 Junior and PL7 Pro software.
C
1.2
Summary of the AS-i bus
The AS-i bus is a fieldbus (level 0), which can be used to connect sensors/actuators. It is used to route discrete data between a bus "master" and sensor/actuator "slaves".
AS-i comprises three main elements :
• a specific power supply providing a voltage of 30 VDC,
• a bus master,
• slaves (sensors and actuators).
The main types of sensor/actuator
1 Communicating sensors/actuators :
These have the AS-i function built in, and are connected directly to the AS-i bus via a passive splitter block or a connection adaptor.
2 Traditional IP 65 sensors/actuators
These are connected to the bus via an AS-i interface (active splitter block or IP20
Telefast discrete I/O bus interface). These interfaces connect traditional sensors and actuators to the AS-i bus and enable them to communicate on the bus.
Active splitter block Passive splitter block Connection adaptor
AS-i bus
9526VGG
ASI
Integrated AS-i function
Integrated AS-i function
AS-i function via interface
AMS
ASI
9526VGG
AMS
Traditional product Communicating product Communicating product
124 products maximum
(124 input data items and 124 output data items)
31 products (sensors or actuators)
___________________________________________________________________________
1/1
C
1.2-1 Range of AS-i products in the Schneider catalog
(non-exhaustive list)
AS-i actuators
4
Motor starter
5
Photoelectric detector
AS-i sensors
6
Inductive proximity sensor
Man/Machine Interface
7
Control station
8
Keypad with
12 keys
Illuminated indicator bank
9
Master
Interface for sensors and actuators
1
Active splitter block
2 inputs / 2 outputs
4 outputs
4 inputs
For connecting standard sensors/ actuators/dialog and signaling units via M12 connectors:
• inductive sensors,
• capacitive switches,
• photoelectric barriers,
• limit switches,
• indicator lamps,
• relays,
• solenoid valves.
2
Passive splitter block
4 channels for connecting AS-i sensors/actuators fitted with M12 connectors
Power supply
3
Telefast bus interface
AS-i bus / discrete I/O interface.
• 4 inputs,
• 4 outputs,
• 8 I/O (4 inputs + 4 outputs).
For connecting standard sensors/ actuators/dialog and signaling units via screw terminals or plugin terminals :
• 2 or 3-wire inductive sensors,
• capacitive switches,
• limit switches,
• indicator lamps,
• relays,
• contactors,
• solenoid valves,
• resistors.
___________________________________________________________________________
1/2
TSX SAY 100 : AS-i bus interface module 1
1.2-2 Presentation of the main components
• The cable
This transmits data and carries energy.
It can consist of :
- either a two-wire ribbon AS-i cable, which is not shielded and has a lip on one side to prevent incorrect insertion,
- or a standard two-wire round cable, which may optionally be shielded,
• Active 1 and passive 2 splitter blocks
IP67 dust and damp proof interfaces for connecting sensors/actuators using M12 connectors :
- Active splitter blocks, with the AS-i function built in, are used for connecting
"traditional" non-communicating sensors/actuators.
- Passive splitter blocks do not have any electronics and are used for connecting
"communicating" sensors/actuators.
Ribbon cable, with lip on one side active splitter blocks for ribbon cable
Round cable active splitter blocks for
round cable
C
• The Telefast SB2 bus/discrete I/O interface 3
IP20 dust and damp proof interface with the AS-i function built in. They are used for connecting all types of "traditional" non-communicating sensors/actuators via screw terminals.
• AS-i actuators 4
D.O.L. motor starters and reversers in dust and damp proof enclosures (IP54 and IP65), are used for the control and protection of electrical motors up to 4
KW at 400VAC.
passive splitter blocks for ribbon cable passive splitter blocks for round cable
1
101
4
104
201
301
204
205
Q1
105
206
Q4
108
___________________________________________________________________________
1/3
C
• AS-i sensors
- Photoelectric detectors
5
:
These detect all types of object (opaque, reflective, etc) using 5 basic systems (thru-beam, reflex, polarized reflex, diffuse and diffuse with background suppression). They have IP67 protection.
- Inductive proximity sensors 6 :
These detect any metal object and supply information to the object presence/absence checking functions.
They have IP67 protection.
• Man/machine interface products
- Control stations 7 :
These are man/machine interface tools which are ideally suited to exchange data between operator and machine. They have IP65 protection.
- Keypads 8 :
Man/machine interface tools with 12 tactile feedback keys. The data supplied is BCD encoded on 4 bits.
They have IP65 protection.
• Signaling elements :
- Illuminated indicator banks 9 : optical or audible signaling elements.
• The bus master
Integrated in a TSX/PMX/
PCX 57 PLC station, the
TSX SAY 100 module
(AS-i bus master) manages all the data exchanges on the AS-i bus.
• AS-i power supplies
Specific AS-i power supplies, for supplying components connected to the AS-i bus.
This power supply is distributed via the same medium as that used for data exchanges.
TSX SAY 100 TSX/PMX/PCX 57 station
7
4
1
-
8
5
2
0
9
6
3
+
TSX SUP A02 TSX SUP A05
___________________________________________________________________________
1/4
TSX SAY 100 : AS-i bus interface module 1
• Connection and tap-link accessories
Connection to the AS-i bus is via connection adaptors designed for connecting to AS-i ribbon cable or ribbon/ round cable tap links.
Connection adaptor for ribbon cable
Ribbon/round cable tap link
C
1.2-3 Example of an AS-i bus topology
Level 1
TSX 57
Level 0
TSX SAY 100
AS-i master
AS-i bus
AS-i power supply Communicating sensors/ actuators
Interfaces with traditional sensors/ actuators
___________________________________________________________________________
1/5
C
1.2-4 Main characteristics of the AS-i bus
AS-i is a system on which data exchanges are managed by a single master which calls each detected slave one after the other by scanning the bus and waits for its answer.
The serial communication frame carries :
• 4 data bits (D0 to D3), which are the image of the inputs or the outputs, depending on the type of interface,
• 4 parameter bits (P0 to P3), which are used to define the operating modes of the interface.
Bits P0 to P3 are used for "intelligent" devices which have an AS-i
ASIC. Operation can be modified while running.
The address of the slave concerned is coded on 5 bits.
In the AS-i master request, the outputs are set and the AS-i device inputs are fed back in the answer from the slave.
Addressing of slaves :
Each slave connected to the AS-i bus must have an address between 1 and 31 (coded on 5 bits). When delivered from the factory, slaves have address 0 (the address of the slave is stored in non-volatile memory). The address is programmed using an XZMC11 special addressing terminal.
Note: If a faulty slave, whose address has been defined, is replaced, the address of the replacement slave can be updated automatically.
Identification of slaves :
All slave devices connected to the AS-i bus are identified by:
• an I/O Code (I/O distribution code),
• an identification code, which completes the functional identification of the slave.
These identifications enable the AS-i master to recognize the configuration on the bus.
The various profiles have been produced by the AS-i bus association, and are used to distinguish input and output modules, mixed modules, families of "intelligent" devices, etc.
Maximum number of I/O :
An AS-i bus can take up to 31 slaves. Each slave can have up to 4 inputs and/or 4 outputs.
Thus up to 124 inputs + 124 outputs, that is 248 discrete I/O, can be managed, where all the active devices have 4 inputs and 4 outputs.
AS-i cable :
The AS-i cable is a two-wire link on which communication and power are transmitted to the connected devices. It is not necessary for the link to be twisted, and the wire crosssection can be 2 x 0.75 mm 2 , 2 x 1.5 mm 2 or 2 x 2.5 mm 2 , depending on the current consumption of the devices.
___________________________________________________________________________
1/6
TSX SAY 100 : AS-i bus interface module 1
Topology and maximum length of the AS-i bus :
The topology of the AS-i bus is totally flexible and can be adapted to users' requirements
(point-to-point, line, tree-structure topology). In all cases, the total length of all the branches of the bus must not exceed 100 meters without using a repeater.
C
AS-i bus cycle time (slave - TSX SAY 100) :
The AS-i system always transmits data of an identical length to each slave on the bus.
The AS-i cycle time depends on the number of slaves connected on the bus (with 31 slaves present, all operating, this time will be 5 ms maximum).
Reliability, flexibility :
The transmission procedure used (current modulation and Manchester code) ensures reliable operation. The master monitors the line supply voltage and the data transmitted. It detects transmission errors and slave failures and transmits the information to the PLC.
Exchanging or connecting a new slave during operation does not disturb the communication by the master with the other slaves.
___________________________________________________________________________
1/7
C
1.3
Description of the TSX SAY 100 module
1.3-1 Physical presentation
The TSX SAY 100 is a standard format module.
It consists of the following components :
1 Display block comprising 4 status indicator lamps for displaying the module operating modes :
- Green RUN indicator lamp : on during normal module operation,
- Red ERR indicator lamp : when on, it indicates a module fault,
Front panel
8
- Green COM indicator lamp : when on, it indicates data exchanges on the AS-i medium,
- Red I/O indicator lamp : when on, it indicates an external I/O fault on the AS-i bus.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
2 Display block comprising 32 indicator lamps (0 to 31) for diagnostics of the AS-i bus and display of the state of each slave connected on the bus.
3 Red AS-i indicator lamp : when on, it indicates a fault on the AS-i power supply,
4 Green BUS indicator lamp : when on, it indicates that display block 2 is in Bus display mode (displaying the slaves on the bus).
5 Green I/O indicator lamp : when on, it indicates that display block 2 is in slave "SLV" display mode (displaying the state of the I/O bits of a selected slave).
6 Pushbutton "
↑↓
" dedicated to local diagnostics of the AS-i bus. Pressing this pushbutton (long or short presses), combined with the "+ / -" pushbutton enables the user to move between the various AS-i bus diagnostic modes.
7 Pushbutton "+ / -" dedicated to local diagnostics of the AS-i bus. Pressing this pushbutton (long or short presses), combined with the "
↑↓
" pushbutton enables the user to move between the various AS-i bus diagnostic modes.
8 CANNON SUB D connector for connection to the AS-i bus.
___________________________________________________________________________
1/8
TSX SAY 100 : AS-i bus interface module 1
1.3-2 Mounting/installation
The TSX SAY 100 module can be mounted in any position in a TSX RKY rack, except the positions specifically for the processor and the power supply.
Insertion and removal of this module follows the general procedure for inserting and removing modules on TSX/PMX/PCX 57
PLCs (see installation manual for TSX/
PMX/PCX 57 PLCs).
Reminder :
The module can be inserted and removed with the PLC power supply and the AS-i bus power supply on.
Example of mounting a TSX SAY 100 module
The maximum number of modules per station depends on the type of processor installed :
Processor
TSX / TPMX P57 102
TPCX 57 1012
TSX / TPMX P57 2 i 2
TSX P57 3 ii / TSX P57 4 ii
TPMX P57 352 / 452
TPCX 57 3512
Maximum number per station of AS-i bus connections of SAY 100 modules
2 2
4
8
4
8
C
1.3-3 Connections
• AS-i bus cables
These carry the signals and provide the sensors and actuators connected on the bus with a 30 VDC supply.
- AS-i ribbon cable, with a lip on one side : yellow, wire cross-section 1.5 mm 2 .
AS-i – AS-i +
- standard round cable with 1.5 mm 2 or
2.5 mm 2 cross-section wires.
Recommended cable : reference H05VV-F2x1.5, complying with standard DIN VDE 0281. Wire crosssection 1.5 mm 2 .
(Blue) (Brown)
AS-i – AS-i +
(Blue) (Brown)
___________________________________________________________________________
1/9
C
Cable routing
The AS-i cable and high energy power cables must be in separate ducting, and protected by a metal screen,
When the AS-i cable is routed together with the control cables, it is essential that the connections on these control links are made in accordance with standard practice
(discharge diode or peak limiters on the terminals of inductive elements, etc).
• Connection of the module to the AS-i bus
A kit (connector + cover) is supplied with the module for connecting it to the AS-i bus. This connector must be connected to the AS-i bus cable and assembled by the user in accordance with the steps described below.
1 Connect the 2 wires of the AS-i cable to the connector observing the correct polarity.
Brown wire
Connector
2 Insert the connector in its cover and secure the cable to the cover.
Cover
3 Close the cover by snapping it shut.
AS-i cable
Blue wire
If in exceptional circumstances a shielded cable is used, this should be connected to the central terminal.
4 Mount the assembled unit on the module.
___________________________________________________________________________
1/10
TSX SAY 100 : AS-i bus interface module 1
1.3-4 Displaying the module status
This is performed by 4 indicator lamps (RUN, ERR, COM, I/O) located on the module which inform the user by their state (indicator lamp off, flashing or on) of the operating mode of the module :
C
State On
Indic.
RUN
(green)
Module operating normally
ERR
(red)
Serious internal fault, module failure
COM
(green)
I/0
(red)
I/O fault
—
Flashing Off
Module self-tests (1) Module faulty, or module off
No internal fault Module self-tests (1)
Fault : system OK but
• application faulty or,
• fault on AS-i bus
Module self-tests (1)
Communication on the AS-i bus
Module self-tests (1)
No communication on the AS-i bus
Module operating normally
(1) all 4 indicator lamps flash simultaneously during the self-tests when the module is powered up.
___________________________________________________________________________
1/11
C
1.3-5 Special displays of the TSX SAY 100 module
3 indicator lamps, AS-i, Bus and I/O display data specific to the TSX SAY 100 module :
AS-i
• AS-i indicator lamp (red)
Indicator lamp off : module operating normally
Indicator lamp on : power supply fault on the AS-i bus
Indicator lamp flashing : automatic addressing initialized
• BUS and I/O indicator lamps
These two indicator lamps show the selected display mode :
- Bus display mode or
- slave display mode.
AS-i
Module display SLV Bus indic.
@I/O indic.
On Off
Off
Off
On
Off
Diagnostics
The 32 indicator lamp display block on the front panel of the module is in BUS display mode which shows the slaves present on the bus.
The 32 indicator lamp display block on the front panel of the module is in slave (SLV) display mode with the state of the I/O bits of the selected slave displayed.
The 32 indicator lamp display block on the front panel of the module is in slave (SLV) display mode with the address of the selected slave displayed.
___________________________________________________________________________
1/12
TSX SAY 100 : AS-i bus interface module 1
1.3-6 Technical characteristics
AS-i bus AS-i bus maximum cycle time
Maximum number of slaves on the AS-i bus
Maximum length of the AS-i bus
(including all branches without repeater)
Maximum number of I/O
AS-i bus nominal supply voltage
TSX SAY 100 Programming the TSX SAY 100 module module
Response time with 31 slaves (1) for a PLC scan time of 10 ms
Calculation of the AS-i scan time for n slaves (normal operation)
Current consumption on the PLC 5V
Current consumption on the AS-i 30V
Dissipated power
Protection against polarity reversal on AS-i bus inputs
Degree of protection
Operating temperature
AS-i master profile
Standards and operating conditions
5 ms
31
100 meters
124 inputs + 124 outputs
30 VDC using the PL7 Junior or PL7 Pro software typically 27 ms maximum 37 ms
156 ms x (n+2) if n < 31
156 ms x (n+1) if n = 31
110 mA typical/ 150 mA max.
50mA typical/ 60 mA max.
2.5 W max.
Yes
IP20
0 to 60°C
M2 in accordance with those for Premium PLCs.
(see Volume 1 - part D)
(1) Program response time = time between an AS-i input activated on the bus, processed in the PLC application and applied to an AS-i output.
C
1.3-7 Safety of personnel
To ensure the safety of personnel, it is essential to :
• connect the PLC ground terminal to earth,
• use a SELV (safety extra low voltage) AS-i power supply, with 30 VDC nominal voltage,
• for PLCs connected to an AC supply, place a residual current device upstream of this supply which will disconnect the PLC power supply source if an earth leakage is detected,
• for PLCs connected to a DC power supply source, ensure that the power supply placed upstream of the PLC is SELV,
• use AS-i certified products on the bus.
Because of its technology and connections, the TSX SAY 100 AS-i module only takes
1/13
C
1.4
Addressing I/O objects
Reading the inputs and updating the outputs of the slave devices connected to the ASi bus are performed automatically, at the beginning and end respectively of each scan of the task in which the TSX SAY 100 module is configured.
The user program can access these inputs and outputs using language objects whose syntax is as follows :
%
Symbol
I or Q
Type of object
I = input
Q = output
\ xy.0
\
Module/channel address of the TSX SAY 100
x = number of the rack
y= position number
0= channel 0 of module n .
Slave number
0 to 31 i
Rank of the bit
0 to 3
2
Examples : special case of rack 0
%I\2.0\1.3 indicates : input 3 of slave 1, channel 0 of the TSX SAY 100 module, located in slot 2 of rack 0.
%Q\2.0\31.0 indicates : input 0 of slave 31, channel 0 of the TSX SAY 100 module, located in slot 2 of rack 0.
2
Slave addresses
Slaves
I/O addresses of the slaves
4 I
@1
4 Q
@ 3
1 Q
@ 5
AS-i bus
0
@ 31
2 I & 2 Q
0 3 0 3
%I\2.0\1.0
%I\2.0\1.3
%Q\2.0\3.0
%Q\2.0\3.3
%Q\2.0\5.0
0 1 0 1
%I\2.0\31.0
%Q\2.0\31.0
%I\2.0\31.1 %Q\2.0\31.1
Reminder : the physical address of an AS-i slave is programmed using the XZM C11 portable terminal.
___________________________________________________________________________
1/14
TSX SAY 100 : AS-i bus interface module 1
1.5
AS-i bus diagnostics
The module display block is used to :
• display the presence of each slave on the AS-i bus, (Bus mode),
• display the state of the I/O bits of each slave on the bus (Slave mode "SLV").
These modes are accessed by pressing combinations of the (
↑↓
and +/-) pushbuttons on the TSX SAY100 module.
+/-
2
3
4
0
1
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
C
Bus mode Slave mode (SLV)
Display of the image of the
AS-i bus, each indicator lamp,
1 to 31, corresponds to a slave address on the bus :
• indicator lamp on : slave present,
• indicator lamp flashing : slave projected and not detected, or detected and not projected,
• indicator lamp off : slave neither projected nor detected.
Display of the address of the selected slave :
• indicator lamp on: number of the selected slave
Display of the state of the I/O bits of the selected slave :
• indicator lamps 0 to 3 display the state of the input bits,
• indicator lamps 4 to 7 display the state of the output bits,
• indicator lamp on: bit at state
1,
• indicator lamp off: bit at state
0 or not significant.
The display mode is indicated when the BUS indicator lamp
The display mode is indicated when both the BUS and I/O indicator lamps are off.
The display mode is indicated when the I/O indicator lamp is on and the BUS indicator lamp is on and the I/O indicator lamp is off.
___________________________________________________________________________
1/15
Moving between the various display modes
C
Bus mode
Display of the image of the AS-i bus
(default display)
On
Off Slaves 1 to 31 present
> 1S
Long press on
↑ ↓
Slave mode
(SLV)
Slave number
State of input bits
State of output bits
Display of the I/O bits of the selected slave
> 1S
Long press on +/-
Off
Change of direction :
Short press on
↑ ↓
< 1S
Change of slave :
Short press on +/-
Off
> 1S
Long press on ↑ ↓
Display of the address of the selected slave
On Off
___________________________________________________________________________
1/16
TSX SAY 100 : AS-i bus interface module 1
• Display of slaves on the AS-i bus (Bus mode)
This mode is displayed by default on power-up and shows :
- slaves which are projected and detected (indicator lamps on, steady),
- slaves which are neither projected nor detected (indicator lamps off),
- slaves which are projected and not detected, or which are detected and not projected (indicator lamps flashing).
C
Display block
+/-
Bus display
Indicator lamps indicating the mode displayed
The image of the AS-i network is displayed on the whole of the display block, with each indicator lamp representing a slave address on the AS-i bus. The user can move between the various modes by pressing combinations of the
↑↓
and +/- pushbuttons
(see previous diagram).
Two indicator lamps, "BUS" and "I/O", indicate the current display mode. In this example, the "BUS" indicator lamp is on and the I/O indicator lamp is off indicating that the display is in Bus mode.
In the above example the display block indicates that:
- slaves 1, 4, 10 and 20 (indicator lamps on) are present,
- slave 11 (indicator lamp flashing) is present and not projected, or projected and absent.
___________________________________________________________________________
1/17
C
• Display of the state of the I/O bits of each slave (Slave mode "SLV")
The module display block indicates the state of the I/O bits of each slave present on the bus.
From the Bus mode display :
- a long press on the (
↑↓
) pushbutton on the TSX SAY 100 module changes it to slave
"SLV" mode with the display of a slave address (1 to 31) which may be incremented
(1 v 31) or decremented (31 v 1), using short presses on the (+/-)pushbutton.
In this case, the "BUS" and "I/O" indicator on the module front panel are off.
From the display of the selected slave :
- a long press on the (+/-) pushbutton on the TSX SAY 100 module displays the state of the I/O bits relating to the selected slave, (indicator lamp on = bit at state 1, indicator lamp off = bit at state 0 or no inputs or outputs). The indicator lamps (0 to
3) in the upper part show the state of the input bits of slave (4 input bits maximum per slave). The indicator lamps (4 to 7) in the lower part show the state of the output bits of slave (4 output bits maximum per slave) .
In this example, the I/O indicator lamp is on and the BUS indicator lamp is off.
Slave number
(example : 10)
State of the input bits (example :
%I\2.0\10.0 and %I\2.0\10.1 = 1)
>1S
Long press on +/-
+/-
Change of direction :
Short press on
↑↓
< 1S
Change of slave :
Short press on +/-
Slave display
State of the output bits
(example: %Q\2.0\10.2
and %Q\2.0\10.3=1)
Channel display
Incrementing or decrementing the slave number
When the PLC display block is in Slave mode (SLV), with a slave number displayed, the user can scan the slaves in an upward (1 v 31) or downward (31 v 1) direction. A short press on the (
↑↓
) pushbutton on the TSX SAY 100 module changes the direction.
___________________________________________________________________________
1/18
TSX SAY 100 : AS-i bus interface module 1
1.6
Operating modes of the TSX SAY 100 module
• Output fallback position
The fallback mode is defined in the configuration screen (general parameters) and can be read in word %KW4.0.19 (%KWxy.0.19:X0 = 1 : fallback to 0, %KWxy.0.19:X0
= 0, maintain state).
See the AS-i section in the application-specific functions installation manual.
x = rack address y = module address
When the AS-i channel changes to STOP:
- with the reset to 0 option : the outputs are forced to 0, then communication on the medium stops,
- with the maintain state option: the state of the outputs is maintained, then communication on the medium stops.
• Automatic addressing of slaves
When this function is validated in the module configuration, a faulty slave can be replaced by a slave of the same type without stopping the AS-i bus and without the necessity for any special operation.
If the replacement slave is programmed with the same address and it has the same profile, it will be automatically inserted in the list of slaves detected and activated. If this is not the case, the ERR and AS-i indicator lamps flash simultaneously.
If the new slave is unformatted (address 0, new slave) and it has the same profile, the slave will automatically take the address of the slave which it replaces and will therefore appear in the list of slaves which are detected and in the list of slaves which are active. If this is not the case, the ERR and AS-i indicator lamps flash simultaneously.
These operations are only possible if a single slave in the configuration is faulty.
C
• Processor fault
If communication with the processor is broken, the module switches to SAFETY position.
Causes of the communication break :
- tripping of the processor watchdog if the TSX SAY 100 module is located in the rack containing the processor,
- disconnection of the X Bus cable if the TSX SAY 100 module is located in an extension rack.
• Module fault
If there is a serious TSX SAY 100 module fault (faulty component, etc), the module stops communication with the X Bus and with the AS-i bus. The same behavior occurs as when a module is removed while powered up.
___________________________________________________________________________
1/19
C
• Removing the module while it is powered up
When the module is removed while it is powered up, communication with the
X Bus stops, and the processor indicates a module fault.
Communication on the AS-i bus is also interrupted without warning. In this case, the slaves which have a watchdog set their outputs to the required state and the others remain in the same position and cannot be set to 0 because the module can no longer provide communication.
• Inserting the module while it is powered up
After the TSX SAY 100 module is powered up, it waits to receive the configuration from the processor or for one of the "
↑↓
"or "+ / " pushbuttons to be pressed, otherwise it remains stopped.
• Fault on the AS-i power supply
When there is a fault on the AS-i power supply module, communication stops and :
- the outputs of the slaves which have a watchdog are set to the required state, unless the slave draws its power from the AS-i medium.
- the commands of the slaves change to 0 as a result of loss of power.
This fault is shown by the AS-i indicator lamp being on.
• Breaking of the AS-i medium
If the medium is broken, there are several possibilities :
- the medium is cut at the module output : the behavior is the same as when there is a power break, with disappearance of all the slaves and indication of a power supply fault.
- the medium is cut beyond the TSX SAY 100 module and AS-i power supply assembly : disappearance of all the slaves and no indication of a power supply fault,
- the medium is cut beyond the TSX SAY 100 module and AS-i power supply assembly and a number of slaves : disappearance of the slaves located beyond the break and no indication of a power supply fault.
___________________________________________________________________________
1/20
TSX SAY 100 : AS-i bus interface module 1
1.7
Recommendations for use
1.7-1 24 V auxiliary power supply
If slaves are using a 24 V auxiliary power supply, the disappearance of this power supply is not managed by the TSX SAY 100 module.
Data on the disappearance of this power supply can be fed back using a 24 V input.
C
1.7-2 Multiple addressing
When connecting one or more slaves, care should be taken not to give them an address which is already in use by a slave on the bus.
If double addressing of slaves occurs, there are two possibilities :
• The two slaves which have the same address also have the same profile and manage identical I/O : the AS-i bus master does not detect any error,
• The two slaves which have the same address manage different I/O : the AS-i bus master may then detect transmission errors when accessing the I/O of one of the two slaves.
___________________________________________________________________________
1/21
C
___________________________________________________________________________
1/22
Communication : Contents
TSX SCY 21601 module / PCMCIA cards Part D
___________________________________________________________________________
Section
Structure of network documentation
General communication architecture
2 Installation of the TSX SCY 21601 module
Characteristics of the integrated channel
Compatibility of the host channel
Page D
___________________________________________________________________________
D/1
Communication :
TSX SCY 21601 module / PCMCIA cards
Contents
Part D
D Section
Connection of the integrated channel
2.8-2 Connection to the UNI-TELWAY fieldbus
2.8-3 Principle of distributed impedance matching for an
2.8-4 Example of a UNI-TELWAY architecture
2.8-5 Connection to the Jbus/Modbus fieldbus
2.8-6 Principle of polarization for an RS485 line
2.8-7 Example of a Modbus architecture
2.8-8 Connection of the TSX SCA50 T-junction box
2.8-9 Connection in Character mode
2.8-10 TSX SCY 21601 module consumption
3 Installation of PCMCIA cards
Connection of the PCMCIA card host channel
3.3-1 Precautions relating to PCMCIA connections
3.3-3 PCMCIA card references and installation
3.3-4 Mounting cards and cables
3.3-5 Displaying the operating status of PCMCIA cards
3.3-6 PCMCIA card visual diagnostics
Connection of the TSX SCP 111 card
3.4-1 Point-to-point connection in character mode
3.4-2 UNI-TELWAY, Modbus or Character mode connection via Modem
Page
___________________________________________________________________________
D/2
Communication : Contents
TSX SCY 21601 module / PCMCIA cards Part D
___________________________________________________________________________
Section
Connection of the TSX SCP 112 card
3.5-1 Point-to-point connection
3.5-4 TSX SCP 112 connection to April 5000/7000 PLCs
Connection of the TSX SCP 114 card
3.6-1 Connection to the UNI-TELWAY network
3.6-2 Connection to the Modbus/Jbus bus
3.6-3 Multi-protocol asynchronous link connection, RS 422
Connection of TSX FPP 20 cards
Connection of TSX FPP 10 cards
Connection of TSX MBP 100 cards
3.10 Summary of connection cables
3.10-4 TSX FPP 10 and TSX FPP 20 cards
3.11 Precautions for connecting PCMCIA cards
3.12 Current consumption of PCMCIA cards
3.12-1 Current consumption of TSX SCP 111 card
3.12-2 Current consumption of TSX SCP 112 card
3.12-3 Current consumption of TSX SCP 114 card
3.12-4 Current consumption of TSX FPP 10 and TSX FPP20 cards
3.12-5 Current consumption of TSX MBP 100 card
Page
D
___________________________________________________________________________
D/3
Communication :
TSX SCY 21601 module / PCMCIA cards
D Section
Contents
Part D
Page
___________________________________________________________________________
D/4
1 Presentation
1.1 Structure of network documentation
This manual is aimed at users wishing to install a device with one or more communication networks.
Manuals :
TSX DM57 33E Volume 3: (this document) part D, provides general information regarding hardware aspects of the installation of the various communication cards.
TSX DRNET E : X-WAY reference manual provides an outline of the world of X-WAY communication, an overview of the various networks, and the X-WAY protocols.
Information on the individual networks is given in the following manuals :
TSX DR FPW E : FIPWAY network
TSX DG UTW E : UNI-TELWAY network
TSX DG MDB E : Modbus network
890 USE 100 01 : Modbus + network
TLX DS COM PL7 33E : PL7 communication manual, providing general information on software installation of the various networks.
D
1.2 General communication architecture
TSX SCP 111
TSX MBP 100 TSX SCY CM 6030
FIPWAY
TSX SCY CU 6030
TSX MBP
CE 030/
060
TSX SCP
CD 1030
MODBUS
990NAD23000
TSX SCA 50
MODBUS PLUS
TSX SCP 114
TSX FPP20
TSX SCP CU 4030
UNI-TELWAY
TSX SCA 50 TSX SCA 50
TSX ACC4
___________________________________________________________________________
1/1
D
1.3
Operating standards
The TSX SCY 21601 module and the PCMCIA communication cards comply with the following international standards :
• US standards : UL508, IEC 1131-2
• CANADA standards : CSA C22.2 / 142
• Conforming to regulations : FCC-B
• CE marking
• type III E mechanical PCMCIA standard
• PCMCIA 2.01.
The integrated link of the TSX SCY 21601 module complies with the following communication standards :
• UNI-TELWAY,
• Modbus,
• XWAY.
The TSX FPP 20 FIPWAY and TSX FPP10 FIPIO agent PCMCIA cards comply with the following communication standards :
• FIP protocol (link, network management),
• PCMCIA,
• XWAY.
The TSX SCP 111, 112, 114 PCMCIA cards comply with the following communication standards :
• UNI-TELWAY, Modbus protocols
• PCMCIA,
• XWAY.
___________________________________________________________________________
1/2
2 Installation of the TSX SCY 21601 module
2.1
Presentation
The TSX SCY 21601 communication module will take PCMCIA communication cards.
It has two communication channels :
• One multiprotocol integrated channel (channel 0), isolated RS485 asynchronous serial link, for UNI-TELWAY, Jbus/Modbus, or Character Mode protocols,
• One PCMCIA host channel (channel 1) which supports the following protocols :
- UNI-TELWAY, Jbus/Modbus, and Character Mode on an RS232-D, current loop or
RS485 link corresponding to the TSX SCP 111, 112 and 114 cards.
- FIPWAY cell network corresponding to the TSX FPP 20 card,
D
Important : the TSX SCY21601 module integrated channel is only compatible with a
2-wire RS485 link.
The installation of new functions on the TSX SCY 21601 module means that TSX SCY
21600 communication modules will not be compatible with certain processors in the
Premium range :
Processors version
TSX P57-••
TSX P57-••
TPMX P57-••
TPCX 57-••
≤
≥
V2
V3
Communication module
TSX SCY 21600 TSX SCY 21601 compatible incompatible incompatible compatible
___________________________________________________________________________
2/1
D
2.2
Description
The TSX SCY 21601 module is a single format module which can be inserted in one of the slots of a TSX/PMX/PCX Premium PLC station rack.
This module comprises the following components :
1 Three indicator lamps on the front panel of the module :
• RUN and ERR indicate the module status,
• CH0 displays the communication status of the integrated serial link channel
(channel 0),
1
2 Integrated channel with a 25-pin female
SUB-D connector, standard RS485 link in half duplex mode (channel 0) :
• UNI-TELWAY
• Jbus/Modbus
• Character mode
(channel 0 : integrated channel)
2
3 Host channel for type III PCMCIA cards
(channel 1) :
(channel 1 : host channel)
3
The various types of communication card which can be integrated in the host channel of the TSX SCY 21601 module
• TSX SCP111 : multiprotocol card (UNI-TELWAY,
Modbus/Jbus, character mode), RS 232 D, 9 non-isolated signals,
• TSX SCP112 : multiprotocol card (UNI-TELWAY,
Modbus/Jbus, character mode), current loop (20 mA
CL),
• TSX SCP114 : multiprotocol card (UNI-TELWAY,
Modbus/Jbus, character mode), RS 485, compatible with isolated RS 422,
Type 3 PCMCIA communication cards
• TSX FPP 20 : FIPWAY network cards,
___________________________________________________________________________
2/2
Installation of the TSX SCY 21601 module 2
2.3
Characteristics of the integrated channel
The integrated channel of the TSX SCY 21601 module comprises :
• an RS485 physical interface,
• a baseband asynchronous mode,
• a double twisted pair medium,
`
• UNITELWAY, Modbus and Character Mode protocols.
Protocol UNI-TELWAY Modbus Character Mode
Type
Speed
Master-slave Master-slave Half duplex
9,600 bits/sec.
9,600 bits/sec.
9,600 bits/sec.
Can be configured Can be configured Can be configured from 1,200 to from 1,200 to from 1,200 to
19,200 bits/sec 19,200 bits/sec 19,200 bits/sec
28 28 Number of devices
Number of slave addresses
Length of bus excluding tap-links
Size of messages
Service
98
1000 m.
240 bytes
98
1000 m.
256 bytes
Message handling Read Words/bits
Master-slave Write Words/bits
Slave-slave
UNI-TE requests
Diagnostics
-
1000 m.
4 Kb
Transmission of character strings
Reception of character strings
D
2.4
Compatibility of the host channel
The cards accepted by the host channel are :
• TSX SCP 111,112,114 PCMCIA cards which are used for communication with TSX 7, series 1000, Modicon PLCs and other products compatible with UNITELWAY, Jbus/
Modbus and Character mode. PCMCIA cards are also Jbus/Modbus compatible with series 1000 PLCs.
• The TSX FPP 20 card is compatible with FIPWAY devices :
- model 40 PLCs (TSX 47-455, TSX 67-455 etc) later than version 5.0,
- TSX 17 PLCs,
- connected PC compatibles with TSX FPC10 and TSX FPC 20 cards.
Note : the host channel does not accept the TSX FPP 10 card.
___________________________________________________________________________
2/3
D
2.5
Installation
The TSX SCY 21601 module is installed in a TSX/PMX/PCX Premium PLC station rack.
It is included in X-WAY network architectures based on TSX series 7, TSX Micro and
TSX/PMX/PCX Premium PLCs.
This communication module provides the PLC station with :
• an isolated multiprotocol RS485 communication channel,
• a slot for a PCMCIA standard communication card.
The TSX SCY 21601 module can be installed in any available slot in a TSX/PMX/PCX
Premium PLC station.
Maximum number of TSX SCY 21601 modules per station
A TSX 21601 module supports a maximum of 2 communication channels; an RS 485 channel integrated in the module and a channel from the PCMCIA card which can be integrated in the module.
As the number of application-specific channels managed by a PLC station depends on the type of processor installed, the maximum number of TSX SCY 21601 modules in a PLC station thus depends on :
• the type of processor installed,
• the number of application-specific channels already used apart from those used for communication.
The user should therefore review the overall total at station level to determine the number of application-specific channels already used, in order to define the number of
TSX 21 601 modules which can be used.
Note :
The calculation of the number of application-specific channels is defined in the manual TSX DM57 2,
Volume 1 - part A - section 3.5-3).
Summary of the number of application-specific channels managed by each type of processor
Processors
TSX P57 102/TPMX P57 102/TPCX 571012
TSX P57 2 i 2/TPMX P57 202
TSX P57 3 i 2/TPMX P57 352/TPCX 57 3512
TSX P57 4 i 2/TPMX P57 452
No. of app.-spec. channels managed
8
24
32
48
Insertion / removal :
The TSX SCY 21601 module can be inserted or removed with the power on. This device does not have memory protection. When the module is disconnected from the rack, its internal memory is erased. The module goes through an initialization phase when it is reinserted.
A TSX SCY 21601 module with a PCMCIA card can be removed with the power on.
!
PCMCIA cards, however, cannot be removed with the power on.
___________________________________________________________________________
2/4
Installation of the TSX SCY 21601 module 2
2.6
Operation
The TSX SCY 21601 module is a two-channel communication module from the Premium range which can be installed on TSX RKY racks of a TSX / PMX / PCX 57 PLC station.
It is used for communication between the PLC station and devices with an X-WAY architecture via UNI-TELWAY or Jbus/Modbus fieldbuses or the FIPWAY network.
The TSX SCY 21601 module manages two independent communication channels with their own functions :
• Channel 0 handles UNI-TELWAY, Jbus/Modbus, and Character mode protocols on a half duplex RS485 standard isolated physical link, with a speed restricted to 19200 bits per second,
• Channel 1 can take one of the following PCMCIA communication cards :
- Fieldbus : TSX SCP111 (RS232), TSX SCP112 (current loop), TSX SCP114 (RS 422/
RS485) cards, UNI-TELWAY, Jbus/Modbus and Character Mode,
- Cell network : TSX FPP 20 FIPWAY card.
D
The PCMCIA card and protocol can be selected during configuration of the TSX SCY
21601 communication channels using PL7 Junior or PL7 Pro software.
2.7
Module visual diagnostics
There are three indicator lamps on the front panel of TSX SCY 21601 modules. These provide information on the operating status of the module and the communication
status of the integrated serial link channel :
RUN (Green)
ERR (Red)
CH0 (Yellow)
The communication status of the host channel is indicated by the ERR and COM indicator lamps on the serial link or FIPWAY PCMCIA cards, see section 3.3-5.
___________________________________________________________________________
2/5
D
The indicator lamps on the TSX SCY 21601 module indicate the operating mode of the integrated channel. These indicator lamps can be : on, off or flashing.
State of indicator lamps
RUN ERR CHO Comments
(1) (1) Module powered down, or not operating
No communication on the integrated channel
(1)
(2) Communication on the integrated channel
Serious fault on the integrated channel
Fault on the integrated channel, configuration fault, no device OK on the channel
Faulty device on the integrated channel
Self-tests
Key :
On
Off
Flashing
(1) = state not significant
(2) = line activity display.
___________________________________________________________________________
2/6
Installation of the TSX SCY 21601 module 2
2.8
Connection of the integrated channel
2.8-1 Presentation
The wiring accessories for connecting the standard RS485 link of the TSX SCY 21601 module enable the following connections :
• connection to the UNI-TELWAY network via a TSX SCA 50 T-junction box with the
TSX SCY CU 6030 cable, or via a TSX SCA62 Y-junction box with the
TSX SCY CU 6530 cable,
• connection to the Jbus/Modbus network via a TSX SCA 50 T-junction box with the
TSX SCY 6030 cable,
• connection to RS485 standard devices using a connector suitable for the link with the
TSX SCY CU 6030 or TSX SCY CM 6030 cable.
D
TSX SCY 21601
TSX SCY CU 6030 cable for UNI-TELWAY
TSX SCY CM 6030 cable for Jbus/Modbus
RS 485 integrated channel
TSX SCA 50
TSX SCY CU 6530 cable for UNI-TELWAY
TSX SCA 62
___________________________________________________________________________
2/7
D
2.8-2 Connection to the UNI-TELWAY fieldbus
The communication channel integrated in the module is connected to the UNI-TELWAY fieldbus with the TSX SCY CU 6030 connection cable, via the TSX SCA50 T-junction box.
25-pin SUB- D connector
UNI-TELWAY cable : TSX SCY CU 6030
TSX SCA 50
15-pin SUB- D connector
UNI-TELWAY cable : TSX SCY CU 6530
TSX SCA 62
Description of the TSX SCY CU 6030 cable
5 V
4.7 k
Ω
J1
20
13 0 V
25 0 V
0 V
6
12
19
24
D (A)
D (B)
TSX SCA 50 box connection
Red
White
3
2
White
Blue
4
5
8
0 V
4.7 k Ω
Description of the TSX SCY CU 6530 cable
J1
5 V
4.7 k
Ω
20
13 0 V
25 0 V
0 V
1
TSX SCA 62 box connection
15
8
0 VL
0 VL
6
12
19
24
D (A)
D (B)
7
14
D (A)
D (B)
15-pin SUB-D connector
8
0 V
4.7 k
Ω
___________________________________________________________________________
2/8
Installation of the TSX SCY 21601 module 2
2.8-3 Principle of distributed impedance matching for an RS485 line
This is the type of impedance matching used for UNI-TELWAY networks
Zc
5 V
Rp
0 V
Rp
5 V
Rp
Rx–
0 V
Rp
Tx+
L–
5 V
Rp
L+
0 V
Rp
5 V
Rp
Zc
0 V
Rp
D
The above diagram shows the general architecture of a UNI-TELWAY network.
The network consists of a single shielded twisted pair. The various network stations are connected simply by linking :
• all the outputs marked + (Tx+, Rx+) on the + wire of the network marked (L+),
• all the outputs marked - (Tx-, Rx-) on the - wire of the network marked (L-).
The network impedance is matched by means of two line termination resistors (Zc) located on the stations at both ends of the network.
Distributed polarization of the network is achieved by connecting the L+ wire to the 5 V and the L- wire to the 0 V by means of two polarization resistors (R = 4.7K
Ω
). This polarization keeps the network stable when it is de-energized. This must be performed for each network station.
The essential features are :
• up to 32 stations,
• maximum length : approximately 1,300 m,
• bus topology,
• tap link
≤
15 m,
• half duplex on 2 wires,
• line termination on the end stations.
• distributed line impedance matching Rp = 4.7K
Ω
___________________________________________________________________________
2/9
D
2.8-4 Example of a UNI-TELWAY architecture
TSX SCY CU 6530 TSX SCY CU 6030
TSX SCA 62
UNI-TELWAY
TSX SCA 50
2.8-5 Connection to the Jbus/Modbus fieldbus
The integrated channel is connected to the bus via the TSC SCA 50 T-junction box with the TSX SCY CM 6030 connection cable.
Integrated channel equipped with a
25-pin SUB-D connector
Jbus/Modbus cable : TSX SCY CM 6030
TSX SCA 50
Description of the TSX SCY CM 6030 cable
0 V
SCY 21600 module integrated channel connector
470 Ω
J1
21
TSX SCY CM 6030 cable
5 V
9
470
Ω
6 EMI –
24 EMI +
Green / White
White / Green
Orange / White
White / Orange
D(A)
D(B
)
150
Ω
11
23
White / Blue
Blue / White
___________________________________________________________________________
2/10
Installation of the TSX SCY 21601 module 2
2.8-6 Principle of polarization for an RS485 line
This is the type of polarization used for Modbus networks.
Rc
5 V
Rp
Rx– Tx+
L+
L–
0 V
Rp
Rc
D
The above diagram shows the general architecture of an RS 485 network.
The transmitters are shown as
The receivers are shown as
:
:
Tx+
(A)
Tx–
(B)
Rx+
(A')
Rx–
(B')
The network consists of a single shielded twisted pair. The various network stations are connected simply by linking :
• all the outputs marked + (Tx+, Rx+) on the + wire of the network marked (L+),
• all the outputs marked - (Tx-, Rx-) on the - wire of the network marked (L-).
The network impedance is matched by means of two line termination resistors (Rc) located on the stations at both ends of the network.
Polarization of the network is achieved by connecting the L+ wire to the 5 V and the Lwire to the 0 V by means of two polarization resistors (R = 470
Ω
). This polarization ensures there is always a current flowing through the network, and can be located at any point along the network (in practice it is generally at the level of the master).
It must be the only one on the network, whatever the network length.
___________________________________________________________________________
2/11
D
The essential characteristics are :
• up to 32 stations,
• maximum length : approximately 1,300 m,
• bus topology,
• tap link
≤
15 m,
• half duplex on 2 wires,
• line termination on the end stations,
• single line impedance matching Rp = 470
Ω.
2.8-7 Example of a Modbus architecture
TSX SCY CM 6030
MODBUS
TSX SCA 50
2.8-8 Connection of the TSX SCA50 T-junction box
• Modbus connection without line matching
0 V
470
Ω
5 V
470
Ω
J1
21
9 nc nc
TSX SCY CM 6030 cable
6
24
TX -
TX +
D(A)
D(B)
Orange / White
White / Orange
TSX SCA50
1
D(A)
D(B)
4
5
150
Ω
11
23 nc nc
___________________________________________________________________________
2/12
Installation of the TSX SCY 21601 module 2
• Modbus connection with line matching
0 V
470 Ω
5 V
470 Ω
J1
21
9
6
24
TX -
TX +
TSX SCY CM 6030 cable
D(A)
D(B)
150
Ω
11
23
Green / White
White / Green
Orange / White
White / Orange
White / Blue
Blue / White
TSX SCA50
1
4
D (A)
5 D (B)
D
2.8-9 Connection in Character mode
The cable for connecting the TSX SCY 21601 module to an RS 485 standard device is the
TSX SCY CM 6030 cable.
When connecting the TSX SCY 21601 integrated channel to a Half duplex standard RS
485 device in Character mode, the user makes the connection using the TSX SCY CM
6030 connection cable, adding a connector suitable for the device to be connected to the free end of the cable, and linking the required signals.
TSX SCY CM 6030 cable Two-wire RS 485 device
___________________________________________________________________________
2/13
D
2.8-10 TSX SCY 21601 module consumption
This table shows the consumption of a TSX SCY 21601 communication module
without a PCMCIA card or connection to the integrated channel :
Voltage
5 Volts
Typical current
350 mA
Maximum current Dissipated power
420 mA 2.1 W max.
___________________________________________________________________________
2/14
3 Installation of PCMCIA cards
3.1
Presentation
TSX/PMX/PCX 57 PLC stations connect to networks, buses and communication links via
PCMCIA communication cards.
The card comprises a metal case whose size conforms to the type III extended PCMCIA format.
These cards are inserted in the appropriate slot in the processor and/or TSX SCY 21601 module of Premium PLCs.
D
! PCMCIA cards must not be connected with the power on.
TSX 37
TSX/PMX 57
TSX/PMX 57
PCX57
• Serial link PCMCIA cards, TSX SCP 11 i
Each TSX SCP 11 i PCMCIA card supports a different physical layer. This card family comprises three products.
- the RS 232-D link, reference TSX SCP 111,
- the current loop link (20 mA), reference
TSX SCP 112,
- the RS 485 link (compatible with the RS 422), reference TSX SCP 114,
___________________________________________________________________________
3/1
D
Each card in the TSX SCP 111, 112, 114 family offers all the communication protocols.
The protocols which can be used for each PCMCIA card are as follows :
• Modbus/Jbus protocol,
• UNI-TELWAY protocol,
• Character mode (asynchronous link).
PCMCIA cards may also be used on devices with a type III slot, such as the CCX 17, FTX
417-40 terminals or third-party devices, for example PC compatibles.
• FIPWAY network PCMCIA card, TSX FPP 20
The TSX FPP 20 PCMCIA card supports the FIP physical layer. The card is used to connect a TSXPMX/
PCX 57 PLC station to a FIPWAY network, and is also suitable for devices made by manufacturers who wish to connect their products to the FIPWAY network.
The card has four rotary switches labeled "1" used to set the code for the network and station number.
1
• Modbus + network PCMCIA card, TSX MBP 100
The TSX MBP 100 PCMCIA card is used to connect a
TSXPMX/PCX 57 PLC station to a Modbus + network.
• FIPIO agent bus PCMCIA card, TSX FPP 10
The TSX FPP 10 PCMCIA card is used to connect a
TSXPMX/PCX 57 PLC station to a FIPIO bus which is a
FIPIO agent. It is used to connect to TSX 47-107 and
April 5000 PLCs.
Setup, use and maintenance of PCMCIA cards is performed using PL7 Junior / PL7 Pro programming and operating software for all Premium PLCs.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/2
Installation of PCMCIA cards 3
3.2
Description
Type III E (extended) PCMCIA communication cards are incorporated in a metal case with the following dimensions :
• length 85.6 mm,
• width 51 mm,
• height 10 mm.
D
The front of the card displays the communication operating status and is the point of physical connection to the network.
The mechanical configuration of the card should be adapted according to the type of installation required by fitting a removable cover :
• installation on TSX P57 i or TPMX P57 i type processor or on a TSX
SCY21601 communication module : Use the removable cover with lugs (3), supplied with screws for fixing the cover to the host module,
• installation on a
TPCX 57 i type processor : Use the removable cover with lugs (2), supplied with screws for fixing the cover to the TPCX 57 processor,
• installation on a PC compatible type device :
Use the removable cover
(1)
Note : Covers (1) and (3) are supplied with the PCMCIA card.
Cover 2 is supplied with the TPCX 57 i processor.
Connection to the network is obtained by connecting the cable to the front of the card.
A locating device prevents incorrect mounting. The product reference label informs the user of the type of physical layer supported by the card.
Note
The use of covers with lugs, mounted on PCMCIA cards, prevents unintentional removal while powered up and ensures correct card operation.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/3
D
3.3
Connection of the PCMCIA card host channel
3.3-1 Precautions relating to PCMCIA connections
!
The PCMCIA card must only be handled when the power is off. When removing or inserting it, the unit may not operate. There are no warm restart procedures between the
PCMCIA card and the TSX SCY 21601 host device.
If the operating environment makes it impossible to stop the application by switching the
PLC processor off, it is advisable to remove both the TSX SCY 21601 module and the
PCMCIA card.
The PCMCIA card must be fitted with its appropriate cover and must be screwed into the
TSX SCY 21601 host module, before the unit is powered up (see section 3.2).
3.3-2 Connecting PCMCIA cards
The connection of PCMCIA cards on a UNI-TELWAY or Modbus/Jbus fieldbus or in
Character mode to a standard device is described in sections 3.4, 3.5 and 3.6 of this document.
List of connection equipment required to use a specific protocol from a PCMCIA card :
PCMCIA cards
TSX SCP 111 (RS232)
UNI-TELWAY
(1)
JBUS/MODBUS
(1)
Character mode
TXS SCP CD 1030/1130
TSX SCP 112 (CL) TSX SCP CX 2030 TSX SCP CX 2030 TSX SCP CX 2030
TSX SCP 114 (RS422/RS485) TSX SCP CU 4030 TSX SCP CM 4030 TSX SCP CU 4030 and TSX SCA 50 and TSX SCA 50 TSX SCP CM 4030
(1) : with point-to-point : TSX SCP CD 1030/1130 cables, with multidrop via a modem : TSX SCP
CC 1030 cable.
Connection of the TSX FPP 20 FIPWAY card via the host channel is performed using the
TSX FPCG 10 or TSX FPCG 30 cable.
Connection of the TSX MBP 100 Modbus+ card via the host channel is performed using the TSX MBP CE 030 (3m) or TSX MBP CE 060 (6m) cable.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/4
Installation of PCMCIA cards 3
3.3-3 PCMCIA card references and installation
References
PCMCIA card references are as follows :
• TSX SCP 111
• TSX SCP 112
: multiprotocol card, RS 232 D, 9 signals, not isolated,
: multiprotocol card, 20 mA current loop,
• TSX SCP 114
• TSX FPP 20
• TSX FPP 10
• TSX MBP 100
: multiprotocol card, RS 485, compatible with RS 422, isolated,
: FIPWAY card
: FIPIO Agent card
: Modbus+ card
Installation
References Installation
PCMCIA cards
TSX SCP 111
TSX SCP 112
TSX SCP 114
TSX FPP 10
TSX FPP 20
TSX MBP 100
Processor host channel
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
TSX SCM 21601 host channel
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
D
Number of application-specific channels and network connections
PCMCIA cards
TSX SCP 111
TSX SCP 112
TSX SCP 114
TSX FPP 10
TSX FPP 20
TSX MBP 100
Number of app.-spec. channels
Card integrated in the processor
Card integrated in
TSX SCY 21601 module
Number of network connections
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
Number of application-specific channels and network connections managed by each type of processor
Processors
TSX P57 102/TPMX P57 102/TPCX 571012
App-specific chans
8
TSX P57 2 i 2/TPMX P57 202 24
TSX P57 3 i 2/TPMX P57 352/TPCX 57 3512 32
4
8
Network connections
2
3/5
D
3.3-4 Mounting cards and cables
PCMCIA cards consist of the following components :
1 Ready-assembled card.
2 Body, made of Zamak.
3 PCMCIA connector.
4 Upper cover.
5 Removable cover.
6 Connection cable with ferrule.
The removable cover (5) displays the operating status of the card in its environment. The function of the two indicator lamps is printed on the front of the removable cover.
The product reference label indicates the type of PCMCIA card. It is located on the upper cover (4).
The metal ferrule (6), located at the PCMCIA card end of the cable, prevents the cable being trapped by the removable cover. The ferrule eliminates the risk of the cable being subjected to a bending radius, which could have a detrimental effect on the quality of the connection.
PCMCIA cards are fitted by assembling the connection accessory (a cable which varies according to the type of transmission support chosen), and then screwing the appropriate removable cover onto the unit. This cover can be used to fix the PCMCIA card onto the processor or the TSX SCY 21601 module.
A 20-pin connector is used on the PCMCIA card end.
To fit the transmission support to the card, first unscrew the cover from the unit, then assemble as described below :
Host processor or
TSX SCY 21600 / 21601
1 Connect the cable.
2 Place the appropriate cover on the unit, taking care to insert the ferrule in the recess designed for this purpose so that the cable is held firmly in place on the card.
3 Screw on the cover.
4 Next, insert the card in the appropriate slot in the host device.
5 Screw the card into position to prevent it being removed while powered up and to ensure correct operation.
1
2
5
4
3
___________________________________________________________________________
3/6
3
4
1
2
5
6
Installation of PCMCIA cards 3
3.3-5 Displaying the operating status of PCMCIA cards
There are two diagnostic indicator lamps on the front of the card. They provide the user with information on the operating status of exchanges between the device supporting the
PCMCIA card and the connected device.
"ERR" error indicator lamp (1) (normally off) displays faults.
The "ERR" indicator lamp is red.
"COM" communication indicator lamp (2) displays line activity.
The "COM" indicator lamp is :
• yellow on TSX SCP 11 i , TSX FPP 10 and
TSX FPP 20 cards.
• green on the TSX MBP 100 card
1
2
D
3.3-6 PCMCIA card visual diagnostics
The PCMCIA card indicator lamps show the communication operating mode and provide card diagnostics.
• TSX SCP 11 i , TSX FPP 10/FPP 20 cards
Indicator lamp state
ERR COM Meaning
Device not powered up
No dialog
Corrective action
Check power supply and connection
Card not operating
(1)
Normal operation
Serious fault
Operational fault
Operational fault
–
Change card
Check configuration and connection to communication bus
Check configuration
Indicator on Indicator off
(1) : state of the indicator lamp not significant.
Indicator flashing.
When the "ERR" indicator lamp on the TSX FPP 20 card flashes, this indicates that an external fault has occurred. External faults include :
• line fault,
• station already present on the network,
• incorrect coding of the network-station address (coding using the rotary switches).
___________________________________________________________________________
3/7
D
• TSX MBP 100 card
Indicator lamp state
ERR COM Meaning
Device not powered up
No dialog
(1)
(2)
Corrective action
Check power supply and connection
Card not operating
Normal operation –
Serious fault Change card
Operational fault : card not configured,
Configure the card from :
PL7 Micro (TSX Micro PLCs) communication on the network PL7 Junior or PL7 Pro (Premium PLCs) cannot start
(1) Operational fault Check configuration and connection to the Modbus + network. The way the COM indicator is flashing indicates the nature of the problem (see description below).
Indicator on Indicator off Indicator flashing.
(1) The way the COM indicator is flashing indicates the operating status of the network (normal operation, faults, etc). The various patterns of flashing and their meaning are shown below.
(2) state of the indicator lamp not significant.
Meaning of COM indicator patterns of flashing
COM indicator state
6 flashes / second
1 flash / second
2 flashes, then off for 2 seconds
3 flashes, then off for 1.7 seconds
4 flashes, then off for 1.4 seconds
Meaning
Normal operating status for the node. It is receiving and passing the network token. All nodes on a healthy network flash this pattern.
The node is offline just after power-up or after exiting the 4 flashes / second mode. In this state, the node monitors the network and builds a table of active nodes. After being in this state for 5 seconds, the node attempts to go to its normal operating status, indicated by 6 flashes / second.
The node hears the token being passed among the other nodes but it never receives the token itself. Check the network for an open circuit or defective termination.
The node does not hear the token being passed among the other nodes. It periodically claims the token but cannot find another node to which to pass it. Check the network for an open circuit or defective termination.
The node has heard a valid message from a node using a network address identical to its own address. The node remains in this state for as long as it continues to hear the duplicate address. If the duplicate address is not heard for 5 seconds, the node changes mode and flashes once per second.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/8
Installation of PCMCIA cards 3
3.4
Connection of the TSX SCP 111 card
3.4-1 Point-to-point connection in character mode (DTE <==> DTE)
The TSX SCP 111 card, with RS 232 D as the physical support, is inserted either in the processor or in the TSX SCY 21601 module. It is connected via the TSX SCP CD 1030/
1100 cable to the connected device.
DTE to DTE type devices such as terminals or printers can be connected (DTE means :
Data Terminal Equipment).
The cable required for this connection is reference TSX SCP CD 1030/1100.
D
Type of connection
The TSX SCP 111 PCMCIA card is connected directly to the device via the
TSX SCP CD 1030 cable.
The two connected devices are DTE.
TSX SCP
1 1 1
J1 TSX SCP CD 1030 (3 m. long) or TSX SCP CD 1100 (10 m. long)
Description of the TSX SCP CD 1030 cable
The 20-pin miniature PCMCIA connector supports the following signals :
TXD
RXD
RTS
CTS
8
7
Blue/white rings
White/blue rings
White/orange rings
10
9
Orange/white rings
DCD
SG
18
15
Green/white ring s
White/green rings
J1
J2
Printer
25 M SUB-D
connector
4
20
3
2
5
RXD
TXD
CTS
RTS
DTR
J2
7
SG
1
PG
___________________________________________________________________________
3/9
D
3.4-2 UNI-TELWAY, Modbus or Character mode connection via Modem
Connection of the PCMCIA card to the UNI-TELWAY, Modbus or Character mode bus via a Modem and a telephone link (DTE/DCE type), can be achieved using the
TSX SCP CC 1030 cable. The card is inserted either into the processor or into the SCY
21601 module (DCE means : data communications equipment).
Type of connection
The TSX SCP 111 PCMCIA card is linked to the connected device via the
TSX SCP CC 1030 cable.
The connected devices are DCE type; for example a MODEM or converters.
J1
TSX SCP
1 1 1
TSX SCP CC 1030 (3 m. long)
Description of the TSX SCP CC 1030 cable
The 20-pin miniature PCMCIA connector supports the following signals :
J1
TXD
RXD
RTS
CTS
DTR
DSR
DCD
RI
CH/CI
SG
8
7
10
9
14
13
18
17
19
15
White/blue rings
Blue/white rings
White/orange rings
Orange/white rings
White/green rings
Green/white rings
White/brown rings
Brown/white rings
White/grey rings
Grey/white rings
J2
Modem
25 M SUB-D connector
2
5
20
3
4
6
8
22
23
7
TXD
RXD
RTS
CTS
DTR
DSR
DCD
RI
CH/CI
SG
J2
1
PG
___________________________________________________________________________
3/10
Installation of PCMCIA cards 3
3.5
Connection of the TSX SCP 112 card
The TSX SCP 112 PCMCIA card is used to connect a TSX/PMX/PCX 57 PLC station to a 20mA current loop link in point-to-point (pp) or multidrop (md) connection.
In all cases a 24V ± 20% supply, external to the TSX SCP 112 card should be used to provide the necessary current to power the current loop.
D
The TSX SCP CX 2030 cable is used to perform this type of connection (3m long).
Description of the TSX SCP CX 2030 cable
The 20-pin miniature PCMCIA connector supports the following signals :
9
J1
+ Supp
13
19
TX mp
+ RX
17
- RX
TX pp
2
20
- Supp
Notes
To connect the TSX SCP 112 card, a screw terminal block must be used.
White / Blue
Orange / White
White / Green
Green / White
White / Orange
Blue / White
___________________________________________________________________________
3/11
D
3.5-1 Point-to-point connection
Wiring principle for TSX SCP112 current loop PCMCIA cards in point-to-point. Point-topoint connection is only possible in 20mA inactive mode.
Station 1
SCP112
9
2
20
19
17
Station 2
SCP112
9
2
20
19
17
+
24 V
–
Terminal block 1 Terminal block 2
Important : the cable shielding must be connected as closely as possible to the terminal blocks.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/12
Installation of PCMCIA cards 3
3.5-2 Multidrop connection
Multidrop connection is only possible in 0mA inactive mode. Transmissions and receptions are wired in parallel. The master is defined by the program.
Example of connection of n TSX SCP 112 cards :
Station 1
SCP112
Station 2
SCP112
Station n
SCP112
D
19
17
9
13
20
19
17
9
13
20
19
17
9
13
20
+
24 V
–
Rc
Terminal block 1 Terminal block 2
RC = optional load resistor
Terminal block n
Important : the cable shielding must be connected as closely as possible to the terminal blocks.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/13
D
3.5-3 Dynamic performance
The flow rate of a current loop link is limited by the cross-section and length of the cable used.
The user should refer to the two diagrams below to get an idea of the performance that can be achieved for his application.
Point-to-point
These curves are for a shielded two-pair cable (transmission in one pair, reception in the other). All precautions for use are adhered to.
speed in Kbps
20
15
10
5
1 mm 2 cable, 4500m max
0.64 mm 2 cable, 2500m max
0.34 mm 2 cable, 1300m max
0
200 500 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000
Multidrop
The graph below is for a shielded cable where the conductor cross-section is 0.34 mm 2 , connected in accordance with the parallel multidrop diagram above. The use of conductors with a larger cross-section will improve the quality of the transmitted signals.
16
Number of connected stations
19200 bps
9600 bps
4800 bps
2400 bps
6
1200 bps
600 bps
2
100 500 1000 1500
___________________________________________________________________________
3/14
Installation of PCMCIA cards 3
The performance of a multidrop link is much improved when a large number of stations is connected. The load on the line is greater, which improves the quality of the transmitted signal.
When connection is performed according to the preceding diagram, the number of stations can be artificially increased (up to a maximum of 16 stations) by loading the line at one end.
This can be performed by incorporating a load resistor. This load resistor can be connected on any terminal block as long as it is between pins 17 and 19 of the SCP112 cards.
The value of resistor R, which simulates the load of "N" stations is determined by the formula :
U
R = ------------
N x 20
R in K
Ω
U = external power supply voltage
N = Number of stations to be simulated
Example :
An installation has 6 physically connected stations in multidrop in accordance with the preceding diagram, with a 24V external power supply.
The line performance will be the same as for 10 stations, with the load of 4 additional stations simulated by a resistor :
24
R = ------------ = 0.3K
Ω
4 x 20
Note : The load resistor should not produce any inductive effect, otherwise operation may be affected.
Use thick film type resistors.
D
___________________________________________________________________________
3/15
D
3.5-4 TSX SCP 112 connection to April 5000/7000 PLCs
The 20 mA current loop TSX SCP 112 PCMCIA card is used to connect April communication modules, type JBU0220 and JBU0250. Multidrop connection of the
TSX SCP 112 PCMCIA card to JBU0220 and JBU0250 modules is performed in serial
mode. For connection of April modules refer to the TEM60000E reference manual.
Important : The TSX SCP 112 must be configured in point-to-point mode in the PL7 configuration screen, regardless of whether a point-to-point or a serial multidrop link is used.
Notes :
The current loop permits a current of 20 mA when the PLC is inactive in both point-to-point and multidrop mode.
If a slave is powered down, the transmitter of this slave becomes conducting, the line is available.
If the loop power supply is located remotely, on one of the slaves, the powering down of this slave interrupts communication.
Point-to-point type link : JBU0220 or JBU0250 module active
TSX SCP 112
9
+SUPP White / Blue +
24 V
JBU0220/0250
19 RX+ White / Green 19
17
RX Green / White 18
17
2
TX PP White / Orange
20 - SUPP
Blue / White
15
14
10
16
Master or slave passive Master or slave active
___________________________________________________________________________
3/16
Installation of PCMCIA cards 3
Point-to-point type link : TSX SCP 112 card active
TSX SCP 112
9
19
17
+SUPP
RX+
RX-
White / Blue
+
White / Green
24 V
Green / White
2
TX PP
White / Orange
JBU0220/0250
19
18
17
15
14
10
16
Master or slave passive
D
20 -SUPP
Blue / White
Master or slave active
Mixed stations link
TSX SCP 112
9
+SUPP
19
17
RX+
RX-
2
TX PP
White / Blue
White / Green
Green / White
+
24 V
White / Orange
JBU0220/0250
19
18
17
15
14
10
16
20
-SUPP
Blue / White
Master or slave : passive on reception active in transmission
Master or slave : passive on reception active in transmission
___________________________________________________________________________
3/17
D
Multidrop type link
The following examples describe the various wiring possibilities for the TSX SCP 112 card with JBU0220/0250 modules.
Important : always connect the 24 V supply of each TSX SCP 112 in the loop, whether active or passive, otherwise the link may not operate.
These supplies must not have any common point (voltage).
Do not connect the -24 V of the supplies to ground.
Example 1 : Multidrop TSX SCP 112 master active
TSX SCP 112
9
+SUPP
19 RX+
17 RX-
2
TX PP
20 -SUPP
Master active
White / Blue
White / Green
+
24 V
Green / White
White / Orange
Blue / White
JBU0220/0250
14
10
16
19
18
17
15
15
14
10
16
Slave 1 passive
19
18
17
Slave 2 passive
___________________________________________________________________________
3/18
Installation of PCMCIA cards 3
Example 2 : Multidrop master JBU0220/0250 active on transmission / reception
JBU0220/0250 JBU0220/0250
19 19
18
17
15
14
10
16
18
17
15
14
10
16
Master active on transmission/ reception
24 V
+
White / Blue
White / Green
Slave 1 passive
+SUPP
9
RX+ 19
Green / White RX-
17
D
White / Orange
TX PP
2
Blue / White
-SUPP
20
TSX SCP 112
Slave 2 passive
___________________________________________________________________________
3/19
D
Example 3 : Multidrop master JBU0220/0250 active on transmission/reception -
TSX SCP 112 slaves.
TSX SCP 112
JBU0220/0250
19
18
–
24 V
+
White / Blue
+SUPP
White / Green RX+
Green / White
9
19
RX-
17
17
15
White / Orange TX PP
2
14
10
16 Blue / White -SUPP
20
Master active on transmission/ reception
–
24 V
+
White / Blue
Slave 1 passive
+SUPP
9
White / Green
Green / White
RX+
19
RX-
17
White / Orange TX PP
2
Blue / White -SUPP
20
TSX SCP 112
Slave 2 passive
___________________________________________________________________________
3/20
Installation of PCMCIA cards 3
Example 4 : Multidrop master active TSX SCP 112.
TSX SCP 112
9
+SUPP
19 RX+
White / Blue +
White / Green
24 V
TSX SCP 112
+ White / Blue +SUPP
24 V
White / Green RX+
9
19
17
RXGreen / White Green / White RX-
17
D
2
TX PP
White / Orange
20 -SUPP Blue / White
Master active on transmission/ reception
White / Orange TX PP
2
Blue / White -SUPP 20
Slave 1 passive
14
10
16
19
18
17
15
JBU0220/0250
Slave 2 passive
___________________________________________________________________________
3/21
D
3.6
Connection of the TSX SCP 114 card
3.6-1 Connection to the UNI-TELWAY network
The TSX SCP 114 card, with RS 485 as the physical support, is connected to the
UNI-TELWAY network using cable TSX SCP CU 4030 via the TSX SCA 50 T-junction box, or using cable TSX SCP CU 4530 (fitted with a 15-pin SUB-D connector) via the
TSX SCA62 Y-junction box.
The card is inserted into the processor or into the SCY 21601 module.
The TSX SCA50 is passive, comprising a printed circuit with 3 sets of screw terminals.
It is used for connecting a station, via tap link, to the trunk cable segment of a
UNI-TELWAY bus.
Electrical continuity of the signals, shielding and end of line termination are thus provided.
Type of connection
The cable of the PCMCIA card has flying leads for connection to the terminal block located inside the T-junction box.
TSX SCP 114
TSX SCA 50
J1
TSX SCP CU 4030
TSX SCA 50
Note
Using the T-junction box configures the wiring system for the card as a tap-link type connection system.
Description of the TSX SCP CU 4030 cable
The 20-pin miniature PCMCIA connector supports the following signals :
TSX SCA 50 T-junction box
5 V
4.7 k Ω
0 V
0 V
4.7 k Ω
8
10
12
11
9
17
16
6
1
2
7
19
J1
0 V
0 V
D (A)
D (B)
Red
White
White
Blue
5
___________________________________________________________________________
3/22
1
3
2
4
Installation of PCMCIA cards 3
Connection via a TSX SCA 62 Y-junction box
TSX SCP 114
TSX SCA 62
D
J1 TSX SCP CU 4530
Description of the TSX SCP CU 4530 cable
The 20-pin miniature PCMCIA connector supports the following signals :
5 V
4.7 k
Ω
0 V
0 V
4.7 k
Ω
19
1
2
11
9
7
6
8
17
16
10
12
J1
0 V
0 V
D (A)
D (B)
TSX SCA 62 Y-junction box
Red
White
White
Blue
15
8
0 VL
0 VL
7
14
D (A)
D (B)
15-pin SUB-D
___________________________________________________________________________
3/23
D
3.6-2 Connection to the Modbus/Jbus bus
The TSX SCP 114 PCMCIA card is connected to the Modbus bus via the
TSX SCP CM 4030 serial link cable. This cable is connected to the TSX SCA 50
T-junction box.
Type of connection
The cable of the PCMCIA card has flying leads for connection to the terminal block located inside the junction box.
TSX SCP 114
J1 TSX SCP CM 4030
TSX SCA 50
Comment :
The user cable (3 m) allows a device to be connected to a TSX SCA 50 T-junction box located at up to 3 meters from the card. This length ensures that connection is possible within a standard enclosure.
Description of the TSX SCP CM 4030 cable
The 20-pin miniature PCMCIA connector supports the following signals :
J1
10
12
11
TX -
TX +
9
5 V
0 V
20
18
1
2
13
Green / White
White / Green
Orange / White
White / Orange
Brown / White
Important : on a Modbus / Jbus bus it is necessary to :
• Polarize the line, usually in one place only, (generally on the master device) using pull-down and pull-up resistors of 470
Ω
available on the PCMCIA card. Connect pulldown R to TX- (D(A)) and pull-up R to TX+ (D(B)).
• Match the line on the two end devices by a 150
Ω
resistor between TX+ and TX-
(connection on TX- is already internally performed by the card).
Important : to connect a TSX SCP114 card to a Series 1000 (S1000) PLC, it is essential to connect TX+ to L-.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/24
Installation of PCMCIA cards 3
Modbus connection to TSX SCA 50 box
Connection without line terminator
5 V
0 V
J1
470
470
150
TX -
TX -
TX +
TX +
Pup 470r
Pdw 470r
RX -
RX +
ADP 150r
9
20
18
10
12
11
1
2
13
Green / White
White / Green nc nc nc
TSX SCA50
1
4
5
D (A)
D (B)
D
Connection of SCA 50 with line terminator
5 V
0 V
J1
470
470
150
TX -
TX -
TX +
TX +
Pup 470r
Pdw 470r
RX -
RX +
ADP 150r
18
1
2
13
10
12
11
9
20
Green / White
White / Green
Orange / White
White / Orange
Brown / White
TSX SCA 50
1
4
5
D (A)
D (B)
___________________________________________________________________________
3/25
D
3.6-3 Multi-protocol asynchronous link connection, RS 422
No special accessories are required for connecting the TSX SCP 114 card in Character mode.
The reference of the connection cable for the RS 485/RS 422 PCMCIA card is
TSX SCP CX 4030. The cable is 3 meters long.
Type of connection
The TSX SCP 114 PCMCIA card is connected in point-to-point mode to a standard
RS 422A VAX station type device.
Industrial calculator
TSX SCP 114
J1 TSX SCP CX 4030
Description of the TSX SCP CX 4030 cable
The 20-pin miniature PCMCIA connector supports the following signals :
J1
470
Ω
18
GND
10
TX -
TX +
12
11
9
VCC
470 Ω
20
RX -
1
RX +
ADP 150r
2
ADP Rx
5
3
16
0 V iso
4
Green / White
White / Green
White / Orange
Orange / White
Brown / White
Also see section 3.4-1 : for connection of the TSX SCY 21601 integrated link in character mode.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/26
Installation of PCMCIA cards 3
3.7
Connection of TSX FPP 20 cards
TSX FPP 20 PCMCIA cards are connected to the FIPWAY network using a TSX FP ACC4 or a TSX FP ACC12 type connector.
To connect the PCMCIA card to the ACC4/ACC12 connector, the user may select either :
• a 1 m cable, reference TSX FPCG 010,
• a 3 m cable, reference TSX FPCG 030.
The figure below shows the components needed to connect the TSX/PMX/PCX 57 PLC to the FIPWAY network :
• TSX P57 i /TPMX P57 i /TPCX 57 i processors or SCY 21601 module,
• TSX FPP 20 PCMCIA card,
• TSX FPCG 10/30 cable,
• TSX FP ACC4 junction box.
D
FIPWAY
••
••••••••••••••••••
••
Host processor or
TSX SCY 21600 /
21601
TSX FPCG 10/30
Important
The cables (TSX FPCG 10 and 30) may be connected to and disconnected from the
PCMCIA card only when it is powered down.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/27
D
3.8
Connection of TSX FPP 10 cards
TSX FPP 10 PCMCIA cards are connected to the FIPIO bus using a TSX FP ACC4 or
TSX FP ACC12 type connector.
To connect the PCMCIA card to the ACC4/ACC12 connector, the user may select either :
• a 1 m cable, reference TSX FPCG 010,
• a 3 m cable, reference TSX FPCG 030.
The figure below shows the components needed to connect the TSX/PMX/PCX 57 PLC to the FIPIO remote I/O bus :
• TSX P57 i /TPMX P57 i /TPCX 57 i processor, .
• TSX FPP 10 PCMCIA card,
• TSX FPCG 10/30 cable,
• TSX FP ACC4 junction box.
FIPIO
Processor slot ••
•••••••••••••••••• ••
TSX FP ACC4
TSX FPCG 10/30
Important
The cables (TSX FPCG 10 and 30) may be connected to and disconnected from the
PCMCIA card only when it is powered down.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/28
Installation of PCMCIA cards 3
3.9
Connection of TSX MBP 100 cards
The TSX MBP 100 PCMCIA card is connected to the Modbus + network using the
TSX MBP CE 030 (3m) or TSX MBP CE 060 (6m) tap link cable. This cable is connected to the Modicon 990NAD23000 local site tap. For installation of a Modbus Plus network, see the Modicon "Modbus Plus Network - Installation and Planning Manual", reference
890 USE 100 01.
• Connection principle, PCMCIA card end
D
Modicon 990 NAD 230 00
Local site Tap
TSX MBP 100
PCMCIA card
J1 TSX MBP CE 030 / 060 cable
Description of TSX MBP CE 030 / 060 cable
18
14
20
J1
GND
White
Blue
GND
Loop clamp
GND
White
Orange
External shielding wire
Shielding braid
PG
Important :
The main cable shielding is grounded via a metal loop clamp in contact with the shielding braid, which itself is fixed to the chassis supporting the rack. See mounting principle on the next page.
This grounding connection must be made even if the PCMCIA card is not in place.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/29
D
Grounding the TSX MBP CE 030 / 060 cable
The cable for connecting the PCMCIA card to the Modicon local site tap must be grounded as described below.
Procedure :
1 Place the loop clamp around the cable. The loop clamp is supplied with the Modicon local site tap, reference 990 NAD 230 00.
2 Fix the clamp + cable to the chassis, which is also connected to ground.
TSX MBP 100
13 mm
350 mm max
TSX
MBP CE 030
MBP CE 060 cable
Loop clamp
___________________________________________________________________________
3/30
Installation of PCMCIA cards 3
• Connecting the TSX MBP CE 030/060 cable, Modicon 990 NAD 230 00 tap end
The TSX MBP CE 030/060 cable comprises two distinct sets of shielded twisted pairs and one external shielding ground wire, making a total of seven conductors.
Procedure :
1 Identify the sets of wires and preparing the cable
Identifying the wires :
- one set of wires is identified by the colors white and orange, with a stripped shielded wire,
- the other set of wires is identified by the colors white and blue, with a stripped shielded wire,
- an external shielding wire.
Before connecting the wires to the appropriate terminals, ensure that the two sets of twisted pairs are correctly identified, since the two white wires are not interchangeable.
Preparing the cable :
Blue/white wires
GND
Orange/white wires
D
25mm
75mm
2 Connecting the wires to the Modicon tap
- insert the cable into the tap and hold it in place with a clamp,
- connect the wires following the directions in the diagrams below.
The terminals are identified as follows :
Terminal Color of wire
O
W
GND
W
BLU
Orange
White
Shielding for both sets
White
Blue
Modicon 990 NAD 230 00 local site tap
O
W
GND
W
BLU
External shielding, ground wire
Cable loop clamp
TSX MBP CE 030/060 cable
___________________________________________________________________________
3/31
D
3 Principle for connecting the wires to the tap terminals
- to connect each wire, remove the plastic cap from the terminal (figure A),
- place the wire in the slot in the terminal (figure B),
- replace the cap and push the wire into the slot using a screwdriver (figure C).
A special tool has been designed for this purpose (reference AMP 552714-3).
The diagrams below illustrate the connection procedure.
4 Connecting the external shielding wire
Fix an open tag on the external shielding wire either by soldering or crimping and connect this to the ground screw of the tap as shown in the diagram above.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/32
Installation of PCMCIA cards 3
3.10 Summary of connection cables
3.10-1 TSX SCP 111 card
Type of cable
Modem cable
Reference
TSX SCP CC 1030
Standard cable TSX SCP CD 1030
TSX SCP CD 1100
Description
Cable for connection via Modem
DTE/DCE, 9 signals, RS 232D, l = 3 m
Cable for DTE/DTE connection
RS 232D, l = 3 m or 10 m
D
3.10-2 TSX SCP 112 card
Type of cable
Current loop cable
Reference
TSX SCP CX 2030
Description
20 mA CL cable, l = 3m.
3.10-3 TSX SCP 114 card
Type of cable
Universal cable
Reference
TSX SCP CX 4030
UNI-TELWAY cable
Modbus cable
T-junction box
Y-junction box
Converter box
TSX SCP CU 4030
TSX SCP CM 4030
TSX SCA 50
TSX SCA 62
TSX SCA72
Description
Universal cable, RS 485 and
RS 422A type, l = 3 m
RS 485 2-wire cable, l = 3 m
RS 485 2-wire cable, l = 3 m
Box for screw connection to bus for RS 485 serial link
Box for connection via connector to bus for RS 485 serial link
RS 232D / RS 485 converter box
___________________________________________________________________________
3/33
3.10-4 TSX FPP 10 and TSX FPP 20 cards
Type of cable
FIPWAY/FIPIO cable
FIPWAY/FIPIO cable
D
Junction box
Junction box
Reference
TSX FPCG 010
TSX FPPCG 030
TSX FP ACC4
TSX FP ACC12
Description
Connection cable, l = 1 m
Connection cable, l = 3 m
FIPWAY/FIPIO junction box
Low-cost FIPWAY/FIPIO junction box
3.10-5 TSX MBP 100 card
Type of cable
Modbus+ cable
Modbus+ cable
Reference
TSX MBP CE 030
TSX MBP CE 060
Description
Connection cable, l = 3 m
Connection cable, l = 6 m
3.11
Precautions for connecting PCMCIA cards
Important :
PCMCIA cards must be connected to and disconnected from the host device
(processor or TSX SCY 21601) with the device powered down.
The ferrule placed in direct contact with the PCMCIA card unit serves to discharge electrical interference carried by the connection cable braid.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/34
Installation of PCMCIA cards 3
3.12 Current consumption of PCMCIA cards
3.12-1 Current consumption of TSX SCP 111 card
Voltage
5 volts
Typical current
140 mA
Maximum current
300 mA
Dissipated power
1.5 W max.
D
3.12-2 Current consumption of TSX SCP 112 card
Voltage
5 volts
Typical current
120 mA
Maximum current
300 mA
Dissipated power
1.5 W max.
3.12-3 Current consumption of TSX SCP 114 card
Voltage
5 volts
Typical current
150 mA
Maximum current
300 mA
Dissipated power
1.5 W max.
3.12-4 Current consumption of TSX FPP 10 and TSX FPP20 cards
Voltage
5 volts
Typical current
280 mA
Maximum current
330 mA
Dissipated power
1.65 W max.
3.12-5 Current consumption of TSX MBP 100 card
Voltage
5 volts
Typical current
220 mA
Maximum current
310 mA
Dissipated power
1.55 W max.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/35
D
___________________________________________________________________________
3/36
Communication
TSX ETY 110 module
Section
1 Installation of the TSX ETY 110 module
Characteristics of the Ethernet channel
Installing the TSX ETY 110 module
1.4-1 Selecting the type of processor
1.4-2 Insertion / removal while powered up
1.4-3 Coding the station address
Connection via the AUI interface
Contents
Part E
Page
E
___________________________________________________________________________
E/1
Communication
TSX ETY 110 module
E
Section
Contents
Part E
Page
___________________________________________________________________________
E/2
1 Installation of the TSX ETY 110 module
1.1
Presentation
The TSX ETY 110 communication module is used for communication in an Ethernet architecture. It consists of a communication channel which provides two types of connection :
• connection to an ETHWAY network supporting the common words service and X-WAY
UNITE message handling service on an ETHWAY profile,
• connection to a TCP_IP network supporting the X-WAY UNITE message handling service.
• this module is also used for transparent routing of X-WAY UNI-TE messages from a TCP-IP network to an X-WAY network and vice versa.
Please refer to the Ethernet reference manual, TSX DR ETH, for the wiring of an
ETHWAY architecture.
E
1.2
Description
The TSX ETY 110 is a single format module for insertion in a slot on a Premium PLC station rack.
This module comprises the following components :
1 a display block indicating the status of the module,
2 a standard connector for 10baseT
(RJ45) interface,
3 a standard connector for 10base5
(AUI) interface,
4 thumbwheels for defining the station number and the network number.
1
2
3
4
___________________________________________________________________________
1/1
E
1.3
Characteristics of the Ethernet channel
The module has two standard interfaces for connection to a network.
• a 10baseT interface on the front panel of the module consisting of an RJ45 connector for point-to-point connection via a connection cable made up of two twisted pairs with an impedance of 100
Ω, ±
15
Ω
.
• a 10base5, or AUI, interface on the front panel of the module consisting of a 15-pin
Sub-D connector for connection to the network by tap-offs. This interface is also used for supplying power to active taps. It complies with standard IEC 802.3, and can be used to connect any device which complies with this standard.
The type of connection is recognized automatically as soon as the device is connected to the network.
Services and functions supported by the module
TCP-IP services UNI-TE
- client / server mode
- 256 byte synchronous requests
- 1 Kbyte asynchronous requests
UNI-TE
- client / server mode
- 256 byte synchronous requests
- 1 Kbyte asynchronous requests
- 256 word shared database Ethway services common words application to - point-to-point exchange of messages of up to 256 bytes application
Common services
- routing between X-WAY networks
- X-WAY / UNI-TE routing
- module diagnostics
Note : The Ethernet driver supports the Ethernet II and (LLC + SNAP) 802.3 formats on
TCP-IP, and LLC 802.3 on Ethway.
___________________________________________________________________________
1/2
Installation of the TSX ETY 110 module 1
1.4
Installing the TSX ETY 110 module
The TSX ETY 110 communication module is inserted in a slot on a TSX/PMX/PCX 57
PLC station rack. It can be located in any available slot as long as the rack power supply requirements are observed (see section 1.8, electrical characteristics).
1.4-1 Selecting the type of processor
The choice of the processor which controls the PLC station will depend on the number of network connections required.
E
Processor
TSX P57 1 ii /2 ii
TPMX P57 1 ii /2 ii
TPCX 57 1012
TSX P57 3 ii
TPMX P57 352
TPCX 57 3512
TSX P57 4 ii
TPMX P57 452
No. of network connections
1
3
4
No. of ETY 110 modules/station (*)
1
3
4
(*) as long as the power consumption on the 5V is compatible with the selected power supply.
1.4-2 Insertion / removal while powered up
Module :
The TSX ETY 110 module can be inserted or removed while it is powered up without disturbing the operation of the station. As it has no function for backing up the internal RAM memory, the memory will be cleared when the module is switched off. The module performs an initialization phase when it is powered up. Be prepared for loss of communication during these operations.
Link :
The 15-pin Sub-D connectors of the AUI interface and the RJ45 connector of the 10baseT interface can be connected or disconnected while powered up. Be prepared for loss of communication in the current application.
___________________________________________________________________________
1/3
E
1.4-3 Coding the station address
Four thumbwheels which can be accessed via the front panel are used to code the network number and the station number.
The coding is hexadecimal :
• the network number can take values from 0 to 7F,
• the station number can take values from 0 to 3F.
Hi
Lo
Hi
Lo network no.
station no.
Lo = low order Hi = high order
The address can be coded while the module is powered up.
Modules are supplied with network number and station number = 0
Example of coding : network 3 : 16#03 station 27 : 16#1B thumbwheels :
0
3
1
B
Hi
Lo
Hi
Lo
Warning : In an Ethernet network, the MAC address must be unique for each station.
Before changing these addresses, check that they comply with the company addressing system.
___________________________________________________________________________
1/4
Installation of the TSX ETY 110 module 1
1.5
Connection via the AUI interface
This interface can be used to connect any type of device which complies with the physical layer defined in ISO standard 802.3 (10base5, 10base2, FOIRL, etc) via a transceiver.
The TSX ETY 110 module can provide a remote power supply for the transceiver via the
Sub-D connector : Imax = 0.5A, 12V -6% < Usupply < 15V +5%.
Reminder of the pinout of the 15-pin Sub-D connector in accordance with standard ISO
802.3
4
5
6
7
8
Pin no.
1
2
3
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Sub-D body
CI-B
DO-B
DO-S
DI-B
VP
VS not used
PG
Name according to ISO 802.3
CI-S
CI-A
DO-A
(Control in shield)
(control in A)
(Data Out A)
DI-S
DI-A
VC not used not used
(Data in shield)
(Data in A)
(Voltage Common)
(control in B)
(Data Out B)
(Data Out shield)
(Data in B)
Voltage Plus
Voltage Shield
Protective Ground
COLL-
TD-
GND
RD-
12V
GND
Use
GND
COLL+
TD+
GND
RD+
GND
Machine ground
The module will be connected to the trunk cable via a transceiver and tap-off cables :
TSX ETY CB 005 length 5m
TSX ETY CB 010 length 10m
TSX ETY CB 020 length 20m
The maximum length of a tap-off is 50 m. This can be achieved by connecting several tapoff cables end to end.
Transceivers (TSX ETH ACC2) must be used to connect two modules together in point-to-point mode.
E
___________________________________________________________________________
1/5
Topology :
Transmitter / receiver TSX ACC2
E
TSX ETY CBXXX
Station i Station j
Locking :
The Sub-D connector on the front panel of the module has a slide locking system. The connector is locked by sliding the mechanism downwards. To ensure correct operation of the module in noisy environments, the connector must be locked.
Locking mechanism
AUI interface 15 pin Sub-D connector
___________________________________________________________________________
1/6
Installation of the TSX ETY 110 module 1
1.6
10baseT interface
This interface has a standard RJ45 connector. The connection cables are widely available commercially.
In industrial environments, it is essential to use a double twisted pair shielded cable, with an impedance of 100
Ω
± 15
Ω.
(1 to 16 MHz), maximum attenuation of 11.5 dB / 100 meters, and a maximum length of 100 meters.
Reminder of the pinout of the 10BaseT (RJ45) connector :
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Pin :
1
2
5
6
3
4
7
8 signal :
TD +
TD –
RD+ not connected not connected
RD – not connected not connected
The 10baseT connection is a point-to-point connection forming a star network. The stations are connected to hubs or switches.
Topology :
This link is used to create a star network with point-to-point connections. The stations are connected to a hub. The hubs can also be cascaded to increase the size of the network.
E station 1 hub 1 stations station 2 stations hub 2
___________________________________________________________________________
1/7
1.7
Display block, diagnostics
The display block conforms to the Premium standard.
RUN
COL
RX
ERR
ADR
TX
E
Visual diagnostics of the module :
A
A
A
A
E
RUN ERR COL ADR TX RX
E A ns ns ns ns module off comments
E
C
A
C
C
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
C
E
E
E module not configured or configuration fault module performing self-tests transmitting Ethernet communication
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
C
E
E
E
E
E
A
A
E
C
C
E
E
C
C
E
E
E receiving Ethernet communication transmitting/receiving Ethernet communication collision detection by the module duplicate MAC address network address or station out of range
A = on, C = flashing, E = off, ns = not significant
___________________________________________________________________________
1/8
Installation of the TSX ETY 110 module 1
1.8
Electrical characteristics
The TSX ETY 110 module can be inserted in any slot on TSX/PMX/PCX 57 PLC station racks. The consumption of the module on the rack power supply depends on whether there is a remote power supply to the transceiver.
Voltage
5 V no remote power supply (RJ45) with remote power supply (AUI) current drawn typical maximum
0.8 A
1.2 A
1.2 A
2.5 A power dissipated typical maximum
4 W
6 W
6 W
12.5 W
E
Warning :
The consumption of ETY 110 modules on the 5 Volts is high when the AUI connection is used. Special attention must therefore be given to the power consumption of the devices in the rack before deciding on the choice of power supply.
Maximum number of TSX ETY 110 modules which may be connected in one rack :
2 TSX ETY 110 modules with AUI connection,
4 TSX ETY 110 modules with RJ45 connection.
___________________________________________________________________________
1/9
E
___________________________________________________________________________
1/10
PCMCIA Modem
Communication Card
Section
1 Installing the PCMCIA Modem card
Installing the TSX MDM 10 card
1.3-1 Selecting the type of processor and the slot
1.3-2 Inserting / removing when powered up
1.3-3 Connecting to the telephone network
1.6-2 Operating characteristics
1.6-3 Maximum operating temperature
Contents
Part F
Page
F
___________________________________________________________________________
F/1
F
PCMCIA Modem
Communication Card
Section
Contents
Part F
Page
___________________________________________________________________________
F/2
1 Installing the PCMCIA Modem card
1.1
Introduction
The TSX MDM 10 card is used to connect to the switched telephone network (PSTN) and access remote stations according to UNI-TELWAY or character mode protocols.
This type of communication is available via the PCMCIA modem card. It can only be installed in the PCMCIA host slot of a TSX/TPMX P57 • processor version V
≥
3.3 .
1.2
Description
The TSX MDM 10 comprises the following elements :
F
1 PCMCIA modem card
2 Cable for connection to the switched telephone network
3 RJ 11 socket for connection to a telephone adapter (4) or direct connection to a telephone socket
4 Telephone adapter for connection to the telephone network
___________________________________________________________________________
1/1
F
1.3
Installing the TSX MDM 10 card
1.3-1 Selecting the type of processor and the slot
The TSX MDM 10 card can only be located in the processor PCMCIA host slot.
TSX/TPMX 57• processor host slot
TSX SCY 21601 host slot
TPCX 57 • processor host slot
The TSX MDM 10 card is compatible with all TSX P57 • and TPMX P57 • processors version V
≥
3.3.
Neither TPCX 57 • processors nor TSX SCY 21601 communication modules accept TSX MDM 10 modem cards.
1.3-2 Inserting / removing when powered up
TSX MDM 10 communication cards must not be inserted or removed when the host module (processor) is powered up.
___________________________________________________________________________
1/2
PCMCIA Modem Card Setup 1
1.3-3 Connecting to the telephone network
To connect to the switched telephone network, follow the assembly instructions below:
1 Connect the RJ 11 socket to the telephone adapter if required.
2 Plug the RJ 11 socket or the telephone adapter into a socket for your telephone line.
If a device is already connected to this socket, unplug it, then plug in the telephone adapter in its place and plug the device back in behind the telephone adapter.
3 Inset the PCMCIA card in the designated slot on the processor.
The card should only be inserted or removed when the host device is powered down.
4 Screw the card into the host device to prevent it from being moved when the device is powered up.
F
___________________________________________________________________________
1/3
F
1.4
Connecting the adapters
1.4-1 The various adapters
Telephone adapters, conforming to the country of purchase, can be used to connect the RJ 11 socket on the PCMCIA TSX MDM 10 card to the wall socket for the telephone network.
To use the TSX MDM 10 card in different countries, simply change the telephone adapter.
They are available under the following references :
• TSX MDM ADT F : adapter for French telephone networks
• TSX MDM ADT G : adapter for German telephone networks
• TSX MDM ADT B : adapter for Belgian telephone networks
• TSX MDM ADT S : adapter for Spanish telephone networks
• TSX MDM ADT T : adapter for Italian telephone networks
___________________________________________________________________________
1/4
PCMCIA Modem Card Setup 1
1.5
Electrical characteristics
This table indicates the consumption for a PCMCIA modem card :
Voltage
5 V
Typical current
195 mA
1.6
Technical specifications
1.6-1 Communication protocols
The TSX MDM 10 card supports the various ITU-T V.32 communication protocols.
F
1.6-2 Operating characteristics
The TSX MDM 10 supports the following characteristics :
• transmission of AT commands
• half and full duplex communication
• automatic calling and answering
• pulse or tone calls
1.6-3 Maximum operating temperature
• without fan module TSX FAN •• : max. 50°C
• with fan module TSX FAN •• : max. 60°C
1.6-4 CE mark
The TSX MDM 10 card conforms to European Telecommunications Directive DTTC 98/
13/EC.
The level of immunity to electromagnetic fields ensured by the card is 3V/m. Communication faults may appear above this threshold. This conforms to EMC Directive 89/336/
EEC which applies to residential, commercial and light industrial sites.
The TSX MDM 10 card also conforms to Low Voltage Directive 73/23 EEC, modified by
93/68/EEC.
___________________________________________________________________________
1/5
F
___________________________________________________________________________
1/6
Index
A
AS-i bus
Addressing I/O objects
AS-i bus diagnostics
C
Characteristics
TSX ETY 110
TSX SAY 100
Connections
TSX FPP 10
TSX FPP 20
TSX MBP 100
TSX SAY 100
TSX SCP 111
TSX SCP 112
TSX SCP 112 to April 5000/7000
PLCs
TSX SCP 114
Consumption
TSX FPP 10
TSX FPP20
TSX MBP 100
TSX SCP 111
TSX SCP 112
TSX SCP 114
D
I
Display
N
Network architecture
Integrated FIPIO link
On TSX/PMX/PCX 57 processors
Integrated FIPIO link connections
M
Modem
Network documentation
P
PCMCIA communication cards
Connection cables
Description
Diagnostics
Display
Installation
Mounting cards and cables
TSX FPP 10
TSX FPP 20
TSX MBP 100
TSX SCP 11i
R
Recommendations for use
S
Standards
T
Terminal port
Connector pinout
On PCX 57 PLCs
On TSX / PMX 57 PLCs
Terminal port characteristics
Terminal port communication
Character string
UNI-TELWAY master / slave
With a programming terminal
With an operator panel
Terminal port connections
Character string
Modem
Operator panel
Programming terminal
UNI-TELWAY inter-devices
UNI-TELWAY inter-PLC
B
___________________________________________________________________________
P/1
P
P
UNI-TELWAY master
UNI-TELWAY slave
TSX ETY 110
10baseT interface
Characteristics
Coding the station address
Connection via the AUI interface
Description
Diagnostics
Display
Installation
TSX MDM 10
Characteristics
Connection
Installation
The various adapters
TSX P ACC 01
Configuring the switches
Connectable devices
Connection between two PLC stations
Connection to the UNI-TELWAY bus A 2/3
Connection to TSX/PMX/PCX 57
PLCs
Connector pinout
Dimensions and fixing
Internal view
Master mode
Slave mode
TSX SAY 100
Displaying the module status
Module operating modes
Mounting/Installation
Physical presentation
Recommendations for use
Special displays
TSX SCY 21601
Characteristics of the integrated channel
Compatibility of the host channel
Connection of the integrated channel
Description
Installation
Operation
Visual diagnostics
___________________________________________________________________________
P/2
VOLUME 4
Installation,
Analog and
Weighing
Analog inputs : TSX AEY i modules
Analog outputs : TSX ASY i modules
Weighing : TSX ISP Y100 module
VOLUME 1
Installation
Processors and
Discrete I/O
VOLUME 2
Installation
Counting,
Motion Control
VOLUME 3
Installation
Communication,
Bus and Network
Interfaces
A
B
C
VOLUME 4
P
___________________________________________________________________________
B / 2
General safety advice for users
____________________________________________________________________________
1 General
This manual is intended for personnel technically qualified to install, operate and maintain the products which are described herein. It contains all the necessary information for correct use of the products. However, for advanced use of our products please contact your nearest sales office for additional information.
The contents of this manual are not contractual and cannot under any circumstance extend or restrict contract warranty clauses.
2 Qualification of personnel
Only qualified personnel are authorized to install, operate or maintain the products. Any work performed by unqualified personnel or non-observance of the safety instructions in this document or attached to the equipment may risk the safety of personnel and/or cause irreparable damage to equipment. The following personnel may be regarded as being "Qualified" :
• those involved with application design. Design office personnel familiar with control system safety concepts (for example, design engineers, etc),
• those involved with equipment installation. Individuals who are familiar with the installation, connection and startup of control system equipment (for example installers or wiring technicians working during the installation phase, technicians setting up the equipment, etc),
• those involved with operation. Personnel trained to operate and manage control system equipment (for example, operators, etc),
• those performing preventive or corrective maintenance. Personnel who are trained and experienced in the adjustment and repair of control system equipment (for example, installation engineers, after sales service engineers, etc).
3 Warnings
Warnings serve to prevent specific risks encountered by personnel and/or equipment. They are indicated in the documentation and on the products by different warning symbols, according to the severity of the risk :
Danger or Caution
Indicates that not following instructions or ignoring the warning may cause serious personal injury, death and/or serious damage to equipment.
Warning or Important or
!
Indicates that not following a specific instruction may lead to minor injury and/or damage to equipment.
Note or Comment
Highlights important information relating to the product, its operation or its accompanying documentation.
___________________________________________________________________________
1
General safety advice for users
___________________________________________________________________________
4 Conformity of use
The products described in this manual conform to the European Directives (*) to which they are subject (CE marking). However, they can only be used correctly in the context of the applications for which they are intended (described in the various documents) and when connected to approved third party products.
As a general rule, if all handling, transport and storage specifications are observed, and all instructions for installation, operation and maintenance are followed, the products will be used correctly, with no danger to personnel or equipment.
(*) EMC and LV Directives, concerning Electromagnetic Compatibility and Low Voltage.
5 Installing and setting up equipment
It is important to observe the following rules when installing and starting up equipment. In addition, if the installation includes digital links, it is essential to follow the basic wiring rules given in the manual
"Electromagnetic Compatibility of industrial Networks and Fielbuses", reference TSX DG KBLE, or in manual TSX DR NET, part C.
• safety instructions must be followed meticulously. These instructions are in the documentation or on the equipment being installed and set up.
• the type of equipment defines the way in which it should be installed :
- a flush-mountable device (for example, an operator terminal or a cell controller) must be flushmounted,
- a device which is to be built in (for example, PLC) must be placed in a cabinet or enclosure,
- the casing of a laptop or portable device (for example, a programming terminal or a notebook) must remain closed,
• if the device is permanently connected,
- the upstream installation must conform to standard IEC 1131-2 overvoltage category 2,
- in addition, its electrical installation must include a device to isolate it from the power supply and a circuit-breaker to protect it against overcurrents and isolation faults. If this is not the case, the power socket must be grounded and be easily accessed. In all cases, the device must be connected to the protective mechanical ground PG using green/yellow wires
(NFC 15 100 - IEC 60 364-5-51) .
• low voltage circuits (even though they are low voltage) must be connected to the protective ground so that dangerous voltages can be detected.
• before a device is powered up, its nominal voltage must be checked to ensure that it has been adjusted to conform with the supply voltage.
• if the device is supplied with 24 or 48 VDC, the low voltage circuits must be protected. Only use power supplies which conform to the standards currently in force.
• check that the supply voltages remain within the tolerance ranges defined in the technical characteristics of the devices.
• all measures must be taken to ensure that any power return (immediate, warm or cold) does not lead to a dangerous state which may risk personnel or the installation.
• emergency stop devices must remain effective in all the device's operating modes, even those which are abnormal (for example, when a wire becomes disconnected). Resetting these devices must not cause uncontrolled or improper restarts.
• cables which carry signals must be located where they do not cause interference with the control system functions by capacitive, inductive or electromagnetic interference.
___________________________________________________________________________
2
General safety advice for users
____________________________________________________________________________
• control system equipment and their control devices must be installed in such a way as to ensure that they are protected against unintentional operation.
• appropriate safety measures must be taken for the inputs and outputs, to prevent improper states in the control system device, if no signal is received.
6 Equipment operation
The operational safety and availability of a device is its ability to avoid the appearance of faults and to minimize their effects if they occur.
A system is said to be fail-safe if the appearance of faults never causes a dangerous situation.
A fault inside the control system is known as :
• passive, if it results in an open output circuit (no command is sent to the actuators).
• active, if it results in a closed output circuit (a command is sent to the actuators).
From the safety point of view, a given fault is dangerous or not depending on the type of command given during normal operation. A passive fault is dangerous if the normal command is the operation of an alarm. An active fault is dangerous if it maintains or activates an undesirable command.
It is important to note the basic difference between the behavior of an electromechanical relay and an electronic component (for example a transistor) :
• there is a high probability, approximately 90%, that the failure of a relay will cause an open circuit
(control circuit powered off).
• there is a 50% probability that the failure of a transistor will cause either an open circuit or a closed circuit.
This is why it is important to correctly estimate the types and consequences of faults when automating a system using electronic products such as PLCs, including when relay output modules are used on PLCs.
The system designer must use devices external to the PLC to protect against active faults inside the PLC, which are not indicated and are judged to be dangerous to the application. This may require solutions from various different technologies such as mechanical, electromechanical, pneumatic or hydraulic devices (for example, directly wiring a limit switch and emergency stop switches to the coil of a movement control contactor).
To protect against dangerous faults which may occur on output circuits or preactuators, it is sometimes beneficial to resort to general principles and use the large processing capacity of
PLCs, for example by using inputs to check the correct execution of commands requested by the program.
7 Electrical and thermal characteristics
Details of the electrical and thermal characteristics of devices are given in the associated technical documents (installation manuals, quick reference guides).
___________________________________________________________________________
3
General safety advice for users
___________________________________________________________________________
8 Environmental conditions
In industry, the micro-environmental conditions of electronic devices can vary greatly. For this reason, programmable controllers and associated modules must conform to the following two types of installation :
• installation in an enclosure with IP54 protection for protecting devices from metallic dust amongst other things. Two guidelines are associated with this type of installation :
- direct access to electronic modules should be strictly reserved to maintenance staff (see section 2), with access keys,
- the selection of a metal enclosure must be considered, since it serves as extra shielding against the latent risk of electromagnetic interference.
• direct installation without protection for Premium PLCs and associated systems (power supply modules, etc) which themselves have IP20 protection.
This type of installation applies to areas with restricted access and low pollution levels (not exceeding 2), for example stations or control rooms which have neither machines nor any activity generating metallic dust or other metallic particles. The external walls hence serve as the PLC enclosure.
9 Preventive or corrective maintenance
Availability
The availability of a system is its ability, in terms of its combined reliability, maintainability and maintenance logistics, to be in a state to perform a required function, at a given moment and within a defined time period.
Availability is therefore specific to each application, since it is a combination of :
• the architecture of the automatic system,
• the reliability and maintainability : intrinsic characteristics of the equipment (PLCs, sensors, machine, etc),
• maintenance logistics : characteristic intrinsic to the user of the control system (software structure, fault indication, process, on-site replacement parts, training of personnel).
Troubleshooting procedure
• control system equipment should only be repaired by qualified personnel (after sales service engineer, or technician approved by Schneider Automation). Only certified replacement parts or components should be used.
• before performing any operation on equipment (for example opening an enclosure), always cut the power supply off (disconnect the power plug or open the power isolation switch).
• before performing any "mechanical" operation on equipment on site, cut the power supply off and mechanically lock any moving parts.
• before removing a module, a memory cartridge, a PCMCIA card, etc, check in the manual whether this should be done with the power off or if it is possible with the device powered up.
Follow the instructions given in the manual carefully.
• on positive logic outputs or negative logic inputs, take all necessary precautions to prevent a disconnected wire coming into contact with the mechanical ground (risk of undesirable control action).
Replacement and recycling of used batteries
• if these are replaced, use batteries of the same type and dispose of defective batteries in the same way as toxic waste.
Do not throw lithium or mercury batteries into a fire, open or recharge them, or attempt to solder them.
___________________________________________________________________________
4
Analog modules
General
Contents
Part A
Section
2.1-1 Module and terminal block installation
3.1-2 Sensor link fault (TSX AEY 414/1614)
3.3-3 Output power supply (TSX ASY 800)
___________________________________________________________________________
A/1
Page
A
A
Analog modules
General
Section
Contents
Part A
Page
___________________________________________________________________________
A/2
1 General presentation
1.1
Description
1.1-1 General
The analog I/O modules in the Premium range are standard format modules (occupying a single position), equipped with one 25-pin SubD connector (TSX AEY 420/800/810 and TSX ASY 800), two 25-pin SubD connectors (TSX AEY 1600/1614), or a screw terminal block (TSX AEY 414 and TSX ASY 410). They can be installed in any position in TSX RKY.. racks, except for the first position which is reserved for the rack power supply.
The maximum number of analog modules which can be used in a TSX/TPMX/PCX 57 configuration is shown in the following table :
Module
Analog channels
57-1•
24 (1)
57-2•
80 (1)
57-3•
128
57-4•
256
(1) TSX AEY 420/800/810 and TSX ASY 800 modules are not compatible with TSX 57-10/20 processors, version < V2.
Note : if the TSX ASY 800 modules are powered by the internal 24V supply, the number of modules is reduced to 2 per rack (with double format power supply) or 1 per rack (with single format power supply.
1.1-2 Physical description
1 Rigid casing which provides support and protection for the electronic card.
2 Module reference markings (visible on the right side of the module).
3 Display block showing operating modes and errors.
4 Connector for the screw terminal block.
5 Module encoder.
6 25-pin SubD connector(s), for connecting sensors or preactuators.
7 Removable screw terminal block, for connecting sensors or preactuators.
This terminal block is supplied separately under reference
TSX BLY 01.
8 Cover providing access to the screw terminals. Also holds the terminal wiring and channel identification label.
9 Terminal encoder.
10 External power supply terminal.
4
2
5
TSX AEY 414/ASY 410
6
1
2
3
1
2
3
2
6
7
8
9
2
10
1
2
3
6
TSX AEY 16../8../420 TSX ASY 800
___________________________________________________________________________
1/1
A
A
1.2
Input catalog
Module type Input
Number of channels 16
Range ± 10 V
0..10 V
0..5 V
1..5 V
0..20 mA
4..20 mA
8 4 16 4
-80..+80mV ± 10 V
Thermocouple 0..10 V
± 5 V
0..5 V
1..5 V
0..20 mA
4..20 mA
-13..+63mV
0..400
Ω
0..3850
Ω
Temp. probe
Thermocouple
Current consumed 0 mA on 24 VR
Current consumed 270 mA (typ.) on 5 V 380 mA (max)
Common point Voltage common mode between channels
Resolution 12 bits
Connections
TSX reference
475 mA (typ.) 500 mA (typ.) 300 mA (typ.) 660 mA (typ.)
630 mA (max) 800 mA (max) 400 mA (max) 940 mA (max)
±200VDC
16 bits
Common point
±100VDC ±200VDC
2 x 25-pin 1 x 25-pin
SubD SubD
2 x25-pin
SubD
20-pin screw terminal block
AEY 1600 AEY 800 AEY 810 AEY 420 AEY 1614 AEY 414
___________________________________________________________________________
1/2
General presentation 1
A
1.3
Output catalog
Module type Output
Number of channels 8
Range ± 10 V
0..20 mA
4..20 mA
Current consumed 300 mA (typ.) on 24 VR 455 mA (max)
Current consumed 200 mA (typ.) on 5 V 300 mA (max)
Channel isolation Common point
(1)
4
0 mA
990 mA (typ.) (2)
1220 mA (max) (2)
1500 Vrms isolation
Resolution
Connections
14 bits for voltage/13 bits for current
1 x 25-pin SubD,
2-pin screw terminal block
11 bits + sign
20-pin screw terminal block
TSX reference ASY 800 ASY 410
(1) If a 24 V internal power supply is used (0 mA if external power supply is used)
(2) + 20 mA per active channel
___________________________________________________________________________
1/3
A
1.4
Labeling
The module is identified by laser-engraved markings on the cover, accessible on the front panel and the right-hand side of the module :
1 1
2
TSX AEY 414
4 Multirange
Isolated
Analog Inputs I 0
1
2
3
3
2
• module marking 1, which indicates the module reference,
• module marking 2, which indicates the module reference and type,
• removable terminal block label 3, located inside the cover, displaying the module reference and type and the terminal wiring. Additional information may be added to this double-sided label by the user.
___________________________________________________________________________
1/4
2 General installation rules
2.1
Installation recommendations
2.1-1 Module and terminal block installation
Inserting/removing modules
Analog modules and terminal blocks can be inserted and removed when the PLC is
powered up (without risk of damage to the modules or interference to the PLC).
The presence of the terminal block is detected using a shunt positioned in the upper part of the terminal block, which should always be tightened to its maximum.
The terminal block should always be removed before removing the module.
This avoids leading voltage on to the terminal block inputs (up to 1700 V) in the event of a module isolation fault.
With the TSX ASY 800 module, the external 24V terminal block should also be removed before removing the module.
Encoding the screw terminal block
The first time a screw terminal block is fitted onto a module, the coding is transferred from the module to the terminal block which then becomes specific to the module type (for more information about encoding the terminal block, please refer to section 5 in part A1).
2.2
Wiring recommendations
To protect the signal against external noise in series mode and common mode noise, it is advisable to take the following precautions :
Conductor type
Use shielded twisted pairs with a minimum cross-section of 0.28 mm 2 (AWG24 gauge).
Cable shielding
• for modules fitted with a screw terminal block (TSX AEY 414 / TSX ASY 410)
Connect the shielding at each end of the cable to the shielding connection terminals
(ground terminals). See the paragraph on the following page concerning referencing of sensors and preactuators to ground.
• for modules fitted with SubD connector(s) (TSX AEY 420/800/810/1600/1614 and
TSX ASY800)
As there is a large number of channels, a minimum 13-pair twisted cable will be used with general shielding (external diameter 15 mm maximum), fitted with a 25-pin male SubD connector for linking with the module.
Connect the shielding of the cable to the cover of the male SubD connector. It is connected to the PLC ground via the SubD connector retention screws (for this reason, it is therefore essential to screw the male SubD connector onto its female base).
___________________________________________________________________________
2/1
A
A
Grouping of conductors in cables
Signals of the same type with the same reference to ground can be grouped together in multipair cables.
Cable routing
Keep the discrete I/O cables (especially those for relay outputs) as far away as possible from the power cables.
Sensors referenced to ground
For modules with non-isolated channels (TSX AEY 800, TSX AEY 420 and TSX AEY
1600), sensors which are not referenced to ground are preferred.
To ensure correct operation of the measurement system, the following precautions are advised :
• sensors should be located near to each other (few meters),
• all the sensors should be referenced to the same point, which is connected to the module ground.
Input channel 0 +ve
Input channel 0 -ve
Use of sensors referenced to ground
If the sensors are referenced to ground, this can, in certain cases, lead to a ground voltage at the terminal block or SubD connector(s) due to a distant earth ground connection. It is therefore essential that the following rules are observed :
• this voltage must be less than the safety voltage,
V
V
Shielding connection
Input channel 1 +ve
Input channel 1 -ve
Input channel n +ve
• when a reference voltage is taken to a sensor it can cause leakage current. It should therefore be checked that any leakage current generated does not interfere with the system.
V
Input channel n -ve
Use of preactuators referenced to ground
There is no technical restriction for referencing preactuators to ground. For safety reasons, however, it is preferable to avoid the introduction of a ground voltage at the terminal block due to a distant earth ground connection, as this may vary significantly from the ground voltage due to a local earth ground connection.
___________________________________________________________________________
2/2
General installation rules 2
A
2.3
TELEFAST wiring accessories
Using TELEFAST wiring accessories facilitates the installation of TSX AEY 420/800/810/
1600/1614 and TSX ASY800 analog modules, by giving access to the inputs (or outputs) via screw terminals.
The analog module is connected to the TELEFAST accessories via a 3 meter shielded cable, reference TSX CAP 030 which has 25-pin SubD connectors fitted at both ends.
TELEFAST
Sensors
TELEFAST
Sensors
There are 5 types of analog TELEFAST wiring accessory :
• TELEFAST accessory, reference ABE 7 CP A02, distributes the 8 channels from a
25-pin SubD connector, to the screw terminals,
• TELEFAST accessory, reference ABE 7 CP A03, distributes the 8 channels from a
25-pin SubD connector, to the screw terminals; but also :
- supplies, channel by channel, the 2 and 4-wire sensors with a 24 V supply protected and current-limited (30 mA),
- maintains the continuity of the current loops when the 25-pin SubD connector is removed,
- protects the current shunt contained in the modules against overvoltages.
• TELEFAST accessory, reference ABE 7 CP A31, distributes the 8 channels from a
25-pin SubD connector, to the screw terminals; but also :
- supplies, channel by channel, the 2 and 4-wire sensors with an IEC 24 V supply protected and current-limited (25 mA), maintaining the isolation between the module channels.
- protects the current shunt (250
Ω
) contained in the modules against overvoltages.
___________________________________________________________________________
2/3
A
• TELEFAST accessory, reference ABE 7 CP A12, distributes the 8 channels from a
25-pin SubD connector, to the screw terminals for connecting thermocouples. It is a junction box, fitted with an integral temperature probe, which also performs cold junction compensation at the connection terminal block.
Number of channels which can be connected :
- 16 thermocouple channels in TELEFAST internal cold junction compensation mode
- 14 thermocouple channels in external cold junction compensation mode with a
4-wire Pt100 probe on channels 0 and 8
• TELEFAST accessory, reference ABE 7CPA21, distributes the 4 channels from a
25-pin SubD connector, to the screw terminals.
• The TSX ASY 410 analog module is connected to the TELEFAST accessory using one of the following cables :
- ABF-Y25S150 : length 1.5m
- ABF-Y25S200 : length 2m
- ABF-Y25S300 : length 3m
- ABF-Y25S500 : length 5m
These cables are part of the TSX BLY 01 terminal block.
The following table shows the TELEFAST accessories which can be used with each module :
Module ABE 7 CPA02 ABE 7 CPA03 ABE 7 CPA31 ABE 7 CPA12 ABE 7 CPA21
TSX AEY 420 X X X
TSX AEY 800 X X
TSX AEY 810 X
TSX AEY 1600 X X
X
TSX AEY 1614
TSX ASY 410
TSX ASY 800 X
X
X
Note
The TELEFAST wiring accessory, reference ABE 6 SD 2520, can be used instead of the TELEFAST
ABE 7 CP A02, as it has the same functions (the only difference between the 2 wiring accessories is that the TELEFAST ABE 6 SD 2520 belongs to the TELEFAST first-generation range).
___________________________________________________________________________
2/4
3 Fault processing
3.1
External faults
3.1-1 Range overshoot
At the time of measurement range overshoot, the following bits are set to 1 :
• fault bit %Ixy.i.ERR, associated with the channel
• bit 1 (range overshoot) of "status" word %MWxy.i.2 associated with channel i for TSX
AEY 414/800/1600 and TSX ASY 410 modules (version : II >10).
• bit 14 or 15 (range overshoot : lower or upper overshoot zone) of "status" word
%MWxy.i.2 associated with the channel for TSX AEY 420/810/1614 modules.
• bit 1 (indicates range overshoot), and bit 3 (if set to 0, indicates a lower limit range overshoot, if set to 1, indicates an upper limit range overshoot) of "status" word
%MWxy.i.2 associated with the channel for TSX ASY 800 and TSX ASY 410 modules
(version : II > 10).
The I/O indicator lamp is permanently on during the fault.
Note :
Overshoot monitoring parameters can be configured for TSX AEY 420/810/1614 and TSX ASY
800 modules (see the overshoot monitoring section for each module).
A
3.1-2 Sensor link fault (TSX AEY 414/1614)
When a sensor link fault occurs (refer to section 4.2-3, sensor link monitoring in part
B), the following bits are set to 1 :
• fault bit %Ixy.i.ERR, associated with the channel,
• bit 0 (sensor link fault) of "status" word %MWxy.i.2 associated with the channel (for example, %MW2.0.2:X0 for channel 0 of the module located in slot 2).
The I/O indicator lamp is permanently on during the fault.
Note :
Sensor link fault monitoring can be activated and deactivated via the configuration.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/1
A
3.2
Internal faults
Each module carries out a series of self-tests (watchdog, memory, analog/digital conversion circuit).
When an error occurs during these tests, an internal fault is signalled. The channels change to 0 and the ERR indicator lamp is permanently on.
If a module is inoperative and can no longer communicate with the processor, the latter will still be informed as it detects a module which is absent or inoperative.
Self-test performed
Watchdog test
Checksum of REPROM memory
Test of X Bus interface
Test of external RAM
Test of EEPROM memory
Test of converters (1)
Test of internal references (2)
(1) TSX AEY 414/1614 modules
(2) TSX AEY 800/810/1600 modules
Status of ERR indicator Feedback of fault lamp during a fault to the processor
Permanently on
Permanently on
Permanently on
Permanently on
Permanently on
Permanently on
Permanently on no no no no no yes yes
___________________________________________________________________________
3/2
Fault processing 3
A
3-3 Other faults
3.3-1 Communication fault
When a fault of communication with the processor occurs, the images of the channel values (at PLC processor level) are frozen at the last value before the fault.
3.3-2 Terminal block fault
If the terminal block fault is configured, it occurs when at least one channel is used, while the corresponding SubD connector or terminal block is absent. When such a fault occurs, the following bits are set to 1 :
• fault bit %Ixy.i.ERR, associated with the channel,
• bit 2 (terminal block fault) of "status" word %MWxy.i.2 associated with the channel
(for example, %MW2.0.2:X2 for channel 0 of the module located in slot 2) for TSX
AEY420/810/1614 and ASY 800 modules.
The I/O indicator lamp flashes during the fault.
Note : Terminal block monitoring can be activated and deactivated via the configuration.
3.3-3 Output power supply (TSX ASY 800)
If the output power supply fault is configured, it occurs when an external power supply is used to supply the module and the absence of this power supply is detected. When such a fault occurs, the following bits are set to 1 :
• fault bit %Ixy.i.ERR, associated with the channel,
• bit 1 (power supply fault) of "status" word %MWxy.mod.2 associated with the module
(for example, %MW2.mod.2:X1 for the module located in slot 2).
The I/O indicator lamp is permanently on during the fault.
Note :
The selection of internal or external power supply and fault monitoring can be activated and deactivated via the configuration.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/3
A
3.4
Fault display
Analog modules are fitted with a display block comprising 3 indicator lamps which display the module operating modes and possible faults : RUN, ERR and I/O indicator lamps.
Module status
RUN
Status indicator lamps
ERR I/O
Normal operation
Module not configured
External fault (range overshoot or external 24 V power supply fault)
Internal fault (module failure)
• communication with CPU possible
• communication with CPU not possible
Other fault (communication fault)
Other fault (terminal block fault)
Note
If a range overshoot occurs at the same time as a terminal block fault, the indicator lamps will indicate a range overshoot (I/O on).
Indicator lamp off
Indicator lamp flashing
Indicator lamp on
___________________________________________________________________________
3/4
Analog inputs :
TSX AEY • modules
Contents
Part B
Section
1 TSX AEY 800/ TSX AEY 810 / TSX AEY 1600 modules
1.2-2 Range selection and overshoot monitoring
2.2-2 Range selection and overshoot monitoring
___________________________________________________________________________
B/1
Page
B
B
Analog inputs :
TSX AEY • modules
Contents
Part B
Section
3.2-2 Range selection and overshoot monitoring
3.2-3 Thresholds and event processing
4.2-2 Range selection and overshoot monitoring
___________________________________________________________________________
B/2
Page
Analog inputs :
TSX AEY • modules
Contents
Part B
Section
4.3-2 Detailed input characteristics
4.4-2 External shunts (0..20 mA and 4..20 mA range)
4.4-4 Recommendations for installing thermocouples
Page
B
___________________________________________________________________________
B/3
B
Analog inputs :
TSX AEY • modules
Section
Contents
Part B
Page
___________________________________________________________________________
B/4
1 TSX AEY 800/ TSX AEY 810 / TSX AEY 1600 modules
1.1
Presentation
General
TSX AEY 800, TSX AEY 810 and
TSX AEY 1600 modules are analog input modules with 8 /16 high level inputs. Linked to sensors or transmitters, they perform monitoring, measurement and continuous process control functions.
TSX AEY 800 / TSX AEY 810 / AEY 1600
B
The TSX AEY 800, TSX AEY 810 or TSX
AEY 1600 module offers the range ± 10 V,
0..10 V, 0..5 V, 1..5 V, 0..20 mA or 4..20 mA for each of its inputs, depending on the choice made during configuration.
Functions
TSX AEY 800, TSX AEY 810 and TSX AEY 1600 input modules perform the following functions :
TSX AEY 800 and TSX AEY 1600
TSX AEY 800/1600
1000 Vrms isolation
Channel selection Optocoupler
Multiplexer
A / D
Optocoupler
Processing
X Bus interface
DC/DC converter 5 V 6
Function 1 2 3 4 5
7
___________________________________________________________________________
1/1
B
TSX AEY 810
TSX AEY 810
Filter
1000 Vrms isolation
Channel selection Optocoupler
A / D
Optocoupler
Processing
X Bus interface
Filter
DC/DC converter
5 V
6
4 5
7
1 Connection to the process and scanning of input channels
• physical connection to the process, via SubD connector(s),
• protection of the module against overvoltages (peak limiting diodes),
• adaptation of input signals by analog filtering,
• scanning of input channels, by solid state multiplexing (it is possible to scan only those channels defined as being used : fast cycle).
For the TSX AEY 810, multiplexing is performed by optical switches which isolate the channels.
2 Adaptation to input signals
• gain selection, according to the characteristics of the input signals, defined during configuration (unipolar or bipolar voltage or current range),
• compensation for drift in the amplifier circuits.
3 Digitalization of input measurement analog signals
• 12-bit analog / digital converter for TSX AEY 800/1600,
• 16-bit analog / digital converter for TSX AEY 810,
___________________________________________________________________________
1/2
TSX AEY 800 / TSX AEY 810 / TSX AEY 1600 modules 1
4 Converting input measurements to a unit which can be handled by the user
• acceptance of recalibration and alignment coefficients to be applied to the measurements, as well as the autocalibration coefficients of the module,
• measurement filtering (digital filter), according to the configuration parameters,
• measurement scaling, according to the parameters set during configuration.
B
5 Interface and communication with the application
• management of exchanges via X bus,
• geographical addressing,
• reception of module and channel configuration parameters,
• transmission of measured values, as well as the module status, to the application.
6 Module power supply
7 Monitoring the module and indicating possible faults to the application
• test for the conversion circuit,
• test for range overshoot on the channels,
• test for the presence of the terminal block,
• test of watchdog.
___________________________________________________________________________
1/3
B
1.2
Input processing
1.2-1 Measurement sampling
Measurement sampling depends on the cycle used, defined during configuration : normal cycle or fast cycle.
In normal cycle, the input scan cycle is fixed, irrespective of the number of inputs used :
27 ms for a TSX AEY 800 module, 29.7 ms for a TSX AEY 810 module, 51 ms for a TSX
AEY 1600 module.
In fast cycle, only the channels defined as used are scanned, even if they are not consecutive. This improves the module scan time. The module scan time is represented by the following formula :
Tc (ms) = (N+1) x Tv where N = number of channels used, Tv = channel scan time :
• 3 ms for a TSX AEY 800 module.
• 3.3 ms for a TSX AEY 810 module.
• 3 ms for a TSX AEY 1600 module.
For example, if 6 channels are used on a TSX AEY 800 module, the cycle time is
(6 +1)x 3 = 21 ms
Filtering is inhibited in fast mode.
The scan cycle of the channels used is as follows :
• normal cycle
Channel 0
T v
Channel 1
T v
Channel 7 (15)
T v
Internal ref. (*)
T v
27 ms (TSX AEY 800), 29.7 ms (TSX AEY 810), 51 ms (TSX AEY 1600)
• fast cycle (for example, channels 3, 5 and 6 used)
Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel 3
T v T v T v
Internal ref. (*)
T v
CT =( 3 + 1) Tv (= 12 ms for TSX AEY 800 and TSX AEY 1600)
(*) corresponds to the acquisition of voltage references integrated in the module, to enable its periodic autocalibration.
Note
The module scan is not synchronous with the PLC scan (application). At the start of each PLC cycle, the channel values are taken into account, which means that some values will not have changed if the scan of the MAST task is shorter than that of the module.
___________________________________________________________________________
1/4
TSX AEY 800 / TSX AEY 810 / TSX AEY 1600 modules 1
1.2-2 Range selection and overshoot monitoring
Each module has the choice of 6 ranges for each of its inputs : ± 10 V, 0..10 V, 0..5 V, 1..5
V, 0..20 mA and 4..20 mA.
The module monitors the overshoot for the chosen range, ie. it checks that the measurement is between the upper and lower limits.
B
TSX AEY 800 and TSX AEY 1600 modules
Overshoot monitoring is always enabled. The measurement range is divided into three zones :
• the nominal zone, corresponding to the selected range,
• the upper overshoot zone, located above the upper limit,
• the lower overshoot zone, located below the lower limit.
Lower limit lower overshoot range nominal zone
Upper limit upper overshoot range
Outside these limits (upper or lower overshoot zone), the analog measurement circuit risks saturation and an overshoot fault is signaled by a bit which can be used by the program (error bit %Imodule.channel.ERR = 1 indicates a channel fault, and status word bit
%MWmodule.channel.2:X1 = 1 indicates a range overshoot on the channel).
Modules generally allow a 5% range overshoot of the positive electrical range (for example, 5% of 10V for the range ± 10 V). The 0-5 V and 0-20 mA ranges will not tolerate a negative overshoot. As soon as the measured value becomes negative, a range overshoot fault is signaled.
AEY 800 Lower
AEY 1600 limit
Range
Upper limit
Default values
Standard format
Min. limit in User (1) format
Max. limit in User (1) format
± 10 V - 10.5 V + 10.5 V ± 10500 Min - 5% (max-min)/2 Max + 5% (max-min)/2
0..10 V
0..5 V
1..5 V
- 0.5 V
0 V
0.8 V
+ 10.5 V
+ 5.25 V
+ 5.2 V
- 500..10500
Min - 5% (max-min) Max + 5% (max-min)
0..10500
Min (2) Max + 5% (max-min)
- 500..10500
Min - 5% (max-min) Max + 5% (max-min)
0..20 mA 0 mA
4..20 mA + 3.2 mA
+ 21 mA
+ 20.8 mA
0..10500
- 500..10500
Min (2)
Min - 5% (max-min)
Max + 5% (max-min)
Max + 5% (max-min)
Min / Max : minimum / maximum values entered in USER format configuration.
(1) See section 1.2-4
(2) Range overshoot is signaled for an overshoot of approximately :
-10 mV for the range 0..5 V,
-40
µ
A for the range 0..20 mA.
___________________________________________________________________________
1/5
B
TSX AEY 810 module
Overshoot monitoring is optional. The measurement range is divided into 5 zones :
• the nominal zone, corresponding to the selected range,
• the upper tolerance zone, with values between the upper value of the range (eg :
+10V for a range +10V/-10V) and the upper limit,
• the lower tolerance zone, with values between the lower value of the range (eg : -
10V for a range +10V/-10V) and the lower limit,
• the upper overshoot zone, located above the upper limit,
• the lower overshoot zone, located below the lower limit.
Lower limit
Lval range
Uval range
Upper limit
Lower overshoot zone
Lower tolerance zone
Upper overshoot zone
When the value read is in one of the 2 tolerance zones, warning bit %IWxy.i.1:X5 (for the lower zone) or %IWxy.i.1:X6 (for the upper zone) is set to 1.
When the value read is in one of the 2 overshoot zones (and overshoot monitoring is required), error bit %Ixy.ERR is set to 1, and the overshoot type (overshoot of lower or upper value) is indicated in bit %MWxy.i.2:X1 (range overshoot) and %MWxy.i.2:X4 (for the lower zone) or %MWxy.i.2:X5 (for the upper zone). The measured value is then limited.
The upper and lower limits can be configured separately. They can have whole values between the following values :
Lower limit = Lval range + lower tolerance zone
Upper limit = Uval range + upper tolerance zone
Range Lower tolerance zone
Default value
Max value
Min value
Upper tolerance zone
Default value
Min value
Max value
Bipolar
Unipolar
-0.125 x FS/2 0
-0.125 x FS 0
0 Standardized -1250
Bipolar
Standardized -1250
Unipolar
0
User
Bipolar
User
Unipolar
-0.125
x
∆ range/2
-0.125 x
∆ range
0
0 nominal zone
-0.25 x FS/2 0.125 x FS/2 0
-0.25 x FS 0.125 x FS 0
-2500 1250 0
-2500
-0.25
x
∆ range/2
-0.25 x
∆ range
1250
0.125
x
∆ range/2
0.125 x
∆ range
Upper tolerance zone
0
0
0
0.25 x FS/2
0.25 x FS
2500
2500
0.25
x
∆ range/2
0.25 x
∆ range
___________________________________________________________________________
1/6
TSX AEY 800 / TSX AEY 810 / TSX AEY 1600 modules 1 where FS = 20 (range ± 10V and 0..20mA), = 10 (range ± 5V and 0..10V), = 5 (range
0..5V), = 4 (range 1..5V),= 16 (range 4..20mA),
∆
range = upper value range - lower value range.
Notes :
• the bipolar range is the range ± 10V, the unipolar ranges are ranges 0..20mA, 0..10V,
0..5V, 1..5V, 4..20mA.
• by default, overshoot monitoring is active. It can be partially activated (only for lower or upper overshoots) and deactivated.
B
Example of overshoot in the range 4..20mA in standardized mode, on channel 0.
Lower limit : -1250 (2mA) Upper limit : 10625 (21mA)
%MWxy.0.2:X1
%MWxy.0.2:X14
%MWxy.0.2:X15
%IWxy.0.1:X5
%IWxy.0.1:X6
%Ixy.0.ERR
Upper limit :
10625
10 000
0mA
1 2
4 mA
3
Measurement range
Range which can be measured electrically
20mA 24mA
4 5
0
Lower limit :
-1250
2 mA 4 mA 20 mA 21 mA where 1 = lower overshoot zone, 2 = lower tolerance zone, 3 = nominal zone, 4 = upper tolerance zone, 5 = upper tolerance zone,
___________________________________________________________________________
1/7
B
1.2-3 Measurement filtering
First order filtering is performed with a filtering coefficient which can be modified from a programming terminal or by the program. The mathematical formula used is as follows :
Mes fn
=
α
x Mes fn-1
+ (1-
α
) x Val bn where :
α
= filter efficiency, Mes fn
= filtered measurement at moment n,
Mes fn-1
= filtered measurement at moment n-1, Val bn
= "raw" value measured at moment n.
During configuration the user selects a filter value from 7 possible values (0 to 6).
This value may be modified, even when the application is in RUN.
Reminder : Filtering is inhibited in the fast cycle
TSX AEY 800
Efficiency required
Value to select
No filter
Low level of filtering
Medium level of 3 filtering 4
High level of filtering
5
6
0
1
2
TSX AEY 810
Efficiency required
Value to select
Corresponding Filter response
ααααα time at 63%
0
0.750
0.875
0.937
0.969
0.984
0.992
0
100 ms
202 ms
419 ms
851 ms
1.714 s
3.442 s
Cut off frequency (Hz)
-
1.591
0.788
0.379
0.187
0.093
0.046
No filter
Low level of filtering
Medium level of 3 filtering 4
High level of filtering
5
6
0
1
2
TSX AEY 1600
Efficiency required
Value to select
Corresponding Filter response
ααααα time at 63%
0
0.750
0.875
0.937
0.969
0.984
0.992
0
104.3 ms
224.7 ms
464.8 ms
944.9 ms
1.905 s
3.825 s
Cut off frequency (Hz)
-
1.526
0.708
0.342
0.168
0.084
0.042
Corresponding Filter response Cut off
α time at 63% frequency (Hz)
No filter
Low level of filtering
Medium level of 3 filtering 4
0
1
2
0
0.750
0.875
0.937
0.969
0
178 ms
382 ms
791 ms
1.607 s
-
0.894
0.416
0.201
0.099
High level of 5 0.984
3.239 s 0.049
filtering 6 0.992
6.502 s 0.024
___________________________________________________________________________
1/8
TSX AEY 800 / TSX AEY 810 / TSX AEY 1600 modules 1
1.2-4 Measurement display
The measurement supplied to the application can be used directly by the operator, who can choose between :
• using the 0..10000 standard display (or ±10000 for the range ±10 V),
• setting his own display format parameters by indicating his required minimum and maximum values.
Standardized display. Values are displayed in standard units :
• for a unipolar range of 0-10 V, 0-5 V, 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA, they are displayed from 0 to
10000 (0 0 /
000
to 10000 0 /
000
),
• for the bipolar range of ± 10 V, they are displayed from - 10000 to + 10000
(-10000 0 /
000
to +10000 0 /
000
).
User display. The user can choose the range of values in which the measurements are expressed, by choosing :
• the lower limit corresponding to the minimum of the range 0 0 /
000
(or - 10000 0 /
000
),
• the upper limit corresponding to the maximum of the range + 10000 0 /
000
.
These upper and lower limits are integers between -30000 and +30000.
For example, suppose a conditioning unit indicates information about pressure on a 4-20 mA loop, with 4 mA corresponding to 3200 mB and 20 mA corresponding to 9600 mB. The user can then select the User format, by defining the following upper and lower limits :
• 0 0 /
000
<=> 3200 as lower limit,
• 10000 0 /
000
<=> 9600 as upper limit.
The values transmitted to the program will vary between 3200 (= 4 mA) and 9600
(= 20 mA).
For more information about the standardized or user display, refer to the installation manual for application-specific functions, reference TLX DS 57 PL7 33E.
B
___________________________________________________________________________
1/9
B
1.2-5 Sensor alignment
Alignment consists of eliminating a systematic shift observed by a given sensor, around a given operating point. An error linked to the process will be compensated but not an error linked to the control system. For this reason, replacing a module does not require a new alignment. On the other hand, replacing the sensor or changing the operating point of that sensor will require a new alignment.
Conversion line after alignment
Initial conversion line
0 100 %
For example, suppose that a pressure sensor, linked to a conditioning unit (1mV/mB), indicates 3200 mB, while the actual pressure is 3210 mB. The value measured by the module in standardized scale will be 3200 (3.20 V). The user can align the measurement to the value 3210 (required value). After this alignment procedure, the measurement channel will apply a systematic offset of +10 to any new measurement.
The alignment value which should be entered is 3210.
The alignment value can be modified via a programming terminal, even if the
program is in RUN. For each input channel, the user can :
• display and modify the required measurement value,
• save the alignment value,
• know if the channel already has an alignment.
The alignment offset can also be modified via the program.
Alignment is performed when the channel is in normal operation, without affecting the operating modes of the module channel.
The maximum deviation between the measured value and the required value (aligned value) should not exceed ± 1000.
The alignment offset is saved in the word %MWxy.i.8.
Note : for TSX AEY 810, bit %IWxy.i.1:X0 = 1 indicates that the channel is aligned.
___________________________________________________________________________
1/10
TSX AEY 800 / TSX AEY 810 / TSX AEY 1600 modules 1
1.2-6 Recalibration
For TSX AEY 800, TSX AEY 810 and TSX AEY 1600 modules, it is only necessary to recalibrate channel 0 in order to recalibrate the whole module.
It is recommended that the module should be recalibrated outside the application.
Recalibration can be performed with the PLC task linked to the channel, in RUN or in
STOP.
In recalibration mode, the measurements of all the module channels are declared invalid (bit %Ixy.i.ERR = 1 for TSX AEY 800 and TSX AEY 1600 modules, bit
%IWxy.i.1:X2= 1 for the TSX AEY 810 module), filtering and alignment are inhibited,
the acquisition cycles of the channels can be extended.
As inputs other than channel 0 are not read during recalibration, the value transmitted to the application for these other channels is the last value measured before recalibration.
Recalibration is performed from the calibration screen and is performed for the whole module only on channel 0. To do this :
• click on a channel to go to recalibration mode (a confirmation message signals the change to this mode),
• connect a voltage reference to the voltage input of channel 0, according to the range to be recalibrated :
- reference = 10 V ± 20 ppm, to recalibrate the module for the ranges ± 10 V and 0..10 V,
- reference = 5 V ± 20 ppm, to recalibrate the module for the ranges 0..5 V, 1..5 V, 0..20 mA and 4..20 mA.
Warning : the 5 V reference recalibrates the whole measurement circuit or the ranges 0..20 mA and 4..20 mA, but does not take into account the 250
Ω
current
shunt integrated in the module and located on the current input,
• select in the calibration screen the connected reference (for example 10 V). Wait the necessary time for the voltage reference to stabilize, then confirm the selection.
Recalibration of the ranges linked to this reference (for example, ± 10 V and 0..10 V) is performed automatically. The displayed value of channel 0 should therefore be 10000
± 10.
• the user can then connect another external voltage reference (for example 5 V), then repeat the previous procedure up to the automatic recalibration of the ranges linked to that reference (0..5 V, 1..5 V, 0..20 mA and 4..20 mA).
Recalibration is not accepted until it has been saved in the module ("save" button). The
"Return to Factory Parameters" button cancels all recalibrations and reverts to the initial recalibration (performed in the factory). Pressing the "Return to Factory Parameters" button triggers a confirmation message. However, after confirmation, it is immediately accepted and does not require saving.
If the user exits the screen without saving, a message is displayed which reminds the user that it has not been saved. If the user still chooses to exit the screen, the new calibration coefficients will be lost (it will revert to the old coefficients).
B
___________________________________________________________________________
1/11
B
1.3
Characteristics
1.3-1 Input characteristics
Module
Number of channels
TSX AEY 800
8
TSX AEY 1600
16
Analog / digital conversion 12 bits (3719 points for voltage /
3836 points for current)
TSX AEY 810
8
16 bits (49090 points for voltage /24545 points for current)
Configuration of acquisition Fast : periodic acquisition of channels used scan Normal : periodic acquisition of all channels
Conversion time
Dielectric voltage channels / ground
3 ms / channel
1000 V rms
3.3 ms / channel
1000 V rms
Isolation between channels Common point ± 200 VDC
Isolation betw. bus and channs. 1000 V rms
Max. permissible overvoltage ± 30 V for voltage on inputs ± 30 mA for current
Input • for voltage 10 M
Ω impedance • for current 250
Ω
Max. dissipated power
Standards
1.9 W
IEC 1131
1000 V rms.
± 30 V for voltage
± 30 mA for current
10 M
Ω
250
Ω
3.15 W
IEC 1131, CSA22.2,UL508
Electrical range
Full scale (FS)
Resolution (1)
Maximum error at 25 °C (1)
± 10 V and 0..10 V 0..5 V and 1..5 V 0..20 mA and 4..20 mA
10 V
5.38 mV
0.19% FS
Max error from 0 to 60 °C (1) 0.22% FS
5 V
1.34V
0.15% FS
0.22% FS
20 mA
5.1
µ
A
0.25% FS
0.41% FS
Temperature drift (1)
Range overshoot
(2)
Precision of internal conversion resistance
/
20 ppm / °C 20 ppm / °C 45 ppm / °C
± 10.5 V (± 12.5 V) 0..5.25 V(0..6.25 V) 0..21 mA(0..25 mA) in range ± 10 V in range 0.. 5 V in range 0.. 20 mA
-0.5..10.5V (-2.5..12.5V) 0.8..5.2 V (0..6V) 3.2..20.8 mA (0..24 mA) in range 0..10 V in range 1..5 V in range 4..20 mA
/ 0.1% - 25 ppm / °C
(0.01% - 25 ppm / °C)
(1) these values do not apply to the TSX AEY 810 module. Its characteristics are shown in the table below,
(2) the TSX AEY 810 module overshoot limits can be configured (see section 3.2-2)
TSX AEY 810 module
Electrical range
Full scale (FS)
Resolution
Maximum error at 25 °C
Max. error from 0 to 60 °C
± 10 V and 0..10 V 0..5 V and 1..5 V 0..20 mA and 4..20 mA
10 V
406
µ
V
0.244%
0.305%
5 V
203
µ
V
0.13%
0.191%
20 mA
812 nA
0.142%
0.212%
1/12
TSX AEY 800 / TSX AEY 810 / TSX AEY 1600 modules 1
1.4
Connections
1.4-1 Connector pinout
TSX AEY 800
(1) +IV0 1
(2) +IC0
(*)
(3) COM1/STD
(4) +IV2
(5) +IC2
2
3
4
5
(6) COM3
(7) +IV4
(8) +IC4
(9) COM5
(10) +IV6
(11) +IC6
(12) COM7
6
9
10
7
8
11
12
14 COM0 (14)
15 +IV1 (15)
16 +IC1 (16)
17 COM2 (17)
18 +IV3 (18)
19 +IC3 (19)
20 COM4 (20)
21 +IV5 (21)
22 +IC5 (22)
23 COM6 (23)
24 +IV7 (24)
25 +IC7 (25)
(13) STD
TSX AEY 810
(1) +IV0
13
1
(2) +IC0 2
(3) COM1
(4) +IV2
(5) +IC2
(6) COM3
(7) +IV4
(8) +IC4
(9) COM5
(10) +IV6
(11) +IC6
(12) COM7
(*)
(13) STD
12
13
10
11
7
8
9
5
6
3
4
14 COM0 (14)
15 +IV1 (15)
16 +IC1 (16)
17 COM2 (17)
18 +IV3 (18)
19 +IC3 (19)
20 COM4 (20)
21 +IV5 (21)
22 +IC5 (22)
23 COM6 (23)
24 +IV7 (24)
25 +IC7 (25)
TSX AEY 1600
(1) +IV0 1
(2) +IC0
(*)
(3) COM1/STD
(4) +IV2
(5) +IC2
2
3
4
5
6 (6) COM3
(7) +IV4
(8) +IC4
(9) COM5
(10) +IV6
(11) +IC6
(12) COM7
(13) STD 13
9
10
7
8
11
12
14 COM0 (14)
15 +IV1 (15)
16 +IC1 (16)
17 COM2 (17)
18 +IV3 (18)
19 +IC3 (19)
20 COM4 (20)
21 +IV5 (21)
22 +IC5 (22)
23 COM6 (23)
24 +IV7 (24)
25 +IC7 (25)
(1) +IV8
(2) +IC8
(*)
(3) COM9/STD
(4) +IV10
(5) +IC10
(6) COM11
(7) +IV12
(8) +IC12
(9) COM13
(10) +IV14
(11) +IC14
(12) COM15
(13) STD
6
7
4
5
1
2
3
10
11
8
9
12
13
14 COM8 (14)
15 +IV9 (15)
16 +IC9 (16)
17 COM10 (17)
18 +IV11 (18)
19 +IC11 (19)
20 COM12 (20)
21 +IV13 (21)
22 +IC13 (22)
23 COM14 (23)
24 +IV15 (24)
25 +IC15 (25)
+IVx : +ve voltage input of channel x +ICx: +ve current input of channel x
COMx: -ve input of channel x (voltage or current) STD : "Strap" (*) to detect removal.
For the TSX AEY 810 : to detect removal of the terminal block, connect pin 13 to ground via the SubD cover.
___________________________________________________________________________
1/13
B
B
1.4-2 TELEFAST pinout
After connecting the analog module to a TELEFAST accessory, via cable TSX CAP 030, the distribution of the analog channels on the TELEFAST terminals is as follows :
TELEFAST, reference ABE 7 CP A02
107
108
109
110
111
102
103
104
105
106
112
113
114
115
TELEFAST 25-pin SubD terminal no. connector pin no.
1 /
2
3
4
100
101
/
/
/
1
2
10
11
24
25
19
7
8
21
22
4
5
15
16
18
Type of signal
Ground
STD (1)
STD (1)
STD (2)
+IV0 or +IV8
+IC0 or +IC8
+IV1 or +IV9
+IC1 or +IC9
+IV2 or +IV10
+IC2 or +IC10
+IV3 or +IV11
+IC3 or +IC11
+IV4 or +IV12
+IC4 or +IC12
+IV5 or +IV13
+IC5 or +IC13
+IV6 or +IV14
+IC6 or +IC14
+IV7 or +IV15
+IC7 or +IC15
207
208
209
210
211
202
203
204
205
206
212
213
214
215
TELEFAST 25-pin SubD terminal no. connector pin no.
Supp1 /
Supp2
Supp3
Supp4
200
201
/
/
/
/
14
/
/
23
12
/
/
9
/
20
/
3
/
17
6
Type of signal
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
COM0 or COM8
Ground
COM1 or COM9
Ground
COM2 or COM10
Ground
COM3 or COM11
Ground
COM4 or COM12
Ground
COM5 or COM13
Ground
COM6 or COM14
Ground
COM7 or COM15
Ground
Terminal detection :
• TSX AEY 1600/800 modules : connect terminals STD (1) and STD (2) using a "strap",
• TSX AEY 810 modules : connect terminals STD (1) and ground (pin no. 1) using a
"strap".
___________________________________________________________________________
1/14
TSX AEY 800 / TSX AEY 810 / TSX AEY 1600 modules 1
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
104
105
106
107
TELEFAST, reference ABE 7 CP A03
Type of signal
100
101
102
103
2
3
4
TELEFAST 25-pin SubD terminal no. connector pin no.
1 /
/
/
/
/
15
/
16
0 V
0 V
0 V
0 V
IS1 or IS9 (*)
+IV1 or +IV9
+IC1 or +IC9
Ground
/
21
/
22
/
24
/
25
/
18
/
19
IS3 or IS11 (*)
+IV3 or +IV11
+IC3 or +IC11
Ground
IS5 or IS13 (*)
+IV5 or +IV13
+IC5 or +IC13
Ground
IS7 or IS15
+IV7 or +IV15
+IC7 or +IC15
Ground
208
209
210
211
204
205
206
207
212
213
214
215
200
201
202
203
TELEFAST 25-pin SubD terminal no. connector pin no.
Supp1 /
Supp2
Supp3
Supp4
/
/
/
/
1
2
14 / 3
/
/
/
4
5
17 / 6
7
8
20 / 9
10
11
23 /12
Type of signal
24 V (sensor supp.)
24 V (sensor supp.)
0 V (sensor supp.)
0 V (sensor supp.)
IS0 or IS8 (*)
+IV0 or +IV8
+IC0 or +IC8
COM0 / COM1 or
COM8 / COM9
IS2 or IS10 (*)
+IV2 or +IV10
+IC2 or +IC10
COM2 / COM3 or
COM10 / COM11
IS4 or IS12 (*)
+IV4 or +IV12
+IC4 or +IC12
COM4 / COM5 or
COM12 / COM13
IS6 or IS14 (*)
+IV6 or +IV14
+IC6 or +IC14
COM6 / COM7 or
COM14 / COM15
(*) ISx : 24 V supply on channel x
B
___________________________________________________________________________
1/15
B
TELEFAST, reference ABE 7 CP A31
112
113
114
115
107
108
109
110
111
102
103
104
105
106
2
3
TELEFAST 25-pin SubD terminal no. connector pin no.
1 /
4
100
101
/
/
/
/
1
/
2
14
15
16
/
/
3
4
5
17
18
19
6
Type of signal
0 V1
IS2
IV2
IC2
0 V2
IC0
0 V0
IS1
IV1
IC1
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
IS0
IV0
IS3
IV3
IC3
0 V3
(*) ISx : 24 V supply on channel x
128
129
130
131
123
124
125
126
127
118
119
120
121
122
TELEFAST 25-pin SubD Type of signal terminal no. connector pin no.
Supp1 / 24 V (sensor supp.)
Supp2
Supp3
Supp4
116
117
/
/
/
/
7
24 V (sensor supp.)
0 V (sensor supp.)
0 V (sensor supp.)
IS4
IV4
/
8
20
21
22
IC4
0 V4
IS5
IV5
IC5
/
/
9
10
11
23
24
25
12
0 V5
IS6
IV6
IC6
0 V6
IS7
IV7
IC7
0 V7
For connections to ground, use the additional terminal block ABE 7 BV20.
Terminal block detection :
The TELEFAST ABE 7CP A31 is fitted with the strap required for the presence check.
___________________________________________________________________________
1/16
2.1
Presentation
General
The TSX AEY 1614 is an analog input module with 16 thermocouple inputs.
This module provides the following ranges for each of its inputs :
• thermocouple : B,E,J,K,L,N,R,S,T or U.
• voltage : -80..+80mV.
according to the selection made during configuration.
The TELEFAST ABE 7 CP 412 connection accessory provides easy connection and integrated cold junction compensation.
2 TSX AEY 1614 modules
B
TSX AEY 1614
TSX AEY 1614 module functions
The TSX AEY 1614 input module performs the following functions :
TSX AEY 1614
Channels
0 to 7
Telefast
8 cold junction
Input
Supply
Opto
A/D converter
Opto
Processing
X Bus interface
Channels
8 to 15
Telefast
8 cold junction
Input
A/D converter
Opto
Supply
Opto
1 2 3
7
4 5
6
___________________________________________________________________________
2/1
B
1 Adaptation and multiplexing
Adaptation consists of a common mode and a differential mode filter. It is followed by channel multiplexing which is performed by optical switches in order to enable common mode voltage between channels (up to 400V). A second stage of multiplexing autocalibrates the input offset closest to the input terminal and selects the cold junction compensation sensor included in the telefast terminal.
2 Amplification
This is constructed around a low level offset amplifier. The amplifier input peak limiter can withstand an overload of 30V.
3 Conversion
The converter receives the signal emitted by an input channel or the cold junction compensation. Conversion is based on a 16-bit
Σ∆ converter.
4 Converting input measurements to a unit which can be handled by the user
• acceptance of recalibration and alignment coefficients to be applied to the measurements, as well as the autocalibration coefficients of the module,
• measurement filtering (digital filter), according to the configuration parameters,
• measurement scaling, according to the parameters set during configuration.
5 Interface and communication with the application
• management of exchanges via X Bus,
• geographical addressing,
• reception of module and channel configuration parameters,
• transmission of measured values, as well as the module status, to the application.
6 Module power supply
7 Monitoring the module and indicating possible faults to the application
• test for the conversion circuit,
• test for range overshoot on the channels,
• test for the presence of the terminal block,
• test of watchdog.
8 Cold junction compensation
• integrated in TELEFAST ABE 7CP A12,
• to be provided by the user if TELEFAST is not used.
___________________________________________________________________________
2/2
TSX AEY 1614 modules 2
2.2
Input processing
2.2-1 Measurement sampling
The TSX AEY 1614 module cycle time (T) depends on the configuration options (wiring check, cold junction compensation, high precision mode). In addition, the channels are read simultaneously in pairs (channel 0 and channel 8; channel 1 and channel 9;...; channel
7 and channel 15).
B
Normal cycle
SubD0
Wc0 V 0
8 m s 7 0 m s
Wc1
8 m s
V 1 Wc2
7 0 m s 8 m s
V 2
7 0 m s
...
...
Wc7 V 7 T C J C Hi prec.
...
8 m s 7 0 m s 7 0 m s 7 0 m s
SubD1 Wc8 V 8
8 m s 7 0 m s
Wc9
8 m s
V 9 W c 1 0
7 0 m s 8 m s
V 1 0
7 0 m s
...
...
W c 1 4 V 1 4 T C J C Hi prec.
...
8 m s 7 0 m s 7 0 m s 7 0 m s where :
• Wc : wiring check (8ms per channel to be tested)
• TCJC : Telefast cold junction compensation
• Hi prec. : high precision mode (corresponding to module autocalibration).
Fast cycle
Only the channels defined as used are scanned, even if they are not consecutive. To reduce the scan time to a minimum, the fact that the channels are read simultaneously in pairs must be taken into account.
Example of optimum wiring for 3 channels used with wiring check, Telefast cold junction compensation and high precision :
If only 3 channels are to be used and the minimum scan time is required, it is advisable to wire channels 0, 8 (dual channels) and 1.
The scan is then as follows :
SubD0
Wc0 V 0 Wc1
8 m s 7 0 m s 8 m s
SubD1
Wc8 V 8
8 m s 7 0 m s
Wc9
8 m s
V 1 T C J C Hi prec.
7 0 m s 7 0 m s 7 0 m s
V 9 T C J C Hi prec.
7 0 m s 7 0 m s 7 0 m s
T = 2 x 70ms + 2 x 8ms + 70ms + 70ms = 296ms
___________________________________________________________________________
2/3
B
2.2-2 Range selection and overshoot monitoring
This module offers a choice between a voltage range and 6 thermocouple ranges for each of its inputs.
Overshoot monitoring for each of the channels can be selected during configuration.
The measurement range is divided into three zones :
• the nominal zone, corresponding to the selected range,
• the upper overshoot zone, located above the upper limit,
• the lower overshoot zone, located below the lower limit.
Lower overshoot range
Lower limit nominal zone
Upper limit
Upper overshoot range
Outside these limits (upper and lower overshoot zone), which correspond to the nominal values of the selected range (thermocouple limit values or -80mV and +80mV for the electrical range), the measurement circuit will be saturated, even if overshoot monitoring has not been selected.
If overshoot monitoring is activated, an overshoot error is indicated as follows :
• error bit %Imodule.channel.ERR = 1 indicates a channel fault,
• status word bit %MWmodule.channel.2:X1 = 1 indicates a range overshoot on the channel,
• status word bit %MWmodule.channel.2:X14 = 1 indicates a lower limit overshoot on the channel,
• status word bit %MWmodule.channel.2:X15 = 1 1 indicates an upper limit overshoot on the channel,
If overshoot monitoring is not activated, all the bits above remain at zero, irrespective of the measurement value.
For temperature ranges :
the range overshoot corresponds to an overshoot of the input range, an overshoot of the standard sensor measurement zone or an overshoot of the compensation temperature range (-5 °C to +85 °C).
___________________________________________________________________________
2/4
TSX AEY 1614 modules 2
2.2-3 Measurement filtering
First order filtering is performed with a filtering coefficient which can be modified from a programming terminal or by the program. The mathematical formula used is as follows : where :
Mes fn
=
αα
x Mes fn-1
+ (1α ) x Val bn
α = filter efficiency,
Mes fn
= filtered measurement at moment n,
Mes fn-1
= filtered measurement at moment n-1,
Val bn
= "raw" value measured at moment n.
During configuration the user selects a filter value from 7 possible values (0 to 6).
This value may be modified, even when the application is in RUN.
B
Filtering is a function of the cycle time T (see section 2.2-1).
Efficiency required
No filter
Low level of filtering
Medium level of 3 filtering 4
High level of filtering
5
6
0
1
2
Value to select
Corresponding Filter response
α time at 63%
0
0.750
0.875
0.937
0.969
0.984
0.992
0
4 T
8 T
16 T
32 T
64 T
128 T
Cut off frequency (Hz)
-
0.040/T
0.020/T
0.010/T
0.005/T
0.025/T
0.012/T
___________________________________________________________________________
2/5
B
2.2-4 Measurement display
This processing is used to select the display format in which the measurements are supplied to the user program. It is necessary to differentiate between electrical ranges and thermocouple or temperature probe ranges.
Electrical ranges -80..80mV
The measurement supplied to the application can be used directly by the operator who can choose between :
• using the standard display ±10000,
• setting his own display format parameters by indicating his required minimum and maximum values.
Standardized display (default). The values are displayed in a standard unit of -10000 to 10000 (-10000 0 /
000
to 10000 0 /
000
),
User display. The user can choose the range of values in which the measurements are expressed, by choosing :
- the lower limit corresponding to the minimum of the range : -10000 0 /
- the upper limit corresponding to the maximum of the range : +10000
000
0
,
/
000
.
These upper and lower limits are integers between -30000 and +30000.
Thermocouple ranges
The user can choose between two types of display :
• Temperature display. Values are supplied by default in tenths of a degree :
- tenths of a degree Celsius, if the unit chosen during configuration is °C,
- tenths of a degree Fahrenheit, if the unit chosen during configuration is °F.
• Standardized display. The user can choose a 0..10000 standard display (0 to
10000 0 /
000
), by specifying the minimum and maximum temperatures corresponding to 0 and 10000.
___________________________________________________________________________
2/6
TSX AEY 1614 modules 2
2.2-5 Sensor alignment
Alignment consists of eliminating a systematic shift observed by a given sensor, around a given operating point. An error linked to the process will be compensated but not an error linked to the control system. For this reason, replacing a module does not require a new alignment. On the other hand, replacing the sensor or changing the operating point of that sensor will require a new alignment.
B
Conversion line after alignment
Initial conversion line
0 100 %
The alignment value can be modified via a programming terminal, even if the
program is in RUN. For each input channel, the user can :
• display and modify the required measurement value,
• save the alignment value,
• know if the channel already has an alignment.
The alignment offset can also be modified via the program.
Alignment is performed when the channel is in normal operation, without affecting the operating modes of the module channel.
The maximum deviation between the measured value and the required value (aligned value) should not exceed 1500.
Note : bit %IWxy.i.1:X0 = 1 indicates that the channel is aligned.
___________________________________________________________________________
2/7
B
2.2-6 Recalibration
For TSX AEY 1614 modules, it is only necessary to recalibrate channels 0 to 8 in order to recalibrate the whole module.
Recalibration is performed from the recalibration screen in the configuration editor.
• select a channel and switch to recalibration mode
• connect a voltage reference to the voltage input of the channel to be recalibrated
(channel 0 to 8), according to the range to be recalibrated.
Voltage reference
+25.000 mV + 0.039%
+55.000 mV + 0.026%
+80.000 mV + 0.023%
+166.962 mV + 0.019%
+1.600V + 0.017%
Ranges to be recalibrated
B, R, S, T
U, N, L, K
J, E
Pt100
Telefast probe
• once the reference has been connected (for example 55mV) to the voltage input, select this reference on the screen using the dropdown list box.
• wait the necessary time for the voltage reference to stabilize, then confirm the selection using the "Confirm" button. Recalibration of the ranges linked to this reference is performed automatically.
The 1.25mA current source (for cold junction compensation) can also be recalibrated :
• select the source from the list of references and confirm. Confirming the selection activates the entry field for the measurement value of the source.
• measure the source with a precision multimeter (0.068% to 1.25mA)
• enter the value read on the multimeter in the entry field (in units of 100 nA) and confirm the entry.
The recalibration will only be accepted and saved in the module if the "Save" button is pressed.
The "Return to Factory Parameters" button can be clicked at any time. This button cancels all recalibrations and reverts to the initial recalibration (performed in the factory).
Note : In the recalibration screen, the values displayed in the left-hand section of the screen (channels
0 and 8) indicate the value measured on the voltage reference connected. The display format in tenths of mV (16000 displayed for 1.6V) is not intended to control the precision of the reference but simply indicates the presence of that reference.
___________________________________________________________________________
2/8
TSX AEY 1614 modules 2
2.3
Characteristics
2.3-1 General characteristics
Number of channels
Analog/digital conversion
Acquisition scan time
Wiring check
Digital filter
16
0..65535 points / 16 bits
70 ms/channel(1)
8 ms
1st order / User-definable time constant
Channel / ground dielectric voltage 1000 Vrms
Permissible common mode voltage 240VAC betw. channels and ground during operation
Permissible common mode voltage 250VDC or 280 VAC between channels during operation
Overvoltage permitted in differential ±30 VDC mode on inputs
Linearization
Cold junction compensation
Automatic
On Telefast between -5 and 60°C
External by Pt100 class A on channel 0, between -5 °C and +85 °C
2 W Max. dissipated power
PLC standards
Sensor standards
Electrical ranges
Max line R for wiring check
Rejection channel / ground
Rejection 50/60 Hz
UL508, UL94, IEC1131, IEC68, IEC801
IEC584, IEC751, DIN 43760, DIN 43710, NF C 42-330
± 80mV
500
Ω
110 dB (VDC-VAC 50/60Hz)
100 dB
(1) For electrical ranges, the data applies to the whole input range.
(2) For thermocouple ranges, the data includes internal or external cold junction compensation after a stabilization of 30 min. and is given for the middle of the standard range.
"IC" signifies that internal compensation is used; in this case care must be taken with the installation (refer to section 4.5-4).
"EC" signifies that external compensation is used, across channel 0 for Pt100, with a class A probe.
B
(1) for more information see section 2.2-2
___________________________________________________________________________
2/9
B
Characteristics of thermocouple ranges
In the following characteristics :
• data is given in degrees Celsius. To convert into degrees Farenheit, use the formula :
°F=9/5°C + 32
• the data given below is valid whatever the type of cold junction compensation : telefast or Pt100 class A
• the cold junction temperature used in the calculations is 25°C
• resolution is given in terms of range
• the data includes : electrical errors on the input channel and cold junction compensation input, software errors, exchange errors on cold junction compensation sensors.
Thermocouple sensor errors are not taken into account.
Thermocouple B
Range : 42.20°C to 1819.70°C
Resolution : 0.088°C
Temperature (°C)
600 °C
700 °C
800 °C
900 °C
1000 °C
1100°C
1200 °C
1300°C
1400 °C
1500°C
1600 °C
1700 °C
Error at 60°C (°C) Error at 60°C (°C) high precision mode normal mode
5.7
5.1
4.7
4.4
4.2
4
3.9
3.8
3.7
3.7
3.8
3.8
24.8
21.7
19.6
17.9
16.6
15.6
14.8
14.2
13.8
13.5
13.5
13.6
Error at 25°C (°C)
3.6
3.2
3
2.7
2.6
2.5
2.4
2.3
2.2
2.2
2.2
2.2
Thermocouple E
Range : -260.60°C to 990.90°C
Resolution : 0.031°C
Temperature (°C)
-200 °C
-100 °C
0 °C
100 °C
200 °C
300 °C
400 °C
500 °C
600 °C
700 °C
1000 °C
Error at 60°C (°C) Error at 60°C (°C) high precision mode normal mode
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.7
2.1
1.4
1.1
1.1
1.2
1.2
6.6
3.9
3.1
2.8
2.7
2.6
2.7
2.7
2.8
2.9
3.2
Error at 25°C (°C)
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.9
0.9
1.3
1
0.9
0.9
0.8
0.8
___________________________________________________________________________
2/10
TSX AEY 1614 modules 2
B
Thermocouple J
Range : -207.70°C to 1199.40°C
Resolution : 0.044°C
Temperature (°C)
-200 °C
-100 °C
0 °C
100 °C
200 °C
300 °C
400 °C
500 °C
600 °C
700 °C
1000 °C
1100°C
1200 °C
Error at 60°C (°C) Error at 60°C (°C) high precision mode normal mode
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.8
1.9
2
2.3
1.5
1.2
1.3
1.3
1.6
1.4
7.5
4.2
3.5
3.3
3.4
3.4
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.4
3.7
3.9
4
Error at 25°C (°C)
1
1
0.9
0.9
0.9
0.9
1.4
1
0.9
0.9
0.9
0.9
0.9
Thermocouple K
Range : -263.90°C to 1371.30°C
Resolution : 0.036°C
Temperature (°C)
-200 °C
-100 °C
0 °C
100 °C
200 °C
300 °C
400 °C
500 °C
600 °C
700 °C
800 °C
900 °C
1000 °C
1100°C
1200 °C
Error at 60°C (°C) Error at 60°C (°C) high precision mode normal mode
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.4
2.9
1.7
1.4
1.4
1.5
1.5
1.6
10.3
5.4
4.2
4.1
4.3
4.3
4.3
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.7
4.8
5
5.2
5.5
Error at 25°C (°C)
1
1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.2
1
1
1
1
1.8
1.2
1
___________________________________________________________________________
2/11
B
Thermocouple N
Range : -245.90°C to 1298.60°C
Resolution : 0.04°C
Temperature (°C)
-200 °C
-100 °C
0 °C
100 °C
200 °C
300 °C
400 °C
500 °C
600 °C
700 °C
800 °C
900 °C
1000 °C
1100°C
1200 °C
Error at 60°C (°C) Error at 60°C (°C) high precision mode normal mode
1.7
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2
2.1
2.2
4
2.1
1.8
1.7
1.6
1.6
1.7
15.4
7.6
6.1
5.5
5.1
4.8
4.7
4.7
4.7
4.7
4.8
4.9
5
5.1
5.3
0 °C
100 °C
200 °C
300 °C
400 °C
500 °C
600 °C
700 °C
800 °C
900 °C
1000 °C
1100 °C
1200 °C
1300 °C
1400 °C
1500 °C
1600 °C
Thermocouple R
Range : -48.30°C to 1768.90°C
Resolution : 0.061°C
Temperature (°C) Error at 60°C (°C) Error at 60°C (°C) high precision mode normal mode
3.6
3.5
3.5
3.4
3.4
3.4
3.3
3.4
6.1
4.6
4
3.8
3.6
3.4
3.4
3.5
3.6
27.6
19.7
16.8
15.4
14.6
14
13.5
13
12.6
12.3
11.9
11.7
11.5
11.4
11.5
11.6
11.8
Error at 25°C (°C)
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
2.4
1.4
1.3
1.2
1.1
1.1
1.1
Error at 25°C (°C)
2.3
2.2
2.1
2.1
2
2
2
1.9
4
3
2.6
2.4
2.3
1.9
1.9
1.9
2
___________________________________________________________________________
2/12
TSX AEY 1614 modules 2
B
0 °C
100 °C
200 °C
300 °C
400 °C
500 °C
600 °C
700 °C
800 °C
900 °C
1000 °C
1100 °C
1200 °C
1300 °C
1400 °C
1500 °C
1600 °C
Thermocouple S
Range : -48.60°C to 1768.20°C
Resolution : 0.069°C
Temperature (°C) Error at 60°C (°C) high precision mode
3.8
3.7
3.7
3.7
3.7
3.7
3.8
3.8
3.9
4
6
4.6
4.2
4
3.9
3.8
3.8
Error at 60°C (°C) normal mode
14.5
14.2
13.9
13.5
13.3
13.1
13.1
13.2
13.3
13.6
27
20.1
17.6
16.4
15.7
15.3
14.9
Error at 25°C (°C)
2.3
2.3
2.2
2.2
2.2
2.1
2.1
2.1
2.2
2.2
3.9
3
2.7
2.6
2.5
2.4
2.4
Thermocouple T
Range : -265.70°C to 399.70°C
Resolution : 0.017°C
Temperature (°C)
-200 °C
-100 °C
0 °C
100 °C
200 °C
300 °C
400 °C
Error at 60°C (°C) high precision mode
2.7
1.7
1.3
1.3
1.3
1.3
1.3
Error at 60°C (°C) normal mode
9.9
5.7
4.3
3.7
3.4
3.2
3.1
Error at 25°C (°C)
1.7
1.2
1
1
0.9
0.9
0.9
___________________________________________________________________________
2/13
B
Characteristics of the + 80mV range
12
13
14
15
8
9
10
11
6
7
4
5
2
3
0
1
20
21
22
23
16
17
18
19
24
25
Range : -265.70°C to 399.70°C
Resolution : 0.017°C
Voltage (mV) Error at 60°C (µV) Error at 60°C (µV) high precision mode normal mode
30.637
31.331
32.025
32.719
33.413
34.107
34.801
35.495
36.189
36.883
37.577
38.271
38.965
39.659
40.353
41.047
41.741
42.435
43.129
43.823
44517
45211
45905
46.599
47.293
47.987
144.037
144.731
145.425
146.119
146.813
147.507
148.201
148.895
149.589
150.283
150.977
151.671
152.365
153.059
153.753
154.447
155.141
155.835
156.529
157.223
157.917
158.611
159.305
159.999
160.693
161.387
Error at 25°C (µV)
19.262
19.324
19.386
19.448
19.51
19.572
19.634
19.696
19.758
19.82
19.882
19.944
20.006
20.068
20.13
20.192
20.254
20.316
20.378
20.44
20.502
20.564
20.626
20.688
20.75
20.812
___________________________________________________________________________
2/14
TSX AEY 1614 modules 2
2.4
Connections
2.4-1 Connector pinout
SUB D 0
Not connected
+IThc0
-IThc0
+IThc1
-IThc1
+IThc2
-IThc2
+IThc3
-IThc3
+IThc4
-IThc4
NC
STD
1
2
14
15
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
22
10
11
23
24
12
25
13
20
21
18
19
16
17
+IThc5
-IThc5
+IThc6
-IThc6
+IThc7
-IThc7
NC
SOCJC
MOCJC
0V CJC
NC
GND used for internal cold junction compensation
Not connected
+IThc8
-IThc8
+IThc9
-IThc9
+IThc10
-IThc10
+IThc11
-IThc11
+IThc12
-IThc12
NC
STD
SUB D 1
1
2
3
6
7
4
5
10
11
8
9
12
13
23
24
25
21
22
19
20
16
17
18
14
15
+IThc13
-IThc13
+IThc14
-IThc14
+IThc15
-IThc15
NC
NC
NC
0V CJC
NC
GND
+IThcx : +ve input of thermocouple channel x
-IThcx : -ve input of thermocouple channel x
SOCJC : TELEFAST internal cold junction compensation power supply output
MOCJC : TELEFAST internal cold junction compensation measurement input
0VCJC : 0 V internal cold junction compensation probe
STD
NC
: "Strap" to detect removal.
: Not connected
To detect removal of the terminal block, connect pin 13 to pin 15 (ground).
For use with Telefast, the removal detection
"strap" is integrated in the Telefast accessory.
B
___________________________________________________________________________
2/15
B
Sensor connection
It is advisable to use shielded cables and to link the shielding to the terminals designed for this purpose (Shielding connection).
For high level and thermocouple inputs, the "source + wiring" resistance should be less than 500
Ω
so as not to adversely affect the module performance.
For temperature probe inputs, the resistance of each of the wires in a 4-wire configuration should be less than 50
Ω
, which corresponds to a copper wire with a cross-section of
0.6 mm 2 and maximum overall length of 3000 m.
Use with Telefast
For use with a Telefast 7CPA12 accessory, the removal detection "strap" is integrated in the Telefast accessory.
• Telefast internal cold junction compensation
Telefast cold junction compensation is performed by a temperature probe (made of silicon) placed in the Telefast accessory. If this compensation mode is selected, no special wiring is required. Simply connect the Telefast accessory to the module using the TSX CAP030 cable.
In this case, all 16 channels can be wired as thermocouples.
To obtain the cold junction temperature value select "Read cold junction" in PL7.
• External cold junction compensation using the external Pt100 platinum probe
In the case of direct connection to Sub D connectors, it is the user's responsibility to connect a Pt 100 probe to measure the terminal block temperature, in which case
"external cold junction compensation" mode should be selected. Channels 0 and 8 are reserved for this measurement. Channel 0 conducts the current to the Pt 100 probe and channel 8 carries out the measurement at high impedance. In this case, only 14 channels can be wired as thermocouples. Wiring is as follows :
Terminals
Channel 0+
Channel 8+
2 (Sub D0)
2 (Sub D1)
Pt100
Channel 83 (Sub D1)
Channel 03 (Sub D0)
Use without Telefast
Cold junction compensation will be external. Channels 0 and 8 are used to wire a Pt 100
4-wire probe. In this case, only 14 channels can be wired as thermocouples.
___________________________________________________________________________
2/16
TSX AEY 1614 modules 2
2.4-2 TELEFAST pinout
After connecting the analog module to a TELEFAST accessory, via cable TSX CAP 030, the distribution of the analog channels on the TELEFAST terminals is as follows :
TELEFAST, reference ABE 7 CP A12
110
112
114
208
210
212
214
202
204
206
108
2
3
4
100
102
104
106
200
TELEFAST 25-pin SubD terminal no. connector pin no.
1 /
Type of signal
/
/
/
2 (SubD0)
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Input Thc+ V0/
Pt100_supp+
Input Thc+ V1 4 (SubD0)
6 (SubD0)
8 (SubD0)
Input Thc+ V2
Input Thc+ V3
10 (SubD0) Input Thc+ V4
14 (SubD0)
16 (SubD0)
18 (SubD0)
2 (SubD1)
Input Thc+ V5
Input Thc+ V6
Input Thc+ V7
Input Thc+ V8/
Pt100_Mes+
4 (SubD1)
6 (SubD1)
Input Thc+ V9
Input Thc+ V10
8 (SubD1) Input Thc+ V11
10 (SubD1) Input Thc+ V12
14 (SubD1) Input Thc+ V13
16 (SubD1) Input Thc+ V14
18 (SubD1) Input Thc+ V15
111
113
115
209
211
213
215
203
205
207
109
12
13
14
101
103
105
107
201
TELEFAST 25-pin SubD terminal no. connector pin no.
11 /
Type of signal
/
/
/
3 (SubD0)
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Input Thc- V0/
Pt100_supp-
Input Thc- V1 5 (SubD0)
7 (SubD0)
9 (SubD0)
Input Thc- V2
Input Thc- V3
11 (SubD0) Input Thc- V4
15 (SubD0)
17 (SubD0)
19 (SubD0)
3 (SubD1)
Input Thc- V5
Input Thc- V6
Input Thc- V7
Input Thc- V8/
Pt100_Mes-
5 (SubD1)
7 (SubD1)
Input Thc- V9
Input Thc- V10
9 (SubD1) Input Thc- V11
11 (SubD1) Input Thc- V12
15 (SubD1) Input Thc- V13
17 (SubD1) Input Thc- V14
19 (SubD1) Input Thc- V15
B
___________________________________________________________________________
2/17
B
___________________________________________________________________________
2/18
3.1
Presentation
General
The TSX AEY 420 module is an analog input module with 4 high-level fast inputs.
Linked to sensors or transmitters, they perform monitoring, measurement and continuous process control functions.
The TSX AEY 420 module offers the range
± 10 V, 0..10 V, 0..5 V, 1..5 V, 0..20 mA or
4..20 mA for each of its inputs, depending on the choice made during configuration.
3 TSX AEY 420 modules
B
TSX AEY 420
TSX AEY 420 module functions
The TSX AEY 420 input module performs the following functions :
TSX AEY 420
1000 Vrms isolation
Channel selection
Optocoupler
Filter
A / D
Optocoupler
Processing
X Bus interface
Filter
Internal ref.
9
DC/DC converter
5 V
7
1 2 3 4
8
5 6
___________________________________________________________________________
3/1
B
1 Connection to the process and scanning of input channels
• physical connection to the process, via SubD connector(s),
• adaptation of input signals by analog filtering,
2 Multiplexing of input signals
• scanning of input channels via solid state multiplexing.
3 Adapting input signals
4 Digitalization of input measurement analog signals (16-bit analog/digital converter).
5 Converting input measurements to a unit which can be handled by the user
• acceptance of scaling and alignment coefficients to be applied to the measurements, as well as the autocalibration coefficients of the module,
• measurement scaling, according to the parameters set during configuration.
6 Interface and communication with the application
• management of exchanges via X Bus,
• geographical addressing,
• reception of module and channel configuration parameters,
• transmission of measured values, as well as the module status, to the application.
7 Module power supply
8 Monitoring the module and indicating possible faults to the application
• test for the conversion circuit,
• test for range overshoot on the channels,
• test for the presence of the terminal block,
• test of watchdog,
• test for threshold overshoot on the channels.
9 Internal reference : the module can calculate its autocalibration coefficients by reading an internal voltage calibration reference.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/2
TSX AEY 420 modules 3
3.2
Input processing
3.2-1 Measurement sampling
The scan cycle is not dependent on the number of inputs used. It lasts 1 ms if event processing has not been activated.
B
Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3
CT = 1 ms
The scan cycle is increased by 150 µs per channel if event processing is activated.
Examples :
• if event processing is activated on one of the channels, the cycle time is 1.15ms
• if event processing is activated on all 4 channels, the cycle time is 1.6ms
3.2-2 Range selection and overshoot monitoring
Each module offers a choice of 6 ranges for each of its inputs : ± 10 V, 0..10 V, 0..5 V,
1..5 V, 0..20 mA and 4..20 mA.
The module monitors overshoot for the chosen range, ie. it checks that the measurement is between the upper and lower limits.
Overshoot monitoring is optional. The measurement range is divided into 5 zones:
• the nominal zone, corresponding to the selected range,
• the upper tolerance zone,, with values between the upper value of the range (eg. :
+10V for a range +10V/-10V) and the upper limit,
• lower tolerance zone, with values between the lower value of the range (eg.: -10V for a range +10V/-10V) and the lower limit,
• the upper overshoot zone, located above the upper limit,
• the lower overshoot zone, located below the lower limit.
Lower limit
Lower overshoot zone
Lval range
Lower tolerance zone nominal zone
Uval range
Upper tolerance zone
Upper limit
Upper overshoot zone
___________________________________________________________________________
3/3
B
When the value read is in one of the 2 tolerance zones, warning bit %IWxy.i.1:X5 (for the lower zone) or %IWxy.i.1:X6 (for the upper zone) is set to 1.
If the read value is in one of the 2 overshoot zones (and overshoot monitoring is required), the following bits are set to 1 :
• error bit %Ixy.ERR,
• range overshoot bit %MWxy.i.2:X1,
• bit %MWxy.i.2:X14 if there is a lower limit overshoot,
• bit %MWxy.i.2:X15 if there is an upper limit overshoot
The measured value is then limited.
The upper and lower limits can be configured separately.
They can have whole values between the following values :
Lower limit = Lval range + lower tolerance zone
Upper limit = Uval range + upper tolerance zone
Range
Range
Lower tolerance zone
Default value
Min value
Max value
Upper tolerance zone
Default value
Min value
Max value
Bipolar ± 10V -0.125 x FS/2 0
Unipolar
0..10 V, 0..5 V-0.125 x FS 0
1..5 V, 0..20 mA
4..20 mA
Standardized -1250 0
0 x
User
Bipolar
± 10 V
-0.125
x
∆ range/2
User -0.125
Unipolar x
0..10 V,0..5 V
∆ range
1..5 V, 0..20 mA
4..20 mA
0 x
-0.25 x FS/2 0.125 x FS/2 0
-0.25 x FS
-2500
-0.25
x
∆ range/2
-0.25
x
∆ range
0.125 xFS
1250
0.125
x
∆ range/2
0.125
x
∆ range
0
0
0 x
0 x
0.25 xFS/2
0.25 xFS
2500
0.25
x
∆ range/2
0.25
x
∆ range where FS = 20 (range ± 10V and 0..20mA), = 10 (range ± 5V and 0..10V), = 5 (range 0..5V),
= 4 (range 1..5V), = 16 (range 4..20mA)
___________________________________________________________________________
3/4
TSX AEY 420 modules 3
3.2-3 Thresholds and event processing
The TSX AEY 420 module manages 2 thresholds per channel (threshold 0 and 1). When the thresholds are crossed, the module can trigger event processing.
The threshold values are entered and modified in the adjustment screen.
The user associates event processing with an analog channel when configuring the module. The event which triggers event processing could be caused by :
• the measurement dropping below threshold 0 (
↓
T0)
• the measurement rising above threshold 0 (
↑
T0),
• the measurement dropping below threshold 1 (
↓
T1),
• the measurement rising above threshold 1 (
↑
T1),
These causes can be masked or unmasked by the program using the bits of word
%QWxy.i : bit 0 for
↑
T0, bit 1 for
↓
T0, bit 2 for
↑
T1, bit 3 for
↓
T1 (0=masking, 1=unmasking).
The bits of word %IWxy.i.2 indicate the source of the event : bit 0 for
↑
T0, bit 1 for
↓
T0, bit 2 for
↑
T1, bit 3 for
↓
T1 (0=no event, 1=event).
Example :
B
%QWxy.0:X0
%QWxy.0:X1
%QWxy.0:X2
%QWxy.0:X3
Threshold 1
Threshold 0
E v t
%IWxy.0.2:X0
%IWxy.0.2:X1
%IWxy.0.2:X2
E v t
E v t E v t
Note : In this example, -T1 is inhibited so %IWxy.0.2:X2 remains at 0 and does not generate an event.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/5
B
Comments :
• Input word %IWxy.i.2 is only updated when a new event cause appears.
• If the measured value is equal to the threshold but does not cross it, no events are triggered.
• Event processing can be activated or deactivated in the configuration of each channel.
• An event number from 0 to 63 is associated with each channel. The number selected determines the priority of the event (0=highest priority, 1 to 63 lowest priority).
3.2-4 Measurement display
The measurement supplied to the application can be used directly by the operator, who can choose between :
• using the 0..10000 standardized display (or ±10000 for the range ±10 V),
• setting his own display format parameters by indicating his required minimum and maximum values.
Standardized display. Values are displayed in standard units :
• for a unipolar range of 0-10 V, 0-5 V, 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA, they are displayed from 0 to
10000 (0 0 /
000
to 10000 0 /
000
),
• for the bipolar range of ± 10 V, they are displayed from - 10000 to + 10000
(-10000 0 /
000
to +10000 0 /
000
).
User display. The user can choose the range of values in which the measurements are expressed, by choosing :
• the lower limit corresponding to the minimum of the range 0 0 /
000
(or - 10000 0 /
000
),
• the upper limit corresponding to the maximum of the range + 10000 0 /
000
.
These upper and lower limits are integers between -30000 and +30000.
For example, suppose a conditioning unit indicates information about pressure on a
4-20 mA loop, with 4 mA corresponding to 3200 mB and 20 mA corresponding to
9600 mB. The user can then select the User format, by defining the following upper and lower limits :
• 0 0 /
000
<=> 3200 as lower limit,
• 10000 0 /
000
<=> 9600 as upper limit.
The values transmitted to the program will vary between 3200 (= 4 mA) and 9600
(= 20 mA).
___________________________________________________________________________
3/6
TSX AEY 420 modules 3
3.2-5 Sensor alignment
Alignment consists of eliminating a systematic shift observed by a given sensor, around a given operating point. An error linked to the process will be compensated but not an error linked to the control system. For this reason, replacing a module does not require a new alignment. On the other hand, replacing the sensor or changing the operating point of that sensor will require a new alignment.
B
Conversion line after alignment
Initial conversion line
100 % 0
For example, suppose that a pressure sensor, linked to a conditioning unit (1mV/mB), indicates 3200 mB, while the actual pressure is 3210 mB. The value measured by the module in standard scale will be 3200 (3.20 V). The user can align the measurement to the value 3210 (required value). After this alignment procedure, the measurement channel will apply a systematic offset of +10 to any new measurement.
The alignment value which should be entered is 3210.
The alignment value can be modified via a programming terminal, even if the
program is in RUN. For each input channel, the user can :
• display and modify the required measurement value,
• save the alignment value,
• know if the channel already has an alignment.
The alignment offset can also be modified via the program.
Alignment is performed when the channel is in normal operation, without affecting the operating modes of the module channel.
The maximum deviation between the measured value and the required value (aligned value) should not exceed ± 1000.
Note : bit %IWxy.i.1:X0 = 1 indicates that the channel is aligned.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/7
B
3.3
Characteristics
3.3-1 Input characteristics
Number of channels 4 common point channels
Analog / digital conversion SAR (successive approximation register)
Resolution 16 bits (52400 points for voltage/13100 points for current)
Acquisition scan time 1 ms for the 4 channels
Monotonicity yes (on 15 bits)
Max. permissible overvoltage ± 30 V for voltage on inputs ± 30 mA for current
Input filter
Dielectric voltage channels / ground
2nd order / overvoltage coefficient : 0.5 Cut off frequency at -6dB : 3.4 kHz
500 V rms.
Isolation between channels Common point
Isolation betw. bus and channels 500 V rms
Crosstalk between channels - 80 dB
Permissible common mode 240 VAC rms voltage between channels 150 VDC and ground during operation
80 dB Common mode rejection channel / ground (DC,50Hz,60Hz)
Wire break detection No (detection out of range for 4/20 mA)
Max. dissipated power
Standards
Electrical range
Full scale (FS)
Resolution (1)
Input • on impedance • off
Maximum error at 25 °C
Max. error at 0 to 60 °C
Temperature drift
Range overshoot
4 W
IEC 1131, CSA22.2, UL508
± 10 V / 0..10 V 0..5 V / 1..5 V 0..20 mA / 4..20 mA
10 V
0.4 mV
2.2M
Ω
10k
Ω
± 0.1% FS
± 0.2% FS
30 ppm / °C
± 12.5 V
(range ± 10 V)
-2.5..12.5 V
(range 0..10 V)
5 V
0.4 mV
2.2M
Ω
10k
Ω
± 0.2% FS
± 0.4% FS
30 ppm / °C
0..6.25 V
(range 0.. 5 V)
0..6 V
(range 1..5 V)
20 mA
1.5
µ
A
250
Ω
± 0.1 %
250
Ω
± 0.1 %
± 0.2% FS
± 0.4% FS
60 ppm / °C
0..25 mA
(range 0.. 20 mA)
0..24 mA
(range 4..20 mA)
Precision of internal conversion resistance
/ / 0.1% - 25 ppm / °C
(1) 52 400 points for ± 10 V, 26200 points for 0..10 V, 13100 points for 0..5 V or 0..20mA, 10400 points
3/8
TSX AEY 420 modules 3
B
3.4
Connections
3.4-1 Connector pinout
TSX AEY 420
(1) +IV0
(2) +IC0
(3) COM1
(4) +IV2
(5) +IC2
(6) COM3
(7) NC
(8) NC
(9) NC
(10) NC
(11) NC
(12) NC
(13) STD
12
13
9
10
7
8
11
5
6
3
4
1
2
14 COM0 (14)
15 +IV1 (15)
16 +IC1 (16)
17 COM2 (17)
18 +IV3 (18)
19 +IC3 (19)
20 NC (20)
21 NC (21)
22 NC (22)
23 NC (23)
24 NC (24)
25 NC (25)
+IVx : +ve voltage input of channel x
+ICx : +ve current input of channel x
COMx: -ve input of channel x (voltage or current)
STD : Strap to detect removal.
NC : not connected
Notes :
• COM0, COM1, COM2 and COM3 are connected internally in the module.
• For use with Telefast, the removal detection strap should be located on the Telefast accessory.
___________________________________________________________________________
3/9
B
3.4-2 TELEFAST pinout
After connecting the analog module to a TELEFAST accessory, via cable TSX CAP 030, the distribution of the analog channels on the TELEFAST terminals is as follows :
TELEFAST, reference ABE 7 CP A02
Type of signal
109
110
111
112
113
104
105
106
107
108
114
115
4
100
101
102
103
1
2
3
TELEFAST 25-pin SubD terminal no. connector pin no.
/
/
/
/
1
2
15
16
8
21
22
10
11
4
5
18
19
7
24
25
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
+IV2
+IC2
+IV3
+IC3
NC
Ground
STD (1)
STD (1)
STD (2)
+IV0
+IC0
+IV1
+IC1
209
210
211
212
213
204
205
206
207
208
214
215
TELEFAST 25-pin SubD terminal no. connector pin no.
Supp1
Supp2
Supp3
/
/
/
Supp4
200
201
202
203
/
/
/
14
3
/
9
/
/
23
/
17
/
6
20
/
12
Type of signal
Ground
NC
Ground
NC
Ground
NC
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
COM0
Ground
COM1
Ground
COM2
Ground
COM3
Ground
NC
NC : Not connected
Note : To perform terminal block detection, connect terminals STD (1) and STD (2) using a strap
___________________________________________________________________________
3/10
TSX AEY 420 modules 3
TELEFAST, reference ABE 7 CP A03
110
111
112
113
114
115
105
106
107
108
109
100
101
102
103
104
2
3
4
TELEFAST 25-pin SubD terminal no. connector pin no.
1 /
/
/
/
/
/
18
19
21
/
/
15
/
16
/
22
/
24
/
25
Type of signal
+IV3
+IC3
Ground
NC
NC
NC
Ground
NC
NC
NC
Ground
0 V
0 V
0 V
0 V
IS1(*)
+IV1
+IC1
Ground
IS3 (*)
(*) ISx : 24 V supply on channel x
210
211
212
213
214
215
205
206
207
208
209
200
201
202
203
204
TELEFAST 25-pin SubD terminal no. connector pin no.
Supp1 /
Supp2
Supp3
Supp4
/
/
/
/
/
1
2
14 / 3
4
5
/
17 / 6
7
8
20 / 9
/
10
11
23 /12
Type of signal
24 V (sensor supp.)
24 V (sensor supp.)
0 V (sensor supp.)
0 V (sensor supp.)
IS0 (*)
+IV0
+IC0
COM0 / COM1
IS2 (*)
NC
NC
NC
NC
+IV2
+IC2
COM2 / COM3
IS4 or IS12 (*)
NC
NC
NC
B
___________________________________________________________________________
3/11
B
TELEFAST, reference ABE 7 CP A21
2
3
4
TELEFAST 25-pin SubD terminal no. connector pin no.
1 /
100
101
102
103
104
/
/
/
1
2
15
16
4
Type of signal
Ground
STD (1)
STD (1)
STD (2)
+IV0
+IC0
+IV1
+IC1
+IV2
TELEFAST 25-pin SubD terminal no. connector pin no.
Supp1
Supp2
Supp3
Supp4
200
201
202
203
204
/
/
/
/
/
3
/
14
17
Type of signal
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
COM0
Ground
COM1
Ground
COM2
105
106
5
18
+IC2
+IV3
205
206
/
6
Ground
COM3
107 19 +IC3 207 / Ground
Note : To perform terminal block detection, connect terminals STD (1) and STD (2) using a strap
___________________________________________________________________________
3/12
4 TSX AEY 414 modules
4.1
Presentation
General
The TSX AEY 414 is a multirange input module, with 4 inputs isolated from each other. This module provides for each of its inputs, according to the selection made during configuration, the range :
• B, E, J, K, L, N, R, S, T, U thermocouple or electrical range -13..+63 mV,
• 2 or 4-wire Pt100, Pt1000, Ni1000 temperature probes, or ohmic range : 0..400
Ω
, 0..3850
Ω
,
• high level ± 10 V, 0..10 V, ±5 V, 0..5 V (0..20 mA with an external shunt) or 1..5 V (4..20 mA with an external shunt). Note that external shunts are delivered with the product.
Note
The terminal block is supplied separately under reference TSX BLY 01.
Functions
This input module performs the following functions :
TSX AEY 414
2830 Vrms isolation
Optocoupler
1780 Vrms isolation
Gain selection
Channel selection (0..3)
B
Optocoupler
Optocoupler
A / D Processing
X Bus interface
Optocoupler
Optocoupler
DC/DC converter
Internal temperature measurement
5 V 5
Function 1 2 3 4
4/1
B
1 Connection to the process and scanning of input channels
• physical connection to the process, via screw terminal block,
• gain selection, according to the characteristics of the input signals, defined for each channel during configuration (high level, thermocouple or temperature probe range),
• multiplexing
2 Digitalization of input measurement analog signals
3 Converting input measurements to a unit which can be handled by the user
• acceptance of recalibration and alignment coefficients to be applied to the measurements (channel by channel and range by range), as well as the autocalibration coefficients of the module,
• linearization of the measurement provided by Pt or Ni temperature probes,
• linearization of the measurement and acceptance of the internal or external cold junction compensation, in the case of thermocouples,
• measurement scaling, according to the parameters set during configuration
(physical units or user range).
4 Interface and communication with the application
• management of exchanges via X Bus,
• geographical addressing,
• reception of module and channel configuration parameters,
• transmission of measured values, as well as the module status, to the application.
5 Module power supply
6 Monitoring the module and indicating possible faults to the application
• test for the conversion circuit,
• test for range overshoot on the channels,
• test for the presence of the terminal block,
• test of the sensor link (except on ranges ±10 V, 0..10 V, ±5 V, 0..5 V and 0..20 mA),
• test for the watchdog.
___________________________________________________________________________
4/2
TSX AEY 414 modules 4
4.2
Input processing
4.2-1 Measurement sampling
The TSX AEY 414 module scan time and consequently the sampling rate are independent of the AC supply frequency (50 Hz or 60 Hz).
The measurements are linked together in the following way : channel 0, channel 1, channel
2, channel 3 and internal selection. Internal selection corresponds to the internal temperature or internal references for module autocalibration or to the line compensation for the temperature probe ranges.
110 ms 110 ms
Tconv Ttf Tconv Tconv
Channel 0 Channel 1 Internal selection
550 ms
B
Tconv is the time taken to convert a channel : Tconv = 106 ms,
Ttf is the time taken for the wiring test : Ttf = 4 ms.
Internal selection does not require a wiring test, except for line compensation.
The scan is always executed in the same way and lasts 550 ms.
4.2-2 Range selection and overshoot monitoring
Using the software, the user can choose one of the following ranges for each channel :
±10 V, 0..10 V, ±5 V, 0..5 V (0..20 mA), 1..5 V (4..20 mA), -13..+63 mV, 0..400 W,
0..3850 W, Pt100, Pt1000, Ni1000, thermocouple B, E, J, K, L, N, R, S, T and U.
For thermocouple ranges, cold junction compensation is performed by the module.
However, the cold junction temperature can be measured via the module terminal block
(by an internal probe in the module) or remotely via a Pt100 Class A external probe (not supplied), connected to channel 0 of the module.
Whatever the selected range, the module monitors overshoot; that is, it checks that the measurement is between the upper and lower limits defined by the following table. Outside these limits, saturation of the analog measurement circuit is likely and an overshoot fault is signaled by a bit which can be used by the program (error bit %Ixy.i.ERR = 1 signals a fault on the channel and status word bit %MWxy.i.2:X1 = 1 indicates a range overshoot on the channel).
___________________________________________________________________________
4/3
B
For ranges ±10 V, 0..10 V, ±5 V, 0..5 V, 1..5 V, 0..20 mA and 4..20 mA : modules generally allow a 5% positive overshoot of the electrical range.
For temperature ranges :
the range overshoot corresponds to an overshoot of the input range, an overshoot of the standard sensor measurement zone or an overshoot of the compensation temperature range (-5 °C to +85 °C). The use of internal compensation in a normal environment (0 °C to +60 °C) is compatible with thresholds -5 °C to +85 °C.
Overshoot values
TSX AEY 414 Lower
Range limit
±10 V
0..10 V
± 5 V
-10.5 V
-0.5 V
-5.25 V
0..5 V
1..5 V
0..20 mA
4..20 mA
-0.25 V
+0.8 V
-1 mA
+3.2 mA
Upper limit
+10.5 V
+10.5 V
+5.25 V
+5.25 V
+5.2 V
+21 mA
+20.8 mA
Default values
Min. limit in
User mode
Max. limit in
User mode
±10500 Min - 5%(max-min)/2 Max + 5%(max-min)/2
-500..+10500 Min - 5%(max-min) Max + 5%(max-min)
±10500 Min - 5%(max-min) Max + 5%(max-min)
-500..+10500 Min - 5%(max-min)
-500..+10500 Min - 5%(max-min)
-500..+10500 Min - 5%(max-min)
-500..+10500 Min - 5%(max-min)
Max + 5%(max-min)
Max + 5%(max-min)
Max + 5%(max-min)
Max + 5%(max-min)
K
L
B
E
J
N
R
S
T
U
Pt100
Pt1000
Ni1000
0 °C (32 °F) +1802 °C (+3276 °F) d°C or d°F
-270 °C (-454 °F) +812 °C (+1495 °F) d°C or d°F
-210 °C (-346 °F) +1065 °C (+1953 °F) d°C or d°F
-270 °C (-454 °F) +1372 °C (+2502 °F) d°C or d°F
-200 °C (-328 °F) +900 °C (+1652 °F) d°C or d°F
-270 °C (-454 °F) +1300 °C (+2372 °F) d°C or d°F
-50 °C (-58 °F) +1769 °C (+3216 °F) d°C or d°F
-50 °C (-58 °F) +1769 °C (+3216 °F) d°C or d°F
-270 °C (-454 °F) +400 °C (+752 °F) d°C or d°F
-200°C (-328 °F) +600 °C (+1112 °F) d°C or d°F
-200 °C (-328 °F) +850 °C (+1562 °F) d°C or d°F
-200 °C (-328 °F) +800 °C (+1472 °F) d°C or d°F
-60 °C (-76 °F) +240 °C (+464 °F) d°C or d°F
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
-500
-500
-500
+10000
+10000
+10000
+10000
+10000
+10000
+10000
+10000
+10000
+10000
+10000
+10000
+10000
-13..+63 mV
0..400
Ω
0..3850
Ω
-13 mV
0
0
+63 mV
400
Ω
3850
Ω
-2064..10000
Min
0..10000
0..10000
Min
Min
Max
Max
Max
___________________________________________________________________________
4/4
TSX AEY 414 modules 4
4.2-3 Sensor link monitoring
Sensor link monitoring imposes a maximum value on the resistance, Rs, of the sensors connected to the module inputs. This maximum Rs value is compatible with normal operation of TSX AEY 414 module (refer to the following table).
A sensor link fault can correspond to a short-circuit (S.C.) or an open circuit (O.C.) according to the type of sensor used. However, report is global and makes no distinction between a short-circuit and an open circuit.
Notes
• the module manages the consistency between the terminal block fault and the sensor link fault.
• the sensor link fault is not detected in the 0-5 V / 0-20 mA range (this function is not offered to the user and the wiring test is not performed).
• in the 1-5 V/ 4-20 mA range, the wiring test is only effective if the 250
Ω
shunt is connected. If the shunt is not connected, the wiring test may not detect a fault, even if the cables are cut.
• in the case of temperature probes, the sensor link fault caused by a line compensation anomaly can appear or disappear with a maximum delay of 12 s, in relation to the occurrence of the anomaly.
Sensor
Max Rs
C.0.
S.C.
Pt1000 / Ni1000 temperature probes
-
> 3850
Ω
150
Ω
Pt100 temperature probe
-
> 400
Ω
15
Ω
Thermocouples
-15/60 mV, B, E, J,
K, L, N, R, S, T, U
100
Ω
100000
Ω not detectable
B
4.2-4 Measurement filtering
First order filtering is performed with a filtering coefficient which can be modified from a programming terminal or by the program. The mathematical formula used is as follows : where :
Mes fn
=
αα
x Mes fn-1
+ (1-
α
) x Val bn
α
= filter efficiency,
Mes fn
= filtered measurement at moment n,
Mes fn-1
= filtered measurement at moment n-1,
Val bn
= "raw" value measured at moment n.
___________________________________________________________________________
4/5
B
During configuration the user selects a filter value from 7 possible values (0 to 6).
This value may be subsequently modified, even when the application is in RUN.
Efficiency required
No filtering 0
Low level of filtering
Medium level of 3 filtering 4
1
2
High level of filtering
5
6
Value to select
Corresponding Filter response
ααααα time at 63%
0
0.750
0.875
0.937
0.969
0.984
0.992
0
1.91 s
4.12 s
8.45 s
17.5 s
34.1 s
68.5 s
Cut off frequency (Hz)
-
0.083
0.039
0.019
0.0091
0.0046
0.0022
4.2-5 Measurement display
This processing is used to select the display format in which the measurements are supplied to the user program. It is necessary to differentiate between electrical ranges and thermocouple or temperature probe ranges.
Electrical ranges
The measurement supplied to the application can be used directly by the operator who can choose between :
• using 0..10000 standardized display (or ±10000 for the range ±10 V),
• setting his own display format parameters by indicating his required minimum and maximum values.
Standardized display (default). Values are displayed in standard units :
- for a unipolar range 0..10 V, 0..5 V, 0..20 mA or 4..20 mA, they are displayed from
0 to 10000 (0 0 /
000
to 10000 0 /
000
),
- for ± 10 V and ±5 V bipolar ranges, they are displayed from -10000 to +10000
(-10000 0 /
000
to +10000 0 /
000
).
User display. The user can choose the range of values in which the measurements are expressed, by choosing :
- the lower limit corresponding to the minimum of the range : 0 0 /
000
(or -10000 0 /
000
),
- the upper limit corresponding to the maximum of the range : +10000 0 /
000
.
These upper and lower limits are integers between -30000 and +30000.
___________________________________________________________________________
4/6
TSX AEY 414 modules 4
Thermocouple and temperature probe ranges
The user has the choice of two types of display :
• Temperature display. Values are supplied by default in tenths of a degree :
- tenths of a degree Celsius, if the unit chosen during configuration is °C,
- tenths of a degree Fahrenheit, if the unit chosen during configuration is °F.
• Standardized display. The user can choose a 0..10000 standardized display (0 to
10000 0 /
000
), by specifying the minimum and maximum temperatures corresponding to 0 and 10000.
B
4.2-6 Sensor alignment
Alignment consists of eliminating a systematic shift observed by a given sensor, around a given operating point. An error linked to the process will be compensated but not an error linked to the control system. For this reason, replacing a module does not require a new alignment. On the other hand, replacing the sensor or changing the operating point of that sensor will require a new alignment.
Conversion line after alignment
Initial conversion line
0 100 %
For example, suppose that a Pt100 probe, plunged into melting ice (probe adjustment procedure) displays 10 °C after measurement (and not 0 °C). The user can align the measurement to the value 0 (required value). After this alignment procedure, the measurement channel will apply a systematic offset of -10 to any new measurement.
The alignment value can be modified via a programming terminal, even if the
program is in RUN. For each input channel, the user can :
• display and modify the required measurement value,
• save the alignment value,
• know if the channel already has an alignment.
Alignment is performed when the channel is in normal operation, without affecting the operating modes of the module channel.
The maximum deviation between the measured value and the required value (aligned value) should not exceed ± 1000.
___________________________________________________________________________
4/7
B
4.2-7 Recalibration
Recalibrating a module :
• corrects long-term drifts on the module,
• improves precision at an ambient temperature other than 25 °C (recommended).
The recalibration range is limited to between ±1% of the full scale, since beyond that range the module will consider there to be an analog input circuit anomaly.
Recalibration (full scale) is performed on each of the channels and in each of the ranges, by placing a calibration source directly on the input terminals. The following table indicates the calibration value to be supplied, according to the user range :
User range ±10 V, 0..10 V, ±5 V, 0..5 V, Pt100, Pt1000 and
1..5 V, 0..20 mA & 4..20 mA Ni1000
Calibration voltage 10 V ±0.018%
Current value /
2.5 V ±0.016%
2.5 mA ±0.0328%
-13..63 mV, B, E, J, K, L,
N, R, S, T and U
/
60 mV ±0.028%
• In the case of temperature probes, recalibration of the current source takes place channel by channel. This consists of reading the value supplied by each of the current sources (only in 2.5 mA) to within 0.0328% and supplying the value in units of 100 nA.
The recalibration procedure is available via the PL7 Junior software debug screens
(refer to the installation manual for analog applications).
• for the calibration voltages 10 V and 2.5 V, the expected value read after calibration is 10000 ±2. For a calibration voltage of 60 mV, the value read is expected to be
9523 ±2 (10000 corresponding to full scale, ie 63 mV).
___________________________________________________________________________
4/8
TSX AEY 414 modules 4
4.3
Characteristics
4.3-1 General characteristics
Number of channels
Analog/digital conversion
Acquisition scan time
4
0..65535 points / 16 bits
550 ms
Digital filter 1st order / User-definable time constant
Channel / ground dielectric voltage 1780 Vrms
Dielectric voltage between channels 2830 Vrms
Permissible common mode voltage 240 VAC or 100 VDC betw. channels and ground during operation
Permissible common mode voltage between channels during operation
415 VAC or 200 VDC
Overvoltage permitted in differential ±30 VDC (powered on, without 250
Ω
external resistors) mode on inputs ±15 VDC (powered off, without 250
Ω
external resistors)
Overcurrent permitted on inputs ±25 mA (powered on/off, with 250
Ω
external shunts)
Linearization Automatic
Cold junction compensation
Temperature probe current
Max. dissipated power
Internal and automatic
External by Pt100 class A on channel 0, between -5 °C and +85 °C
2.5 mA DC for 100
Ω
and 559
µ
A DC for 1000
Ω
4.7 W
PLC standards
Sensor standards
Electrical ranges
Full Scale
Max. error at 25 °C (2)
±10 V 0..10 V
10 V 10 V
±5 V
(1)
5 V
UL508, UL94, IEC1131, IEC68, IEC801
IEC584, IEC751, DIN 43760, DIN 43710, NF C 42-330
0..5 V
(1)
5 V
1..5 V 0..20 mA 4..20 mA -13..63 mV 0..400
Ω
0..3850
Ω
(1) (1)
5 V 20 mA 20 mA 63 mV 400
Ω
3850
Ω
0.27% 0.16% 0.27% 0.22% 0.27% 0.36% 0.45% 0.19% 0.13% 0.22%
FS FS FS FS FS FS FS FS FS FS
Max. error from 0.50% 0.39% 0.50% 0.45% 0.56% 0.69% 0.86% 0.44% 0.27% 0.48%
0 to 60 °C (2) FS FS FS FS FS FS FS FS FS FS
Temp. probe Pt100 according to IEC Pt1000 according to IEC Ni1000 according to DIN ranges
Max. error at 25 °C (3)
1.2 °C 2.5 °C 1.1 °C
Max. error from
0 to 60 °C (3)
2.4 °C 5.0 °C 2.0 °C
(1) The parameters for ranges 0..5 V and 0..20 mA or 1..5 V and 4..20 mA are set in the same way during configuration; the only difference lies in their installation (250 W shunt or not).
(2) For electrical ranges, the data applies to the whole input range.
(3) For temperature probe ranges, the data is given for the middle of the standard range, in 4-
4/9
B
B
General characteristics (continued)
Thermocouple
B ranges (31)
Max error IC
at 25 °C (4) EC
Max error IC
0 to 60 °C EC
E J K L N R S T U
3.5°C 6.1°C 7.3°C 7.8°C 7.5°C 6.0°C 6.0°C 6.6°C 6.6°C 5.4°C
/ 1.5°C 1.9°C 2.3°C 2.0°C 2.0°C 3.2°C 3.4°C 1.5°C 1.5°C
8.1°C 8.1°C 9.5°C 10.5°C 9.8°C 8.7°C 11.0°C 12.0°C 8.8°C 7.3°C
/ 3.2°C 4.0°C 4.7°C 4.2°C 4.3°C 7.7°C 8.5°C 3.3°C 3.1°C
(4) For thermocouple ranges, the data includes internal or external cold junction compensation after a stabilization of 30 min. and is given for the middle of the standard range.
"IC" signifies that internal compensation is used; in this case care must be taken with the installation (refer to section 4.5-4).
"EC" signifies that external compensation is used, across channel 0 for Pt100, with a class A probe.
4.3-2 Detailed input characteristics
The TSX AEY 414 module has 23 ranges on each of its inputs, which can be configured channel by channel.
Precision
The precision of each input is given by the following formula :
Measurement = C + K x M where C = constant for the range examined,
K = proportionality coefficient,
M = absolute value of the measurement.
The measurement error is therefore composed of a constant value (C) and a value proportional to the measurement (K), which can be different depending on the polarity of the measurement.
For thermocouple ranges, the measurement error also takes into account the cold junction compensation error and the linearization error, and for current ranges it takes into account the external resistance error (shunt).
Crosstalk
Crosstalk is expressed in dB and is given by the following formula :
Crosstalk = 20 x Log
10
(V
M
/ V m
) where V
M
V m
= full scale voltage in the least sensitive range,
= error voltage on the following channel, configured in the most sensitive range (due to the presence of V
M
).
In this case, V
M
equals +10 V and V m
is the error due to the presence of +10 V on the following channel configured for ±20 mV.
___________________________________________________________________________
4/10
TSX AEY 414 modules 4
Rejection in common mode
Rejection in common mode between channel and ground is expressed in dB and is given by the following formula :
CM rejection = 20 x Log
10
(V
MC
/ V em
) where V
MC
= voltage in common mode, expressed in VDC or VAC (50 / 60 Hz),
V em
= error voltage on the measurement (reduced by the conversion resolution), expressed in VDC.
For a current range, rejection in common mode is naturally deduced from this formula.
For temperature probe or thermocouple ranges, rejection in common mode has no significance.
Rejection in 50/60 Hz serial mode
Rejection in 50/60 Hz serial mode, superimposed on the measured value, is expressed in dB and is given by the following formula :
SM rejection = 20 x Log
10
(V
MS
/ V em
) where V
MS
= serial mode voltage, expressed in peak to peak V,
V em
= error voltage on the measurement (reduced by the conversion resolution), expressed in VDC.
For a current range, rejection in serial mode is naturally deduced from this formula.
For temperature probe or thermocouple ranges, rejection in serial mode has no significance.
Characteristics of the ±10 V range
Range
Full scale (FS)
Conversion resolution
Display resolution
Max. error at 25 °C
±10 V
10 V
570
µ
V
1 mV
+2 mV + 0.0014 x M
- 2 mV + 0.0025 x M
(0.01%)
(0.27% FS)
Max. error from 0 to 60 °C
Input range
Range overshoot
0.50% FS
±10 V
±10.5 V
CM rejection channel / ground 95 dB
(VDC)
CM rejection channel / ground 105 dB
(VAC - 50 / 60 Hz)
SM rejection - 50 / 60 Hz 35 dB
(±10000)
(±10500)
Errors at temperatures other than 25 °C and 60 °C can be deduced by linear extrapolation of the errors defined at 25 and 60 °C. The formula is :
E(T) = E(25°C) + I T - 25°C I x [E(60°C) - E(25°C)]/35
___________________________________________________________________________
4/11
B
B
Characteristics of the 0..10 V range
Range
Full scale (FS)
Conversion resolution
Display resolution
Max. error at 25 °C
Max. error from 0 to 60 °C
Input range
0..10 V
10 V
570
µ
V
1 mV
+2 mV + 0.0014 x M
0.39% FS
0..10 V
Range overshoot -0.5..10.5 V
CM rejection channel / ground 95 dB
(VDC)
CM rejection channel / ground 105 dB
(VAC - 50 / 60 Hz)
SM rejection - 50 / 60 Hz 35 dB
(0.01% FS)
(0.16% FS)
(0..10000)
(-500..10500)
Characteristics of the ±5 V range
Range
Full scale (FS)
Conversion resolution
Display resolution
Max. error at 25 °C
±5 V
5 V
570
µ
V
0.5 mV
+1.5 mV + 0.0019 x M
-1.5 mV + 0.0024 x M
Max. error from 0 to 60 °C
Input range
0.50% FS
±5 V
Range overshoot ±5,25 V
CM rejection channel / ground 100 dB
(VDC)
CM rejection channel / ground 110 dB
(VAC - 50 / 60 Hz)
SM rejection - 50 / 60 Hz 35 dB
(0.01% FS)
(0.27% FS)
(±10000)
(±10500)
Errors at temperatures other than 25 °C and 60 °C can be deduced by linear extrapolation of the errors defined at 25 and 60 °C. The formula is :
E(T) = E(25°C) + I T - 25°C I x [E(60°C) - E(25°C)]/35
___________________________________________________________________________
4/12
TSX AEY 414 modules 4
Characteristics of the 0..5 V range
Range
Full scale (FS)
Conversion resolution
Display resolution
Max. error at 25 °C
Max. error from 0 to 60 °C
Input range
0..5 V
5 V
570
µ
V
500
µ
V
+1.5 mV + 0.0019 x M
0.45% FS
0..5 V
Range overshoot -0.25..5.25 V
CM rejection channel / ground 100 dB
(VDC)
CM rejection channel / ground 110 dB
(VAC - 50 / 60 Hz)
SM rejection- 50 / 60 Hz 35 dB
(0.01% FS)
(0.22% FS)
(0..10000)
(-500..10500)
Characteristics of the 1..5 V range
Range
Full scale (FS)
Conversion resolution
Display resolution
Max. error at 25 °C
Max. error from 0 to 60 °C
1..5 V
4 V
570
µ
V
400
µ
V
+3.2 mV + 0.0019 x M
0.56% FS
Input range
Range overshoot
1..5 V
0.8..5.2 V
CM rejection channel / ground 100 dB
(VDC)
CM rejection channel / ground 110 dB
(VAC - 50 / 60 Hz)
SM rejection - 50 / 60 Hz 35 dB
(0.01% FS)
(0.27% FS)
(0..10000)
(-500..10500)
Errors at temperatures other than 25 °C and 60 °C can be deduced by linear extrapolation of the errors defined at 25 and 60 °C. The formula is :
E(T) = E(25°C) + I T - 25°C I x [E(60°C) - E(25°C)]/35
B
___________________________________________________________________________
4/13
B
Characteristics of the 0..20 mA range
Range
Full scale (FS)
Conversion resolution
Display resolution
Max. error at 25 °C
Max. error from 0 to 60 °C
Input range
0..20 mA
20 mA
2.28
µ
A
2
µ
A
+6
µ
A + 0.0033 x M
0.69% FS
0..20 mA
Range overshoot -1..21 mA
CM rejection channel / ground 100 dB
(VDC)
CM rejection channel / ground 110 dB
(VAC - 50 / 60 Hz)
SM rejection - 50 / 60 Hz 35 dB
(0.01% FS)
(0.36% Fs)
(0..10000)
(-500..10500)
Characteristics of the 4..20 mA range
Range
Full scale (FS)
Conversion resolution
Display resolution
Max. error at 25 °C
Max. error from 0 to 60 °C
4..20 mA
16 mA
2.28
µ
A
1.6
µ
A
+19.2
µ
A + 0.0033 x M
0.86% FS
Input range
Range overshoot
4..20 mA
3.2..20.8 mA
CM rejection channel / ground 100 dB
(VDC)
CM rejection channel / ground 110 dB
(VAC - 50 / 60 Hz)
SM rejection - 50 / 60 Hz 35 dB
(0.01% FS)
(0.45% Fs)
(0..10000)
(-500..10500)
Errors at temperatures other than 25 °C and 60 °C can be deduced by linear extrapolation of the errors defined at 25 and 60 °C. The formula is :
E(T) = E(25°C) + I T - 25°C I x [E(60°C) - E(25°C)]/35
Precision includes the shunt (250
Ω
- 0.1% - 25 ppm/°C). The influence of the shunt on the precision can be reduced by using a more precise resistance (0.01% - 10 ppm/°C).
___________________________________________________________________________
4/14
TSX AEY 414 modules 4
Characteristics of the -13..63 mV range
Range
Full scale (FS)
Conversion resolution
Display resolution
Max. error at 25 °C
-13..63 mV
63 mV
2.02
µ
V
6.3
µ
V (1)
+18
µ
V + 0.001581 x M
-18
µ
V + 0.004581 x M
0.44% FS Max. error from 0 to 60 °C
Input range
Range overshoot
-13..63 mV
-13..63 mV
CM rejection channel / ground >140 dB
(VDC)
CM rejection channel / ground >150 dB
(VAC - 50 / 60 Hz)
SM rejection - 50 / 60 Hz >35 dB
(0.01% FS)
(0.19% FS)
(-2064..10000)
(-2064..10000)
Characteristics of the 0..400
Ω range
Range
Full scale (FS)
Conversion resolution
Display resolution
Max. error at 25 °C
Max. error from 0 to 60 °C
Input range
Range overshoot
0..400
Ω
400
Ω
31 m
Ω
40 m
Ω
(1)
63 m
Ω
+ 0.001180 x M
0.27% FS
0..400
Ω
0..400
Ω
CM rejection channel / ground >110 dB
(VDC)
CM rejection channel / ground >120 dB
(VAC - 50 / 60 Hz)
SM rejection - 50 / 60 Hz >35 dB
(0.01% FS)
(0.13% FS)
(0..10000)
(0..10000)
Errors at temperatures other than 25 °C and 60 °C can be deduced by linear extrapolation of the errors defined at 25 and 60 °C. The formula is :
E(T) = E(25°C) + I T - 25°C I x [E(60°C) - E(25°C)]/35
(1) Converter resolution can be achieved by redefining the limits in the User scale.
B
___________________________________________________________________________
4/15
B
Characteristics of the 0..3850
Ω range
Range
Full scale (FS)
Conversion resolution
Display resolution
Max. error at 25 °C
Max. error from 0 to 60 °C
Input range
Range overshoot
0..3850
Ω
3850
Ω
139 m
Ω
385 m
Ω
(1)
2.114
Ω
+ 0.001647 x M
0.48% FS
0..3850
Ω
0..3850
Ω
CM rejection channel / ground >110 dB
(VDC)
CM rejection channel / ground >120 dB
(VAC - 50 / 60 Hz)
SM rejection - 50 / 60 Hz >35 dB
(0.01% FS)
(0.22% FS)
(0..10000)
(0..10000)
Errors at temperatures other than 25 °C and 60 °C can be deduced by linear extrapolation of the errors defined at 25 and 60 °C. The formula is :
E(T) = E(25°C) + I T - 25°C I x [E(60°C) - E(25°C)]/35
(1) Converter resolution can be achieved by redefining the limits in the User scale.
___________________________________________________________________________
4/16
TSX AEY 414 modules 4
Characteristics of the temperature probe ranges
Range
Conversion resolution (1)
Display resolution
Max error at 25 °C (2)
-200 °C
-100 °C
0 °C
100 °C
200 °C
300 °C
400 °C
500 °C
600 °C
700 °C
800 °C
Max error from 0 to 60 °C
-200 °C
-100 °C
0 °C
100 °C
200 °C
300 °C
400 °C
500 °C
600 °C
700 °C
800 °C
Input range in °C in °F
Pt100
0.09 °C
0.1 °C
0.3 °C
0.5 °C
0.6 °C
0.8 °C
1.0 °C
1.2 °C
1.4 °C
1.7 °C
1.8 °C
2.1 °C
2.3 °C
0.5 °C
0.8 °C
1.2 °C
1.6 °C
2.0 °C
2.4 °C
2.9 °C
3.3 °C
3.8 °C
4.4 °C
5.0 °C
-200..850 °C
-328..1562 °F
Pt1000
0.04 °C
0.1 °C
0.4 °C
0.8 °C
1.2 °C
1.6 °C
2.1 °C
2.5 °C
3.0 °C
3.4 °C
4.0 °C
4.5 °C
5.1 °C
0.5 °C
1.4 °C
2.2 °C
3.1 °C
4.0 °C
4.9 °C
5.9 °C
7.0 °C
8.0 °C
9.1 °C
10.3 °C
-200..800 °C
-328..1472 °F
Ni1000
0.02 °C
0.1 °C
0.9 °C
1.1 °C
1.2 °C
1.6 °C
2.0 °C
2.3 °C
-60..250 °C
-76..482 °F
Errors at temperatures other than 25 °C and 60 °C can be deduced by linear extrapolation of the errors defined at 25 and 60 °C. The formula is :
E(T) = E(25°C) + I T - 25°C I x [E(60°C) - E(25°C)]/35
The data is given for 4-wire connections and include errors and drifts from the current source
2500
µ
A (Pt100) or 559.03
µ
A (Pt1000 or Ni1000).
The effect of self-heating does not cause a significant error on the measurement, whether the probe is in air or water.
(1) these values are given for an operating point in the middle of the temperature probe range.
(2) ambient temperature of TSX AEY 414.
Reference standards : NF C 42-330 June 1983 and IEC 751, 2nd edition 1986 for Pt100 / 1000,
DIN 43760 September 1987 for Ni1000.
B
___________________________________________________________________________
4/17
B
Characteristics of thermocouple ranges
Thermocouple range
Conversion resolution (1)
Display resolution
Max error at 25 °C (2)
-200 °C
-100 °C
0 °C
100 °C
200 °C
300 °C
400 °C
500 °C
600 °C
700 °C
800 °C
900 °C
1000 °C
1100 °C
1200 °C
1300 °C
1400 °C
1500 °C
1600 °C
1700 °C
Input range (4)
B E J K
0.24 °C
0.1 °C
0.026 °C
0.1 °C
0.037 °C
0.1 °C
0.048 °C
0.1 °C
4.7
4.0
4.0
3.8
3.6
3.5
3.6
3.6
IC / EC(°C) (3) IC (°C) EC (°C) IC (°C) EC (°C) IC (°C) EC (°C)
16.8
2.7
9.5
1.7
7.5
6.7
1.5
1.4
7.4
7.1
1.5
1.5
18.7
3.3
9.5
7.5
7.4
1.8
1.6
1.7
6.2
6.1
6.1
6.2
6.4
6.6
6.8
1.5
1.5
1.7
1.8
2.0
2.1
2.3
7.1
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.3
7.0
1.7
1.8
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.2
7.8
7.6
7.6
7.8
7.9
8.2
8.6
8.9
1.9
2.0
2.1
2.3
2.4
2.6
2.8
3.1
9.3
9.8
3.3
3.6
10.3
3.8
3.5
3.5
3.7
3.9
0..1802 °C -270..812 °C -210..1065 °C -270..1372 °C
Errors at temperatures other than 25 °C and 60 °C can be deduced by linear extrapolation of the errors defined at 25 and 60 °C. The formula is :
E(T) = E(25°C) + I T - 25°C I x [E(60°C) - E(25°C)]/35
(1) These values are given for an operating point in the middle of the thermocouple range.
(2) IC = ambient temperature of the TSX AEY 414 (4) and automatic internal compensation (see section 4.5-4),
EC = ambient temperature of the TSX AEY 414 (4) and automatic external compensation, with
Pt100 class A.
(3) With thermocouple B, the type of cold junction compensation (internal or external) is not taken into account, since it has no effect on precision.
(4) Internal compensation : ambient temperature = 20 °C,
External compensation : ambient temperature = 30 °C.
Reference standards : IEC 584-1, 1st edition 1977 and IEC 584-2, 2nd edition 1989.
___________________________________________________________________________
4/18
TSX AEY 414 modules 4
Characteristics of thermocouple ranges (continued)
Thermocouple range
Max error at 25 °C (1)
-300 °F
-100 °F
0 °F
100 °F
200 °F
300 °F
400 °F
500 °F
600 °F
700 °F
800 °F
900 °F
1000 °F
1100 °F
1200 °F
1300 °F
1400 °F
1500 °F
1700 °F
1900 °F
2100 °F
2300 °F
2500 °F
2700 °F
2900 °F
3100 °F
Input range (3)
B E J K
7.0
6.8
6.6
6.2
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.6
7.0
IC / EC (°F) (2) IC (°F) EC (°F) IC (°F) EC (°F) IC (°F) EC (°F)
26.4
4.3
28.5
5.1
15.8
2.9
15.7
3.1
13.6
2.7
12.8
2.6
13.2
2.9
12.7
2.8
11.6
2.6
13.7
3.2
12.8
3.0
11.0
2.7
13.8
3.5
13.1
3.3
10.9
2.9
13.8
3.7
13.4
3.6
11.1
3.2
13.9
4.0
13.4
3.9
8.5
11.4
3.5
14.3
4.3
12.9
4.0
7.3
11.8
3.9
14.7
4.7
12.5
4.0
12.4
4.3
15.5
5.1
16.3
5.6
17.1
6.1
18.0
6.6
19.1
7.2
32..3276 °F -454..1493 °F -346..1949 °F -454..2502 °F
(1) IC = ambient temperature of the TSX AEY 414 (3) and automatic internal compensation (see section 4.5-4),
EC = ambient temperature of the TSX AEY 414 (3) and automatic external compensation, with
Pt100 class A.
(2) With thermocouple B, the type of cold junction compensation (internal or external) is not taken into account, since it has no effect on precision.
(3) Internal compensation : ambient temperature = 20 °C,
External compensation : ambient temperature = 30 °C.
B
___________________________________________________________________________
4/19
B
Characteristics of thermocouple ranges (continued)
Thermocouple range
Conversion resolution (1)
Display resolution
Max. error at 25 °C (2)
-200 °C
-100 °C
0 °C
100 °C
200 °C
300 °C
400 °C
500 °C
600 °C
700 °C
800 °C
900 °C
1000 °C
1100 °C
1200 °C
1300 °C
1400 °C
1500 °C
1600 °C
Input range (3)
L
0.036 °C
N
0.05 °C
R
0.16 °C
S
0.19 °C
0.1 °C 0.1 °C 0.1 °C 0.1 °C
7.4
7.4
7.1
6.8
6.7
IC (°C) EC (°C) IC (°C) EC (°C) IC (°C) EC (°C) IC (°C) EC (°C)
19.6
4.0
7.5
1.5
9.5
7.8
2.1
1.8
11.4
4.8
11.2
4.7
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.5
1.5
1.7
1.9
2.0
7.0
6.5
6.2
6.0
1.8
1.7
1.8
1.9
8.1
7.1
6.5
6.3
3.5
3.2
2.9
3.0
8.3
7.4
6.9
6.8
3.5
3.3
3.1
3.2
2.1
2.2
2.2
2.3
2.3
6.0
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.5
6.8
7.0
7.4
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.4
2.6
2.7
2.9
3.2
6.2
6.1
6.1
6.0
6.0
5.9
5.9
5.9
3.0
3.1
3.1
3.2
3.2
3.3
3.3
3.4
6.8
6.8
6.6
6.6
6.6
6.6
6.6
6.7
3.3
3.4
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
6.0
6.1
6.3
6.5
3.5
3.7
3.8
4.0
6.8
6.9
7.2
7.4
3.9
4.1
4.3
4.5
-200..900 °C -270..1300 °C -50..1769 °C -50..1769 °C
Errors at temperatures other than 25 °C and 60 °C can be deduced by linear extrapolation of the errors defined at 25 and 60 °C. The formula is :
E(T) = E(25°C) + I T - 25°C I x [E(60°C) - E(25°C)]/35
(1) These values are given for an operating point in the middle of the thermocouple range.
(2) IC = ambient temperature of the TSX AEY 414 (4) and automatic internal compensation (see section 4.5-4),
EC = ambient temperature of the TSX AEY 414 (4) and automatic external compensation, with
Pt100 class A.
(3) Internal compensation : ambient temperature = 20 °C,
External compensation : ambient temperature = 30 °C.
Reference standards :
• thermocouple L : DIN 43710, edition December 1985,
• thermocouple N : IEC 584-1, 2nd edition 1989 and IEC 584-2, 2nd edition 1989,
• thermocouple R : IEC 584-1, 1st edition 1977 and IEC 584-2, 2nd edition 1989,
• thermocouple S : IEC 584-1, 1st edition 1977 and IEC 584-2, 2nd edition 1989.
___________________________________________________________________________
4/20
TSX AEY 414 modules 4
Characteristics of thermocouple ranges (continued)
Thermocouple range
1200 °F
1300 °F
1400 °F
1500 °F
1600 °F
1700 °F
1800 °F
1900 °F
2000 °F
2100 °F
2200 °F
2300 °F
2400 °F
2600 °F
2800 °F
3000 °F
Max. error at 25 °C (1)
-300 °F
-100 °F
0 °F
100 °F
200 °F
300 °F
400 °F
500 °F
600 °F
700 °F
800 °F
900 °F
1000 °F
1100 °F
Input range (2)
L
-328..1652 °F
N
-454..2372 °F
R
-58..3216 °F
S
IC (°F) EC (°F) IC (°F) EC (°F) IC (°F) EC (°F) IC (°F) EC (°F)
29.4
6.0
15.7
3.4
14.9
2.8
21.9
8.8
21.2
8.6
13.5
3.3
13.1
2.7
14.8
6.4
15.1
6.5
12.0
3.1
12.7
2.9
12.8
5.7
13.3
6.0
11.2
3.2
13.0
3.2
11.9
5.6
12.3
5.5
10.9
3.3
13.3
3.5
11.2
5.3
12.1
5.7
10.9
3.5
13.4
3.8
11.0
5.3
12.1
5.9
10.9
3.8
13.3
4.0
10.8
5.4
12.1
6.0
11.1
4.0
12.8
4.0
12.2
4.0
11.5
4.3
10.7
5.5
12.0
6.2
10.5
5.6
11.9
6.3
11.9
4.7
10.7
5.7
11.9
6.4
12.3
5.1
10.6
6.0
3.9
2.3
13.0
5.5
10.5
6.1
3.9
2.3
13.7
6.0
10.5
6.2
10.4
6.3
10.4
6.4
10.7
6.7
4.0
4.1
4.2
4.4
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.8
-58..3216 °F
(1) IC = ambient temperature of the TSX AEY 414 (2) and automatic internal compensation (see section 4.5-4),
EC = ambient temperature of the TSX AEY 414 (2) and automatic external compensation, with
Pt100 class A.
(2) Internal compensation : ambient temperature = 20 °C,
External compensation : ambient temperature = 30 °C.
B
___________________________________________________________________________
4/21
B
Characteristics of thermocouple ranges (continued)
Thermocouple range
Conversion resolution (1)
Display resolution
Max. error at 25 °C (2)
-200 °C
-150 °C
-100 °C
-50 °C
0 °C
50 °C
100 °C
150 °C
200 °C
250 °C
300 °C
350 °C
400 °C
500 °C
600 °C
Input range (3)
T
0.046 °C
0.1 °C
7.7
7.1
6.6
6.2
5.9
5.7
5.6
5.5
IC (°C)
18.3
13.0
10.3
8.7
-270..400 °C
EC (°C)
3.2
2.4
2.0
1.7
1.6
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.6
U
0.038 °C
0.1 °C
IC (°C)
7.7
6.7
5.8
5.4
5.4
5.2
5.0
-200..600 °C
EC (°C)
1.6
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.6
1.6
1.7
Errors at temperatures other than 25 °C and 60 °C can be deduced by linear extrapolation of the errors defined at 25 and 60 °C. The formula is :
E(T) = E(25°C) + I T - 25°C I x [E(60°C) - E(25°C)]/35
(1) These values are given for an operating point in the middle of the thermocouple range.
(2) IC = ambient temperature of the TSX AEY 414 (4) and automatic internal compensation (see section 4.5-4),
EC = ambient temperature of the TSX AEY 414 (4) and automatic external compensation, with
Pt100 class A.
(3) Internal compensation : ambient temperature = 20 °C,
External compensation : ambient temperature = 30 °C.
Reference standards :
• thermocouple T : IEC 584-1, 1st edition 1977 and IEC 584-2, 2nd edition 1989,
• thermocouple U : DIN 43710, edition December 1985.
___________________________________________________________________________
4/22
TSX AEY 414 modules 4
Characteristics of thermocouple ranges (continued)
Thermocouple range
Max error at 25 °C (1)
-300 °F
-200 °F
-100 °F
0 °F
100 °F
200 °F
300 °F
400 °F
500 °F
600 °F
700 °F
800 °F
1000 °F
Input range (2)
T
IC (°F)
29.2
21.1
16.9
14.4
13.0
11.9
11.2
10.6
10.3
10.0
9.8
EC (°F)
5.3
4.0
3.3
3.0
2.8
2.7
2.7
2.7
2.7
2.7
2.8
U
IC (°F) EC (°F)
14.3
12.3
10.5
9.8
2.9
2.8
2.6
2.7
9.7
9.2
-328..1112 °F
2.9
3.0
-454..752 °F
(1) IC = ambient temperature of the TSX AEY 414 (2) and automatic internal compensation (see section 4.5-4),
EC = ambient temperature of the TSX AEY 414 (2) and automatic external compensation, with
Pt100 class A.
(2) Internal compensation : ambient temperature = 20 °C,
External compensation : ambient temperature = 30 °C.
B
___________________________________________________________________________
4/23
B
4.4
Connections
4.4-1 Terminal block pinout
The TSX AEY 414 module uses a TSX BLY 01 terminal block.
COM0
LC0
Shielding connection
IN1
IS1
COM2
LC2
Shielding connection
IN3
IS3
1
2
4
6
7
8
10
12
18
13
14
16
15
17
19
20
9
11
3
5
Shielding connection
IN0
IS0
COM1
LC1
Shielding connection
IN2
IS2
COM3
LC3
INx : +ve input channel x
COMx : -ve input channel x
I S x : +ve sensor supply
LCx : Line compensation
Note
The terminal block is fitted with an internal shunt, which cannot be accessed at the terminals.
4.4-2 External shunts (0..20 mA and 4..20 mA range)
When the 0..20 mA or 4..20 mA range is used, an external shunt of 250
Ω
- 0.1% - 1/2 W
- 25ppm/°C is required, connected in parallel on the input terminals. This shunt is supplied with the module in lots of 4, which can also be supplied separately, under reference
TSX AAK2.
___________________________________________________________________________
4/24
TSX AEY 414 modules 4
4.4-3 Sensor connection
It is advisable to use shielded cables and to link the shielding to the terminals designed for this purpose (Shielding connection).
For high level and thermocouple inputs, the "source + wiring" resistance should be less than 100
Ω
so as not to adversely affect the module performance.
For temperature probe inputs, the resistance of each of the wires in 4-wire configuration should be less than 50
Ω
, which corresponds to a copper wire with a cross-section of 0.6
mm 2 and maximum overall length of 3000 m.
For temperature probes, the resistance of each of the wires in 2-wire configuration should be less than 50 m
Ω
(to avoid measurement errors caused by resistive losses in the cables).
Examples of wiring sensors on channel 0
High level voltage
Shielding connection
1
COM0
2
High level current
Shielding connection
COM0
1
2
IN0
3
2-wire temperature probe
Shielding connection
(2)
COM0
LC0
IS0
(2)
IN0
5
3
1
2
4
(1)
(1)
IN0
(1) External shunt 250
Ω
3
Thermocouple
Shielding connection
COM0
1
2
IN0
3
(2) Probe supply straps
4-wire temperature probe
IN0
5
3
3-wire temperature probe
IS0
IN0
5
3
COM0
2
LC0
4
COM0
2
LC0
4
___________________________________________________________________________
4/25
B
B
4.4-4 Recommendations for installing thermocouples
• Use of internal cold junction compensation
In the case of measurements by ET thermocouple with internal compensation (and only in this case) it is advisable to follow the rules below :
- the PLC must not be directly fan-cooled, convection must be natural,
- variations in ambient temperature must be less than 5 °C per hour,
- the modules in the immediate vicinity must dissipate between 2.2 W and 3.3 W, corresponding to the most commonly used modules (TSX P5710, TSX P5720,
TSX DEY 16D2, TSX DEY 32DK, TSX DEY 16FK, TSX DSY 16R5, TSX AEY 414, etc),
- the TSX AEY 414 module must be mounted in a PLC which has a minimum clearance height of 150 mm (D) and width (d) of 100 mm.
If these recommendations are followed, installation can be made in a wall or floormounted enclosure, or without an enclosure.
D
If the installation rules described above are not observed, module operation is not impaired. However, measurement precision on inputs set for thermocouple ranges will be affected. In stable ambient temperature conditions and with fixed configuration, the measurement will simply be shifted by a stable value, which can be compensated by carrying out "sensor alignment".
d
D d
Since thermocouple B is not sensitive to cold junction compensation from 0 to 70 °C, these installation restrictions do not apply.
• Use of external cold junction compensation
If thermocouples with external compensation are used, the acquisition of the cold junction temperature must be made using a Pt100 class A probe on channel 0 (probe not supplied). Channels 1, 2 and 3 of the module can therefore be used for the thermocouple measurement.
This type of use places no particular constraints on TSX AEY 414 installation. The Pt100 must be placed close to the cold junction terminal. This means that standard (copper) shielded cables will be used instead of compensated cables.
___________________________________________________________________________
4/26
TSX ASY • analog modules
Contents
Part C
C
Section
Page
1.2-1 Writing to the outputs 1/3
1.2-2 Behavior of outputs when the program is in STOP or absent 1/3
1.2-4 Behavior during external output supply fault
1.2-6 Digital/analog conversion
1.2-8 Fallback / Maintain outputs or set outputs to 0
1.2-9 Behavior during power up (TSX ASY 800)
1.4-1 TSX ASY 410 terminal block pinout
1.4-2 TSX ASY 800 connector pinout
___________________________________________________________________________
C/1
C
TSX ASY • analog modules
Section
Contents
Part C
Page
___________________________________________________________________________
C/2
1 TSX ASY 410/800 modules
1.1
Presentation
General
TSX ASY 410 and TSX ASY 800 modules have 4 and 8 analog outputs and provide the ranges ± 10 V, 0..20 mA and 4..20 mA for each of their inputs.
• TSX ASY 410 : 4 analog outputs isolated from each other,
• TSX ASY 800 : 8 non-isolated analog outputs,
TSX ASY 800 TSX ASY 410
C
Functions
These output modules perform the following functions :
TSX ASY 410
TSX ASY 410
1500 Vrms isolation
Voltage/current Optocoupler
Optocoupler
D / A
6
X Bus interface
5 V
Processing
Optocoupler
Optocoupler
D / A
D / A
Optocoupler
DC/DC converter
D / A
Function 5 4 3 2 1
7
___________________________________________________________________________
1/1
C
TSX ASY 800
TSX ASY 800
Optocoupler
X Bus interface
Processing
Optocoupler
D / A
Multiplexer
DC/DC converter
6
8
5 4 3 2 1
7
1 Connection to the process
• physical connection to the process, via a 20-pin screw terminal block (TSX ASY 420) or a 25-pin SubD connector (TSX ASY 800),
• protection of the module against overvoltages.
2 Adaptation to different actuators (voltage or current output).
3 Conversion of digital data into analog signals
4 Converting application data into data which can be used by the digital/ analog converter.
5 Interface and communication with the application
• management of exchanges via X Bus,
• geographical addressing,
• reception, from the application, of module and channel configuration parameters, as well as digital channel settings,
• transmission of module status to the application.
6 Module power supply
7 Monitoring the module and indicating possible faults to the application
• converter test,
• test for range overshoot on the channels,
• test for the presence of the terminal block,
• test of watchdog.
___________________________________________________________________________
1/2
TSX ASY 410/800 modules 1
1.2
Output processing
1.2-1 Writing to the outputs
The application must provide the outputs with standard format values :
• -10000 to +10000 in the range ±10 V,
• 0 to +10000 in the ranges 0-20mA and 4-20mA.
The values must be written in words %QWxy.i.0 to 3 for channels 0 to 3 of the
TSX ASY 400 module or %QWxy.i.0 to 7 for channels 0 to 7 of the TSX ASY 800 module.
C
1.2-2 Behavior of outputs when the program is in STOP or absent
When the task which controls the outputs is in STOP or when the program is absent, the outputs take the following position :
• programmable fallback, if the "Fallback" option was selected during module configuration,
• maintain last value transmitted, if the "Maintain" option was selected during module configuration.
The fallback value can be modified from the PL7 Junior debug screen or via the program.
1.2-3 Forcing outputs
From the PL7 Junior debug screen, each output can be forced to a value between -10000 and +10000, defined by the user. This function is mainly used for the wiring test.
Forcing can only be accessed if the program task which controls the output is in RUN (the output is in Fallback or Maintain position when the program task is in STOP).
1.2-4 Behavior during external output supply fault
If an external output supply fault occurs (TSX ASY 800), all the module outputs are set to
0.
Note :
If an external supply fault and a terminal block fault occur at the same time on the module, only the supply fault is indicated.
___________________________________________________________________________
1/3
1.2-5 Overshoot monitoring
C
TSX ASY 410 (software version : II<10) (1)
If the values supplied by the application are less than -10000 or greater than +10000, analog outputs will become saturated at the following value :
• -10 V or +10 V in the range ±10 V,
• 4 mA or 20 mA in the range 4..20 mA,
• 0 mA or 20 mA in the range 0..20 mA.
An overshoot fault is signalled by a bit which can be used by the program (error bit
%Ixy.i.ERR = 1 signals a fault on the channel and status word bit %MWxy.i.2:X1 = 1 indicates a range overshoot on the channel).
TSX ASY 800 and TSX ASY 410 (software version : II>10) (1)
These modules allow an overshoot of ±5% on voltage and 4..20mA ranges and +5% on the range 0..20mA.
Lower overshoot zone
Lower limit nominal zone
Upper limit
Upper overshoot zone
Overshoot value according to range :
Range
±10V
0..20mA
4..20mA
Lower limit
-10 500 (or -10.5 V)
0 (or 0mA)
- 500 (or 3.2 mA)
Upper limit
+10 500 (or +10.5 V)
+10 500 (or 21mA)
+10 500 (or 20.8 mA)
Range overshoot detection is optional : during configuration, the user can select overshoot detection by upper or lower values or both.
When the value is transmitted outside the overshoot limits and overshoot monitoring is required, bit %Ixy.ERR is set to 1 and the type of overshoot (upper or lower) is registered in bits %MWxy.i.2:X1 (range overshoot) and %MWxy.i.2:X3 (=1 if upper value overshoot
=0 if lower value overshoot).
(1) the module software version is marked on the label which gives the module reference.
___________________________________________________________________________
1/4
TSX ASY 410/800 modules 1
1.2-6 Digital/analog conversion
Digital / analog conversion is executed on :
• 11 bits + sign (-2048 to +2047) for the TSX ASY 410 module,
• 13 bits + sign (-8192 to +8191) for voltage for the TSX ASY 800 module,
• 13 bits (0 to +8191) for current for the TSX ASY 800 module,
The data supplied by the program is converted automatically within the range limits of the converter.
C
1.2-7 Updating the outputs
The maximum time between the transmission of the output value on the PLC bus and its positioning on the terminal block is 2.5 ms for the TSX ASY 410 and 5 ms for the
TSX ASY 800.
Outputs can be individually assigned to the MAST task or to the FAST task of the application program.
1.2-8 Fallback / Maintain outputs or set outputs to 0
When a fault occurs, depending on the seriousness of the fault, the outputs take the
"Fallback/Maintain" value individually or together or are forced to 0 (0 V or 0 mA).
Fault Behavior of voltage outputs
Behavior of current outputs
Task in STOP or program absent
Communication fault
Configuration fault
Internal module fault
Output value outside limits
(range overshoot)
Fallback/Maintain
(channel by channel)
Fallback/Maintain
(all channels)
Fallback/Maintain
(channel by channel)
Fallback/Maintain
(all channels)
0 V (channel by channel) 0 mA (channel by channel)
0 V (all channels) 0 mA (all channels)
Value transmitted with Value transmitted with saturation at +10.5/ -10.5V saturation at 3.2 / 20.8 mA (1)
(1) (channel by channel) or 0 / 20 mA (channel by channel)
Terminal block fault
Insertion while powered up
Processor stopped
Reloading of program
Maintain value
(all channels)
Outputs to 0
(all channels)
0 V (all channels)
Maintain value
(all channels)
0 mA
(all channels)
0 mA (all channels)
(1) These values apply to the TSX ASY 800 and TSX ASY 410 (II>10) modules, for TSX ASY 410
(II<10) modules, they are +10/-10V for voltage and 4/20mA or 0/20 mA for current.
___________________________________________________________________________
1/5
C
1.2-9 Behavior during power up (TSX ASY 800)
When the module is powered up (power up of rack or insertion while powered up), the outputs take a second to become operational. During this time, they are at 0V, 0mA. This time is required to stabilize the output power supply.
1.3
Characteristics
1.3-1 Output characteristics
Voltage or current outputs TSX ASY 410 TSX ASY800
Number of channels
5
Conversion time
Output power supply
Type of protection
Crosstalk between channels
Monotonicity
4
2.5 ms
8
5ms by the PLC by the PLC or 24 V IEC external supply short-circuits and overloads short-circuits and overloads
-80 dB yes
-80 dB yes
Non linearity
RC ground network
< 1 LSB < 1 LSB
R = 50 M
Ω
, C = 4.7 nF C = 4.7 nF
Isolation between channel and ground 500 VDC 1000 V rms
Isolation between channels 1500 V rms
Isolation between bus and channels 1500 V rms
Dissipated power typical maximum
8.2 W
12.2 W common point
1000 Vrms
5 W
6.1 W
Voltage outputs
Voltage output range
Maximum voltage without damage for voltage output
Load impedance
Capacitive load
Maximum resolution
Measurement error as a % 25 °C of Full Scale (10V) 0 to 60 °C
TSX ASY 410
±10 V
±30 V
1 k
Ω
< 0.1
minimum
µ
F
5.12 mV (1) for ±10 V
0.45%
0.75% (35 ppm / °C)
TSX ASY800
±10.5 V
±30 V
1 k
Ω
minimum
< 0.1
µ
F
1.28 mV for ±10 V
±0.14%
± 0.28% (26ppm / °C)
(1) Value given for TSX ASY 410 (software version : II > 10). For TSX ASY 410 (software version :
II < 10) this value is 4.88 mV,
___________________________________________________________________________
1/6
TSX ASY 410/800 modules 1
Current outputs
Current output range
TSX ASY 410
20 mA
Maximum voltage without damage for current output
±30 V
Load impedance
Inductive load
Maximum resolution
600
Ω
maximum
< 300
µ
H
10.25
µ
A (1)
Measurement error as a % 25 °C of Full Scale (20mA) 0 to 60 °C
0.52%
0.98% (70 ppm /°C)
Max. leakage current 50
µ
A
External power supply
Characteristics -
TSX ASY 410
TSX ASY800
21 mA
±30 V
600
Ω
maximum/
< 300
µ
H
2.56
µ
A
±0.21% (2)
±0.52%(64 ppm /°C)
33
µ
A
TSX ASY800
24 V + 5% ripple 1V max shielded cable
455mA max/300mA typical
Cable
Consumption -
-
Connection removable screw terminal block
(1) Value given for TSX ASY 410 (software version : II > 10). For TSX ASY 410 (software version : II < 10) this value is 9.77
µ
A.
(2) Precision calculated in a ventilated cabinet (in a non-ventilated cabinet, precision is 0.32%).
C
Important :
• in an ambient temperature above 50°C, the TSX ASY 800 module must be ventilated.
• if an external power supply is used (TSX ASY 800), it must be a SELV (Safety Extra Low
Voltage) type power supply. Examples of SELV type power supplies include :
TSX SUP 1011, TSX SUP 1021,TSX SUP 1051, TSX SUP 1101 and TSX SUP A05.
___________________________________________________________________________
1/7
C
1.4
Connections
1.4-1 TSX ASY 410 terminal block pinout
The TSX ASY 410 module uses a TSX BLY 01 terminal block.
Channel 0 common
Shielding connection
2
4
1
3
Channel 0 voltage output
Channel 0 current output
Shielding connection
5
Channel 1 voltage output 6
7
Channel 1 common
Channel 1 current output
Shielding connection
8
9 Shielding connection
10
11 Channel 2 voltage output
Channel 2 common 12
Shielding connection
Channel 3 voltage output 16
Channel 3 current output 18
Shielding connection
20
14
13 Channel 2 current output
15
Shielding connection
17 Channel 3 common
19 Shielding connection
Note
It is advisable to use shielded cables and to link the shielding to the terminals designed for this purpose (shielding connection).
Wiring accessories :
The TELEFAST accessory, reference ABE 7CPA21, distributes the 4 channels from a 25-pin SubD connector, to the screw terminals.
The analog module is connected to the TELEFAST accessory using one of the following cables :
• ABF Y25S150 : length 1.5m
• ABF Y25S200 : length 2m
• ABF Y25S300 : length 3m
• ABF Y25S500 : length 5m
These cables are part of the TSX BLY 01 terminal block.
___________________________________________________________________________
1/8
TSX ASY 410/800 modules 1
1.4-2 TSX ASY 800 connector pinout
(1) Channel 0 voltage output
(2) Channel 0 current output
(3) Channel 1 common
(4) Channel 2 voltage output
(5) Channel 2 current output
(6) Channel 3 common
(7) Channel 4 voltage output
(8) Channel 4 current output
(9) Channel 5 common
(10) Channel 6 voltage output
(11) Channel 6 current output
(12) Channel 7 common
(13) Removal detection strap
1
2
14
15
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
22
10
11
23
24
12
25
13
20
21
18
19
16
17
Channel 0 common (14)
Channel 1 voltage output (15)
Channel 1 current output (16)
Channel 2 common (17)
Channel 3 voltage output (18)
Channel 3 current output (19)
Channel 4 common (20)
Channel 5 voltage output (21)
Channel 5 current output (22)
Channel 6 common (23)
Channel 7 voltage output (24)
Channel 7 current output (25)
For use with Telefast, the removal detection strap should be located on the Telefast.
C
External power supply connector
+24V
0V
• the external power supply must be a 24 V + 5% SELV, maximum ripple : 1V
• the connection cable must be a shielded cable (the shielding braid should be connected at the supply end and as close as possible to the module using grounded cable ties).
• SELV type power supplies include : TSX SUP 1011, TSX SUP 1021,TSX SUP 1051,
TSX SUP 1101 and TSX SUP A05.
___________________________________________________________________________
1/9
C
1.4-3 TELEFAST pinout
After connecting the TSX ASY 800 analog module to a TELEFAST accessory, via cable
TSX CAP 030, the distribution of the analog channels on the TELEFAST terminals is as follows :
TELEFAST, reference ABE 7 CP A02
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
104
105
106
107
108
100
101
102
103
2
3
4
TELEFAST 25-pin SubD terminal no. connector pin no.
1 /
/
/
/
1
2
15
16
4
5
18
19
7
8
21
22
10
11
24
25
Type of signal
Ground
STD (1)
STD (1)
STD (2)
Voltage output V0 200
Current output V0 201
Voltage output V1 202
Current output V1 203
TELEFAST 25-pin SubD terminal no. connector pin no.
Supp1 /
Supp2
Supp3
Supp4
/
/
/
/
/
14
3
Voltage output V2 204
Current output V2 205
Voltage output V3 206
Current output V3 207
Voltage output V4 208
Current output V4 209
Voltage output V5 210
Current output V5 211
Voltage output V6 212
Current output V6 213
Voltage output V7 214
Current output V7 215
/
9
/
/
23
/
17
/
6
20
/
12
Type of signal
After connecting the TSX ASY 410 analog module to the TELEFAST accessory
ABE 7CPA21, via cable ABF Y25S•••, the distribution of the analog channels on the
TELEFAST terminals is as described above, limited to terminals 1 to 107.
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Channel 0 common
Ground
Channel 1 common
Ground
Channel 2 common
Ground
Channel 3 common
Ground
Channel 4 common
Ground
Channel 5 common
Ground
Channel 6 common
Ground
Channel 7 common
Ground
To perform terminal block detection : connect terminals STD (1) and STD (2) using a strap.
___________________________________________________________________________
1/10
TSX ASY 410/800 modules 1
TELEFAST, reference ABE 7 CP A21
102
103
104
105
106
107
TELEFAST 25-pin SubD terminal no. connector pin no.
1 /
2
3
4
100
101
/
/
/
1
2
15
16
4
5
18
19
Type of signal TELEFAST 25-pin SubD terminal no. connector pin no.
Supp1 / Ground
STD (1)
STD (1)
Supp2
Supp3
STD (2) Supp4
Voltage output V0 200
Current output V0 201
/
/
/
/
14
Voltage output V1 202
Current output V1 203
Voltage output V2 204
Current output V2 205
Voltage output V3 206
Current output V3 207
/
/
/
3
17
6
Type of signal
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Channel 0 common
Ground
Channel 1 common
Ground
Channel 2 common
Ground
Channel 3 common
Ground
C
___________________________________________________________________________
1/11
C
___________________________________________________________________________
1/12
TSX ISP Y100 Contents
Weighing module Part D
___________________________________________________________________________
Section
Introduction of the weighing range
Presentation of the weighing module
1.2-2 Physical description of the weighing module
Description of the connections
2.4-1 Connecting the measurement system
2.4-2 Connecting the discrete outputs
2.4-3 Pinout for the display unit serial link
2.4-4 TSX XBT H100 display unit
2.4-5 Connecting the display unit
2.4-6 TSX ISP Y100 module consumption
Page D
___________________________________________________________________________
D/1
TSX ISP Y100
Weighing module
D Section
Contents
Part D
Page
___________________________________________________________________________
D/2
1 General presentation
1.1
Introduction of the weighing range
The Modicon TSX Premium range of weighing devices consists of :
• a specialized module, TSX ISP Y100,
• a TSX XBT H100 weighing protocol display unit,
• process control applications : weigher dosers, multi-product batching, flow rate controllers, weigher sorters, discontinuous and continuous totalizers,
• load cells,
• junction boxes.
This document only covers module setup and operation : other points are dealt with in the documentation for associated products.
D
ETHWAY/FIPWAY
Weighing applications
T S X / P M X /
PCX57
Supervisor
Operator-
Application dialog
Printer
Display report
Weighing module
Junction box
Load cells
The diagram above shows the various elements which may be used to create a complete weighing configuration.
___________________________________________________________________________
1/1
D
1.2
Presentation of the weighing module
1.2-1 General
The TSX ISP Y100 has :
• a measurement input channel connected to one or more load cells which provides a numerical value corresponding to the weight being measured. A maximum of 8 load cells may be connected to the measurement input which has a resolution of 20 bits (1 048 576 points). The module executes 50 measurements per second.
• 2 high speed discrete outputs with constant response times, which trigger actions when thresholds are exceeded.
This type of operation is used for “weigher doser” applications.
• a sealable digital link used to display the weight on an external TSX XBT H100 type display unit
To ensure that measurements are accurate, the measurement input, weighing module and display unit may all be sealed in order to meet any legal requirements relating to weighing instruments for use in commercial transactions.
The TSX ISP Y100 module may be inserted into any available slot on a TSX/PMX/PCX
Premium PLC rack.
Maximum number of TSX ISP Y100 modules per station
Although the TSX ISP Y100 application-specific module has only one measurement channel, it is comparable to a module which has 2 application-specific channels.
The maximum number of application-specific channels managed by a PLC station depends on the type of processor installed. The maximum number of
TSX ISP Y100 modules in a PLC station thus depends on :
• the type of processor installed,
• the number of application-specific channels already used.
The user should therefore perform a review at station level to determine the number of application-specific channels already used, in order to define the number of TSX ISP Y100 modules which can be used.
Note:
The definition and number of application-specific channels is given in the manual " Processors and discrete I/O" - section A - paragraph 3.5-3).
Number of application-specific channels managed by each type of processor
Processor
TSX P57 102/TPMX P57 102/TPCX 571012
TSX P57 2 i 2/TPMX P57 202
TSX P57 3 i 2/TPMX P57 352/TPCX 57 3512
TSX P57 4 i 2/TPMX P57 452 (1)
Number of app.-spec. channels managed
8
24
32
48
___________________________________________________________________________
1/2
General presentation 1
The module offers functions specific to weighing, such as :
• calibration,
• zero reset,
• semi-automatic tare,
• zero tracking function,
• temporary measurement freeze.
The module communicates with the processor and provides various data relating to weighing, such as :
• weight measurement (gross or net),
• flow rate,
• data on stability, zero, underload, overload, manual tare, etc,
• discrete output image,
• the tare value,
• the offset memory value,
• status words : operating report for module and internal or external faults.
D
The PLC language is used to manage :
• module operation (via the configuration),
• reading measurements
• module operating modes,
• start processing commands (calibration, tare, zero reset, control of discrete outputs, freezing display, etc).
___________________________________________________________________________
1/3
D
1.2-2 Physical description of the weighing module
The TSX ISP Y100 module may be inserted into any slot on the TSX RKY racks.
The module consists of the following elements :
1 a plastic box with metal screening to protect the electronic circuitry and provide protection against radiated interference.
2 a display unit,
3 a 9-pin female Sub-D connector for the remote display unit (TSX XBT H100),
4 a 5-pin screw terminal block to connect the discrete outputs,
5 a 15-pin female Sub-D connector for the load cells.
1
2
3
4
5
___________________________________________________________________________
1/4
General presentation 1
1.3
Suggested methodology
To facilitate the development of a control system integrating a weighing function, the flowchart below suggests an installation method and gives section and document references.
Install and connect weighing module to the process
(see section 2) r
Debug the weighing function
(see TLX DS 57 33E application-specific manual
Volume 3 - section D) r
Operate the weighing function
(see TLX DS 57 33E application-specific manual
Volume 3 - section D) r
Protect adjustments
(see TLX DS 57 33E application-specific manual
Volume 3 - section D)
Configure module in PL7 Junior
/PL7 Pro (see TLX DS 57 33E application-specific manual Volume
3 - section D) r
Program the weighing function
(see TLX DS 57 33E application-specific manual
Volume 3 - section D)
D
___________________________________________________________________________
1/5
D
___________________________________________________________________________
1/6
2 General installation rules
2.1
Installation precautions
The weighing modules and terminal blocks may be mounted or removed while the
PLC is powered up with no risk of damaging the module.
D
2.2
Wiring recommendations
To protect the signal from external noise induced in serial mode and from noise occurring in common mode, the following precautions are recommended :
Type of wires
Use shielded twisted pairs.
Cable screening
Measurement cable screening may only be grounded at the module end.
In the event of difficulty, and if the ground connections at both ends are of good quality, both ends of the screening may be grounded. Connect the cable screening to the
Sub-D connector covers : the PLC ground connection is via the Sub-D connector securing pins (it is therefore obligatory to screw the Sub-D connector into its socket).
Cable routing
Route the measurement cables at the maximum possible distance from the discrete
I/O cables (especially for relay outputs) and cables carrying “power” signals.
Avoid parallel routing (ensure there is a distance of at least 20 cm between the cables) and make sure any intersections are at right angles.
The measurement input is referenced to ground via the module.
___________________________________________________________________________
2/1
D
2.3
Display of module status
Module operation and status are shown on the display unit :
• two indicator lamps show that the module is powered up and operating correctly
(a green RUN lamp and a red ERR lamp),
• the I/O lamp (red) indicates an external fault on the measurement channel.
Status On Flashing Off
Lamps
RUN
ERR
I/O
CH
Normal operation Module faulty or off
Internal fault, module Communication fault, fault application absent, invalid or faulty
No fault
External faults :
• Overload or underload fault during calibration
• Range overshoot fault
• Measurement fault
• Sealed module
(configuration refused)
Loss of communication No fault with the processor
No channel status indicator lamp
___________________________________________________________________________
2/2
General installation rules 2
2.4
Description of the connections
2.4-1 Connecting the measurement system
The module and the Sub-D connectors may be connected and disconnected while powered up.
D
Load cells
Measurement cable
Connection block
The load cells are connected via a 15-pin female Sub-D connector at the module end.
A cable with two shielded twisted pairs should be used.
The load cells are powered exclusively by the module.
Ve -
Vr -
Vr +
Ve +
1
9
2
10
3
5
V-
V +
1 - Measurement input (-)
2 - Load cell input (-)
3 - Load cell input (+)
5 - Measurement input (+)
9 - Power supply output (-)
10 - Power supply output (+)
15
8
View from module
___________________________________________________________________________
2/3
2.4-2 Connecting the discrete outputs
The 24V transistor outputs are connected via a screw terminal block as shown below.
D
5
4
3
2
1
Q0 (Discrete
output 0)
Q1 (Discrete
output 1)
Common
Common
24 VDC
Discrete transistor outputs
Number of channels
Nominal supply voltage
Maximum current load load
Fu
The discrete outputs are electrically isolated from ground.
Commons 2 and 3 are connected via the card
Characteristics
2
24 V
500 mA
Protection
• Protection on each channel against short-circuits and overloads :
All the channels have an integrated protection device providing protection against these types of faults
• Protection against polarity inversion :
The module is fitted with a device which short-circuits the power supply if the polarity is reversed, without damaging the module. For this protection to operate in the best possible conditions, a fast-blow fuse should be placed on the power supply upstream of the loads.
2.4-3 Pinout for the display unit serial link
The serial link enables the weight to be displayed on an external unit.
The terminal is connected via a 9-pin female Sub-D connector at the module end, RS485 link : connections are as follows :
View from module
Terminal block
L-
1
6
3
8
4
5
9
Pole L-
Pole L+
L+
Straps 6-5 and 8-9 are used to polarize the line
2/4
General installation rules 2
2.4-4 TSX XBT H100 display unit
The TSX XBT H100 unit is connected to the weighing module, and is the principal weight indicator display.
The display unit must be connected to the module via a shielded 2-wire cable. It has a 25pin female Sub-D connector.
D
Electrical characteristics
Serial line
Transmission speed
Connection
Power supply
Voltage limits
Ripple factor
Consumption
Display unit
Refresh period
RS485 2, isolated wires
9600 bauds
Via sealable Sub-D port
3-pin plug-in terminal block from 24 VDC external source
18V to 30V
25% maximum
10 W
Back-lit liquid crystal display
(2 lines of 20 characters)
Every 100ms
Note:
For more details refer to the “Magelis Range / user’s guide” documentation.
The serial link is isolated at the TSX XBT H100 end.
___________________________________________________________________________
2/5
D
2.4-5 Connecting the display unit
The shielded twisted pair cable connecting the weighing module to the TSX XBT H100 must not exceed 100 meters.
The screening must be connected to the metal part of the Sub-D connector at the module end .
Weighing module
TSX ISP Y100
XBT H100
1
1
6
3
4
8
9
5
L -
L +
4
5
18
6
8
12
View from solder side
2.4-6 TSX ISP Y100 module consumption
Consumption
On 5VDC
On 24 VR (1)
Typical
150 mA
7 mA + 17 mA x N
Maximum
330 mA
14 mA + 17 mA x N
(1) consumption depends on the number of load cells (N) present at the measurement input
Dissipated power Typical
0.75 W
Maximum
1.65 W
___________________________________________________________________________
2/6
Glossary
____________________________________________________________________________
Metrology :
The science of weights and measures.
Calibration :
Graduates the measurement equipment.
Weighing instruments :
Measurement instruments used to determine the mass of an object through the action of its weight.
These instruments can also be used to determine other sizes, quantities, parameters or characteristics relating to weight.
Weighing instruments are classed as either non-automatic or automatic instruments depending on their type of operation.
D
Non-automatic weighing instruments :
Weighing instruments which require operator intervention during weighing operations, for example by placing the loads to be weighed on or off the load receptacle or reading the result. These instruments are used for direct observation of the result of the weighing by either displaying or printing it. Both possibilities are covered by the word “indication”.
Load receptacle :
The part of the instrument designed to receive the load.
Indicator (of a weighing instrument) :
The part of the load measurement device which gives a direct reading of the result
(TSX XBT H100).
Reset device :
The facility to reset the indicator to zero when there is no load on the load receptacle.
Tare device :
The facility to reset the instrument indication to zero when a load is placed on the load receptacle :
• without affecting the extent of the weighing range of net loads (tare addition device), or
• by reducing the extent of the weighing range of net loads (tare subtraction device, see ISP Y100).
___________________________________________________________________________
1
Glossary
___________________________________________________________________________
Predefined tare device :
The facility to subtract a predefined tare value from a gross weight and indicate the calculated result. The weighing range is, therefore reduced.
D
Maximum range (Max) :
The maximum weighing capacity, without taking into account the added tare capacity.
Minimum range (Min) :
The load value below which weighing results may be adversely affected by significant relative error.
Weighing range :
The interval between the minimum and maximum ranges.
Load limit (Lim) :
The maximum static load which the instrument can withstand without permanently impairing its measurement accuracy.
Scale division :
The value, expressed in units of weight, of the difference between two consecutive numerical indications for a given value.
Gross value :
The indication of the weight of a load on an instrument when no tare facility or tare predefined device has been used.
Net value (N) :
The indication of the weight of a load on an instrument when a tare facility has been used.
Tare value (T) :
The value of the weight of a load determined by a tare weighing facility.
Predefined tare value (PT)
The numerical value representing a weight introduced into an instrument.
The word ‘introduced’ covers any procedure such as, for example, tabulation, data retrieval following storage or the introduction of the value via an interface.
Sealing :
The sealing of an appliance to meet legal requirements.
Language objects :
PLC variables : bits, words, etc.
___________________________________________________________________________
2
Index
Symbols E
%Ixy.i.ERR
A
ABE 6 DS 2520
ABE 7 CP A 03
ABE 7CPA21
ABF Y25S
Acquistion scan
ABE 7 CP A02
ABE 7 CP A03
ABE 7 CP A12
ABE 7 CP A21
ABE 7 CP A31
AEY 414
Encoding the terminal block
Event processing
AEY 420
External faults
F
Fallback
Fast cycle
AEY 1614
AEY800/810/1600
Fault display analog modules
Forcing outputs
G
C
Grouping of conductors
Cable routing
Cable shielding
Characteristics
AEY 1614
AEY 414
AEY420
AEY800/810/1600
ASY 410/800
Cold junction compensation
AEY 1614
AEY 414
Communication fault
Conductor type
Connections
AEY 1614
AEY 414
AEY 420
AEY800/810/1600
Connector pinout
AEY 1614
AEY800/810/1600
ASY 800
Current consumed on 24 VR
D
Digital filter
AEY 414
Display block
B2/15
B1/13
I
Input catalog
Input processing
AEY 414
AEY 420
AEY 800/810/1600
Inserting modules
Internal faults
M
Maintain
Measurement display
AEY 1614
AEY 414
AEY 420
AEY800/810/1600
Measurement filtering
AEY 1614
AEY 414
AEY800/810/1600
Measurement sampling
AEY 1614
AEY 414
AEY 420
AEY800/810/1600
Module labelling
Module marking
___________________________________________________________________________
P/1
B
P
N
Normal cycle
AEY 1614
AEY800/810/1600
Number of analog modules
O
Output catalog
Output power supply fault
Analog
Output processing
Overshoot monitoring
AEY 1614
AEY 414
AEY420
AEY800/810/1600
ASY 410/800
Overshoots
AEY 414
R
Range overshoot
Recalibration
AEY 1614
AEY 414
AEY80/810/1600
S
Self-tests
Sensor alignment
AEY 1614
AEY 414
AEY 420
AEY800/810/1600
Sensor link fault
AEY 414 analog
Sensor link monitoring
AEY 414
Sensors not referenced to ground
Sensors referenced to ground
Standard display
AEY 1614
AEY 414
AEY 420
AEY800/810/1600
Standard format
Status indicator lamps
T
TELEFAST
Analog
Temperature display
AEY 414
Temperature probes
AEY 414
Terminal block fault
Terminal block label
Terminal block pinout
AEY 414
ASY 410
Thermocouple B
Thermocouple E
Thermocouple J
Thermocouple K
Thermocouple N
Thermocouple R
Thermocouple S
Thermocouple T
Thresholds
AEY 420
TSX AEY/ASY wiring
TSX BLY 01
TSX BLY 01 terminal block
TSX CAP 030
TSX ISP Y100
Display
Installation precautions
Physical description
Presentation
Wiring recommendations
TSX ISP Y100 consumption
TSX ISPY 100 connection
Discrete outputs
Measurement
TSX XBT H100 display unit
P
___________________________________________________________________________
P/2
U
User display
AEY 1614
AEY 414
AEY 420
AEY800/810/1600
W
Weighing
Wiring
Index
B
___________________________________________________________________________
P/3
P
P
___________________________________________________________________________
P/4
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Presentation of the Electronic Cam Module ........................ 3
Presentation of the Module in its Environment ................................................. 4
Chapter 2 General Rules for Setting up the Module ............................. 9
Mounting the Module in a PLC Station Rack .................................................. 10
Number of Application-Specific Channels Managed by one PLC Station ...... 13
Selection and Protection of the Auxiliary Power Supplies .............................. 16
Chapter 3 Connecting an Incremental Encoder and an SSI Absolute
Encoder ................................................................................. 21
Connecting an RS 422 Output Incremental Encoder ..................................... 23
Connecting a Totem Pole Output Incremental Encoder ................................. 26
Connecting an SSI Absolute Encoder ............................................................ 29
Connecting the Encoder Power Supply Return Check ................................... 32
Connecting the Encoder Power Supply .......................................................... 34
TSX CAP S15 Connection Accessory ............................................................ 37
TSX TAP S1505/S1524 and TSX CCP S15• Connection Accessories .......... 38
Chapter 4 Connecting the Auxiliary Inputs and the Track Outputs .. 43
i
Table of Contents
Chapter 5 Electrical Specifications of the Module .............................. 63
Specifications of the Encoder Power Supply Return Check ........................... 66
Chapter 6 Module Displays .................................................................... 69
Presentation of the TSX CCY 1128 Module Display Block ............................. 70
Chapter 7 Appendix: Connecting a Parallel Output Absolute Encoder 73
TELEFAST ABE-7CPA11 Sub-Base .............................................................. 75
Pinout of the 15-pin SUB D Module and TELEFAST Connectors .................. 78
Connecting a Parallel Output Absolute Encoder ............................................. 80
Special Wiring Rules and Precautions ............................................................ 83
Configuring the TELEFAST Sub-Base ............................................................ 87
ii
Presentation of the Electronic
Cam Module
1
At a Glance
Introduction This chapter presents the TSX CCY 1128 electronic cam module.
What's in this
Chapter
This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic
Presentation of the Module in its Environment
Physical Presentation of the Module
Compatibility with the Installed Base
Page
3
Presentation of the Electronic Cam Module
Presentation of the Module in its Environment
Introduction The TSX CCY 1128 is a standard format application-specific module in the
Premium range. It can be integrated in a TSX RKY•• rack on a TSX/PMX/PCX 57
PLC station. It performs the "electronic cam" function for a rotary, alternating, cyclic or endless axis, managed by an incremental or absolute encoder.
Operating
Principle
The module manages up to 128 cams independently. The cams may be distributed over a maximum of 32 tracks, to which up to 24 physical outputs and 8 logic outputs can be assigned. After transmission of configuration and adjustment data by the PLC processor, the module processes the cam program and controls the track outputs independently of the PLC scan. The various functions of the module are described in the "Electronic cam" application-specific manual - Reference
35001381.
Diagram of an
Installation
The diagram below shows a basic configuration for an installation
For example: TSX 57
PLC station Machine
Control elements
Programming and adjustment terminal equipped with
PL7 Junior/Pro software TSX CCY
1128
Encoder signals
Auxiliary inputs
Encoder
Sensors
Track outputs
Actuators
4
Presentation of the Electronic Cam Module
Physical Presentation of the Module
Introduction The connectors for the I/O interfaces to the machine are on the front panel of the module. The connector for linking to Bus X is at the rear of the module. All the control data and signals from the processor travel via this bus.
View of the
Module
The diagram below shows the TSX CCY 1128 module with its various elements.
TSX CCY 1128
1
2
3
5
6
4
7
5
Presentation of the Electronic Cam Module
Physical Presentation of the Module, continued
Elements and
Their Functions
Number Element
1 Screw
2 Module casing
3 Display block comprising
4 LEDs:
Function
Attaches the module to the TSX RKY •• rack
Performs the following functions:
• Supports and protects the electronic cards
• Attaches the module in its slot
• Supports the connectors
Display the module states and faults, and the channel diagnostics.
6
7
4
5
• green RUN LED
• red ERR LED
• red I/O LED
• green CH0 LED
15-pin SUB D connector
HE 10 connector
HE 10 connector
HE 10 connector
Indicates the module operating mode
Indicates a module internal fault
Indicates a fault which is external to the module or an application fault
Used for channel diagnostics.
(The states of the lamps and their meanings are described in chapter 6).
For connecting to the encoder.
For connecting the group 0 and 1 track outputs
For connecting the group 2 and 3 track outputs
For connecting the auxiliary outputs and the encoder power supply
6
Presentation of the Electronic Cam Module
Electronic Cam Function
Introduction
Illustration
●
●
●
●
The electronic cam function controls the module outputs according to the position of the encoder installed on the machine. Several types of encoder can be used:
Incremental encoder with RS 422 / RS 485 line emitter outputs
Incremental encoder with Totem Pole outputs
SSI serial output absolute encoder
Parallel output absolute encoder. Use of this encoder requires a Telefast ABE-
7CPA11 interface which converts the parallel output signals to serial output signals.
The diagram below shows the various types of encoder which can be connected to the module.
TSX CCY 1128
Incremental encoder
RS 422/485 or Totem Pole
Absolute encoder with SSI serial connection
TELEFAST ABE-7CPA11
Absolute encoder with parallel outputs
7
Presentation of the Electronic Cam Module
Compatibility with the Installed Base
Hardware
Compatibility
To take the TSX CCY 112 8 module, the PLC station must have a processor with software version SV > 3.3
Software
Compatibility
To develop an application which integrates the TSX CCY 1128 module, the
PL7 Junior / Pro software must be version SV > 3.4 + option or SV 3.4.
8
General Rules for Setting up the
Module
2
At a Glance
Introduction This chapter describes the general rules for setting up the TSX CCY 1128 electronic cam module.
What's in this
Chapter
This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic
Mounting the Module in a PLC Station Rack
Installing the Module in a PLC Station
Number of Application-Specific Channels Managed by one PLC Station
Selection and Protection of the Auxiliary Power Supplies
Page
9
General Setup Rules
Mounting the Module in a PLC Station Rack
Introduction The TSX CCY 1128 module can be mounted in any of the available slots in a TSX
RKY •• rack on a TSX 57/PMX 57/PCX 57 PLC station, except for the slots specifically for the power supply and processor modules.
Illustration The diagrams below show the procedure for mounting a module from the Premium range in the TSX RKY •• rack.
3
2
1
Procedure The following table describes the operations to be performed:
2
3
Step
1
Operation
Position the pins on the rear of the module in the locating holes at the bottom of the rack.
Rotate the module to bring it into contact with the rack.
Attach the module to the rack by tightening the screw at the bottom of the module. Maximum tightening torque for the screw: 2.0 N.m
10
General Setup Rules
Installing the Module in a PLC Station
Introduction The TSX CCY 1128 module can be installed in any of the racks in a PLC station:
●
●
TSX RKY•• extendable racks on the main Bus X segment (segment on which the rack which supports the processor is installed).
TSX RKY•• extendable racks located on remote Bus X segments.
Installation on a
Rack Belonging to the Main
Bus X Segment
The following diagram shows the installation of the module on racks belonging to the main Bus X segment. The module can be installed on the rack which supports the processor and on any of the other racks present on the Bus X. The distance between the rack which supports the module and the rack which supports the processor must not exceed 100 meters.
Bus X < 100 m
TSX CCY 1128 application-specific module
Processor
11
General Setup Rules
Installing the Module in a PLC Station, continued
Installation on a
Rack Belonging to a Remote
Bus X Segment
The following diagram shows the installation of the module on racks belonging to remote Bus X segments. In all cases, the distance between the rack which supports the module and the rack which supports the processor must not exceed
225 meters.
< 225 m
Remote location of Bus X via TSX REY 200
TSX CCY 1128 application-specific module
Processor
Processor
Remote location of
Bus X via
TSX REY 200
< 225 m
Bus X
< 100m
Remote Bus X segment
12
General Setup Rules
Number of Application-Specific Channels Managed by one PLC Station
Definition of an
Application-
Specific Channel
An application-specific module (TSX CTY• counter modules, TSX CAY• axis control modules, TSX CFY • stepper motor control modules, TSX YSP Y• weighing module, TSX CCY 1128 electronic cam module, etc) has a number of channels varying from 1 to n depending on the type of module. These channels are called application-specific channels.
Why Count the
Number of
Application-
Specific
Channels in the
Station?
To define:
●
●
The power of the processor to install
The maximum number of application-specific modules which can be installed in the station.
The number of application-specific channels for each type of application-specific module is defined in manual TSX DM 57 33E - part A - chapter 3.
Number of
Application-
Specific
Channels
Managed by
Each Type of
Processor
The following table defines the number of application-specific channels managed by each type of processor.
Processor type
TSX P57 102 / TPMX P57 102 / TPCX 57 1012
TSX P57 202 / TPMX P57 202
TSX P57 252
TSX P57 302
TSX P57 352 / TPMX P57 352 / TPCX 57 3512:
TSX P57 402
TSX P57 452 / TPMX P57 452
32
32
48
48
Number of channels managed
8
24
24
Number of
Channels for a
TSX CCY 1128
Module
A TSX CCY 1128 module has one application-specific channel.
13
General Setup Rules
Installation Recommendations
Introduction In order to ensure that the module operates correctly, certain precautions must be taken when it is inserted and removed, when plugging in and removing connectors on the front panel of the module and when tightening the module fixing screw and the 15-pin SUB D connector.
Inserting and
Removing a
Module
A module can be inserted or removed without switching off the rack power supply.
The module has been designed to allow this operation to be performed with the power supply on to ensure availability of the equipment.
Plugging and
Unplugging
Connectors on the Front Panel of the Module
It is not advisable to plug or unplug the connectors located on the front panel of the module if the sensor/preactuator power supplies are switched on.
Reasons:
●
●
The encoders do not allow simultaneous startup and switching off of the signals and power supplies.
The track outputs may be damaged if they are at state 1 and connected to inductive loads.
Tightening the
Screws and
Locking the
HE10
Connectors
To ensure good electrical contact between the grounds and thus obtain good resistance to electrostatic and electromagnetic interference:
●
● the module fixing screws and those on the 15-pin SUB D connector must be correctly tightened.
❍
❍ tightening torque on the module fixing screw: 2.0 N.m
tightening torque on the 15-pin SUB D connector fixing screws 0.5 N.m
The HE10 connectors must be correctly locked.
14
General Setup Rules
General Wiring Instructions
Introduction Certain basic rules must be followed to ensure that the control system works correctly.
Cross-section of
Wires Used
This must be sufficient to prevent any line voltage drops and overheating.
Cable Routing The connection cables of the encoders, of other sensors and of the preactuators must be kept away from any source of radiation caused by the switching of high power electrical circuits which could cause malfunctions.
Encoder Signal
Connection
Cables ●
●
●
The module/encoder connection cables must observe the following rules:
●
They must be shielded using good quality shielding
They must only carry signals relating to the encoder
The shielding of the cables must be connected to the machine ground on the module side and the encoder side
There must be electrical continuity over the whole connection.
15
General Setup Rules
Selection and Protection of the Auxiliary Power Supplies
Introduction The encoders, sensors and preactuators associated with the module require the use of auxiliary power supplies (5 VDC and/or 24 VDC).
Type of Power
Supply
Only regulated power supplies should be used, in order to:
● Ensure more accurate sensor and preactuator response times
● Increase the reliability of the equipment by lower temperature rises in the module I/O circuits.
These power supplies must have a sufficiently long period of independent operation (> 10 ms) to deal with mains supply micro-cuts and ensure continuous correct operation of the module.
Protection of
Power Supplies
The power supplies of the encoder, other sensors and preactuators must be protected against overloads and short-circuits by fast-blow fuses of the appropriate rating.
Machine
Grounding of the
Power Supply 0V
The 0V of the power supplies must be machine grounded as close as possible to the power supply outputs.
General Rules for Setting up the
Encoder Power
Supply
●
●
●
It must only be used for supplying the encoder
It must have a sufficiently long period of independent operation to deal with mains supply micro-cuts (> 10 ms).
It must be placed as close as possible to the TSX CCY 1128 module in order to reduce the coupling capacities as much as possible.
16
General Setup Rules
Choice of Encoder
Introduction The inputs of TSX CCY 1128 modules can receive signals from an encoder, which may be:
●
●
An incremental encoder
An SSI serial output absolute encoder
● A parallel output absolute encoder. The last type requires the use of a special
ABE-7CPA11 TELEFAST interface.
The user chooses one of these types of encoder according to requirements.
Encoder Output
Interfaces
The following table summarizes the main specifications of the output interface for the types of encoder generally used.
Type of encoder
Supply voltage
Incremental 5 VDC
Absolute with SSI outputs
10...30 VDC
10...30 VDC
Absolute with parallel outputs
5 VDC or
10...30 VDC
Output voltage
Type of interface
5 VDC differential Standard RS 422 line emitter outputs with 2 outputs per signal
A+/A-, B+/B-, Z+/Z-
10...30 VDC Totem Pole outputs with one output per signal A, B, Z
5 VDC differential Standard RS 422 line emitter output for the data signal
(Data SSI)
RS 422 compatible input for the clock signal (CLK SSI).
5 VDC or
10...30 VDC
Parallel outputs. Require the use of the ABE-7CPA11 Telefast interface to convert the parallel output signals to serial signals
17
General Setup Rules
Choice of Encoder, continued
Encoder Power
Supply
The design of the module enables the encoder to be supplied with:
● 5VDC
● or 24 VDC, standard voltage in the range 10...30 VDC.
The choice of supply voltage depends on the supply voltage of the encoder.
5VDC Encoder
Power Supply
For encoders with a 5VDC supply, the line voltage drop must be taken into account.
This depends on:
●
●
The length of the cable between the module and the encoder (length in both directions)
The cross-section of the wire
● The consumption of the encoder
The voltage drop permitted by the encoder is generally 10% of the nominal voltage.
The following table gives the line voltage drop for a wire length of 100 meters and a given encoder consumption, according to the wire cross-section.
Wire cross-section Voltage drop for a 100 meter length wire and an encoder consumption of:
50 mA 100 mA 150 mA 200 mA
0.22 mm² = 24 gauge 0.4 V
0.34 mm² = 22 gauge 0.25 V
0.5 mm²
1 mm²
0.17 V
0.09 V
-
0.5 V
0.34 V
0.17 V
-
-
0.51 V
0.24 V
-
-
-
0.34 V
Continued on next page
18
General Setup Rules
Choice of Encoder, continued
5VDC Encoder
Power Supply, continued
CAUTION
Recommendation concerning the 5 VDC encoder power supply
It is dangerous to increase the encoder supply voltage to compensate for a line voltage drop. If there is a load break, this may result in an overvoltage on the module inputs.
Failure to follow this recommendation may result in damage to the module.
24VDC Encoder
Power Supply
Encoders with a 24 VDC supply voltage are recommended for the following reasons:
●
●
The power supply source does not require a high level of accuracy. These encoders generally have a power supply range of 10...30V.
The line voltage drop is low, thus there can be a considerable distance between the module and the encoder.
Electrical
Continuity
To ensure correct operation in an environment which is subject to interference, it is essential:
●
● to select an encoder whose metal casing is connected to the machine ground of the connected device.
that there is electrical continuity between:
❍ the encoder
❍
❍ the connection cable shielding the module.
19
General Setup Rules
20
Connecting an Incremental
Encoder and an SSI Absolute
Encoder
3
At a Glance
Introduction This chapter describes the operations for connecting an incremental encoder and an SSI absolute encoder to the TSX CCY 1128 electronic cam module.
What's in this
Chapter
This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic
Connecting an RS 422 Output Incremental Encoder
Connecting a Totem Pole Output Incremental Encoder
Connecting an SSI Absolute Encoder
Connecting the Encoder Power Supply Return Check
Connecting the Encoder Power Supply
TSX CAP S15 Connection Accessory
TSX TAP S1505/S1524 and TSX CCP S15• Connection Accessories
Page
21
Connecting an Incremental and SSI Absolute Encoder
Principle
Connection
Interfaces
Illustration
The 15-pin SUB D connector, located on the module front panel, connects the module to the encoder. The following pass via this connector:
●
●
All signals from and to the encoder
The encoder power supply source, which is itself connected to the HE10 connector:
❍
❍ either via an ABE-7H16R20 TELEFAST wiring interface. or directly via a TSX CDP •01 prewired cable
The following diagram illustrates the principle for connecting an encoder to a TSX
CCY 1128 module.
C
TSX CCY
1128
15-pin SUB D connector
1
9
2
10
3
Encoder
11
4
5
12
Module/encoder connection system
(cables + connectors)
13
6
14
7
15
8
TSX CDP •01 prewired cable
OR
TSX CDP ••3 cable
TELEFAST ABE-7H16R20
5VDC or 10..30VDC
encoder power supply
5VDC or 10..30VDC
encoder power supply
22
Connecting an Incremental and SSI Absolute Encoder
Connecting an RS 422 Output Incremental Encoder
Pinout of the
Module
15-pin SUB D
Connector
The pinout of the module 15-pin SUB D connector for connecting an RS 422 output incremental encoder is as follows:
Diagram (view from the front)
Pin no.
Signal Description
5
6
3
4
7
8
1
2
11
12
13
9
10
14
15
10
11
12
7
8
9
13
4
5
6
1
2
3
14
15
A+ 5V
A-
-
Z+ 5V
Z-
-
Encoder input, pulse A+ (5VDC)
Encoder input, pulse A-
-
Encoder input, zero marker pulse Z+ (5 VDC)
Encoder input, zero marker pulse Z-
-
10...30 V Encoder power supply output (+ 10...30 VDC)
0 V Encoder power supply output (- 0 VDC)
-
B+ 5V
B-
-
EPSR
Encoder input, pulse B+ (5 VDC)
Encoder input, pulse B-
-
Encoder power supply return + input. It receives the feedback from the power supply + from the encoder which enables the module to check that the encoder is present.
-
5 V
-
Encoder power supply output (+5 VDC)
23
Connecting an Incremental and SSI Absolute Encoder
Connecting an RS 422 Output Incremental Encoder, continued
Equivalent
Circuit Diagram of Module
Encoder Inputs
A, B and Z
The following diagram shows the equivalent circuit diagram of encoder input A, B or Z used with an incremental encoder which has:
❍
❍ a line emitter output stage a 5VDC standard RS 422 output voltage.
Note: Each A, B and Z input has a differential line check.
220 Ohms
A+ 5V
This diagram shows the equivalent circuit diagram of input A.
The diagram is identical for inputs B and Z.
TSX CCY 1128
A-
24
Connecting an Incremental and SSI Absolute Encoder
Connecting an RS 422 Output Incremental Encoder, continued
Connection
Diagram
The following diagram shows the principle for connecting the TSX CCY 1128 module to an RS 422 output incremental encoder powered with 5VDC.
TSX CCY 1128 Encoder
A
B
Z
EPSR
+ 5 VDC
- 0 VDC
3
4
5
1
2
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
4
2
1
3
5
6
8
12
10
A+
A-
B+
B-
Z+
Z-
Return supply + supply + supply -
Recommendations
●
●
The following recommendations must be followed when making the connection:
●
Connect each encoder signal, A+/A-, B+/B-, Z+/Z- , using a twisted pair
Connect each power supply point using a twisted pair, in order to reduce line voltage drops
Connect the cable shielding to the machine ground at both ends
CAUTION:
Recommendations concerning the pinout of the encoder I/O
Before connecting the encoder to the module, check the pinout given by the encoder manufacturer.
Failure to follow this recommendation may result in damage to the encoder and the module.
25
Connecting an Incremental and SSI Absolute Encoder
Connecting a Totem Pole Output Incremental Encoder
Pinout of the
Module
15-pin SUB D
Connector
The pinout of the module 15-pin SUB D connector for connecting a Totem Pole output incremental encoder is as follows:
Diagram (view from the front)
Pin no.
Signal
5
6
3
4
7
8
1
2
9
10
14
15
11
12
13
9
10
11
6
7
8
12
3
4
5
1
2
13
14
15
Description
-
A-
-
Input to be connected to encoder 0V
B+ 24V Encoder input, pulse B+ (10...30VDC)
-
ZInput to be connected to encoder 0V
-
10...30 V Encoder power supply output (+ 10...30 VDC)
0 V Encoder power supply output (- 0 VDC)
A+ 24V Encoder input, pulse A+ (10...30VDC)
-
BInput to be connected to encoder 0V
Z+ 24V Encoder input, zero marker pulse Z+
(+10...30 VDC)
EPSR Encoder power supply return + input. It receives the feedback from the power supply + of the encoder which enables the module to check that the encoder is present.
-
5 V
-
Encoder power supply output (+5 VDC)
26
Connecting an Incremental and SSI Absolute Encoder
Connecting a Totem Pole Output Incremental Encoder, continued
Equivalent
Circuit Diagram of Module
Encoder Inputs
A, B and Z
The following diagram shows the equivalent circuit diagram of encoder input A, B or Z used with an incremental encoder which has:
● A Totem Pole output stage
● A 10...30 VDC output voltage.
Notes:
●
●
Differential mounting is not possible. The - pole of each input (A-, B-and Z-) must be linked to the encoder 0V, and the + inputs (A+, B+ and Z+) to encoder outputs A+, B+, Z+.
No line check.
R2 R1
A+ 24V
This diagram shows the equivalent circuit diagram of input A.
The diagram is identical for inputs B and Z.
R3
TSX CCY 1128
A-
27
Connecting an Incremental and SSI Absolute Encoder
Connecting a Totem Pole Output Incremental Encoder, continued
Encoder
Connection
Diagram
The following diagram shows the connection of a Totem Pole output incremental encoder, supplied with 10...30VDC.
TSX CCY 1128
A
B
Z
EPSR
+ 10...30 VDC
- 0 VDC
9
13
14
15
10
11
12
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
A+
B+
Z+
Return supply + supply + supply -
Encoder
Recommendations
●
●
●
Connect the encoder supply + to pin 7 of the module 15-pin SUB D connector
Connect the module EPSR input to the supply + if the encoder does not have a supply + return output.
Connect the cable shielding to the machine ground at both ends
CAUTION
Recommendations concerning the pinout of the encoder I/O
Before connecting the encoder to the module, check the pinout given by the encoder manufacturer.
Failure to follow this recommendation may result in damage to the encoder and the module.
28
Connecting an Incremental and SSI Absolute Encoder
Connecting an SSI Absolute Encoder
Pinout of the
Module
15-pin SUB D
Connector
The pinout of the module 15-pin SUB D connector for connecting an SSI absolute encoder is as follows:
Diagram (view from the front)
Pin no.
Signal
5
6
3
4
7
8
1
2
11
12
13
9
10
14
15
9
10
11
6
7
8
12
13
3
4
5
1
2
14
15
Description
-
-
-
SSI data + Encoder input, SSI data + (5 VDC)
SSI data Encoder input, SSI data-
-
-
-
-
-
-
CLK + Encoder output, CLK SSI + (5 VDC)
10...30 V Encoder power supply output (+ 10...30 VDC)
0 V Encoder power supply output (- 0 VDC)
-
EPSR
-
-
-
CLK -
5 V
-
Encoder power supply return + input. It receives the feedback from the power supply + of the encoder which enables the module to check that the encoder is present.
Encoder output, CLK SSI -
Encoder power supply output (+5 VDC)
29
Connecting an Incremental and SSI Absolute Encoder
Connecting an SSI Absolute Encoder, continued
Equivalent
Circuit Diagram of the Module
SSI Data
Encoder Input
The following diagram gives the equivalent circuit diagram of the SSI Data encoder input used with an SSI absolute encoder which has:
❍
❍
A line emitter output stage
A standard RS 422/RS 485 5VDC output voltage.
Note: The SSI Data input has a differential line check.
This diagram shows the equivalent circuit diagram of input A.
The diagram is identical for inputs B and Z.
SSI Data +
220 Ohms
SSI Data -
TSX CCY 1128
30
Connecting an Incremental and SSI Absolute Encoder
Connecting an SSI Absolute Encoder, continued
SSI Absolute
Encoder
Connection
Diagram
The following diagram shows the connection of an SSI serial link absolute encoder, supplied with 10...30VDC with RS 422 standard line emitter outputs.
TSX CCY 1128
DATA SSI +
DATA SSI -
CLK
SSI
1
DATA SSI
2
EPSR 3
+10...30 VDC
- 0 VDC
6
7
4
5
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15 supply + return
CLK SSI +
CLK SSI supply + supply -
Encoder
Recommendations
●
●
●
●
Connect each DATA SSI+/DATA SSI- encoder signal using a twisted pair
Connect each power supply point using a twisted pair, in order to reduce line voltage drops
Connect the cable shielding to the machine ground at both ends
Connect the module EPSR input to the power supply + on the encoder side if the encoder does not have a power supply + return output.
CAUTION
Recommendations concerning the pinout of the encoder I/O
Before connecting the encoder to the module, check the pinout given by the encoder manufacturer.
Failure to follow this recommendation may result in damage to the encoder or the module.
31
Connecting an Incremental and SSI Absolute Encoder
Connecting the Encoder Power Supply Return Check
Principle The EPSR input signal from the encoder is compared with:
●
●
Either a fixed voltage of 3.3 V generated internally, if the VRef input is not connected.
Or a voltage equal to 66% of the voltage applied at the Vref input, + pole of the encoder supply voltage.
Equivalent
Circuit Diagram of the Encoder
Power Supply
Return Check
The following diagram gives the equivalent circuit diagram of the encoder power supply return check.
3,3 V
Encoder supply +
VRef
Encoder power supply return
(EPSR)
TSX CCY 1128
Encoder - 0 V
Using the Vref
Input
The following table summarizes the use of the Vref input according to the encoder supply voltage.
If
The encoder is supplied with 5V
The encoder is supplied with 10...30V
Then
The VRef input is not connected to the encoder power supply +.
The EPSR signal is compared with the internal voltage of 3.3V. OK if > 3.3 V
The VRef input is connected to the encoder power supply +.
The EPSR signal is compared with 66% of the encoder power supply voltage. OK if > 66%
32
Connecting an Incremental and SSI Absolute Encoder
Connecting the Encoder Power Supply Return Check, continued
Connection
Diagram if the
Encoder is
Supplied with
10...30 V
The following is the connection diagram for the encoder power supply return check if the encoder is supplied with 10...30 V.
3,3 V
+ 10..30V
VRef
EPSR
Encoder supply +
EPSR
- 0V
TSX CCY 1128
Encoder
Encoder - 0V
Connection
Diagram if the
Encoder is
Supplied with 5 V
The following is the connection diagram for the encoder power supply return check if the encoder is supplied with 5 V.
3,3 V
+ 5V
VRef
EPSR
Encoder supply +
EPSR
Encoder
Encoder - 0V
TSX CCY 1128
- 0V
Connection
Diagram if the
Encoder does not have a Power
Supply Return
Output
In this case, the EPSR input is connected to the power supply + on the encoder side.
3,3 V
Encoder supply +
VRef
EPSR
(1)
Encoder supply +
Encoder
Encoder - 0V
- 0V
TSX CCY 1128
(1) Connection to be made if the encoder is supplied with 10...30V
33
Connecting an Incremental and SSI Absolute Encoder
Connecting the Encoder Power Supply
Introduction The encoder power supply is connected:
●
● either via an ABE-7H16R20 TELEFAST wiring interface, which is itself connected to the module via a TSX CDP ••3 cable.
or directly via a TSX CDP •01 prewired cable
Connection
Diagram for the
Encoder Power
Supply via a
TELEFAST
Interface
The following diagram shows the connection of the encoder power supply:
●
● either 24 VDC, for encoders with 10...30VDC power supply range or 5 VDC, for encoders with 5 VDC power supply.
TSX CCY
1128
+ + – –
TSX CDP
••3 cable
TELEFAST
ABE-7H16R20
34
1
3
2
4
5 V
0 V
10...30 V
VRef
TSX CDP
••3 cable
24 VDC power
101 102 103
- 0 V
FU
+24 V
VRef
(1)
5 VDC power
101 100
- 0 V
FU
+5 V
(1) For encoder power supply check at 66% of the voltage provided. Connection only to be made if supply voltage is
10...30 VDC
Connecting an Incremental and SSI Absolute Encoder
Connecting the Encoder Power Supply, continued
Catalog of TSX
CDP ••3
Connection
Cables
The following table gives the part numbers of the various cables for connecting the
TELEFAST to the module, together with their respective lengths.
Part no. of cable
TSX CDP 053
TSX CDP 103
TSX CDP 203
TSX CDP 303
TSX CDP 503
Length of cable
0.5 meter
1 meter
2 meters
3 meters
5 meters
Power Supply
Connection
Diagram using
Prewired Cable
TSX CDP •01
The following diagram shows the connection of the encoder power supply:
●
● either 24 VDC, for encoders with 10...30VDC power supply range or 5 VDC, for encoders with 5 VDC power supply.
TSX CCY
1128
VRef
(1)
White
Brown
Green
Yellow
Fu
+5 VDC
0 VDC
Fu
+24 VDC
TSX CDP •01 cable
TSX CDP •01 cable
TSX CDP •01 cable
(1) For encoder power supply check at 66% of the voltage provided. Connection only to be made if the supply voltage is
10...30 VDC
35
Connecting an Incremental and SSI Absolute Encoder
Connecting the Encoder Power Supply, continued
Catalog of
TSX CDP •01
Connection
Cables
The following table gives the part numbers of the various cables for connecting the
TELEFAST to the module, together with their respective lengths.
Part no. of cable
TSX CDP 301
TSX CDP 501
Length of cable
3 meters
5 meters
Recommendations
●
●
●
Maximum length of the wires between the power supply outputs and the connection points on the TELEFAST: must be less than 0.5 meter
Protections on the power supply + : although the module has a number of integrated protection systems against wiring errors and accidental shortcircuits on the cable, it is essential to install a 1A fast blow fuse (Fu) on the power supply +.
Machine grounding of the power supply 0V: this must be done as close as possible to the power supply output.
36
Connecting an Incremental and SSI Absolute Encoder
TSX CAP S15 Connection Accessory
At a Glance The TSX CAP S15 accessory consists of two 15-pin SUB D connectors. One of these connectors is used to provide the interface for connecting the module to the encoder connection system.
The following table presents the TSX CAP S15 connection accessory.
Diagram Part number Use
TSX CAP S15 Can be used in the module/encoder connection system
Composition
Kit consisting of two 15-pin
SUB D connectors with covers.
Integration of the
TSX CAP S15 in the Connection
System
The following diagram shows the integration of a 15-pin SUB D connector from the
TSX CAP S15 kit in the encoder connection system.
12-pin DIN connectors
TSX CCY 1128
TSX CAP S15
TSX CAP S15
Cable
Cable female male
12-pin DIN connectors
Cable
12-pin DIN connectors
Incremental or
SSI absolute encoder
Encoder outputs: via shielded cable without connector
Encoder outputs:
12-pin DIN connector integrated in the encoder
37
Connecting an Incremental and SSI Absolute Encoder
TSX TAP S1505/S1524 and TSX CCP S15• Connection Accessories
Presentation of the Accessories
The following table presents the various accessories, their use and functions.
Diagram
12-pin
DIN
12-pin
DIN
15-pin
SUB D
15-pin
SUB D
Part number Use Function
TSX TAP S1505 Can be used in the module/encoder connection system to connect an RS
422 output incremental encoder supplied with 5
VDC. Signals A+/A-,
B+/B-, Z+/Z-.
Mechanical interface, equipped with two connectors which convert a 15-pin SUB D connector to a 12-pin DIN connector.
15-pin
SUB D
TSX TAP S1524 Can be used in the module/encoder connection system to connect a Totem
Pole output encoder supplied with 24
VDC. Signals A, B,
Z.
Mechanical interface, equipped with two connectors which convert a 15-pin SUB D connector to a 12-pin DIN connector.
15-pin
SUB D
TSX CCP S15• Can be used in the module/encoder connection system to connect the module to the TSX
TAP S1505 or TSX
TAP S1524
Connection cables consisting of one cable with 24 gauge wires equipped with a 15-pin
SUB D connector at both ends.
38
Connecting an Incremental and SSI Absolute Encoder
TSX TAP S1505/S1524 and TSX CCP S15• Connection Accessories, continued
Integration of the
TSX TAP S1505/
S1524 and TSX
CCP S15•
Accessories in the Connection
System
The following diagram shows the integration of the TSX CCP S15, TSX TAP S1505 and TSX TAP S1524 accessories in the connection system of an encoder.
TSX CCY 1128
12-pin DIN connectors female male
Incremental encoder
Cable
TSX CCP S15 •
TSX TAP
S1505/S1524
Encoder outputs via shielded cable
Cable
TSX CCP S15 • TSX TAP
S1505/S1524
Encoder outputs via 12-pin DIN connector integrated in the encoder
Mounting the
TSX TAP S1505 /
TAP S1524
Accessories
The following diagrams show both methods for mounting these accessories.
Mounting on Telequick plate AM1-PA• Mounting on enclosure feedthrough
Max. thickness =5mm
Seal
Cut-out
∅
7mm
39
Connecting an Incremental and SSI Absolute Encoder
TSX TAP S1505/S1524 and TSX CCP S15• Connection Accessories, continued
Dimensions of the TSX TAP
S1505 / TAP
S1524
Accessories
The following diagram gives the dimensions and fixing centers for the TSX TAP
S1505 and TSX TAP 1524 accessories on AM1-PA• Telequick plates.
55
31 38
47
Clockwise and
Counterclockwise
Direction of the
12-point DIN
Connector in the
Connection
System
For ease of connection, the numbers of the pins on the 12-point DIN connectors in the connection system must correspond exactly. For this, the pinout of these connectors must be:
●
●
Clockwise for connectors which belong to the cable connecting the TSX TAP
S1505/S1524 accessory to the encoder
Counterclockwise for connectors which belong to the encoder and to the TSX
TAP S1505/S1524 accessory.
TSX TAP S1505/S1524
Cable to be made by the user or supplied by the encoder manufacturer
Encoder with counterclockwise connector female 12-pin
DIN
3
1 9 8
2 10 12 7
11
6
4 5 male 12-pin
DIN
8 9 1
7 12 10 2
6
11
5 4
3
Clockwise
Counterclockwise female 12-pin
DIN
8 9 1
7 12 10 2
6
11
5 4
3 male 12-pin
DIN
3
1 9 8
2 10 12 7
11
6
4 5
40
Connecting an Incremental and SSI Absolute Encoder
TSX TAP S1505/S1524 and TSX CCP S15• Connection Accessories, continued
Pinout of the
Connectors on the TSX TAP
S1505 Accessory
The following diagram shows the pinout of the TSX TAP S1505 accessory on the
15-pin SUB D connector side and the 12-pin DIN connector side.
male 15-pin SUB D
TSX CCP S15•
9
1
1
2
A+ 5 V
A- 5 V
5
6
Special cable to be made or supplied by the encoder manufacturer
2
10 10
B+ 5 V
8 female 12-pin
DIN
3
B- 5 V
11 11 1
12
13
4
5
4
5
Z+ 5 V
Z- 5 V
3
4
1 9 8
2 10 12 7
3
11
4 5
6
TSX CCY
1128
14
15
6
7
13
15
EPSR
+5 V
2
12
RS 422 output incremental encoder
(signals (A+/A-,
B+/B-, Z+/Z-)
8
0V
8 10
TSX TAP S1505
41
Connecting an Incremental and SSI Absolute Encoder
TSX TAP S1505/S1524 and TSX CCP S15• Connection Accessories, continued
Pinout of the
Connectors on the TSX TAP
S1524 Accessory
The following diagram shows the pinout of the TSX TAP S1524 accessory on the
15-pin SUB D connector side and the 12-pin DIN connector side.
TSX CCP S15•
TSX CCY
1128 male 15-pin
SUB D
1
9
2
10
3
11
4
12
5
13
6
14
7
15
8
3
9
12
7
13
2
5
8
B+ 24V
8
A+ 24V
5
Z+ 24V
Encoder power supply return
3
24V
12 female 12-pin
DIN
3
1 9 8
2 10 12 7
11
6
4 5
Special cable to be made or supplied by the encoder manufacturer
Totem Pole output incremental encoder
(signals (A, B,
Z)
0V
11 10
TSX TAP S1524
42
Connecting the Auxiliary Inputs and the Track Outputs
4
At a Glance
Introduction This chapter describes the operations for connecting the auxiliary inputs and track outputs of the TSX CCY 1128 electronic cam module.
What's in this
Chapter
This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic
Connecting the Auxiliary Inputs
Page
43
Connecting the Auxiliary Inputs and the Track Outputs
At a Glance
Connection
Interfaces
Illustration
The three HE10 connectors on the front panel of the module are designed to connect:
●
●
The sensors and preactuators associated with the module I/O
The power supplies of the sensors and preactuators associated with the module I/O
The module/sensors and preactuators are connected using:
●
● either TELEFAST sub-bases and TSX CDP ••3 cables (this is the recommended connection system).
or TSX CDP •01 flat cables.
The following diagram illustrates the principle of the system for connecting the I/O of a TSX CCY 1128 module.
TSX CCY
1128
Preactuator power supply
TELEFAST
ABE-7H16R20 5
3 or
0
Connection of the track output preactuators
Preactuator power supply
TELEFAST
ABE-7H16R20 5
3
4
1 or
4
Connection of the track output preactuators
2 or
3
5
4
Sensor power supply
TELEFAST
ABE-7H16R20
Connection of the auxiliary input sensors
44
Connecting the Auxiliary Inputs and the Track Outputs
At a Glance, continued
Elements and
Their Functions
The following table gives the various elements of the connection system.
Number
0
1
2
3
4
5
Element
20-pin HE10 connector
20-pin HE10 connector
Function
Connects:
• the preactuators controlled by the group 0 and 1 track outputs
• the preactuator power supply
Connects:
• the preactuators controlled by the group 2 and 3 track outputs
• the preactuator power supply
20-pin HE10 connector Connects:
• the sensors which control the auxiliary inputs,
• the sensor power supply
• the incremental encoder or SSI absolute encoder power supply
TSX CDP••3 cables equipped at both ends with an HE10 connector
Connect the module to the TELEFAST sub-base.
They are available in 5 lengths:
• TSX CDP 053: length 0.5 meter
• TSX CDP 103: length 1 meter
• TSX CDP 203: length 2 meters
• TSX CDP 303: length 3 meters
• TSX CDP 503: length 5 meters
TSX CDP•01 flat cables equipped with an HE10 connector at one end and with color-coded flying leads at the other
TELEFAST sub-bases
ABE-7H16R20
Used to connect the module I/O directly to the sensors and preactuators. They are available in 2 lengths:
• TSX CDP 301: length 3 meters
• TSX CDP 501: length 5 meters
Used to convert an HE10 connector to a screw terminal connector, for quick connection of power supplies, sensors and preactuators
45
Connecting the Auxiliary Inputs and the Track Outputs
At a Glance, continued
Connection
Accessories
The sensors are connected to the auxiliary inputs and the preactuators to the track outputs in the following way:
●
● either via an ABE-7H16R20 TELEFAST sub-base and TSX CDP ••3 cable
(recommended system).
or directly using a TSX CDP •01 flat cable.
The following diagram shows both these types of connection
TSX CCY 1128 TSX CCY 1128
TSX CDP ••3 cable
TELEFAST
ABE-7H16R20
TSX CDP •01 flat cable
Connection to terminal block or directly to sensors/ preactuators
Sensor/preactuator connection
46
Connecting the Auxiliary Inputs and the Track Outputs
Connecting the Auxiliary Inputs
Number of
Auxiliary Inputs
The TSX CCY 1128 module has 3 auxiliary inputs:
Input
IREC
ICAPT0
ICAPT1
Function
Recalibration of the position measurement
Reading the position in register 0
Reading the position in register 1
Equivalent
Circuit Diagram
The auxiliary inputs are supplied with 24 VDC from an external power supply to be provided on the connector. The following illustration gives the equivalent circuit diagram.
+ 24 VDC
ICAPT1
ICAPT0
IREC
+ -
Sensor power supply
24 VDC
- 0VDC
TSX CCY 1128
Voltage monitoring
47
Connecting the Auxiliary Inputs and the Track Outputs
Connecting the Auxiliary Inputs, continued
Position of the
HE10 Connector and
Identification of the Signals
The following diagram shows the position of the HE 10 connector on the module relative to the auxiliary inputs and identifies the signals carried via this connector.
This connector also carries the power supply for the incremental encoder or SSI absolute encoder. This information is given in more detail in Chapter 3.
TSX
CCY 1128
5 V
10...30 V
IREC
ICAPT0 nc
1
3
5
7
9
2
4
6 nc nc
11
13
12
14 nc 15 16
24 V 17 18
24 V 19 20
0 V
VRef nc
8
10
ICAPT1 nc nc nc nc
0 V
0 V
48
Connecting the Auxiliary Inputs and the Track Outputs
Connecting the Auxiliary Inputs, continued
Pinout of the
Module HE10
Connector
The pinout of the HE10 connector relative to the auxiliary inputs is as follows:
Description Diagram (view from the front)
Pin no.
Signal
1
3
5
2
4
6
1
2
3
4
5 V
0 V
10...30V
VRef
7
9
11
8
10
12
13 14
15 16
17 18
19 20
5
6
7
8
9
10
17
18
19
20
14
15
16
11
12
13
-
-
-
-
IREC
-
ICAPT0
ICAPT1
-
-
24 V
0 V
24 V
0 V
Encoder +5 VDC power supply input
Encoder - 0VDC power supply input
Encoder + 10...30 VDC power supply input
Voltage reference input for the encoder power supply check
Recalibration auxiliary input
Not wired
Read auxiliary input 0
Read auxiliary input 1
Not wired
Not wired
Not wired
Not wired
Not wired
Not wired
Not wired
Not wired
Sensor +24 VDC power supply input
Sensor - 0 VDC power supply input
Sensor +24 VDC power supply input
Sensor - 0 VDC power supply input
49
Connecting the Auxiliary Inputs and the Track Outputs
Connecting the Auxiliary Inputs, continued
Outline Diagram The following illustration gives the outline diagram for connecting the auxiliary inputs
Encoder power supply
- 0 VDC
+ 5 VDC
FU2
FU3
+ 10..30 VDC
Sensor power supply
+24 VDC
FU1
+
–
0 VDC
9 10
11 12
13 14
15 16
17 18
19 20
1
HE10
2
2
3
5
7 to module and encoder
15-pin SUB D connector
4
IREC
6
8
ICAPT0
ICAPT1
50
Connecting the Auxiliary Inputs and the Track Outputs
Connecting the Auxiliary Inputs, continued
Connection
Using TELEFAST
Sub-Base and
TSX CDP ••3
Cable
● Availability of the signals on the TELEFAST sub-base screw terminal block
(1)
(2)
●
●
(1) On the ABE-7H16R20 TELEFAST sub-base, the position of the jumper defines the polarity of terminals 200 to 215:
Jumper in positions 1 and 2: terminals 200 to 215 are at + polarity
Jumper in positions 2 and 4: terminals 200 to 215 are at - polarity
(2) On the ABE-7H16R20 TELEFAST sub-base it is possible to add an optional
ABE-7BV20 terminal bar to create a second sensor common (+ or - depending on the user’s choice).
Continued on next page
51
Connecting the Auxiliary Inputs and the Track Outputs
Connecting the Auxiliary Inputs, continued
Connection
Using TELEFAST
Sub-Base and
TSX CDP ••3
Cable, continued
● Example of connecting the sensors to the auxiliary inputs
TSX CCY 1128
Connection of 24 VDC power supply for auxiliary input sensors
+ + – –
24 VDC 0 VDC
+ + – –
TELEFAST
ABE-7H16R20
52
Connection of sensors to auxiliary inputs
Mechanical contact
IREC ICAPT0 ICAPT1
204 104 205 105 206 106
+ +
207 107
+
2-wire PNP proximity sensor
204 104 205 105 206 106
+ +
207 107
+
3-wire PNP proximity sensor
204 104
+
205
304
–
105 206 106
+
207
306
–
+
107
307
–
Continued on next page
Connecting the Auxiliary Inputs and the Track Outputs
Connecting the Auxiliary Inputs, continued
Connection
Using TELEFAST
Sub-Base and
TSX CDP ••3
Cable, continued
● Correspondence between the TELEFAST terminal block and the module HE10 connector
Type of signal Function TELEFAST screw terminal block (terminal no.)
HE10 connector
20 pins
(pin no.)
100
101
1
2
102
103
3
4
+ 5VDC
- 0 VDC
+ 10...30 VDC
VRef
Encoder power supply
104
105
106
107
108 to 115
3
4
+ 24 VDC
- 0 VDC
+24 VDC
- 0 VDC
1
2
200...215
300...315
-
-
20
-
-
17
18
19
5
6
7
8
9 to 16
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
IREC
Not connected
ICAPT0
ICAPT1
Not connected
-
-
Voltage reference input for the encoder power supply monitoring
Recalibration input
-
Register 0 read input
Register 1 read input
-
Auxiliary input sensor power supply
Terminals 200 to 215 at + 24 VDC, if terminals 1 and 2 are linked
Terminals 200 to 215 at
- 0 VDC, if terminals 3 and 4 are linked
Connection of sensor commons to:
• + 24 VDC if terminals 1 & 2 linked
• - 0 VDC if terminals 3 & 4 linked
On ABE-7BV20 optional terminal bar, terminals which can be used as sensor common are to be linked by wire at the required common voltage.
53
Connecting the Auxiliary Inputs and the Track Outputs
Connecting the Auxiliary Inputs, continued
Connection
Using
TSX CDP •01
Flat Cable
With this type of connection all the signals from or to the module can be connected directly:
●
● on a terminal block, or on the sensors.
HE10
5
7
1
3
9 10
11 12
13 14
15 16
17 18
19 20
6
8
2
4
TSX CDP •01 white green brown
+5 VDC
0 VDC yellow
+10...30 VDC
VRef grey pink blue red black grey-pink purple red-blue white-green brown-green white-yellow yellow-brown white-grey grey-brown white-pink pink-brown
IREC nc
ICAPT0
ICAPT1 nc nc nc nc nc nc nc nc
+24 VDC
0 VDC
+24 VDC
0 VDC
Incremental encoder or
SSI absolute encoder power supply
Voltage reference input
Auxiliary inputs
Sensor power supply nc = not connected
54
Connecting the Auxiliary Inputs and the Track Outputs
Connecting the Track Outputs
Number and
Division of Track
Outputs
The TSX CCY 1128 module has 32 track outputs, 24 of which are physically accessible. These track outputs are divided into 4 groups on two HE10 connectors on the front panel of the module.
Connectors
Groups
Tracks
Outputs
0
0 1
01234567 0123
Q0.
01234567
Q1.
0123
1
2
01234567
Q2.
01234567
3
0123
Q3.
0123
Equivalent
Circuit Diagram
The following illustration gives the equivalent circuit diagram of a track output.
Preactuator power supply monitoring
Command
Short-circuit fault monitoring
+
Output
Preactuator
24VDC
TSX CCY 1128
–
55
Connecting the Auxiliary Inputs and the Track Outputs
Connecting the Track Outputs, continued
Position of the
HE10
Connectors and
Identification of the Signals
The following diagram shows the position of the HE 10 connectors on the module relative to the track outputs and identifies the signals carried via these connectors.
Track outputs group 0
Track outputs group 1
Output power supply
Q0.0
Q0.2
Q0.4
1
3
5
Q0.6
Q1.0
7
9
2
4
6
8
10
Q0.1
Q0.3
Q0.5
Q0.7
Q1.1
Q1.2
11
+ 24 V
13
12 Q1.3
14 + 24 V
+ 24 V 15 16
24 V
17 18
+ 24 V
0 V
24 V
19 20 0 V
Connector 0
TSX
CCY 1128
Track outputs group 2
Track outputs group 3
Output power supply
Q2.0
Q2.2
Q2.4
1
3
5
Q2.6
Q3.0
7
9
Q3.2
+ 24 V
11
13
+ 24 V
15
2
4
Q2.1
Q2.3
6
8
10
Q2.5
Q2.7
Q3.1
12
Q3.3
14
+ 24 V
16
+ 24 V
+ 24 V 17 18
+ 24 V 19 20
0 V
0 V
Connector 1
56
Connecting the Track Outputs, continued
Connecting the Auxiliary Inputs and the Track Outputs
Outline Diagram The following illustrations give the outline diagrams of the connection principle.
Preactuators
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
1
0
2
3 4
5
7
9
11
10
12
6
8
13
15
17 18
14
16
19 20
Q0.0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Q1.0
1
2
3
Group 0 outputs
Group 1 outputs
- 0 V
Preactuator power supply
FU2
+ 24 VDC
Preactuators
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
Preactuator power supply
- 0 V
1
1
2
3 4
5
7
9
11
10
12
13 14
15 16
17 18
19 20
6
8
Q2.0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Q3.0
1
2
3
Group 2 outputs
Group 3 outputs
FU2
+ 24 VDC
57
Connecting the Auxiliary Inputs and the Track Outputs
Connecting the Track Outputs, continued
Connection via
TELEFAST
Sub-Base and
TSX CDP ••3
Cable
● Availability of the connector 0 signals on the TELEFAST screw terminal block
(1)
● Availability of the connector 1 signals on the TELEFAST screw terminal block
58
(1)
(1) On the ABE-7H16R20 TELEFAST sub-base, the position of the jumper defines the polarity of terminals 200 to 215:
●
●
Jumper in positions 1 and 2: terminals 200 to 215 are at + polarity
Jumper in positions 3 and 4: terminals 200 to 215 are at - polarity
Continued on next page
Connecting the Auxiliary Inputs and the Track Outputs
Connecting the Track Outputs, continued
Connection
Using TELEFAST
Sub-Base and
TSX CDP ••3
Cable, continued
Example of connecting the preactuators on the connector 0 track outputs (groups 0 and 1). Perform the same operations for connector 1 (output groups 2 and 3).
TSX CCY 1128
+ + – –
24 VDC 0 VDC
Connection of the 24 VDC power supply for track output preactuators
+ + – –
TELEFAST
ABE-7H16R20
Q0.0
Q0.1
Q0.2
Connection of preactuators to track outputs
Group 0
Q0.3
Q0.4
Q0.5
Q0.6
Q0.7
Group 1
Q1.0
Q1.1
Q1.2
Q1.3
200 100
-
201 101
-
202 102
-
203 103 204 104
-
205 105
-
206 106
-
207 107
-
208 108
-
209 109
-
210 110 211 111
-
Connection of + 24VDC commons
1
+ 24VDC
112 113 114
+ + +
115
59
Connecting the Auxiliary Inputs and the Track Outputs
Connecting the Track Outputs, continued
Connection
Using TELEFAST
Sub-Base and
TSX CDP ••3
Cable, continued
The following table gives the correspondence between the TELEFAST screw terminal block and the module HE10 connectors (connectors 0 and 1).
108
109
110
111
104
105
106
107
100
101
102
103
Terminal no. on TELEFAST screw terminal block
HE 10 connector pin no.
1
2
3
4
Type of signals on connectors
0
7
8
5
6
9 Q1.0
10 Q1.1
11
12
Q1.2
Q1.3
Q0.0
Q0.1
Q0.2
Q0.3
Q0.4
Q0.5
Q0.6
Q0.7
1
Q2.0
Q2.1
Q2.2
Q2.3
Q2.4
Q2.5
Q2.6
Q2.7
Q3.0
Q3.1
Q3.2
Q3.3
112 13
113 14
114
115
15
16
1
2
+ 24 VDC
- 0 VDC
-
-
17-19
18-20
3
4
200...215
-
-
-
+ 24 VDC
+ 24 VDC
- 0 VDC
+ 24 VDC
Common of terminals 200 to 215
Functions of connectors
0
Group 0 track outputs
Group 1 track outputs
1
Group 2 track outputs
Group 3 track outputs
Preactuator power supply + 24 VDC commons if external connection to terminal 1 of the TELEFAST
Track output preactuator power supply
Terminals 200 to 215 at + 24 VDC, if terminals 1 and 2 are linked
Common of terminals 200 to 215
- 0 VDC
Terminals 200 to 215 at
- 0 VDC, if terminals 3 and 4 are linked
• + 24 VDC if terminals 1 & 2 linked
• - 0 VDC if terminals
3 & 4 linked
Connection of sensor commons
60
Connecting the Auxiliary Inputs and the Track Outputs
Connecting the Track Outputs, continued
Connection
Using
TSX CDP •01
Flat Cable ●
●
With this type of connection all the signals from or to the module can be connected directly: either on a terminal block, or on the preactuators.
3
5
7
HE10
1 2
4
6
8
9 10
11 12
13 14
15 16
17 18
19 20
The following diagrams gives the correspondence between the color of the wires and the pin number on the HE10 connector for connectors 0 and 1
TSX CDP •01 white brown green yellow grey pink blue red black grey-pink purple red-blue white-green brown-green white-yellow yellow-brown white-grey grey-brown white-pink pink-brown
Connector 0 Connector 1
Q0.0
Q0.1
Q0.2
Q0.3
Q0.4
Q0.5
Q0.6
Q0.7
Q1.0
Q1.1
Q1.2
Q1.3
+24 VDC
+24 VDC
+24 VDC
+24 VDC
+24 VDC
0 VDC
+24 VDC
0 VDC
Group 0 track outputs
Q2.0
Q2.1
Q2.2
Q2.3
Q2.4
Q2.5
Q2.6
Q2.7
Group 1 track outputs
Q3.0
Q3.1
Q3.2
Q3.3
+24 VDC
+24 VDC
Preactuator power
+24 VDC
+24 VDC supply +24 VDC
0 VDC
+24 VDC
0 VDC
Group 2 track outputs
Group 3 track outputs
Preactuator power supply
61
Connecting the Auxiliary Inputs and the Track Outputs
62
Electrical Specifications of the
Module
5
Introduction This chapter describes the electrical specifications of the TSX CCY 1128 electronic cam module.
What's in this
Chapter
This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic
Specifications of the Encoder Power Supply Return Check
Specifications of the Auxiliary Inputs
Page
63
Electrical Specifications of the Module
General Specifications
Table of General
Specifications of the Module
The following table gives the general specifications of the module.
Description of parameter
Current consumption of the module
Value
Typical
0.66 A On internal 5V
(with module internal fan running)
On sensor/ preactuator 24 V
(auxiliary inputs and track outputs)
15 mA
On 10...30V
(when using an SSI absolute encoder and single 24V power supply)
11 mA
Maximum
1 A
18 mA
20 mA
Power dissipated in the module
Sensor/preactuator supply monitoring
7 W (1)
Yes
10 W (2)
Insulation resistance > 10 MOhms at 500 VDC
Dielectric strength with ground or PLC logic 0V 1000V rms - 50/60 Hz for
1 min
Operating temperature
Storage temperature
Relative humidity (without condensation)
Operating altitude
0 to 60°C
-25°C to 70°C
5% to 95%
0 to 2000 m
(1) Under normal operating conditions: one auxiliary input active, 24 VDC supply voltage, standard RS 422 signals.
(2) Under extreme operating conditions: 100% of auxiliary inputs active, 30 VDC supply voltage, etc.
64
Electrical Specifications
Encoder Input Specifications
Encoder Input
Specifications
The following table gives the specifications of encoder inputs A, B and Z.
Input
Logic
Nominal values
Limit values
Voltage
Current
Voltage
At state
1
At state
0
Voltage
Current
Voltage current
Input impedance at nominal voltage
Input type
Maximum permissible frequency
Incremental encoders
RS 422 operation
Differential inputs
-
10 mA
< 5.5 V
10… 30 VDC operation
Positive or negative
24 V
15.5 mA
< 30 V (possible up to
34 V, limited to 1 hour in every 24 hours)
> 3 V (1)
> 5.8 mA (1)
< -3 V
< -5.8 mA
> 11 V
> 5 mA
< 5 V
< 2 mA
-
Resistive
1.5 kOhms
Resistive
500 kHz with multiplication by 1
250 kHz with multiplication by 4
●
●
(1) The positive or negative differential voltage must be greater than 3 volts and the current in the positive or negative loop must be greater than 5.8 mA to ensure: that counting pulses up to 500 kHz are taken into account that the line check does not detect any errors whatever the frequency.
Note: Paralleling of standard RS 422 encoder outputs
An encoder which has standard RS 422 outputs can control the inputs of two TSX
CCY 1128 modules in parallel. To ensure the required voltage levels, the encoder supply voltage should be greater than 4.5V.
65
Electrical Specifications of the Module
Specifications of the Encoder Power Supply Return Check
-
Specifications of the EPSR input
The following table gives the specifications of the encoder power supply check.
Parameters
Limit values on the
EPSR input
Voltage for OK state
Voltage
Value
30 V (possible up to 34V, limited to 1 hour in every 24 hours)
Current < 1.5 mA
VRef input not connected OK if U > 3.3 V
VRef input connected to encoder power supply +
OK if U > 66% of the voltage applied at VRef input
66
Electrical Specifications
Specifications of the Auxiliary Inputs
Auxiliary Input
Specifications
Table
The following table gives the specifications of auxiliary inputs IREC, ICAPT1 and
ICAPT2.
Description of the parameters
Nominal values Voltage
Current
Sensor power supply, including ripple
Limit values
Response time
Sensor voltage monitoring threshold
At state
1
Voltage Uon
Current at Uon Ion
Uoff At state
0
Voltage
State 0 to 1
Current Ioff
Ton
State 1 to 0 Toff
OK
Fault
Uok
Udef
Re Input impedance
Input type
Logic type
IEC 1131 compatibility with the sensors
3-wire/2-wire proximity sensor compatibility
Resistive
Positive (sink)
Type 1
Symbol
Un
In
U1
Utemp (1)
Dielectric strength with ground
Value
24
8
19...30
34
> 11
> 3
< 5
< 1.5
< 100
< 100
> 18
< 14
3
• 3-wire proximity sensor: All 3-wire proximity sensors operate at 24 VDC
• 2-wire proximity sensor: All 2-wire proximity sensors operate at 24 VDC with the following specifications:
Residual voltage at closed state < 7V
Minimum switching capacity: < 2.5 mA
Residual current at open state: < 1.5 mA
1500 V rms 50/60 Hz for 1 min
Unit
V mA
V
V mA
V
V
V mA
µ s
µ s kOhms
(1) Utemp: maximum voltage permissible for 1 hour in every 24 hour period.
67
Electrical Specifications of the Module
Track Output Specifications
Track Output
Specifications
Table
The following table gives the specifications of the track outputs.
Description of the parameters
Nominal values Voltage
Limit values
Current
Voltage
Compatibility with DC inputs
Symbol
Un
In
U1
Value
24
500
19...30
Max. current per output for
U= 30V or 34V
Maximum current
Max. power for tungsten filament lamp per connector per module
Max. switching frequency on inductive load
Utemp (1) 34
I1
I2
I3
P1
F
600
< 6
< 12
V mA
A
A
10 W
< 0.6/LI² Hz
Electro discharge time
Preactuator voltage monitoring threshold
OK
Fault
T
Uok
< L/R
> 18
Unit
V mA
V s
V
Udef < 14 V
All positive logic DC inputs with input resistance of < 15 kOhms
Protection against overloads and short-circuits
Protection against output overvoltages
Protection against polarity inversion
Dielectric strength with ground
IEC 1131-2 conformity
By current limiter and thermal breaking (0.7A<Id<2A)
By Zener diode between the outputs and the + 24V
By diode reverse-mounted on the supply
1500 V rms 50/60 Hz for 1 min
Yes
68
Module Displays
6
Introduction This chapter presents the LEDs on the TSX CCY 1128 electronic cam module and their meaning.
What's in this
Chapter
This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic
Presentation of the TSX CCY 1128 Module Display Block
Page
69
Module Displays
Presentation of the TSX CCY 1128 Module Display Block
Role The module display block has four LEDs whose role it is to provide the user with information on:
●
●
The operating mode of the module (normal operation, module faulty or off)
Operating faults which are internal or external to the module.
Physical
Presentation
The following diagram shows the physical appearance of the display block on the module and the geographical position of its four LEDs
CH0 RUN ERR
I / O
70
Module Displays
LED States and Their Meaning
Indication of the
Operating Mode
The following table gives the states of the RUN LED and their meaning
LED
RUN
Color
Green
State
Lit
Off
Meaning
Module operating normally
Module faulty or off
Fault Indication The following table gives the states of the ERR, I/O and CH0 LEDs and their meaning.
LED
ERR
I/O
CH0
Color
Red
Red
Green
State
Lit
Meaning
Internal module fault:
• module failure
Flashing • Communication fault with the processor
• Application missing, invalid or execution fault
Off
Lit
Normal operation, no fault
Fault external to the module:
• Wiring fault
• Encoder power supply fault
• Configuration/adjustment parameters refused
Flashing Not significant
Off Normal operation, no fault
Lit Normal operation, the channel is operational
Flashing The channel is not operating correctly, due to:
• an external fault
• a communication fault
Off The channel is inoperative:
• channel not configured
• channel incorrectly configured
71
Module Displays
72
Appendix: Connecting a Parallel
Output Absolute Encoder
7
At a Glance
Introduction This chapter describes the procedure for connecting a parallel output absolute encoder to the TSX CCY 1128 electronic cam module.
What's in this
Chapter
This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic
Pinout of the 15-pin SUB D Module and TELEFAST Connectors
Connecting a Parallel Output Absolute Encoder
Special Wiring Rules and Precautions
Configuring the TELEFAST Sub-Base
Page
73
Appendices
Principle
Connection
System
Illustration
The 15-pin SUB D connector, located on the module front panel, connects the module to the encoder via an ABE-7CPA11 TELEFAST sub-base.
●
●
The TELEFAST sub-base receives:
❍ All the parallel signals from the encoder
❍ The 5 VDC or 10...30 VDC encoder power supply source.
The TELEFAST sub-base restores the encoder signals
❍ to the module in the form of standard RS 422 serial signals.
The following diagram illustrates the principle for connecting a parallel output absolute encoder to a TSX CCY 1128 module.
TSX CCY 1128
Module/ABE-7CPA11 connection cable: TSX CCP
S15•, length 0.5m, 1m, 1.5m
Encoder power supply
5 VDC or 10...30 VDC
TELEFAST
ABE-7CPA11
Module/ABE-7CPA11 connection cable made using the TSX CAP S15 kit
Parallel output absolute encoder
74
Appendices
TELEFAST ABE-7CPA11 Sub-Base
Role
View of the
TELEFAST
Sub-Base
The ABE-7CPA11 TELEFAST sub-base performs the following functions:
●
●
Acts as the connection interface between:
❍
❍ the parallel output absolute encoder and the TSX CCY 1128 module
Converts the position value supplied by the parallel output encoder to standard
RS 422 serial data. The absolute encoder must be coded in pure binary code or Gray code with a maximum of 24 data bits.
The following diagram shows the ABE-7CPA11 TELEFAST sub-base with its various elements.
1 2 3
4 5 6 7
Elements and
Their Functions
The following table gives the functions of the TELEFAST sub-base elements.
2
3
4
Number Element
1 15-pin SUB D connector
Screw terminal block
15-pin SUB D connector
LED
Function
For connection to the TSX CCY 1128 module via a TSX CCP S15• cable.
For connecting the encoder power supply
Not used
When it is lit, shows that the TELEFAST is powered up.
Continued on next page
75
Appendices
ABE-7CPA11 TELEFAST Sub-Base, continued
Elements and
Their Functions, continued
The following table gives the functions of the remaining TELEFAST sub-base elements.
6
7
Number Element
5 Fuse
Screw terminal block
Microswitches
Function
Protects the power supply:
• rating: 1A
• type: fast-blow
For connecting the encoder.
For configuring the type of encoder connected to the TELEFAST (Gray or binary).
Specifications of the TELEFAST
Sub-Base
● General Specifications
The following table gives the general specifications of the ABE-7CPA11 TELEFAST sub-base.
Parameter
Permissible voltage at 10...30 VDC
Permissible voltage at 5 VDC
Maximum frequency of change of state of least significant bit
Serial frame reading frequency
Current consumption (excluding encoder)
Value
11...30 VDC
5…6 VDC
75 kHz
150 kHz...1 MHz
Typical: 90 mA - Maximum: 130 mA
Dissipated power Typical: 450 mW - Maximum: 1.5 W
Encoder power supply return monitoring limit - 15% < supply voltage < + 15%
Insulation resistance > 10 M
Ω at 500 VDC
Dielectric strength
Operating temperature
Storage temperature
Relative humidity
Operating altitude
1000 Vrms - 50 / 60 Hz for 1 min
0...60°C
-25°C...+70°C
5%...95% without condensation
0...2000 meters
Continued on next page
76
Appendices
ABE-7CPA11 TELEFAST Sub-Base, continued
Specifications of the TELEFAST
Sub-Base, continued
● Specifications of encoder read inputs In0 to In23
The following table gives the various parameters of the TELEFAST inputs which are connected to the encoder channels.
Parameter
Logic input
Compatibility with the encoder outputs
Maximum voltage on the inputs
Maximum length of the encoder/TELEFAST wiring
-
Type
Positive
Negative
Totem Pole outputs
5V TTL outputs
NPN open collector transistor outputs
-
Value
State 0: U < 2.5V, state 1: U > 3.9V
State 0: U > 3.9V, state 1: U < 2.5V
11…30 VDC
5VDC
11…30 VDC
+ 30 VDC
Maximum length of the module/TELEFAST wiring
Lower input voltage limit
Upper input voltage limit
-
-
-
200 m
This maximum distance depends on the type of encoder used and limits the frequency with which the least significant bit changes. See the
TELEFAST sub-base configuration
200 m.
This maximum distance limits the serial transmission clock frequency.
See special wiring precautions and rules
0 VDC < VIL < 2.5 VDC
3.9 VDC < VIH< 30 VDC
77
Appendices
Pinout of the 15-pin SUB D Module and TELEFAST Connectors
Pinout of the
15-pin SUB D
Connector on the Module
The pinout for connecting a parallel output absolute encoder via the TELEFAST
ABE-7CPA11 is as follows.
Diagram (view from the front)
Pin no.
Signal Description
5
6
3
4
7
8
1
2
9
10
14
15
11
12
13
9
10
11
6
7
8
12
13
3
4
5
1
2
14
15
-
-
-
Data +
Data -
-
-
-
Encoder input, Data + (5 VDC)
Encoder input, Data-
-
-
-
CLK + Encoder input, CLK + (5 VDC)
10...30 V Encoder power supply input (+ 10...30 VDC)
0 V Encoder power supply input (- 0 VDC)
-
EPSR
-
-
-
CLK -
5 V
-
Encoder power supply return + input. It receives the feedback from the power supply + of the encoder which enables the module to check that the encoder is present.
Encoder input, CLK -
Encoder power supply input (+ 5 VDC)
78
Appendices
Pinout of the 15-pin SUB D Module and TELEFAST Connectors, continued
Pinout of the
15-pin SUB D
Connector on the TELEFAST
The pinout of the 15-pin SUB D connector on the TELEFAST ABE-7CPA11 is as follows.
Diagram (view from the front)
Pin no.
Signal
3
4
5
1
2
6
7
8
11
12
13
9
10
14
15
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Description
-
-
Data +
Data -
-
-
Encoder output, data + signal (5 VDC)
Encoder output, data- signal
-
CLK +
-
Encoder output, CLK + signal (5 VDC)
10...30 V Encoder power supply output (+ 10...30 VDC)
0 V Encoder power supply output (- 0 VDC)
-
-
-
-
EPSR
-
-
-
-
Encoder power supply return + output. It receives the feedback from the power supply + of the encoder which enables the module to check that the encoder is present.
CLK -
5 V
Encoder output, CLK - signal
Encoder power supply output (+5 VDC)
79
Appendices
Connecting a Parallel Output Absolute Encoder
Introduction A parallel output absolute encoder is always connected to the module via an ABE-
7CPA11 TELEFAST sub-base. The signals returned to the module will be standard
RS 422 SSI serial signals. The encoder power supply will be 10...30 VDC or 5 VDC depending on the type of encoder.
Outline Diagram
Showing the
Connection of a
Parallel Output
Absolute
Encoder,
Supplied with
10...30VDC
The following diagram shows the connection system of a parallel output absolute encoder supplied with 10...30 VDC.
TSX CCY 1128
TSX CCP S15• cable + – – +
+10...30 VDC Encoder power supply
0 VDC
TELEFAST ABE-7CPA11
TSX CAP S15 kit
+ cable
GND
Local machine ground
Connection of the cable shielding Encoder
80
Appendices
Connecting a Parallel Output Absolute Encoder, continued
Outline Diagram
Showing the
Connection of a
Parallel Output
Absolute
Encoder,
Supplied with
5 VDC
The following diagram shows the connection system of a parallel output absolute encoder supplied with 5 VDC.
TSX CCY 1128
TSX CCP S15• cable
+ – – +
+ 5 VDC
0 VDC
Encoder power supply
TELEFAST ABE-7CPA11
TSX CAP S15 kit
+ cable
GND
Local machine ground
Connection of the cable shielding
Encoder
81
Appendices
Connecting a Parallel Output Absolute Encoder, continued
Functions of the
Screw Terminal
Blocks on the
TELEFAST
The TELEFAST sub-base has two terminal blocks:
● One terminal block in the upper part, consisting of 4 terminals, designed to connect the encoder power supply source.
Function
+
-
Terminals on the screw terminal blocks
Signal
-
-
Encoder power supply source + inputs
Encoder power supply source - inputs
● Two terminal blocks in the lower part, consisting of 36 terminals, designed to connect all the signals from and to the encoder.
Function Terminals on the screw terminal blocks
GND
Signal
-
+10...30V
+ 5 V
0 V
1 to 24
25
29
30
-
-
-
In0 to In24
DEF
EPSR +
EPSR -
Machine grounding of the TELEFAST. Provides electrical continuity between the encoder and the module
Connection of the encoder power supply + for encoder supplied with 10...30 VDC
Connection of the encoder power supply + for encoder supplied with 5 VDC
Connection of the encoder power supply -
Encoder parallel outputs
Encoder fault output
Encoder power supply + return. If there is no encoder power supply return, the terminal should be connected to the + 10...30 V or + 5 V terminal depending on the encoder power supply
Encoder power supply - return. If there is no encoder power supply return, the terminal should be connected to the 0 V terminal
82
Appendices
Special Wiring Rules and Precautions
Connecting to and
Disconnecting from the
TELEFAST
The connectors and the connection wires on the TELEFAST must be always be connected and disconnected with the POWER OFF:
●
●
Connecting or disconnecting the connectors of the connection cable between the module and the TELEFAST sub-base
Connecting or disconnecting the wires linking the TELEFAST sub-base to the encoder.
Length of the
Cable and Cross-
Section of the
Connection
Wires Between the Module and the TELEFAST
● Cable length
The length of the module/TELEFAST connection cable limits the frequency of the serial transmission clock.
The following table gives the serial transmission clock frequency according to the distance.
If cable length < 10 meters cable length < 20 meters cable length < 50 meters cable length < 100 meters cable length < 150 meters cable length < 200 meters then serial transmission clock frequency: 1 MHz serial transmission clock frequency: 750 kHz serial transmission clock frequency: 500 kHz serial transmission clock frequency: 375 kHz serial transmission clock frequency: 200 kHz serial transmission clock frequency: 150 kHz
● Cross-section of the wires in the cable
To reduce line voltage drops as much as possible, the following instructions should be followed:
If
The encoder is supplied with 5V
And
The module/TELEFAST distance is < 100m
The module/TELEFAST distance is > 100m
Then
Use wires with a minimum crosssection of 0.08 mm² (28 gauge)
Use wires with a minimum crosssection of 0.34 mm² (22 gauge)
83
Appendices
Special Wiring Rules and Precautions, continued
Connecting the
Encoder Power
Supply
To limit the voltage drop in the 0V, due to the encoder power supply current, it is recommended that the 0V is wired in the following way:
24 VDC or
5 VDC
Power supply
+ -
+ – – +
+ 5 VDC
+ 24 VDC
Connection depending on the encoder power supply
Encoder 0 VDC
84
Appendices
Special Wiring Rules and Precautions, continued
Wiring the
Encoder Outputs on the
TELEFAST
If the encoder outputs are positive or negative logic and there are fewer than 24, then the following connection rules should be followed:
If the encoder outputs are positive logic
And Then there are fewer than 24
• wire the encoder outputs on the TELEFAST inputs starting from the least significant, up to the most significant
• wire the unused TELEFAST inputs to the 0V terminal
0 V
Example: 14-bit encoder
If the encoder outputs are negative logic
And Then there are fewer than 24
• wire the encoder outputs on the TELEFAST inputs starting from the least significant, up to the most significant
• do not wire the unused TELEFAST inputs (leave them unconnected)
Example: 14-bit encoder
85
Appendices
Special Wiring Rules and Precautions, continued
Protecting the
Encoder Power
Supply
Depending on the encoder supply voltage, the encoder power supply should be protected in the following way:
If
The encoder supply voltage is 10...30 VDC
The encoder supply voltage is 5 VDC
Then
The protective fuse is integrated in the TELEFAST:
• rating: 1A
• type: fast-blow
Install a fuse (Fu) in series on the power supply +:
• rating: to be defined by the user according to the consumption of the TELEFAST and the encoder
• type: fast-blow
5 VDC encoder power supply
Fu
+ – – + TELEFAST
Checking the
Encoder Power
Supply
If the encoder supply voltage falls by 15%, the fault (EPSR signal) is fed back to the module. If the encoder does not have a power supply return, proceed as follows:
If
No encoder power supply return
Then
Connect the EPSR + and EPSR - inputs on the TELEFAST:
• EPSR + terminal on the TELEFAST to the encoder power supply + terminal
• EPSR - terminal on the TELEFAST to the encoder power supply - terminal
86
Appendices
Configuring the TELEFAST Sub-Base
At a Glance The TELEFAST sub-base is configured by setting the 4 microswitches located under the right-hand 15-pin SUB D connector. With the TSX CCY 1128 module, the configuration is limited to defining the type of encoder connected.
The following diagram shows the geographical position and the function of these 4 microswitches.
+ – – +
ABE-7CPA11
ON
OFF
Type of encoder connected to the TELEFAST sub-base
Not used with the TSX CCY 1128 module (always in OFF position)
Not used with the TSX CCY 1128 module (always in OFF position)
Setting the
Microswitches
The two microswitches on the right must always be set to the OFF position. The two microswitches on the left are used to define the performance of the link according to the TELEFAST/encoder distance and depending on the specifications of the encoder outputs.
● Encoder with positive logic outputs, GRAY code
Type of encoder outputs
Logic Output interface
Code position of the microswitches
Gray
Max. encoder/
TELEFAST length
50 meters Positive • Totem Pole
• TTL
• NPN open collector
ON
OFF
Max. frequency of change of least significant bit
75 kHz
Continued on next page
87
Appendices
Configuring the TELEFAST Sub-Base, continued
Setting the
Microswitches, continued
● Encoder with negative logic outputs, GRAY code
Type of encoder outputs
Logic Output interface
Code position of the microswitches
Max. encoder/
TELEFAST length
50 meters
Negative
•
•
•
•
•
• Totem Pole
• TTL
• NPN open collector
Gray
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
100 meters
200 meters
ON
Max. frequency of change of least significant bit
75 kHz
40 kHz
5 kHz
OFF
● Encoder with positive or negative logic outputs, Binary code
Type of encoder outputs
Logic Output interface
Code
Position of the microswitches
Max. encoder/
TELEFAST length
10 meters
Positive or negative
•
•
•
•
•
• Totem Pole
• TTL
• NPN open collector
Binary
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
30 meters
Max. frequency of change of least significant bit
40 kHz
20 kHz
50 meters 5 kHz
ON
OFF
88
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Presentation of the TSX CSY 84 Module .............................. 3
Presentation of the Module in its Environment ................................................. 4
Chapter 2 Module Setup .......................................................................... 9
Mounting the Module in a PLC Station Rack .................................................. 10
Number of Application-Specific Channels Managed by one PLC Station ...... 12
Initialization of the Module on an Internal Fault .............................................. 20
TSX CSY 84 Module Operating Mode ............................................................ 21
Chapter 3 Description of the Multi-Axis Control System ................... 23
SERCOS® Multi-Axis Control System on Premium PLCs ............................. 24
Chapter 4 Fiber Optic Cables ................................................................ 31
Kits for Creating Fiber Optic Cables on Request ............................................ 34
Chapter 5 Specifications, Standards and Operating Conditions ....... 35
SERCOS® Network Specifications ................................................................ 37
Standards and Operating Conditions ............................................................. 38
Chapter 6 Compatible Speed Drives .................................................... 39
i
Table of Contents ii
Presentation of the TSX CSY 84
Module
1
At a Glance
Introduction This chapter presents the TSX CSY 84 multi-axis control module.
What's in this
Chapter
This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic
Presentation of the Module in its Environment
Physical Presentation of the Module
Compatibility with the Installed Base
Page
3
Presentation of the TSX CSY 84 Module
Presentation of the Module in its Environment
Introduction The TSX CSY 84 is a double format application-specific module in the Premium range. It can be integrated in a TSX RKY•• rack in a TSX/PMX/PCX 57 PLC station.
It is part of the SERCOS® offer on Premium PLCs which is used to create a multiaxis control system.
Presentation of the Components
of the SERCOS®
Offer on
Premium PLCs
The SERCOS® offer on Premium PLCs is made up of the following elements :
●
●
●
●
●
●
● a TSX/PMX/PCX 57 PLC station comprising:
❍
❍ one or more racks power supply modules
❍
❍ a processor module the various modules required by the application.
one or more TSX CSY 84 multi-axis control modules, each able to control up to
8 servo drives distributed on a SERCOS® network.
a range of 5 LEXIUM MHDS servo drives a range of motors plastic fiber optic cables, from 0.3 to 16.5 meters long:
❍ for making the physical connection between the module and the drives and between the drives in a network ring structure
❍ which act as the medium for the digital link between the TSX CSY 84
(master) module and the drives (slaves).The digital link is defined by
European standard EN61491.
PL7 Junior/Pro software which is used to configure the TSX CSY 84 module and to program the motion application
UniLink software which is used to enter parameters and adjust drives
4
Presentation of the TSX CSY 84 Module
Presentation of the Module in its Environment, continued
Block Diagram of an Installation
The diagram below gives an example of a SERCOS® multi-axis control installation
PLC station :
For example a TSX 57 station
Programming and adjustment terminal
PL7 Junior/Pro software to:
• configure the module
• program and adjust the application.
Logiciel UniLink to:
• enter and adjust drive parameters
TSX CSY 84
LEXIUM
MHDS drives
Fiber optic cables
SERCOS® network ring
Motors
5
Presentation of the TSX CSY 84 Module
Physical Presentation of the Module
Description of the Front Panel
The following items are to be found on the front panel of the module:
●
●
●
● a display block consisting of 6 indicator lamps to display and diagnose the state of the module.
a set of 24 indicator lamps to display and diagnose the various channels of the module two connectors for attaching the fiber optic cables which link the module and the drives. two 8-pin Mini DIN connectors.
View of the
Module
The diagram below shows the TSX CSY 84 module with its various elements.
TSX CSY 84
7
8
9
4
5
6
1
2
3
6
Presentation of the TSX CSY 84 Module
Physical Presentation of the Module, continued
Elements and their Functions
Number Element
1 Screw
2 Module casing
3 Display block of 6 indicator lamps:
Function
Used to fix the module on the TSX RKY •• rack
Performs the following functions:
• supports and protects the electronic cards
• fixes the module in its slot
Display the module states and faults
6
7
4
5
8
9
• green RUN indicator lamp
• red ERR indicator lamp
• red I/O indicator lamp
• yellow SER indicator lamp
• yellow COM indicator lamp
• yellow INI indicator lamp
Indicates the operating mode of the module
Indicates a module internal fault
Indicates a fault external to the module or an application fault
Indicates traffic on the SERCOS ® network during normal operation
Not used
Indicates that the module is in the reinitialization phase
Used to initialize the module
Reserved
Pencil-point pushbutton
COM2 8-pin Mini DIN connector
24 indicator lamps
COM1 8-pin Mini DIN connector
TX transmission SMA connector
Display and diagnose the module channels
Reserved
For connecting the fiber optic transmission cable from the SERCOS ® network ring
RX reception SMA connector For connecting the fiber optic reception cable from the SERCOS ® network ring
7
Presentation of the TSX CSY 84 Module
Compatibility with the Installed Base
Hardware
Compatibility
To take a TSX CSY 84 module, the PLC station must have a processor with software version SV > 3.3
Software
Compatibility
To develop an application which integrates the TSX CSY 84 module, the
PL7 Junior / Pro software must be version SV 3.4 + option or SV > 3.4.
8
Module Setup
2
At a Glance
Introduction This chapter describes the operations for setting up the TSX CSY 84 multi-axis control module.
What's in this
Chapter
This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic
Mounting the Module in a PLC Station Rack
Installing the Module in a PLC Station
Number of Application-Specific Channels Managed by one PLC Station
Initialization of the Module on an Internal Fault
TSX CSY 84 Module Operating Mode
Page
9
Module Setup
Mounting the Module in a PLC Station Rack
Introduction The TSX CSY 84 module can be mounted in any of the available slots in a
TSX RKY •• rack on a TSX 57/PMX 57/PCX 57 PLC station, except for those slots specifically for the power supply and processor modules. This double format module takes up 2 slots on a TSX RKY •• rack.
Illustration The diagrams below show the procedure for mounting a standard format module from the Premium range in the TSX RKY •• rack. The procedure is identical for a double format module.
3
2
1
Procedure The following table describes the operations to be performed:
2
3
Step
1
Action
Position the pins at the rear of the module in the locating holes at the bottom of the rack.
Turn the module round to place it in contact with the rack.
Attach the module to the rack by tightening the screw at the top of the module.
Maximum tightening torque for the screw : 2.0 N. m
10
Module Setup
Installing the Module in a PLC Station
Introduction The TSX CSY 84 module can be installed in any of the racks on the main Bus X segment of a PLC station.
Installing the
Module
The diagram below shows the installation of the module in the racks belonging to the main Bus X segment. The module can be installed in the rack which contains the processor and in any of the other racks on Bus X. The distance between the rack which contains the module and the rack which contains the processor should not exceed 100 meters.
Bus X < 100 meters
TSX CSY 84 applicationspecific module
Processor
Note: The TSX CSY 84 module cannot be installed in a rack belonging to a Bus X segment which is remotely located using a TSX REY 200 module.
11
Module Setup
Number of Application-Specific Channels Managed by one PLC Station
Definition of an
Application-
Specific Channel
An application-specific module (TSX CTY• counter modules, TSX CAY• axis control modules, TSX CFY• stepper control modules, TSX YSP Y• weighing module,
TSX CCY 1128 electronic cam module, TSX CSY 84 motion control module, etc) have a number of channels which may vary from 1 to n depending on the type of module. These channels are called application-specific channels.
Why Count the
Number of
Application-
Specific
Channels in the
Station:
To define:
●
● the power of the processor to be installed the maximum number of application-specific modules which can be installed in the station.
The number of application-specific channels for each type of application-specific module is defined in the TSX DM 57 33E manual - Part A - Chapter 3.
Number of
Application-
Specific
Channels
Managed by
Each Type of
Processor
The table below defines the number of application-specific channels managed by each type of processor.
Type of processor
TSX P57 102 / TPMX P57 102 / TPCX 57 1012:
TSX P57 2x2 / TPMX P57 202:
TSX P57 252
TSX P57 302
TSX P57 352 / TPMX P57 352 / TPCX 57 3512:
TSX P57 402
TSX P57 452 / TPMX P57 452
24
32
32
48
48
Number of application-specific channels managed
8
24
12
Module Setup
Number of Application-Specific Channels Managed by one PLC Station,
continued
Number of
Application-
Specific
Channels for one
TSX CSY 84
Module
One TSX CSY 84 module can contain up to 32 application-specific channels. Only those application-specific channels which are configured must be taken into account.
Types of
Application-
Specific Channel on the
TSX CSY 84
Module
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Channel 0: SERCOS® channel for managing the digital bus
Channels 1 to 8: Real axes
Channels 9 to 12: Imaginary axes
Channels 13 to 16: Remote axes
Channels 17 to 20: Sets of coordinated axes
Channels 21 to 24: Sets of follower axes
Channels 25 to 31: Cam profiles
13
Module Setup
Installation Precautions
Introduction To ensure that it operates correctly, certain precautions must be taken when installing and removing the module, connecting and disconnecting the connectors on the front panel of the module and tightening the screws for fixing the module.
Installing and
Removing the
Module
A module can be safely installed or removed without switching off the power supply to the rack.
To prevent the application from malfunctioning, these operations should preferably be performed with the module powered down
Connecting and
Disconnecting the Fiber Optic
Connectors on the Front Panel of the Module
The fiber optic connectors on the front panel of the module can be safely connected or disconnected with the module powered up.
To prevent the application from malfunctioning, these operations should preferably be performed with the module powered down
Tightening
Torque for the
Module Fixing
Screw
Tightening torque: 2.0 N.m.
14
Module Setup
Module Displays
Role The TSX CSY 84 module has two sets of displays:
●
●
A standard Premium display block comprising 6 LEDs whose role it is to inform the user about:
❍ the operating mode of the module: module operating normally, faulty or off
❍ Operating faults which are internal or external to the module.
A set of 24 LEDs to display the state of the application-specific channels of the module (real or imaginary axes, etc).
Presentation of the Display
Block
The diagram below shows the module display block and the geographical position of its 6 LEDs.
TSX CSY 84
RUN
SER
COM
ERR
I / O
INI
States of the
Various LEDs on the Display
Block and their
Meaning
The following tables give the various states of each LED on the display block and their meaning
LED
RUN
Color
Green
State
Lit
Off
Meaning
Module operating normally
Module faulty, off, in the initialization phase or application missing
Continued on next page
15
Module Setup
Module Displays, continued
States of the
Various LEDs on the Display
Block and their
Meaning, continued
LED
ERR
Color
Red
I/O
INI
SER
COM
Red
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
State Meaning
Lit Module internal fault:
• module failure
Flashing • Module starting
• Communication Fault
• Application missing, not valid or execution fault
Off
Lit
Normal operation, no fault
External module fault:
• Wiring fault
Flashing Not significant
Off Normal operation, no fault lit Not significant
Flashing The module is in the reinitialization phase
Off Normal operation
Lit Not significant
Flashing Traffic on the SERCOS network operating normally
Off No traffic on the SERCOS network
not used
16
Module Setup
Module Displays, continued
Presentation of the LEDs for the
Application-
Specific
Channels
The diagram below shows the 24 LEDs for certain application-specific channels on the module.
1 9
TSX CSY 84
2
3
4
5
6
7
10
11
12
13
14
15
17
18
19
20
21
22
LEDs 1 to 8: display the 8 real axes
LEDs 9 to 12: display the 4 imaginary axes
LEDs 13 to 16: display the 4 remote axes
LEDs 17 to 20: display the 4 sets of coordinated axes
LEDs 21 to 24: display the 4 sets of follower axes
23
8 16 24
17
Module Setup
Module Displays, continued
States and
Meanings of the
LEDs for the
Application-
Specific
Channels
The table below gives the various states of the LEDs for the application-specific channels which represent the 8 real axes.
6
7
4
5
8
2
3
LED
1
Assignment
Real axis 1
Real axis 2
Real axis 3
Real axis 4
Real axis 5
Real axis 6
Real axis 7
Real axis 8
Color
Green
State
Lit
Flashing
Off
Meaning
Axis operating normally
Axis being configured or faulty
Axis not configured or configuration fault
The table below gives the various states of the LEDs for the application-specific channels which represent the 4 imaginary axes.
LED
9
10
11
12
Assignment Color
Imaginary axis 1 Green
Imaginary axis 2
Imaginary axis 3
Imaginary axis 4
State
Lit
Meaning
Axis operating normally
Flashing Axis being configured or faulty
Off Axis not configured or configuration fault
Continued on next page
18
Module Setup
Module Displays, continued
States and
Meanings of the
LEDs for the
Application-
Specific
Channels, continued
The table below gives the various states of the LEDs for the application-specific channels which represent the 4 remote axes.
LED
13
14
15
16
Assignment
Remote axis 1
Remote axis 2
Remote axis 3
Remote axis 4
Color
Green
State
Lit
Meaning
Axis operating normally
Flashing Axis being configured or faulty
Off Axis not configured or configuration fault
The table below gives the various states of the LEDs for the application-specific channels which represent the 4 sets of coordinated axes.
LED
17
18
19
20
Assignment
Set of Axes 1
Set of Axes 2
Set of Axes 3
Set of Axes 4
Color
Green
State
Lit
Meaning
Set operating normally
Flashing Set being configured or faulty
Off Set not configured or configuration fault
The table below gives the various states of the LEDs for the application-specific channels which represent the 4 sets of follower axes.
LED
21
22
23
24
Assignment
Set of Axes 1
Set of Axes 2
Set of Axes 3
Set of Axes 4
Color
Green
State
Lit
Meaning
Set operating normally
Flashing Set being configured or faulty
Off Set not configured or configuration fault
19
Module Setup
Initialization of the Module on an Internal Fault
How to Initialize the Module
The module is initialized by pressing the pencil-point button on the front panel as shown in the diagram below.
TSX CSY 84
CAUTION:
Recommendations on pressing the pencil-point button
This button should only be pressed gently.
The point of the tool must be held at right angles to the front panel of the module and in the center of the aperture.
Failure to follow these recommendations may lead to the button being damaged.
Consequences of an
Initialization
The module restarts in the initialization phase in the same way as when it is powered up. See the block diagram of the module operating modes
20
Module Setup
TSX CSY 84 Module Operating Mode
Block Diagram of the Operating
Mode of the
TSX CSY 84
Module
The following block diagram describes the various steps in the operation of the module and gives the state of the LEDs on the module front panel for each step.
RESET using pencil-point button
Power up
NOK
Initialization
OK
Self-tests for the PC card integrated into the module
(duration 20 to 30 s)
Module self-tests
(duration 2 to 3 s)
LEDs
ERR
INI
Others
Status flashing flashing off
LEDs
All
Status flashing
NOK
Self-tests
OK
Serious error
LEDs
ERR
Others
Status lit not significant
NOK
Start-up
OK
NOK
Ready
OK
NOK
Configured
Firmware initialization
(duration 5 to 20 s)
Module ready to receive a configuration
LEDs
ERR
INI
Others
LEDs
ERR
Others
Status flashing flashing off
Status flashing off
(1) flashing during normal operation, otherwise off
(2) lit: off: flashing: channel in operation channel not configured channel being configured or faulty
Module communicating with the processor
LEDs
RUN
Status lit
INI
I/O off off
SER (1) flashing off
ERR off
1 to 24 lit flashing off
21
Module Setup
22
Description of the Multi-Axis
Control System
3
At a Glance
Introduction This chapter describes how the TSX CSY 84 module interfaces with the speed drives in a SERCOS® network configuration to form a multi-axis control system.
What's in this
Chapter
This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic
SERCOS® Multi-Axis Control System on Premium PLCs
Page
23
SERCOS® Multi-Axis System on Premium PLCs
SERCOS® Multi-Axis Control System on Premium PLCs
Architecture of a
SERCOS® Multi-
Axis Control
System
The architecture of a SERCOS® multi-axis control system on Premium PLCs consists of :
●
●
●
● a TSX/PMX/PCX 57 PLC station a TSX CSY 84 multi-axis control module speed drives which control the motors associated with the different axes.
a SERCOS® fiber optic network.
Illustration The diagram below gives an example of a SERCOS® multi-axis control system architecture
Programming terminal
PLC station : for example a TSX 57 station
TSX
CSY 84
Power Processor Transmission
Drive
Fiber optic cable
Drive
Reception
Drive
SERCOS® network ring
Drive
Drive
24
SERCOS® Multi-Axis System on Premium PLCs
SERCOS® Multi-Axis Control System on Premium PLCs, continued
Operating
Principle
The TSX CSY 84 multi-axis control module and the drives are connected together in a network using fiber optic cables to form the multi-axis control system. Drives which are connected together on the fiber optic network behave in the same way as individual axes. Motion control instructions transmitted by the TSX CSY 84 module are sent to each drive on the network, and in return the module receives the actual position values for each axis from the network.
Maximum
Number of Real
Axes Controlled by one Module
A TSX CSY 84 module controls a maximum of 8 real axes, that is, axes associated with speed drives.
In addition to these real axes, the module can control:
●
●
●
●
●
4 imaginary axes
4 remote axes
4 sets of coordinated axes
4 sets of follower axes
7 cam profiles
Developing
Applications
Applications are developed using a terminal (PC) equipped with PL7 Junior/Pro software to:
●
● configure the axes start the system
● adjust and diagnose the application
(See the application-specific setup manual “Motion Control on a SERCOS® network” - Reference 35001368)
25
SERCOS® Multi-Axis System on Premium PLCs
SERCOS® Network Ring
At a Glance The TSX CSY 84 module performs the following operations via the SERCOS® fiber optic network ring:
●
● transmits motion control instructions defined by the application program to each axis in return receives, via the drives, the actual data transmitted by the various position sensors on the axes.
SERCOS®
Network Ring
The diagram below shows an example of a SERCOS® network configuration comprising 5 LEXIUM servo drives, connected to a TSX CSY 84 module via fiber optic cables.
PLC station : for example a TSX 57 station
TSX
CSY 84
TX
RX
Transmission Reception
SERCOS® network ring
RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX
26
Motor 1 Motor 3 Motor 5 Motor 2 Motor 4
SERCOS® Multi-Axis System on Premium PLCs
SERCOS® Network Ring, continued
Transmission of
Commands and
Reception of
Data
The module coordinates the movement activities of the various axes installed on the network:
●
●
It transmits to the drives, via the network, the motion control instructions for the various axes.
It receives current data on each axis, via the network, and executes the required processing according to this data.
The module transmits the move instructions from the connector (TX), via the fiber optic cable, to the first drive, which interprets and executes them. The instructions are then transmitted to the next drive.
The last drive on the ring sends the current data on all the axes to the (RX) connector on the module via the fiber optic cable.
Note: If a drive on the SERCOS® network is powered down, this will cause the ring to open and the system to be set to fault mode.
Cycle Time Data is transmitted in one direction only on the network, with a typical cycle time of
4 ms. This may be reduced to 2 ms in configuration mode if it is permitted by the volume of data. (See the application-specific setup manual “Motion Control on a
SERCOS® network” - Reference 35001368)
Transmission
Speed
The default transmission speed is 4 Mbauds. If the drives do not support this speed, it may be reduced to 2 Mbauds in configuration mode. (See the applicationspecific setup manual “Motion Control on a SERCOS® network” - Reference
35001368)
27
SERCOS® Multi-Axis System on Premium PLCs
SERCOS® Network Ring, continued
Maximum Length of the Various
Segments of the
Network
The maximum length of each segment of the SERCOS® network is limited to 40 meters when using the plastic fiber optic cables recommended by Schneider
Automation.
Illustration of the
Various
Segments
The various segments of the SERCOS® network:
●
●
TSX CSY 84 module / drive: segment 1
Drive / drive: segment 2 to n
● Drive / module: segment n+1
The diagram below shows the various segments of a SERCOS® network to which
5 drives are connected.
TSX
CSY 84
Segment 1
Drive
Segment 2
Drive
SERCOS® network ring
Segment 6
Drive
Drive
Segment 5
Segment 3 Segment 4
Drive
28
SERCOS® Multi-Axis System on Premium PLCs
SERCOS® Network Ring, continued
Setting the
Optical Power of the Transceiver
According to the
Length of the
Segment
Each component on the SERCOS® network (TSX CSY 84 module and drives) has a fiber optic transceiver.
The operator should set the optical power of each fiber optic transceiver according to the length of the segment.
● Optical power of segment 1 (module / first drive): this is always provided by the fiber optic transceiver of the TSX CSY 84 module. The optical power is set in configuration mode using PL7 Junior / Pro software by defining a percentage of the optical power according to the length of the segment. (See the applicationspecific setup manual “Motion Control on a SERCOS® network” - Reference
35001368)
Length of the segment (in meters)
0 < L < 15
15 < L < 40
Optical power (as a percentage of the total power)
66%
100%
● Optical power of the other segments (drive / drive and last drive / module): This is always provided by the fiber optic transceiver of the drive. The optical power is set using UniLink software by defining only the length of the segment.
29
SERCOS® Multi-Axis System on Premium PLCs
30
Fiber Optic Cables
4
At a Glance
Introduction This chapter presents the fiber optic cables used to connect the various components of the SERCOS network (TSX CSY 84 module and drives).
What's in this
Chapter
This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic
Pre-Equipped Fiber Optic Cables
Kits for Creating Fiber Optic Cables on Request
Page
31
Fiber Optic Cables
Pre-Equipped Fiber Optic Cables
At a Glance Schneider Automation has a range of 1 mm diameter plastic fiber optic cables for connecting the various components on the SERCOS network (TSX CSY 84 module and speed drives). Each cable is equipped with an SMA connector at both ends.
List of Cables The following table gives the part number and length of each cable.
Part number
990 MCO 00001
990 MCO 00003
990 MCO 00005
990 MCO 00015
990 MCO 00055
Length
0.3 meters
0.9 meters
1.5 meters
4.5 meters
16.5 meters
32
Fiber Optic Cables
Pre-Equipped Fiber Optic Cables, continued
Recommendations
The following recommendations must be followed when installing fiber optic cables:
CAUTION:
Recommendation concerning the radius curvature of the cables
The minimum radius curvature for this type of cable, is 25 mm.
Failure to follow this recommendation may lead to the cables being damaged.
CAUTION:
Recommendation concerning the tension exerted on the cables during installation
The maximum tension on the cables during installation should not exceed 6 Kg.
Failure to follow this recommendation may lead to the cables being damaged.
Maximum permissible temperature: - 40°C...+80°C.
33
Fiber Optic Cables
Kits for Creating Fiber Optic Cables on Request
At a Glance Schneider Automation offers two kits for creating cable on request:
●
●
1 tool kit
1 equipment kit, consisting of one cable and connectors.
Tool Kit The table below gives the part number and contents of the tool kit
Part number
990 MCO KIT 00 1
1
Contents
Quantity
1
1
Description
Instructions for creating the cable
Cable stripping tool
Crimping pliers for connectors
25W soldering iron
Equipment Kit The table below gives the part number and contents of the equipment kit
Part number Contents
Quantity
990 MCO KIT 01 12
12
1
Description
SMA type connectors
Insulating sleeves
Plastic fiber optic cable (30 meters long)
34
Specifications, Standards and
Operating Conditions
5
Introduction This chapter presents the specifications of the TSX CSY 84 module and the
SERCOS network
What's in this
Chapter
This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic
SERCOS® Network Specifications
Standards and Operating Conditions
Page
35
Electrical Specifications
Module Specifications
Electrical
Specifications
The following table gives the electrical specifications of the module.
Description of the parameters
Current consumption of the module on the 5V of the rack power supply
Power dissipated in the module
Optical fiber outputs
Values
Typical
1.8 A
9 W
Maximum
2 A
10 W
Conforming to standard EN 61491
Operating and
Storage
Temperature/
Relative
Humidity/
Altitude
The following table gives the specifications of the module.
Description of the parameters
Operating temperature
Storage temperature
Relative humidity (without condensation)
Operating altitude
Values
0 to 60°C
-25°C to 70°C
5% to 95%
0 to 2000 m
36
Electrical Specifications
SERCOS® Network Specifications
Specifications
Table
The following table gives the main specifications of the SERCOS® network.
Description of the parameters
Addresses
Baud rate
Cycle time
Values
1...254
2 or 4 Mbauds, configurable via the software
4 ms
37
Electrical Specifications
Standards and Operating Conditions
Standards Standards identical to those applied to Premium PLCs.
(See the Premium PLC Installation Manual TSX DM 57 33E - Volume 1-Part D).
Standard EN 61491: Electrical equipment for industrial machines. Serial data link for realtime communication between control units and drive devices
Operating
Conditions and
Requirements
Relating to the
Environment
These are identical to those applied to Premium PLCs.
(See the Premium PLC Installation Manual TSX DM 57 33E - Volume 1-Part D).
38
Compatible Speed Drives
6
At a Glance
Introduction This chapter gives a list of speed drives which are compatible with the SERCOS offer on Premium PLCs.
What's in this
Chapter
This chapter contains the following topic:
Topic
List of Speed Drives
Page
39
Fiber Optic Cables
List of Speed Drives
List of Drives from the
Schneider
Automation Offer
Schneider Automation has a range of speed drives which are compatible with the
SERCOS offer on Premium PLCs. The following table gives the part number and description of each speed drive.
Part Number
MHDS 1004 N00
MHDS 1008 N00
MHDS 1017 N00
MHDS 1028 N00
MHDS 1056 N00
Description
LEXIUM speed drive, 1.5 A rms continuous current
LEXIUM speed drive, 3 A rms continuous current
LEXIUM speed drive, 6 A rms continuous current
LEXIUM speed drive, 10 A rms continuous current
LEXIUM speed drive, 20 A rms continuous current
Other Drives Any drive which complies with standard EN 61491 can be used with the TSX CSY
84 module.
40
Download
Link público atualizado
O link público para seu chat foi atualizado. Você pode visualizar e gerenciar seus links de chat após o registro aqui.
Link público do documento
Anúncio
